Scribd
Upload
71 views

Molded Forms Guide

This document is the user's guide for Molded Forms version 2016 (11.0) from November 2016. It includes information on copyright, licensing terms, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and export controls related to the software and documentation. The guide also lists trademarks and a table of contents.

Uploaded by

Ramiro Saldana
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
71 views

Molded Forms Guide

This document is the user's guide for Molded Forms version 2016 (11.0) from November 2016. It includes information on copyright, licensing terms, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and export controls related to the software and documentation. The guide also lists trademarks and a table of contents.

Uploaded by

Ramiro Saldana
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 1482

Molded Forms

User's Guide

Version 2016 (11.0)


November 2016
Copyright
Copyright © 1999-2016 Intergraph® Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Portions of this software are owned by Spatial Corp. © 1986-2016. All Rights Reserved.
Portions of the user interface are copyright © 2012-2016 Telerik AD.

U.S. Government Restricted Rights Legend


Use, duplication, or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth below. For civilian agencies: This was
developed at private expense and is "restricted computer software" submitted with restricted rights in accordance with subparagraphs
(a) through (d) of the Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19 of the Federal Acquisition Regulations
("FAR") and its successors, and is unpublished and all rights are reserved under the copyright laws of the United States. For units of
the Department of Defense ("DoD"): This is "commercial computer software" as defined at DFARS 252.227-7014 and the rights of the
Government are as specified at DFARS 227.7202-3.
Unpublished - rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.
Intergraph Corporation
305 Intergraph Way
Madison, AL 35758

Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.

Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph as
guidance for using a software product.

Terms of Use
a. Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the applicable
license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b. For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensee’s internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensee’s internal, non-commercial use. The Other Documentation
may not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for
any reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.

Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a
modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication
date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

Molded Forms User's Guide 2


The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data. Users
should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.

Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF REVENUE
OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN ADVISED
OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION’S LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT INTERGRAPH
CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS MADE. EXCEPT
WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION
WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2) YEARS AFTER
THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.

Export Controls
Intergraph Corporation’s software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access) under
the following circumstances:
a. To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b. To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d. To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporation’s Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.

Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, PDS, SmartPlant, FrameWorks, I-Sketch, SmartMarine, IntelliShip, ISOGEN, SmartSketch,
SPOOLGEN, SupportManager, SupportModeler, Sapphire, and Intergraph Smart are trademarks or registered trademarks of
Intergraph Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries. Hexagon and the Hexagon logo are registered
trademarks of Hexagon AB or its subsidiaries. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. ACIS is a
registered trademark of SPATIAL TECHNOLOGY, INC. Infragistics, Presentation Layer Framework, ActiveTreeView Ctrl,
ProtoViewCtl, ActiveThreed Ctrl, ActiveListBar Ctrl, ActiveSplitter, ActiveToolbars Ctrl, ActiveToolbars Plus Ctrl, and ProtoView are
trademarks of Infragistics, Inc. Incorporates portions of 2D DCM, 3D DCM, and HLM by Siemens Product Lifecycle Management
Software III (GB) Ltd. All rights reserved. Gigasoft is a registered trademark, and ProEssentials a trademark of Gigasoft, Inc.
VideoSoft and VXFlexGrid are either registered trademarks or trademarks of ComponentOne LLC 1991-2013, All rights reserved.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Tribon is a
trademark of AVEVA Group plc. Alma and act/cut are trademarks of the Alma company. Other brands and product names are
trademarks of their respective owners.

Molded Forms User's Guide 3


Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 18

What's New in Molded Forms ................................................................................................................... 18

Molded Forms ............................................................................................................................................ 22

Molded Forms Workflow ........................................................................................................................... 28


Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer........................................................................ 30
Icons in the Workspace Explorer .......................................................................................................... 32
Selecting Objects .................................................................................................................................. 40
Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects ....................................................................................... 44
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ...................................................................................... 45
Best Practices ....................................................................................................................................... 50
Bracket Best Practices ................................................................................................................... 50
Knuckle Best Practices ................................................................................................................... 56
Landing Curve Best Practices ........................................................................................................ 56
Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings....................................................................................... 57
Seams Best Practices .................................................................................................................... 60
Session File Best Practices ............................................................................................................ 64
Sketch 2D Best Practices ............................................................................................................... 65
Split Best Practices ......................................................................................................................... 74
Plane Methods ...................................................................................................................................... 76
Define a coincident plane ............................................................................................................... 76
Define an offset plane..................................................................................................................... 77
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector .......................................................................... 78
Define a plane using three points ................................................................................................... 79
Move a defined plane ..................................................................................................................... 80
Boundary Methods ................................................................................................................................ 80
Pick boundaries .............................................................................................................................. 81
Use the Boundary List dialog box ................................................................................................... 81
Define a boundary curve ................................................................................................................ 82
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries ........................................................... 82
Boundary List Dialog Box ............................................................................................................... 83
Landing Curve Methods ........................................................................................................................ 87
Define landing curve by 2D ............................................................................................................ 87
Define landing curve by 3D ............................................................................................................ 88
Profile Orientation ................................................................................................................................. 88
Center of Buoyancy .............................................................................................................................. 91
Minimum Distance................................................................................................................................. 92

Placing Plate Systems .............................................................................................................................. 96


Plate System Boundaries ...................................................................................................................... 98
Planar Plate System ............................................................................................................................. 99
Place a planar plate system ......................................................................................................... 104
Modify a plate system ................................................................................................................... 104

Molded Forms User's Guide 4


Contents

Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy .............................................. 105
Delete a plate system ................................................................................................................... 106
Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 106
Plate Part Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 125
Imported Plate System ........................................................................................................................ 130
Import a plate system ................................................................................................................... 136
Swap hulls .................................................................................................................................... 137
Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 137
Linear Extruded Plate System ............................................................................................................ 156
Place a linear extruded plate system ........................................................................................... 161
Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................. 162
Nonlinear Extruded Plate System ....................................................................................................... 180
Place a nonlinear extruded plate system ..................................................................................... 185
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................ 187
Revolved Plate System ....................................................................................................................... 205
Place a revolved plate system ...................................................................................................... 209
Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................ 210
Bracket Plate System .......................................................................................................................... 227
Create a one support bracket by plane ........................................................................................ 237
Create a two support bracket by plane......................................................................................... 238
Create a three support bracket by plane ...................................................................................... 239
Create a four or five support bracket by plane ............................................................................. 239
Create a two support bracket by supports.................................................................................... 241
Create a three, four, or five support bracket by supports ............................................................. 241
Manually select a bracket symbol ................................................................................................ 242
Sketch a bracket ........................................................................................................................... 243
Add reinforcement to a bracket .................................................................................................... 244
Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement using the icon browser ........................................... 244
Modify a bracket ........................................................................................................................... 245
Delete a bracket ........................................................................................................................... 245
Bracket by Plane .......................................................................................................................... 246
Bracket by Supports ..................................................................................................................... 247
Bracket System Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 250
Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 271
Define Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................... 272
Advanced Plate System ...................................................................................................................... 275
Modify an advanced plate system ................................................................................................ 281
Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions ....................................................... 282
Modify a plate system created with geometric constructions ....................................................... 282
Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 283
Select Macro Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 408
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................... 408
Child Plate System .............................................................................................................................. 426
Create a child plate system .......................................................................................................... 431
Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 432
Ruled Plate System ............................................................................................................................ 449
Create a ruled plate system using existing curves ....................................................................... 454
Create a ruled plate system by drawing curves ........................................................................... 455
Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 456

Molded Forms User's Guide 5


Contents

Openings .................................................................................................................................................. 475


Place an opening by sketching ........................................................................................................... 479
Place an advanced opening ................................................................................................................ 480
Modify an Opening .............................................................................................................................. 480
Copy and paste a sketched opening .................................................................................................. 481
Delete an opening ............................................................................................................................... 481
Opening Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................................... 482
Main Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box).................................................................................. 482
Legacy Catalog Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 482
Opening Palette Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 482
Custom Shape Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ....................................................................... 484
Support and Offset Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................ 505
0S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 515
3S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 529
4S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ................................................................................ 555
0S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 576
3S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 589
4S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................................. 615
0S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 637
3S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 653
4S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) ......................................................................... 680
Geometric Construction Explorer ................................................................................................. 703

Place Opening .......................................................................................................................................... 705


Place an opening by boundaries......................................................................................................... 709
Place an opening by shape ................................................................................................................. 710
Place an opening by drawing .............................................................................................................. 711
Place an opening on a sloped wall ..................................................................................................... 713
Place an opening on a leaning wall .................................................................................................... 715
Change a recess opening to a through opening ................................................................................. 717
Change a through opening to a recess opening ................................................................................. 717
Delete an opening ............................................................................................................................... 717
Opening Properties Dialog Box........................................................................................................... 719
General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................ 719

Placing Profile Systems .......................................................................................................................... 721


Stiffener Profile System by Intersection .............................................................................................. 723
Place stiffener profile by intersection ............................................................................................ 728
Modify a stiffener profile ............................................................................................................... 729
Delete a stiffener profile................................................................................................................ 729
Profile Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 729
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 736
Stiffener Profile System by Offset ....................................................................................................... 739
Place stiffener profile by offset ..................................................................................................... 745
Stiffener Profile System by Projection ................................................................................................ 746
Place stiffener profile by projection .............................................................................................. 753
Stiffener Profile System by Table........................................................................................................ 755
Place stiffener profile by table ...................................................................................................... 760
Landing Curve Table Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 760

Molded Forms User's Guide 6


Contents

Tripping Stiffener System .................................................................................................................... 765


Place tripping stiffener .................................................................................................................. 769
Modify a tripping stiffener profile .................................................................................................. 769
Delete a tripping stiffener profile ................................................................................................... 770
Tripping Stiffener Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 770
Profile Edge Reinforcement ................................................................................................................ 771
Place edge reinforcement profile .................................................................................................. 774
Modify an edge reinforcement profile ........................................................................................... 775
Delete edge reinforcement profile ................................................................................................ 775
Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 775
Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box .............................................................. 779
Modify Profile System Landing Curve Display Colors ........................................................................ 783
Extend ................................................................................................................................................. 785
Extend a profile or seam in one direction ..................................................................................... 785
Extend a profile or seam in both directions .................................................................................. 785
Display a profile or seam dynamically while extending ................................................................ 786

Place Linear Member Systems ............................................................................................................... 787


Place members using discrete placement .......................................................................................... 806
Place members using contiguous placement ..................................................................................... 807
Place a member using finish mode ..................................................................................................... 808
Edit member system properties .......................................................................................................... 809
Edit member part properties ............................................................................................................... 809
Edit a frame connection ...................................................................................................................... 809
Delete a member system .................................................................................................................... 809
Convert a member part ....................................................................................................................... 810
Modify the cardinal point of a member ................................................................................................ 810
Modify the end releases of a member ................................................................................................ 810
Modify the angle of a member ............................................................................................................ 811
Modify the cross-section of a member ................................................................................................ 811
Modify the material of a member ........................................................................................................ 811
Modify the material grade of a member .............................................................................................. 811
Modify the type of member ................................................................................................................. 812
Move a member .................................................................................................................................. 812
Move one end of a member ................................................................................................................ 812
Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................. 813
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) .................................. 813
Relationship Tab........................................................................................................................... 815
Configuration Tab ......................................................................................................................... 815
Notes Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 817
Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 818
Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) ............................................. 818
Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) ............................................ 824
Designed Member Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................... 828
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) ....................................................... 829
Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) ................................................... 832
Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................. 836
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ......................................................... 836
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) .................................................... 839
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box -
Designed Member) ....................................................................................................................... 840

Molded Forms User's Guide 7


Contents

General Tab .................................................................................................................................. 845


Plate Part Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 845
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................................... 845
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 846
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 847
Weight & CG Tab ......................................................................................................................... 849
Extended User Attributes Tab ...................................................................................................... 849
Routing Tab .................................................................................................................................. 849
Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 850
General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box) ............................................................ 850

Place Can.................................................................................................................................................. 860


Place an in-line can ............................................................................................................................. 865
Place an in-line can on cross bracing ................................................................................................. 866
Place an end can ................................................................................................................................ 868
Place a stub-end can .......................................................................................................................... 869
Add a transverse member to a can ..................................................................................................... 870
Remove a transverse member from a can ......................................................................................... 871
Can Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................................. 872
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) .............................................................................. 872
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................................. 877
Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) .......................................................................... 884

Creating Seams ....................................................................................................................................... 888


Execute Split ....................................................................................................................................... 891
Split a plate system ...................................................................................................................... 893
Split a profile or member system .................................................................................................. 893
Split List Dialog Box ...................................................................................................................... 894
Manual Split ........................................................................................................................................ 895
Create multiple intersections seams ............................................................................................ 895
Un-Split ............................................................................................................................................... 895
Un-split a plate at a selected seam .............................................................................................. 896
Split Seam ........................................................................................................................................... 897
Split a seam by intersecting seams .............................................................................................. 897
Split List Dialog Box (Split Seam) ................................................................................................. 898
Split Root System................................................................................................................................ 899
Split a root system into multiple root systems .............................................................................. 901
Split Root System Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 901
Seam by Intersection .......................................................................................................................... 902
Place a seam by intersection ....................................................................................................... 903
Modify a seam .............................................................................................................................. 904
Delete a seam .............................................................................................................................. 904
Seam Properties Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 904
Seam by Offset ................................................................................................................................... 905
Place a seam by offset ................................................................................................................. 907
Seam by Projection ............................................................................................................................. 908
Place a seam by Projection .......................................................................................................... 912
Seam by Table .................................................................................................................................... 912
Place a seam by table .................................................................................................................. 914
Profile Seam........................................................................................................................................ 914

Molded Forms User's Guide 8


Contents

Place a profile seam by offsetting from a reference ..................................................................... 916


Place a profile seam at a distance along the profile ..................................................................... 916
Profile Seam Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 917
Modify Seam Display Colors ............................................................................................................... 918

Place Splits .............................................................................................................................................. 921


Split a member that intersects another member ................................................................................. 925
Split a cross brace .............................................................................................................................. 926
Split columns at a plane ...................................................................................................................... 927
Split a member at a point along member ............................................................................................ 928
Set member split priority ..................................................................................................................... 928
Remove a split .................................................................................................................................... 929
Split Connection Properties Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 929
General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................................ 929

Creating Knuckles ................................................................................................................................... 931


Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 931
General Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box) .................................................................... 931
General KNU Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 933
Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................................ 933
Profile Knuckle Tab (Profile Knuckle Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 933
Profile Knuckle .................................................................................................................................... 935
Place a manual profile knuckle by GC point................................................................................. 937
Place a manual profile knuckle by reference curve ...................................................................... 937
Edit a manual profile knuckle ....................................................................................................... 938
Delete a profile knuckle ................................................................................................................ 938
Manual Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................. 938
Modify Plate Knuckle Curve Display Colors ....................................................................................... 939

Placing Logical Connections ................................................................................................................. 942


Logical Connection ............................................................................................................................. 943
Connect systems using a logical connection ............................................................................... 945
Remove logical connections ......................................................................................................... 945
Logical Connection Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................... 945
Edit Intersection .................................................................................................................................. 948
Modify a logical connection .......................................................................................................... 950
Invert multiple logical connections ................................................................................................ 950
Invert the logical connection between a plate and a profile ......................................................... 951

Place Assembly Connection .................................................................................................................. 952


Place an assembly connection ........................................................................................................... 959
Edit assembly connection properties .................................................................................................. 960
Delete an assembly connection .......................................................................................................... 960
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection ................................................................................... 960
Edit assembly connection parts .......................................................................................................... 961
Place free end cuts ............................................................................................................................. 961
Edit free end cut properties ................................................................................................................. 961
Delete free end cut .............................................................................................................................. 961
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box ..................................................................................... 962

Molded Forms User's Guide 9


Contents

Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ................................................. 962


Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 966
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) ..................................................... 966

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection ..................................................................................... 968


Place a member generic assembly connection .................................................................................. 970
Edit assembly connection ports .......................................................................................................... 971

Creating Reference Curves .................................................................................................................... 972


Reference Curve by Intersection ........................................................................................................ 973
Place a reference curve by intersection ....................................................................................... 974
Modify a reference curve .............................................................................................................. 975
Delete a reference curve .............................................................................................................. 975
Reference Curve By Intersection Properties Dialog Box ............................................................. 975
Reference Curve by Offset ................................................................................................................. 976
Place a reference curve by offset ................................................................................................. 978
Reference Curve By Offset Properties Dialog Box ...................................................................... 979
Reference Curve by 2D Sketch .......................................................................................................... 980
Place a reference curve by 2D sketch.......................................................................................... 982
Reference Curve By 2D Sketch Properties Dialog Box ............................................................... 983
Reference Curve from External File.................................................................................................... 984
Place a reference curve by importing from file ............................................................................. 985
Reference Curve from External File Properties Dialog Box ......................................................... 985
Modify Reference Curve Display Colors ............................................................................................. 986

Execute Detailing Command .................................................................................................................. 989


Assign part names at placement......................................................................................................... 992
Create detailed parts from plate and profile systems ......................................................................... 992
Delete a smart occurrence object ....................................................................................................... 992
Modify a smart occurrence object ....................................................................................................... 992
Remove detailed parts from plate and profile systems ....................................................................... 993
Detailing Built Up Connections ........................................................................................................... 993
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ................................................................. 994
Tube End to Tube End - Co-Linear Axis ...................................................................................... 998
Tube to Tube - Axis Along .......................................................................................................... 1000
Designed Member to Designed Member.................................................................................... 1002
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ............................................................... 1003
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ............................................................... 1004
Designed Member to Designed Member - I Seated ................................................................... 1005
Vertical Brace or Gap ................................................................................................................. 1006
Rolled I to Built Up I .................................................................................................................... 1006
Designed Member to Rolled I ..................................................................................................... 1007
Designed Member to Plate ......................................................................................................... 1008
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90° Center ........................................................................................ 1009
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Center ............................................................... 1010
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite Connect Points ........................................................... 1011
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Opposite Connect Points .................................. 1012
Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular ......................................................................................... 1013
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Overlapping Connect Points ...................................................... 1014

Molded Forms User's Guide 10


Contents

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Partial Penetration ............................................ 1015


Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Penetration ................................................................................ 1016
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Penetration ........................................................ 1017
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Rotation of Member ................................................................... 1018
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Split Both ................................................................................... 1019
Can - Horizontal Beam ............................................................................................................... 1020
Can - Vertical Column ................................................................................................................ 1020
Can - Continuous Leg................................................................................................................. 1021
Can - Multiple Braces ................................................................................................................. 1021
Can - Diameter Change.............................................................................................................. 1022
Can - Single Axis Gap ................................................................................................................ 1023
Can - Multiple Braces ................................................................................................................. 1024
Can - Cone Transition ................................................................................................................ 1025
Can - Beam and Column End Point ........................................................................................... 1025
Can - Beam and Column Intersection ........................................................................................ 1026

Geometric Constructions ..................................................................................................................... 1027


Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 1028
Point Along Curve on Surface .................................................................................................... 1029
Point from Coordinate System ................................................................................................... 1039
Points Along Curve ..................................................................................................................... 1047
Vertices from Curve or Surface .................................................................................................. 1057
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)....................................................................... 1061
Curve as Extended Section ........................................................................................................ 1063
Curve at Offset by Intersection ................................................................................................... 1066
Curve by Curves ......................................................................................................................... 1070
Curve by Intersection .................................................................................................................. 1073
Curve by Points on Surface ........................................................................................................ 1076
Curve by Two Points on Surface ................................................................................................ 1081
Edge from Curve or Surface ....................................................................................................... 1085
Edges from Curve or Surface ..................................................................................................... 1088
Fillet by Curve ............................................................................................................................. 1090
Line by Point, Angle, and Length ............................................................................................... 1094
Line by Points ............................................................................................................................. 1098
Line from Coordinate System ..................................................................................................... 1100
Line String by Points................................................................................................................... 1104
Parallel Line ................................................................................................................................ 1107
Polyline by One to Four Segments ............................................................................................. 1110
Surfaces (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) .................................................................... 1115
Plane from Coordinate System .................................................................................................. 1117
Plane by Points ........................................................................................................................... 1120
Plane by Positions ...................................................................................................................... 1123
Plane by Two Points and Normal ............................................................................................... 1126
Surface by Curves ...................................................................................................................... 1130
Surface by Corrugation............................................................................................................... 1133
Surface by Surfaces ................................................................................................................... 1142
Surface by Swage ...................................................................................................................... 1145
Surface by Sweeping.................................................................................................................. 1153
Surface by Blending ................................................................................................................... 1158
Surface by Fillet .......................................................................................................................... 1161
Surface with Knuckles ................................................................................................................ 1165

Molded Forms User's Guide 11


Contents

Coordinate Systems (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ................................................. 1168


Coordinate System by Lines ...................................................................................................... 1169
Coordinate System by Points ..................................................................................................... 1172
Solids (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ........................................................................ 1176
Solid by Sweeping ...................................................................................................................... 1176
Standard Chutes (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) ....................................................... 1180
Head Section Type A.................................................................................................................. 1181
Head Section Type B.................................................................................................................. 1190
Head Section Type C ................................................................................................................. 1194
Transition Section Type A .......................................................................................................... 1197
Transition Section Type B .......................................................................................................... 1200
Transition Section Type C .......................................................................................................... 1204
Bifurcated Section Type A .......................................................................................................... 1207
Spoon Section Type A ................................................................................................................ 1210
Geometric Construction Explorer ...................................................................................................... 1214

Importing ACIS and IGES Data ............................................................................................................ 1216


Import ACIS (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1216
Import ACIS or IGES data .......................................................................................................... 1216
Import IGES (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1216

Importing Stiffeners and Seams .......................................................................................................... 1217


Import Stiffeners (File Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1217
Import stiffener or seam data ..................................................................................................... 1217
Import Stiffener Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 1218
Stiffener Import Workbook .......................................................................................................... 1218
Import Seams (File Menu) ................................................................................................................ 1225
Import Seam Dialog Box............................................................................................................. 1225
Seam Import Workbook .............................................................................................................. 1226

Import Ship Structure ............................................................................................................................ 1231


Import ship structure data ................................................................................................................. 1231
Import Ship Structure Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1231
Import Translation Map Workbook .................................................................................................... 1232
Cross Section Worksheet ........................................................................................................... 1232
Material Worksheet..................................................................................................................... 1232

Import Bocad ......................................................................................................................................... 1233


bocad Import Dialog Box ................................................................................................................... 1234

Exporting ACIS and IGES Data ............................................................................................................ 1236


Export ACIS (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1236
Export IGES (File Menu) ................................................................................................................... 1236

Exporting Stiffeners and Seams .......................................................................................................... 1237


Export Stiffeners (File Menu) ............................................................................................................ 1237
Export stiffener data ................................................................................................................... 1238
Export Stiffeners Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1238

Molded Forms User's Guide 12


Contents

Export Seams (File Menu) ................................................................................................................ 1239


Export seam data ....................................................................................................................... 1239
Export Seams Dialog Box .......................................................................................................... 1240

Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu) ................................................................................................ 1241


Export data to Neutral XML ............................................................................................................... 1242
Export data to GeniE XML ................................................................................................................ 1243
Configure the GeniE export initialization file ..................................................................................... 1243
GeniE Export Initialization File Global Options ................................................................................. 1243
Limitations of GeniE Export .............................................................................................................. 1244
Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 1244
General ....................................................................................................................................... 1244
Output Format ............................................................................................................................ 1244
External Geometry Export Options ............................................................................................. 1244
Paths........................................................................................................................................... 1245
Export Attribute Mapping Workbooks ............................................................................................... 1246
ExportAttributeMapping.xls ........................................................................................................ 1246
S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls ..................................................................................................... 1250

Copy by Family ...................................................................................................................................... 1255


Create a copy similar family using a single grid plane ...................................................................... 1260
Create a copy similar family using multiple grid planes .................................................................... 1261
Modify a copy similar family .............................................................................................................. 1262
Delete a copy similar family .............................................................................................................. 1262
Create a copy symmetry family......................................................................................................... 1262
Modify a copy symmetry family ......................................................................................................... 1263
Delete a copy symmetry family ......................................................................................................... 1263
Create a copy across models family using a single grid plane ......................................................... 1263
Create a copy across models family using multiple grid planes ....................................................... 1264
Create a copy across models family by range .................................................................................. 1264
Modify a copy across model family ................................................................................................... 1265
Delete a copy across model family ................................................................................................... 1265
Copy objects in a similar family......................................................................................................... 1265
Update objects in a similar family ..................................................................................................... 1266
Delete objects in a similar family....................................................................................................... 1267
Copy objects in a symmetry family ................................................................................................... 1269
Update objects in a symmetry family ................................................................................................ 1269
Delete objects in a symmetry family ................................................................................................. 1270
Manually copy objects ....................................................................................................................... 1271
Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts .................................................................................................. 1271
Copy objects in an across model family ........................................................................................... 1272
Find and correlate objects across models ........................................................................................ 1273
Select the source filter for copy across models ................................................................................ 1273
Schedule a Copy by Family operation as a batch job....................................................................... 1274
Configure the Smart 3D batch queues ............................................................................................. 1274
Configure account mapping for batch services ................................................................................. 1275
Synchronize Options Dialog Box ...................................................................................................... 1275
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1276
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box .......................................................................................... 1279
Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box ...................................................................................... 1281

Molded Forms User's Guide 13


Contents

Select Filter Dialog Box ..................................................................................................................... 1282


Select Copy Family Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 1283
Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box ................................................................................................. 1284
Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 1285
Schedule [Task] Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 1287
Properties Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 1288
Copy By Family Log Files ................................................................................................................. 1288
Copy By Family Log File Workflows ........................................................................................... 1289
Frame mapping and Range Growth Values in Copy by Family ........................................................ 1292
Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family ...................................................................... 1294
Objects not supported by Copy by Family ........................................................................................ 1302
Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify ....................................................................... 1303
Solutions to common problems in Copy by Family ........................................................................... 1310

Copy By Family Synchronize ............................................................................................................... 1315

Copy By Family Audit Report ............................................................................................................... 1316


Generate an object summary report in manual mode ...................................................................... 1320
Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects mode .......................................... 1320
Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode .................... 1320
Generate a property summary report in manual mode ..................................................................... 1321
Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects mode ........................................ 1321
Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode .................. 1321

Topological Points (Insert Menu) ......................................................................................................... 1323


Point Along Curve on Surface........................................................................................................... 1324
Place a topological point on a surface and along a curve .......................................................... 1333
Modify a topological point ........................................................................................................... 1334
Change a topological point to a different point definition ........................................................... 1335
Delete a topological point ........................................................................................................... 1335
Point at Curve Middle ........................................................................................................................ 1335
Place a point at the middle of a curve ........................................................................................ 1340
Point at Minimum Distance ............................................................................................................... 1341
Place a topological point along a girth distance and offset normal to the curve ........................ 1346
Place a topological point offset from the intersection of two offset curves ................................. 1347
Point at Offset from Key Point ........................................................................................................... 1348
Place a topological point referenced from a profile or member cross-section key
point ............................................................................................................................................ 1352
Key Points .................................................................................................................................. 1353
Point from Coordinate System .......................................................................................................... 1358
Place a topological point by distances from a coordinate system origin .................................... 1364
Place a topological point by distances from a reference point ................................................... 1364

Delay Settings (Tools Menu) ................................................................................................................ 1366


Turn on delay operations .................................................................................................................. 1366
Update delayed objects .................................................................................................................... 1366
Turn off delay operations .................................................................................................................. 1366
Delay Operations Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 1367
Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) ................................................................... 1367

Molded Forms User's Guide 14


Contents

Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) ...................................................... 1367


To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box)................................................ 1368

Repairing Tribon Data ........................................................................................................................... 1369


Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1369
Repair Tribon data ...................................................................................................................... 1369
Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box ......................................................................................................... 1369

Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1371


Check data integrity of plates............................................................................................................ 1371
Results Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 1372

Manufacturing Service Manager .......................................................................................................... 1375


Review a manufacturing object ......................................................................................................... 1377
Update a manufacturing object ......................................................................................................... 1377
Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter ...................................................................... 1377
Review Dialog Box ............................................................................................................................ 1378
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box .................................................................................. 1379

Submit Batch Job .................................................................................................................................. 1380


Run a detailing batch process........................................................................................................... 1380
Run a production batch process ....................................................................................................... 1381
Run a custom batch process ............................................................................................................ 1381
Add a custom batch process............................................................................................................. 1382
Generic Batch Command Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1383
Batch Process Selection Dialog Box................................................................................................. 1384

Miscellaneous Commands ................................................................................................................... 1385


Change Geometry Type (Edit Menu) ................................................................................................ 1385
Modify geometry type ................................................................................................................. 1385
Measure Explicit (Tools Menu) ......................................................................................................... 1386
Measure using a temporary coordinate system ......................................................................... 1387
Measure a girth distance along a landing curve ......................................................................... 1387
Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu).................................................................................................. 1388
Use filters to view copied objects requiring reconnection .......................................................... 1388
Reconnect copied objects to a new boundary ........................................................................... 1390
Reconnect temporary definition and sketching planes to model reference planes .................... 1390
Rebound objects ......................................................................................................................... 1391
Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1391
Automatic Preview (Tools Menu) ...................................................................................................... 1395

Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay ........................................................... 1396
Prepare the model ............................................................................................................................ 1397
Copy the model ................................................................................................................................. 1397
Start error logging ............................................................................................................................. 1398
Select delay and range settings and swap the hulls ......................................................................... 1398
Check the To-Do List ........................................................................................................................ 1400
Check the seam pattern on the new hull .......................................................................................... 1400

Molded Forms User's Guide 15


Contents

Repair seams that did not split .......................................................................................................... 1401


Remove delay and update To-Do List records for the hull ............................................................... 1402
Check hull records on the To-Do List................................................................................................ 1402
Remove delay and update To-Do List records for internal structure ................................................ 1403
Check internal structure records on the To-Do List .......................................................................... 1403
Check internal structure in the model ............................................................................................... 1403
Update remaining To-Do List records ............................................................................................... 1403
Evaluate results................................................................................................................................. 1404
Recover from a failed hull swap ........................................................................................................ 1405
Stop error logging.............................................................................................................................. 1405
Optimal Update Processing for Hull Swaps ...................................................................................... 1406

Data Integrity Check Messages ........................................................................................................... 1407


All seams or knuckles are ignored in split. ........................................................................................ 1408
Bad connection (either missing port or invalid port in connection) ................................................... 1408
Bad edge attributes because of knuckle <name of knuckle>. Check connection. ........................... 1408
Bad edge attributes because of seam <name of seam>. Check connection. .................................. 1409
Connection has no geometry. ........................................................................................................... 1409
Could not find the boundary/operator creating the edge. Check the connection. ............................ 1410
Could not get back the edge information. Check connection ........................................................... 1410
Could not retrieve boundary. Check connection. .............................................................................. 1410
Could not retrieve edge information. Check connection. .................................................................. 1411
Could not retrieve the children of the plate system........................................................................... 1411
Could not retrieve the root plate........................................................................................................ 1411
Duplicate Physical Connection. ........................................................................................................ 1412
Edge port doesn't have geometry. Check connection. ..................................................................... 1412
Entire length of seam ignored in split. ............................................................................................... 1413
Error - Has opposite surface normal as the root plate <name of root plate> ................................... 1413
Failure encountered while checking seam geometry and split result. .............................................. 1413
Failure encountered while retrieving thickness. ................................................................................ 1414
Gap detected in the seam bounding. ................................................................................................ 1414
In to-do list: <to-do list item> ............................................................................................................. 1415
Inconsistent attributes between system and part geometry. Check connection. .............................. 1415
Inconsistent port attributes between root plate and leaf plate. Check connection. .......................... 1415
Knuckle <name of knuckle> has no geometry. ................................................................................. 1416
<length in meters> of seam length ignored in split. .......................................................................... 1416
Missing boundary connection to <object name> .............................................................................. 1417
Missing child connections. ................................................................................................................ 1417
Missing connection with <object name> ........................................................................................... 1417
Missing root intersection connection with <object name> ................................................................ 1418
No splitting surface - will be ignored in split. Check the seam creation. ........................................... 1418
Not used in splitting. .......................................................................................................................... 1419
Seam <name of seam> has no geometry. ........................................................................................ 1419
Seam overlaps knuckle <name of knuckle> ..................................................................................... 1419
Seam overlaps seam <name of seam>. ........................................................................................... 1420
Part light part geometry might be corrupted. .................................................................................... 1420
Plate has no plate part children. ....................................................................................................... 1421
The seam has multiple segments; there may be a problem in the split............................................ 1421
The wrong item is used in the bounding logical connection. ............................................................ 1421
There is a gap in the boundary <name of boundary>. Detailing might fail. ...................................... 1422
Too many child connections. ............................................................................................................ 1423

Molded Forms User's Guide 16


Contents

Unable to check for seams in To Do List. ......................................................................................... 1423


Unknown error................................................................................................................................... 1424
Warning!!--Possible wrong thickness direction among leaf parts. .................................................... 1424

Tripping Bracket .................................................................................................................................... 1425


Add a flange to a catalog bracket system ......................................................................................... 1428
Modify a bracket system ................................................................................................................... 1429
Delete a bracket system ................................................................................................................... 1429
Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box .................................................................................... 1429
Main Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ........................................................... 1429
Material Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box)...................................................... 1432
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) ................................. 1432
Bracket Parameters Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) .................................. 1445
Bracket Flange Properties Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box)......................... 1446
Tripping Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties
Dialog Box) ................................................................................................................................. 1447
Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box ................................................................................. 1448
Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) .......................................... 1448
Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) ...................................... 1448

Shell Plate Unfold Preview ................................................................................................................... 1449

Glossary ................................................................................................................................................. 1450

Index ....................................................................................................................................................... 1468

Molded Forms User's Guide 17


Preface
TM
This document is a user's guide for the Molded Forms functionality of Intergraph Smart 3D and
provides command reference information and procedural instructions.

Documentation Comments
For the latest support information for this product, comments or suggestions about this
documentation, and documentation updates for supported software versions, please visit
Intergraph Smart Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).

What's New in Molded Forms


The following changes have been made to the Molded Forms task.
Version 2016 (11.0)
 Formerly known as SmartPlant 3D (SP3D) and SmartMarine 3D (SM3D), the products are
now integrated and rebranded as Smart 3D (S3D). Replaced all instances of SP3D and
SM3D with S3D in the Export Neutral/GeniE XML section of this guide. (P1 CP:273062)
 The Bracket Plate System command improves the workflow for bracket creation. Length 1
and Length 2 boxes do not display by default when Support 1 and Support 2 are planar. For
curved supports, Length 1 and Length 2 boxes control the bracket plane position, but not
bracket creation. Bracket browser and rule creation icons are improved. For more information,
see Bracket Plate System Ribbon in Bracket Plate System (on page 227). (P1 CP:271139,
P1 CP:244914, P3 CP:251341)
 When you copy a plate system using Delete Optional in the Paste command, the software
replaces the plate with a standalone boundary to prevent the plate from going to the To Do
List. For more information, see Placing Plate Systems (on page 96). (P1 CP:210300)
 Delete Optional in the Paste command supports plates, openings, profile systems, tripping
stiffeners, seams, profile seams, and reference curves. (P1 CP:210300, CP:210328,
CP:210340, CP:210345, CP:210378, CP:210388, CP:210397, CP:261307, CP:262625)
 Model Data Transform supports plates, profile systems, tripping stiffeners, profile seams,
topological openings, and sketched openings. (P1 CP:231434, CP:231435, CP:231439,
CP:231448, CP:258168)
 You can create multiple plate systems with appropriate macros in the Advanced Plate
System command. (P1 CP:245070, P2 CP:259821)
 Export to Neutral Schema now supports mapping of custom attributes on the Smart 3D
objects, and exporting these attributes to the neutral schema. New class map sheets are
added to map these attributes. For more information, see Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File
Menu) (on page 1241) and ExportAttributeMapping.xls (on page 1246). (P2 CP:218559)
 A new option, Non Planar, has been added to Plate Systems under External Geometry
Export Options in the Export NSchema/GeniE dialog box. For more information, see
Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box (on page 1244). (P2 CP:274229)

Molded Forms User's Guide 18


Preface

 Information related to exporting of Non Planar plate systems has been added. For more
information, see Export data to Neutral XML (on page 1242). (P2 CP:274229)
 Welded, Snip, Cutback, and Bracketed are now available as options for defining the profile
connection types. For more information, see PDBT MF Section Orientation Tab (see "Section
Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box)" on page 732). (P2 CP:264507, CP:280640)
 Updated Objects not supported by Copy by Family (on page 1302), Objects and behaviors
supported in Attribute Modify (on page 1303), and Solutions to common problems in Copy by
Family (on page 1310). (P2 CP:237601, CP:211489, CP:211490, CP:213977, CP:238915,
CP:238917, CP:253294)
 The naming rule is improved for a plate system that is not on a reference plane. For more
information, see Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 107). (P2
CP:256932)
 A new property, CoG Coordinate System, is available for defining center of gravity
properties. For more information, see Weight & CG Tab (on page 129). (P2 CR:236999)
 Plane controls are simplified. The controls are used in multiple commands for defining planes.
For more information, see Plane Methods (on page 76). (P2: 244830)
 The Boundary List dialog box supports offset values, enhanced display of boundaries in the
graphic view, display of standalone planes, and improved boundary list controls. For more
information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83). (P2 CP:230926, CP:262705,
CP:297356)
 The Extend Sketch Boundary in Graphic View option on the Boundary List dialog box
allows you to extend a sketched boundary without entering Sketch 2D. For more information,
see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83) and Planar Plate System (on page 99). (P2
CP:274205)
 Added descriptions of molded conventions for the individual plates of a designed (built-up)
member. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box - Designed Member) (on page 840). (P2 CP:264474)
 Expanded the descriptions of molded conventions for plate systems. As an example, see
Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 110). (P2
CP:264474)
 The workflow for offsetting a seam using the Profile Seam command is improved. For more
information, see Profile Seam (on page 914). (P2 CP:264024)
 To improve usability, commonly used properties are available on the plate system command
ribbons. For more information, see Planar Plate System (on page 99), Imported Plate System
(on page 130), Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156), Nonlinear Extruded Plate
System (on page 180), Revolved Plate System (on page 205), Bracket Plate System (on
page 227), Advanced Plate System (on page 275), Child Plate System (on page 426), and
Ruled Plate System (on page 449). (P2 CP:276091, CP:292407)
 To improve usability, commonly used properties are available on the profile system command
ribbons. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Intersection (on page 723),
Stiffener Profile System by Offset (on page 739), Stiffener Profile System by Projection (on
page 746), Stiffener Profile System by Table (on page 755), and Tripping Stiffener System
(on page 765) (P2 CP:276090,CP:292407)
 The Subtype plate system property specifies an additional plate type that is independent of
the Type value. The subtype does not affect molded conventions or profile naming. For more
information, see Planar Plate System (on page 99), Imported Plate System (on page 130),

Molded Forms User's Guide 19


Preface

Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156), Nonlinear Extruded Plate System (on page
180), Revolved Plate System (on page 205), Bracket Plate System (on page 227), Advanced
Plate System (on page 275), Child Plate System (on page 426), and Ruled Plate System (on
page 449). (P2 CP:227200)
 Added the Copy MfgData option to the Across Model Family Definition dialog box. For
more information, see Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box (on page 1281). (P2
CP:245086)
 Added the Submit Batch Job command to run batch processes using the Intergraph Batch
Services framework. For more information, see Submit Batch Job (on page 1380). (P2
CP:273093, P2 CP:178040)
 Added a new locate filter, Construction Graphics. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 40). (P2 CP:271166)
 Updated Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 1294), Objects not
supported by Copy by Family (on page 1302), and Objects and behaviors supported in
Attribute Modify (on page 1303) for Version 2016. (P3 CP:288254)
 The Description option has been removed for bracket plate systems. For more information,
see Main Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 250). (P2 CP:272877)
 The Automatic Rebound command is now named Automatic Reconnect and reconnects
boundaries and definition planes on copied objects. You can also filter the workspace to
highlight objects with definition planes and boundaries defined by standalone planes. For
more information, see Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu) (on page 1388),Use filters to view
copied objects requiring reconnection (on page 1388), and Plane Tab (Automatic Reconnect
Dialog Box) (on page 1394). (P2 CP:271267, CP:259014, CP: 273850)
 A profile can be split by a penetrating standard member (P2 CP:177250)
 Openings migrated from the previous version of the software maintain their sketches and
constraints (P2 CP:178057)
 You can select a standard member as a support for a bracket by supports (P2 CP:187594)
 Plate systems can be split by planning seams in addition to design seams. (P2 CP: 229642)
 When creating plate systems, gaps between boundaries display with a glyph to aid in
identifying the gap. (P2 CP:244838)
 WBS commands support Molded Forms objects (P2 CP:268662)
 Filters are available on the Select by Filter dialog box to select objects by plate thickness,
profile cross-section name, plate and profile material, and plate and profile grade. (P2
CP:273852, CP:273853, CP:273854)
 Added information about the options that you can change on root edge reinforcement
systems and leaf edge reinforcement systems. For more information, see Section Orientation
Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 777). (P3 CP:254962)
 Added information about which objects Smart 3D copies as well as what types of
modifications are supported by Copy Symmetry, Copy Similar, and Copy Across Model.
For more information, see the following:
Frame mapping and Range Growth Values in Copy by Family (on page 1292)
Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 1294)
Objects not supported by Copy by Family (on page 1302)
Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify (on page 1303)
Solutions to common problems in Copy by Family (on page 1310)

Molded Forms User's Guide 20


Preface

(P3 CP:263679)
 Expanded Advanced Plate System help to include an overview, ribbon description, and
workflow for each macro. For more information, see Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on
page 283). (P3 CP:253349)
 After a command using geometric constructions is interrupted and restarted, you can recover
geometric constructions created before the interruption. For more information, see Geometric
Constructions (on page 1027). (P3 CP:257735)
 Import and Export commands and error display are available for geometric constructions.
For more information, see Geometric Construction Explorer (on page 1214). (P3 CP:185171)
 You can add a profile seam to a stiffener profile system by offset (P3 CP:187396)
 Concurrent highlighting of selected boundary objects in the Workspace Explorer and
graphic view is improved. (P3 CP:251413)
 When a plate system with openings is rebounded in a way that the openings will fall outside
of the plate boundaries, the plate modifications complete, and the software places the
openings on the To Do List. (P3 CP:272150)
 Added information on the Pick Edges option for selecting boundaries. For more
information, see Boundary Methods (on page 80). (P3 CP:289423)
 For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole, Maintenance,
and Operation aspects displaying in the 3D graphic view also display in the Sketch 2D
environment. In marine mode, the additional aspects also display in Sketch 2D for Openings.
For more information, see Format View Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide. (P4 CP:
119768)
 Updated the descriptions of the Thickening Technique Requested and Thickening
Technique Used properties on the General tab of the Plate Part Properties dialog box. For
more information, see General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127). (P4
CP:258906)

Molded Forms User's Guide 21


SECTION 1

Molded Forms
TM
The Molded Forms task of Intergraph Smart 3D is used to define basic structure of the model,
including planar plates, non-planar plates, major openings, stiffeners, and design seams. Using
this task, you create:
 High-level plate and profile design systems. These systems contain properties such as type,
thickness, continuity, and molded conventions.
 Child plate and profile design systems. All high-level systems have at least one child. If a
high-level system has been split, it has two or more child systems.
 Root parts. These parts are created automatically as children of systems. They have
thickness and inherit the properties of their parent systems. These properties are used to
detail the root parts in the Structural Detailing task and to generate data for manufacturing in
the Structural Manufacturing task.
 Logical connections. These connections are created automatically as children of systems and
contain the connection properties between systems. These properties are used to detail the
connections in the Structural Detailing task and to generate data for manufacturing in the
Structural Manufacturing task.
You can start the Molded Forms task by clicking Tasks > Molded Forms. The Molded Forms
task has these commands:

Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting Objects
(on page 40).

Planar Plate System - Places a planar plate system. For more information, see Planar
Plate System (on page 99).

Imported Plate System - Imports an ACIS or IGES file into the model. The file is used to
create a plate system, typically a complex, non-planar system such as a ship hull. For
more information, see Imported Plate System (on page 130).

Linear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve normal to the
sketching plane. For more information, see Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156).

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve along a
linear or nonlinear curve that you specify. For more information, see Nonlinear Extruded
Plate System (on page 180).

Revolved Plate System - Places a plate system by rotating a curve around an axis. For
more information, see Revolved Plate System (on page 205).

Bracket Plate System - Creates plate systems that represent primary structural brackets.
Bracket orientation is defined by a plane or bracket supports. For more information, see
Bracket Plate System (on page 227).

Molded Forms User's Guide 22


Molded Forms

Advanced Plate System - Creates specialized plate systems such as side plates, ring
plates, transition plates, continuity plates, and buckling plates. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System (on page 275).

Child Plate System - Creates a plate system that is a child to another plate system. For
more information, see Child Plate System (on page 426).

Ruled Plate System - Creates a plate system that is interpolated between two non-planar
curves. For more information, see Ruled Plate System (on page 449).

Openings - Places a major opening in a plate system. For more information, see
Openings (on page 475).

Member Openings - Places openings (holes) in slabs and linear member systems. For
more information, see Place Opening (on page 705).

Execute Split - Automatically creates intersection seams and splits systems by


intersection and design seams. The split creates new subsystems. For more information,
see Execute Split (on page 891).

Manual Split - Allows multiple seams and splits to be placed. For more information, see
Manual Split (on page 895).

Place Split - Divides a member system into multiple member parts while maintaining the
design intent of the original member system. For more information, see Place Splits (on
page 921).

Split Seam - Splits a seam by intersecting seams. For more information, see Split Seam
(on page 897).

Split Root System - Splits a top-level (or root) plate or profile system into multiple root
systems. For more information, see Split Root System (on page 899).

Stiffener Profile System by Intersection - Creates a stiffener profile system on the


selected plate system by defining the landing curve of the stiffener as the intersection of
the selected plate system and a grid plane. For more information, see Stiffener Profile
System by Intersection (on page 723).

Stiffener Profile System by Offset - Creates a stiffener profile system on the selected
plate system by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (a seam,
plate boundary, plate edge, the landing curve of another profile system, or grid plane). For
more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Offset (on page 739).

Stiffener Profile System by Projection - Creates a stiffener profile system on the


selected plate system by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto the
plate system. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Projection (on page
746).

Stiffener Profile System by Table - Creates a stiffener profile system on the selected
plate system by defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table. For more information,
see Stiffener Profile System by Table (on page 755).

Molded Forms User's Guide 23


Molded Forms

Tripping Stiffener System - Creates a tripping stiffener on a selected plate system. For
more information, see Tripping Stiffener System (on page 765).

Profile Edge Reinforcement - Places a profile system along the free edge of a plate
system. For more information, see Profile Edge Reinforcement (on page 771).

Place Linear Member - Places columns, beams, braces, and other linear members in the
model. For more information, see Place Linear Member Systems (on page 787).

Place Can - Places a can in the model. A can is a reinforcing connection piece on a
member to increase the surface area available for connections or to provide increased wall
thickness or both. For more information, see Place Can (on page 860).

Logical Connection - Creates a relationship between two molded form systems to identify
that the two systems are connected. For more information, see Logical Connection (on
page 943).

Place Assembly Connection - Places assembly connections between linear member


systems. For more information, see Place Assembly Connection (on page 952).

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection - Places an assembly connection


between a built-up member part and an intersecting part. For more information, see Place
Member Generic Assembly Connection (on page 968).

Seam by Intersection - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by defining the
landing curve of the seam as the intersection of the selected plate system and a grid plane.
For more information, see Seam by Intersection (on page 902).

Seam by Offset - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by defining the landing
curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another seam, plate boundary, profile
system, or grid plane). For more information, see Seam by Offset (on page 905).

Seam by Projection - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by projecting a 2D or


3D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system. For more information, see
Seam by Projection (on page 908).

Seam by Table - Creates a seam on the selected plate system by defining the landing
curve as coordinates in a table. For more information, see Seam by Table (on page 912).

Profile Seam - Creates a design seam on a profile or on all profiles that belong to a plate
system. For more information, see Profile Seam (on page 914).

Profile Knuckle - Places a manual profile knuckle on a selected profile system. For more
information, see Profile Knuckle (on page 935).

Reference Curve by Intersection - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate


system by defining the landing curve of the reference plane as the intersection of the
selected plate system and a grid plane. For more information, see Reference Curve by
Intersection (on page 973).

Molded Forms User's Guide 24


Molded Forms

Reference Curve by Offset - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate system by
defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another grid,
mark, or reference). For more information, see Reference Curve by Offset (on page 976).

Reference Curve by 2D Sketch - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate system
by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system. For more
information, see Reference Curve by 2D Sketch (on page 980).

Reference Curve from External File - Creates and modifies knuckle reference curves.
These curves require that the edges of the sheetbody faces carry an attribute that reflects
that they are knuckles and relates them to the appropriate reference curve. For more
information, see Reference Curve from External File (on page 984).

Execute Detailing - Creates detail parts from the root part of a plate or profile system. For
more information, see Execute Detailing Command (on page 989).

Import IGES - Imports 3D geometric data from a file in the IGES (Initial Graphics
Exchange Standard) format. This command is on the File menu. For more information, see
Import IGES (File Menu) (on page 1216).

Import ACIS - Imports 3D geometric data from a file in the ACIS .sat format. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Import ACIS (File Menu) (on
page 1216).

Import Stiffeners - Imports stiffener profile systems from data in a Microsoft Excel
workbook. This command is on the File menu. For more information, see Import Stiffeners
(File Menu) (on page 1217).

Import Seams - Imports design seams from data in a Microsoft Excel workbook. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Import Seams (File Menu) (on
page 1225).

Import Ship Structure - Imports Tribon ship structure data for use as background
structure in planning and outfitting work. This command is only available if the Smart 3D
Tribon Interface is installed. For more information, see Import Ship Structure (File Menu).

Export IGES - Exports 3D geometric data to a file in the IGES format. This command is on
the File menu. For more information, see Export IGES (File Menu) (on page 1236).

Export ACIS - Exports geometric data to a file in the ACIS .sat format. This command is on
the File menu. For more information, see Export ACIS (File Menu) (on page 1236).

Export Stiffeners - Exports stiffener data to a Microsoft Excel workbook. This command is
on the File menu. For more information, see Export Stiffeners (File Menu) (on page 1237).

Export Seams - Exports seam data to a Microsoft Excel workbook. This command is on
the File menu. For more information, see Export Seams (File Menu) (on page 1239).

Neutral/GeniE Export - Exports model data to a neutral or GeniE XML format. This
command is on the File menu. For more information, see Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File
Menu) (on page 1241).

Molded Forms User's Guide 25


Molded Forms

Copy by Family - Replicates objects in the model maintaining a relationship between the
copies. This command is available on the Edit menu. For more information, see Copy by
Family (on page 1255).

Copy by Family Synchronize - Opens the Copy by Family ribbon with the last used
family set as the default family. This command is available on the Edit menu. For more
information, see Copy By Family Synchronize (on page 1315).

Copy by Family Audit Report - Creates a report that allows you to verify that the source
has been copied to the target. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more
information, see Copy By Family Audit Report (on page 1316).

Change Geometry Type - Modifies the geometry type of a plate. This command is
available on the Edit menu. For more information, see Change Geometry Type (Edit
Menu) (on page 1385).

Topological Points - Creates associative points directly in the graphic view. This
command is available on the Insert menu. For more information, see Topological Points
(Insert Menu) (on page 1323).

Delay Settings - Delays the update of existing Structural Detailing and Structural
Manufacturing objects when the parent Molded Form object is modified, putting the objects
on the To Do List for future update. This command is available on the Tools menu. For
more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page 1366).

Data Integrity Check - Verifies the data integrity of Molded Forms systems in your model
before creating detailed parts in the Structural Detailing task. This command is available
on the Tools menu. For more information, see Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) (on page
1371).

Measure Explicit - Measures girth distances along landing curves in a cumulative fashion.
This command is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see Measure Explicit
(Tools Menu) (on page 1386).

Automatic Rebound - Changes the boundary from one object to another. This command
is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see Rebound objects (on page
1391).

Submit Batch Job - Runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework. This command is available on the Tools menu. For more information, see
Submit Batch Job (on page 1380).

Un-Split - Merges plates into a single plate leaving the seam in the model so that you can
use the seam to split the plate again at a later time. For more information, see Un-Split (on
page 895).

Tripping Bracket - Provides compatibility with brackets created with Bracket Plate
System in earlier versions of the software. For more information, see Tripping Bracket
(on page 1425).

To create new tripping brackets, use Bracket Plate System and

Molded Forms User's Guide 26


Molded Forms

select Plane by Selected Supports as the value for Select Plane.

Shell Plate Unfold Preview - Generates a graphic preview of an unfolded plate shape
with frame marks, roll line marks, surrounding minimum rectangle and annotation
representing dimensions of minimum rectangle, unfolded surface area and percentage of
material utilization in a private graphic view. For more information, see Shell Plate Unfold
Preview (on page 1449).

See Also
Molded Forms Workflow (on page 28)

Molded Forms User's Guide 27


SECTION 2

Molded Forms Workflow


All molded forms objects are placed in the model using information defined in the reference data.
The first steps are to review, edit, and otherwise customize the delivered reference data. These
steps are performed by an administrator with permissions to change the reference data prior to
the start of modeling.
After the reference data is customized, your administrator needs to define the molded forms
systems in the Systems and Specifications task. The systems are typically in a predefined work
breakdown structure.
Because molded forms rely on grid planes, your administrator must go to the Grids task and
place grid planes before you can place any molded forms objects in your model.
After the reference data and the needed systems are defined, you can begin placing molded
forms objects in your model.

Place the Hull


Import an ACIS or IGES file into your model to create the hull. For more information, see Import a
plate system (on page 136).

Place Decks and Bulkheads


Create the major plate systems in your model that represent the decks and bulkheads. You have
several methods for placing these plate systems:
Place a planar plate system (on page 104)
Place a linear extruded plate system (on page 161)
Place a nonlinear extruded plate system (on page 185)
Place a revolved plate system (on page 209)
Create a ruled plate system using existing curves (on page 454)
Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions (on page 282)
Bracket Plate System (on page 227)

Place Openings
After the deck and bulkheads are in the model, add the major openings such as cargo hold
hatches.
Place an opening by sketching (on page 479)
Place an advanced opening (on page 480)

Create Stiffener Profile Systems


Place stiffeners as needed. You have several methods for placing stiffeners:
Place stiffener profile by intersection (on page 728)
Place stiffener profile by offset (on page 745)
Place stiffener profile by projection (on page 753)
Place stiffener profile by table (on page 760)

Molded Forms User's Guide 28


Molded Forms Workflow

Place tripping stiffener (on page 769)


Import stiffener or seam data (on page 1217)

Place Seams
Place design and planning seams as needed. You have several methods for placing seams:
Seam by Intersection (on page 902)
Seam by Offset (on page 905)
Seam by Projection (on page 908)
Seam by Table (on page 912)
Profile Seam (on page 914)
Import stiffener or seam data (on page 1217)

Place Edge Reinforcement Profile Systems


Place edge reinforcements as needed. For more information, see Place edge reinforcement
profile (on page 774).

Execute the Splits


When all the design seams are placed, you need to split the plate and profile systems.
Split a plate system (on page 893)
Split a profile or member system (on page 893)
Create multiple intersections seams (on page 895)
Split a seam by intersecting seams (on page 897)
Split a member that intersects another member (on page 925)

In This Section
Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer ................ 30
Icons in the Workspace Explorer ................................................... 32
Selecting Objects ........................................................................... 40
Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects ................................ 44
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ............................... 45
Best Practices ................................................................................ 50
Plane Methods ............................................................................... 76
Boundary Methods ......................................................................... 80
Landing Curve Methods ................................................................. 87
Profile Orientation .......................................................................... 88
Center of Buoyancy ....................................................................... 91
Minimum Distance ......................................................................... 92

Molded Forms User's Guide 29


Molded Forms Workflow

Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer


Plates and profiles gain children objects in the Workspace Explorer hierarchy as the model
progresses from early design in Molded Forms through manufacturing parts in Structural
Manufacturing. The following objects appear on the System tab of the Workspace Explorer:
Root system
Contains the top-level properties for a plate or profile, such as continuity, tightness, material
grade, and molded conventions, but does not contain all physical attributes. For example, a
root plate system is a surface without thickness, and a root profile system is a landing curve.
Leaf or child system
Inherits the properties of the parent root system. Properties can be manually changed to be
different from the root system. Each root system is created with a leaf system. When the root
system is split, additional leaf systems are created.
Plate part
Inherits the properties of the parent leaf system and begins to carry physical attributes. Each
leaf system has a plate part. There are two types of plate parts:
Light part
The initial part created in Molded Forms. Plate parts have thickness and profile parts
have cross-sections, but other physical attributes are not considered. For example, parts
are not trimmed at their boundaries and profile part locations are not adjusted based on
plate part thickness.
Detailed part
Replaces the light part after detailing the part in Structural Detailing. Parts gain additional
physical attributes. For example, plates are now trimmed at their boundaries; profile
webs and flanges are trimmed.
Root logical connection
Contains top-level properties for a connection between plate and profile systems. Each root
logical connection is a child of a root system.
Leaf or child logical connection
Each root logical connection is created with a leaf logical connection. When the root logical
connection is split, additional leaf logical connections are created.
Assembly connection
Inherits the properties of the parent leaf logical connection. An assembly connection is
created when parts are detailed in Structural Detailing. Each assembly connection is a child
of a leaf logical connection. An assembly connection contains properties used for physical
connections (welds) and features such as end cuts, slots, and collars.
Feature
Contains properties and physical attributes for detailed features such as end cuts, slots, or
collars. A feature is created when parts are detailed in Structural Detailing. Each feature is a
child of an assembly connection.
Physical connection
Contains properties and physical attributes for welds. Physical connections are created for

Molded Forms User's Guide 30


Molded Forms Workflow

each assembly connection when parts are detailed in Structural Detailing. End-to-end and
edge-to-edge connections have one physical connection for each part. Each physical
connection is a child of an assembly connection or a feature.

Examples
Plate

1 - Root system
2 - Leaf system
3 - Light part
4 - Detailed part
5 - Root logical connection
6 - Leaf logical connection
7 - Assembly connection
8 - Collar feature
9 - Slot feature
10 - Physical connection

Molded Forms User's Guide 31


Molded Forms Workflow

Profile

1 - Root system
2 - Leaf system
3 - Detailed part
4 - Root logical connection
5 - Leaf logical connection
6 - Assembly connection
7 - End cut feature
8 - Physical connection

 Objects created in Structural Manufacturing, such as manufacturing parts, templates, and pin
jigs, are children to parts, blocks, or assemblies on the Assembly tab of the Workspace
Explorer.
 Plate Systems display at the same level in the hierarchy as Bracket Plate Systems. If you
filter on Plate Systems, the software also displays Bracket Plate Systems as shown in the
following figure. This happens because the leaf system of a bracket plate system is a plate
system object. The bracket plate system is included in the workspace because it is the parent
of the leaf plate system.

Icons in the Workspace Explorer


Analysis Folder

Analysis Model

Assembly

Assembly Connection

Beam Part - undetailed

Beam Part - detailed

Molded Forms User's Guide 32


Molded Forms Workflow

Beam Part - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - undetailed

Bearing Plate - detailed

Bearing Plate - detailed, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group member

Bearing Plate - group member, manufactured

Bearing Plate - group master

Bearing Plate - group master, manufactured

Block

Boundary Condition

Bracket System or Leaf System

Bracket Part - undetailed

Bracket Part - detailed

Bracket Part - detailed, manufactured

Bracket Part - group member

Bracket Part - group member, manufactured

Bracket Part - group master

Bracket Part - group master, manufactured

Cable Nozzle on Equipment

Cabletray Nozzle on Equipment

Collar Plate - undetailed

Collar Plate - detailed

Collar Plate - detailed, manufactured

Molded Forms User's Guide 33


Molded Forms Workflow

Collar Plate - group member

Collar Plate - group member, manufactured

Collar Plate - group master

Collar Plate - group master, manufactured

Common Part Manager

Conduit Nozzle on Equipment

Coordinate System

Coordinate System Axis

Coordinate System Grid Plane

Coordinate System Elevation Plane

Coordinate System Radial Plane

Coordinate System Radial Cylinder

Curved Member Part - undetailed

Curved Member Part - light

Curved Member Part - light, manufactured

Curved Member Part - detailed

Curved Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group member

Curved Member Part - group member, manufactured

Curved Member Part - group master

Curved Member Part - group master, manufactured

Designed Equipment Component

Designed Equipment

Molded Forms User's Guide 34


Molded Forms Workflow

Designed Handrail

Designed Member - undetailed

Designed Member - light

Designed Member - light, manufactured

Designed Member - detailed

Designed Member - detailed, manufactured

Designed Member - group member

Designed Member - group member, manufactured

Designed Member - group master

Designed Member - group master, manufactured

Edge Treatment

Equipment

Equipment Component

Equipment Foundation

Equipment Shape

Equipment Solid

Equipment Solid - Added

Equipment Solid - Subtracted

Equipment Solid - Suppressed

Feature (includes corner feature, edge feature, face feature, slot, and so on)

Footing

Footing Components

Foundation Port

Frame Connection

Molded Forms User's Guide 35


Molded Forms Workflow

Handrail

HVAC Nozzle on equipment

Insert Plate - undetailed

Insert Plate - detailed

Insert Plate - detailed, manufactured

Insert Plate - group member

Insert Plate - group member, manufactured

Insert Plate - group master

Insert Plate - group master, manufactured

Ladder

Linear Member Part - undetailed

Linear Member Part - light

Linear Member Part - light, manufactured

Linear Member Part - detailed

Linear Member Part - detailed, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group member

Linear Member Part - group member, manufactured

Linear Member Part - group master

Linear Member Part - group master, manufactured

Load Case

Load Combination

Member Assembly Connection Cutback Feature

Member Assembly Connection Plate Part

Molded Forms User's Guide 36


Molded Forms Workflow

Member Assembly Connection

Member Fireproofing

Member Part

Member Split Connection

Member System

Opening

Panel - manufactured

Physical Connection

Pipe Nozzle on Equipment

Planning Joint - butt weld

Planning Joint - lap weld

Planning Joint - tee weld

Planning Joint Folder

Plate - light

Plate Part - undetailed

Plate Part - light

Plate Part - light, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Plate Part - detailed, manufactured, with manufacturing part assembly child

Plate Part - group member

Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Plate Part - group master

Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Molded Forms User's Guide 37


Molded Forms Workflow

Plate System or leaf system

Profile Edge Reinforcement System or Leaf System

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - light, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part detailed, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Seam - Design

Seam - Intersection

Seam - Planning

Seam - Straking

Slab Assembly Connection

Slab

Stair

Standalone Beam Part - undetailed

Standalone Beam Part - detailed

Standalone Beam Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - undetailed

Standalone Plate Part - detailed

Molded Forms User's Guide 38


Molded Forms Workflow

Standalone Plate Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group member

Standalone Plate Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Plate Part - group master

Standalone Plate Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - undetailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master

Standalone Profile Edge Reinforcement Part - group master, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - undetailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed

Standalone Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member

Standalone Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master

Standalone Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener Part - undetailed

Stiffener Part - light

Stiffener Part - light, manufactured

Molded Forms User's Guide 39


Molded Forms Workflow

Stiffener Part - detailed

Stiffener Part - detailed, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group member

Stiffener Part - group member, manufactured

Stiffener Part - group master

Stiffener Part - group master, manufactured

Stiffener System or Leaf System

Wall Assembly Connection

Wall Part

Wall Run

Wall System

Selecting Objects
All objects in the Molded Forms task have properties that you can edit. Using the Select
command on the vertical toolbar, you select the object that you want to edit or work with.
An important part of the Select command is the
Locate Filter box that appears on the ribbon. The
Locate Filter box contains pre-defined filters for
the Select command. When you choose a filter in
the Locate Filter box, the software allows you to select only the filtered objects in a graphic view
and in the Workspace Explorer. For example, if you select Seams, you can select only design,
intersection, planning, or a seam point in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
The Molded Forms task includes these filters:
Bracket Plate Systems
Limits your selection to bracket plate systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 40


Molded Forms Workflow

Plate Systems display at the same level in the hierarchy as Bracket Plate
Systems. If you filter on Plate Systems, the software also displays Bracket Plate Systems
as shown in the following figure. This happens because the leaf system of a bracket plate
system is a plate system object. The bracket plate system is included in the workspace
because it is the parent of the leaf plate system.

Connections
Limits your selection to:
 Indent 2
 Logical connections
 Frame connections
 Split connections
 Indent bullet 3
 Indent bullet 4
Control Points
Limits your selection to control points. You define the location of a control point with Insert >
Control Point.
Construction Graphics
Limits your selection to lines, line strings, arcs, circles, and rectangles created with Insert >
Construction Graphics.
Members
Limits your selection to member parts.
Member Systems
Limits your selection to:
 Standard members
 Design members
 Cans
Molded Forms (Leaf Level)
Limits your selection to:
 Leaf plate systems
 Leaf stiffener systems
 Leaf edge reinforcements
 Leaf logical connections
 Grids

Molded Forms User's Guide 41


Molded Forms Workflow

 Standard members
 Cans
Molded Forms (Root Level)
Limits your selection to:
 Root plate systems
 Root bracket plate system
 Root stiffener systems
 Root edge reinforcements
 Root beam systems
 Root logical connections
 Seams
 Seam point
 Openings
 Knuckles
 Reference curves
 Grids
 Frames (Child of grid frame system)
 Frame connections
 Split connections
 Standard members
 Designed members
 Cans
Openings
Limits your selection to major openings and member openings.
Parts
Limits your selection to:
 Plate parts
 Profile parts
 Beam parts
 Edge reinforcement parts
 Member parts
Points
Limits your selection to topological points. You define the location of a control point with the
Insert > Topological Points command.
RefCurve on Surface & Knuckles

Molded Forms User's Guide 42


Molded Forms Workflow

Limits your selection to:


 Reference curves
 Plate knuckles
 Profile knuckles
Root Plates
Limits your selection to:
 Root plate systems
 Leaf plate systems
 Designed members
 Cans
Root Profiles
Limits your selection to:
 Root stiffener systems
 Leaf stiffener systems
 Root edge reinforcement systems
 Leaf edge reinforcements systems
 Standard members
 Design members
Seams
Limits your selection to:
 Design seams
 Intersection seams
 Planning seams
 Seam points
All
Allows you to select any object, even objects created in another task.
More
Allows you to create and select customized filters. For more information, see Select Filter
Dialog Box (on page 1282) in the Common User's Guide.

Inside Fence
Allows you to select all objects entirely inside the fence.

Overlapping Fence
Allows you to select all objects entirely inside the fence and those objects outside but
touching the fence at some point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 43


Molded Forms Workflow

Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects


The software provides feedback on the direction, orientation, and rotation of objects using glyphs.
A glyph is a straight or curved line with a cone-shaped arrow head that indicates a particular
direction. When you are creating or modifying objects, glyphs assist you so that you can properly
set design parameters like twist, mounting angle, and offset.
The software displays glyphs for:
 Root plate systems and leaf plate systems
 Root stiffener systems and leaf stiffener systems
 Seams
 Reference curves
Glyphs display using the defined handle color as defined in Tools > Options.

Glyphs for Plate Systems


Glyphs for plate systems display at the approximate center of plate as a straight line with two
arrows. The top arrow represents the thickness direction, and the bottom arrow represents
normal direction. For example:
 Glyphs for plate systems with both thickness and normal pointing in the same direction

 Glyphs for plate systems with thickness and normal pointing in opposite directions

Glyphs for Bracket Systems


Glyphs for bracket systems display at the bracket origin for tripping brackets and at the bracket
reference position for brackets by plane. The three glyphs represent the thickness direction, the
normal direction, and the U-direction vector.

Glyphs for Profile Systems


Glyphs for profile systems display at the start point of the profile landing curve. The three glyphs
represent the profile direction, primary orientation, and angular orientation.

The profile direction glyph represents the tangent of the profile at the start point. The angular
orientation glyph represents the direction of profile orientation when a positive angle is applied for
twist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 44


Molded Forms Workflow

Glyphs for Seams and Reference Curves


Glyphs for seams and reference curves display at the start point of the landing curve and display
the direction of the landing curve.

See Also
Molded Forms Workflow ................................................................ 28
Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer ................ 30
Icons in the Workspace Explorer ................................................... 32
Selecting Objects ........................................................................... 40
Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks ............................... 45
Best Practices ................................................................................ 50
Plane Methods ............................................................................... 76
Boundary Methods ......................................................................... 80
Landing Curve Methods ................................................................. 87
Profile Orientation .......................................................................... 88
Center of Buoyancy ....................................................................... 91
Minimum Distance ......................................................................... 92

Permission Group Behaviors Between Tasks


Permission groups provide controls for when, where, and by whom the model can be updated.
Permission groups are assigned according to several common types of workflow. They typically
fall into the following categories:
 By Function: such as Outfitting versus Structure, or Piping versus Equipment versus Molded
Forms versus Structural Detailing.
 By System: such as Hull versus Deck1 versus TransvBhd1. This includes the ability to place
the hull system (and its child leaf systems, seams, connections related seams, reference
curves and openings) in a different permission group than the hull detailing objects and other
connected objects.
 By Area: Fwd versus Aft, or by block or assembly.
 Combinations: for example, By Function and By Area (Molded Forms for Block1 versus
Detailing for Block1).
The permission group of an object is not modified regardless of the Active Permission Group
unless the permission group is explicitly changed on the Configuration tab of the Properties
dialog box as described under the change propagation sections below.

Molded Forms Behavior


Plate systems and profile systems are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
Leaf systems, light parts, reference curves, and logical connections are assigned the permission
group of their parent.

Molded Forms User's Guide 45


Molded Forms Workflow

Seams and openings are assigned to the permission group of the plate or profile system they cut.
You must have write access to the root plate system being cut when placing an opening or
design seam.
In the Execute Split command, seams and knuckles that you do not have permission to modify
are not selectable in the table.
Logical connections between profile systems and plate systems are in same permission group as
the profile systems.
Logical connections between different root systems are created as children of the bounded or
penetrated system.
Summary of Molded Forms permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Root plate system Active Permission Group

Leaf plate system Same as root plate system

Root and child logical Same as dependent root plate


connections system

Reference curve Same as root plate system

Design seam, intersection Same as root plate system Must have write access to
seam root plate system

Opening Same as root plate system Must have write access to


root plate system

Manual logical connection Permission group of system for Must have write access to
which you have write access, at least one of the systems
use first system selected if you being connected
have write access to both
systems

Root profile system Active Permission Group Profiles are handled


similarly to plates

Logical connection between Same permission group as root


stiffener or edge reinforcement profile system
and the plate being stiffened

Beam Active Permission Group

Molded Forms Change Propagation


The root system and its child leaf system, logical connections, reference curves, seams and
openings always have the same permission group. When the permission group is changed for
any of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other objects.

Molded Forms User's Guide 46


Molded Forms Workflow

If plate system A is bounded by plate system B, you can modify A without write access to B. Plate
System B is placed on the To Do List as Out of Date if the change to A impacts B.

Structural Detailing Behavior


The detailed part permission group is not assigned from the parent system permission group.
Detailed parts created with Execute Detailing are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
You can modify this assignment. You must have write permission to the part to detail the part.
If a detailed part is deleted, the resulting light part maintains the permission group of the detailed
part.
You can assign different permission groups to parts sharing the same leaf system as created by
a planning seam.
You can only add seams and features to a part if you have write permissions to the part.
Summary of Structural Detailing permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Light Root Plate Part (before Same as plate system at


detailing) creation

Detailed Root Plate Part Active Permission Group when Must have write access to the
detailed. Part keeps this light part
permission group if the detail
part is deleted.

Leaf part Same as root part

Straking seam Same as root part Must have write access to root
part

Feature placed by command Same as root part Must have write access to root
(edge, corner, sketched, free part
edge treatment)

Assembly Connection Same as dependent part

Feature, part, physical Same as assembly connection


connection created by
assembly connection

Free end cut object and its Same as root part


features

Standalone part Active Permission Group

Molded Forms User's Guide 47


Molded Forms Workflow

Structural Detailing Change Propagation


The detailed part, its child leaf parts, features and straking seams always have the same
permission group. Assembly connections always have the same permission group as the
dependent part in the connection. Assembly connection children always have the same
permission group as the assembly connection. Standalone parts plus associated features and
connections always have the same permission group. When the permission group is changed for
any of these objects, the permission group is also changed for the other objects.
If you do not have write access to a part, the part is placed on the To Do List as Out of Date if a
change is made to the part. Assembly connections and features are also not created until the part
is updated on the To Do List by someone with write access.

Hole Management Behavior


Hole traces and outfitting catalog hole fittings are assigned to the Active Permission Group.
Hole cuts and structural hole fittings are assigned the permission group of their parent structural
part (plate or profile).
Summary of Hole Management permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Hole trace Active Permission Group

Hole cut Same as root plate part Must have write access to parent plate
part. Root plate part must be detailed
in the Structural Detailing task.

Outfitting catalog hole Active Permission Group


fitting

Structural hole fitting Active Permission Group Must have write access to parent plate
part. Root plate part must be detailed
in the Structural Detailing task.

Hole Management Change Propagation


The permission group of an outfitting catalog hole fitting can be changed without changing the
permission group of the hole trace.
The permission group of a structural hole fitting can be changed without changing the permission
group of the hole cut or parent plate part.
A hole cut and its parent plate part always have the same permission group. When the
permission group is changed for one of these objects, the permission group is also changed for
the other object.

Planning Behavior
Planning permission group behavior is related to Molded Forms and Structural Detailing behavior
because planning seams split leaf systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 48


Molded Forms Workflow

When Manage Intersections is run and an intersecting part is set to Split or Offset, planning
seams are created in the Active Permission Group. You must have write access to the root
system.
Summary of Planning permission behaviors:

Object Permission Group Comments

Planning seam Active Permission Group Must have write access to the root system of
the parts being split.

Block or assembly Active Permission Group

Planning Change Propagation


Write access is required to both parts to remove a planning split using Flatten Assembly or
Manage Intersections. The resulting new part is assigned to the same permission group as the
original parts if they belonged to the same permission group. The new part is assigned to the
Active Permission Group if the original parts were in different permission groups.

Global Workshare Behavior


Global Workshare allows managed replication of the model at several sites. One of the
restrictions of a Workshare configuration is that you only have Read access to objects that are
controlled by non-local permission groups.
A system is a logical grouping of sub-systems. When you add or remove a sub-system, you are
modifying the definition of the parent system. Therefore, you must have write access to the
parent system. You do not need write access to the grandparent system.
When participating in a Global Workshare Configuration, you must manage all permission groups
at the host site. The sub-system requirement to have write access to its parent system is not
possible if the sub-system's permission group is created at the satellite site and the parent
system's permission group is created at the host site.
For example, your host site is Houston and your satellite site is London. You create a system
named "Midbody", and its controlling permission group is in Houston. You assign John, who
works in London, write access. During the workshare replication process, the Midbody system
and permission group is replicated in London. In London, John can add systems, plates, profiles
and whatever else he wants to the Midbody system because John was given write access to the
system's permission group in Houston. John cannot delete or change any of the properties of the
Midbody system in London because the host site, Houston, owns it. He can only add objects to
the system. If John were to travel to Houston and log on there, he could delete or change any of
the properties of the Midbody system because the Houston host site owns it.

Molded Forms User's Guide 49


Molded Forms Workflow

Best Practices
You may encounter situations where you do not know the best modeling technique. The following
best practices guide you through the modeling process. Because your modeling environment is
unique, specific instructions are not possible. However, enough detail is provided to help you
work through the solutions.

Topics
Bracket Best Practices ................................................................... 50
Knuckle Best Practices .................................................................. 56
Landing Curve Best Practices ....................................................... 56
Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings ...................................... 57
Seams Best Practices .................................................................... 60
Session File Best Practices ........................................................... 64
Sketch 2D Best Practices .............................................................. 65
Split Best Practices ........................................................................ 74

Bracket Best Practices


Bracket Plate System creates plate systems for primary structural brackets that can be
stiffened, penetrated by stiffeners on the bounding structure, and split with design seams. Use
the following best practices when working with the command. For more information, see Bracket
Plate System (on page 227).

Backside support
When a support is on the backside of another plate, select the edge of the support. Selecting the
system results in an error.
The following example shows a bracket with the backside edge of a plate as one of the supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 50


Molded Forms Workflow

1. Select the desk plate system as Support 1.

2. The second support is a bulkhead on the backside of another bulkhead. Using QuickPick,
select the edge of second support as Support 2. Do not select the plate system.

Length value and bracket parameters


When the supports are non-linear or non-planer, select a value for Length that is closest to or
greater than bracket height and width parameters.

Ambiguity in a bracket support


When a bracket support has an ambiguity, select the correct side of the ambiguity.

Molded Forms User's Guide 51


Molded Forms Workflow

The following example shows a bracket that is on the far side of the bulkhead.

1. Select the bulkhead plate system as Support 1.

Molded Forms User's Guide 52


Molded Forms Workflow

2. Select the far side of the profile system as Support 2.

Bracket thickness
When modifying the secondary orientation of a lapped bracket profile support, also modify the
bracket thickness direction so that the bracket is properly lapped.
In the following example, a lapped bracket is placed on a profile system, and the secondary
orientation of the profile system is modified.

1. Select the profile system you want to modify and click Properties .
2. Select Section Orientation and modify Secondary Orientation as needed.
3. Click Finish.
The orientation of the profile system is modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 53


Molded Forms Workflow

4. Check if the lapped bracket thickness direction is correct.

5. If the lapped bracket thickness direction is incorrect, select the bracket and click Properties
.
6. Select Molded Conventions and modify the Thickness Direction as needed.

Molded Forms brackets versus Structural Detailing brackets


When a bracket must be penetrated, split, stiffened, or is needed for strength calculations (in an
external analysis tool) or class drawings, use Bracket Plate System in Molded Forms
instead of Place Bracket Parts in Structural Detailing.

Bracket symbols
Use a bracket symbol instead of a sketched bracket when a profile is a support and minimum
height of the bracket nose is important. The nose height is not maintained on a sketched bracket
when the profile height is modified.

Create multiple brackets using Auto Finish Mode


When you want to create multiple brackets with the same symbol and common supports, use
Auto Finish Mode .
The following example shows a plate system with multiple two-support and three-support
brackets created using Auto Finish Mode .

1 - Two-support bracket
2 - Three-support bracket

Molded Forms User's Guide 54


Molded Forms Workflow

1. For a two-support bracket, select the plate system as Support 1.

2. Select Support 2 and click Auto Finish Mode to create two-support brackets each time
you select a similar Support 2.
3. For a three-support bracket, use Bracket Shape.
4. Select the plate system as Support 1.
5. Select similar Support 2 and Support 3 each time you want to create a three-support
bracket.

1 - Support 2 for
two-support bracket
2 - Support 2 for
three-support bracket
3 - Support 3 for
three-support bracket

Logical connection
When the bracket supports are not loaded in the workspace, you can identify the supports by the
bracket logical connections in the Workspace Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 55


Molded Forms Workflow

Knuckle Best Practices


You can use different methods to split larger plate and profile systems into smaller subsystems
for detailed design and manufacturing. However, when using a knuckle instead of a split, follow
these best practices.
 Do not use seams to split knuckles.
 Do not create seams too close to a knuckle curve or point. Seam creation fails if the knuckle
is closer than 5mm.
 Do not delete a knuckled reference curve.
 When a knuckle reference curve transitions to a tangent, check that it also connects to
another seam.

 When you have a plate bend, such as a flanged plate that is concave (thickness direction is
toward the center of the radius), ensure that the radius is equal to or smaller than the plate
thickness.
See Also
Placing Plate Systems (on page 96)
Placing Profile Systems (on page 721)
Creating Seams (on page 888)
Creating Reference Curves (on page 972)

Landing Curve Best Practices


Landing curves are defined when creating profile systems, seams, and reference curves by
projection. When creating landing curves, use the following best practices. For more information,
see Landing Curve Methods (on page 87).
 Avoid multi-lump (non-continuous) landing curves. For example, profiles crossing openings
or openings cutting profiles are not valid.
 Do not define landing curves that overlap or are collinear.
 When placing profiles by projection, the default profile type depends on the selected
sketching plane. This may not be the intended type. For example, when creating longitudinal
profiles with a transverse sketch plane, the default type is Transverse. Check the type on the
Properties dialog box, and modify it if needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 56


Molded Forms Workflow

 When placing profiles or seams by projection, extend the landing curves beyond the
expected plate boundary or surface edges. If the geometry of the surface changes, then the
landing curves are be long enough. The recommended extension is approximately 1 meter.
 When placing profiles or seams by offset, do not use an offset value of zero.
 When placing profiles or seams by projection that are to be bounded, extend the sketch curve
past the boundaries in Sketch 2D and then set boundaries in 3D.
Also See
Placing Profile Systems (on page 721)
Creating Seams (on page 888)
Creating Reference Curves (on page 972)

Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings


This best practice illustrates how to model interior openings as sketched boundaries and include
the decks that define the base of the openings in the bulkhead boundary list, allowing the
transverse bulkhead to be modeled as one plate system.
You want to create a transverse bulkhead as one plate system, which is split by the decks and
longitudinal bulkheads, and contains large openings outboard of longitudinal bulkheads. The
challenge in modeling the transverse bulkhead is how to model the openings. If you create an
opening, the base of the opening is coincident with the intersection seam, which sometimes
causes detailing to fail.

Instead of using Place Opening to model the openings, model the interior openings as
sketched boundaries and include the decks that define the base of the openings in the bulkhead
boundary list. The transverse bulkhead to be modeled as one plate system.
The following example uses sketched boundaries to create interior openings that are coincident
with intersection seam:

Molded Forms User's Guide 57


Molded Forms Workflow

1. Import the hull using Imported Plate System (on page 130) .
2. Assuming grid planes that are 1 meter apart, create decks D3, D21, D30, and D35, bounded
by the hull and reference frames x = 40 and 60M, using Planar Plate System (on page 99)
.
3. Create longitudinal bulkheads L10 and L-10, bounded by the hull and the D35 deck system,
also using the Planar Plate System command.
4. Using Planar Plate System , create a transverse bulkhead at F50:
a. Set Continuity to Intercostal.
b. As the boundaries, select the hull, D21, D30, and D35, and then click Sketch Boundary
Curve .

c. Click Add Intersecting Item and select bulkheads L10 and L-10.
d. Draw the opening boundaries as shown.

e. Click Finish.
The software starts the Ambiguity Solver. Three cells are presented (between hull and
D21, between D21 and D30 and between D30 and D35).
f. Select all three cells, and then click Finish again.

Molded Forms User's Guide 58


Molded Forms Workflow

The bulkhead is created as shown.

5. Run Execute Split .


The software creates the 12 leaf systems and all the logical connections.

At this point you can detail the parts, create the manufacturing parts, add design seams to the
bulkhead, and place edge reinforcement on the free edges of the sketched boundaries. You can
also modify the sketched boundaries to have round corners:

Molded Forms User's Guide 59


Molded Forms Workflow

Seams Best Practices


By using a seam object, you can split a plate system into separate child plate subsystems. A
seam is always attached to one or more plate systems. Use the following best practices when
working with seams. For more information, see Creating Seams (on page 888).

Avoid overlapping or coincident seams


Do not place seams that overlap. Overlapping seams can cause trimming issues. In the following
example, two seams overlap.

Instead, place a single seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 60


Molded Forms Workflow

Avoid seam boundaries at tangent points


Seams at tangent points can cause problems when detailing. Do not place separate seams.

Instead, place a single seam to avoid seam boundaries at tangent points.

Avoid seams that are coincident with system boundaries


To avoid weld and other detailing issues, do not place seams that coincide with the system
boundary.
In the following example, a seam from point b to point c is not required and makes detailing and
trimming of the plate difficult.

Molded Forms User's Guide 61


Molded Forms Workflow

1 - Seam coinciding with the plate boundary

Instead, place the seam only from point a to point b.

Avoid seams that end in the middle of the plate


To avoid detailing problems, do not place seams that do not completely split the plate. Place a
seam across the plate touching the plate edges.

Seams by projection on non-planar plate systems


When you place a seam by projection on non-planar plate systems, extend the ends of the seam
past the plate boundaries.

Seams by projection
When you place a seam by projection, connect the elements in Sketch 2D when the seam
consists of multiple elements.

Split the intersection seam before creating a design seam


Split an intersection seam before creating a design seam that is bounded to the intersection
seam.
In the following example, only a part of the plate is required to be cut. If the design seam is
created without splitting the intersection seam, then the complete plate is split by the design

Molded Forms User's Guide 62


Molded Forms Workflow

seam. If you split the profile seam first, then a design seam can be created that ends at the profile
edge.
Split the profile to create the intersection seam, and then create the design seam and bound it to
the intersection seam.

Closed edge reinforcements with seams must have at least two seams
You need to create at least two profile seams on a closed-edge reinforcement. For example,
create one seam on the port side and the other on the starboard side. Select Auto Split and
select the port solution to solve the ambiguity.

Continuous and intercostal seams


Create longer continuous seams before creating shorter intercostal seams. This helps in detailing
and reduces ambiguity.

Modifying the seam geometry causes the seam to re-split


When you modify seam geometry, the software reruns the splitting operation on the seam. This
might affect the objects that intersect with it. Plan seams carefully and proceed with caution if you
need to modify a seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 63


Molded Forms Workflow

Session File Best Practices


A session file is a standard workspace file used to save settings from one work session to the
next, such as settings for windows, default colors, Sketch 2D, and units of measure. Use the
following best practices when working with session files. For more information, see Managing
Sessions in the Common User's Guide.

Save Session Files


 After restoring new databases from a backup, open the model, make necessary setting
changes, and save new session files.
 Save a session file after making significant changes, such as splitting blocks and detailing
structure. This minimizes the refresh time the next time you open the model from the session
file.
 You cannot save a session file if you run out of memory or the session quits abnormally.
Re-open the session file and refresh the workspace to restore. If new objects are not defined
in a filter, browse the database and add the objects to the filter.

Global Workshare
 When working in a global workshare environment, refresh the workspace after opening a
session file.

Share session files


When sharing a session file, define the session file with catalog or model filters. You must have
appropriate permissions to create or modify catalog filters and model filters. For more information,
see Permission Group Tab and Permissions Overview in the Common User's Guide.
 Catalog filters are used like reference data in the catalog. A catalog filter applies to
company-wide operations. For example, your administrator can define filters such as
Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2.
 Model filters are available to everyone assigned to a specific database model.
 Delivered catalog filters query different types of model objects.
 You must have appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete model and catalog filters.
Do not create model filters at a satellite site.
For more information, see Define Workspace in the Common User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 64


Molded Forms Workflow

Sketch 2D Best Practices


The Sketch 2D option is used in several commands to create sketched boundaries,
openings, curves for extruded plate systems, and profile and seam landing curves. The following
Sketch 2D best practices help you create objects in Molded Forms that you detail in the
Structural Detailing task and manufacture in the Structural Manufacturing task.

Templates
Sketch 2D default display options are saved in the file [Product
Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\template.sha. You can change the default display by
changing options in this file:
1. Right-click template.sha and select Properties.
2. Clear Read-only and click OK.
3. Open template.sha and change any of the following default display options:
 File > Properties. You can change the units displayed in command ribbon bars on the
Units tab.
 View > Toolbars. You can select the toolbars that are displayed.
 Format > Dimensions. You can change the units used in dimensions, the text size, and
other dimension properties.
 Tools > Options. You can change the default colors on the Colors tab.
 Tools > Display Manager. You can change the default geometry color, line type, and
width for individual layers.
 Tools > SmartSketch Settings. You can select the SmartSketch relationships that are
enabled on the Relationships tab.
4. Save and close the file.

Fractional Units
The default units and precision values in Sketch 2D are defined in a 3D task. For example, if the
file [Product Folder]\Common2D\Symbol2D\Templates\template.sha has default units set to mm,
and the units of measure in Molded Forms are set to ft-in, Sketch 2D defines the units of
measurement as ft-in.
The Properties dialog box in Sketch 2D allows you to view the defined units of measurement
and to specify the fractional precision value. If you need to use a specific fractional precision
value for all tasks in Sketch 2D, you can specify the precision value in the template file, which
takes precedence over the precision value defined by the 3D task.
The following example shows how to modify the length readout precision to 1/64 in the template
file:
1. In the template.sha file, set the precision value to 1/64, and save the file.
2. In the Molded Forms task, click Tools > Options.
The Options dialog box displays.
3. Under Units of Measure, set the distance readout to ft-in (fractional).
4. Click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 65


Molded Forms Workflow

The distance units in Sketch 2D are now in ft-in with a precision value of 1/64.

Number of sketch files allowed per plate


Sketch 2D geometry for an object is saved in 2D files cached in the model and related to the
object.
The Boundary Curve step for the plate system commands uses one 2D file. All boundary
curves are in one 2D file for each plate system, and are modified, added, or deleted in the same
file.

The Place Opening , Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection , and Design Seam by
2D Sketch commands can each have:
 Multiple 2D files, with a separate file for each object on one plate system. The objects are
modified in the 2D file, and deleted from the graphic view or Workspace Explorer.
 Geometry for multiple objects in one 2D file. The objects are modified or deleted in the 2D file.
 One 2D file that applies to multiple plate systems. Changes to the 2D file are reflected on all
plate systems.
 A combination of these files.

Add items to sketch


The Add Intersecting Item and Add Projection Item steps are used to add reference
structure to Sketch 2D. Select the minimum number of needed items.
More than 30 items added to a sketch file can slow down software performance when
the object is recomputed.
Next, you can select Auto to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to the current select set. Items that pass the criteria are added to the select set and are
highlighted in the graphic view, as well as the Workspace Explorer.
The filter criteria that the software uses to determine eligible candidates depend upon whether
Add Intersecting Item or Add Projection Item was selected in a previous step. The following
table lists the various relevant objects that are automatically imported based on the target, or
base sketch, object type.

Base Sketch Object Intersecting Objects Projecting Objects

Plate System  Stiffeners  Reference Curves


 Edge Reinforcements  Stiffeners
 Seams  Penetration Plates
 Bounded Objects
 Bounding Objects
 Knuckle Reference Curves

Plate Part None supported in the current version of the None supported in the current version of
software the software

Profile System None supported in the current version of the None supported in the current version of
software the software

Member None supported in the current version of the None supported in the current version of
software the software

Molded Forms User's Guide 66


Molded Forms Workflow

Designed Member (Built Up) Same as Plate System Same as Plate System

If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a message on the status bar.
If you clear Auto, all selected objects, whether added to the select set automatically or manually,
are cleared. Selecting Auto adds back those objects that initially passed the filter criteria, but it
does not add back any objects that you selected manually.
When the selected plate system is large, Auto automatically adds all objects
relative to the sketch in the context of intersecting or project. This can slow down software
performance.

Layers
The software automatically defines several layers in Sketch 2D. Reference items (selected
automatically by the software or manually using the Add Intersecting Item and Add
Projection Item steps) are placed on those layers:

Default Layer
The software only uses geometry that you create on the Default layer. You can put other
geometry, such as construction lines, on other layers. The Default layer must be the first layer
alphabetically. To avoid a conflict, you should add a "z" prefix to any layer which you add, such
as "z_construction."

Infinite Elements Layer


Contains reference items with infinite geometry intersecting the sketch plane, such as grid planes.
Objects on this layer can be used with dimensions and relationships.

Inputs Layer
Contains other reference items intersecting the sketch plane that can also be used with
dimensions and relationships. The reference geometry includes openings, design seams, plate
systems, and profile systems.

No_Constrained_Elements Layer
Contains reference items that do not intersect the sketch plane. Also contains reference items
that cannot be used with relationships and dimensions, such as plate and profile parts. By default,
you cannot select reference geometry on the No_Constrained_Elements layer. To make the
geometry selectable, you must make No_Constrained_Elements the active layer, and then
switch back to the Default layer.
You can add relationships and dimensions to reference geometry on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer, but the relationships are not saved when you click Finish.

Multiple reference planes


You can add reference planes to Sketch 2D that are different than the sketching plane, but
parallel to the sketching plane. This is useful in defining landing curves for projected profiles and
seams on the hull. Use Add Projection Item to add the reference planes.

Molded Forms User's Guide 67


Molded Forms Workflow

The additional reference plane intersection geometry is gray in color and placed on the
No_Constrained_Elements layer.

Using SmartSketch Drawing Editor to save sketch geometry


SmartSketch Drawing Editor, delivered to [Product Folder]\Shape2D\Bin\shape2dserver.exe,
can be used to save geometry commonly used in Sketch 2D, such as:
 Mother curves and extrusion curves for extruded plate systems.
 Boundary curves.
 Openings or sketched features not included in the Catalog.
 Landing curves for projected profiles and seams.
You can copy the geometry from Sketch 2D and paste it into SmartSketch Drawing Editor, or
create the geometry directly in SmartSketch Drawing Editor. Geometry can be saved in multiple
SmartSketch Drawing Editor files or into a single file with multiple sheets. The geometry can be
copied from SmartSketch Drawing Editor and pasted into Sketch 2D as needed.

Deleting reference geometry


You can delete reference geometry from the sketch when the software includes geometry that
you do not want to see. The reference structure is not deleted, and the reference geometry is
recreated the next time that you open the sketch.

Modifying groups of geometry


The software automatically groups Sketch 2D geometry when you click Finish. When you modify
the existing 2D geometry of an object, you must maintain the original group identifier by using the
following methods:
1. To modify or delete existing geometry, use QuickPick, Top Down or Bottom Up
with Select Tool to select the geometry instead of the group.
2. To add new geometry to a group, use Edit > Group Modify.
3. To replace all geometry in a group with geometry copied to the clipboard, use Replace
Group Elements .

Molded Forms User's Guide 68


Molded Forms Workflow

Rectangles
Use Line or Line/Arc Continuous to create rectangles.
If you use Rectangle , you must select Tools > Maintain Relationships. Right-click the
geometry, and then select Convert. This converts the rectangle into four lines and the correct
connection relationships are created at the corners.

Constraints
Use relationships and dimensions to constrain geometry to reference structure. This keeps the
geometry properly related to the reference structure if the reference structure changes.
Keep relationships and dimensions as simple as possible. This allows the geometry the best
chance to update if the reference structure changes.

Connections
Connection relationships are required for the software to create connected geometry.
Do not create a connection between the corner of the sketched geometry, and the corner of the
bounding object. Instead, move the constraint slightly off the corner.
Good: All endpoints of opening are connected.

Bad: Missing connection at one corner causes the creation of the opening to fail.

Molded Forms User's Guide 69


Molded Forms Workflow

Good: All endpoints of extrusion curve are connected.

Bad: Missing connection on extrusion curve.

Plate system is missing part of the curve.

Extending sketch geometry to intersect bounding structure


Extend sketch geometry beyond bounding reference structure geometry to ensure that the
sketch geometry intersects the reference structure at all locations.
Good:

Molded Forms User's Guide 70


Molded Forms Workflow

Extrusion curve extends beyond the hull. Bracket boundary curve extends
beyond the top flange and the
bottom of the bottom flange.

Bad:

Overlapping sketch geometry for boundary curves


A boundary curve with all geometry connected is treated as one edge in the Graphics View. You
may sometimes want parts of the curve to be treated as separate edges at sharp discontinuities
such as corners. This allows you to add edge reinforcements in the Molded Forms task or edge
treatments in the Structural Detailing task to part of the boundary curve without defining
additional boundaries. In order to separate the boundary curve into separate edges, overlap the
boundary curve geometry instead of connecting it at the corners:

Molded Forms User's Guide 71


Molded Forms Workflow

Creating boundary curves on the thickness side of a plate


If your plate boundaries include a plate system with the thickness direction towards the plate that
you are creating, a profile mounted to the bounding plate system and a sketched boundary, and
then the boundary curve must intersect both the profile system and profile part.
In the following example:
 The solid blue line is the molded surface of the bounding plate system.
 The dashed blue line is the thickness direction for the bounding plate part.
 The dashed gray profile outline is the bounding profile system mounted to the bounding plate
system at the molded surface (on the No_Constrained_Elements layer).
 The dashed blue profile outline is the bounding profile part mounted to the thickened
bounding plate part.
 The solid black line is the intended boundary curve intersecting the profile part.
 The solid red line is the required adjustment to the boundary curve, passing through both the
profile part and profile system, and intersecting the profile system.

The black line is the intended boundary curve. It can be constrained to the dashed blue profile
part using relationships and dimensions. The red lines are additional geometry that must connect
to the black boundary curve, pass through the profile part geometry, and intersect the dashed
grey profile system geometry.

Arcs in boundary curves


If a boundary curve ends with a circular or elliptical arc, you must add a line segment pointing
away from the direction of the arc. This prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve as the curve is calculated.
In the following example, the black curves are the intended boundary curve. The red line is the
extension to the boundary curve that prevents the arc from extending back onto the boundary
curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 72


Molded Forms Workflow

Multiple curves
Do not create a close boundary curve contour that overlaps trimming input geometry. Instead,
draw two separate curves. In the following example, there are two separate curves, one for
corner feature and one for diagonal boundary.

1 - Corner feature curve


2 - Diagonal boundary curve

Associative offsets
The Associative Offset command allows you to create a curve based on an existing curve, and
place the new curve at a specified offset. To use this command, you must add it to a toolbar.
1. Right-click an existing toolbar, and click Toolbars.
2. Click Customize on the Toolbars dialog box.
3. Click Manipulation on the Categories list.
4. Drag the Associative Offset icon from the Buttons list to an existing toolbar.
For more information on the Associative Offset command see the Associative Offset
Command topics in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor help file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 73


Molded Forms Workflow

Split Best Practices


Execute Split divides large plate and profile systems into smaller subsystems. The systems
can be split by intersection and design seams. Execute Split automatically creates intersection
seam at the intersection of two objects. Use the following best practices when working with the
command. For more information, see Execute Split (on page 891).

Continuities and priorities


After you place a plate or a profile, specify continuity and priority before splitting.
1. Select plate or profile system. You can select more than one system if they are to have the
same continuity and priority.

2. Click Properties on the ribbon bar.


3. On the Main tab, specify Continuity and Priority.
4. Click OK.
Continuity defines how the object reacts when it intersects another object. Select Continuous to
indicate that the object penetrates the other object. Select Intercostal to indicate that the object
is penetrated by the other object.
Priority specifies which object is penetrated when two similar objects with the same continuity
value intersect. An object with a lower continuity priority (for example, 1, 2, or 3) penetrates other
object with a higher continuity priority (for example, 7, 8, or 9).

Design seams
Split intercostal structure with continuous structure before placing design seams on the
intercostal structure. For best performance, create all design seams, and then execute split
before detailing for best performance.

Review the Split List


Each object by default is set as a split (intercostal) or splitter (continuous) object based on the
continuity and priority properties you specify.

Molded Forms User's Guide 74


Molded Forms Workflow

1. If a row in the split list is highlighted in red, there is ambiguity in the split-splitter relationship.
Modify the continuity and priority properties of the objects as needed.
2. Click Invert to swap split and splitter objects.
3. Click Finish after reviewing the list.
Split the objects in batches rather splitting entire objects at the same time. Splitting
early and often reduces the computation time.

Splitting late in design


When modifying or creating a split after detailing, many parts are affected. In this case, use the
following workflow:
1. Turn on Delay Struct Detailing
a. Go to Tools > Delay Settings.
b. On the Delay Setting tab, select Delay Struct Detailing.
c. Click Apply, and close the dialog box.
2. Split
a. Select the objects to split or a split to modify.

b. Click Execute Split .


c. Review the split list as needed, and then click Finish.
3. Turn off Delay Struct Detailing
a. Go to Tools > Delay Settings.
b. On the Delay Setting tab, clear Delay Struct Detailing.
c. Click Apply.
4. Update
a. On the Update To Do Records tab, click Update Objects.
b. Click OK to close the dialog box.

Un-Split
Use Un-split command to remove a split. You can use the seam that caused the split again at a
later time.
1. Select Tools > Un-Split from the menu.

2. Click Select on the ribbon.


3. Select the seam that caused the split to undo.
4. Click Un-Split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 75


Molded Forms Workflow

Plane Methods
You must often define planes used for object surfaces and sketching planes. Usually, but not
necessarily, these planes are based from an existing plate or from a grid or reference plane
created using the Grids task. The following methods define planes:
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.
Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

What do you want to do?


 Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
 Define an offset plane (on page 77)
 Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
 Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
 Move a defined plane (on page 80)

Define a coincident plane


1. Click Offset from a Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar
plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays
at the plane's center.

Molded Forms User's Guide 76


Molded Forms Workflow

3. Check that Offset Lock is locked and that the Offset value is 0.

 You create reference planes in the Grids task by selecting Ship in the Grid Type box of the
Grid Wizard. For this plane method, you can select reference planes in the Workspace
Explorer or in a graphic view.

 You create grid planes in the Grids task by selecting Grids in the Grid Type box of the Grid
Wizard. For this plane method, you can best select grid planes in the Workspace Explorer.

 For more information, see Create Coordinate System (Grid Wizard) in the Grids User's
Guide.

Define an offset plane


1. Click Offset from a Plane .
2. In the model or Workspace Explorer, select the base plane from which to offset the new
plane. The base plane can be a reference plane, a grid plane, or a planar plate system.
A preview of the selected plane displays. The local coordinate system of the plane displays
at the plane's center.

3. In the Offset box, type the offset distance from the plane and press TAB.
The plane moves to the new location.
-OR-
4. Graphically define the offset:

Molded Forms User's Guide 77


Molded Forms Workflow

a. Click Offset Lock .

The option changes to unlocked .


b. Move the pointer to the required location and click.

The plane and plane coordinate system move to the new location, Offset Lock
changes to locked , and the offset value displays in the Offset box.
c. If an adjustment to the offset is needed, type a new value in the Offset box.
5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane (on page
80).

 You can graphically define the offset with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For more
information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.
 By moving the pointer back and forth over the base plane in the graphic view, you can
change the offset direction. You can also change the direction by changing the sign in the
Offset box.
 When Offset Lock is set to locked , the Offset value does not change when the pointer
moves.

Define a plane using a point and a normal vector


1. Click Plane by Point and Vector .
2. Select a vector in the model that is normal to the required plane. The vector can be any
linear geometry that is part of the construction of a model object, such as a plate system
edge or a profile system landing curve. Use QuickPick to select a line geometry element.

3. Click the Line geometry element.


The selected geometry highlights in yellow.

Molded Forms User's Guide 78


Molded Forms Workflow

4. Move the cursor to a point that is on the required plane, and then click.
A preview of the plane and its local U_V_N coordinate system displays. The plane is
coincident with the point and normal to the vector.

5. To move the plane independent of its previous definition, see Move a defined plane (on page
80).
You can graphically define the point with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For
more information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.

Define a plane using three points


1. Click Plane by Three Points .
2. Specify on the first point that defines the plane.

3. Specify the second point that defines the plane.

4. Specify the third point that defines the plane.

 You can define points on the surfaces, edges, and corners of systems and parts. You can
control the types of points by using Tools > Options. For more information, see SmartSketch
Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
 You can define points on grid planes, especially at intersections.

You can control the types of points using Tools > Options. For more information, see
SmartSketch Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
In Molded Forms, define parametric points by using Insert > Topological Points. For more
information, see Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323).

Molded Forms User's Guide 79


Molded Forms Workflow

Move a defined plane


1. Click Maintain Plane Relationships to disable relationships used to create the plane.
2. Click Move Plane .
The pointer changes to a plus symbol, and the origin point of the local U-V-N coordinate
system for the plane moves to the pointer.

3. Move the pointer to the required location, and then click.


The local U-V-N coordinate system and the plane display in the new location.

You can move the plane with the best precision by also using PinPoint. For more
information, see PinPoint in the Common User's Guide.

Boundary Methods
You must often define boundaries when creating plate systems, profiles, edge reinforcements,
and other objects. The common methods for defining boundaries are:

Pick Boundaries
Define boundaries by selecting them graphically either in a graphics view or in the
Workspace Explorer.
Pick Edges
This option is only available if you pick a plate as a boundary. Select the plate edges to use.
Click Pick Boundaries to exit the Pick Edges option and select other boundaries.

Boundary List
Define boundaries by selecting them from a list of potential boundaries. For more information,

Molded Forms User's Guide 80


Molded Forms Workflow

see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Define the boundary by drawing its shape.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.

What do you want to do?


 Pick boundaries (on page 81)
 Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 81)
 Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
 Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
 Rebound objects (on page 1391)

Pick boundaries
1. Click Pick Boundaries .
2. In a graphic view or Workspace Explorer, select an object or grid plane to use as a
boundary.
3. Continue selecting objects or grid planes until you have completed defining the boundaries
for the object.
To remove an object from the group of boundaries, select the object again.

Use the Boundary List dialog box


1. On the command ribbon, click Boundary List .
The Boundary List dialog box displays.
2. To remove a boundary, select the boundary in the list, and then click Remove .

3. To remove all boundaries, click Remove All .

4. To add a new boundary, click Add , and then select a boundary in the graphic view or in
the Workspace Explorer. You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value
in the Offset box or the Name box.
For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Molded Forms User's Guide 81


Molded Forms Workflow

Define a boundary curve


1. Select Boundary Curve .
2. Define the sketching plane for the curve.
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define plane using angle from plane
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
Define plane by vectors normal

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .


4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .


6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane and that you want to use
as reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and
appear in the 2D environment.
7. Select Auto to automatically add all related objects to the select set, if needed.

8. Click Sketch 2D .
The 2D environment appears.
9. In the 2D environment, sketch the boundary.
You can constrain the boundary to geometric construction points referenced from
profile cross-section key points or offset from plate systems. For more information, see Point
at Offset from Keypoint Command and Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
10. Click Finish in the 2D environment.
The 3D environment and the main command ribbon return.
Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment also removes it from the
Boundary List dialog box.

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries


The command switches to Solve Ambiguity automatically if an ambiguous solution exists
after clicking Accept or Finish. All possible solutions created by the selected boundaries
appear in the graphic view.
1. Move the pointer over a solution, and then click to select it.
2. Continue to select solutions until you have defined the entire bounded object. A correct
solution to ambiguity meets these conditions:
 Each solution must have a common edge with at least one other solution.
 Each boundary must be used by at least one solution.

Molded Forms User's Guide 82


Molded Forms Workflow

 To modify the ambiguous solution after creating an object, select Solve Ambiguity , and
select new solutions.
 To remove a previously-selected solution, select the solution again.
 Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a boundary
plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.

Boundary List Dialog Box


Displays the boundaries for the object that you are placing:
 Model objects, such as plate systems or profile systems.
 Reference planes and other plane definitions.

 Sketched boundary curves created using the Sketch 2D option on a supported ribbon.
Boundary curves are prefixed with SketchGroup_.
 A standalone plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation when a boundary was
not included in the operation. You usually want to replace the standalone plane with a new
boundary.

Open this dialog box by clicking Boundary List on the command ribbon during the boundary
definition step.
Preview Type
You can press ARROW DOWN and ARROW UP to step through the boundary list. Each
selected boundary highlights in the graphic view according to the selected preview type.
Tools > Options defines the Highlight color. For more information, see Colors Tab (Options
Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
In the following examples, two plate systems, a reference plane, and a sketched boundary
are the selected boundaries of the vertical plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 83


Molded Forms Workflow

Bounding Objects - Highlights the selected boundary object as an outline. Reference


planes display as translucent shaded planes.

Bounding Geometry - Highlights the internal boundary geometry used by the software. The
internal geometry is typically an unlimited length line for model objects and reference plane
boundaries.

Molded Forms User's Guide 84


Molded Forms Workflow

Edges - Highlights edges of the bounded object where the bounded object intersects with the
selected boundary.

For Bounding Objects and Bounding Geometry, the complete sketched


boundary curve geometry displays as drawn in Sketch 2D , as shown in the following
example.

Add
Specifies a new boundary. You can select a boundary in the graphic view or the Workspace
Explorer.

 You can also type the boundary name and an optional offset value in the Name box or
the Offset box, and then press TAB or ENTER.
 Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
Remove
Removes the selected boundary from the list.
Deleting a boundary curve from the 2D environment (Sketch 2D on the main
command ribbon) also removes it from the Boundary List dialog box.

Clear All
Removes all boundaries from the list.

Molded Forms User's Guide 85


Molded Forms Workflow

/ Disconnect
Removes the relationships of a boundary to its definition method. When you disconnect a
boundary, it becomes a standalone plane. This option is active by default for a standalone
plane created during a copy, move, or mirror operation.
After disconnecting a boundary, you must select a replacement boundary in the
graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.

Extend Sketch Boundary in Graphic View


Extends a sketched boundary to a point in space or to another element selected in the
graphic view. This option is available when you select a sketched boundary (with a name
prefixed with SketchGroup_).
Name
Specifies the name of a boundary.
Offset
Specifies an offset distance from the boundary. You can type the following formats for offset
values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m
Invalid text displays with a gray background in the Name box or the Offset box.
Apply
Displays a preview of the boundaries in the graphic view.
Gaps between boundaries display with a glyph.

The glyph uses the Handle color defined in Tools > Options. For more information, see
Colors Tab (Options Dialog Box) in the Common User's Guide.
OK
Closes the dialog box and saves the boundary changes.
To cancel boundary changes, you must click OK and then exit the parent
command without clicking Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 86


Molded Forms Workflow

Landing Curve Methods


You must often create landing curves when creating profile systems and seams by projection.
Landing curves are sometimes based on existing grid planes created with the Grids task. There
are two methods for defining the landing curve:

Define using 2D Sketcher


Defines a landing curve by projecting a 2D curve that is sketched onto the plate systems.
Landing Curve Definition by 3D
Defines a 3D geometric construction landing curve by creating a curve through a set of points,
a set of curves on the plate system, or a surface intersecting the plate system. For more
information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).

Landing Curve Best Practices (on page 56)

What do you want to do?


 Define landing curve by 2D (on page 87)
 Define landing curve by 3D (on page 88)

Define landing curve by 2D


1. Click Define using 2D Sketcher .
2. Define a sketching plane using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .


4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .


6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. Sketch the 2D stiffener profile landing curve that you want the software to project onto the
plate system that you are stiffening. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on
page 65).
You can constrain the landing curve to geometric construction points offset from
plate systems. For more information, see Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
9. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 87


Molded Forms Workflow

Define landing curve by 3D


You can create the landing curve by using a variety of macros available in the
Geometric Construction Palette dialog box. The following procedure provides an example.
1. On the Stiffener Profile System by Projection ribbon, click Landing Curve Definition by
3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon display.
2. In the Points tab of the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, select a point macro,
and create the needed geometric construction points.
3. Click Continue.
The Geometric Construction Explorer shows a list of points.
4. In the Curves tab, select the CurveByPointsOnSurface macro, and create the curve.
5. Click Continue.
The curve is added to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
6. Click Close.

Profile Orientation
You must often define the orientation of stiffener profiles. A profile has a linear or twisted
orientation and can be divided into multiple regions, each having a different orientation. The
following options are available to define profile orientation:
Rule Region Definition
Defines regions along the profile landing curve. Each region of the landing curve can have a
different orientation rule assigned to it. The software initially defines a region boundary point
at the profile boundaries. You cannot delete or modify the software-defined region boundary
points. You can define and modify additional region boundary along the profile landing curve
using grid/reference planes, plate design seams, and plate planning seams.

Orientation Rule Assignment


Opens a list of orientation rules from which you can select. These rules include:
 Normal - The web of the profile follows the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve. This is the default setting if the profile parent is a plate system.
 Up-Down - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in an up-down
direction. For example, you can select Up-Down for profiles on a deck.
 Fore-Aft - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in a fore-aft
direction. For example, you can select Fore-Aft for profiles on a transverse frame.
 Port-Starboard - The orientation vector of the profile cross- section remains in a
port-starboard direction. For example, you can select Port-Starboard for longitudinal
stringer profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 88


Molded Forms Workflow

 Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to a reference plane that
you specify.

 Angle - Type the angle for the plane.


 Reference - Select the reference plane from which to measure the angle. You can
select Normal, Up-Down (horizontal), Fore-Aft (longitudinal) or Port-Starboard
(transverse). Normal reference plane is the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve and is available for any profile orientation. Up-Down, Fore-Aft or
Port-Starboard are available as is appropriate for the direction of the landing curve.
 Plane - Select the plane in which to measure the angle. For Normal Reference, this
option is unavailable because the angle is always measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. For Up-Down or Port-Starboard Reference, you can select Normal
or Orthogonal. If Normal is selected, the angle is measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. Orthogonal is the transverse, longitudinal or horizontal plane closest
to the landing curve normal. If Orthogonal is selected, the software selects the
orthogonal plane based on average direction of the landing curve.
Twist Linear Girth
Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the profile region, based on the difference
between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the region. The twist rate
is constant.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Cubic
Twist is distributed using a cubic equation along the girth length of the profile region, based
on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the
region. The twist rate at the ends is zero. The twist rate reaches its maximum at the midpoint.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 89


Molded Forms Workflow

 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Linear Ortho
Twist is constant at every frame along the orthogonal projection length of the profile region,
based on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of
the region. The software uses the Main_CS frame system if it exists. Otherwise, the software
uses the CS_0 frame system.

 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Profile System Table


Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles and twist rates of the
current profile.
See Also
Molded Forms Workflow (on page 28)

Molded Forms User's Guide 90


Molded Forms Workflow

Center of Buoyancy
The center of buoyancy of an object is located at the center of the volume of the liquid that the
object displaces. It is the point through which the upward buoyant force acts.
The following diagram shows a rectangular form floating in water. The center of gravity (point 1)
is at the geometric center of the shape. The center of buoyancy (point 2) is at the center of the
volume of the displaced water.

1 - Center of Gravity
2 - Center of Buoyancy

For a ship, there is no single center of buoyancy value. Rather, there is a center of buoyancy for
every floating position of the ship. This includes both non-heeled and heeled conditions up to and
including the design draft (the maximum submerged floating position). Normally, calculations are
done for a range of drafts at the 0° heeled state. These are reported in a tabular form or depicted
graphically on a drawing along with other computed values. The collection of these values is
commonly referred to as Hydrostatics.
Smart 3D does not directly calculate the center of buoyancy. The data used to compute the
center of buoyancy of a ship is provided by the hull plate system. Because a ship is designed to
meet conditions of performance (speed, carrying capacity, and so on) the hull form shape is
usually developed before the three-dimensional model is started. Usually, the three-dimensional
model is built based on preliminary hull designs.
Smart 3D allows you to use the third-party hull design tool that best meets your needs to create
this preliminary design. You can then import that hull form as either an Initial Graphics Exchange
Standard (IGES) file or a Standard ACIS Text (SAT) file. For more information, see Import ACIS
(File Menu) (on page 1216) and Import IGES (File Menu) (on page 1216).
For floating offshore structures, there may be multiple hull plate systems, such as the pontoons
and columns on semi-submersibles.
The tubular legs and braces of offshore jacket structures can be treated as hulls for floating
calculations after the jacket is launched and positioned and before it is flooded. In these cases,
you must know which structural objects are designed to be watertight and which are not. Smart
3D allows you to set properties on plate systems to indicate their tightness.
Smart 3D allows you to query structural system objects in the model database for the type (such
as hull, deck, transverse bulkhead, longitudinal bulkhead, tube, and so on) as well as for their
tightness (such as watertight, non-tight, weather tight, airtight, and so on). Such a query helps to
identify which objects contribute to determining a center of buoyancy. These objects must be
defined by the designer creating the model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 91


Molded Forms Workflow

You must know what objects contribute to the floating position, the density of the fluid (salt or
fresh water), the weight and center of gravity, and which objects are going to produce buoyant
forces before you can calculate the center of buoyancy.
Calculations of this nature, and use of the computed data, are very specialized. They are done by
professionals and experts in the field of naval architecture. Thicknesses of the structural
members, such as pipes and tubes, have one volume when they are not flooded (volume of outer
diameter) and another when they are flooded (volume of inner diameter). Submerged objects
must take into account the volume of the structure itself because the net volume is what
determines the actual buoyancy. Intergraph assumes no liability for use of data from Smart 3D for
this purpose.
The three-dimensional model is built from early designs and it is rare to take a 3D model and try
to compute these values. Intergraph recommends that you contact the group or company that
was responsible for the design to get this type of data.

Minimum Distance
Minimum height or distances are maintained for plate systems with sketched boundaries and
mother curves, profiles by projection, seams by projections, sketched openings, and stand-alone
plate parts with sketched boundaries.
Minimum distances for sketched openings on plate systems are not supported.
The software maintains the minimum height when the plate part is detailed in the Structural
Detailing task. For example, if the sketched boundary is on the molded side of the bounding plate,
then the minimum distance is maintained.

If the sketched boundary is on the thickness side of the bounding plate, then the sketched
boundary is adjusted to compensate for thickness. For example, if the sketch is constrained to
the molded side, the results are as follows:

If the sketch is adjusted to the near side, the results would be as follows:

Molded Forms User's Guide 92


Molded Forms Workflow

If the plate thickness is different along the length of the bounded plate, the minimum distance is
applied using the plate thickness where the sketched boundary crosses the plate system. The
results are as follows:

If the plate is defined with a sketched boundary that is not normal to the bounding plate, then the
software addresses any long point - short point issues. The minimum distance is maintained on
the shortest side, either the molded or anti- molded side.

In non-planar cases, the minimum distance is maintained measured along the plate surface
instead of in the sketch plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 93


Molded Forms Workflow

In cases where the sketched boundaries are constrained with several dimensions, the results are
as follows:

In cases where there is a sketched plate boundary plate bounded by a profile, the software
resolves the long point - short point issues.

If there is a profile section size difference, the software maintains minimum dimensions where the
sketched boundary crosses the profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 94


Molded Forms Workflow

The following illustrations depict typical examples where minimum heights are maintained for
sketched or symbolic tripping brackets. In these examples, A equals the base object thickness.

Minimum distance is controlled by a combination of Sketch2D and the symbol


definition. You can identify dimensions that reflect minimum distances by adding graphic inputs in
the symbol file. When the software finds these inputs in the symbol, then the software makes the
necessary adjustments to ensure that the dimensions are maintained regardless of the supports
thickness direction. For more information, see 2D Symbols User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 95


SECTION 3

Placing Plate Systems


The Molded Forms task provides different groups of commands to create and represent single or
multiple surfaces for plate systems. Also, you can represent and store imported surfaces. These
commands start when you click the appropriate command icon on the vertical toolbar on the left
side of the screen.

When you create any plate system, the first step is to use the Properties option to confirm the
default attributes or define new values. Examples of attributes for a plate system include its name,
category, molded conventions, its parent plate system, material properties, material thickness,
tightness, and continuity.
The next step is defining the surface geometry of the plate system. You then define topological
boundaries of the plate system by selecting objects in the three-dimensional workspace,
selecting objects from the Workspace Explorer, or selecting objects from a list of potential
bounding objects. For more information, see Plate System Boundaries (on page 98).

 When a plate system is created, a plate part is also created. Plate parts are detailed in the
Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the Structural
Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified. For more information, see Plate
Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 125).
 Minimum height or distances are maintained by the software for objects that use Sketch 2D,
such as plate systems with sketched boundaries and mother curves, and standalone plate
parts with sketched boundaries. For more information, see Minimum Distance (on page 92).
 When you create or edit a plate system or a stand-alone plate part, the dialog box title
displays the plate system name using the format [Plate System: <name of the plate
system>], as shown below.

Copying Plate and Profile Systems


When you copy, move, or mirror systems (including through Model Data Reuse and Model Data
Transform operations in the Project Management task) without including a boundary in the copy
(by selecting Edit > Paste > Delete Optional), the software replaces the boundary with a
standalone boundary. This prevents the plate system from going to the To Do List. After the
copy, you can replace the standalone boundary with a new boundary by using Tools >
Automatic Reconnect.
If the original boundary was detailed, Delete Optional also deletes the physical connection
between the plate system and the boundary. For the copied plate system, if you replace the

Molded Forms User's Guide 96


Placing Plate Systems

standalone boundary with a new detailed boundary, then the software creates a new physical
connection.
For more information, see:
 Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu) (on page 1388)
 Move, Mirror Copy, and Paste Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide
 Model Data Reuse (MDR) in the Project Management User's Guide
 Model Data Transform (MDT) in the Project Management User's Guide

Select - Used to select objects in the model. For more information, see Selecting
Objects (on page 40).

Planar Plate System - Places a planar plate system. For more information, see Planar
Plate System (on page 99).

Imported Plate System - Imports an ACIS or IGES file into the model. The file is used
to create a plate system, typically a complex, non-planar system such as a ship hull.
For more information, see Imported Plate System (on page 130).

Linear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve normal to
the sketching plane. For more information, see Linear Extruded Plate System (on page
156).

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System - Extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve along a
linear or nonlinear curve that you specify. For more information, see Nonlinear
Extruded Plate System (on page 180).

Revolved Plate System - Places a plate system by rotating a curve around an axis.
For more information, see Revolved Plate System (on page 205).

Bracket Plate System - Creates a bracket plate system oriented by a plane or by its
supports. For more information, see Bracket Plate System (on page 227).

Advanced Plate System - Creates specialized plate systems such as side plates, ring
plates, transition plates, continuity plates, and buckling plates. For more information,
see Advanced Plate System (on page 275).

Child Plate System - Creates a plate system that is a child to and in the same plane
as another plate system. For more information, see Child Plate System (on page 426).

Ruled Plate System - Creates a plate system that is interpolated between two
non-planar curves. For more information, see Ruled Plate System (on page 449).

Molded Forms User's Guide 97


Placing Plate Systems

Plate System Boundaries


You can select any of the following as boundaries for plate systems:
 Plate systems.
 Profile systems such as stiffeners, beams, or edge reinforcements. A plate can be bound to
the webs and flanges of profile systems.
 Standard members created in the Structure task. A plate can be bound to the webs and
flanges of members.
 Built-up members, but only when the web or flange plate systems of the built-up are selected.
 Sketched boundary curves.

Sketching Limitations
Sketched curves must extend beyond other bounding objects. In this example, the curve for a
linear extruded deck extends beyond the hull boundary:

In this example, the bracket boundary curve extends beyond the top and bottom flanges:

Bounding and Splitting


A profile or member cannot be used to both bound and split a plate at the same time. In the
following example, the two plates can be created in two different ways:

Molded Forms User's Guide 98


Placing Plate Systems

1. The plates are created separately, each using both members and a sketched line as
boundaries.
2. A single plate is created using the horizontal member and two sketched lines as boundaries.
After creation, the plate can then be split by the vertical member.

Planar Plate System


The Planar Plate System command creates planar plate systems. These plate systems are
generally used to represent decks, sides of the deck house, transverse bulkheads, and
longitudinal bulkheads, but are not limited to just those uses.

Creating a plate system involves three steps. First, define the plane of the plate system. Finally,
define topological boundaries of the plate system. Then, use the Properties command to
define attributes and defaults for the plate system. You can define the topological boundaries by
selecting objects in a view, selecting objects from the Workspace Explorer, or selecting objects
from a list of potential bounding objects.

Using Planar Plate Systems with Members


If a planar plate system is inserted along the length of a standard or built-up member, such as on
the flange, the needed penetration logical connections, splits, and slot on the flange are not
created automatically. You must then use Manual Split to create connections and splits and
Execute Detailing to detail the plate and create the flange slot. The preferred method is to
use Advanced Plate System , which automatically creates all needed connections, splits,
and the flange slot. For more information, see Advanced Plate System (on page 275).

Planar Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place the planar plate system in the model.

Plate System Properties


Opens the Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate
system properties default from the selected structural specification. For more information,
see Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 106).

Molded Forms User's Guide 99


Placing Plate Systems

Define Plane
Specifies the reference plane of the plate system. You can select multiple planes to place
multiple plate systems at the same time. The software uses the same boundaries for each
plane and places the plate systems. After placement, the plate systems are unrelated to each
other and can be edited as individual entities unless boundaries are defined as boundary
curves. If so, then a single curve is related to all of the plate systems. See the Define Plane
Controls section below.

Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including structural members, in the model or by sketching boundary
curves. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the plate system to maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define
Boundary Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,


then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 100


Placing Plate Systems

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the Define Plane or Boundary Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 101


Placing Plate Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 102


Placing Plate Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).

Molded Forms User's Guide 103


Placing Plate Systems

Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?


 Place a planar plate system (on page 104)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a planar plate system


1. Click Planar Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Click Define Plane .
3. Specify the plane for the plate system using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
4. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)

5. Click Define Boundaries .


6. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
7. Set the remaining plate system properties.
8. Click Finish.

Modify a plate system


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the plate system to modify.
The plate system ribbon appears.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the plate system as needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 104


Placing Plate Systems

 You cannot change the defining surface definition for plate systems that were created for a
built-up member.
 You cannot delete individual plates from a built-up member.
 If you select a plate that is part of a built-up member, some of the boxes on the Properties
dialog box are read-only.
 If the plate system is constrained to geometric construction points, you can modify the points.
A separate ribbon displays for the points. For more information, see Points (Geometric
Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028).

Move a plate system to a different system in the model


hierarchy
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Locate Filter, select Molded Forms (Root Level).
3. Select one or more root plate systems to move.
The plate system ribbon appears.

 Select only the root plate system to move. The root plate system is not moved if any of its
children in the hierarchy are also selected.
 If you are selecting more than one root plate system, use CTRL+click to select only the
root systems.
4. In the Select Parent box, select a new system. If the needed system is not available, click
More to open the Select System dialog box.
If an invalid system, such as another root plate system, is selected, an
error message displays and the plate system is not moved.
5. Click Finish.
The root plate system and its children move to the new system in the Workspace Explorer.

 Children of a root plate system (such as leaf plate systems and parts, profile systems and
parts, openings, seams, and connections) always move with the root plate system.
 Children cannot be selected and moved out of the root plate system hierarchy.
 Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task, or with the New System
command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide, or New
System in the Common User's Guide.
 Root plate systems can also be moved in the Common task. The workflow and restrictions
are similar, except that the system moves after making a selection in the Select Parent box
because Finish is not available in the Common task.

Molded Forms User's Guide 105


Placing Plate Systems

Delete a plate system


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the plate system to delete.
4. Click Delete .
You cannot delete individual plates from a built-up member.

Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 107)
Material Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 109)
Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 110)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Molded Forms User's Guide 106


Placing Plate Systems

Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the planar plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to

Molded Forms User's Guide 107


Placing Plate Systems

Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 108


Placing Plate Systems

Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.


Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 109


Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the plate system.
All profile orientation properties can only be modified at the root system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Molded Forms User's Guide 110


Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 111


Placing Plate Systems

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 112


Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 113


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 114


Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 115


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 116


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 117


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 118


Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 119


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 120


Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Molded Forms User's Guide 121


Placing Plate Systems

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:

Molded Forms User's Guide 122


Placing Plate Systems

 Are on the plate of a designed tube member


 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Relationship Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, appear on this tab.

Molded Forms User's Guide 123


Placing Plate Systems

Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:


 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object. To change the options on the list, edit the Weld Type select list
in Catalog.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.
Plant
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the filters and surface style rules.
Approval State
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your
access level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by
the ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 124


Placing Plate Systems

ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date when the object was last modified.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

General Tab
The General tab displays the properties that were selected by you or automatically determined
by the software at creation. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
The properties displayed duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. You can
edit the properties on these tabs.

Plate Part Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the plate part that you are editing.
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)
Routing Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the plate part.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object.
PlatePartRule - Creates a name based on the parent root plate system name, the location
within the parent root plate system, and the parent assembly name.
User Defined - Name the plate part yourself by using the appropriate box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 125


Placing Plate Systems

Type
Displays the type of the plate part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the object.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Specification
Specifies the specification for the object. This property is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
Tightness
Specifies the water tightness of the object. It is inherited from the parent system.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 126


Placing Plate Systems

Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the material properties for the plate part that you are editing. The material properties are
inherited from the parent system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Actual Thickness
Displays the material thickness for the object.

General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies general properties of the plate part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.

Category: Standard
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125).
PlateTightness
Specifies the water tightness of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateTightness
codelist.
PlateType
Specifies the type of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateType codelist.
Thickening Technique Requested
Specifies the technique requested to thicken the plate part.
This property affects only the behavior of plate parts derived from systems. The property
defaults to Procedural at creation. Changing the value of this property can affect the
geometry of the part as described below.
Standalone plate parts initially display nothing for this property. You can change the value,
but those changes do not change the part or its geometry. Smart 3D thickens all standalone
plate parts, including collars, using procedural thickening.
Undefined (blank) indicates that Smart 3D selects the appropriate technique. Smart 3D
automatically changes this value to Procedural.
Procedural indicates the part is thickened using the standard thickening method provided by
the ACIS modeler. This works for the vast majority of parts, and you should not change this
value unless there is a specific reason to try a different technique.
If the thickening fails using ACIS, and the part is a hull part, the software
automatically tries the NonProcedural thickening technique. This option only controls which
method the software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used

Molded Forms User's Guide 127


Placing Plate Systems

from the Thickening Technique Used property.


Procedural with slit is used for parts that have internal slits or discontinuities in the surface
of the system that form part of the boundary of parts on the system. The currently-supported
example of this is a surface with a combination of split and bent knuckles joined end to end.
Because Smart 3D does not support splitting knuckles and changing the properties of
different segments, these surface must be constructed with the correct geometry to reflect
the bent and split portions. Parts that are bounded by the slit, and potentially parts on the
system that are within half a meter of the slit, must have this value set to assure a proper trim.
Setting this attribute on parts that do not need it should not cause a failure but may cause the
part to take more time to detail. The following pictures show an example of this type of
surface, first the full surface and then a close-up in the region of the slit or discontinuity.
The plate system in these pictures is split into three parts by the knuckle (shown as white)
and the two black seams. You must be sure that a single part does not touch both sides of
the slit.

NonProcedural is an infrequently used option. Historically, a much higher percentage of


parts failed to thicken with the ACIS modeler, and many designers used a specific hull form
definition tool that produced a surface with very specific characteristics. NonProcedural
thickening provided a tool that would thicken almost any part on this type of surface, even if
the ACIS modeler failed. The ACIS modeler has improved greatly, and the NonProcedural
thickening method has not been enhanced to handle the surfaces produced by many of the
hull form tools currently in use. Setting this option may solve a failure-to-thicken problem on a
hull part.
If NonProcedural thickening fails for a hull shell part, Smart 3D automatically tries
to thicken the part using Procedural thickening. This option only controls which method the
software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used from the
Thickening Technique Used property.
Thickening Technique Used
Displays the technique used to thicken the plate part. This is blank for a standalone plate part,
although Procedural is always used for these parts. It displays one of the values defined for
Thickening Technique Requested for a system-derived part. The meaning for these values
is the same as defined for Thickening Technique Requested.

Molded Forms User's Guide 128


Placing Plate Systems

Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all available
values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically Vertical Drop,
Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.

Weight & CG Tab


Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the part.
Type
Displays the type of weight: Dry Weight or Wet Weight.
Weight
Displays the weight of the plate part pertaining to the weight type.
CoG X
Displays the position of center of gravity along the X-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Y
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Y-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Z
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Z-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use to measure the center of gravity.

Extended User Attributes Tab


Displays the user attributes that have been bulkloaded on the report data object related to the
part. Changes to these attributes do not cause the related manufacturing part to go out-of-date.
The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value
appears on the right side of the grid.

Routing Tab
Specifies routing properties for the part. By default, no routing properties are set.
Create
Sets routing properties for the part.
Delete
Deletes the routing properties for the part.

Molded Forms User's Guide 129


Placing Plate Systems

Rule
Specifies a predefined rule set or a user-defined rule that is applicable to the part.
Workcenter
Select an assembly workcenter where the part is produced from a facility-defined rule set.
The list contains all available workcenters regardless of their level in the workcenter
hierarchy. Examples of workcenters include docks, shops, bays, and panel lines.
Workcenters may also be areas and zones where a block is assembled from multiple
assemblies.
Stage Code
Specifies the workcenter code.
No. Of Actions
Specifies the number of actions required to produce the part.
Action
Specifies the name of the action.
Machine
Specifies the type of machine used to perform the required operation.
Code
Specifies the machine code.

Imported Plate System


Imports an ACIS or IGES file into the model. The file is typically created using third-party
applications such as Napa, Rhino, or TID. If the file represents a hull form, it can contain naval
architecture reference curves.

Reference Curves
The software displays these curves as part of the plate system surface. The curves are also
named, typed, and categorized, allowing you to query for a curve or select the curve and use it as
a reference just like any other curve. You can modify the properties of reference curves, such as
the name and type. You cannot modify the geometry of a naval architecture reference curve in
the software. You must import a new file that contains the modified curve geometry.
The software supports the following ship curves that can be included as naval architecture
references curves in the imported file:
 Buttock_line - A curve lying on the molded surface of a hull that is the intersection of a
longitudinal plane with a hull molded form.

Molded Forms User's Guide 130


Placing Plate Systems

 Centerline - A curve lying on the molded surface of a hull that is the intersection of the
longitudinal center plane with the hull molded form.
 Flat_of_Bottom - The boundary curve of the bottom planar surface at the hull molded form
base.
 Flat_of_Side - The boundary curve of the side planar surface at the outer-most port or
starboard side of the hull molded form.
 Intersection_Line - A curve that is the intersection of two surfaces found on, or within, a
molded form.
 Station_Line - A curve lying on the hull molded surface that is the intersection of a
transverse plane with a hull molded form.
 Waterline - A curve lying on the hull molded surface that is the intersection of the water plane
with the hull molded form.
 Bounding_Line - Any bounding curve of a ship surface.
 Unspecified - A curve whose relation to naval architecture is not known or not recorded.
The software recognizes the following types of naval architecture reference curves:
 Knuckle Curves (KNU) - A 3D curve on the hull surface that exhibits tangent discontinuity
(knuckle constraint) of more than one degree anywhere along its curve geometry. Multiple
knuckle curves can occur and are given unique names. Knuckle reference curves support
rules that determine the production method (bend, split, or ignore) governing their treatment
and processing in the model.
 Tangent Curves (TAN) - A 3D curve on the hull surface that exhibits tangency constraint
when intersected by orthogonal curves (section, waterlines, and buttocks). Multiple tangent
curves can occur and are given unique names.
 Stem and Stern Profiles Curves (STM PROF and STR PROF) - The profile curves that
define the outline of the hull at the Y=0 position. It is usually split into two individual curves,
the Stem and Stern Profile. These two curves meet at amidships at Z=0. These curves are
unique to single hulls.
 Stem and Stern Half Siding Curves (HS STM and HS STR) - The stem and stern
half-siding curve is a 3D curve that defines the points at which waterline endings knuckle in to
the centerline of the hull (stem and stern profile). The resulting surface bounded by the
half-siding curve is a flat surface. These curves are unique to single hulls.
 Stem and Stern Tangent Curves (STM TAN, STR TAN) - The stem and stern tangent curve
is a 3D curve that defines the points at which waterline endings are tangential into a circular
or elliptical waterline ending. The resulting surface bounded by the tangent curve is a circular
or elliptical part cone. These curves are unique in single hulls.

Imported Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to import a .SAT or .IGS file into the model.

Imported Plate System Properties


Opens the Imported Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate
system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the selected
structural specification. For more information, see Imported Plate System Properties Dialog
Box (on page 137).

Molded Forms User's Guide 131


Placing Plate Systems

File Definition
Select the file to import. This option opens the Open Hull File dialog box.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,
then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls


These options are only available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a
boundary plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Select this option to pick free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available
if you selected a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple

Molded Forms User's Guide 132


Placing Plate Systems

bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.

Define Plane Controls


Only available when you use the Boundary Curve option.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.

Molded Forms User's Guide 133


Placing Plate Systems

Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 134


Placing Plate Systems

Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.


Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Mirror Surface
Mirrors the surface about the longitudinal centerline. This option is only available when you
are importing a plate from an .IGS file. You can use this option for a complete hull surface
when the IGES file defines only half of the hull. A preview for the hull is updated automatically
when you select or clear the option. The default value is not to mirror and is reset to this state
after you click Finish.

Mirror Reference Curves


Mirrors the reference curves about the longitudinal centerline. This option is only available
when you are importing a plate from an .IGS file. You can use this option for complete
reference curves when the IGES file defines only half of the hull. The default value is not to

Molded Forms User's Guide 135


Placing Plate Systems

mirror and is reset to this state after you click Finish.

What do you want to do?


 Import a plate system (on page 136)
 Swap hulls (on page 137)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Import a plate system


This workflow applies to all imported plates systems, including hulls.

1. On the Molded Forms vertical toolbar, click Imported Plate System .


2. Select the .SAT or .IGS file to import.
To show .IGS files in the file browser, you must select IGES files (*.igs) as the file
type.
3. Click Open.
4. If you are importing a hull from an .IGS file and the file defines only half of the hull, click
Mirror surface , Mirror reference curves , or both to import a complete hull.
By default, the two mirror options are disabled. A preview for the hull is updated
automatically when you click Mirror surface .
5. On the ribbon bar, select an appropriate plate type. For example, select Hull for a hull form.
6. Specify the properties for the imported plate system.
7. Define the boundaries for the imported plate system.
8. Click Finish.

 A complete hull form may not have boundaries.


 If you define an ambiguous boundary, you must provide more information by selecting
bounded areas that together compose the total bounded area.
 For a hull imported from IGES, an import log file and a .SAT file are automatically created in
the same folder as the source .IGS file. The surfaces and curves are automatically named
based on the data in the .IGS file directory, and all imported curves are set to Reference type.
You can modify the curve type of multiple curves by selecting the reference curves in the
Workspace Explorer and then clicking Reference Curve Properties .
 A minimum set of checks are performed on the data to ensure that it meets the criteria
necessary to successfully bound, trim, detail, and manufacture in the software. These checks
are the same as those available in the Geometry Analysis and Repair (GAR) task. If any of
the checks are not met, then the plate system is created, but it is added to the To Do List
with an appropriate error message. You must review the data in GAR, determine the cause of

Molded Forms User's Guide 136


Placing Plate Systems

the problem, and make needed corrections. The third-party tool used to create the geometry
might be needed to make the corrections.

Swap hulls
Follow this procedure only if you are very early in the design cycle with a model having a minimal
number of objects detailed in the Structural Detailing task. Otherwise, follow the procedure
described in Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay (on page 1396).

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the existing hull in the model.

4. On the ribbon, select File Definition .


5. Select the .SAT or .IGS file that contains the new hull to import.
To show .IGS files in the file browser, you must select IGES files (*.igs) as the file
type.
6. Click Open.
7. If you are importing a hull from an .IGS file and the file defines only half of the hull, click
Mirror surface , Mirror reference curves , or both to import a complete hull.
By default, the two mirror options are disabled. A preview for the hull is updated
automatically when you click Mirror surface
8. Click Finish.

Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf imported plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 137


Placing Plate Systems

 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 138)
Material Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 140)
Molded Conventions Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 141)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)
Delay Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 155)

Main Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the imported plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).

Molded Forms User's Guide 138


Placing Plate Systems

StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system


name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority

Molded Forms User's Guide 139


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the plate system that you are editing.

Molded Forms User's Guide 140


Placing Plate Systems

Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Imported Plate System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the plate system that you are editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 141


Placing Plate Systems

Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.

Molded Forms User's Guide 142


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 143


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 144


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 145


Placing Plate Systems

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 146


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset

Molded Forms User's Guide 147


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 148


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 149


Placing Plate Systems

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction

Molded Forms User's Guide 150


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 151


Placing Plate Systems

In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the

Molded Forms User's Guide 152


Placing Plate Systems

plate system to place the profiles.


With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for

Molded Forms User's Guide 153


Placing Plate Systems

designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 154


Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Delay Tab (Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies properties for delaying recalculation of the imported plate system that you are editing.

Delay Settings
Molded Forms Delay - Delays recalculation of Molded Forms objects. The objects are instead
added to the To Do List.
Plate Split Delay - Delays splitting of the plate system by seams.

Range Settings
User range of change - Restricts recalculation to one or more range boxes that you specify.
Type low and high values for X, Y, and Z in User Range to create a box.
System range of change - Restricts recalculation to a range box created by the software and
based on the X, Y, and Z differences between the old and new imported plate systems.

User Range
Low - Specifies the lowest value along a coordinate system axis. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
High - Specifies the highest value along a coordinate system axis. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
Modify - For a selected existing row in the Display Range grid, changes the Low and High
values to the new values.
Add - Adds a new row of Low and High values to the Display Range grid.
Display Range - Displays range boxes where recalculation is delayed. Each row in the grid
contains low and high coordinate values for a range box.
- Selects a row in the Display Range grid. When a row is selected, the range box displays in
a graphic view.
Clear All - Clears row selection in Display Range.
Select All - Selects all rows in Display Range.
Delete - Removes the selected row from Display Range.
Delete All - Removes all rows from Display Range.
OK - Accepts the values and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Rejects the values and closes the dialog box.
Apply - Accepts the values but does not close the dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 155


Placing Plate Systems

Linear Extruded Plate System


The Linear Extruded Plate System command extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve
normal to the sketching plane. You define the 2D curve that the software uses to define the plate
system surface geometry.

Use the Nonlinear Extruded Plate System command if you need the 2D curve to
follow a curved path instead of always being normal to the sketching plane. For more information,
see Nonlinear Extruded Plate System (on page 180).

Plate Knuckles
If the plate system has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve, the software creates a
plate knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the Workspace Explorer. For
more information, see Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page 931).

Linear Extruded Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to extrude a plate system along a linear extrusion curve in the
model.

Plate System Properties


Opens the Linear Extruded Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view
and modify the properties of the plate system. The initial plate system properties default from
the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the selected structural specification. For more
information, see Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 162).

Mother Curve Definition


Defines the sketching plane and the shape of the mother curve. See the Define Mother
Curve Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.

Define Boundaries
Specifies the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 156


Placing Plate Systems

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,


then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Mother Curve Controls


Available when you use the Mother Curve Definition option.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a

Molded Forms User's Guide 157


Placing Plate Systems

message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D

Molded Forms User's Guide 158


Placing Plate Systems

Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the Mother Curve Definition or Boundary Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane

Molded Forms User's Guide 159


Placing Plate Systems

Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube

Molded Forms User's Guide 160


Placing Plate Systems

Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.


If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?


 Place a linear extruded plate system (on page 161)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a linear extruded plate system


1. Click Linear Extruded Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the sketching plane for the mother curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

Molded Forms User's Guide 161


Placing Plate Systems

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .


4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .


6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the mother curve for the extruded plate system.
9. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

10. Click Define Boundaries .


11. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
12. Click Accept .
13. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
14. Set the remaining plate system properties.
15. Click Finish.

Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 162


Placing Plate Systems

 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 163)
Material Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Molded Conventions Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 166)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the linear extruded plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as

Molded Forms User's Guide 163


Placing Plate Systems

Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 164


Placing Plate Systems

Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 165


Placing Plate Systems

Material Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the material properties for the linear extruded plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System


Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the linear extruded plate system that
you are editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the

Molded Forms User's Guide 166


Placing Plate Systems

longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 167


Placing Plate Systems

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 168


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation

Molded Forms User's Guide 169


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 170


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Molded Forms User's Guide 171


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 172


Placing Plate Systems

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 173


Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 174


Placing Plate Systems

opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 175


Placing Plate Systems

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 176


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface

Molded Forms User's Guide 177


Placing Plate Systems

normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 178


Placing Plate Systems

opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 179


Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System


The Nonlinear Extruded Plate System command extrudes a plate system from a 2D curve
along a linear or nonlinear curve that you specify. The software uses the 2D curves to define the
plate system surface geometry.

Use the Linear Extruded Plate System command instead of this command if the
2D curve remains normal to the sketching plane. For more information, see Linear Extruded
Plate System (on page 156).

Plate Knuckles
If the plate system has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve, the software creates a
plate knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the Workspace Explorer. For
more information, see Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page 931).

Nonlinear Extruded Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to extrude a plate system along a non- linear extrusion curve in
the model.

Plate System Properties


Opens the Nonlinear Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
plate system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the
selected structural specification. For more information, see Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box (on page 187).

Extrusion Definition
Specify the path the mother curve is to follow. See the Define Curve Controls and Define
Plane Controls sections below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 180


Placing Plate Systems

Mother Curve Definition


Defines the sketching plane and the shape of the mother curve. See the Define Curve
Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.

` Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,
then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Curve Controls


Available when you use the Extrusion Definition and Mother Curve Definition options.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Molded Forms User's Guide 181


Placing Plate Systems

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a
boundary plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Select this option to pick free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available
if you selected a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple
bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.

Molded Forms User's Guide 182


Placing Plate Systems

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the Extrusion Definition, Mother Curve Definition or Boundary
Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable

Molded Forms User's Guide 183


Placing Plate Systems

options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 184


Placing Plate Systems

The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?


 Place a nonlinear extruded plate system (on page 185)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a nonlinear extruded plate system


1. Click Nonlinear Extruded Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the grid plane for the extruded curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .


4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .

Molded Forms User's Guide 185


Placing Plate Systems

6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the extruded curve.
Be sure to read Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).
9. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

10. Click Mother Curve Definition .


11. Specify the sketching plane for the mother curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

12. Click Add Intersecting Item .


13. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.
14. Click Add Projection Item .
15. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.
16. Click Sketch 2D .
17. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the mother curve for the extruded plate system.
18. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

19. Click Define Boundaries .


20. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
21. Click Accept .
22. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
23. Set the remaining plate system properties.
24. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 186


Placing Plate Systems

Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf nonlinear extruded plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 187)
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 190)
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 191)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the nonlinear extruded plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type

Molded Forms User's Guide 187


Placing Plate Systems

(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the

Molded Forms User's Guide 188


Placing Plate Systems

property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on

Molded Forms User's Guide 189


Placing Plate Systems

page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the nonlinear extruded plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 190


Placing Plate Systems

Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the nonlinear extruded plate system
that you are editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 191


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 192


Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 193


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 194


Placing Plate Systems

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 195


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 196


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 197


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Molded Forms User's Guide 198


Placing Plate Systems

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 199


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 200


Placing Plate Systems

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 201


Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 202


Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube

Molded Forms User's Guide 203


Placing Plate Systems

member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 204


Placing Plate Systems

Revolved Plate System


The Revolved Plate System command creates a plate system by rotating a curve around an
axis. You define the 2D curve that the software uses to define the plate system surface geometry
and the axis of revolution.

Revolved Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a rotated plate system in the model.

Plate System Properties


Opens the Revolved Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
plate system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the
selected structural specification. For more information, see Revolved Plate System
Properties Dialog Box (on page 210).

First Curve Definition


Defines the shape of the mother curve and the axis of rotation. See the Define Curve
Controls, Sketch 2D Command, and Define Plane Controls sections below.
Second Curve Definition
Defines the extent of the revolution for the mother curve about the axis of rotation. See the
Define Revolution Controls section below.

Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Plane Controls sections below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Curve Controls


Available when you use the First Curve Definition option.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Molded Forms User's Guide 205


Placing Plate Systems

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Sketch 2D Command
Axis of Rotation
Select a line element to designate as the axis of rotation. The line is green when selected.
This Axis of Rotation command is available only with the First Curve Definition option. It
displays on the Draw toolbar of the Sketch 2D environment.

Define Revolution Controls


Available when you use the Second Curve Definition option.

360° Revolution
Select to have the mother curve rotate 360 degrees around the axis of rotation.

Revolution Angle
Select to limit the mother curve rotation about the axis of rotation.
Angle
Type the angle for the mother curve to rotate about the axis of rotation. You must define the
direction by clicking the mouse button when the cursor is on the side in which to rotate. This
option is only available when the Revolution Angle option is selected.
Both Directions
Select to have the mother curve rotate both directions about the axis of rotation from the
sketching plane used to define the mother curve. The mother curve is rotated by the Angle
value in each direction.

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the First Curve Definition or Define Boundaries options.

Molded Forms User's Guide 206


Placing Plate Systems

Offset from Plane


Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.
Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available

Molded Forms User's Guide 207


Placing Plate Systems

when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.

Molded Forms User's Guide 208


Placing Plate Systems

Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?


 Place a revolved plate system (on page 209)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a revolved plate system


1. Click Revolved Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Specify the sketching plane for the curve and rotation axis using one of the following
methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

3. Click Add Intersecting Item .


4. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

5. Click Add Projection Item .


6. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Sketch 2D .
8. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the curve for the revolved plate system. This is the
curve that is to revolve around the axis.
9. Draw a straight line to represent the axis of rotation for the revolved plate system.

10. Select Axis of Rotation (located under the Select command in the Sketch 2D
environment), and then select the straight line that you drew for the axis of rotation. The
software changes the line color to green to indicate that it accepts the selected line as the
axis of rotation.
11. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.
12. Click Accept .
13. Specify the revolution angle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 209


Placing Plate Systems

14. Click Accept .


15. Define the plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
16. Click Accept .
17. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
18. Set the remaining plate system properties.
19. Click Finish.

Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 211)
Material Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 213)
Molded Conventions Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 214)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Molded Forms User's Guide 210


Placing Plate Systems

Main Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the revolved plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to

Molded Forms User's Guide 211


Placing Plate Systems

Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 212


Placing Plate Systems

Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.


Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the revolved plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 213


Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Revolved Plate System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the revolved plate system that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Molded Forms User's Guide 214


Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 215


Placing Plate Systems

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 216


Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 217


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 218


Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 219


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 220


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 221


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 222


Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 223


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 224


Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Molded Forms User's Guide 225


Placing Plate Systems

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:

Molded Forms User's Guide 226


Placing Plate Systems

 Are on the plate of a designed tube member


 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Bracket Plate System


Creates plate systems for primary structural brackets that can be stiffened, penetrated by
stiffeners on the bounding structure, and split with design seams.

Molded Forms User's Guide 227


Placing Plate Systems

A bracket plate system is always bounded to the structure that it supports. You select a plane to
locate and orient the bracket. The bracket has predefined shapes defined by symbols and rules.
A bracket is classified by its plane definition and its number of supports. Brackets are oriented by
a selected plane or by the supports.

Bracket by Plane Bracket by Supports

Bracket plane Reference plane. The plane of one of the supports


orientation defined (profile web or plate).
by:

Types of supports Plate system, profile system web, Plate system and profile system.
profile system flange, member
system web, and member system
flange.

Plane controls used By Plane or Offset Plane Bracket Plane by Selected Supports
Plane by Point and Vector

Plane by Three Points

Use the command Supports cannot be used to orient Supports can be used to orient the
when: the bracket. bracket.
For more information, see Bracket For more information, see Bracket
by Plane (on page 246). by Supports (on page 247).

Bracket Plate System Ribbon


Displays the controls used to place bracket plate systems.

Properties
Opens the Bracket System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the bracket system that you are about to place in the model. The initial bracket
properties default from the selected structural specification and the bracket rules. For more
information, see Bracket System Properties Dialog Box (on page 250).

Bracket Browser
Opens the Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box that specifies bracket
symbols, parameters, and properties in an icon-based browser. You can select a symbol for
the bracket prior to choosing the supports. For more information, see Define Bracket Plate
System Properties Dialog Box (on page 272).
Bracket
Displays the bracket symbol. You can also manually select a bracket symbol in the catalog
when Select from the Catalog is active.

Select from the Catalog


Allows the selection of any bracket symbol in the catalog in the Bracket box. This option is a
toggle with Create by Rule .

Molded Forms User's Guide 228


Placing Plate Systems

Create by Rule
Limits the Bracket box to applicable rule-based symbols. This is the default option. This
option is a toggle with Select from the Catalog .
Rule Based - When Create by Rule is active, this option allows the software to define the
default rule-based bracket symbol. Clear this option to manually select another bracket
symbol that is in the applicable set defined in the rules. This option is the same as the Rule
Based option for the symbol question on the Selection tab of the Bracket System
Properties dialog box. The symbol question is always the final question. For more
information, see Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267).

 When using Create by Rule , Bracket and Rule Based are inactive. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports , select supports, and click Accept to
allow the bracket rules to determine the applicable options.
Select Plane
Click to select the type of plane upon which you want to place the bracket system. See
Plane Controls below.
Select Bracket Supports
Define the structural support systems for the bracket system. Brackets require at least two,
but not more than five, supports. Supports can be plate systems or profile stiffener systems.
See Bracket Support Controls below.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the bracket plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including structural members, in the model or by sketching boundary
curves. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the plate system to maintain the boundary relationship. See Boundary
Controls and Plane Controls below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 229


Placing Plate Systems

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,


then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Select Bracket Reinforcement


Adds reinforcement to the bracket. See Bracket Reinforcement Controls below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Clears all selected planes.
Accept
Accepts all selected planes and supports, runs the bracket rules, and determines the catalog
symbols that appear in the Bracket box.

Auto Finish Mode


Click to set this option to On and automatically place a bracket in the model as you define all
of the required parameters. When this option is set to Off, you must click Finish to place the
bracket. When this option is set to On, some parameters for two-support bracket or
three-support bracket are retained for creation of the next bracket.
 For a two-support bracket, if you select a plate as the first support, then that plate is
retained as Support 1. You only need to select a second support for subsequent
brackets. When creating a sketched two-support bracket, if Support 1 and Support 2
are profiles, then the sketched contour is retained for subsequent brackets. You can
select new supports without editing the contour in Sketch 2D.
 For a three-support bracket, if you select a plate as the first support and the third
support penetrates Support 1, then only Support 1 is retained for the next bracket. If
Support 3 does not penetrate Support 1, then Support 1 and Support 3 are retained.
You only need to select Support 2 for subsequent brackets.
To prevent the software from retaining the supports for subsequent brackets, click
Auto Finish Mode again to set it to Off without exiting the Bracket Plate System command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 230


Placing Plate Systems

Connection

Select the type of connection between the bracket and supports: By Rule,
Trimmed, Lapped, or By Reference. The selected connection is used to guide
bracket selection in the rules. This option is not available if a bracket symbol is manually
selected in Bracket Symbol.
Override UV
Select to override the U and V offsets for all three points that are used to define the plane of a
tripping bracket and set the offsets to zero. For more information, see Tripping Bracket
Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1447).
Constraint
Select the orientation of a tripping bracket (or bracket by support) with its support. Select
Parallel, Perpendicular, Transverse, Vertical, Longitudinal, Fixed X, Fixed Y, or Fixed Z.
This option is only available when Plane by Selected Supports is selected for Select
Plane.
Orientation

Select the orientation of the bracket: right side, left side, or both sides. This
option is only available for a one-support bracket on a profile.

Toggle Dir
Click to move bracket placement to another location using the same combination of supports.
Each click toggles the location to the next acceptable location.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).

Plane Controls
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Molded Forms User's Guide 231


Placing Plate Systems

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.
/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Molded Forms User's Guide 232


Placing Plate Systems

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Plane by Selected Supports


Places the bracket plate system on a plane defined by its supports, such as a plate support
along one edge, and a profile or plate support along the other edges. See Bracket Support
Controls below. A tripping bracket is commonly placed by this method and is supported on
the flange side of one or more profiles. For more information, see Bracket by Supports (on
page 247). This is the default plane option for Select Shape from Standard Catalog
Browser .

Bracket Support Controls


Support 1
Select the first support for the bracket system.

Support 2
Select the second support for the bracket system.

Support 3
Select the third support for the bracket system (For 3S, 4S, and 5S brackets).

Support 4
Select the fourth support for the bracket system (For 4S and 5S brackets).

Support 5
Select the fifth support for the bracket system (For 5S brackets).
Length 1
Type a value to define a point along Support 1 on the bracket plane.
 If the support is linear, then the Length 1 box does not display.
 If the support is curved, then the Length 1 value can be adjusted to change the
bracket plane position relative to the support.
Length 2
Type a value to define a second point along Support 2 on the bracket plane.
 If the support is linear, then the Length 2 box does not display.
 If the support is curved, then the Length 2 value can be adjusted to change the
bracket plane position relative to the support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 233


Placing Plate Systems

 Length 1 and Length 2 values affect the position of the bracket plane. These values do not
affect bracket creation.
 The software cannot create the bracket If a bracket dimension is greater than a support
dimension.

Boundary Controls
Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D

Molded Forms User's Guide 234


Placing Plate Systems

Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Bracket Reinforcement Controls


By Rule
Select to limit reinforcement selection to the default defined in the rules.
Reinforcement

If By Rule is cleared, select the reinforcement type: None, Buckling Stiffener,


Edge Reinforcement, or Flange.

The following options are only available when you select Edge Reinforcement or Buckling
Stiffener for Reinforcement and after you make a reinforcement selection and click Accept
:

Bracket Reinforcement Properties


Click to open the Bracket Reinforcement Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the bracket stiffener or edge reinforcement. The initial bracket
properties default from the selected structural specification and the bracket and
reinforcement rules. For more information, see Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box
(on page 271).
When Flange is selected, properties are displayed on the Flange Selection
tab of the Bracket System Properties dialog box. For more information, see Flange
Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 269).
Override
Select to override the rule-based values for Section Size, Material, and Grade and manually
select different values. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge
Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.
Section Size
Displays the rule-based profile cross-section of the bracket reinforcement. Select Override
to modify this value. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge
Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.
Material
Displays the rule-based material type of the bracket reinforcement. Override to modify this
value. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement or
Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.
Grade
Displays the rule-based material grade of the bracket reinforcement. Select Override to
modify this value. This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge

Molded Forms User's Guide 235


Placing Plate Systems

Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.


Primary Orientation
The primary direction of reinforcement placement, based on the molded conventions of the
bracket. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 254). This option is only available after bracket creation when Edge
Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is selected for Reinforcement.

General Controls
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).

Bracket Best Practices (on page 50)

What do you want to do?


 Create a one support bracket by plane (on page 237)
 Create a two support bracket by plane (on page 238)
 Create a three support bracket by plane (on page 239)
 Create a four or five support bracket by plane (on page 239)

Molded Forms User's Guide 236


Placing Plate Systems

 Create a two support bracket by supports (on page 241)


 Create a three, four, or five support bracket by supports (on page 241)
 Manually select a bracket symbol (on page 242)
 Sketch a bracket (on page 243)
 Add reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244)
 Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement using the icon browser (on page 244)
 Modify a bracket (on page 245)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a bracket (on page 245)

Create a one support bracket by plane


This workflow creates one or two brackets on the web and flange of a profile system.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket support.
3. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .


4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the profile system that you want to use.

5. If the profile has a flange on more than one side, select an option for Orientation to select
the side for a single bracket, or to place a bracket on each side.
6. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.
7. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
8. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
9. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

Molded Forms User's Guide 237


Placing Plate Systems

10. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
11. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
12. Click Finish.

Create a two support bracket by plane


1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket supports.
3. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .


4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the first plate, profile, or member
system support.

5. Click Support 2 and select the second plate, profile, or member system support.
6. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.

7. If needed, click Toggle Dir to change the location of the bracket.


8. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
9. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
10. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

11. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
12. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
13. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 238


Placing Plate Systems

Create a three support bracket by plane


1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.
2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket supports.
3. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .


4. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the first plate, profile, or member
system support.

5. Click Support 2 and select the second plate, profile, or member system support.

6. Click Support 3 and select the third plate, profile, or member system support.
7. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.

8. If needed, click Toggle Dir to change the location of the bracket.


9. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
10. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
11. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

12. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
13. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
14. Click Finish.

Create a four or five support bracket by plane


1. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:

Molded Forms User's Guide 239


Placing Plate Systems

Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)


Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
The plane must intersect the bracket supports.
2. Click Select Bracket Supports .

The ribbon advances to Support 1 .


3. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the first plate, profile, or member
system that you want to use.

For a four support bracket: For a five support bracket:

4. Click Support 2 and select the second plate, profile, or member system support.

5. Click Support 3 and select the third plate, profile, or member system support.

6. Click Support 4 and select the fourth plate, profile, or member system support.

7. For a five support bracket only, click Support 5 and select the fifth plate, profile, or
member system support.
8. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.
9. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
10. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
11. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

12. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
13. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
14. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 240


Placing Plate Systems

Create a two support bracket by supports


This workflow creates a bracket oriented by its supports. One or more of the supports may be
profile systems.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the ribbon, click Plane by Selected Supports as the plane option.


3. Select the first plate or profile system support.

4. Select the second plate or profile system support.


5. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.

6. If needed, click Toggle Dir to change the location of the bracket.


7. If needed, select a new orientation value for Constraint.
8. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
9. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
10. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

11. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
12. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
13. Click Finish.

Select Auto Finish Mode to place brackets without clicking Finish and to retain the
first support when placing consecutive brackets.

Create a three, four, or five support bracket by supports


This workflow creates a bracket oriented by its supports. One or more of the supports may be
profile systems.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.

2. On the ribbon, click Plane by Selected Supports as the plane option.


3. Select the first plate or profile system support.
4. Select the third, fourth, and fifth plate or profile system supports as needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 241


Placing Plate Systems

For a three support For a four support bracket: For a five support bracket:
bracket:

5. Click Accept .
A rule-based value for Bracket appears in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in
the graphic view.
6. If needed, select a new orientation value for Constraint.
7. If needed, select a different rule-based value for Bracket.
8. If you want to override the rules and manually select a bracket, see Manually select a bracket
symbol (on page 242).
9. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

10. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or
parameters for the bracket.
11. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
12. Click Finish.

For three-support brackets, select Auto Finish Mode to place brackets without
clicking Finish and to retain the first and third supports when placing consecutive brackets.

Manually select a bracket symbol


To override the rules and manually select a bracket when using Plane by Selected Supports
, perform the following steps:
1. If Create by Rule is visible, then click the button.

The button toggles to Select from the Catalog , and Rule Based is hidden.
2. Select More in the Bracket box.
The Catalog Objects dialog box appears.
3. Select a bracket symbol, and click OK
4. Click Select Bracket Supports and continue with bracket creation.
5. To add a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or flange to the bracket, see Add
reinforcement to a bracket (on page 244).
6. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 242


Placing Plate Systems

Sketch a bracket
If you want to sketch the free edges of a bracket, perform the following steps:

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click , and select the needed plane or support
method.
3. If Create by Rule is visible, then click the button.

The button toggles to Select from the Catalog , and Rule Based is hidden.
4. Select More in the Bracket box.
The Catalog Objects dialog box appears.
5. Select a bracket symbol that supports sketching, and click OK.
Delivered symbols that support sketching have Sketched in their names.
6. Click Select Bracket Supports , and select the needed bracket supports.

7. Click Define Boundaries .

8. Click Boundary Curve .

9. Click Add Intersecting Item .


10. Select the bracket supports and other objects in the model that intersect the bracket
sketching plane. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment as reference
geometry.
11. Click Add Projection Item .
12. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use
when sketching the bracket. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and
appear in the Sketch 2D environment as reference geometry.

13. Click Sketch 2D .


14. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the bracket.
You can constrain the bracket to geometric construction points referenced from profile
cross-section key points or offset from plate systems. For more information, see Point at Offset
from Keypoint Command and Point at Minimum Distance Command in the SmartSketch Drawing
Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the Sketch 2D environment.
1. Click Finish in Sketch 2D.
2. In the Parent System box, select a parent system for the bracket.

3. If needed, click Properties to further refine attributes, defaults, selection results, or


parameters for the bracket.
4. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 243


Placing Plate Systems

Add reinforcement to a bracket


1. Do one of the following:
 In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select an existing bracket system.
 When creating a new bracket, click Select Bracket Supports , and select the
supports.
The Bracket Plate System ribbon appears.
2. If Create by Rule is visible, then click the button.

The button toggles to Select from the Catalog , and Rule Based is hidden.

3. Click Select Bracket Reinforcement .


4. Select a value for Reinforcement to select a buckling stiffener, edge reinforcement, or
flange.
5. Click Accept .
Flange parameters appear in the ribbon and a preview of the bracket appears in the graphic
view.
6. Change the flange parameters as needed.
7. Click Finish.
To automatically place the default reinforcement defined in the catalog rules, select
Rule Based when Filter by Rules is visible.

Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement using the icon


browser
This workflow selects a bracket and bracket reinforcement in a single dialog box before selecting
the supports. The dialog box can remain open to simplify creation of successive brackets.

1. Click Bracket Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. On the Bracket Plate System ribbon, click , and select one of the following options to
define the plane for the bracket using one of the following methods:
Coincident Plane - Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Offset from a Plane - Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Plane by Point and Vector - Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page
78)
Plane by Three Points - Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

Plane by Selected Supports - Select this option to create a tripping bracket.


The plane must intersect the bracket support.

3. Click Bracket Browser .


The Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box appears.
4. To manually select a bracket, clear By Rule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 244


Placing Plate Systems

5. To manually select a bracket reinforcement, clear Reinforcement By Rule.


6. Select a bracket and reinforcement type.
7. Set bracket properties and parameters.
8. Click Apply.
9. With the dialog box open, click Select Bracket Supports on the ribbon.
10. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the profile system that you want to use.
11. Select supports, connection type, and other parameters on the ribbon.
12. Click Finish.
The bracket is created.

Create additional brackets using the icon browser


1. To create another bracket of the same plane type, click the Define Bracket Plate System
Properties dialog box to make it the active window and repeat the previous steps.
2. To create a bracket of a different plane type, click Select Plane on the ribbon, and then
select a different option. Click the Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box to
make it the active window, and repeat the previous steps.
3. Click Close to close the Define Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box.

Modify a bracket
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Plates in the Locate Filter.
3. Select one or more brackets to modify in a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the brackets as needed.

 If you select multiple brackets, you can edit common properties on the ribbon.
 If you select multiple brackets by supports, you can modify load points and offsets for the
brackets. For more information, see Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket System
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 271).
 If the bracket is constrained to geometric construction points, you can modify the points. A
separate ribbon displays for the points. For more information, see Points (Geometric
Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028).

Delete a bracket
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Bracket Plate Systems in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the bracket system to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Molded Forms User's Guide 245


Placing Plate Systems

Bracket by Plane
A bracket system can have a plane that intersects the supports. This type of bracket is created
when Coincident Plane , Offset from a Plane , Angle from plane , Plane by Point
and Vector , Plane by Three Points , or Plane by Vectors Normal are selected for
Select Plane.
The following examples show the general support selection sequence:

1 Support (1S) Bracket


Typically a profile with the bracket on the flange and web.

2 Support (2S) Bracket

Examples of supports include:


 Two plate systems
 A plate system and an edge reinforcement
 A rib connection, using a plate system and the web of a profile

3 Support (3S) Bracket

4 Support (4S) Bracket

Molded Forms User's Guide 246


Placing Plate Systems

5 Support (5S) Bracket

Bracket by Supports
A bracket system can have a plane that is in line with one of its selected supports. This type of
bracket is created when Plane by Selected Supports is selected for Select Plane. You can
select a bracket symbol or sketch the free edge of the bracket.
The supports are used to define the plane of the bracket as well as its boundaries. The first two
supports must intersect in a manner that allows the plane to be defined. Bracket orientation is
driven by the orientation of one of the supports, such as a plate system or the web of a profile
system.
The default bracket orientation is parallel to the first selected support having a plane
usable to drive the orientation.

A flange can be added to the free edge of the bracket.

Molded Forms User's Guide 247


Placing Plate Systems

A bracket can be supported on the flange side of one or more profiles. It is created in the same
way as other brackets except that the plane of the bracket is usually offset so that it can be fillet
welded to the supporting profile flange.

A bracket by supports can be lapped to one or more supports.

A bracket by supports can use two intersecting profiles on the same plate as supports. The
bracket can be supported by the web, or both the web and profile of the second profile.

A bracket is classified by its number of supports. The support object type selected affects the
available support object types available for succeeding supports. The following examples show
the general support selection sequence and the available combinations of supports:

Molded Forms User's Guide 248


Placing Plate Systems

2 Support (2S) Bracket 4 Support (4S) Bracket

3 Support (3S) Bracket 5 Support (5S) Bracket

Support 1 Object Allowed Support 2 & 3 Objects Allowed Support 4 & 5 Objects

Plate edge Plate face Plate face


Plate edge Profile system
Profile system

Plate face Plate edge Plate face


Profile system Profile system

Profile system Plate face Plate face


Plate edge Profile system
Profile system

Support Order when Supports are Unconnected


Bracket supports are usually connected to each other, either by bounding or intersecting. There
are some circumstances where supports are not connected. The supports must be linear (for
profiles) and planar (for plates) so that the intersection of the unbounded landing curves and/or
unbounded definition planes are unique.

Molded Forms User's Guide 249


Placing Plate Systems

Bracket System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf bracket system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 250)
Material Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 253)
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 254)
Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 267)
Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 268)
Flange Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 269)
Flange Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 270)
Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 271)

Main Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the bracket plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 250


Placing Plate Systems

 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate


type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 251


Placing Plate Systems

Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on

Molded Forms User's Guide 252


Placing Plate Systems

page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.
Edge Length Thickness Ratio (L/T) - Displays the length divided by the thickness. This value is
used by the rules to calculate the reinforcement.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the bracket that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 253


Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the bracket system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 254


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 255


Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 256


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 257


Placing Plate Systems

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 258


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 259


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 260


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 261


Placing Plate Systems

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 262


Placing Plate Systems

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 263


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Primary Orientation


Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 264


Placing Plate Systems

Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Molded Forms User's Guide 265


Placing Plate Systems

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 266


Placing Plate Systems

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the rule criteria used for bracket plate system selection.

 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when you
select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question
Displays questions asked by the rule.
Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or

Molded Forms User's Guide 267


Placing Plate Systems

answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-based
and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and the Rule
Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

Questions, Answers, and Results


The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket class.
Bracket Contour Type - Select a bracket type. Select the check box to use the default answer of
the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket catalog item. Displays only the valid selections based on the
Bracket Contour Type answer.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. Customized rules may have different questions.

Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the parameters for the bracket plate system.
Parameter - Displays the name of the parameter.
Value - Displays the value of the parameter. Values that are shaded cannot be modified.
Rule-Based - Displays a check box if the parameter value is rule-based. Clear the check box to
modify the value in the Value box.
Catalog Value - Displays the original catalog value if the Value box has been modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 268


Placing Plate Systems

Flange Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the rule criteria used for bracket flange selection. This tab is only visible after bracket
creation when Flange is selected for Reinforcement.

 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when you
select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question
Displays questions asked by the rule.
Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or
answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-based
and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and the Rule
Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

User Answers
Select from a list of bracket flanges. The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket flange class.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. Customized rules may have different questions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 269


Placing Plate Systems

Flange Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the default values for the bracket flange parameters. Values can be modified as
permitted by the catalog. This tab is only visible after bracket creation when Flange is
selected for Reinforcement.
Neutral Axis Ratio - Sets the molded side of the bracket and bracket flange. This option creates
the flange symbol at the correct location by accounting for molded convention thickness direction
and offset values.
 If the molded side is the inner surface, the value is 0.
 If the molded side is the outer surface, the value is 1.
 If the molded side is centered, the value is 0.5.
Flange Width - Width of the flange measured from the edge of the bracket symbol, which is also
the first bend tangent.
Inner Radius - Bend radius measured along the inner surface of the bend.
Bend Angle - Angle between the flange surface and bracket surface.

1 Flange Width

2 Bend Angle

3 Inner Radius

KnuLine - The knuckle line for the flange, measured from the edge where the flange is added to
the bracket plate to the edge of the unrolled flange. This is calculated by the rule based on the
other parameter values so that when the flange is fully bent at manufacturing, the flange length is
correct as specified. This parameter is read-only.
RollLine1 / RollLine2 - The roll lines define exactly how the flange is rolled or bent during
manufacturing. RollLine1 is measured from the edge where the flange is added to the bracket
plate, and RollLine2 is measured from where RollLine1 ends. These parameters are read-only
and are calculated by the rule based on the other parameter values.
Flange Orientation -Select the orientation of the flange bracket.
 Same As Parent - Orientation is the same as the bracket plate system primary profile
orientation.
 Against Parent - Orientation is in the opposite direction of the bracket plate system primary
profile orientation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 270


Placing Plate Systems

Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default offset values and lapped status for a bracket by supports. This tab is only
visible after bracket creation when Plane by Selected Supports is selected for Select
Plane.

Offset Values
Load Point - Specifies the support load point of each point used to calculate the bracket system
plane. Offsets are measured from the load points. Load points are defined in the profile
cross-section symbols. If one of the supports is a plate system, then the load point value is 0. For
more information, see Key Points (on page 1353).

U Offset - Specifies the offset along the local U axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.
V Offset - Specifies the offset along the local V axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.
Override - Select to specify different values for Load Point, U Offset and V Offset.

Lapped Status
Displays the status of each bracket support. Lapped is selected if the support is lapped. This
value is set during bracket creation and cannot be changed here.

Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the bracket system reinforcement that you are editing. Tabs on this
dialog box are visible only after bracket creation.
Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 272)
Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 272)

Molded Forms User's Guide 271


Placing Plate Systems

Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the cross-section settings for a bucking stiffener bracket reinforcement. This tab is only
visible after bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is
selected for Reinforcement.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type. The software displays the section type properties for
the section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Override Cross Section Information
Select to override the cross-section information generated by the rule.
WebLength(WL)
Displays the web length of the reinforcement.
WebThickness(WT)
Displays the web thickness of the reinforcement.

Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the orientation settings for a bracket edge reinforcement. This tab is only visible after
bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement is selected for Reinforcement.
Rule
Select the orientation rule that you want to use for the edge reinforcement. Available rules
include Normal, Longitudinal, Vertical, and Transverse.

Define Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the bracket symbol to use prior to choosing supports. To select the bracket symbol and
edit its properties, click Define Bracket Plate System properties dialog box.
By Rule - Select to limit bracket selection to the default defined in the catalog rules. When
cleared, you can manually select a bracket.
The following options are available when you clear By Rule.
 Filters - Specifies the bracket type. Select All, 1S, 2S, 3S, 4S, 5S, Sketched, or Flanged.

Molded Forms User's Guide 272


Placing Plate Systems

 Bracket class tabs - Each tab displays a bracket class name. The tabs are based on the
selected bracket type in Filter.
 Bracket icons - Each tab displays small icons of individual brackets within the bracket class.
Select an icon to display a preview of the bracket.
 Clear Recent - Clears the recently selected brackets from Recent tab.

Toggle Dir - Click to move bracket placement to another location using the same
combination of supports. Each click toggles the location to the next acceptable location.
Reinforcement By Rule - Select to limit bracket reinforcement selection to the default defined in
the catalog rules. If By Rule is unchecked, select the reinforcement type: None , Buckling
Stiffener , Edge Reinforcement , or Flange .

Bracket Properties
Bracket tab
Specifies properties for the bracket.
Thickness - Select the material thickness for the plate system.
Grade - Select the material grade for the plate system.
Type - Select the type of plate system that you are placing. If you do not specify a type, the
software automatically determines the type based on the plate system orientation. Plate systems
that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to Deck. Plate systems that are mostly
transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly
longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to Longitudinal Bulkhead. This option is also used by the
naming rule to name the plate system.
Thickness Direction - Select the direction in which to apply the thickness. If you have selected
supports for the bracket, the software displays an arrow indicating the active direction.
Buckling Stiffener and Edge Reinforcement tabs
Specifies properties for the bracket reinforcement. These tabs are available when Buckling
Stiffener or Edge Reinforcement are selected for Reinforcement By Rule.
Override - Select to override the rule-based values for Section Size, Material, and Grade and
manually select different values.
Section Type - Select the profile section type. The software displays the section type properties
for the section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size - Displays the rule-based profile cross-section of the bracket reinforcement. Select
Override to modify this value.
Material - Displays the rule-based material type of the bracket reinforcement. Override to modify
this value.
Grade - Displays the rule-based material grade of the bracket reinforcement. Select Override to
modify this value.
Primary Orientation - Specifies the primary direction of reinforcement placement, based on the
molded conventions of the bracket. For more information, see Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket
System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 254).
Orientation Rule - Select the orientation rule that you want to use for the edge reinforcement.
Available rules include Normal, Longitudinal, Vertical, and Transverse.

Molded Forms User's Guide 273


Placing Plate Systems

Flange tab

Specifies properties for the bracket flange. This tab is available only when Flange is
selected for Reinforcement By Rule.
Flange Shape - Select the flange type.
Flange Orientation -Select the orientation of the flange bracket.
 Same As Parent - Orientation is the same as the bracket plate system primary profile
orientation.
 Against Parent - Orientation is in the opposite direction of the bracket plate system primary
profile orientation.

Questions, Answers, and Results


The default answers are determined by the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket class.
Bracket Contour Type - Select a bracket type. Select the check box to use the default answer of
the rule class.
Results - Select the bracket catalog item. Displays only the valid selections based on the
Bracket Contour Type answer.
The questions described here represent the default rules delivered with the
software. Customized rules may have different questions.

Connect Points Frame


Specifies the default offset values for a bracket by supports. This frame is available when Plane
by Selected Supports is selected for Select Plane on the ribbon.

Offset Values
Load Point - Specifies the support load point of each point used to calculate the bracket system
plane. Offsets are measured from the load points. Load points are defined in the profile
cross-section symbols. If one of the supports is a plate system, then the load point value is 0. For
more information, see Key Points (on page 1353).

U Offset - Specifies the offset along the local U axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 274


Placing Plate Systems

V Offset - Specifies the offset along the local V axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the
bracket is not on the flange of a profile support.
Override - Select to specify different values for Load Point, U Offset and V Offset.

Lapped Status
Displays the status of each bracket support. Lapped is selected if the support is lapped. This
value is set during bracket creation and cannot be changed here.

Advanced Plate System


Creates specialized, complex, such as side plates, ring plates, transition plates, continuity
plates, and buckling plates.

With this command, you create a predefined plate using an advanced plate system macro or
define your own custom plate using geometric construction interfaces.

Using Advanced Plate Systems with Members


Most advanced plate systems are used with standard and built-up members created with Place
Linear Member in the Molded Forms or Structure tasks. Member flanges and webs are
trimmed (rebounded) and connected to the advanced plate system. As an example, when you
insert an advanced plate system along the length of a standard (rolled) member, typically on the
flange, the software creates a penetration connectionbetween the standard member and the
advanced plate system.

When you use Execute Detailing to detail the plate, the software automatically creates all
connections and penetration seams.
When you modify an existing member, you also must modify connections and trimming by
selecting a port and using the Modify Member Generic Assembly Connection ribbon in the
Molded Forms and Structural Detailing tasks.

Molded Forms User's Guide 275


Placing Plate Systems

For more information, see Place Linear Member Systems (on page 787) and Edit assembly
connection ports (on page 971).

Using Geometric Constructions


When an advanced plate system macro is not available, geometric construction interfaces can be
used to create custom plate systems. You can use multiple geometric constructions in sequence.
For example, you can create points, create curves from the points, and then create a surface
from the curves. Geometric constructions are available by clicking Plate Definition by 3D on
the ribbon.

Advanced Plate System Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The initial properties default from the selected structural
specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information see Advanced Plate
System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro.
 APS Icon Browser - Graphically displays the available advanced plate system
macros. For more information, see Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page
283).
 More - Displays a list of the available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
The software displays recently selected macros in the list.
Plate Definition by 3D
Allows the creation of plate geometry directly in a graphic view by using the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, the Geometric Construction ribbon, and the Geometric
Construction Explorer. This option is the 3D equivalent to Sketch 2D and is only available
when Construction is selected for Macro Definition. For more information, see Geometric
Constructions (on page 1027).

Select Supports
Returns the ribbon to the options available for the selected macro. This option is only
available after the initial definition of the advance plate system.

Define Boundaries
Sets the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects, including structural members, in the model or by sketching boundary curves. If you
select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes
the plate system to maintain the boundary relationship. See Define Boundary Controls below.

When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,


then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 276


Placing Plate Systems

This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.

Molded Forms User's Guide 277


Placing Plate Systems

Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use Define Boundaries .

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane

Molded Forms User's Guide 278


Placing Plate Systems

Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use Boundary Curve .
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.

Molded Forms User's Guide 279


Placing Plate Systems

Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

What do you want to do?


 Place a side plate (on page 288)
 Place a side plate with sniped corners (on page 294)
 Place an axial side plate (on page 298)
 Place a ring plate (on page 305)

Molded Forms User's Guide 280


Placing Plate Systems

 Place a ring plate with sniped corners (on page 312)


 Place a ring plate with radial edges (on page 319)
 Place a transition plate (on page 332)
 Place a gap transition plate between flanges (on page 337)
 Place a gap transition plate between webs (on page 339)
 Place a continuity plate (on page 325)
 Place a buckling plate along a built-up boxed member (on page 344)
 Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges or continuity plates (on page 349)
 Place a buckling plate along a member (on page 355)
 Place a buckling plate at a rolled member and a nodal connection (on page 360)
 Place a buckling plate along a built-up tubular member (on page 365)
 Place a partial buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 371)
 Place a buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 375)
 Place a knuckled bracket (on page 382)
 Place a cross insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 388)
 Place a cross insert plate on intersecting members (on page 392)
 Place a tee insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 396)
 Place a column insert plate along a member (on page 400)
 Place a column insert plate on supporting and supporting members (on page 405)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions (on page 282)
 Modify a plate system created with geometric constructions (on page 282)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Modify an advanced plate system


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Plates in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the advanced plate system to modify.
The Advanced Plate System ribbon displays.

4. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon for the advanced plate system macro displays.

5. Click Select on the ribbon.


6. Change the required inputs and parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 281


Placing Plate Systems

7. Click Continue.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
8. Click Finish.

Place a custom plate system using geometric constructions


The following workflow is general. The macros to use can vary.

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


The Advanced Plate System ribbon displays.
2. Select Construction from the Macro Definition list.
-OR-
If Construction was selected earlier in the same session, and is visible in the Macro
Definition list, click Plate Definition by 3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon display.
3. If required, select a point geometric construction interface.
4. Follow the system prompts and create the points.
5. Click Continue.
The Geometric Construction Explorer shows a list of points.
6. Select a curve geometric construction interface.
7. Follow the system prompts and select points to create the needed curves. Select the points
from the graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or the Geometric Construction Explorer.
8. Click Continue.
A list of curves is added to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
9. Select a surface geometric construction interface.
10. Follow the system prompts and select curves to create a surface. Select the curves from the
graphic view, the Workspace Explorer, or the Geometric Construction Explorer.
11. Click Continue.
A surface is added to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
12. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
13. Create boundaries for the plate system as required. Boundaries create connections between
plates.
14. Click Finish.
The software creates a plate system using the geometric construction surface.

Modify a plate system created with geometric constructions


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.

Molded Forms User's Guide 282


Placing Plate Systems

2. Select Root Plates in the Locate Filter.


3. Select the advanced plate system to modify.
The Advanced Plate System ribbon displays.
4. Click Plate Definition by 3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon display.

5. Click Select on the ribbon.


6. Select the geometry on the Geometric Construction Explorer or select a numbered input
step on the ribbon.
The geometry highlights in the graphic view.
7. Make the required changes.
8. To delete geometry, click Delete .
9. Click Continue.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
10. Click Finish.

Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box


Specifies an advanced plate system macro to use. The dialog box displays when you click APS
Icon Browser in the Macro Definition list. Each tab of the palette graphically displays options
available for a type of macro in the Catalog database. After you select a macro, the appropriate
options display on the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Filters
Limits the available macros on a tab to the selected type.
Clear Recent
Removes recently selected macros from the Recent tab.
Help
Displays help for the selected macro in a preview window. If no help is available, a preview of
the selected macro displays.
You can also select Tools > Automatic Preview to display the preview window.
Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 284)
Ring Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 301)
Continuity Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 321)
Transition Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 328)
Buckling Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 341)
Brackets Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 378)
Insert Plate Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 385)

Molded Forms User's Guide 283


Placing Plate Systems

The Recent tab displays macros recently selected on the other tabs. Click Clear
Recent to remove interfaces from this tab.

Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macros create side plates, which reinforce one or more
members sharing a nodal connection. A nodal connection is typically a construction assembly
between built-up members and consists of side plates or ring plates, transition plates, and
continuity plates.

Side Plate - Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming
members that share a nodal connection. The corners of the side plate are
square. For more information, see Side Plate (on page 284).

Side Plate 2 - Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of


incoming members that share a nodal connection. The corners of the side plate
are sniped. For more information, see Side Plate 2 (on page 290).

Side Plate Axial - Creates a side plate axially on a supported member at its
nodal connection with a supporting member. For more information, see Side
Plate Axial (on page 296).

Side Plate

Molded Forms User's Guide 284


Placing Plate Systems

Tooltip: SidePlate
Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection. The corners of the side plate are square.
The physical axes of the members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common end
point is the node. You must have at least two members with non-collinear axes. The incoming
flange and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the software trims theincoming
flange and web parts by the edges of the side plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:


 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first selected member oriented from the nodal point to the
other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second selected member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross-product of X-axis by Y-axis.
The type of free edge on the side plate depends on the angle between the axes of two adjacent
members.

Side Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).

Molded Forms User's Guide 285


Placing Plate Systems

 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the primary members that support the side plate. These members can be rolled
members or built-up members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end
points. Select the first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first
member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate. The second member that you select
defines the Y-axis for the side plate.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

Molded Forms User's Guide 286


Placing Plate Systems

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

If the angle between the members is less than 175


degrees, the following free edge is created:

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
If the angle between the members is between 175 and 3 - Cutback
180 degrees, then the following free edge is created:
4 - Arm length

Weld Toe - Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the side plate
free edges.
Fillet - Specifies the radius of the fillet between two successive line segments of the side plate
free edge.
Arm Length - Specifies the distance between the line perpendicular to the bisector of the two
member axes and the intersection point between the two member edges. This parameter is only
used if the angle between the members is between 175 and 180 degrees.
Cutback - Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members away from the fillet of the
side plate free edge.
Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 287


Placing Plate Systems

Side - Specifies the flange location of the side plate. Select Front or Back.

What do you want to do?


 Place a side plate (on page 288)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a side plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click SidePlate.
The Side Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members that support the side plate. Select the
members in clockwise or counter-clockwise consecutive order.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the side plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 288


Placing Plate Systems

5. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Fillet, Arm Length, and Cutback.
6. Select the flange location of the side plate from the Side list.
7. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Side Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 289


Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the side plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Side Plate 2

.
Tooltip: SidePlate2
Creates a side plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection. The corners of the side plate are sniped.

Molded Forms User's Guide 290


Placing Plate Systems

The physical axes of the members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common end
point is the node. You must have at least two members with non-collinear axes. The incoming
flange and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the software trims the incoming
flange and web parts by the edges of the side plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:


 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first selected member oriented from the nodal point to the
other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second selected member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross-product of X-axis by Y-axis.
The type of free edge on the side plate depends on the angle between the axes of two adjacent
members.

Side Plate 2 Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

Molded Forms User's Guide 291


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Specifies the primary members that support the side plate. These members can be rolled
members or built-up members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end
points. Select the first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first
member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate. The second member that you select
defines the Y-axis for the side plate.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 292


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Cutback 2
5 - Slope ratio

Weld Toe - Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the side plate
free edges.
Fillet - Specifies the radius of the fillet between two successive line segments of the side plate
free edge.
Cutback - Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members away from the fillet of the
side plate free edge.
Cutback 2 - Specifies the distance to cut back the second line of incoming members away from
the fillet of the side plate free edge.
Slope Ratio - Specifies the slope of sniped corners at the side plate free edges.
Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Side - Specifies the flange location of the side plate. Select Front or Back.

What do you want to do?


 Place a side plate with sniped corners (on page 294)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Molded Forms User's Guide 293


Placing Plate Systems

Place a side plate with sniped corners

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click SidePlate2.
The Side Plate 2 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members that support the side plate. Select the
members in clockwise or counter-clockwise consecutive order.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the side plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the side plate.

5. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Fillet, Slope Ratio, Cutback, and Cutback 2.
6. Select the flange location of the side plate from the Side list.
7. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 294


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Side Plate 2 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the side plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 295


Placing Plate Systems

Side Plate Axial

Tooltip: SidePlateAxial
Creates a side plate by connecting the flange on an incoming intercostal supported member that
share a nodal connection with a continuous supporting member.
The physical axes of the members are coplanar. The end point of the supported member is the
node with the supporting member. The software trims the incoming flange and web plate parts of
the supported member. For built-up members, the software trims the incoming flange and web
parts of the supported member by the edges of the side plate.

Side Plate Axial Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the supporting member. This member can be a rolled member or a built-up member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 296


Placing Plate Systems

2 - Specifies the supported member. This member can be a rolled member or a built-up member.
The physical axis must be coplanar with and nodally connected to the supporting member.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 297


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Supporting member
2 - Supported member
3 - Length
4 - Chamfer length
5 - Chamfer width
6 - Setback
7 - Axial side plate

Length - Specifies the length of the side plate.


Chamfer Length - Specifies the length of sniped corners at the free edges of the side plate.
Chamfer Width - Specifies the width of sniped corners at the free edges of the side plate.
Setback - Specifies the distance to set back sniped corners from the end of the side plate.
Location - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate relative to the member major
axis. Select Top to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Bottom to
place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?


 Place an axial side plate (on page 298)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place an axial side plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click SidePlateAxial.
The Side Plate Axial ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 298


Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select the supporting member.

5. Select the supported member.

6. Type values for Length, Chamfer Length, Chamfer Width, and Setback.
7. Select the location of the side plate from the Side list.
8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 299


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Side Plate Axial ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flange, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the side plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 300


Placing Plate Systems

Ring Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macros create ring plates, which reinforce one or more
members sharing a nodal connection and penetrated by a perpendicular cylindrical member. A
nodal connection is typically a construction assembly between built-up members and consists of
side plates or ring plates, transition plates, and continuity plates.

Ring Plate 1 - Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of


incoming members that share a nodal connection and a penetrating
perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are square.
For more information, see Ring Plate 1 (on page 301).

Ring Plate 2 - Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of


incoming members that share a nodal connection and a penetrating
perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are sniped. For
more information, see Ring Plate 2 (on page 308).

Ring Plate 3- Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of


incoming members that share a nodal connection and a penetrating
perpendicular cylindrical member. The ring plate has a continuous radial edge
between members. For more information, see Ring Plate 3 (on page 315).

Ring Plate 1

Tooltip: RingPlate
Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection and a penetrating perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are
square.

Molded Forms User's Guide 301


Placing Plate Systems

The physical axes of the incoming members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common
end point is the node. The axis of the perpendicular member traverses the node. A ring plate can
be defined by a single incoming member and the perpendicular member. The incoming flange
and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the incoming flange and web parts are
trimmed by the edges of the ring plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:


1. If the ring plate has one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the member oriented from the nodal point to the other end
of the member.
 Z-axis - Defined by the axis of the perpendicular cylindrical member oriented from the
nodal point to the other end of the perpendicular member.
 Y-axis - Calculated as the cross product of Z-axis by Y-axis.
2. If the ring plate has more than one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first located member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second located member oriented from the nodal point
to the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross product of X-axis by Y-axis.

Ring Plate 1 Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 302


Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1
Specifies the members that support the ring plate. These members can be rolled or built-up
members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end points. Select the
first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first member that you
select defines the X-axis for the ring plate. If you select a second member, that member
defines the Y-axis for the ring plate. If there is only a single incoming member, then the
macro computes the Y-axis based on the supporting member and the perpendicular
member.
2
Specifies the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member, but it must be orthogonal to the plane described by the members selected
in step 1, and it must pass through the node.

(Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the ring plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 303


Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Offset

Weld Toe
Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the ring plate free
edges.

Molded Forms User's Guide 304


Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the offset between the extracted cylinder and the outer circle of the ring plate free
edges.
Fillet
Specifies the radius of the fillet between the offset radius and the cutback length of the free
edge ring plate.
Cutback
Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members from the fillet.
Extension
Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly extend
the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Support
Specifies the flange location of the ring plate. Select Front or Back.
Is Cut By Tube
Specifies whether a connection is created between the tubular member or the ring plate.
Select True for a connection. Select False for no connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place a ring plate (on page 305)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a ring plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click RingPlate1.
The Ring Plate 1 ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 305


Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members, in clockwise or counter-clockwise


consecutive order, that support the ring plate.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the ring plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the ring plate.

5. Click 2 on the ribbon.


6. Select the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This can be a rolled or built-up
member. The member must be orthogonal to the plane defined by the members selected for
1, and it must pass through the node point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 306


Placing Plate Systems

7. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Offset, Fillet, and Cutback.
8. Select the flange location of the ring plate in the Support list.
9. Select the connection of the ring plate in the Is Cut By Tube list.
10. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Ring Plate 1 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Support list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the ring plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 307


Placing Plate Systems

Ring Plate 2

Tooltip: RingPlate2
Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection and a penetrating perpendicular cylindrical member. The corners of the ring plate are
sniped.
The physical axes of the incoming members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common
end point is the node. The axis of the perpendicular member traverses the node. A ring plate can
be defined by a single incoming member and the perpendicular member. The incoming flange
and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the incoming flange and web parts are
trimmed by the edges of the ring plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:


1. If the ring plate has one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the member oriented from the nodal point to the other end
of the member.
 Z-axis - Defined by the axis of the perpendicular cylindrical member oriented from the
nodal point to the other end of the perpendicular member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 308


Placing Plate Systems

 Y-axis - Calculated as the cross product of Z-axis by Y-axis.


2. If the ring plate has more than one incoming member
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first located member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second located member oriented from the nodal point
to the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross product of X-axis by Y-axis.

Ring Plate 2 Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1
Specifies the members that support the ring plate. These members can be rolled or built-up
members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end points. Select the
first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first member that you
select defines the X-axis for the ring plate. If you select a second member, that member
defines the Y-axis for the ring plate. If there is only a single incoming member, then the
macro computes the Y-axis based on the supporting member and the perpendicular
member.
2
Specifies the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member, but it must be orthogonal to the plane described by the members selected
in step 1, and it must pass through the node.

(Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 309


Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 310


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Cutback 2
5 - Offset
6 - Slope Ratio

Weld Toe
Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the ring plate free
edges.
Offset
Specifies the offset between the extracted cylinder and the outer circle of the ring plate free
edges.
Fillet
Specifies the radius of the fillet between the offset radius and the cutback length of the ring
plate free edge.
Cutback
Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members from the fillet.
Cutback 2
Specifies the distance to cut back the second line of incoming members from the fillet.
Slope Ratio
Specifies the slope of sniped corners at the ring plate free edges.
Extension
Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly extend
the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 311


Placing Plate Systems

Support
Specifies the location of the ring plate. Select Front or Back.
Is Cut By Tube
Specifies whether a connection is created between the tubular member or the ring plate.
Select True for a connection. Select False for no connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place a ring plate with sniped corners (on page 312)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a ring plate with sniped corners

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click RingPlate2.
The Ring Plate 2 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members, n clockwise or counter-clockwise
consecutive order, that support the ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 312


Placing Plate Systems

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the ring plate.
 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the ring plate.

5. Click 2 on the ribbon.


6. Select the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member. It must be orthogonal to the plane defined by the members selected for 1,
and it must pass through the node point.

7. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Offset, Fillet, Slope Ratio, Cutback, and Cutback
2.
8. Select the flange location of the ring plate in the Support list.
9. Select the continuity of the ring plate in the Is Cut By Tube list.
10. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 313


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Ring Plate 2 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Support list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the ring plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 314


Placing Plate Systems

Ring Plate 3

Tooltip: RingPlate3
Creates a ring plate by connecting all flanges on a set of incoming members that share a nodal
connection and a penetrating perpendicular cylindrical member. The ring plate has a large fillet
radius between non-colinear incoming members.
The physical axes of the incoming members are end-point connected and coplanar. The common
end point is the node. The axis of the perpendicular member traverses the node. A ring plate can
be defined by a single incoming member and the perpendicular member. The incoming flange
and web plate parts are trimmed. For built-up members, the incoming flange and web parts are
trimmed by the edges of the ring plate.

The macro computes a local coordinate system from the following:


1. If the ring plate has one incoming member:
 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the member oriented from the nodal point to the other end
of the member.
 Z-axis - Defined by the axis of the perpendicular cylindrical member oriented from the
nodal point to the other end of the perpendicular member.
 Y-axis - Calculated as the cross product of Z-axis by Y-axis.
2. If the ring plate has more than one incoming member

Molded Forms User's Guide 315


Placing Plate Systems

 X-axis - Defined by the axis of the first located member oriented from the nodal point to
the other end of the member.
 Y-axis - Defined by the axis of the second located member oriented from the nodal point
to the other end of the member.
 Z-axis - Calculated as the cross product of X-axis by Y-axis.

Ring Plate 3 Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1
Specifies the members that support the ring plate. These members can be rolled or built-up
members. Their physical axes must be coplanar and connected at the end points. Select the
first two members in a clockwise or counter-clockwise direction. The first member that you
select defines the X-axis for the ring plate. If you select a second member, that member
defines the Y-axis for the ring plate. If there is only a single incoming member, then the
macro computes the Y-axis based on the supporting member and the perpendicular
member.
2
Specifies the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or
built-up member. It must be orthogonal to the plane described by the members selected in
step 1, and it must pass through the node.

(Optional) Specifies secondary members that are attached to the face of the side plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

Molded Forms User's Guide 316


Placing Plate Systems

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 317


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Weld toe
2 - Fillet
3 - Cutback
4 - Offset

Weld Toe
Specifies the offset distance between the edges of the members and the ring plate free
edges.
Offset
Specifies the offset between the extracted cylinder and the outer circle of the ring plate free
edges.
Fillet
Specifies the radius of the fillet between the offset radius and the cutback length of the ring
plate free edge.
Cutback
Specifies the distance to cut back the incoming members from the fillet.
Extension
Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly extend
the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Support

Molded Forms User's Guide 318


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the location of the ring plate. Select Front or Back.


Is Cut By Tube
Specifies whether a connection is created between the tubular member or the ring plate.
Select True for a connection. Select False for no connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place a ring plate with radial edges (on page 319)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a ring plate with radial edges

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Side Plates tab, click RingPlate3.
The Ring Plate 3 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the co-planar members, in a clockwise or counter-clockwise
consecutive order, that support the ring plate.

 The first member that you select defines the X-axis for the ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 319


Placing Plate Systems

 The second member that you select defines the Y-axis for the ring plate.

5. Click 2 on the ribbon.


6. Select the tubular member that penetrates the ring plate. This member can be a rolled or built
up member. It must be orthogonal to the plane defined by the members selected for 1, and it
must pass through the node.

7. Type the required values for Weld Toe, Offset, Fillet, and Cutback.
8. Select the location of the ring plate in the Support list.
9. Select the continuity of the ring plate in the Is Cut By Tube list.
10. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 320


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Ring Plate 3 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Support list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the ring plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Continuity Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macro creates continuity plates between side or ring plates
and along the webs of supported members. Continuity plates are typically used to create offshore
nodal connections between built-up members in combination with transition plates, sides plates,
and ring plates.

Molded Forms User's Guide 321


Placing Plate Systems

Continuity Plate - Creates a plate along supported member webs at the


connection with supporting members and between top and bottom side plates
or ring plates. For more information, see Continuity Plate (on page 322).

Continuity Plate

Tooltip: ContinuityPlate
Creates a plate along supported member webs at the connection with supporting members and
between top and bottom side plates or ring plates. Continuity plates are typically used to create
offshore nodal connections between built-up members in combination with transition plates, sides
plates, and ring plates.

Continuity Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).

Molded Forms User's Guide 322


Placing Plate Systems

 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

1 - Specifies the supported member with which to establish the continuity.


2 - Specifies the transition plate with which to limit the length of the continuity plate.
3 - Specifies the first bounding side or ring plate.
4 - Specifies the second bounding side or ring plate.
5 - Specifies the supporting member to use as a reference for the Location parameter. In the
above figure, you can select either supporting member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 323


Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Location - Specifies the location of the continuity plate with respect to the selected reference
member 5. Select Near, Far, or Centered.

Molded Forms User's Guide 324


Placing Plate Systems

Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

What do you want to do?


 Place a continuity plate (on page 325)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a continuity plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. At the nodal connection, create two ring plates or side plates.
Place a ring plate (on page 305)
Place a side plate (on page 288)
4. At the nodal connection, create a transition plate.
Place a transition plate (on page 332)
5. On the Continuity Plates tab, click ContinuityPlate.
The Continuity Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 325


Placing Plate Systems

6. In a graphic view, select the supported member.

7. Select the transition plate.

8. Select the first side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 326


Placing Plate Systems

9. Select the second side or ring plate.

10. Select the supporting member to use as a reference for Location.

11. Select the location of the continuity plate in the Location list.
12. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate display in the
graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

13. If the plate preview does not display on the correct side of the supported member, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

Molded Forms User's Guide 327


Placing Plate Systems

The ribbon display returns to the Continuity Plate ribbon.


b. Select another option from the Location list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the repositioned continuity plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

14. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
15. Click Finish.
The software creates the continuity plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Transition Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macros create transition plates between side or ring plates,
and along the webs of supporting members. Transition plates are typically used to create
offshore nodal connections between built-up members in combination with continuity plates,
sides plates, and ring plates.

Transition Plate - Creates a plate along supporting member webs between top
and bottom side plates or ring plates. For more information, see Transition
Plate (on page 329).

Gap Transition Plate - Creates a plate to fill the gap between the webs or
flanges of two profile systems or members of differing dimensions. For more
information, see Gap Transition Plate (on page 334).

Molded Forms User's Guide 328


Placing Plate Systems

Transition Plate

Tooltip: TransitionPlate
Creates a plate used to transition along the webs of supporting members and between sets of
side or ring plates. Transition plates are typically used to create offshore nodal connections
between built-up members in combination with continuity plates, sides plates, and ring plates.

Transition Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).

Molded Forms User's Guide 329


Placing Plate Systems

 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

1 - Specifies the first member with which to establish the transition.


2 - Specifies the second opposing and collinear member with which to establish the transition.
3 - Specifies the first bounding side or ring plate.
4 - Specifies the second bounding side or ring plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Molded Forms User's Guide 330


Placing Plate Systems

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Extension - Specifies the distance to extend the trimming planes. If the macro does not properly
extend the trimming planes through all of the member cross-section, you can increase this value.

Side - Specifies the location of the transition plate with respect to the computed coordinate
system. Select Bottom, Top, or Centered.

What do you want to do?


 Place a transition plate (on page 332)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Molded Forms User's Guide 331


Placing Plate Systems

Place a transition plate

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. At the nodal connection, create two ring plates or side plates.
Place a ring plate (on page 305)
Place a side plate (on page 288)
4. On the Transition Plates tab, click TransitionPlate.
The Transition Plate ribbon displays.
5. In a graphic view, select the first supporting member with which to establish the transition.

6. Select the second collinear member with which to establish the transition.

Molded Forms User's Guide 332


Placing Plate Systems

7. Select the first side or ring plate.

8. Select the second side or ring plate.

9. Select the location of the transition plate from the Side list.
10. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct side of the supporting members, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

Molded Forms User's Guide 333


Placing Plate Systems

The ribbon display returns to the Transition Plate ribbon.


b. Select another option from the Side list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the repositioned transition plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the transition plate.

If the macro does not properly cut through the member cross-sections, type a new
distance to extend the trimming planes in the Extension box.

Gap Transition Plate

Tooltip: TransitionPlateGap
Creates a plate to fill the gap between the webs or flanges of two profile systems or members of
differing dimensions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 334


Placing Plate Systems

Gap Transition Plates Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first member or profile system with which to establish the transition.
2 - Specifies the second member or profile system with which to establish the transition.
- Optionally, select a bounding plate system. Typically, you select a plate system or a flange
when creating a transition plate web.
- Optionally, select a second bounding plate system. Typically, you select a plate system or a
flange when creating a transition plate web.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 335


Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Location - Specifies the location of the continuity plate with respect to the selected members.
Select one of the following options:

1 - Top
2 - Bottom
3 - Left
4 - Right
5 - Centered-horiz
6 - Centered-vert

 Top - Transitions between the top flanges of profile systems or members, or between the
bottom walls of box members.
 Bottom - Transitions between the bottom flanges of profile systems or members, or between
the bottom walls of box members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 336


Placing Plate Systems

 Left - Transitions between the left side walls of box members.


 Right - Transitions between the right side walls of box members.
 Centered-horiz - Transitions between interior horizontal stiffeners of profile systems or
members.
 Centered-vert - Transitions between the webs of profile systems or members, or between
the interior horizontal stiffeners of box members.

What do you want to do?


 Place a gap transition plate between flanges (on page 337)
 Place a gap transition plate between webs (on page 339)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a gap transition plate between flanges


In this workflow, a gap transition plate is placed between flanges of two marine profile systems.
The parent plate system is hidden in the illustrations.

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Transition Plates tab, click TransitionPlateGap.
The Gap Transition Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the first profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 337


Placing Plate Systems

5. Select the second profile system.

6. Select Top on the Location list.


7. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
9. Click Finish.
The software creates the gap transition plate between the profile flanges.

Molded Forms User's Guide 338


Placing Plate Systems

Place a gap transition plate between webs


In this workflow, a gap transition plate is placed between webs of two marine profile systems.
The parent plate system is hidden in the illustrations.

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. Create the gap transition plate between the profile flanges.
Place a gap transition plate between flanges (on page 337)
4. On the Transition Plates tab, click TransitionPlateGap.
The Gap Transition Plate ribbon displays.
5. In a graphic view, select the first profile system.

6. Select the second profile system.

7. Click .

Molded Forms User's Guide 339


Placing Plate Systems

8. Select the parent plate system to bound the transition plate.

9. Click .
10. Select the flange transition plate to bound the opposite side of the transition plate.

11. Select Centered-vert on the Location list.


12. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

13. If the plate preview does not display in the correct location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .

Molded Forms User's Guide 340


Placing Plate Systems

The ribbon display returns to the Gap Transition Plate ribbon.


b. Select another option from the Location list, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the repositioned plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display
returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

14. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
15. Click Finish.
The software creates the gap transition plate between the profile webs.

Buckling Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macros create buckling plates on members or at nodal
connections. A buckling plate stiffens the web and flange of a member. The buckling plate can be
positioned by and bounded to plates sharing a nodal connection with the member, or can be
defined by dimensions.

Boxed Member Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a


built-up boxed member. For more information, see Boxed Member Buckling
Plate (on page 342).

Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate aligned with one or two flanges of
built-up members or with continuity plates. For more information, see Buckling
Plate (on page 347).

Buckling Plate along Member - Creates a buckling plate along a member at a


nodal connection. For more information, see Buckling Plate along Member (on
page 353).

Molded Forms User's Guide 341


Placing Plate Systems

Rolled Member Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate at the intersection of


the flanges of a rolled member with a nodal connection. For more information,
see Rolled Member Buckling Plate (on page 358).

Tubular Member Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a


built-up tubular member. For more information, see Tubular Member Buckling
Plate (on page 363).

Partial Buckling Plate - Creates a partial buckling plate on one side of the web
of a member and on one flange of the member. For more information, see
Partial Buckling Plate (on page 368).

One-sided Buckling Plate - Creates a buckling plate on one side of the web of
a member. For more information, see One-sided Buckling Plate (on page 373).

Boxed Member Buckling Plate

Molded Forms User's Guide 342


Placing Plate Systems

Tooltip: Buckling_Box
Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a built-up boxed member. To locate the buckling plate,
you specify the offset distance from the start node of the member.

Boxed Member Buckling Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the built-up boxed member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 343


Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Distance - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the start node of the
member.

What do you want to do?


 Place a buckling plate along a built-up boxed member (on page 344)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate along a built-up boxed member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 344


Placing Plate Systems

3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click Buckling_Box.


The Boxed Member Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a built-up boxed member. The name of this member type typically
starts with BUBox....
The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. Type the required offset value for Distance, and then click Accept .
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
6. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the

Molded Forms User's Guide 345


Placing Plate Systems

Advanced Plate System ribbon.

7. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Boxed Member Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Type a new offset value for Distance, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new offset location, displays in the graphic view. The
ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
9. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 346


Placing Plate Systems

Buckling Plate

Tooltip:BucklingPlate
Creates a buckling plate aligned with one or two flanges of built-up members or with continuity
plates. The buckling plate typically stiffens a transition plate and is limited (bounded) by two side
plates.
If you specify one flange or continuity plate, then the buckling plate is positioned at the point at
which the plate intersects the first side plate and orients normal to nodal connection plates. In the
following example, the continuity plate is yellow, and the buckling plate is green.

If you specify two flanges or continuity plates, then the buckling plate is positioned between the
intersection of the first flange and the first side plate, and the intersection of the second flange
and the second side plate. In the following example, the continuity plates are yellow, and the
buckling plate is green.

Molded Forms User's Guide 347


Placing Plate Systems

Buckling Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first built-up flange or continuity plate with which to align the buckling plate.
2 - Specifies the first bounding plate, such as a side plate or a built-up flange.
3 - Specifies the second bounding plate, such as a side plate or a built-up flange.
- (Optional) Specifies a second built-up flange or continuity plate with which to align the
buckling plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a first lateral bounding plate, such as a transition plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a second lateral bounding plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 348


Placing Plate Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

What do you want to do?


 Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges or continuity plates (on page 349)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges or continuity plates

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlate.
The Buckling Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 349


Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select a built-up member flange or continuity plate incoming to the side or
ring plate of a nodal connection. Flanges are used in the following example.

5. Select the first side or ring plate.

6. Select the second side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 350


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays.

7. Optionally, click , and then select a second built-up member flange or continuity plate
incoming to the side or ring plate.
The geometric constructions adjust to transition between the two flanges.

8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 351


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 352


Placing Plate Systems

Buckling Plate along Member

Tooltip: BucklingPlate0
Creates a buckling plate along a member at a nodal connection. To locate the buckling plate, you
specify the offset distance from the node of the nodal connection.

Buckling Plate along Member Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the rolled or built-up member incoming to a nodal connection.
2 - Specifies the first bounding side or ring plate.
3 - Specifies the second bounding side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 353


Placing Plate Systems

- Optionally, select a first lateral bounding plate, such as a transition plate.


- Optionally, select a second lateral bounding plate.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Distance from - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the node of the
nodal connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 354


Placing Plate Systems

What do you want to do?


 Place a buckling plate along a member (on page 355)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate along a member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlate0.
The Buckling Plate along Member ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a rolled or built-up member.

5. Select the first side or ring plate.

6. Select the second side or ring plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 355


Placing Plate Systems

The geometric constructions used to create the plate display in the graphic view.

7. Type the required offset value for Distance from, and click Accept .
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 356


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Buckling Plate along Member ribbon.
b. Type a new offset value for Distance from, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new offset location, displays in the graphic view. The
ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 357


Placing Plate Systems

Rolled Member Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlate1r
Creates a buckling plate at the intersection of the flanges of a rolled member with a nodal
connection. The buckling plate orients normal to nodal connection plates.

Rolled Member Buckling Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the rolled member incoming to the nodal connection.
2 - Specifies the first bounding plate, such as a side plate or an insert plate.
3 - Specifies the second bounding plate, such as a side plate or an insert plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a first lateral bounding plate, such as a transition plate.
- (Optional) Specifies a second lateral bounding plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 358


Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Location - Specifies the web of the member for placement of the buckling plate. Select Inside or
Outside.

Molded Forms User's Guide 359


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Inside
2 - Outside

What do you want to do?


 Place a buckling plate at a rolled member and a nodal connection (on page 360)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate at a rolled member and a nodal connection

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlate1r.
The Rolled Member Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a rolled member incoming to the side or ring plate of a nodal
connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 360


Placing Plate Systems

5. Select the first side or ring plate.

6. Select the second side or ring plate.

7. Select the required value for Location, and click Accept .

Molded Forms User's Guide 361


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Inside
2 - Outside

8. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate
display in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System
ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display at the required flange, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Rolled Member Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Select a new value for Location, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new location, displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 362


Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the buckling plate.

12. Repeat the previous steps to place a buckling plate at the other rolled member flange.

Tubular Member Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlateForTube
Creates a buckling plate on the interior of a built-up tubular member. To locate the buckling plate,
you specify the offset distance from the start or end node of the member.

Tubular Member Buckling Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).

Molded Forms User's Guide 363


Placing Plate Systems

Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the built-up tubular member.
- Select the member node used for offset distance measurement. The start node is the
default selection.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 364


Placing Plate Systems

Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Distance - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the selected node of
the member.

What do you want to do?


 Place a buckling plate along a built-up tubular member (on page 365)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate along a built-up tubular member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlateForTube.
The Tubular Member Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a built-up tubular member. The name of this member type typically
starts with BUTube....

Molded Forms User's Guide 365


Placing Plate Systems

The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. If a different node is needed, click , and then select the node.


The new node highlights, and the intersection plane offsets from the new node.

6. Type the required offset value for Distance, and click Accept .

Molded Forms User's Guide 366


Placing Plate Systems

The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
7. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

8. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Tubular Member Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Type a new offset value for Distance, click Accept , and then click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 367


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate, now in the new offset location, displays in the graphic view. The
ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the buckling plate.

Partial Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlatePartial
Creates a partial buckling plate on one side of the web of a member and on one flange of the
member. To locate the buckling plate, you specify the offset distance from the start node of the
member.

Partial Buckling Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 368


Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the member. Select a rolled or a built-up member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

Molded Forms User's Guide 369


Placing Plate Systems

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Offset - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the start node of the
member.

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height 1
5 - Height 2
6 - Radius
7 - Top/Bottom
8 - Near/Far

Height 1 - Specifies the distance from the flange on the connected edge to the transition point.
Height 2 - Specifies the distance from the free edge of the buckling plate to the transition point.
Height 1 plus Height 2 is the total height of the partial buckling plate.
Weld Toe 1 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member top flange and the
buckling plate free edge at Height 1.
Weld Toe 2 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member web and the
buckling plate free edge at Height 2.
Radius - Specifies the interior corner radius.
Top/Bottom - Specifies the flange for placement of the connected edge. Select Top or Bottom.
Near/Far - Specifies the side of the member web for placement of the buckling plate. Select Near
or Far.

What do you want to do?


 Place a partial buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 371)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Molded Forms User's Guide 370


Placing Plate Systems

Place a partial buckling plate on one side of a member web

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlatePartial.
The Partial Buckling Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select a member.
The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. Type the required distance value for Offset, and press TAB.
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
6. Type the required values for Height 1, Height 2, Weld Toe 1, Weld Toe 2, and Radius.

Molded Forms User's Guide 371


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height 1
5 - Height 2
6 - Radius
7 - Top/Bottom
8 - Near/Far

7. Select the required flange in the Top/Bottom box.


8. Select the required web side in the Near/Far box.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Partial Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Select new values for Near/Far and Top/Bottom, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new web side and flange side, displays in the graphic
view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 372


Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the buckling plate.

One-sided Buckling Plate

Tooltip: BucklingPlateOneSide
Creates a buckling plate on one side of the web of a member. To locate the buckling plate, you
specify the offset distance from the start node of the member.

One-sided Buckling Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 373


Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the member. Select a rolled or a built-up member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

Molded Forms User's Guide 374


Placing Plate Systems

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Offset - Specifies the location of the buckling plate as the distance from the start node of the
member.

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height
5 - Near/Far

Weld Toe 1 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member top flange and the
free edge of the buckling plate.
Weld Toe 2 - Specifies the offset distance between the edge of the member bottom flange and
the free edge of the buckling plate.
Height - Specifies the distance from the bottom flange to the transition point. This option is
applicable when the values of Weld Toe 1 and Weld Toe 2 differ.
Near/Far - Specifies the side of the member web for placement of the buckling plate. Select Near
or Far.

What do you want to do?


 Place a buckling plate on one side of a member web (on page 375)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a buckling plate on one side of a member web

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Buckling Plate tab, click BucklingPlateOneSide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 375


Placing Plate Systems

The One-sided Buckling Plate ribbon displays.


4. In a graphic view, select a member.
The intersection plane geometric construction, normal to the member axis and offset from the
member start point, displays.

5. Type the required distance value for Offset, and press TAB.
The intersection plane moves to the new offset location.

To better see the point at which the plane intersects the member, change the
orientation of the graphic view.
6. Type the required values for Weld Toe 1, Weld Toe 2, and Height.

Molded Forms User's Guide 376


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Member
2 - Weld Toe 1
3 - Weld Toe 2
4 - Height
5 - Near/Far

7. Select the required web side in the Near/Far box.


8. Click Continue.
A preview of the buckling plate displays in the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

9. If the plate preview does not display in the required location, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the One-sided Buckling Plate ribbon.
b. Select a new value for Near/Far, click Accept , and then click Continue.
A preview of the plate, now in the new web side, displays in the graphic view. The ribbon
display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
11. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 377


Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the buckling plate.

Brackets Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macro creates a bracket plate between supporting profile
stiffeners systems and a supporting plate system.

Knuckled Bracket - Creates a bracket plate containing a knuckle when the


webs of supporting profiles are not coplanar. For more information, see
Knuckled Bracket (on page 379).

Molded Forms User's Guide 378


Placing Plate Systems

Knuckled Bracket

Tooltip: KnuckledBracket
Creates a bracket plate containing a knuckle when the webs of supporting profiles are not
coplanar. A bracket stiffens profile stiffeners and a supporting plate.
If the supports for a bracket are coplanar and a knuckled bracket is not needed, use
Bracket Plate System . For more information, see Bracket Plate System (on page 227).

Knuckled Bracket Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first profile system support. The widest side of the knuckle is along this system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 379


Placing Plate Systems

2 - Specifies the second profile system support.


3 - Specifies the plate system support.
4 - Specifies the coordinate system. If there are multiple coordinate systems, select the
coordinate system to use for justification of the bracket.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 380


Placing Plate Systems

1 - First profile system


2 - Second profile system
3 - Plate system
4 - Knuckle height for partial knuckle
5 - Left for Justif #1 and Justif #2, and
direction of negative value for U-offset
#1 and U-offset #2.
6 - Right for Justif #1 and Justif #2, and
direction of positive value for U-offset #1
and U-offset #2.
7 - Bracket
8 - Bracket knuckle
9 - Positive/negative directions for
Orientation.

Auto Preview - Specifies whether a preview of the bracket displays. The preview updates as
options are changed. Select On or Off.
Orientation - Specifies the direction of the bracket relative to the selected plate system 3 and the
selected coordinate system 4.
Width - Specifies the width of the bracket as measured from the plate system.
Knuckle Type - Specifies whether the knuckle extends to the full height of the plate. Select
Partial to define a height of the knuckle from profile system 1. Select Full to define the height of
the knuckle the full height between profile systems 1 and 2.
Knuckle Height - Defines the height of the knuckle from profile system 1. This option is only
available when Full is selected for Knuckle Type.
Justif #1 - Specifies the justification of the bracket on the flange of profile system 1. Select
Centered to center the bracket on the flange. Select Left to position the bracket on the left side
of the flange. Select Right to position the bracket on the right side of the flange. Left and Right
are defined by looking toward the free edge of the bracket when the top of your view is toward
support and are independent of the secondary orientation of the profile system supports. The
default value is Centered.
U-offset #1 - Specifies the distance to offset the bracket on the flange of profile system 1. A
positive value offsets the bracket to the right when looking toward the free edge of the bracket. A
negative value offsets the bracket to the left when looking toward the free edge of the bracket.
The maximum value is one-half of the flange width.
Justif #2 - Specifies the justification of the bracket on the flange of profile system 2. Select
Centered to center the bracket on the flange. Select Left to position the bracket on the left side
of the flange. Select Right to position the bracket on the right side of the flange. Left and Right
are defined by looking toward the free edge of the bracket and are independent of the secondary
orientation of the profile system. The default value is Centered.
U-offset #2 - Specifies the distance to offset the bracket on the flange of profile system 2. A
positive value offsets the bracket to the right when looking toward the free edge of the bracket. A
negative value offsets the bracket to the left when looking toward the free edge of the bracket.
The maximum value is one-half of the flange width.

Molded Forms User's Guide 381


Placing Plate Systems

What do you want to do?


 Place a knuckled bracket (on page 382)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a knuckled bracket

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Brackets tab, click KnuckledBracket.
The Knuckled Bracket ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the first profile system support. The widest side of the knuckle is
along this system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 382


Placing Plate Systems

5. Select the second profile system support.

6. Select the plate system support.

7. Select the coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 383


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the geometric constructions used to create the bracket displays in the graphic
view.

8. If the bracket is not on the required side of the plate system, select an axis in the opposite
direction in the Orientation box. For example, in the previous figure, if -x is the value, then
select +x to switch the bracket to the other side of the plate.
9. Type the required value for Width.
10. Select the knuckle type. If it is a partial knuckle, type a value for Knuckle Height.
11. Set values for justification (Justif #1 and Justif #2) and offset (U-offset #1 and U-offset #2)
at each end of the bracket.
12. Click Continue.
A preview of the bracket displays in the graphic view, and the Advanced Plate System
ribbon returns.

If changes to the bracket parameters are needed, click Select Supports to


return to the Knuckled Bracket ribbon, and repeat the previous steps.
13. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 384


Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the knuckled bracket.

Insert Plate Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced plate system macros create insert plates, which reinforce intersecting
members or supported and supporting members.
If the members share a nodal connection, use a side plate. For more information, see
Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box) (on page 284).

Cross Insert Plate - Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between


supporting and supported members. For more information, see Cross Insert
Plate (on page 386).

Cross Insert Plate 1 - Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between


intersecting members. For more information, see Cross Insert Plate 1 (on page
390).

Tee Insert Plate - Creates a tee-shaped insert plate between supported and
supporting members. For more information, see Tee Insert Plate (on page
394).

Molded Forms User's Guide 385


Placing Plate Systems

Column Insert Plate - Creates an insert plate along a member flange and at
the end of a column or brace. For more information, see Column Insert Plate
(on page 398).

Column Tee Insert Plate - Creates an insert plate between intersecting


members and at the end of a column or brace. For more information, see
Column Tee Insert Plate (on page 403).

Cross Insert Plate

Tooltip: CrossInsertPlate
Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between supporting and supported members.

Cross Insert Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:

Molded Forms User's Guide 386


Placing Plate Systems

 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies a supporting member. The member can be continuous or two connected members.
2 - Specifies the first supported member.
3 - Specifies the second supported member that is colinear with the first supported member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns

Molded Forms User's Guide 387


Placing Plate Systems

to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length - Specifies the length of the insert plate in each direction from the intersection of the
supported and supporting members.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the insert plate at each inside corner of the cross.
Direction - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?


 Place a cross insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 388)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a cross insert plate on supporting and supported members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click CrossInsertPlate.
The Cross Insert Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the supporting member or two connected members.

5. Click 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 388


Placing Plate Systems

6. Select the first supported member.

7. Select the second supported member.

8. Type the required values for Length and Radius.


9. Select the flange location of the insert plate from the Direction list.
10. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

Molded Forms User's Guide 389


Placing Plate Systems

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Cross Insert Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Direction list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

12. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Cross Insert Plate 1

Tooltip: CrossInsertPlate1
Creates a cross or plus-shaped insert plate between intersecting members.

Cross Insert Plate 1 Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 390


Placing Plate Systems

Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).


Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the first intersecting member. The member can be continuous or two connected
members.
2 - Specifies the second intersecting member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 391


Placing Plate Systems

Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length - Specifies the length of the insert plate in each direction from the intersection of the
intersecting members.
Width - Specifies the width of the insert plate centered along each member flange.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the insert plate at each inside corner of the cross.
Direction - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?


 Place a cross insert plate on intersecting members (on page 392)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a cross insert plate on intersecting members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click CrossInsertPlate1.
The Cross Insert Plate 1 ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the first intersecting member or two connected members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 392


Placing Plate Systems

5. Click 2.
6. Select the second intersecting member.

7. Type the required values for Length, Width, and Radius.


8. Select the location of the insert plate from the Direction list.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Cross Insert Plate 1 ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Direction list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 393


Placing Plate Systems

The software creates the insert plate.

Tee Insert Plate

Tooltip: TInsertPlate
Creates a tee-shaped insert plate between a supported and a supporting member.

Tee Insert Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).

Molded Forms User's Guide 394


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Specifies a supporting member. The member can be continuous or two connected members.
2 - Specifies the first supported member.
3 - Specifies the second supported member that is colinear with the first supported member.

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.
Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length - Specifies the length of the insert plate in each direction from the intersection of the
supported and supporting members.
Width - Specifies the width of the insert plate centered along each member flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 395


Placing Plate Systems

Radius - Specifies the radius of the insert plate at each inside corner of the cross.
Direction - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?


 Place a tee insert plate on supporting and supported members (on page 396)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a tee insert plate on supporting and supported members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click TInsertPlate.
The Tee Insert Plate ribbon displays.
4. In a graphic view, select the supporting member or two connected members.

5. Click 2.
6. Select the supported member.

7. Type the required values for Length, Width, and Radius.

Molded Forms User's Guide 396


Placing Plate Systems

8. Select the location of the insert plate from the Direction list.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Tee Insert Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Direction list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flanges, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 397


Placing Plate Systems

Column Insert Plate

Tooltip: InsertPlate
Creates an insert plate along a member flange and at the end of one or more columns or braces.

Column Insert Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the supporting beam member or edge reinforcement. The member can be a rolled
member or a built-up member.
2 - Specifies the column or brace connected to the supporting member.
- (Optional) Specifies secondary columns or braces that are also attached to the insert plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 398


Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 399


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Length Offset
2 - Width Offset
3 - Offset
4 - Slope

Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Length Offset - Specifies the distance of the connected edge of the insert plate from the column
along the length of the supporting member.
Width Offset - Specifies the distance of the free edge of the insert plate from the column.
Offset - Specifies the distance of the snipe corner from the edge of the supporting member
flange.
Slope - Specifies the angle of the sniped corners.
Location - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?


 Place a column insert plate along a member (on page 400)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a column insert plate along a member

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click InsertPlate.
The Column Insert Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 400


Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select a continuous beam member.

5. Select the column or brace.

6. Optionally, click , and select secondary columns or braces.


7. Type the required values for Length Offset, Width Offset, Offset, and Slope.

1 - Length Offset
2 - Width Offset
3 - Offset
4 - Slope

8. Select the member side for the insert plate from the Location list.
9. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 401


Placing Plate Systems

A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Column Insert Plate ribbon.
b. Select the opposite location from the Location list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flange, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 402


Placing Plate Systems

Column Tee Insert Plate

Tooltip: TInsertPlate1
Creates an insert plate between a supported and a supporting member and, optionally, at the end
of a column or brace.

Column Tee Insert Plate Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Advanced Plate System Properties dialog box to view and modify the properties
of the advanced plate system. The software defines the default properties from the selected
structural specification and the advanced plate system rules. For more information, see
Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 408).
Macro Definition
Specifies the advanced plate system macro to use. The macro that you select determines the
inputs that the software requires. Select one of the following:
 Advanced plate system macros on the selected tab of the Advanced Plate Palette
dialog box. The current macro is the default value.
 Recently selected macros.
 Construction - Creates a custom advanced plate system by using a basic geometric
construction macro. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
 APS Icon Browser - Displays the Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).
 More - Displays a list of all available advanced plate system macros. For more
information, see Select Macro Dialog Box (on page 408).
1 - Specifies the supporting beam member. The member can be a rolled member or a built-up
member.
2 - Specifies the supported beam member. The member can be a rolled member or a built-up
member.
- (Optional) Specifies the column or brace connected to the supporting member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 403


Placing Plate Systems

Color Coding
For a new advanced plate system, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is newly selected.

 - Yellow background when you change a parameter from the default value.

 - Blue background when you previously selected an input.


Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Reject
Clears the selection for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selection for the current step.
Continue
Completes the advanced plate system definition, shows a preview of the system, and returns
to the Advanced Plate System ribbon. For more information, see Advanced Plate System
(on page 275).

To change the advanced plate system definition, click Select Supports on the
Advanced Plate System ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 404


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Offset 1
2 - Offset 2
3 - Offset

Category - Specifies a category for the macro. This option is not currently used.
Offset 1 - Specifies the distance of the edges of the insert plate from the flange of the supporting
member.
Offset 2 - Specifies the distance of the edges of the insert plate from the flange of the supported
member.
Offset - Specifies the distance of the snipe corner from the edge of the supporting and supported
member flanges.
Location - Specifies the flange on which to place the insert plate, relative to the member major
axis. Select Positive to place the insert plate on the top flanges of the members. Select Negative
to place the insert plate on the bottom flanges of the members.

What do you want to do?


 Place a column insert plate on supporting and supporting members (on page 405)
 Modify an advanced plate system (on page 281)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Place a column insert plate on supporting and supporting members

1. Click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select APS Icon Browser from the Macro Definition list.
The Advanced Plate Palette dialog box displays.
3. On the Insert Plate tab, click TInsertPlate1.
The Column Tee Insert Plate ribbon displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 405


Placing Plate Systems

4. In a graphic view, select a continuous supporting beam member.

5. Select the supported beam member.

6. Optionally, click , and select a column or brace connected to the supporting member.

7. Type the required values for Offset 1, Offset 2, and Offset.

Molded Forms User's Guide 406


Placing Plate Systems

1 - Offset 1
2 - Offset 2
3 - Offset

8. Select the member side for the insert plate from the Location list.
9. Click Continue.
A preview of the plate and the geometric constructions used to create the plate displays in
the graphic view. The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

10. If the plate preview does not display on the correct member flange side, then:

a. Click Select Supports .


The ribbon display returns to the Column Tee Insert Plate ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 407


Placing Plate Systems

b. Select the opposite location from the Location list, click Accept , and then click
Continue.
A preview of the plate, now on the opposite member flange, displays in the graphic view.
The ribbon display returns to the Advanced Plate System ribbon.

11. If needed, click Define Boundaries , and define boundaries for the plate.
12. Click Finish.
The software creates the insert plate.

Select Macro Dialog Box


Specifies an advanced plate system macro to use. The dialog box displays when you click More
in the Macro Definition list. Macros in the catalog database are displayed in a hierarchical list.
After you select a macro, the appropriate options display on the Advanced Plate System ribbon.
This dialog box displays the same macros as the Advanced Plate System dialog box as a list.
For information on the macro types, see Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283).

Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf advanced plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 408


Placing Plate Systems

 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 409)
Material Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 412)
Molded Conventions Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 412)
Relationships Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 426)

Main Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).

Molded Forms User's Guide 409


Placing Plate Systems

StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system


name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 410


Placing Plate Systems

Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active - Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition, because
connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid connections
in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state, select Yes; however,
to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For information on leaf
systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on page 30) in the Molded
Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 411


Placing Plate Systems

Material Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the default material settings for the advanced plate system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the advanced plate system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Molded Forms User's Guide 412


Placing Plate Systems

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 413


Placing Plate Systems

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 414


Placing Plate Systems

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles

Molded Forms User's Guide 415


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.


Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 416


Placing Plate Systems

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 417


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset

Molded Forms User's Guide 418


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 419


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 420


Placing Plate Systems

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction

Molded Forms User's Guide 421


Placing Plate Systems

Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 422


Placing Plate Systems

In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the

Molded Forms User's Guide 423


Placing Plate Systems

plate system to place the profiles.


With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for

Molded Forms User's Guide 424


Placing Plate Systems

designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 425


Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Relationships Tab (Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog


Box)
Displays a list of objects related to the plate system. Select General, Boundaries, Bounds, or
Connections as the relationship category from the list on the right.
List color - Specifies the display color in the graphic view for all items in the list.
Item color - Specifies the display color in the graphic view for a selected item in the list.
Name - Displays the name of the related object.
Type - Displays the type of related object.
Go To - Displays the properties of the selected object.
In the following example, the advanced plate system in magenta, the list color is red, and the
color of the item selected in the list is yellow.

Child Plate System


The Child Plate System command creates a plate system that is a child to and in the same
plane as another plate system. As a child plate system, it inherits the parent plate system's
category, reference plane, molded conventions, material properties, tightness, topological
boundaries, and continuity.

Child Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to create a child plate system in the model.

Plate System Properties


Opens the Child Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the plate system. The initial plate system properties default from the parent

Molded Forms User's Guide 426


Placing Plate Systems

plate system, if there is one, or from the selected structural specification. For more
information, see Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 432).
Select Surface
Specifies an existing plate system in the model that you want to make a child plate system.

Define Boundaries
Defines the outside boundaries of the child plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
When selecting an existing plate system, if displays for Define Boundaries,
then the boundaries do not form a closed shape because a boundary has been modified.
This condition most commonly occurs when the plate system has a sketched boundary that
no longer intersects a plate system or reference plane boundary. Click Define Boundaries
to display the location of the gap in the boundary.

Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Define Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Specifies objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity

Molded Forms User's Guide 427


Placing Plate Systems

If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple
bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.
Sketching Plane
Select the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the Boundary Curve option.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 428


Placing Plate Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 429


Placing Plate Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.

Molded Forms User's Guide 430


Placing Plate Systems

Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

What do you want to do?


 Create a child plate system (on page 431)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Create a child plate system


1. Click Child Plate System command.
2. Select the parent plate system.

3. Click Define Boundaries .


4. Define the child plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Use the Boundary List dialog box (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
5. Click Accept .
6. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
7. Set the remaining child plate system properties.
8. Click Finish.

 The new child plate system references, but does not copy, the surface geometry of the
selected parent plate system.
 If you change the parent surface geometry, all child plate systems that reference that surface
geometry also change.

Molded Forms User's Guide 431


Placing Plate Systems

Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf child plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 432)
Material Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 435)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)
Routing Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the child plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 432


Placing Plate Systems

 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate


type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 433


Placing Plate Systems

Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid

Molded Forms User's Guide 434


Placing Plate Systems

connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the child plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 435


Placing Plate Systems

The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Child Plate System Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the child plate system that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 436


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 437


Placing Plate Systems

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 438


Placing Plate Systems

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 439


Placing Plate Systems

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 440


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 441


Placing Plate Systems

Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 442


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 443


Placing Plate Systems

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 444


Placing Plate Systems

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 445


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Primary Orientation


Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member

Molded Forms User's Guide 446


Placing Plate Systems

Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Molded Forms User's Guide 447


Placing Plate Systems

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 448


Placing Plate Systems

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Ruled Plate System


The Ruled Plate System command creates a plate system that is interpolated between two
non-planar curves, providing a smooth transition. You have the option of selecting existing curves
in the model or drawing the curves in the Sketch 2D environment. A common use for this
command is to place a plate system between two other plate systems that form a corner.

Ruled Plate System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to create a ruled plate system in the model.

Ruled Plate System Properties


Opens the Ruled Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the plate system that you are about to place in the model. The initial plate
system properties default from the parent plate system, if there is one, or from the selected
structural specification. For more information, see Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box
(on page 456).

Molded Forms User's Guide 449


Placing Plate Systems

First Curve Definition


Defines the first curve of the ruled plate system. See the Define Curve Controls and Define
Plane Controls sections below.

Second Curve Definition


Defines the second curve of the ruled plate system. See the Define Curve Controls and
Define Plane Controls sections below.

Define Boundaries
Define the outside boundaries of the plate system. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects in the model or by drawing the boundaries. If you select objects in the
model and those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the plate system to
maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls and Define Plane
Controls sections below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the plate system that you are placing. If the needed system is
not available, click More to open the Select System dialog box. For more information, see
Select System Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Valid systems are created in the Systems and Specifications task or with the New
System command. For more information see the Systems and Specifications User's Guide,
or New System in the Common User's Guide.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part

Molded Forms User's Guide 450


Placing Plate Systems

that is a child to the profile system.


Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.
Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Values are specific to the Type value. For more information, see the molded conventions for
each plate type in Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 110).
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Define Curve Controls


Available when you use the First Curve Definition and Second Curve Definition options.

Pick Curve
Select this option to select an existing curve in the model as a curve for a ruled plate system.
Sketch Curve
Select this option to draw a curve for the ruled plate system.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable

Molded Forms User's Guide 451


Placing Plate Systems

Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Boundary Curve option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
Pressing the SHIFT key selects the Pick Edges option after you have selected a
boundary plate. Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Select this option to pick free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available
if you selected a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object boundary in more than one way, then
you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The software prompts you to select multiple
bounded areas to clarify the needed boundary. For more information, see Solve ambiguous
solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Select this option to draw the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining
the boundaries.

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the First Curve Definition, Second Curve Definition and Boundary
Curve options.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 452


Placing Plate Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 453


Placing Plate Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

What do you want to do?


 Create a ruled plate system using existing curves (on page 454)
 Create a ruled plate system by drawing curves (on page 455)
 Modify a plate system (on page 104)
 Move a plate system to a different system in the model hierarchy (on page 105)
 Delete a plate system (on page 106)

Create a ruled plate system using existing curves


1. Click Ruled Plate System .

2. Click First Curve Definition .

Pick Curve is selected as the default option.


3. Select the first curve.

4. Click Second Curve Definition .

Pick Curve is selected as the default option.


5. Select the second curve.

6. Click Define Boundaries .


7. Define the ruled plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
8. Click Accept .
9. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:

Molded Forms User's Guide 454


Placing Plate Systems

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)


10. Set the remaining plate system properties.
11. Click Finish.

Create a ruled plate system by drawing curves


1. Click Ruled Plate System .

2. Click First Curve Definition .


3. Click Sketch Curve .
4. Specify the sketching plane for the curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

5. Click Add Intersecting Item .


6. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

7. Click Add Projection Item .


8. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

9. Click Sketch 2D .
10. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the first curve for the ruled plate system.
11. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

12. Click Second Curve Definition .


13. Click Sketch Curve .
14. Specify the sketching plane for the second curve using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)

15. Click Add Intersecting Item .


16. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

17. Click Add Projection Item .


18. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

19. Click Sketch 2D .

Molded Forms User's Guide 455


Placing Plate Systems

20. In the Sketch 2D environment, sketch the second curve for the ruled plate system.
21. Click Finish in the Sketch 2D environment.

22. Click Define Boundaries .


23. Define the ruled plate system boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
24. Click Accept .
25. If the boundary definition results in more than one solution, you must select bounded areas
that together compose the total bounded area. Pick the needed solutions using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
26. Set the remaining plate system properties.
27. Click Finish.

Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 457)
Material Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 459)
Molded Conventions Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 460)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)

Molded Forms User's Guide 456


Placing Plate Systems

General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the ruled plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the

Molded Forms User's Guide 457


Placing Plate Systems

plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 458


Placing Plate Systems

Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.


Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the ruled plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 459


Placing Plate Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the ruled plate system that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Molded Forms User's Guide 460


Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 461


Placing Plate Systems

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 462


Placing Plate Systems

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference

Molded Forms User's Guide 463


Placing Plate Systems

Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 464


Placing Plate Systems

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 465


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 466


Placing Plate Systems

Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.

Molded Forms User's Guide 467


Placing Plate Systems

Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Molded Forms User's Guide 468


Placing Plate Systems

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 469


Placing Plate Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 470


Placing Plate Systems

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 471


Placing Plate Systems

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 472


Placing Plate Systems

Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube

Molded Forms User's Guide 473


Placing Plate Systems

member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 474


SECTION 4

Openings
Places an opening in a plate system created in the Molded Forms task. An opening is a cutout
in a plate system that is part of the high-level design. You can specify the shape of the opening
by:
 Sketching it in the Sketch 2D environment. This method provides the most flexibility for
creating a small number of openings or for sketching unusual opening shapes. The openings
can be dimensionally constrained to other objects in the model.
 Selecting a predefined advanced opening macro from the catalog and placing it directly in the
3D model. The opening is defined by a set of supports. This methods provides the most
speed when placing large numbers of openings that share similar constraints.

Opening Properties
When you place an opening, you can define opening properties to better reflect the more
granular details of the purpose of the opening or hole, when it is cut, and how it is produced.
These properties are grouped into the following categories:
Design Properties
Represent the functional purpose of the opening or hole. The design property reflects why
the opening exists in the model. Typical design properties include:
 Access (Permanent)
 Access (Temporary)
 Lightening (Weight Reduction)
 Air Escape
 Liquid Escape
 Air/Liquid Escape
 Foothold
 Martyr
Planning Properties
Represent the staging of the opening or hole. The planning property denotes the point in the
design and production lifecycle when the cut is physically made. Typical planning properties
include:
 Design
 Shop (Assembly)
 Ship (Field)
Production Properties
Represent the production method of the opening or hole. The planning property denotes
whether the cut is truly cut from the system or part, whether it is marked, bridged, and so

Molded Forms User's Guide 475


Openings

forth. Typical production properties include:


 Cut (Default)
 Mark
 Bridge
 Chill Hole (Patch)

 You can place multiple openings at one time on a plate system or copy openings from one
plate system to another. For more information, see Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings
(on page 57).
 Minimum height or distances are maintained by the software for objects that use Sketch 2D,
such as sketched openings. For more information, see Minimum Distance (on page 92).
 When you create or edit an opening, the dialog box title displays the plate system name using
the format [Plate System: <name of the plate system>].

 Openings created in the Molded Forms task appear in conceptual drawings such as
classification scantlings, whereas cutouts and holes created in the Hole Management and
Structural Detailing tasks do not appear in the conceptual drawings. The difference between
an opening and a hole is an important distinction primarily for the Drawings and Reports task.

Openings Ribbon
Specifies the properties for the opening that you are placing.

Opening Properties
Opens the Opening Properties dialog box, which is used to define properties of the opening
that are not available on the ribbon. For more information, see Opening Properties Dialog
Box (on page 482).
Plate System
Selects the plate system on which to place the opening.
Define using 2D sketcher
Defines the opening by sketching in the Sketch 2D environment. See 2D Sketcher Options,
below.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.

Define by catalog selection


Defines an advanced opening directly in the 3D model by selecting an opening geometric
construction and defining its dimensions and supports. This option opens the Opening
Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box.
Opening Palette Dialog Box (on page 482)
Geometric Construction Explorer (on page 703)

Molded Forms User's Guide 476


Openings

Finish
Places the opening using the defined parameters.

2D Sketcher Options
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the opening. This is the first step in defining the opening.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects that intersect the sketching plane in the 3D environment. You
see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Allows you to select objects that do not intersect the sketching plane in the 3D environment.
The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and you see the selected objects in the
Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the opening.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.
/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the

Molded Forms User's Guide 477


Openings

distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selections.
Accept
Accepts all selections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 478


Openings

Opening design type


Specifies the design opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is
Permanent Access. The list is defined by the CutoutDesignType codelist.
Opening planning method
Specifies the planning opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is Design.
The list is defined by the CutoutPlanningMethod codelist.
Opening production method
Specifies the production opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is Cut.
The list is defined by the CutoutProductionMethod codelist.
For more information about opening properties, see Openings (on page 475).

Opening Palette Dialog Box (on page 482)

What do you want to do?


 Place an opening by sketching (on page 479)
 Place an advanced opening (on page 480)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Modify an opening (on page 480)
 Copy and paste a sketched opening (on page 481)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)
 Delete an opening (on page 481)

Place an opening by sketching


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define using 2D sketcher .


4. Specify the sketching plane for the opening using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
If you selected a planar plate system, its surface is automatically specified as the
coincident sketch plane. You can specify another sketch plane by one of the other methods if
needed.

5. Click Add Intersecting Item .


6. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in Sketch 2D as reference geometry.

7. Click Add Projection Item .

Molded Forms User's Guide 479


Openings

8. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in Sketch 2D as reference geometry.

9. Click Sketch 2D .
The Sketch 2D environment opens.
10. Using the available drawing commands in the 2D environment, draw the opening.

 You can draw more than one opening. Each opening is created as a separate object, but
the openings share the same Sketch 2D sketch.
 You can constrain the opening to geometric construction points offset from plate systems.
For more information, see Point at Minimum Distance Command in the SmartSketch
Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
You must sketch a closed contour. See Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page
65) for more information.
11. Use the commands on the Relationship and Dimension toolbars to constrain the opening to
reference geometry, if needed.
12. Click Finish on the ribbon bar in the 2D environment.
The software returns to the 3D environment.
13. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
14. Click Finish.
The opening is created and appears in the graphic view and the Workspace Explorer.

Place an advanced opening


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. In the Opening Palette dialog box, select a tab for the needed opening type, and then select
an opening macro.
5. Follow the help for the selected macro. For more information, see Opening Palette Dialog
Box (on page 482).

Modify an Opening
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.

Molded Forms User's Guide 480


Openings

3. Select the opening to modify. You can select the opening in a graphic view or from the
Workspace Explorer.
4. Using the ribbon controls, edit the opening as needed.
If multiple sketched openings were created on the same sketch, you can modify them at
the same time.

Copy and paste a sketched opening


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the opening to copy. You can select the opening in a graphic view or from the
Workspace Explorer.
4. Click Edit > Copy.
5. Click Edit > Paste.
6. Select Parent of in the Paste dialog box.
7. Select the plate system to receive the opening copy. You can select the plate system in a
graphic view or from the Workspace Explorer.
8. If you want to select a new sketching plane, select StructSketchInput in the Paste dialog
box.
9. Select a planar plate system, planar surface of an extruded plate system, or grid plane to use
as a sketching plane. You can select a plate system or gird plane in a graphic view or from
the Workspace Explorer. You must select the planar surface of an extruded plate system
from a graphic view.
10. Click OK.

 Parent for Naming and StructSketchInput must be parallel to the parent plate system of
the original opening.
 The original opening geometry is pasted to the new sketching plane in the same planar
coordinates used on the original sketching plane.
 Only the original opening geometry is copied. Dimension and relationship constraints on the
original sketch are ignored. Use Copy Similar to copy constraints. For more information, see
Copy by Family (on page 1255).
 The copied opening has no relationship to the original opening. Each opening can be
modified independently. Use Copy Similar if you need a relationship between the openings.
For more information, see Copy by Family (on page 1255).

Delete an opening
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the opening to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Molded Forms User's Guide 481


Openings

Opening Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the opening.
Main Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) (on page 482)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Legacy Catalog Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) (on page 482)

Main Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box)


Name - Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For more
information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule - Select the naming rule to use to name the opening.
 Select StdHierarchyChildNamingRule to use the following syntax: <Parent
Name>-<"Opening Entity"><Index Number>. For example, D0-1DCK-1-Opening Entity1,
where D0 is the reference plane, 1DCK is an index number appended by the plate type
(Deck in this example), 1 is the Workshare Location ID, and Opening Entity1 is Opening
Entity appended by an index number.
 Select User Defined if you want to name the opening yourself using the appropriate box.
Opening design type
Specifies the design opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is
Permanent Access. The list is defined by the CutoutDesignType codelist.
Opening planning method
Specifies the planning opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is Design.
The list is defined by the CutoutPlanningMethod codelist.
Opening production method
Specifies the production opening property for the opening or hole. The default value is Cut.
The list is defined by the CutoutProductionMethod codelist.
For more information about opening properties, see Openings (on page 475).

Legacy Catalog Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box)


This tab is provided only for compatibility with catalog openings created in a model migrated from
earlier versions of the software.

To create new catalog openings, use Define by catalog selection . For more information,
see Openings (on page 475).

Opening Palette Dialog Box


Specifies an advanced opening. The software creates an advanced opening by using a
geometric construction macro. The Opening Palette dialog box displays when you click Define
by catalog selection on the Openings ribbon. Each tab of the palette graphically displays

Molded Forms User's Guide 482


Openings

options available for a type of opening macro in the Catalog database. After you select a macro,
the appropriate options display on the Advanced Openings ribbon.
Filters
Limits the available macros on a tab to the selected type.
Clear Recent
Removes recently selected macros from the Recent tab.
Help
Displays help for the selected macro in a preview window. If no help is available, a preview of
the selected macro displays.
You can also select Tools > Automatic Preview to display the preview window.
Custom Shape Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 484)
Support and Offset Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 505)
0S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 515)
3S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 529)
4S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 555)
0S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 576)
3S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 589)
4S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 615)
0S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 637)
3S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 653)
4S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) (on page 680)
The Recent tab displays macros recently selected on the other tabs. Click Clear
Recent to remove interfaces from this tab.
The Geometric Construction Explorer also displays. As openings are created, a list of opening
macros and output opening geometry display.

Geometric Construction Explorer (on page 703)

Molded Forms User's Guide 483


Openings

Custom Shape Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to select the shape and size of the opening
based on the number of supports.

Advanced Opening with No Supports - Creates an opening with no


supports that you position with X, Y, and Z coordinates. The default position
is the center of the plate. You can select the opening shape (circle, oval, or
rounded rectangle). For more information, see Advanced Opening with No
Supports (on page 484).

Advanced 3S Opening - Creates an opening with three supports. The


opening is positioned by a dimension from the first support and centered
between the second and third support. You can select the opening shape
(circle, oval, or rounded rectangle). For more information, see Advanced 3S
Opening (on page 490).

Advanced 4S Opening - Creates an opening with four supports and


centered between the supports. You can select the opening shape (circle,
oval, or rounded rectangle). For more information, see Advanced 4S Opening
(on page 498).

Advanced Opening with No Supports

Tooltip: AOWithNoSupports
Creates an opening with no supports and positioned by X, Y, and Z coordinates. The default
position is the center of the plate. You can select the opening shape (circle, oval, or rounded
rectangle), and then define the parameters for that shape.

Advanced Opening with No Supports Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 484


Openings

Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 485


Openings

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. Select Circle, Oval, or Rounded Rect.
Radius - Defines the radius of a circular opening.
Length - Defines the length of an oval or rounded rectangle opening.
Width - Defines the width of an oval or rounded rectangle opening.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of a rounded rectangle opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place an advanced opening with no supports (on page 487)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 486


Openings

Place an advanced opening with no supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the Custom Shape tab, click AOWithNoSupports.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
default shape and size values displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local
coordinates at the center of the plate.

6. If required, select a new shape and new values for the dimension and angle values.
The preview reflects the new parameters.

7. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 487


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

8. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
9. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
10. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
11. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 488


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Delete advanced opening geometry


These steps can be performed only when you are creating geometry using an Advanced
Openings ribbon, before the opening object is created in the model.

1. Click Select on the Advanced Openings ribbon.

Do not click Select on the vertical toolbar.


2. In the Geometric Construction Explorer, select the opening macro containing the opening
geometry to be deleted.

3. Click Delete on the ribbon.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue after
defining each opening.
 To delete an opening object after the object is created in the model, see Delete an opening
(on page 481).

Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the advanced opening to modify.
The opening highlights in the graphic view, the ribbon for the opening displays, and the
inputs highlight in the Workspace Explorer.
3. In the Macro Definition box, click More.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box displays. Only the appropriate opening
geometric constructions display.
4. Select the needed opening geometric construction, and then click OK.
The new selection displays in the Macro Definition box with a yellow background. Options
with blue backgrounds contain new values suggested by the software. Options with white

Molded Forms User's Guide 489


Openings

backgrounds retain the values from the previous geometric construction.


5. Make the needed changes to options on the ribbon.
Changed options have a yellow background.
6. Click Accept .
A preview of the changed opening appears.
7. Click Finish.
The software modifies the opening.

Copy and paste an advanced opening


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the opening to copy. You can select the opening in a graphic view or from the
Workspace Explorer.
4. Click Edit > Copy.
5. Click Edit > Paste.
6. Select Parent of in the Paste dialog box.
7. Select the plate system to receive the opening copy. You can select the plate system in a
graphic view or from the Workspace Explorer.
8. If needed, select Select a coordinate system in the Paste dialog box.
9. Select a new coordinate system in the Workspace Explorer.
10. Click OK.

 Only the original opening geometry copies. Dimension and support constraints on the original
opening geometry are ignored. Use Copy Similar to copy constraints. For more information,
see Copy by Family (on page 1255).
 The copied opening has no relationship to the original opening. Each opening can be
modified independently. Use Copy Similar if you need a relationship between the openings.
For more information, see Copy by Family (on page 1255).

Advanced 3S Opening

Tooltip: AO3SupportOpening
Creates an opening with three supports. The opening is positioned by a dimension from the first
support and is centered between the second and third supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 490


Openings

Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

You can select the opening shape (circle, oval, or rounded rectangle), and then define the
parameters for that shape.
If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

Advanced 3S Opening Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 491


Openings

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 492


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:
 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of
these options:Select one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 493


Openings

 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from he closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. Select Circle, Oval, or Rounded Rect.
Radius - Defines the radius of a circular opening.
Length - Defines the length of an oval or rounded rectangle opening.
Width - Defines the width of an oval or rounded rectangle opening.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of a rounded rectangle opening.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.

Molded Forms User's Guide 494


Openings

Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place an advanced opening with three supports (on page 495)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an advanced opening with three supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the Custom Shape tab, click AO3SupportOpening.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 495


Openings

7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, then a preview
displays.

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays: "Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, select a new shape and new values for the dimension and angle values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 496


Openings

The preview reflects the new parameters.

10. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

11. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
12. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 497


Openings

The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.


13. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
14. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Advanced 4S Opening

Tooltip: AO4SupportOpening
Creates an opening with four supports. The opening is centered between the supports.
Select the supports in order of opposing sets.

You can select the opening shape (circle, oval, or rounded rectangle), and then define the
parameters for that shape.
If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

Advanced 4S Opening Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 498


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 499


Openings

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 500


Openings

Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 501


Openings

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. Select Circle, Oval, or Rounded Rect. For some
opening types, the shape is defined and cannot be changed.
Radius - Defines the radius of a circular opening.
Length - Defines the length of an oval or rounded rectangle opening.
Width - Defines the width of an oval or rounded rectangle opening.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of a rounded rectangle opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place an advanced opening with four supports (on page 502)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an advanced opening with four supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the Custom Shape tab, click AO4SupportOpening.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 502


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. If required, select a new shape and new values for the dimension and angle values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 503


Openings

The preview reflects the new parameters.

9. If required, change the Dimension Type value to change the opening distance from the
supports.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 504


Openings

The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.


12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Support and Offset Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to offset the sides of an opening from the
selected supports.

3S Support and Offset Opening - Creates an opening with sides offset from
three supports. You can define the offset distance from each support, and the
radius at each corner. For more information, see 3S Support and Offset
Opening (on page 505).

4S Support and Offset Opening - Creates an opening with sides offset from
four supports. You can define the offset distance from each support, and the
radius at each corner. For more information, see 4S Support and Offset
Opening (on page 512).

3S Support and Offset Opening

Tooltip: 3SSupportAndOffsetOpenings

Molded Forms User's Guide 505


Openings

Creates an opening with sides offset from three supports. Select the supports in clockwise or
counterclockwise sequential order.

You can define the offset distance from each support, and the radius at each corner.

3S Support and Offset Opening Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.
3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must intersect the
first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.
4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. This support must intersect the
second and first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.
6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

Molded Forms User's Guide 506


Openings

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Category - Specifies the type of opening parameters to define. Select All Supports, Support 1,
Support 2, Support 3, or Support 4.

Molded Forms User's Guide 507


Openings

Radius - Defines the radius of each corner of the opening for the All Supports category.
Radius 1, Radius 2, Radius 3, or Radius 4 - Defines the corner radius at the start of the support
selected for Category.
Supp Offset - Defines the offset of the opening from each support for the All Supports category.
Supp 1 Offset, Supp 2 Offset, Supp 3 Offset, or Supp 4 Offset - Defines the offset of the
opening from the support selected for Category.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support for the All
Supports category. Select one of the following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Dimension 1 Type, Dimension 2 Type, Dimension 3 Type, or Dimension 4 Type - Defines


how the edge of the opening is located from the support selected for Category. See Dimension
Type, above, for the available options.
Ambiguity 1 - Specifies the location on which to place the opening if two solutions are possible.
Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. The preview of the opening updates based on the selected value.
This option displays only when needed. For more information, see the example below.
Ambiguity 2 - When used in conjunction with Ambiguity 1, specifies the location on which to
place the opening if four solutions are possible. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. The preview of the
opening updates based on the selected values. This option displays only when needed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 508


Openings

In the following example, two plate systems and a circular hull are used as supports and result in
four possible solutions. Selecting +y for Ambiguity 1 and +z for the Ambiguity 2 results in the
solution shown in green.

If you select a value that is not valid, such as an x or z value for Ambiguity 1 or an x
value for Ambiguity 2, then an error message displays.

What do you want to do?


 Place an advanced opening offset from three supports (on page 509)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an advanced opening offset from three supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the Support and Offset tab, click 3SSupportAndOffsetOpenings.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
6. Click 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 509


Openings

7. Select the first support, the second support and the third support in clockwise or
counterclockwise sequencial order.

In this example, the hull is clipped in the graphic view.


The opening preview displays.

8. If there is more than one possible solution, select the required location.

9. If required, change the radius, offset, and dimension type values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 510


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 511


Openings

4S Support and Offset Opening

Tooltip: 4SSupportAndOffsetOpenings
Creates an opening with sides offset from four supports. Select the supports in clockwise or
counterclockwise sequential order.

You can define the offset distance from each support, and the radius at each corner.

4S Support and Offset Opening Ribbon

What do you want to do?


 Place an advanced opening offset from four supports (on page 512)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an advanced opening offset from four supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the Support and Offset tab, click 4SSupportAndOffsetOpenings.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, the second support, the third support, and the fourth support in
clockwise or counterclockwise sequencial order.

Molded Forms User's Guide 512


Openings

The opening preview displays.

8. If there is more than one possible solution, select the required location.

9. If required, change the radius, offset, and dimension type values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 513


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 514


Openings

0S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place circular openings with no supports.
The software positions a no-support opening by X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates. The default position is
the center of the plate.

0S Circle R - A circular opening with no supports. You can define the radius.
For more information, see Circular Opening with No Supports (on page 515).

0S Circle 200 - A circular opening with no supports. The radius is fixed at 200
mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with No Supports and a 200
mm Fixed Radius (on page 520).

0S Circle 250 - A circular opening with no supports. The radius is fixed at 250
mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with No Supports and a 250
mm Fixed Radius (on page 524).

0S Circle 300 - A circular opening with no supports. The radius is fixed at 300
mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with No Supports and a 300
mm Fixed Radius (on page 526).

Circular Opening with No Supports

Tooltip: 0SCircle R
Creates a circular opening with no supports that you position with X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates. The
default position is the center of the plate. You can define the radius of the opening.

0S Circle Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 515


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 516


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with no supports (on page 518)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 517


Openings

Place a circular opening with no supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 0S Circle tab, click 0SCircle R.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
default radius displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local coordinates at
the center of the plate.

6. If required, type a new value for Radius.


The preview reflects the new opening size.

7. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 518


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

8. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
9. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
10. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
11. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 519


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Circular Opening with No Supports and a 200 mm Fixed Radius

Tooltip: 0SCircle 200


Creates a circular opening with a 200 mm radius and no supports. The opening is positioned by X,
Y, and Z coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

0S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Molded Forms User's Guide 520


Openings

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 521


Openings

 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with no supports and a fixed radius (on page 522)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a circular opening with no supports and a fixed radius


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 0S Circle tab, click 0SCircle 200, 0SCircle 250, or 0SCircle 300.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 522


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
fixed radius displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local coordinates at the
center of the plate.

6. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.


The preview reflects the new opening location.

7. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
8. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 523


Openings

The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.


9. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
10. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Circular Opening with No Supports and a 250 mm Fixed Radius

Tooltip: 0SCircle 250


Creates a circular opening with a 250 mm radius and no supports. The opening is positioned by
X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

0S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.

Molded Forms User's Guide 524


Openings

 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

Molded Forms User's Guide 525


Openings

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with no supports and a fixed radius (on page 522)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Circular Opening with No Supports and a 300 mm Fixed Radius

Tooltip: 0SCircle 300


Creates a circular opening with a 300 mm radius and no supports. The opening is positioned by X,
Y, and Z coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 526


Openings

0S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 527


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 528


Openings

 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.


 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with no supports and a fixed radius (on page 522)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

3S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place circular openings with three supports.
The software positions a three-support opening by dimensions from the first support and is
centers the opening between the second and third supports.

3S Circle R - Creates a circular opening with three supports. You can define
the radius. For more information, see Circular Opening with Three Supports
(on page 530).

3S Circle 200 - Creates a circular opening with three supports. The radius is
fixed at 200 mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with Three
Supports and a 200 mm Fixed Radius (on page 538).

3S Circle 250 - Creates a circular opening with three supports. The radius is
fixed at 250 mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with Three
Supports and a 250 mm Fixed Radius (on page 545).

3S Circle 300 - Creates a circular opening with three supports. The radius is
fixed at 300 mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with Three
Supports and a 300 mm Fixed Radius (on page 550).

Molded Forms User's Guide 529


Openings

Circular Opening with Three Supports

Tooltip: Circle RxD


Creates a circular opening with three supports. The software positions the opening by a
dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second and third
supports. You define the radius of the opening.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Circle Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This
option is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 530


Openings

2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 531


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 532


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 533


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with three supports (on page 534)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a circular opening with three supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 534


Openings

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 3S Circle tab, click Circle RxD.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, a preview displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 535


Openings

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays:
"Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, type a new value for the Radius.
The preview reflects the opening size.

10. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 536


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

11. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
12. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
13. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
14. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 537


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Circular Opening with Three Supports and a 200 mm Fixed


Radius

Tooltip: Circle 200


Creates a circular opening with a 200 mm radius and three supports. The software positions the
opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second
and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 538


Openings

Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 539


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 540


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 541


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of a circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with three supports and a fixed radius (on page 543)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 542


Openings

Place a circular opening with three supports and a fixed radius


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 3S Circle tab, click Circle 200, Circle 250, or Circle 300.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 543


Openings

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, a preview displays.

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays: "Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

Molded Forms User's Guide 544


Openings

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Circular Opening with Three Supports and a 250 mm Fixed


Radius

Tooltip: Circle 250

Molded Forms User's Guide 545


Openings

Creates a circular opening with a 250 mm radius and three supports. The software positions the
opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second
and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 546


Openings

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 547


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:
 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 548


Openings

 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of a circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.

Molded Forms User's Guide 549


Openings

Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with three supports and a fixed radius (on page 543)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Circular Opening with Three Supports and a 300 mm Fixed


Radius

Tooltip: Circle 300


Creates a circular opening with a 300 mm radius and three supports. The software positions the
opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second
and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 550


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

Molded Forms User's Guide 551


Openings

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 552


Openings

Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:
 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 553


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of a circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with three supports and a fixed radius (on page 543)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 554


Openings

4S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place circular openings with four supports.
The software centers a four-support opening between opposing supports.

4S Circle R - Creates a circular opening with four supports. You can define
the radius. For more information, see Circular Opening with Four Supports (on
page 555).

4S Circle 200 - Creates a circular opening with four supports. The radius is
fixed at 200 mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with Four
Supports and a 200 mm Fixed Radius (on page 562).

4S Circle 250 - Creates a circular opening with four supports. The radius is
fixed at 250 mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with Four
Supports and a 250 mm Fixed Radius (on page 568).

4S Circle 300 - Creates a circular opening with four supports. The radius is
fixed at 300 mm. For more information, see Circular Opening with Four
Supports and a 300 mm Fixed Radius (see "Circular Opening with Four
Supports and a 250 mm Fixed Radius" on page 572).

Circular Opening with Four Supports

Tooltip: 4SCircle R
Creates a circular opening with four supports. The software centers the opening between
opposing supports. You define the radius of the opening.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

Molded Forms User's Guide 555


Openings

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Circle Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 556


Openings

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 557


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 558


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with four supports (on page 559)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a circular opening with four supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 4S Circle tab, click 4SCircle R.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 559


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. If required, type a new value for Radius.

Molded Forms User's Guide 560


Openings

The preview reflects the new size.

9. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
10. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
11. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 561


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Circular Opening with Four Supports and a 200 mm Fixed


Radius

Tooltip: 4SCircle 200


Creates a circular opening with a 200 mm radius and four supports. The software centers the
opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 562


Openings

Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 563


Openings

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 564


Openings

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 565


Openings

Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with four supports and a fixed radius (on page 566)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a circular opening with four supports and a fixed radius


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 4S Circle tab, click 4SCircle 200, 4SCircle 250, or 4SCircle 300.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 566


Openings

7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).

Molded Forms User's Guide 567


Openings

9. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
10. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Circular Opening with Four Supports and a 250 mm Fixed


Radius

Tooltip: 4SCircle 250


Creates a circular opening with a 250 mm radius and four supports. The software centers the
opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 568


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 569


Openings

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 570


Openings

Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 571


Openings

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with four supports and a fixed radius (on page 566)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Circular Opening with Four Supports and a 250 mm Fixed


Radius

Tooltip: 4SCircle 300


Creates a circular opening with a 300 mm radius and four supports. The software centers the
opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 572


Openings

4S Fixed Radius Circle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 573


Openings

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 574


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 575


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg. This option is not used for a circular opening.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Circle.
Radius - Defines the radius of the circular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a circular opening with four supports and a fixed radius (on page 566)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

0S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place oval openings with no supports. The
software positions a no-support opening by X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates. The default position is the
center of the plate.

0S Oval HxW - Creates an oval opening with no supports. You can define the
length and the width. For more information, see Oval Opening with No
Supports (on page 577).

Molded Forms User's Guide 576


Openings

0S Oval 500x250 - Creates a 500 mm length and 250 mm width oval opening
with no supports. For more information, see Oval Opening with No Supports, a
500 mm Length, and a 250 mm Width (on page 582).

0S Oval 850x500 - Creates an 850 mm length and 500 mm width oval


opening with no supports. For more information, see Oval Opening with No
Supports, an 850 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width (on page 586).

Oval Opening with No Supports

Tooltip: 0SOval HxW


Creates an oval opening with no supports that you position with X, Y, and Z coordinates. The
default position is the center of the plate.You define the length and the width.

0S Oval Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Molded Forms User's Guide 577


Openings

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 578


Openings

 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with no supports (on page 579)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an oval opening with no supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 0S Oval tab, click 0SOval HxW.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 579


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
default length and width displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local
coordinates at the center of the plate.

6. If required, type new values for Length and Width.


The preview reflects the new opening size.

7. If required, type a new value for Angle.


The preview reflects the new parameters.

8. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 580


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

9. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
10. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
11. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 581


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Oval Opening with No Supports, a 500 mm Length, and a 250


mm Width

Tooltip: 0SOval 500x250


Creates a 500 mm by 250 mm oval opening with no supports that you position with X, Y, and Z
coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

0S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 582


Openings

2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 583


Openings

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of these
options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to
the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening.This option is unavailable and set to the fixed width
of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with no supports and a fixed height and width (on page 584)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an oval opening with no supports and a fixed height and width
1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 0SOval tab, click 0SOval 500x250, 0SOval 600x450, or 0SOval 850x500.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 584


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
fixed length and width displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local
coordinates at the center of the plate.

6. If required, type a new value for Angle.


The preview reflects the new parameters.

7. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.


The preview reflects the new opening location.

8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 585


Openings

The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
9. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
10. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Oval Opening with No Supports, an 850 mm Length, and a 500


mm Width

Tooltip: 0SOval 850x500

Molded Forms User's Guide 586


Openings

Creates an 850 mm by 500 mm oval opening with no supports that you position with X, Y, and Z
coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

0S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 587


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of these
options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 588


Openings

 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.


 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to
the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening.This option is unavailable and set to the fixed width
of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with no supports and a fixed height and width (on page 584)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

3S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place oval openings with three supports.
The software positions a three-support opening by dimensions from the first support and is
centers the opening between the second and third supports.

3S Oval HxW - Creates an oval opening with three supports. You can define
length and width. For more information, see Oval Opening with Three
Supports (on page 590).

3S Oval 500x250 - Creates an oval opening with three supports. The length is
fixed at 500 mm and the width is fixed at 250 mm. For more information, see
Oval Opening with Three Supports, a 500 mm Length, and a 250 mm Width
(on page 598).

3S Oval 600x450 - Creates an oval opening with three supports. The length is
fixed at 600 mm and the width is fixed at 450 mm. For more information, see
Oval Opening with Three Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 450 mm Width
(on page 605).

3S Oval 850x500 - Creates an oval opening with three supports. The length is
fixed at 850 mm and the width is fixed at 500 mm. For more information, see
Oval Opening with Three Supports, an 850 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width
(on page 610).

Molded Forms User's Guide 589


Openings

Oval Opening with Three Supports

Tooltip: Oval HxWxD


Creates an oval opening with three supports. The software positions the opening by a dimension
from the first support and is centers the opening between the second and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Oval Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This
option is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 590


Openings

2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 591


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 592


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 593


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with three supports (on page 595)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 594


Openings

Place an oval opening with three supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 3S Oval tab, click Oval HxWxD.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 595


Openings

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, a preview displays.

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays: "Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, type new values for the Length and Width.
The preview reflects the opening size.

10. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 596


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

11. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
12. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
13. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
14. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 597


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Oval Opening with Three Supports, a 500 mm Length, and a 250


mm Width

Tooltip: Oval 500x250


Creates a 500 mm by 250 mm oval opening with three supports. The software positions the
opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second
and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 598


Openings

Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 599


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 600


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 601


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to
the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
width of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with three supports and a fixed height and width (on page 603)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 602


Openings

Place an oval opening with three supports and a fixed height and width
1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 3S Oval tab, click Oval 500x250, Oval 600x450, or Oval 850x500.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 603


Openings

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, a preview displays.

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays: "Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

Molded Forms User's Guide 604


Openings

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Oval Opening with Three Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 450


mm Width

Tooltip: Oval 600x450

Molded Forms User's Guide 605


Openings

Creates a 600 mm by 450 mm oval opening with three supports. The software positions the
opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second
and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 606


Openings

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 607


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:
 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 608


Openings

 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to
the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
width of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.

Molded Forms User's Guide 609


Openings

Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with three supports and a fixed height and width (on page 603)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Oval Opening with Three Supports, an 850 mm Length, and a


500 mm Width

Tooltip: Oval 850x500


Creates an 850 mm by 500 mm oval opening with three supports. The software positions the
opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second
and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 610


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

Molded Forms User's Guide 611


Openings

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 612


Openings

Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:
 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 613


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to
the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
width of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with three supports and a fixed height and width (on page 603)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 614


Openings

4S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place oval openings with four supports. The
software centers a four-support opening between opposing supports.

4S Oval HxW - Creates an oval opening with four supports. You can define
length and width. For more information, see Oval Opening with Four Supports
(on page 615).

4S Oval 500x250 - Creates an oval opening with four supports. The length is
fixed at 500 mm and the width is fixed at 250 mm. For more information, see
Oval Opening with Four Supports, a 500 mm Length, and a 250 mm Width (on
page 622).

4S Oval 600x450 - Creates an oval opening with four supports. The length is
fixed at 600 mm and the width is fixed at 450 mm. For more information, see
Oval Opening with Four Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 450 mm Width (on
page 629).

4S Oval 850x500 - Creates an oval opening with four supports. The length is
fixed at 850 mm and the width is fixed at 500 mm. For more information, see
Oval Opening with Four Supports, an 850 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width
(on page 633).

Oval Opening with Four Supports

Tooltip: 4SOval HxW


Creates an oval opening with four supports. The software centers the opening between opposing
supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

Molded Forms User's Guide 615


Openings

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Oval Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 616


Openings

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 617


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 618


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length of the oval opening.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with four supports (on page 619)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an oval opening with four supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 4S Oval tab, click 4SOval HxW.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 619


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. If required, type new values for Angle, Length, and Width.

Molded Forms User's Guide 620


Openings

The preview reflects the new parameters.

9. If required, change the Dimension Type value to change the opening distance from the
supports.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 621


Openings

The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.


12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Oval Opening with Four Supports, a 500 mm Length, and a 250


mm Width

Tooltip: 4SOval 500x250


Creates a 500 mm by 250 mm oval opening with four supports. The software centers the opening
between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 622


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 623


Openings

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 624


Openings

Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 625


Openings

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
width of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with four supports and a fixed height and width (on page 626)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place an oval opening with four supports and a fixed height and width
1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 4S Oval tab, click 4SOval 500x250, 4SOval 600x450, or 4SOval 850x500.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 626


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. If required, type a new value for Angle.


9. If required, change the Dimension Type value to change the opening distance from the
supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 627


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 628


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Oval Opening with Four Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 450


mm Width

Tooltip: 4SOval 600x450


Creates a 600 mm by 450 mm oval opening with four supports. The software centers the opening
between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 629


Openings

Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 630


Openings

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 631


Openings

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.

Molded Forms User's Guide 632


Openings

Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
width of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with four supports and a fixed height and width (on page 626)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Oval Opening with Four Supports, an 850 mm Length, and a 500


mm Width

Tooltip: 4SOval 850x500


Creates an 850 mm by 500 mm oval opening with four supports. The software centers the
opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Dimension Oval Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 633


Openings

Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 634


Openings

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 635


Openings

Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 636


Openings

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Oval.
Length - Defines the length of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the oval opening. This option is unavailable and set to the fixed
width of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place an oval opening with four supports and a fixed height and width (on page 626)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

0S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place rectangular openings with no
supports. The software positions a no-support opening by X-, Y-, and Z-coordinates. The default
position is the center of the plate.

0S Rectangle HxWxR - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with no


supports. You can define the length, the width, and the corner radius. For
more information, see Rectangular Opening with No Supports (on page 638).

0S Rectangle 400x300x100 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with no


supports. The length is fixed at 400 mm, the width is fixed at 300 mm, and the
corner radius is fixed at 100 mm. For more information, see Rectangular
Opening with No Supports, a 400 mm Length, and a 300 mm Width (on page
643).

0S Rectangle 600x500x200 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with no


supports. The length is fixed at 600 mm, the width is fixed at 500 mm, and the
corner radius is fixed at 200 mm. For more information, see Rectangular
Opening with No Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width (on page
647).

Molded Forms User's Guide 637


Openings

0S Rectangle 1350x700x150 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


no supports. The length is fixed at 1350 mm, the width is fixed at 700 mm , and
the corner radius is fixed at 150 mm. For more information, see Rectangular
Opening with No Supports, a 1350 mm Length, and a 700 mm Width (on page
650).

Rectangular Opening with No Supports

Tooltip: 0SRect HxWxR


Creates a rectangular opening with no supports that you position with X, Y, and Z coordinates.
The default position is the center of the plate. You define the length, the width, and the corner
radius.

0S Rectangle Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

Molded Forms User's Guide 638


Openings

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.

Molded Forms User's Guide 639


Openings

Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rounded rectangular opening.
Width - Defines the width of the rounded rectangular opening.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with no supports (on page 640)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a rectangular opening with no supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 0S Rectangle tab, click 0SRect HxWxR.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 640


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
default size values displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local
coordinates at the center of the plate.

6. If required, type new values for Length, Width, and Rounded Rad.
The preview reflects the new opening size.

7. If required, type a new value for Angle.


The preview reflects the new angle.

8. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.

Molded Forms User's Guide 641


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

9. Click Continue.
The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
10. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
11. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
12. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 642


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Rectangular Opening with No Supports, a 400 mm Length, and a


300 mm Width

Tooltip: 0SRect 400x300x100


Creates a 400 mm by 300 mm rectangular opening with 100 mm radius corners and no supports
that you position with X, Y, and Z coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

0S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 643


Openings

2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 644


Openings

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set
to the fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with no supports and a fixed height and width (on page 645)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a rectangular opening with no supports and a fixed height and width
1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 0S Rectangle tab, click 0SRect 400x300x100, 0SRect 600x500x200, or 0SRect
1350x700x150.

Molded Forms User's Guide 645


Openings

The ribbon for the macro displays.


5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays. A preview of the opening using the
fixed size values displays at the center of the plate. X, Y, and Z display the local coordinates
at the center of the plate.

6. If required, type a new value for Angle.


The preview reflects the new angle.

7. If required, type new X, Y, and Z values.


The preview reflects the new opening location.

8. Click Continue.

Molded Forms User's Guide 646


Openings

The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
9. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
10. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
11. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Rectangular Opening with No Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a


500 mm Width

Tooltip: 0SRect 600x500x200


Creates a 600 mm by 500 mm rectangular opening with 200 mm radius corners, with no supports,
and positioned by X, Y, and Z coordinates. The default position is the center of the plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 647


Openings

0S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 648


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 649


Openings

 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.


 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set
to the fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with no supports and a fixed height and width (on page 645)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Rectangular Opening with No Supports, a 1350 mm Length, and


a 700 mm Width

Tooltip: 0SRect 1350x700x150


Creates a 1350 mm by 700 mm rectangular opening with 150 mm radius corners and no
supports that you position with X, Y, and Z coordinates. The default position is the center of the
plate.

0S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 650


Openings

Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 651


Openings

Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.


Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
X - Defines the X-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Y - Defines the Y-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Z - Defines the Z-coordinate of the selected coordinate system for the opening center.
Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about its center. The default value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set
to the fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with no supports and a fixed height and width (on page 645)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 652


Openings

3S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place rectangular openings with three
supports. The software positions a three-support opening by dimensions from the first support
and is centers the opening between the second and third supports.

3S Rectangle HxWxR - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with three


supports. You can define the length, the width, and the corner radius. For
more information, see Rectangular Opening with Three Supports (on page
653).

3S Rectangle 400x300x100 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


three supports. The length is fixed at 400 mm, the width is fixed at 300 mm,
and the corner radius is fixed at 100 mm. For more information, see
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports, a 400 mm Length, and a 300 mm
Width (on page 662).

3S Rectangle 600x500x200 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


three supports. The length is fixed at 600 mm, the width is fixed at 500 mm,
and the corner radius is fixed at 200 mm. For more information, see
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 500 mm
Width (on page 670).

3S Rectangle 1350x700x150 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


three supports. The length is fixed at 1350 mm, the width is fixed at 700 mm,
and the corner radius is fixed at 150 mm. For more information, see
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports, a 1350 mm Length, and a 700 mm
Width (on page 675).

Rectangular Opening with Three Supports

Tooltip: Rect HxWxRxD


Creates a rounded rectangular opening with three supports. The software positions the opening
by a dimension from the first support and is centers the opening between the second and third
supports. You define the length, the width, and the corner radius.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

Molded Forms User's Guide 653


Openings

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Rectangle Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This
option is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 654


Openings

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.

Molded Forms User's Guide 655


Openings

Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:
 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 656


Openings

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rectangular opening.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

Molded Forms User's Guide 657


Openings

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with three supports (on page 658)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a rectangular opening with three supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 3S Rectangle tab, click Rect HxWxRxD.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 658


Openings

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, then a preview
displays.

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays: "Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, type new values for Length, Width, and Rounded Rad.
The preview reflects the new opening size.

Molded Forms User's Guide 659


Openings

10. If required, type a new value for Angle.


The preview reflects the new angle.

11. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

12. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).

Molded Forms User's Guide 660


Openings

13. Click Close.


The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
14. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
15. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 661


Openings

Rectangular Opening with Three Supports, a 400 mm Length,


and a 300 mm Width

Tooltip: Rect 400x300x100


Creates a 400 mm by 300 mm rectangular opening with 100 mm radius corners and with three
supports. The software positions the opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers
the opening between the second and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This
option is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 662


Openings

2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 663


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 664


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 665


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and
set to the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with three supports and a fixed height and width (on page 667)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 666


Openings

Place a rectangular opening with three supports and a fixed height and
width
1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 3S Rectangle tab, click Rect 400x300x100, Rect 600x500x200, or Rect
1350x700x150.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.
A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the middle support, and then select the two side supports.

Molded Forms User's Guide 667


Openings

If the default solution for Distance Dir defines geometry on the plate, a preview displays.

If the default solution for Distance Dir does not define geometry on the plate, then
a message displays: "Make sure ProjDirection and the DistanceDir are valid and try again."
8. If a solution is not possible or is not correct:
a. Click Distance Dir.
The possible solutions display.

b. Select the required solution for Distance Dir.


The opening preview displays.
9. If required, type a new value for Angle.
The preview reflects the new angle.

10. If required, change Distance From and Distance values to change the opening distance
with respect to the middle support.

Molded Forms User's Guide 668


Openings

The preview reflects the new opening location.

11. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
12. Click Close.
The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.
13. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
14. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 669


Openings

The software creates the opening.

Rectangular Opening with Three Supports, a 600 mm Length,


and a 500 mm Width

Tooltip: Rect 600x500x200


Creates a 600 mm by 500 mm rectangular opening with 200 mm radius corners and with three
supports. The software positions the opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers
the opening between the second and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This
option is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 670


Openings

Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 671


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 672


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 673


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and
set to the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with three supports and a fixed height and width (on page 667)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 674


Openings

Rectangular Opening with Three Supports, a 1350 mm Length,


and a 700 mm Width

Tooltip: Rect 1350x700x150


Creates a 1350 mm by 700 mm rectangular opening with 150 mm radius corners and with three
supports. The software positions the opening by a dimension from the first support and is centers
the opening between the second and third supports.
Select the middle support first for a 3S opening:

If opposing supports 2 and 3 are not parallel, then the opening is centered between
the midpoint of each support.

3S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This
option is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 675


Openings

2 - Specifies the middle support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the first side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the second side support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system,
profile system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 676


Openings

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Distance From - Defines the method used to locate the opening from the first support. Select
one of the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 677


Openings

 Center - Measures from the first support to the center of the opening.

 Edge - Measures from the first support to the edge of the opening closest to the support.

Distance - Defines the distance from the first support to an opening. This distance is defined by
the value of Distance From.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 678


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length (or height) of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and
set to the fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.
Distance Dir - Defines the side on which to place the opening if more than one solution is
possible. Select Solution 1 or Solution 2. A preview of the opening appears at the selected
location.
Select Value in the 3D Graphic View - Displays previews of the possible solutions for
Distance Dir in the graphic view. Select the solution to use.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with three supports and a fixed height and width (on page 667)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 679


Openings

4S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)


The following advanced opening macros allow you to place rectangular openings with four
supports. The software centers a four-support opening between opposing supports.

4S Rectangle HxWxR - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with four


supports. You can define the length, the width, and the corner radius. For
more information, see Rectangular Opening with Four Supports (on page
680).

4S Rectangle 400x300x100 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


four supports. The length is fixed at 400 mm, the width is fixed at 300 mm, and
the corner radius is fixed at 100 mm. For more information, see Rectangular
Opening with Four Supports, a 400 mm Length, and a 300 mm Width (on page
687).

4S Rectangle 600x500x200 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


four supports. The length is fixed at 600 mm, the width is fixed at 500 mm, and
the corner radius is fixed at 200 mm. For more information, see Rectangular
Opening with Four Supports, a 600 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width (on page
694).

4S Rectangle 1350x700x150 - Creates a rounded rectangular opening with


four supports. The length is fixed at 1350 mm, the width is fixed at 500 700 ,
and the corner radius is fixed at 150 mm. For more information, see
Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a 1350 mm Length, and a 700 mm
Width (on page 698).

Rectangular Opening with Four Supports

Tooltip: 4SRect HxWxR


Creates a rounded rectangular opening with four supports. The software centers the opening
between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

Molded Forms User's Guide 680


Openings

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Rectangle Ribbon
Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 681


Openings

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 682


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 683


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length of the rectangular opening.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with four supports (on page 684)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a rectangular opening with four supports


1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 4S Rectangle tab, click 4SRect HxWxR.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 684


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. If required, type new values for Angle, Length, Width, and Rounded Rad.

Molded Forms User's Guide 685


Openings

The preview reflects the new parameters.

9. If required, change the Dimension Type value to change the opening distance from the
supports.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 686


Openings

The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.


12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a 400 mm Length, and


a 300 mm Width

Tooltip: 4SRect 400x300x100


Creates a 400 mm by 300 mm rectangular opening with 100 mm radius corners and with four
supports. The software centers the opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 687


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 688


Openings

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 689


Openings

Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 690


Openings

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with four supports and a fixed height and width (on page 691)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Place a rectangular opening with four supports and a fixed height and
width
1. Click Openings on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system on which to place the opening.

3. Click Define by catalog selection .


The Opening Palette dialog box and the Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box
display.
4. On the 4S Rectangle tab, click 4SRect 400x300x100, 4SRect 600x500x200, or 4SRect
1350x700x150.
The ribbon for the macro displays.
5. Select a coordinate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 691


Openings

A local coordinate system at the plate origin displays.

6. Click 2.
7. Select the first support, a second support opposite the first support, a third support, and a
fourth support opposite the third support.

The opening preview displays.

8. If required, type a new value for Angle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 692


Openings

The preview reflects the new angle

9. If required, change the Dimension Type value to change the opening distance from the
supports.
The preview reflects the new opening location.

10. Click Continue.


The preview colors change. The opening also displays in the Geometric Construction
Explorer hierarchy.

 You can define additional openings before proceeding to the next step. Click Continue
after defining each opening.
 To delete opening geometry, see Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489).
11. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 693


Openings

The ribbon display returns to the main Openings ribbon.


12. Use the Opening design type, Opening planning method, and Opening production
method lists to set the design, planning, and production properties on the opening.
13. Click Finish.
The software creates the opening.

Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a 600 mm Length, and


a 500 mm Width

Tooltip: 4SRect 600x500x200


Creates a 600 mm by 500 mm rectangular opening with 200 mm radius corners and with four
supports. The software centers the opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 694


Openings

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 695


Openings

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 696


Openings

Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 697


Openings

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with four supports and a fixed height and width (on page 691)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a 1350 mm Length,


and a 700 mm Width

Tooltip: 4SRect 1350x700x150


Creates a 1350 mm by 700 mm rectangular opening with 150 mm radius corners and with four
supports. The software centers the opening between opposing supports.
Select supports as opposing pairs for a 4S opening:

Molded Forms User's Guide 698


Openings

If opposing supports 1 and 2, or 3 and 4, are not parallel, then the opening is centered
between the midpoint of each support.

4S Fixed Dimension Rectangle Ribbon


Opening Properties - Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected opening. This option
is only available after selecting an existing opening.

Select - Selects an existing opening object to edit or delete.

Add - Selects geometry that defines a new opening. USe this option with the numbered step
options listed below.
Delete - Deletes a selected opening.
Cancel - Cancels the opening creation, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box,
and then returns to the Openings ribbon.
Close - Verifies the option values, closes the ribbon and the Opening Palette dialog box, and
then returns to the Openings ribbon. The selected values display when Define by catalog
selection is selected again on the Openings ribbon.
Geometric Construction - Displays the current opening macro. You can also select the
following:
 A different, recently used macro.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. Use this option only for
openings that do not appear on the Opening Palette dialog box.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system used.
2 - Specifies the first support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

3 - Specifies the second support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the first support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 699


Openings

4 - Specifies the third support used to constrain the opening. A support is a plate system, profile
system, or reference plane.

5 - Specifies the fourth support used to constrain the opening. This support must be opposite of
the third support. A support is a plate system, profile system, or reference plane.

6 - Specifies additional plates on which to create the opening. The plate that you initially selected
using the Plate System step on the Openings ribbon is the default option.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 700


Openings

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject - Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept - Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes the opening definition. Display of the ribbon continues, allowing you to
define parameters for additional openings.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the opening
geometric constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message
displays, giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and does not display when editing an
object.
 The software does not create opening objects and save to the model until you click Finish on
the main Openings ribbon.
Dimension Type - Defines the measurement location of the support. The edge of the opening is
measured from this location. This option is defined separately for each support. Select one of the
following options:
 Molded - Measures from the molded side of the support to the edge of the opening.

 Thickness - Measures from the thickness side of the support to the edge of the opening. If
the support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the web.

Molded Forms User's Guide 701


Openings

 Clearance - Measures from the closest side of the support to the edge of the opening. If the
support is a profile, then the measurement is from the closest side of the flange.

Projection Direction - Defines the project direction of the opening shape. Select one of the
following options:
 Normal - Normal to the surface of the plate system.
 Along X - In the X direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Y - In the Y direction of the selected coordinate system.
 Along Z - In the Z direction of the selected coordinate system.
Angle - Defines the rotation angle of the opening about the center of the opening. The default
value is 0.00 deg.
Shape - Defines the shape of the opening. This option is unavailable and set to Rounded Rect.
Length - Defines the length of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed length of the macro.
Width - Defines the width of the rectangular opening. This option is unavailable and set to the
fixed width of the macro.
Rounded Rad - Defines the corner radius of the rounded rectangular opening. This option is
unavailable and set to the fixed radius of the macro.

What do you want to do?


 Place a rectangular opening with four supports and a fixed height and width (on page 691)
 Delete advanced opening geometry (on page 489)
 Change an advanced opening to a different opening definition (on page 489)
 Copy and paste an advanced opening (on page 490)

Molded Forms User's Guide 702


Openings

Geometric Construction Explorer


Displays geometry related to an opening. The geometry is added after opening parameters are
defined and Continue is clicked on the Advanced Openings ribbon.
The Geometric Construction Explorer displays parameters in a hierarchical list similar to the
Workspace Explorer. Selecting a blue opening geometry name highlights the geometry in the
graphic view.

1 - Opening macro (black text)


2 - Output opening geometry
(blue text)
3 - Geometric construction set

Commands
The following commands are available by right-clicking an item in the hierarchical list:
Show
Turns on the graphical display of a hidden object in the graphic view.
Hide
Turns off the graphical display of an object in the graphic view. The names of hidden objects
display in italics in the Geometric Construction Explorer.
Export
Exports the selected geometric construction to an XML file. This command is only available
when you right-click the top level geometric construction set.
Import
Imports a previously exported geometric construction from an XML file into the workspace.
The imported geometric construction replaces any existing geometric construction. This
command is only available when you right-click the top level geometric construction set.
Export and Import are primarily intended for use by administrators creating complex
geometric construction macros. The commands can also be used to save multiple geometric
constructions, such as a set of seams or profile stiffener landing curves on a hull, that you may
not complete in a single session, or that you want to reuse in a similar model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 703


Openings

Error Display
When a required input for a geometric construction is deleted, the Geometric Construction
Explorer displays an error, such as those shown in the following example.

Deleting Opening Geometry


The Geometric Construction Explorer is best used to delete opening geometry when the
Advanced Openings ribbon is open and before openings are created. In this way, you can
create geometry for multiple openings, delete geometry as needed, and then create all of the
openings at one time by clicking Finish on the main Openings ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 704


SECTION 5

Place Opening
Places an opening (hole) in a slab, wall, or member
created in the Structure or Civil task. The shape of the
opening can be defined by placing a pre-defined shape from
the catalog, sketching the opening outline, or defining the
boundaries for the opening. In addition, you can control the
depth of the opening to create a fully penetrating hole or a
recessed opening.
This command is named Member Openings
in the Molded Forms task and is typically used with members
created with Place Linear Member System .

Place Opening Ribbon


Specifies the properties for the opening that you are placing or editing.

Opening Properties
Activates the Opening Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to specify opening
properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see Opening Properties
Dialog Box (on page 719).
Structure
Select the object in which to place an opening. You can select members or slabs.
Sketching Plane
Select the plane on the object on which to draw the opening. If you are placing an opening
that does not go all the way through the object, the sketching plane defines the side of the
object in which the partial opening is placed.
If you are editing an opening in the Structure or Civil task, this option is only
available if the sketching plane for the opening is missing.

Define Orientation
Select this option if you plan to sketch the opening and want to define the orientation of the
object, in which the opening is being placed, in the 2D environment. Most of the time, the
default orientation that the software uses is appropriate for the opening. However, use this
option if you are placing an opening in a multi- sided slab, for example, and you need to know
that the correct side of the slab is selected for the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 705


Place Opening

Edge for 2D X-axis


Select this option to specify the object edge that should be oriented along the bottom of the
2D environment. This option is only available when you select the Define Orientation option.

End Point
Select this option to specify the lower left corner of the object as you want it to appear in the
2D environment. This option is only available when you select the Define Orientation option.
Boundary
Specify the boundaries of the opening. If you select objects in the model and those objects
are moved, the software automatically resizes the opening to maintain the boundary
relationship. For example, you can select the outside edge of a beam flange as a boundary
along one side of an opening. Later, if the section size for the beam is changed and the
flange edge moves out an inch, the software automatically moves the edge of the opening an
inch to match the new location of the flange edge.

Molded Forms User's Guide 706


Place Opening

Boundary List
Activates the Boundary Offsets dialog box. This dialog box allows you to define an offset
distance for each boundary that you have defined. Select a row to highlight the boundary in
the model. Then, type the distance from the boundary to place the edge of the opening. Type
0 to place the opening edge on the boundary. Type a negative number to offset the opening
inside the boundary. Type a positive number to offset the opening outside the boundary.

Finish
Places the opening using the defined parameters.
Cancel
Rejects the objects that you have selected.
Accept
Confirms the objects that you have selected.

Select Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model to define the boundaries of the opening. This
option is only available when you are specifying boundaries.
Add References to Sketch 2D
Adds an object as a reference object in the 2-D environment. The objects that you select will
display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define relationships and
dimensions to these blue-lined objects in 2-D. The software may also automatically retrieve
3-D objects to display in the 2-D environment. The automatically selected objects will display
as grey lines. These grey line objects are read-only (you cannot define relationships or
dimensions to them) and are there to help you visualize the model. This option is only
available when you are drawing the boundaries of the opening.
For piping and equipment objects in plant mode, Insulation, Equipment Hole,
Maintenance, and Operation aspects displaying in the 3D graphic view also display in the
Sketch 2D environment. The aspect geometry displays as dashed lines. You can define
dimensions, but not relationships, to these aspects in 2D.
The software also automatically retrieves 3-D objects to display in the 2-D
environment. The automatically selected objects display as fine grey lines. Examples of
these objects include geometry generated by end cut operations, geometry that represents
hidden lines from intersecting objects projected to the sketching plane, or objects that
intersect the sketching plane. The software writes these graphics to the
No_Constrained_Elements layer. You can reference these objects to place your sketch, but
the objects that display as fine grey lines are temporary. When you exit the 2-D environment,

Molded Forms User's Guide 707


Place Opening

the software deletes these graphics. Any relationships or constraints to the temporary
graphics are also deleted when you exit the 2-D environment.
Although the references are deleted when you exit the 2D environment, the references are
automatically reimported when you modify the opening.

Draw
Activates the Structure Draft 2D View environment. Use this environment to sketch the
outline of the opening in the structure that you have selected.
Shape
Specifies how you want to define the opening shape. Select Sketch to draw the opening
shape. Select More to select an opening shape from the catalog. This option is only used
when you are not using boundaries to define the opening shape.
Cutting Limit
Select the cutting depth method for the opening.
 Select Through-All to completely penetrate the object in which the opening is placed.
This option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
 Select Through-Next to penetrate only one side of an object. For example, a channel
section member in which you want an opening only on the top flange. This option is
available only when the object that you select for the opening is a member whose
cross-section has parallel webs or flanges or a wall that turns back on itself. In the figure,
A is the Through-All option and B is the Through-Next option.

 Select User Defined if you want to specify the penetration depth of the opening. This
option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
Cutting Depth
Specify the cutting depth for the opening. The depth is measured from the sketching plane
that you specified.

What do you want to do?


 Place an opening by boundaries (on page 709)
 Place an opening by shape (on page 710)
 Place an opening by drawing (on page 711)
 Place an opening on a sloped wall (on page 713)
 Place an opening on a leaning wall (on page 715)
 Change a recess opening to a through opening (on page 717)
 Change a through opening to a recess opening (on page 717)
 Delete an opening (on page 717)

Molded Forms User's Guide 708


Place Opening

Place an opening by boundaries


1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the object in which you want to place the opening. You can select walls, slabs, and
members.

3. Click Select Boundaries .


4. Select objects in the model to use as boundaries of the opening.
You must select the boundary objects in a clockwise or counterclockwise order.

5. Click Accept .

6. Optionally, define any offset from the boundaries that you have selected.

Molded Forms User's Guide 709


Place Opening

Type 0 to place the opening edge on the boundary. Type a negative number to offset
the opening inside the boundary. Type a positive number to offset the opening outside the
boundary. This offset can only be applied when the selected boundaries are lines or planes.
7. Click OK on the Boundary dialog box.
8. Click Finish.

Place an opening by shape


1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the object in which to place the opening. You can select walls, slabs, and members.

3. Click Add References to Sketch 2D .


4. Select objects that you need to reference when placing the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 710


Place Opening

5. In the Shape option, select More....


6. Select the catalog shape that you want to place, and then click OK.
7. Drag the shape to where you want the opening on the object.

8. Click Close on the ribbon bar.

9. Click Finish.

Place an opening by drawing


1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.

Molded Forms User's Guide 711


Place Opening

2. Select the object in which to place the opening. You can select walls, slabs, and members.

3. Click Add References to Sketch 2D .


4. Select objects in the 3-D model near the object in which you are placing the opening. The
objects that you select display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define
relationships and dimensions to these blue-lined objects in 2-D.
The software also automatically retrieves 3-D objects to display in the 2-D
environment. The automatically selected objects display as fine grey lines. Examples of
these objects include geometry generated by end cut operations, geometry that represents
hidden lines from intersecting objects projected to the sketching plane, or objects that
intersect the sketching plane. The software writes these graphics to the
No_Constrained_Elements layer. You can reference these objects to place your sketch, but
the objects that display as fine grey lines are temporary. When you exit the 2-D environment,
the software deletes these graphics. Any relationships or constraints to the temporary
graphics are also deleted when you exit the 2-D environment.
Although the references are deleted when you exit the 2D environment, the references are
automatically reimported when you modify the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 712


Place Opening

5. Click Draw .

6. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening.
7. Click Close on the ribbon bar.
The opening that you drew displays in the 3-D environment.

8. Click Finish.

Place an opening on a sloped wall


Hole Parallel with Wall Slope
1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the sloped wall.
3. Select the side of the wall in which to place the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 713


Place Opening

If you are placing an opening that completely penetrates the wall, the side selection
is not important. However, if you are placing an opening that does not completely penetrate
the wall, then the surface selection is important because the penetration depth is measured
from the selected surface.

4. Click Draw .
Regardless of the slope, the wall displays as level in the 2-D environment.
5. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening. In the
example below, a small rectangular hole was drawn at the wall end.

6. Click Close on the ribbon bar.


7. Specify the cutting limit to use.
8. Click Finish.
The software places the hole in the sloped wall parallel to the slope.

Hole Parallel with Another Model Object


1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the sloped wall.
3. Select the side of the wall in which to place the opening.
If you are placing an opening that completely penetrates the wall, the side selection
is not important. However, if you are placing an opening that does not completely penetrate
the wall, then the surface selection is important because the penetration depth is measured
from the selected surface.
4. Click Add References to Sketch 2D .
5. Select an object in the 3-D model near the wall that you want the hole parallel to. For
example, select a grid line to make the hole parallel to a plane. The objects that you select
will display as thick blue lines in the 2-D environment. You can define relationships and
dimensions to these blue-lined objects in 2-D. The software may also automatically retrieve
3-D objects to display in the 2-D environment. The automatically selected objects will display
as grey lines. These grey line objects are read-only (you cannot define relationships or
dimensions to them) and are there to help you visualize the model.
The software also automatically retrieves 3-D objects to display in the 2-D
environment. The automatically selected objects display as fine grey lines. Examples of
these objects include geometry generated by end cut operations, geometry that represents
hidden lines from intersecting objects projected to the sketching plane, or objects that
intersect the sketching plane. The software writes these graphics to the

Molded Forms User's Guide 714


Place Opening

No_Constrained_Elements layer. You can reference these objects to place your sketch, but
the objects that display as fine grey lines are temporary. When you exit the 2-D environment,
the software deletes these graphics. Any relationships or constraints to the temporary
graphics are also deleted when you exit the 2-D environment.
Although the references are deleted when you exit the 2D environment, the references are
automatically reimported when you modify the opening.

6. Click Draw .
The wall and the selected object displays in the 2-D environment.
7. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening. In the
example below, the opening was placed using the parallel SmartSketch relationship with a
grid line that was selected as a reference.

8. Click Close on the ribbon bar.


9. Specify the cutting limit to use.
10. Click Finish.
The software places the hole in the sloped wall parallel to the referenced grid line.

Place an opening on a leaning wall


Opening Normal to Side of Wall
1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the wall.
3. Select the side of the wall in which to place the opening.
If you are placing an opening that completely penetrates the wall, the side selection
is not important. However, if you are placing an opening that does not completely penetrate
the wall, then the surface selection is important because the penetration depth is measured
from the selected surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 715


Place Opening

4. Click Draw .
5. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening. In the
example below, a circular hole was drawn at the wall end.

6. Click Close on the ribbon bar.


7. Specify the cutting limit to use.
8. Click Finish.
The software places the opening normal to the wall face.

Opening Normal to Another Model Object


1. Click Place Opening on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the wall.
3. Select a plane that is normal to the opening that you want. In the example below, the web of
a nearby column is selected.

4. Click Draw .

Molded Forms User's Guide 716


Place Opening

The wall displays in the 2-D environment.


5. Using the available drawing commands in the 2-D environment, draw the opening.
6. Click Close on the ribbon bar.
7. Specify the cutting limit to use.
8. Click Finish.
The software places the opening normal to the column's web (right opening), not the wall
face (left opening).

Change a recess opening to a through opening


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the recess opening to change to a through opening.
4. In the Cutting Limit option, select Through-All.

Change a through opening to a recess opening


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the through opening to change to a recess opening.
4. In the Cutting Limit option, select User Defined.
5. In the Cutting Depth option, specify the new depth of the opening.

Delete an opening
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Openings in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the opening to delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 717


Place Opening

4. Click Delete .

Molded Forms User's Guide 718


Place Opening

Opening Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the opening that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) (on page 719)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box)


The General tab displays the opening properties that you can edit or that are automatically
determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on the left side of the grid
and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more
than one opening and then selected the properties command, only the common properties
between the selected openings display.
When viewing properties for a single opening, the following properties display. More properties
may display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the Structure
Reference Data Guide for more information on properties. You can access this document using
the Help > Printable Guides command in the software.
Category - Select the properties that you want to view for the opening. Opening properties have
one category: Standard. You select the category to define values for by using the Category
option.

Standard
The standard properties that display depend on the reference data for the opening. Because
opening reference data is fully customizable, only the common properties are documented.
Name
Specify a name for the opening.
Naming Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the opening.
 Default Name Rule - Names the opening using the format
"Opening-<location>-<index>" where <location> is the global workshare location ID and
<index> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, Opening-1-0043.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the wall using the format "Opening-<location>-<index>"
where <location> is the global workshare location ID and <index> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example, Opening-1-0043.
 User Defined - Select to specify the wall system name yourself in the Name box.
Description
Type a description for the opening.
Cutting Limit
Select the cutting depth method for the opening.

Molded Forms User's Guide 719


Place Opening

 Select Through-All to completely penetrate the object in which the opening is placed.
This option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
 Select Through-Next to penetrate only one side of an object. For example, a channel
section member in which you want an opening only on the top flange. This option is
available only when the object that you select for the opening is a member whose
cross-section has parallel webs or flanges or a wall that turns back on itself. In the figure,
A is the Through-All option and B is the Through-Next option.

 Select User Defined if you want to specify the penetration depth of the opening. This
option is available for all objects in which you can place an opening.
Cutting Depth
Specify the cutting depth for the opening. The depth is measured from the sketching plane
that you specified.
Default constant offset
Specify the offset between the opening edge and the boundary. Type 0 to place the opening
edge on the boundary. Type a negative number to offset the opening inside the boundary.
Type a positive number to offset the opening outside the boundary. This offset can only be
set when the boundaries are lines or planes.
See Also
Opening Properties Dialog Box (on page 719)

Molded Forms User's Guide 720


SECTION 6

Placing Profile Systems


The Profile System commands define a single profile system or multiple profile systems.
Commands are available for stiffener profile systems, linear beam profile systems, edge
reinforcements, and tripping stiffener systems. Additional commands from the Structure task are
also available for creating members and cans.

Five methods are available for creating the landing curves of stiffener profile systems:
 By intersection
 By offset
 By two-dimensional sketch projection
 By entering coordinates in a table
 By selecting a starting object, an ending object, and an orientation (for a tripping stiffener)
When you create a landing curve by one of these methods, it can be linear, curved, polyline,
circle, circular arc or elliptical.
You can use various input methods to create profile systems. You choose a method based on the
type of trace curve to create.
You can use any of the following methods to create profile systems for vertical, horizontal, sloped,
and curved profiles:
 Define the location line and the inclination angle from an orthogonal surface.
 Specify a distance from a reference surface or frame system.
 Copy an existing profile system to create one or multiple new profile system.
 Specify a pattern or spacing for multiple profile systems.
 Refer an existing surface and defining a non-orthogonal surface tangent to the existing
surface (for example, the surface of a stiffener connected to a longitudinal frame).

 Minimum height or distances are maintained by the software for objects that use Sketch2D,
such as profiles by projection. For more information, see Minimum Distance (on page 92).
 When a profile system is created, a profile part is also created. Profile parts are detailed in the
Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the Structural
Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified.

Molded Forms User's Guide 721


Placing Profile Systems

 When you create a profile by projection, the dialog box title displays the plate system name
using the format Plate System: <name of the plate system>.

 You can change the default colors of profile systems, seams, reference curves, and knuckle
curves to enhance visibility. For more information, see Modify Profile System Landing Curve
Display Colors (on page 783).

Stiffener Profile System by Intersection - Creates a stiffener profile system on the


selected plate system by defining the landing curve of the stiffener as the intersection
of the selected plate system and a grid plane. For more information, see Stiffener
Profile System by Intersection (on page 723).

Stiffener Profile System by Offset - Creates a stiffener profile system on the


selected plate system by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing
curve (a seam, plate boundary, plate edge, the landing curve of another profile
system, or grid plane). For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Offset
(on page 739).

Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection - Creates a stiffener profile system on


the selected plate system by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched
onto the plate system. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by
Projection (on page 746).

Stiffener Profile System by Table - Creates a stiffener profile system on the


selected plate system by defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table. For
more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Table (on page 755).

Tripping Stiffener System - Creates a tripping stiffener on a selected plate system.


For more information, see Tripping Stiffener System (on page 765).

Profile Edge Reinforcement - Places a profile system along the free edge of a plate
system. For more information, see Profile Edge Reinforcement (on page 771).

Place Linear Member System - Places columns, beams, braces, and other linear
members in the model. For more information, see Place Linear Member Systems (on
page 787).

Place Can - Places a can in the model. A can is a reinforcing connection piece on a
member to increase the surface area available for connections or to provide
increased wall thickness or both. For more information, see Place Can (on page
860).

See Also
Knuckle Best Practices (on page 56)
Landing Curve Best Practices (on page 56)

Molded Forms User's Guide 722


Placing Profile Systems

Stiffener Profile System by Intersection


The Stiffener Profile System by Intersection command creates a stiffener profile system on
the selected plate system by defining the landing curve of the stiffener as the intersection of the
selected plate system and a grid plane.
You can control the boundaries of the stiffener profile by selecting a plate system, profile system,
seam or grid plane that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software
uses the landing curve ends as the stiffener profile boundaries.
After defining the landing curve and the boundaries, you can set the profile orientation. The plate
system side and the flange direction for unsymmetrical profile sections are set by the molded
convention of the plate system. However, you may override the default settings by using the
Profile Properties dialog box.
When a stiffener profile system is created, a stiffener part is also created. Profile parts
are detailed in the Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the
Structural Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified. For more information, see
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 736).

Stiffener Profile System by Intersection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a stiffener profile in the model.

Profile by Intersection Settings


Opens the Profile by Intersection Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the profile system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
settings default from the parent plate system. For more information, see Profile Properties
Dialog Box (on page 729).
Plate System
Specifies the plate system that you want to stiffen. You can select multiple plate systems to
place multiple stiffener profiles systems at the same time. The software uses the same
information for each stiffener profile system. After placement, the stiffener profiles are
unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.
Landing Curve Definition
Specifies the grid planes that intersect the plate system at which to place the stiffener
profiles.
Profile Orientation Definition
Defines the orientation of the profile system cross-section. See the Profile Orientation
Definition Controls section below.
Boundary Definition
Defines the boundaries of the stiffener profile. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the stiffener profile to maintain the boundary relationship. See
the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 723


Placing Profile Systems

Profile Orientation Definition Controls


Available when you use the Profile Orientation Definition option.
Rule Region Definition
Defines regions along the profile landing curve. Each region of the landing curve can have a
different orientation rule assigned to it. The software initially defines a region boundary point
at the profile boundaries. You cannot delete or modify the software-defined region boundary
points. You can define and modify additional region boundary along the profile landing curve
using grid/reference planes, plate design seams, and plate planning seams.

Orientation Rule Assignment


Opens a list of orientation rules from which you can select. These rules include:
 Normal - The web of the profile follows the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve. This is the default setting if the profile parent is a plate system.
 Up-Down - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in an up-down
direction. For example, you can select Up-Down for profiles on a deck.
 Fore-Aft - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in a fore-aft
direction. For example, you can select Fore-Aft for profiles on a transverse frame.
 Port-Starboard - The orientation vector of the profile cross- section remains in a
port-starboard direction. For example, you can select Port-Starboard for longitudinal
stringer profiles.
 Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to a reference plane that
you specify.

 Angle - Type the angle for the plane.


 Reference - Select the reference plane from which to measure the angle. You can
select Normal, Up-Down (horizontal), Fore-Aft (longitudinal) or Port-Starboard
(transverse). Normal reference plane is the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve and is available for any profile orientation. Up-Down, Fore-Aft or
Port-Starboard are available as is appropriate for the direction of the landing curve.
 Plane - Select the plane in which to measure the angle. For Normal Reference, this
option is unavailable because the angle is always measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. For Up-Down or Port-Starboard Reference, you can select Normal
or Orthogonal. If Normal is selected, the angle is measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. Orthogonal is the transverse, longitudinal or horizontal plane closest

Molded Forms User's Guide 724


Placing Profile Systems

to the landing curve normal. If Orthogonal is selected, the software selects the
orthogonal plane based on average direction of the landing curve.
Twist Linear Girth
Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the profile region, based on the difference
between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the region. The twist rate
is constant.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Cubic
Twist is distributed using a cubic equation along the girth length of the profile region, based
on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the
region. The twist rate at the ends is zero. The twist rate reaches its maximum at the midpoint.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Linear Ortho
Twist is constant at every frame along the orthogonal projection length of the profile region,
based on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of
the region. The software uses the Main_CS frame system if it exists. Otherwise, the software
uses the CS_0 frame system.

 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.

Molded Forms User's Guide 725


Placing Profile Systems

 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Profile System Table


Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles and twist rates of the
current profile.

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundary Definition option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Molded Forms User's Guide 726


Placing Profile Systems

Add Projection Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.

Molded Forms User's Guide 727


Placing Profile Systems

Start Connection
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place stiffener profile by intersection (on page 728)
 Modify a stiffener profile (on page 729)
 Delete a stiffener profile (on page 729)

Place stiffener profile by intersection


1. Click Stiffener Profile System by Intersection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to stiffen.
3. Select the Section Type and Section Size.
4. Click Landing Curve Definition .
5. Select a grid plane that intersects the plate system that you selected.

6. Click Profile Orientation Definition .


7. Define the orientation of the stiffener profile with regard to the plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 728


Placing Profile Systems

8. Click Boundary Definition .


9. Define the boundaries for the stiffener profile.
10. Click Accept .
11. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
12. Click Finish.

 Stiffener profiles are always associated with the plate system to which they belong.
 You can select more than one grid plane to place multiple stiffener profiles at one time.

Modify a stiffener profile


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Profiles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the stiffener profile to modify.
4. Using the ribbon controls, modify the stiffener profile as needed.

Delete a stiffener profile


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Profiles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the stiffener profile to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Profile Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf profile system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 729


Placing Profile Systems

 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 730)
Cross Section Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732)
Section Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general settings for the profile.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created.
StdProfileSystemNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent Name>-<Index
Number><Profile Type>-<Index Number>. For example, L3-1LBH-1-1L-1, where L3-1LBH-1
is the parent name, 1L is an index number appended by the profile type, and 1 is an index
number. The profile type abbreviations are L for longitudinal, V for vertical, T for Transversal,
R for ring, and A for axial.
User Defined - Indicates that you want to name the profile yourself by using the appropriate
box.
Type
Specifies the type of profile. The profile type is used by the naming rule in naming the profile
system and by the molded conventions assigned to the parent plate system.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the object.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the name of the profile system command used to create the profile.
Specification

Molded Forms User's Guide 730


Placing Profile Systems

Specifies the specification for the object. This property is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
Continuity
Defines the default behavior for the object when that object intersects another plate system
or profile. To change the options on the list, edit the Slab Continuity select list in Catalog.
Continuous indicates that this object penetrates other plate systems and profile systems
that the object intersects.
Intercostal indicates that this object is split by the other plate systems and profile systems
that the object intersects.
This property can only be modified at the root system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.
Continuity Priority
Specifies the priority when two profile systems that have the same Continuity setting
intersect. The profile system with the lowest continuity priority number penetrates the other
system. For example, two profile systems intersect and the Continuity setting of each set to
Continuous. The profile system with the lowest Continuity Priority number splits the other
profile system. You can only modify this property at the root system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 731


Placing Profile Systems

Cross Section Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the cross-section settings for the profile.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type. The software displays the section type properties for
the section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Section Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the position of the profile cross-section.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Mounting Face

Molded Forms User's Guide 732


Placing Profile Systems

Specifies the cross-section face to mount to the plate system. The options vary depending on
the profile cross-section.
Load Point
Specifies the cross-section load point through which the landing curve passes.
Landing Curve Projection Method
Specifies how the software locates the landing curve with respect to the parent plate system
thickness. The list is defined by the ShipStructLandingCurveProjectionMethod codelist
Along Web indicates that Smart 3D projects the landing curve in-line with the profile web.

Normal indicates that Smart 3D projects the landing curve normal to the plate surface.

Attachment Method
Specifies the method of trimming the profile web where it is attached to the plate system. The
list is defined by the ShipStructStiffenerAttachmentMethod codelist.
Partial Trim indicates that Smart 3D trims the short side of the web.

No Trim indicates that Smart 3D does not trim the web.

Full Trim indicates that Smart 3D trims the entire web.

Offset Method
Specifies how the profile is offset from and trimmed by the plate system when the profile
crosses design seams with leaf plates of varying thickness, and the profile is on the
thickened sides of the plates. The list is defined by the StiffenerOffsetMethod codelist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 733


Placing Profile Systems

Position on thinnest plate indicates that each profile part of the parent profile system is
mounted to the thinnest plate part that the profile part crosses. The profile part is then
trimmed to any thicker plate it crosses.

Position on thickest plate indicates that each profile part of the parent profile system is
mounted to the thickest plate part that the profile part crosses. No trimming occurs.

Offset and trim indicates that each profile part of the parent profile system is mounted at the
specified Offset Value from the molded surface of the plate system. Profile part position is
not adjusted based on plate part thickness. Each profile part is trimmed by any plate part
thicker than the offset distance.

Molded Forms User's Guide 734


Placing Profile Systems

Offset with no trim indicates that each profile part of the parent profile system is mounted at
the specified Offset Value from the molded surface of the plate system. Profile part position
is not adjusted based on plate part thickness. Profile parts are not trimmed by any plate part
thicker than the offset distance.

This option is useful when the gap from successively thicker plates can be filled by
welding:

Offset Value
Defines the amount of offset used with Offset and trim or Offset with no trim. A positive
value moves the stiffener away from the molded surface. A negative value moves it toward
the molded surface. The value is also relative to the profile orientation.
For example, the following positive and negative values are used when profile orientation is
Below on a deck:

The following positive and negative values are used when the profile orientation is Above on
a deck:

Attachment, connection, and offset methods are applied to the profile after the
plate and profile systems are detailed in Structural Detailing.
Start Connection Method
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing

Molded Forms User's Guide 735


Placing Profile Systems

Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.


Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection Method
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the stiffener part that you are editing. Default properties are inherited
from the parent system of the part.
Main Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 737)
Profile Section Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 738)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 738)

Molded Forms User's Guide 736


Placing Profile Systems

Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)


Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)
Routing Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the stiffener part.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies the naming rule to use to name the stiffener part.
 Select StiffenerPartRule to create a name based on the parent root profile system name,
the location within the parent root profile system, and the parent assembly name.
 Select User Defined to name the stiffener part using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the category for the stiffener part. Categories specify the role of the part in the
model.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the stiffener part.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the landing curve definition.
Specification
Displays the structural specification for the stiffener part. It is inherited from the parent
system.
Description
Type a description for the stiffener part.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 737


Placing Profile Systems

Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Profile Section Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the profile section settings for the stiffener part.
Material
Displays the material for the stiffener part.
Grade
Displays the material grade for the stiffener part.
Section Type
Displays the profile section type.
Section Size
Displays the profile section size.

General Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies general properties of the stiffener part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
Category: Standard
ProfileType
Specifies the profile type of the part. The list is defined by the StrMfgProfileType codelist.
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 737).
Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all available
values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically Vertical Drop,
Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 738


Placing Profile Systems

Stiffener Profile System by Offset


The Stiffener Profile System by Offset command creates a stiffener profile system on the
selected plate system by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (a
seam, plate boundary, plate edge, the landing curve of another profile system, or grid plane).
You can control the boundaries of the stiffener profile by selecting a plate system, profile system,
seam or grid plane that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software
uses the landing curve ends as the stiffener profile boundaries.
After defining the landing curve and the boundaries, you can set the profile orientation. The plate
system side and the flange direction for unsymmetrical profile sections are set by the molded
convention of the plate system. However, you may override the default settings by using the
Profile Properties dialog box.
When a stiffener profile system is created, a stiffener part is also created. Profile parts
are detailed in the Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the
Structural Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified. For more information, see
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 736).

Stiffener Profile System by Offset Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a stiffener profile in the model.

Profile by Offset Settings


Opens the Profile by Offset Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the profile system that you are about to place in the model. The initial settings
default from the parent plate system. For more information, see Profile Properties Dialog Box
(on page 729).
Plate System
Specifies the plate system that you want to stiffen. You can select multiple plate systems to
place multiple stiffener profiles systems at the same time. The software uses the same
information for each stiffener profile system. After placement, the stiffener profiles are
unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.
Base Curve Definition
Specifies an existing curve or grid plane from which to offset the profile. The intersection of
the grid plane and the plate system defines the base curve.
Offset Curve Definition
Defines the offset parameters and direction from the base curve. See the Offset Curve
Definition Controls section below.

Profile Orientation Definition


Defines the orientation of the profile system cross-section. See the Profile Orientation
Definition Controls section below.
Boundary Definition
Defines the boundaries of the stiffener profile. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the stiffener profile to maintain the boundary relationship. See

Molded Forms User's Guide 739


Placing Profile Systems

the Boundary Definition Controls section below.


Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Offset Curve Definition Controls


Available when you use the Offset Curve Definition option.
Unlimited
Defines offset curves without a stop limit.

Stop Limit
Defines offset curves with a stop limit. By using a stop limit, you can select an edge, profile
landing curve, connection reference curve, or seam to control the landing curves being
created. If you define an offset value and the Offset lock is locked, then landing curves
are applied at increments of the offset value until the selected stop limit is reached. If the
Offset lock is unlocked and a value has been defined for Count, then the landing
curves equal to the number entered in the Count box are equally spaced between the base
curve and the stop limit.
Offset lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the base curve and the landing curve that you are
defining. If you type 0, the landing curve is placed on the base curve. This box may also
display the offset distance as defined by mouse movements.
Method
Select an offset direction. You can select transverse, longitudinal, vertical, or girth.
Count
Specifies how many profiles to create, each equally spaced by increments of the offset value.
Step
Defines an increment that the system uses as you dynamically move the mouse. If you have
entered a value in the Offset box, then this control is not used.

Profile Orientation Definition Controls


Available when you use the Profile Orientation Definition option.
Rule Region Definition
Defines regions along the profile landing curve. Each region of the landing curve can have a
different orientation rule assigned to it. The software initially defines a region boundary point
at the profile boundaries. You cannot delete or modify the software-defined region boundary
points. You can define and modify additional region boundary along the profile landing curve
using grid/reference planes, plate design seams, and plate planning seams.

Orientation Rule Assignment


Opens a list of orientation rules from which you can select. These rules include:

Molded Forms User's Guide 740


Placing Profile Systems

 Normal - The web of the profile follows the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve. This is the default setting if the profile parent is a plate system.
 Up-Down - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in an up-down
direction. For example, you can select Up-Down for profiles on a deck.
 Fore-Aft - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in a fore-aft
direction. For example, you can select Fore-Aft for profiles on a transverse frame.
 Port-Starboard - The orientation vector of the profile cross- section remains in a
port-starboard direction. For example, you can select Port-Starboard for longitudinal
stringer profiles.
 Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to a reference plane that
you specify.

 Angle - Type the angle for the plane.


 Reference - Select the reference plane from which to measure the angle. You can
select Normal, Up-Down (horizontal), Fore-Aft (longitudinal) or Port-Starboard
(transverse). Normal reference plane is the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve and is available for any profile orientation. Up-Down, Fore-Aft or
Port-Starboard are available as is appropriate for the direction of the landing curve.
 Plane - Select the plane in which to measure the angle. For Normal Reference, this
option is unavailable because the angle is always measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. For Up-Down or Port-Starboard Reference, you can select Normal
or Orthogonal. If Normal is selected, the angle is measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. Orthogonal is the transverse, longitudinal or horizontal plane closest
to the landing curve normal. If Orthogonal is selected, the software selects the
orthogonal plane based on average direction of the landing curve.
Twist Linear Girth
Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the profile region, based on the difference
between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the region. The twist rate
is constant.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 741


Placing Profile Systems

 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Cubic
Twist is distributed using a cubic equation along the girth length of the profile region, based
on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the
region. The twist rate at the ends is zero. The twist rate reaches its maximum at the midpoint.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Linear Ortho
Twist is constant at every frame along the orthogonal projection length of the profile region,
based on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of
the region. The software uses the Main_CS frame system if it exists. Otherwise, the software
uses the CS_0 frame system.

 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Profile System Table


Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles and twist rates of the
current profile.

Molded Forms User's Guide 742


Placing Profile Systems

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundary Definition option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select
a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto

Molded Forms User's Guide 743


Placing Profile Systems

Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Start Connection
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.

Molded Forms User's Guide 744


Placing Profile Systems

Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.


Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place stiffener profile by offset (on page 745)
 Modify a stiffener profile (on page 729)
 Delete a stiffener profile (on page 729)

Place stiffener profile by offset


1. Click Stiffener Profile System by Offset on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to stiffen.
3. Select the Section Type and Section Size.
4. Click Base Curve Definition .
5. Select a base curve (grid plane) that intersects the plate system that you selected. This is the
curve to offset from.
6. Click Offset Curve Definition .
7. Define the offset from the base curve.
8. Click Profile Orientation Definition .
9. Define the orientation of the profile system cross-section.
10. Click Boundary Definition .
11. Define the boundaries for the stiffener profile.
12. Click Accept .
13. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:

Molded Forms User's Guide 745


Placing Profile Systems

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)


14. Click Finish.
Stiffener profiles are always associated with the plate system to which they belong.

Stiffener Profile System by Projection


The Stiffener Profile System by Projection command creates a stiffener profile system on
the selected plate system by projecting a 2D or 3D landing curve that you have sketched onto the
plate system.
You can control the boundaries of the stiffener profile by selecting a plate system, profile system,
seam or grid plane that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software
uses the landing curve ends as the stiffener profile boundaries.
After defining the landing curve and the boundaries, you can set the profile orientation. The plate
system side and the flange direction for unsymmetrical profile sections are set by the molded
convention of the plate system. However, you may override the default settings by using the
Profile Properties dialog box.
When a stiffener profile system is created, a stiffener part is also created. Profile parts
are detailed in the Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the
Structural Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified. For more information, see
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 736).

Profile Knuckles
If the plate system associated with the profile has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve,
the software creates a profile knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the
Workspace Explorer. For more information, see Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page
933).

Stiffener Profile System by Projection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a stiffener profile in the model.

Profile by Intersection Settings


Opens the Profile by Intersection Settings dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the profile system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
settings default from the parent plate system. For more information, see Profile Properties
Dialog Box (on page 729).
Plate System
Specifies the plate system that you want to stiffen. You can select multiple plate systems to
place multiple stiffener profiles systems at the same time. The software uses the same
information for each stiffener profile system. After placement, the stiffener profiles are
unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.

Define using 2D Sketcher


Defines the landing curve by drawing it in the Sketch 2D environment. See the Landing
Curve Definition Controls and Define Plane Controls sections below.
Landing Curve Definition by 3D

Molded Forms User's Guide 746


Placing Profile Systems

Allows creation of the landing curve directly in a graphic view by using the Profile Palette
dialog box (similar to the Geometric Construction Palette), the Geometric Construction
ribbon, and the Geometric Construction Explorer. This option is the 3D equivalent to
Sketch 2D. For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).

Profile Orientation Definition


Defines the orientation of the profile system cross-section. See the Profile Orientation
Definition Controls section below.
Boundary Definition
Defines the boundaries of the stiffener profile. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the stiffener profile to maintain the boundary relationship. See
the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Profile Orientation Definition Controls


Available when you use the Profile Orientation Definition option.
Rule Region Definition
Defines regions along the profile landing curve. Each region of the landing curve can have a
different orientation rule assigned to it. The software initially defines a region boundary point
at the profile boundaries. You cannot delete or modify the software-defined region boundary
points. You can define and modify additional region boundary along the profile landing curve
using grid/reference planes, plate design seams, and plate planning seams.

Orientation Rule Assignment


Opens a list of orientation rules from which you can select. These rules include:
 Normal - The web of the profile follows the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve. This is the default setting if the profile parent is a plate system.
 Up-Down - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in an up-down
direction. For example, you can select Up-Down for profiles on a deck.
 Fore-Aft - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in a fore-aft
direction. For example, you can select Fore-Aft for profiles on a transverse frame.
 Port-Starboard - The orientation vector of the profile cross- section remains in a
port-starboard direction. For example, you can select Port-Starboard for longitudinal
stringer profiles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 747


Placing Profile Systems

 Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to a reference plane that
you specify.

 Angle - Type the angle for the plane.


 Reference - Select the reference plane from which to measure the angle. You can
select Normal, Up-Down (horizontal), Fore-Aft (longitudinal) or Port-Starboard
(transverse). Normal reference plane is the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve and is available for any profile orientation. Up-Down, Fore-Aft or
Port-Starboard are available as is appropriate for the direction of the landing curve.
 Plane - Select the plane in which to measure the angle. For Normal Reference, this
option is unavailable because the angle is always measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. For Up-Down or Port-Starboard Reference, you can select Normal
or Orthogonal. If Normal is selected, the angle is measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. Orthogonal is the transverse, longitudinal or horizontal plane closest
to the landing curve normal. If Orthogonal is selected, the software selects the
orthogonal plane based on average direction of the landing curve.
Twist Linear Girth
Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the profile region, based on the difference
between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the region. The twist rate
is constant.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Cubic
Twist is distributed using a cubic equation along the girth length of the profile region, based
on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the
region. The twist rate at the ends is zero. The twist rate reaches its maximum at the midpoint.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 748


Placing Profile Systems

 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Linear Ortho
Twist is constant at every frame along the orthogonal projection length of the profile region,
based on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of
the region. The software uses the Main_CS frame system if it exists. Otherwise, the software
uses the CS_0 frame system.

 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Profile System Table


Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles and twist rates of the
current profile.

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundary Definition option.

Pick Boundaries
Selects objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the boundaries. This
option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
After you select a boundary plate, press SHIFT to select the Pick Edges option.
Press SHIFT again to return to the Pick Boundaries option.
Pick Edges
Selects free edges on plates to define the boundary. This option is available when you select

Molded Forms User's Guide 749


Placing Profile Systems

a plate in the Pick Boundaries step.

Solve Ambiguity
Clarifies the required boundary. If the boundaries that you selected can form the object
boundary in more than one way, then you have defined an ambiguous boundary. The
software prompts you to select multiple bounded areas to specify the boundary. For more
information, see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

Boundary Curve
Draws the boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.
See Define Plane Controls below.
Sketching Plane
Selects the sketching plane for the boundary.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane to use as
reference geometry. You see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Allows you to select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you
want to use as reference geometry. The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and
you see the selected objects in the Sketch 2D environment.
Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the boundary.
Auto
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. The Workspace Explorer and the graphics view highlight items in
the select set. If the software adds no objects to the select set, a message displays in the
status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting Item or the Add
Projection Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices (on page 65).

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the Define using 2D Sketcher option.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 750


Placing Profile Systems

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only

Molded Forms User's Guide 751


Placing Profile Systems

available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Start Connection

Molded Forms User's Guide 752


Placing Profile Systems

Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

Knuckle Best Practices (on page 56)

What do you want to do?


 Place stiffener profile by projection (on page 753)
 Define landing curve by 2D (on page 87)
 Define landing curve by 3D (on page 88)
 Modify a stiffener profile (on page 729)
 Delete a stiffener profile (on page 729)

Place stiffener profile by projection


1. Click Stiffener Profile System by Projection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to stiffen.
3. Select the Section Type and Section Size.
4. Define the landing curve using one of the following methods:

Define landing curve by 2D (on page 87) .

Molded Forms User's Guide 753


Placing Profile Systems

Define landing curve by 3D (on page 88) .

5. Click Profile Orientation Definition .


6. Define the orientation of the stiffener profile with regard to the plate system.
7. Click Boundary Definition .
8. Define the boundaries for the stiffener profile.
9. Click Accept .
10. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
11. Click Finish.

 If you do not select boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to apply
to the resulting profile curves.
 Stiffener profiles are always associated with the plate system to which they belong.
 If the plate system is symmetrical about the sketch plane (For example, a revolved plate
system or a hull), an unbounded sketched seam curve appear on both sides of the plate
system. If you want the profile on only one side, then you must add a boundary to the profile
so that the command switches to Solve Ambiguity . The plate system on which the
profile is placed can also be selected as its own boundary to meet this requirement.

Molded Forms User's Guide 754


Placing Profile Systems

Stiffener Profile System by Table


The Stiffener Profile System by Table command creates a stiffener profile system on the
selected plate system by defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table. This command is
particularly useful when placing stiffener profiles on a hull or other multi-curved shape.
You can control the boundaries of the stiffener profile by selecting a plate system, profile system,
seam or grid plane that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software
uses the landing curve ends as the stiffener profile boundaries.
After defining the landing curve and the boundaries, you can set the profile orientation. The plate
system side and the flange direction for unsymmetrical profile sections are set by the molded
convention of the plate system. However, you may override the default settings by using the
Profile Properties dialog box.
When a stiffener profile system is created, a stiffener part is also created. Profile parts
are detailed in the Structural Detailing task and then used to create manufacturing parts in the
Structural Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be modified. For more information, see
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box (on page 736).

Stiffener Profile System by Table Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a stiffener profile in the model.

Profile Properties
Opens the Profile Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the properties of
the profile system that you are about to place in the model. The initial settings default from
the parent plate system. For more information, see Profile Properties Dialog Box (on page
729).
Plate System
Specifies the plate system that you want to stiffen. You can select multiple plate systems to
place multiple stiffener profiles systems at the same time. The software uses the same
information for each stiffener profile system. After placement, the stiffener profiles are
unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.
Landing Curve Table
Opens a table where you can define the landing curve coordinates for the stiffener profile
system. For more information, see Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).

Profile Orientation Definition


Defines the orientation of the profile system cross-section. See the Profile Orientation
Definition Controls section below.
Boundary Definition
Defines the boundaries of the stiffener profile. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the stiffener profile to maintain the boundary relationship. See
the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish
Places the system using the defined parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 755


Placing Profile Systems

Profile Orientation Definition Controls


Available when you use the Profile Orientation Definition option.
Rule Region Definition
Defines regions along the profile landing curve. Each region of the landing curve can have a
different orientation rule assigned to it. The software initially defines a region boundary point
at the profile boundaries. You cannot delete or modify the software-defined region boundary
points. You can define and modify additional region boundary along the profile landing curve
using grid/reference planes, plate design seams, and plate planning seams.

Orientation Rule Assignment


Opens a list of orientation rules from which you can select. These rules include:
 Normal - The web of the profile follows the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve. This is the default setting if the profile parent is a plate system.
 Up-Down - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in an up-down
direction. For example, you can select Up-Down for profiles on a deck.
 Fore-Aft - The orientation vector of the profile cross-section remains in a fore-aft
direction. For example, you can select Fore-Aft for profiles on a transverse frame.
 Port-Starboard - The orientation vector of the profile cross- section remains in a
port-starboard direction. For example, you can select Port-Starboard for longitudinal
stringer profiles.
 Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to a reference plane that
you specify.

 Angle - Type the angle for the plane.


 Reference - Select the reference plane from which to measure the angle. You can
select Normal, Up-Down (horizontal), Fore-Aft (longitudinal) or Port-Starboard
(transverse). Normal reference plane is the plate system surface normal along the
landing curve and is available for any profile orientation. Up-Down, Fore-Aft or
Port-Starboard are available as is appropriate for the direction of the landing curve.
 Plane - Select the plane in which to measure the angle. For Normal Reference, this
option is unavailable because the angle is always measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. For Up-Down or Port-Starboard Reference, you can select Normal
or Orthogonal. If Normal is selected, the angle is measured in a plane normal to the
landing curve. Orthogonal is the transverse, longitudinal or horizontal plane closest

Molded Forms User's Guide 756


Placing Profile Systems

to the landing curve normal. If Orthogonal is selected, the software selects the
orthogonal plane based on average direction of the landing curve.
Twist Linear Girth
Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the profile region, based on the difference
between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the region. The twist rate
is constant.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Cubic
Twist is distributed using a cubic equation along the girth length of the profile region, based
on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of the
region. The twist rate at the ends is zero. The twist rate reaches its maximum at the midpoint.
 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.
 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
Twist Linear Ortho
Twist is constant at every frame along the orthogonal projection length of the profile region,
based on the difference between the First Angle and Second Angle defined at each end of
the region. The software uses the Main_CS frame system if it exists. Otherwise, the software
uses the CS_0 frame system.

 First Angle - Type the angle at the first (beginning) point of the region boundary.

Molded Forms User's Guide 757


Placing Profile Systems

 Second Angle - Type the angle at the second (end) point of the region boundary.
 Angle - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Reference - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.
 Plane - See the definition and graphic for the Planar orientation rule.

Profile System Table


Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles and twist rates of the
current profile.

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundary Definition option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified

Molded Forms User's Guide 758


Placing Profile Systems

only at the root system.


Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Start Connection
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760)

What do you want to do?


 Place stiffener profile by table (on page 760)
 Modify a stiffener profile (on page 729)
 Delete a stiffener profile (on page 729)

Molded Forms User's Guide 759


Placing Profile Systems

Place stiffener profile by table


1. Click Stiffener Profile System by Table on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to stiffen.
3. Select the Section Type and Section Size.
4. Click Landing Curve Table .
5. Define the landing curve coordinates in the table. For more information about defining
coordinates, see Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).
6. Click Close.

7. Click Profile Orientation Definition .


8. Define the orientation of the stiffener profile with regard to the plate system.
9. Click Boundary Definition .
10. Define the boundaries for the stiffener profile.
11. Click Accept .
12. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
13. Click Finish.

 If you do not define boundaries, the software uses the ends of the landing curve as the
boundaries.
 Stiffener profiles are always associated with the plate system to which they belong.

Landing Curve Table Dialog Box


Specifies a landing curve by defining X, Y, and Z coordinates of points along the landing curve.
Each point along the landing curve is defined on a single row in the table. You must define two
out of the three point coordinates. The software derives the third coordinate for you, and
highlights the derived coordinate in blue.

Dialog Box Controls

Point Type
Select an option for each point:

Molded Forms User's Guide 760


Placing Profile Systems

 Definition - The point on the row is used to define the landing curve, and the curve
transitions smoothly through the point.
 Knuckle - The point on the row is used to define the landing curve, and the curve knuckles at
the point.
Display - The point is computed based on the intersection of the landing curve and another
object, as defined by Derived Points in the Table. Display points are not definition points and
are not saved as part of the landing curve definition.
Intersecting Object - Select a seam or profile stiffener on the selected plate system, or another
plate system that is bounded or split by the selected plate system.
 If Intersecting Object is not selected, then two of the X, Y, and Z coordinates must have
values. The third coordinate is derived.
 If Intersecting Object is selected, then one of the X, Y, and Z coordinates must have a value.
The other two coordinates are derived.
X Reference - Select a frame (Y-Z) grid plane to specify the X-coordinate of the landing curve
point. You can also explicitly specify the X coordinate by typing the point's location along the
X-axis.
X Offset - Type an offset value from the X reference.
Y Reference - Select a buttock (X-Z) grid plane to specify the Y-coordinate of the landing curve
point. You can also explicitly specify the Y coordinate by typing the point's location along the
Y-axis.
Y Offset - Type an offset value from the Y reference.
Z Reference - Select a waterline (X-Y) grid plane to specify the Z-coordinate of the landing curve
point. You can also explicitly specify the Z coordinate by typing the point's location along the
Z-axis.
Z Offset - Type an offset value from the Z reference.

 Points for which you have entered coordinates are usually definition points.
 Knuckle points cannot be at the ends of a landing curve.
 Every curve must have a minimum of two definition points.

Molded Forms User's Guide 761


Placing Profile Systems

Curvature Vector
 Display Method - Specifies how you want the curvature vectors to appear when you click
Preview. Select Number of vectors to specify a fixed number of vectors that the software is
to distribute evenly along the landing curve. Specify the number of vectors in the Count box.
Select Vector spacing to place vectors along the landing curve a fixed distance apart. The
software determines the number of vectors based on the landing curve length and the
spacing distance specified in the Spacing box.
 Count - Specifies the number of vectors to distribute evenly along the landing curve preview.
This option is only available when Display Method is set to Number of vectors.
 Spacing - Specifies the distance between vectors along the landing curve preview. This
option is only available when Display Method is set to Vector Spacing.
 Range - Select where along the landing curve preview you want to see curvature vectors.
Select Entire Curve to display curvature vectors along the entire landing curve. Select
Between Definition Points to display curvature vectors only between definition points.
 Scale Factor - Specify a scaling factor value for the curvature vectors. The larger the value
the larger the curvature vectors appear in the graphic view.
Intersection Plane
This option is available only when the coordinates of two points are known for a landing curve on
a plate system with curvature (such as the hull). When the coordinates of only two points are
known, multiple solutions exist to define the landing curve. You can define an intersection plane
passing through the points to complete the landing curve definition.
 Base Plane - Specifies the plane in which to measure the angle used to define the
intersection plane.
 From - Specifies the plane from which to measure the angle used to define the intersection
plane. Select Horizontal or Vertical.
 Angle - Specifies the angle of the intersection plane, measured from the Horizontal or
Vertical plane. Use the unit of measure selected in Tools > Options.
 Normal to Base Plane - Select to orient the intersection plane normal to the base plane. The
intersection plane appears as a straight line when viewed in the direction of the Base Plane.
Clear to orient the intersection plane by the minimum linear distance between the two points
as allowed by the specified Angle.

 Base Plane is similar to the angle Plane in Profile Orientation Definition.


 From plane is similar to the Reference plane in Profile Orientation Definition.
 Angle is similar to the Angle in Profile Orientation Definition.
 You can create a profile with a planar web if the Angle for the landing curve is the same as
the Angle for the profile orientation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 762


Placing Profile Systems

In the following example, A is the Base Plane, B is the From Horizontal plane, C is the Angle, D
is the final Intersection Plane, and E is the landing curve on the selected plate system.

Derived Points in the Table - These options control when and how the software derives points
between definition points that you define. Derived points are not saved as part of the landing
curve definition.
 X: Transverse - Select this option to have the software derive points where the landing curve
intersects each X grid plane. You must select a coordinate system.
 Y: Buttock - Select this option to have the software derive points where the landing curve
intersects each Y grid plane. You must select a coordinate system.
 Z: Waterline - Select this option to have the software derive points where the landing curve
intersects each Z grid plane. You must select a coordinate system.
 Seams - Select this option to have the software derive points at the intersection of the landing
curve with seams on the selected plate system.
 Stiffeners - Select this option to have the software derive points at the intersection of the
landing curve with stiffeners on the selected plate system.
 Plates - Select this option to have the software derive points at the intersection of the landing
curve with other plate systems bounded or split by the selected plate system.
Preview - Displays the landing curve, as currently defined by the points in the table, in the model.
You can select Preview multiple times to see changes made to the landing curve as you add and
edit points in the table.
Print - Prints a copy of the landing curve table, as it is currently defined.
Close - Closes the dialog box.

Right-Click Menu Commands


There are several right-click commands available to help in defining the points in the table.
Cut Cell - Removes the contents of the selected cell and moves the contents to the Clipboard.
Copy Cell - Moves a copy of the selected cell contents to the Clipboard.
Paste Cell - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the cell.
Cut Row - Removes the contents of the selected row and moves the contents to the Clipboard.
Copy Row - Moves a copy of the selected row contents to the Clipboard.

Molded Forms User's Guide 763


Placing Profile Systems

Paste Row - Places a copy of the Clipboard contents in the row, replacing any existing values in
the row.
Paste Reverse - If more than one row is copied, this command places a copy of the Clipboard
contents in the same number of rows but in reverse order, replacing any existing values in the
rows.
Insert Cut/Copied Rows - Inserts the row on the Clipboard into a new row in the table.
Insert Reverse Rows - If more than one row is copied, this command inserts the rows from the
Clipboard in the table in reverse order.
Delete - Removes the contents of the selected cell.
Insert Row - Inserts a new, blank row into the table above the selected row.
Remove Row - Removes the selected row from the table.
Make Derived - Marks the selected reference as the one you want the software to derive.

What do you want to do?


 Select intersecting object (on page 764)
 Set coordinate by plane (on page 764)
 Set coordinate by key-ins (on page 765)
 Derive points (on page 765)

Select intersecting object


1. Select the Point Type.
2. Click in the Intersecting Object cell.

3. Click the browse button .


4. Select an intersecting object, such as a seam, stiffener, or plate system, to use.
Only valid intersecting objects are available, based on the relationship to the
selected plate system.
5. Click OK.

Set coordinate by plane


1. Select the Point Type. The valid options are Definition and Knuckle.
2. Click in the X, Y, or Z Reference cell for the coordinate.

3. Click the browse button .


4. Select Reference Plane.
5. Select a grid plane to use as the coordinate reference.
Only valid grid planes are available, based on the coordinate reference axis.
6. Click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 764


Placing Profile Systems

7. Type an offset from the plane for the coordinate, if needed, in the X, Y, or Z Offset box.

Set coordinate by key-ins


1. Select the Point Type. The valid options are Definition and Knuckle.
2. Click in the X, Y, or Z Reference cell for the coordinate.

3. Click the browse button .


4. Select Coordinate.
5. Type the coordinate value in the box.
Include the unit of measure, such as m for meter, if the coordinate value is not in the
default unit of measure as defined on the Units of Measure tab of Tools > Options.
6. Click OK.

Derive points
1. In row 1, define one end point of the landing curve. Be sure to select the Definition option in
the Point Type cell.
2. In row 2, define the other end point of the landing curve. Be sure to select the Definition
option in the Point Type cell.
3. Add other Definition or Knuckle points between the end points, if needed.
Add rows by using the Insert Row command on the using right-click menu.
4. In Derived Points in the Table, select the axis, axes, or object types to derive points for. In
general, you want select an axis or object type that intersects your landing curve.
5. Select the coordinate system or object in the model along which to derive the points.
6. Click Preview.
7. Review the points in the table that the software derived. The derived points have Display as
the Point Type.

 You can change a derived point to be a definition point by selecting the Definition option
in the Point Type cell.
 Click Preview when you make any changes to the definition points in the table.

Tripping Stiffener System


The Tripping Stiffener System command places a stiffener profile system on a parent plate
system, but the stiffener has the following unique characteristics:
 Defined by and bounded to a starting object and an ending object. The objects can be profile
stiffener systems, edge reinforcements, plate systems, or edges of the parent plate system.
 Oriented in relation to the orientation of the starting or ending object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 765


Placing Profile Systems

 At least one of the starting and ending objects must penetrate or be bounded to the parent
plate of the tripping stiffener.

The software uses the parent plate's molded conventions for the tripping stiffener. Like other
profile systems, the tripping stiffener can be split, detailed, and manufactured.

Tripping Stiffener System Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a tripping stiffener in the model.

Tripping Stiffener Properties


Opens the Tripping Stiffener Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the
properties of the stiffener system that you are about to place in the model. The initial settings
default from the parent plate system. For more information, see Tripping Stiffener Properties
Dialog Box (on page 770).
Select Plate System
Specifies the plate system to stiffen.
Select Starting Object
Specifies a reference object to serve as the starting location of the tripping stiffener. If the
reference object intersects the parent plate system, the software uses the intersection of the
two objects as the connect point. If the reference object is an edge of the parent plate system
or a profile system that is a child of the parent plate system, then the software uses the
mouse click location along the edge or profile as the connect point.
Select Ending Object
Specifies a reference object to serve as the ending location of the tripping stiffener. If the
reference object intersects the parent plate system, the software uses the intersection of the
two objects as the connect point. If the reference object is an edge of the parent plate system
or a profile system that is a child of the parent plate system, then the software uses the
mouse click location along the edge or profile as the connect point.
Finish
Places the tripping stiffeners using the defined parameters.

Finish Mode
When set to On, places the tripping stiffeners in the model as soon as you set all of the
required inputs. When set to Off, you must click Finish to place the system.

Orientation Table
Opens a read-only table containing the coordinates, orientation angles, and twist rates of the
current tripping stiffener system part.
Connect Type

Molded Forms User's Guide 766


Placing Profile Systems

Specifies how the tripping stiffener relates to the selected reference object. You can select
from:
 Connected - The tripping stiffener connects to and is trimmed by the surface of the
reference object. This is the default selection.
 Lapped - The tripping stiffener overlaps the reference object.
 Parallel - The tripping stiffener landing curve direction is constrained to be parallel to
the web of the starting reference object. Not available if the starting and ending
reference objects both intersect the parent plate system.
 Perpendicular - The tripping stiffener landing curve direction is constrained to be
perpendicular to the ending reference object. Not available if the starting and ending
reference objects both intersect the parent plate system.
 Transverse, Vertical, or Longitudinal - The tripping stiffener landing curve is
constrained to be parallel to one of the main axes, relative to the starting object
connect point location. Not available if the starting and ending reference objects both
intersect the parent plate system.
 Fixed X, Fixed Y, or Fixed Z - The tripping stiffener end location is defined by a
distance from a main axis. Not available if the starting and ending reference objects
both intersect the parent plate system.
 End Connect - The tripping stiffener connects to the end of the ending reference
object when the reference object is a profile stiffener or an edge reinforcement.
 Distance Along - The tripping stiffener end location is defined by a distance from a
reference object along the ending object.
 Twisted - Twist is distributed evenly along the girth length of the tripping stiffener
region based on the orientation of the start and end objects. The twist rate is
constant. This connect type is available only when both the supports are
non-aligned.
If the tangents computed at the intersecting points of the plate to stiffen and
supports are not co-planar, then both of the supports are said to be non-aligned.
Fixed Value
Specifies the value for the Fixed X, Fixed Y, or Fixed Z connect type.

Select Reference Object


Specifies a plate system, profile system, grid plane, seam or reference curve which has a
valid intersection with the ending object of the stiffener. The constraint distance is measured
along the ending object from the intersection of this reference object and ending object. This
option is available only when the Distance Along connect type is used for the ending object.
Method
Specifies the constraint direction. In the current release of the software, Girth is the only
supported constraint method.
Offset
Specifies the constraint distance value for the Distance Along connect type. You can type
positive and negative values to measure in different directions.
Override Offsets

Molded Forms User's Guide 767


Placing Profile Systems

Ignores the rule-based U and V offsets for the start and ending objects of the tripping stiffener,
and sets the offsets to zero and the override flag to True.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Start Connection
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 768


Placing Profile Systems

Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.


End Connection
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place tripping stiffener (on page 769)
 Modify a tripping stiffener profile (on page 769)
 Delete a tripping stiffener profile (on page 770)

Place tripping stiffener


1. Click Tripping Stiffener System on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the parent plate system to stiffen.
3. Select a Connect Type for the tripping stiffener starting object.
4. Select a plate system, profile system, or parent plate edge to use as the starting object for
the tripping stiffener.
5. Select a Connect Type for the tripping stiffener ending object.
6. Select a plate system, profile system, or parent plate edge to use as the ending object for the
tripping stiffener.
7. Click Finish.
At least one of the starting and ending objects must penetrate or be bounded
to the parent plate system of the tripping stiffener.
Tripping stiffener profiles are always associated with the parent plate system to which
they belong.

Modify a tripping stiffener profile


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Profiles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the tripping stiffener profile to modify.

Molded Forms User's Guide 769


Placing Profile Systems

4. Using the ribbon controls, modify the tripping stiffener profile as needed.

Delete a tripping stiffener profile


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Profiles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the tripping stiffener profile to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Tripping Stiffener Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf tripping stiffener profile system that you are editing.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 730)
Cross Section Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732)
Section Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732)
Tripping Stiffener Connection Data Tab (Tripping Stiffener Properties Dialog Box) (on page 771)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Molded Forms User's Guide 770


Placing Profile Systems

Tripping Stiffener Connection Data Tab (Tripping Stiffener


Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the tripping stiffener connection data as it relates to the two reference objects that
define the stiffener location. This tab is available only when you are modifying a tripping stiffener.
Connect Type - Specifies how the tripping stiffener relates to the selected reference object. You
can select from:
 Connected - The tripping stiffener connects with a butt or tee type connection and is trimmed
by the reference object.
 Lapped - The tripping stiffener overlaps the reference object.
 Fixed X, Fixed Y, or Fixed Z - The tripping stiffener end location is defined by a distance
from a main axis.
 Parallel - The tripping stiffener landing curve direction is constrained to be parallel to the web
of the beginning reference object.
 Perpendicular - The tripping stiffener landing curve direction is constrained to be
perpendicular to the ending reference object.
 Transverse, Vertical, or Longitudinal - The tripping stiffener landing curve is constrained to
be parallel to one of the main axis.
Load Point - Specifies the load point of the beginning and ending reference object to which the
tripping stiffener landing curve is to connect. You must select the Override option to change this
value.
U Offset - Specifies an offset of the tripping stiffener landing curve relative to the load point on
the cross-section of the reference profile. The offset value is based on the approach angle
between the end objects.
V Offset - Specifies an offset of the tripping stiffener landing curve relative to the load point on
the cross-section of the reference profile. The offset value is based on the approach angle
between the end objects.
Override - Select to override the values of Load Point, U Offset, and V Offset.

Profile Edge Reinforcement


The Profile Edge Reinforcement command places a profile system along the free edge of a
plate system. A free edge is defined as a plate edge that has no logical connections. Therefore, a
free edge can be an opening edge, an edge made by use of a boundary curve, or an edge
defined by use of a grid plane.
When an edge reinforcement profile system is created, an edge reinforcement part is
also created. Profile parts are detailed in the Structural Detailing task and then used to create
manufacturing parts in the Structural Manufacturing task. Properties of the part can be
modified. For more information, see Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box (on
page 779).

Profile Edge Reinforcement Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a profile edge reinforcement in the model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 771


Placing Profile Systems

Edge Reinforcement System Properties


Opens the Edge Reinforcement Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the edge reinforcement system that you are about to place in the model. For
more information, see Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box (on page 775).
Pick Edge
Specifies the plate edge to reinforce.

Define Orientation
Specifies the orientation of the edge reinforcement. See the Define Orientation Controls
section below.
Boundary 1
Defines the first boundary for the edge reinforcement.
Boundary 2
Defines the second boundary for the edge reinforcement.
Edge Boundary
Allows you to select the edge of a plate as the boundary. This option is available when you
select Boundary 1 or Boundary 2 .
Finish
Places the edge reinforcement using the defined parameters.

Define Orientation Controls


Available when you use the Define Orientation Definition option.
Rule
Specifies the orientation rule. This option is only available after you click Define Orientation
. You can select from the following rules:
Normal - The web of the edge reinforcement system part follows the plate system surface
normal along the landing curve. This is the default setting.
Vertical - The orientation vector of the edge reinforcement cross-section remains in a vertical
direction. For example, you can select Vertical for edge reinforcements on a deck.
Longitudinal - The orientation vector of the edge reinforcement cross-section remains in a
longitudinal direction. For example, you can select Longitudinal for edge reinforcements on
a transverse frame.
Transverse - The orientation vector of the edge reinforcement cross- section remains in a
transverse direction. For example, you can select Transverse for longitudinal stringer edge
reinforcements.
Planar - The orientation angle remains constant relative to the Normal reference plane. This
rule is valid only for planar edges.
Angle Reference
Specifies the angle reference plane from which to measure the mounting angle. This option
is available only when you select Planar from the Rule list. You can select from the following
reference planes.

Molded Forms User's Guide 772


Placing Profile Systems

Normal - Specifies that the reference plane from which the mounting angle is measured is in
the Normal direction.
Up-Down - Specifies that the reference plane from which the mounting angle is measured is
in the Up-Down direction.
Fore-Aft - Specifies that the reference plane from which the mounting angle is measured is
in the Fore-Aft direction.
Port-Starboard - Specifies that the reference plane from which the mounting angle is
measured is in the Port-Starboard direction.
Angle
Specifies the angle for the plane. This is set as the mounting angle for the edge
reinforcement. The allowable range for the angle is -90 to +90 degrees. The Angle option is
only available when you select Planar in the Rule list.
Reject
Clears all selected edges or boundaries.
Accept
Accepts all selected edges or boundaries.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile cross-section size.
Name
Specifies the name of the object that you are placing. Type a name, or leave the box blank to
use the default naming rule.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Primary Orientation
Defines the side of the plate system used to place the stiffener profile. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Secondary Orientation
Defines the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections and the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross- sections. The default setting is
determined by the molded conventions of the parent system. This property can be modified
only at the root system.
Material

Molded Forms User's Guide 773


Placing Profile Systems

Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Start Connection
Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.
End Connection
Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate, profile, or member
boundary. By Rule is the default setting. The connection is determined by assembly
connection rules defined for Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be added as
part of your reference data customization.
By Rule - The connection is determined by assembly connection rules defined for Structural
Detailing
Welded - Places a welded web and flange cut.
Snip - Places a snipped web and flanged cut.
Cutback - Places a web and flange cut that are straight (not snipped), but are cut back from
the bounding object.
Bracketed - Places a bracket as a child of the assembly connection.

What do you want to do?


 Place edge reinforcement profile (on page 774)
 Modify an edge reinforcement profile (on page 775)
 Delete edge reinforcement profile (on page 775)

Place edge reinforcement profile


1. Click Profile Edge Reinforcement on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the edge to reinforce.

3. Click Define Orientation .


4. Define the orientation of the profile.
5. Click Boundary 1 , and define the first boundary for the profile.

Molded Forms User's Guide 774


Placing Profile Systems

To select the edge of a plate as the first boundary, click Edge Boundary .
6. Click Boundary 2 , and define the first boundary for the profile.
To select the edge of a plate as the second boundary, click Edge Boundary .
7. Click Accept .
8. Click Finish.
Profiles are always associated with the plate systems to which they belong.

Modify an edge reinforcement profile


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Profiles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the edge reinforcement profile to modify.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Modify the profile as needed.

Delete edge reinforcement profile


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Profiles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the edge reinforcement profile to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the settings for the profile edge reinforcement.
Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 775)
Cross Section Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732)
Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 777)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 779)

Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general settings for the profile edge reinforcement. Names generated by a rule
include a Global Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model
database was created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global
Workshare Guide.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare

Molded Forms User's Guide 775


Placing Profile Systems

name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies how the name is created.
 Select StdProfileSystemNamingRule to use the following syntax: <Parent
Name>-<Index Number><"X">-<Index Number>. For example, L3-1LBH-1-1X-1, where
L3-1LBH-1 is the parent name, 1X is an index number appended by the letter X, and 1 is
an index number.
 Select User Defined if you want to name the profile yourself by using the appropriate
box.
Type
Displays the object type, which in this case is Edge Reinforcement.
Naming Category
Select a naming category. The category is used by the naming rule to name the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the edge reinforcement profile.
Description
Type a description for the edge reinforcement profile.
Specification
Select a specification for the edge reinforcement profile.
Specification can only be changed on a root edge reinforcement system. This
option is unavailable for the leaf system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 776


Placing Profile Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the position of the cross-section relative to the free edge.
The Primary Orientation is the only option that you can change on root edge
reinforcement systems. You can change all the other options on leaf edge reinforcement
systems.
Position - Specifies how the cross section of the profile is attached to the free edge.
On Edge - Centered indicates that the cross-section is centered on the plate thickness using
the cross-section load point that you select.

On Edge - Offset indicates that the cross- section load point is offset from the free edge the
distance you specify in the Offset box.

On Face indicates that the cross-section load point is placed on the face of the plate. The
load point can be offset from the free edge the distance you specify in the Offset box.

Primary Orientation - Specifies on which side of the plate system the profile is placed. The
default setting is the molded conventions of the parent system. The options vary depending on
the placement of the edge reinforcement. For example, if the edge reinforcement is running
transverse, then the options are Fore and Aft. This option is not available when On Edge -
Centered is selected for Position.

Molded Forms User's Guide 777


Placing Profile Systems

Secondary Orientation - Specifies the orientation of the web thickness for symmetrical
cross-sections and both the web thickness and the flange direction for unsymmetrical
cross-sections. The options are:
 Toward Plate - The plate edge is moved back so that the flange is at the plate edge.

 From Plate - The flange is added to the plate edge.

Parent System Type - Displays the object type of the parent system. You cannot change this
value.
Offset - Specify the distance that the cross-section is offset from free edge or from the plate face.
 If Position is set to On Face, then the offset is measured from the free edge. A positive offset
value moves the cross- section towards the plate. A negative offset value moves the
cross-section away from the plate.

 If Position is set to On Edge, then the offset is measured from the plate face. A positive
offset value moves the cross- section in the opposite direction from the primary orientation. A
negative value moves the cross-section in the same direction as the primary orientation.

Mounting Face - Select the cross-section face to mount to the plate system. The options vary
depending on the selected profile cross-section. This option is not available when On Edge -
Centered is selected for Position.
Load Point - Select the cross-section load point through which the free edge passes. This option
is not available when On Edge - Centered or On Edge - Offset is selected for Position.
Start Connection Method - Defines the method of connecting the beginning of the profile to its
plate, profile, or member boundary. By Rule is the default option. The connection is determined
by assembly connection rules defined for the Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can
be added as part of your reference data customization.
End Connection Method - Defines the method of connecting the end of the profile to its plate,
profile, or member boundary. By Rule is the default option. The connection is determined by
assembly connection rules defined for the Structural Detailing. Other connection methods can be
added as part of your reference data customization.

Molded Forms User's Guide 778


Placing Profile Systems

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies general properties of the edge reinforcement profile system. Some properties displayed
duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the
left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
ContinuityType - Select the continuity type for the profile system. Continuity defines how the
profile system reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to
indicate that the profile system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that
the profile system is penetrated by the other system.
flangeDirection
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical crossing-sections or the direction of
the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
NamingCategory - Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab.
For more information, see Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 775).
orientation
Specifies the orientation of the edge reinforcement.
Displays the relative continuity priority. For example, if a continuous part of priority 1 intersects a
continuous part of priority 2, the priority 2 part is intercostal at the intersection.
ProfileType - Displays the profile type.
webThicknessOffset
Specifies the offset direction along the plate face.
webThicknessOrientation
This property is not used.

Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the edge reinforcement profile part that you are editing. Default
properties are inherited from the parent system of the part.

Molded Forms User's Guide 779


Placing Profile Systems

Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 780)
Cross Section Tab (on page 781)
Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 781)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 782)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the general properties of the edge reinforcement profile part.
Name
Specifies the name of the edge reinforcement profile part. Names generated by a rule include
a Global Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database
was created. For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare
Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the edge reinforcement profile part.
 Select StiffenerPartRule to create a name based on the parent root profile system name,
the location within the parent root profile system, and the parent assembly name.
 Select User Defined to name the part yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Naming Category
Select a category for the edge reinforcement profile part. Categories specify the role of the
part in the model.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the edge reinforcement profile part.
Specification
Displays the structural specification for the edge reinforcement profile part. It is inherited from
the parent system.
Description
Type a description for the edge reinforcement profile part.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Molded Forms User's Guide 780


Placing Profile Systems

Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Cross Section Tab


Specifies the cross-section settings for the part.
Section Type
Displays the profile section type.
Section Size
Displays the profile section size.
Material
Displays the material for the part.
Grade
Displays the material grade for the part.
The tab also displays the graphic and parameters of the cross-section symbol used by
the part.

Section Orientation Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part


Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the section orientation settings for the edge reinforcement profile part.
Position
Displays how the cross-section of the profile is attached to the free edge.
Primary Orientation
Displays which side of the plate to place the edge reinforcement profile.
Secondary Orientation
Displays the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical crossing-sections and the
direction of the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Parent System Type
Displays the object type of the parent system.
Offset
Displays the distance that the cross-section is offset from free edge or from the plate face.
Mounting Face
Displays the cross-section face to mount to the plate.
Load Point

Molded Forms User's Guide 781


Placing Profile Systems

Displays the cross-section load point through which the landing curve passes.

General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies general properties of the stiffener part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
flangeDirection
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical crossing-sections or the direction
of the flange and web thickness for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page
780).
orientation
Specifies the orientation of the edge reinforcement.
ProfileType
Specifies the profile type of the part. The list is defined by the StrMfgProfileType codelist.
webThicknessOffset
Specifies the offset direction along the plate face.
webThicknessOrientation
This property is not used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 782


Placing Profile Systems

Modify Profile System Landing Curve Display Colors


Use this procedure to create style rules to customize the display colors of landing curves. You
can use the procedure to set different colors for the landing curves of:
 Seams
 Profile Systems
 Reference Curves
 Plate Knuckle Curves
For example, before creating style rules, reference curves and design seams are white:

After creating separate style rules for reference curves and design seams, they appear in
different colors:

Use the following steps to customize curve display colors.

Molded Forms User's Guide 783


Placing Profile Systems

Select the View Aspect


1. Click Format >View.
The Format View dialog box opens.
2. In the Selected Aspects box, click Reference Geometry.
By default, Simple physical is also selected.
3. Click OK.

Create a Style Rule


1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
The Surface Style Rules dialog box opens.
2. Click New.
The Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box opens
3. Type a name for the new surface style rule in the Rule name box.
4. In the Filter list, click More to create a new filter.
The Select Filter dialog box opens.

5. Click New Filter .


The New Filter Properties dialog box opens.
If you are an administrator, you can first select Ship Filters. The new filter is then
available to all users.
6. On the Object Type tab, expand the hierarchy Ship Structure, and select one of the
following:
 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Reference Curve
 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Knuckle Curve
 Ship Structure/Seams/Plate Seam
 Ship Structure/Systems/Profile Systems/Stiffener System

7. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Select Filter dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 784


Placing Profile Systems

9. In the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box, select a color in the Style applied box.
10. Click OK.
The new rule appears in the Style rule library list.

Add the Rule to the Workspace


1. Select the rule in the Style rule library list.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK.
See Also
In the Common User's Guide:
Format View
Format a View
Surface Style Rules
Create a Surface Style Rule
Create a New Filter
Add a Surface Style Rule to the Workspace

Extend
Extends landing curve definitions in a tangential direction so that an object used to define the
landing curve can also be used as a bounding object. Also extends plate systems sketched
boundary curves to ensure that a closed boundary is created.
This command is available on the context menu when a sketched profile or seam is selected.

What do you want to do?


 Extend a profile or seam in one direction (on page 785)
 Extend a profile or seam in both directions (on page 785)
 Display a profile or seam dynamically while extending (on page 786)

Extend a profile or seam in one direction


1. Select the sketched profile or seam to extend.
You can select the profile or seam in the Workspace Explorer or in the graphic view.
2. Right-click, and select Extend from the context menu.
3. Move the mouse to indicate the direction to extend the profile or seam.
4. Left-click to accept the extension.
The software extends the profile or seam to the boundary.

Extend a profile or seam in both directions


1. Select the sketched profile or seam to extend.
You can select the profile or seam in the Workspace Explorer or in the graphic view.

Molded Forms User's Guide 785


Placing Profile Systems

2. Right-click, and select Extend from the context menu.


3. Rotate the mouse wheel to extend the profile or seam.
4. Left-click to accept the extension.
The software extends the profile or seam to the boundary.

Display a profile or seam dynamically while extending


1. Select the sketched profile or seam to extend.
You can select the profile or seam in the Workspace Explorer or in the graphic view.
2. Right-click, and select Extend from the context menu.
3. Press SHIFT, and move the mouse or rotate the mouse wheel to extend the profile or seam.
For more information, see Extend a profile or seam in one direction (on page 785) or Extend
a profile or seam in both directions (on page 785).
The profile or seam displays dynamically.
4. Left-click to accept the extension.
The software extends the profile or seam to the boundary.

Molded Forms User's Guide 786


SECTION 7

Place Linear Member Systems


Places a linear member in the model. You can
place beams, columns, braces, truss elements, or
cable member types using this command. You can
place standard members (rolled shapes) or
designed members (built-up shapes). Use this
command when you want to place members by
specifying the exact start and end points.

 You can define custom member types by


editing the Structural Member Type select list
in the Catalog task.
 When a linear member system is connected
directly to another member, a frame
connection is created. If detailed trimming is
needed in a plant database, use the Trim
Member or Place Assembly Connection
. If detailed trimming of the members is needed in a marine database, use Place Member
Generic Assembly Connection in the Molded Forms or Structural Detailing task.
 When a linear member system is connected to a plate system or edge reinforcement system,
the member is trimmed to the plate and a generic assembly connection is created. In marine
mode, the bounding ports can be modified with Place Member Generic Assembly
Connection in the Molded Forms or Structural Detailing task. For more information, see
Place Member Generic Assembly Connection (on page 968).

Place Linear Member System Ribbon


Specifies the properties for the member that you are placing. When editing a member part, this
ribbon changes. For more information on the properties that are available when you are
modifying a member part, see Modify Linear Member Part Ribbon.

Member Properties
Activates the Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 813). You can use
this dialog box to specify additional member properties that you cannot set on the ribbon,
such as material, material grade, and end releases. Because changes made on the ribbon,
such as to the Type Category, can affect or reset properties in the dialog box, we
recommend that you set properties in this dialog box after you have made your selections
from the ribbon.
Start
Specify the start location of the member. After placing the first member, click Start to select
the discrete placement method. For more information about discrete placement, see
Members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 787


Place Linear Member Systems

End
Specify the end location of the member. After placing the first member, click End to select the
contiguous placement method. For more information about contiguous placement, see
Members.
Enter AMP
Activates the Advanced Member Positioning Ribbon, which you can use when you want to
place a member at the intersection of three objects and maintain the relationship to those
objects. For example, a column that needs to stay over two walls, or bulkheads, on a lower
level. You must select the Align-Default or Align-Lapped frame connections from the
Connection box to use the advanced member positioning options.
Finish
Click to place the member in the model. Finish is active only when Finish Mode is
selected.
Finish Mode
Specify whether or not Finish must be selected to place a member in the model. If the Finish
Mode is selected, the software places the member in tentative mode after you identify the
second end point. This tentative mode allows you to modify placement settings such as the
offset, cardinal point, or frame connection properties before you commit the member to the
model. If the Finish Mode is not selected, then the software automatically places the
member in the model after you identify the second end point.
Connection
Select the frame connection type to use for the member that you are placing. If you select By
Rule, the software determines the frame connection to use based on the geometry between
the member that you are placing and existing members in the model. If you select More, all
available frame connections display from which you can select the frame connection to use.
For more information about frame connections, see Frame Connections. This option is not
available if you are editing an existing member. You can change the frame connection later
by editing the frame connection directly.
Connection Properties
Activates the Connection Properties dialog box, which is used to specify properties for the
active frame connection. The properties that appear in this dialog box are described under
the Connection Properties section.
System
Select the system to which the member belongs. You can define new systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box in Place
Linear Member Systems (on page 787).
Type Category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Type
Specifies the type of member, such as a beam or column. The available member properties

Molded Forms User's Guide 788


Place Linear Member Systems

change depending on the member type that you select. This property is a hierarchical child of
Type Category. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Type select
list in Catalog.
Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the member. If you know the section name, type it in. You can
use the asterisk [*] character wildcard to see all sections that contain that text. For example,
type W10X* to see all W10X sections in the catalog. Select More to browse the catalog for
the section to use. Sections are defined in the reference data. See Structure Reference Data
Guide for more information about reference data.
Cardinal Point
Displays the relative position of the structural cross-section to the member
placement line. Nine cardinal positions (1 -9) are available. The location of
cardinal points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center) depend on the
section shape. The local z-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity
point of the section define cardinal points 11 and 14. The local y-axis of
the member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal
points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10 through 15 are unavailable for
designed members or cans.
Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the cross-section is rotated about the
member axis. The zero-degree position is either the Z-axis or the X-axis of the active
coordinate system depending on the member orientation. The active coordinate system is set
using the Coordinate System control in PinPoint . The Angle property is not used
when placing members using the Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This
parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of
when to use this option would be when you want the flanges of a channel
section to point in the opposite direction. The Reflect property is not available
when editing members that have Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.

Connection Properties

The Connection Properties appear only when you have selected the Connection Properties
option. Connection properties change depending on the frame connection specified in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 789


Place Linear Member Systems

Connection option. To see the frame connection properties for the start of the member, select
. To see the frame connection properties for the end of the member, select . Click to see
a preview of the frame connection. The frame connection type appears in the upper left corner of
the dialog box.
The supported member is the member that you are placing. The supporting member is
the existing member in the model to which you are connecting.

Seated, Flush, and Centerline Frame Connection Properties


Side
Select the side of the supporting member on which you want to place the supported member.
Offset
Specify the distance to place the supported member from the supporting member. For
seated and flush frame connections, the offset is between the side of the supporting member
that you specified with the Side option and the supported member's side that you specify with
the Edge option. For centerline frame connections, the offset is between centerline of the
supporting member and the supported member's side that you specify with the Edge option.
Edge
Specifies the side of the supported member's cross-section that is
mated to the supporting member. You can specify Top, Right,
Bottom, or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the
figure.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section of the supported member
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. For
example, when you place a supported member with an angle
cross-section using the left edge option and you want the angle
facing the other direction.

Axis Frame Connection Properties


X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values. Local is the local coordinate
system of the supporting member.
Supporting CP
Specifies to which cardinal point on the supporting member system to align the supported
member system's cardinal point. You can specify any cardinal point number, or select 0 to
use the cardinal point with which the supporting member was placed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 790


Place Linear Member Systems

Surface Frame Connection Properties


X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values.

Vertical Corner Brace Frame Connection Properties


X Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Select whether the offset values are defined relative to the global coordinate system or the
member's local coordinate system.
Work Point
Specifies the work point location. There are six work point locations that you can select.

1 - Primary Center - Secondary Far Side


2 - Primary Center - Secondary Center
3 - Primary Center - Secondary Near Side
4 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Far Side
5 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Center
6 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Near Side

Modify Linear Member Part Ribbon


Displays the member part properties that you are editing when you select one or more linear
member parts.
Member Properties
Activates the Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 818). You can use this
dialog box to specify additional member part properties, such as material, material grade,
and end releases, which you cannot set on the ribbon.
Start
Specify the start location of the member. After placing the first member, click Start to select
the discrete placement method. For more information about discrete placement, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 791


Place Linear Member Systems

Members.
End
Specify the end location of the member. After placing the first member, click End to select the
contiguous placement method. For more information about contiguous placement, see
Members.
Convert
Translates a member part to have a single stand-alone member system. This option is only
available when you select a member part that belongs to a member system that has been
split.
When you place a member system, that member system has a single member part
associated with it (for more information, see Members). Using the Place Splits (on page 921),
you can split that single member part into multiple member parts that are each still
associated with the original single member system.
If you want to delete or modify only one of the member parts, you must delete the member
system and all the other member parts. Deleting a member part deletes its parent member
system which causes the sibling member parts to be deleted. However, using the Convert
option you can cause a member part to have its own, new parent member system. You can
then delete or otherwise modify that member part without affecting the other member parts of
the original member system.
The software automatically translates the relevant split connections into frame connections.
Permission groups of the original member system are used for the new member system.
System
Select the system to which the member belongs. You can define new systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined in the
workspace or the model. For more information, see Select System Dialog Box in Place
Linear Member Systems (on page 787).
Type Category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Type
Specifies the type of member, such as a beam or column. The available member properties
change depending on the member type that you select. This property is a hierarchical child of
Type Category. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Type select
list in Catalog.
Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the member. If you know the section name, type it in. You can
use the asterisk [*] character wildcard to see all sections that contain that text. For example,
type W10X* to see all W10X sections in the catalog. Select More to browse the catalog for
the section to use. Sections are defined in the reference data. See Structure Reference Data
Guide for more information about reference data.
Cardinal Point
Displays the relative position of the structural cross-section to the

Molded Forms User's Guide 792


Place Linear Member Systems

member placement line. Nine cardinal positions (1 -9) are available. The location of cardinal
points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center) depend on the section shape. The local
z-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 11
and 14. The local y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define
cardinal points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10 through 15 are unavailable for designed
members or cans.
Angle
Defines the angle, in degrees or radians, by which the cross-section is rotated about the
member axis. The zero-degree position is either the Z-axis or the X-axis of the active
coordinate system depending on the member orientation. The active coordinate system is set
using the Coordinate System control in PinPoint . The Angle property is not used
when placing members using the Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This
parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of
when to use this option would be when you want the flanges of a channel
section to point in the opposite direction. The Reflect property is not
available when editing members that have Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.

Advanced Member Positioning Ribbon


Specifies the properties for the member that you are placing using the advanced member
positioning option. When editing a member part, this ribbon changes. For more information on
the properties that are available when you are modifying a member part, see Modify Linear
Member Part Ribbon in Place Linear Member Systems (on page 787).

Member Properties
Activates the Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 813). You can use
this dialog box to specify additional member properties that you cannot set on the ribbon,
such as material, material grade, and end releases. Because changes made on the ribbon,
such as to the Type Category, can affect or reset properties in the dialog box, we
recommend that you set properties in this dialog box after you have made your selections
from the ribbon.
Start
Specify the start location of the member. After placing the first member, click Start to select
the discrete placement method. For more information about discrete placement, see
Members.
End
Specify the end location of the member. After placing the first member, click End to select the
contiguous placement method. For more information about contiguous placement, see
Members.
Exit AMP
Exits the advanced member positioning ribbon, and returns you to the standard member
controls.
Connection Properties
Activates the Connection Properties dialog box, which is used to specify properties for the

Molded Forms User's Guide 793


Place Linear Member Systems

active frame connection. The properties that appear in this dialog box are described below in
the Connection Properties section.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available. For more information,
see [Product Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when
Programming Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the bounding object.
2
Specifies the align object.
3
Specifies the intersect object.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 794


Place Linear Member Systems

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Bound Offset
Type an offset distance for the point from the bound surface. This offset is in addition to the
ratio you defined.

Molded Forms User's Guide 795


Place Linear Member Systems

Bound Ratio
Type the ratio of the plate's thickness to the point position. Type 0 to place the point on the
molded-form surface. Type 1 to place the point on the anti-molded-form surface. Entering a
ratio of 0.5 centers the point between the two surfaces.

Bound Orient
Specifies how to interpret the bounding object for advanced member positioning. Select
Primary to evaluate along the primary axis. Select Secondary to evaluate along the
secondary axis. See Orient Options below.
Align Offset
Type an offset distance for the point from the align surface. This offset is in addition to the
ratio you defined.
Align Ratio
Type the ratio of the plate's thickness to the point position. Type 0 to place the point on the
molded-form surface. Type 1 to place the point on the anti-molded-form surface. Entering a
ratio of 0.5 centers the point between the two surfaces.
Align Orient
Specifies how to interpret the align object for advanced member positioning. Select Primary
to evaluate along the primary axis. Select Secondary to evaluate along the secondary axis.
See Orient Options below.
Intersect Offset
Type an offset distance for the point from the intersect surface. This offset is in addition to the
ratio you defined.
Intersect Ratio
Type the ratio of the plate's thickness to the point position. Type 0 to place the point on the
molded-form surface. Type 1 to place the point on the anti-molded-form surface. Typing a
ratio of 0.5 centers the point between the two surfaces.
Intersect Orient
Specifies how to interpret the intersect object for advanced member positioning. Select
Primary to evaluate along the primary axis. Select Secondary to evaluate along the
secondary axis. See Orient Options below.

Orient Options
Specifies if the profile is interpreted along its primary orientation or its secondary orientation. If
along the primary orientation, then 0.0 is the red surface and 1.0 is the black surface. If along the
secondary orientation, then 0.0 is the green surface and 1.0 is the blue surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 796


Place Linear Member Systems

Tee
Includes W, S, and M types and fabricated Ts

I-beams
Includes W and S types.

Angle
Includes equal and unequal leg angles.

Molded Forms User's Guide 797


Place Linear Member Systems

Fabricated Angle

Flat Bar

Channel

Molded Forms User's Guide 798


Place Linear Member Systems

Bulb

Rectangular Tube

Molded Forms User's Guide 799


Place Linear Member Systems

Half Round and Round Bar

Round Tube (Pipe)


Round Tube has no faces defined along the secondary orientation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 800


Place Linear Member Systems

Connection Properties
The Connection Properties appear only when you have selected the Connection Properties
option. Connection properties change depending on the frame connection specified in the
Connection option. To see the frame connection properties for the start of the member, select
. To see the frame connection properties for the end of the member, select . Click to see
a preview of the frame connection. The frame connection type appears in the upper left corner of
the dialog box.

The supported member is the member that you are placing. The supporting member is
the existing member in the model to which you are connecting.

Align-Default/Lapped Frame Connection Properties


Side Justification
Select the side of the plane on which to place the member.
 None - Aligns the member axis so that it is placed on the surface.
 Seated - Sets the member on top of the surface. The selected Orientation Side is
nearest the surface.
 Center - The center of the cross-section is placed on the surface. The center is
calculated by the top-bottom, left-right bounds of the cross-section shape.
 Flush - Uses the alignment surface's top and bottom extent to position the supported
member. The supported member typically lies within the body of the alignment plane with
one edge of the member flush with the alignment surface but can be offset.

Molded Forms User's Guide 801


Place Linear Member Systems

Orientation Control
If On, the member angle is controlled by the Orientation Angle value defined for the Align
frame connection. If Off, you can set the angle of the member independently of the align
surface by using the Rotation property for the member part.
Orientation Side
Specifies the side of the supported member's cross-section that is
mated to the alignment surface. You can specify Top, Right, Bottom,
or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the figure.
Orientation Angle
When Orientation Control is On, this angle is added to the selected Orientation Side to
rotate the member. If the Align frame connection is used on both ends of the member and
you define a different angle value for each end, the angle defined at the start end of the
member is used.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section of the supported member
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side.
An example of when to use this option is when you place a
supported member with an angle cross-section using the left
edge option and you want the angle facing the other direction.
Extend Distance
Specifies the offset distance from the bounding surface along the member's axis.
Side Clearance
Specify the offset distance perpendicular to the align surface to place the member axis.
Lateral Distance
Specifies the offset distance in the plane of the align surface to place the member axis.

Molded Forms User's Guide 802


Place Linear Member Systems

Select System Dialog Box


This dialog box displays when you select the More... option in the System list. Use this dialog
box to select the system that you want. You can create new systems in the Systems and
Specifications task.

Look in
Specify where you want to look for the system. Select Workspace to look for the system in
your defined workspace only. Select Database to look for the system in the entire Model
database.

Molded Forms User's Guide 803


Place Linear Member Systems

Select Section Dialog Box


Allows selection of the type of section to be placed. This dialog box appears when you click the
More option on the Section Name list. By browsing through the hierarchy, you can find any
section in the Catalog database. After you select a section, the software returns you to the model,
where you can finalize placement.

Properties
Displays the properties of the selected section. Because you cannot modify any properties
until the section is placed, all properties on the dialog box are read-only.
Preview
Displays a picture of the selected section. The image file must be assigned to the section in
the reference data.
Filter
Allows you to filter catalog data to help find the subset of data that you want to work with,
similar to Microsoft Excel.

Sort
Sorts the catalog data by column to help you find like items.
Customize Current View
Defines with columns in the data you want to see.

List View
Sets the dialog box to display sections in a list view.

Grid View
Sets the dialog box to display sections in a spreadsheet-style grid view.

Molded Forms User's Guide 804


Place Linear Member Systems

Back
Returns you to the previously selected section type or node. Use this command to navigate
through the hierarchy to the specific type that you need.
Forward
Sends you to the last selected section type or node that you moved away from by using the
Back button. Use this command to navigate through the hierarchy to the specific type that
you need.

Up One Level
Brings up the next highest level of the catalog hierarchy. Use this command to navigate
through the hierarchy to the specific type that you need.
Address
Specifies your exact location within the displayed hierarchy.

What do you want to do?


 Place members using discrete placement (on page 806)
 Place members using contiguous placement (on page 807)
 Place a member using finish mode (on page 808)
 Edit member system properties (on page 809)
 Edit member part properties (on page 809)
 Edit a frame connection (on page 809)
 Delete a member system (on page 809)
 Convert a member part (on page 810)
 Modify the cardinal point of a member (on page 810)
 Modify the end releases of a member (on page 810)
 Modify the angle of a member (on page 811)
 Modify the cross-section of a member (on page 811)
 Modify the material of a member (on page 811)
 Modify the material grade of a member (on page 811)
 Modify the type of member (on page 812)
 Move a member (on page 812)
 Move one end of a member (on page 812)
 Move one end of multiple members

Molded Forms User's Guide 805


Place Linear Member Systems

Place members using discrete placement


1. Click Place Linear Member System on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Connection box, select a frame connection type.
If you are unsure of which frame connection type to use, review Frame Connections.
You can also select the By Rule option to allow the software to select automatically a frame
connection type.
3. In the Type category box, select the member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the member type to place.
5. Specify the start location, or first point, of the member.

You can use the frame connection of another member as the start or end location of
the member that you are placing.
6. Specify the end location, or second point, of the member.

7. Click Start to specify the start location of the next member.


8. Specify the start location of the next member.

 To find the intersection of grid lines easily, click Tools > Options to verify that the
SmartSketch Intersection option is selected.
 You can set the beta angle relative to your rotated coordinate system by activating PinPoint
and selecting the rotated coordinated system as the active coordinate system in the
Coordinate System box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 806


Place Linear Member Systems

Place members using contiguous placement


1. Click Place Linear Member System on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Connection box, select a frame connection type.
If you are unsure of which frame connection type to use, review Frame Connections.
You can also select the By Rule option to allow the software automatically to select a frame
connection type.
3. In the Type category box, select the member type category to place.
4. In the Type box, select the member type to place.
5. Specify the start location, or first point, of the member.

You can use the frame connection of another member as the start or end location of
the member that you are placing.
6. Specify the end location, or second point, of the member.

7. Click End to activate the contiguous placement mode.

Molded Forms User's Guide 807


Place Linear Member Systems

8. Specify the end location of the next member.

To find the intersection of grid lines easily, click Tools > Options to verify that the
SmartSketch Intersection option is selected.

Place a member using finish mode


1. Click Place Linear Member System on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Connection box, select a frame connection type.
If you are unsure of which frame connection type to use, review Frame Connections.
You can also select the By Rule option to allow the software to select automatically a frame
connection type.
3. Click Finish Mode to activate the Finish button.
4. Click Connection Properties to activate the Connection Properties dialog box.
5. In the Type category box, select the member type category to place.
6. In the Type box, select the member type to place.
7. Specify the start location, or first point, of the member.
You can use the frame connection of another member as the start or end location of
the member that you are placing.
8. Specify the end location, or second point, of the member.
9. Edit the start and end frame connection properties in the Connection Properties dialog box.

10. Edit the member properties using the Member Properties dialog box.
11. Click Finish.

 To find the intersection of grid lines easily, click Tools > Options to verify that the
SmartSketch Intersection option is selected.
 You can set the beta angle relative to your rotated coordinate system by activating PinPoint
and selecting the rotated coordinated system as the active coordinate system in the
Coordinate System box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 808


Place Linear Member Systems

Edit member system properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Members System in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the member system to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about properties, see Member System
Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 813).

Edit member part properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the member part to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the properties as needed. For more information about properties, see Member Part
Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 818).

Edit a frame connection


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Frame Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the frame connection to edit.
4. Edit the frame connection as needed. For more information about frame connection
properties, see Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 850).

Delete a member system


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Members System in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the members to delete.
4. Click Delete .

 All loads and boundary conditions placed in the Structural Analysis task on the deleted
member system are also deleted. This could affect any Analytical Models that have been
exported.
 All footings associated with the member system are also deleted.

Molded Forms User's Guide 809


Place Linear Member Systems

 Ladders or stairs using the deleted member system as the defined top edge are sent to the
To Do List.

Convert a member part


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member part to have its own member system.
4. Click Convert on the ribbon.

Modify the cardinal point of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the member part to modify.
4. Using the Cardinal Point control on the ribbon bar, select a new cardinal point for the
member part.
There are 15 cardinal positions available. The location of cardinal points 10
(center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center) depend on the section shape. The local z-axis of the
member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 11 and 14. The local
y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 12 and
13.

Modify the end releases of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to modify.

4. Click Member Properties on the ribbon.


5. Select the Member Part tab.
6. In the Category box, select End Releases.
7. Modify the member part end releases as required.

Molded Forms User's Guide 810


Place Linear Member Systems

Modify the angle of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to modify.
4. Using the Angle control on the ribbon bar, edit the member angle.
You can set the beta angle relative to your rotated coordinate system by activating
PinPoint and selecting the rotated coordinated system as the active coordinate system
in the Coordinate System box.

Modify the cross-section of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to modify.
4. Using the Section name box on the ribbon bar, type the new cross-section name for the
member, or select More to select the cross-section from the Catalog.

Modify the material of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to modify.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Select the Cross Section tab.
6. Select a new value for the Material property.

Modify the material grade of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to modify.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Select the Cross Section tab.
6. Select a new value for the Grade property.

Molded Forms User's Guide 811


Place Linear Member Systems

Modify the type of member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to modify.
4. Using the Type Category and Type controls on the ribbon bar, change the type of the
member part.
If the member type category or type that you want to use is not available, you can add
it by editing the Structural Member Type sheet in the AllCodeLists.xls workbook and
bulkloading it into the Catalog database. For more information on editing the workbook and bulk
loading, see the Smart 3D Reference Data Guide.

Move a member
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Parts in the Locate Filter.
3. Select a member to move.
4. Click Move on the main ribbon.
5. Define the first point of a vector used to move the member.
6. Define the second point of the vector.
The frame connections might prevent you from moving the member as you would like.
For example, a supported member has a seated frame connection to a supporting member. The
seated frame connection prevents you from moving the supported member off of the supporting
member. You can, however, slide the supported member along the supporting member as long
as the seated frame connection is still valid. Consider copying and pasting a member that you
want to move, and then deleting the original.

Move one end of a member


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Frame Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the frame connection that is near the member end to move.

Molded Forms User's Guide 812


Place Linear Member Systems

4. In the Connection option, select By Rule.


5. Define the new location for the member end.

Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the standard member or designed member that you are editing. For
an explanation of the difference between a standard member and a designed member, see
Members.
Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 813)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the properties for the member system.
Category
Select the properties to view for the member system.

Standard
Name
Displays the name of the member system. The member system name is based on the Name
Rule selection. If you want to type a new name for the member system, in the Name Rule
box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the member system in the Name box. If
you change the Type Category of the member system after defining a custom name, the
name resets to the default name for the new member type.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this member system.
MemberSystemTypeNameRule - Names the member system using this method: <member
type>-<location>-<index number> where <member type> is the selected Type property,
<location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index number> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example: Purlin-1-0003.
Default Name Rule - Names the member system using this method:
MemberSystem-<location>-<index number> where <location> is the global workshare
location ID and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For example:
MemberSystem-1-0045.

Molded Forms User's Guide 813


Place Linear Member Systems

Unique Name Rule - Names the member system using this method: <parent
system>-MemberSystem-<location>-<index number> where <parent system> is the name of
the parent system that the Member System belongs to, <location> is the global workshare
location ID, and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at 0001. For example:
Structure System-MemberSystem-1-0001.
User Defined - Select this name rule to name the member system yourself using the Name
box.
Parent System
Select the system to which the member system that you are placing belongs.
Type category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Type
Specifies the type of member, such as a beam or column. The available member properties
change depending on the member type that you select. This property is a hierarchical child of
Type Category. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Type select
list in Catalog.
Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object system. Smart 3D uses the priority to group
objects. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Priority select list in
Catalog.
Continuity Type
Indicates the way in which the object system reacts when the system intersects another
object system (your automatic splitting preference). The list is defined by the StructContinuity
codelist.
Continuous indicates that the object system should split the other object system.
Intercostal indicates that the object system should be split by the other object system.
You cannot split objects that have a Continuity Type setting of Continuous.
Continuity Priority Number
Specifies the priority when two profile systems that have the same Continuity setting
intersect. The profile system with the lowest continuity priority number penetrates the other
system. For example, two profile systems intersect and the Continuity setting of each set to
Continuous. The profile system with the lowest Continuity Priority number splits the other
profile system. You can only modify this property at the root system.
Align
Indicates whether the software copies offsets from the frame connection at the member
system end to the unsupported frame connection at the other member system end.
True indicates that Smart 3D copies the offsets.
False indicates the Smart 3D does not copy the offsets.

Molded Forms User's Guide 814


Place Linear Member Systems

Start East / Start X


Displays the X-coordinates of the start of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
Start North / Start Y
Displays the Y-coordinates of the start of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
Start Elevation / Start Z
Displays the Z-coordinates of the start of the member relative to the active coordinate
system.
End East / End X
Displays the X-coordinates of the end of the member relative to the active coordinate system.
End North / End Y
Displays the Y-coordinates of the end of the member relative to the active coordinate system.
End Elevation / End Z
Displays the Z-coordinates of the end of the member relative to the active coordinate system.

Relationship Tab
Displays all objects related to the selected object for which you are viewing properties. For
example, if you are viewing the properties of a pipe run, the related pipeline, features, parts,
associated control points, hangers or supports, and equipment display on this tab. All WBS
assignments, including project relationships, appear on this tab.
Additional examples for marine relationships are as follows:
 For plate and profile system properties, the related bounded objects, bounding objects, and
connections are shown.
 For plate and profile system part properties, parent systems are shown.
 For assembly connection properties, all connected objects are shown.
 For the properties of a frame connection on a member, supported, supporting, and auxiliary
supporting parts are shown.
 For split connection properties, the parent and auxiliary supporting parts are shown.
Name
Specifies the name of the object.
Type
Specifies the type of object. To change the options on the list, edit the Weld Type select list
in Catalog.
Go To
Displays the properties of the selected object.

Configuration Tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 815


Place Linear Member Systems

You cannot define the filters using the Configuration tab.


Plant
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which the object belongs. You can select another
permission group, if needed. Permission groups are created in Project Management.
Transfer
Reassigns ownership of the selected model objects from their current permission group to
another satellite or host permission group. This option is only available if the active model or
project is replicated in a workshare configuration. The option is not available if all of the
objects in the select set already belong to another location and are non-transferable. For
more information, see Transfer Ownership Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
The Transfer option does not apply to the filters and surface style rules.
Approval State
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. The display depends on your
access level. You might be unable to change the status of the object. The list is defined by
the ApprovalStatus codelist.
You can only edit or manipulate an object with a status of Working.
Status
Specifies the location of the object in the workflow process. Changing this property sets the
Approval State. The list is controlled by the ApprovalReason codelist in the
ApprovalReason.xls file. You must bulkload this file. For more information, see
ApprovalReason in the Reference Data Guide.
Date Created
Specifies the creation date of the object.
Created by
Specifies the name of the person who created the object.
Date Last Modified
Specifies the date when the object was last modified.
Last Modified by
Specifies the name of the person who last modified the object.

Transfer Ownership Dialog Box


Allows you to specify a new location and permission group for the selected model objects.
Current location
Displays the name of the location with which the current permission group is associated. All
of the objects in the select set must belong to the same location.
Current permission group
Displays the name of the permission group with which the selected objects are currently

Molded Forms User's Guide 816


Place Linear Member Systems

associated. If all of the objects in the select set do not belong to the same permission group,
this box appears blank.
New location
Specifies the name of the location to which you want to assign the objects. In a global
workshare configuration, this box lists all the locations in which you have write access to one
or more permission groups. The selection in this box filters the entries in the New
permission group box.
New permission group
Specifies the new permission group to which to assign the selected objects. If you specify a
value in the New location box, this list displays all permission groups to which you have
write access in the selected location. If you do not specify a value in the New location box,
this list includes all permission groups to which you have write access in all locations except
the current location. This box is blank if you do not have write access to any permission
groups at any locations other than the current one.
We strongly recommend that administrators follow naming convention rules that
include the location as a prefix in the permission group name.

Notes Tab
Creates and edits user-definable text placed by the designer on an object in the model. The
notes provide special instructions related to the object for the fabricator and are available in
downstream tasks. For example, the notes appear in two-dimensional drawings and within
design review sessions.
Only one note of a given kind from a given object can be shown on a drawing. For
example, if there are two fabrication notes on a piping part, then only one of the notes shows on
the drawing. It is important to know about and to consider this situation when defining notes on an
object in the modeling phase. For example, you can display one Fabrication note and one
Installation note by defining two separate labels for the two kinds of notes.
Key point
Specifies the key point on the object to which you want to add a note.
Notes at this location, listed by name
Lists all notes for the selected key point on the object.
Date
Displays the date that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the date.
Time
Displays the time that the note was created. The system automatically supplies the time.
Purpose of note
Specifies the purpose of the note.
Author
Displays the login name of the person who created the note. The system automatically
supplies this information. You cannot change this information.
Note text
Defines the note text. The software does not limit the length of the note text.

Molded Forms User's Guide 817


Place Linear Member Systems

Show dimension
Indicates that the note generates a dimension.
If you are displaying the properties for a Support component, then a dimension can be
included for the component in the Support drawings, if you select the Show dimension
option. The note must be associated with one of the key points for the Support component. It
is recommended that you set the Purpose of note as Fabrication, but this is not a
requirement. The note Name and Note text are not used when you select this option.
New Note
Creates a new note on the object.
Standard Note
Displays a list of standard notes from which you can select. This feature is not available in
this version.
Highlight Note
Highlights the note in the graphic view so that you can easily find the note and the object to
which it is related. This feature is not available in this version.
Delete Note
Deletes the currently displayed note.

Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the member part of the standard member that you are editing. For an
explanation of the difference between a member system and a member part, see Members.
Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 818)
Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 824)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the properties for the member.
Category
Select the properties to view for the member. Member part properties are divided into several
different categories: Standard, Weight and CG, Fabrication and Construction, Surface
Treatment and Coating, Responsibility, and End Releases. You select which category
that you want to define values for by using the Category option.

Standard
Name
Displays the name of the member part. The member part name is based on the Name Rule
selection. If you want to type a new name for the member part, in the Name Rule box, select
User Defined, and then type a name for the member part in the Name box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 818


Place Linear Member Systems

Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this member part.
 Member Part Type Name Rule - Names the member part using this method: <member
type>-<location>-<index number> where <member type> is the selected Type property,
<location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index number> is a unique index
number that starts at 0001. For example: Beam-1-0003.
 Default Name Rule - Names the member part using this method:
MemberPartPrismatic-<location>-<index number> where <location> is the global
workshare location ID and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at 0001.
For example: MemberPartPrismatic-1-0045.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the member part using this method:
MemberPartPrismatic-<location>-<index number> where <location> is the global
workshare location ID and <index number> is a unique index number that starts at 0001.
For example: MemberPartPrismatic-1-0045.
 User Defined - Select this name rule to name the member system yourself using the
Name box.
If you plan to export this model to Tekla Structures using CIMsteel, you must know
that Tekla limits part names to 21 characters. If you use a Smart 3D naming rule that creates
a member part name that is longer than 21 characters, Tekla truncates the name during the
CIMSteel import into Tekla. This truncation can cause all your member parts to have the
same name in Tekla because Smart 3D naming rules have the unique index at the end of the
name.
Parent System
Specifies the name of the parent system. You can define new systems in the Systems and
Specifications task.
Type category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Type
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object system. Smart 3D uses the priority to group
objects. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Priority select list in
Catalog.
Length
Displays the length of the member without cutbacks applied. You cannot change this value.
Cut Length
Specifies the length of the member with cutbacks applied. You cannot change this value. A
cutback is that part of a member removed by an assembly connection or by a manually

Molded Forms User's Guide 819


Place Linear Member Systems

placed trim (a cope, for example).


Reporting Requirements
Specify whether this object is reported.
Reporting Type
Select the reporting requirements code for the object. Valid codes are defined in Catalog in
the Reporting Type select list.
Piece Mark
Specifies the piece mark of the member. Piece marks are typically used when importing and
exporting member through CIMsteel. If a piece mark displays, the mark is usually the identity
of the manufactured part from the other software package.
Assembly Mark
Specifies the assembly mark of the member. If the member was imported through CIMsteel,
the assembly mark is usually the identity of the manufactured assembly to which this
member belongs.
Seam Angle
Defines the location of the seam. This angle is measured clockwise from orientation vector of
the member looking down the member from the start end.

Seam Angle is only available on cross-sections that use the Has Seam definition. Refer to
the Smart 3D Symbol 2D User's Guide and Symbol 2D Reference Data Guide for more
information about cross-sections.

Weight and CG
Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the selected object. The center-of-gravity
locations are displayed relative to the active coordinate system along the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. The
weight value that is displayed in the properties dialog box is calculated as the material density
multiplied by the object's solid volume. Therefore, the material of the object affects the weight
value that is displayed here. Check the material assigned to the object if the weight displayed is
an improbable value. For the most accurate weight calculation, use the Tools > Run Reports
command.
Dry Weight
Specifies the dry weight of the object.
Wet Weight

Molded Forms User's Guide 820


Place Linear Member Systems

Specifies the wet weight of the object.


For equipment, the Weight and CG property Wet Weight is the sum of Dry
Weight and Water Weight. The dry weight and water weight values are catalog properties
entered on the part sheet for the equipment.
Dry CG X
Specifies the X-axis location of the dry center-of-gravity.
Dry CG Y
Specifies the Y-axis location of the dry center-of-gravity.
Dry CG Z
Specifies the Z-axis location of the dry center-of-gravity.
Wet CG X
Specifies the X-axis location of the wet center-of-gravity.
Wet CG Y
Specifies the Y-axis location of the wet center-of-gravity.
Wet CG Z
Specifies the Z-axis location of the wet center-of-gravity.
Dry WCG Origin
Specifies the way in which the dry weight center-of-gravity location is defined. The list is
defined by the WCGOrigin codelist.
Computed indicates that the software calculates the origin location.
Defined indicates that you want to manually define the dry weight center-of-gravity location
relative to the active coordinate system.
Wet WCG Origin
Specifies the way in which the wet weight center-of-gravity location is defined. The list is
defined by the WCGOrigin codelist.
Computed indicates that the software calculates the origin location.
Defined indicates that you want to manually define the wet weight center-of-gravity location
relative to the active coordinate system.

Fabrication and Construction


Fabrication Requirement
Specifies the fabrication requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Fabrication Type select list in Catalog.
Fabrication Type
Specifies the type of fabrication for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Fabrication Type select list in Catalog.
Construction Requirement
Specifies the construction requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Construction Requirement select list in Catalog.

Molded Forms User's Guide 821


Place Linear Member Systems

Construction Type
Specifies the type of construction for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Construction Type select list in Catalog.

Surface Treatment and Coating


Exterior Coating Requirement
Specifies the coating requirement for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Coating Type select list in Catalog.
Exterior Coating Type
Specifies the type of coating for the object. To change the options on the list, edit the
Coating Type select list in Catalog.
Coating Color
Specifies the color of the object coating. To change the options on the list, edit the Coating
Color select list in Catalog. Smart 3D includes this property in the painting area report.
Exterior Coating Area
Specifies the area of the coating for the object.

Responsibility
Cleaning Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for cleaning the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Cleaning Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Design Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for designing the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Design Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Fabrication Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for fabricating the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Fabrication Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Installation Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for installing the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Installation Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Painting Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for painting the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Painting Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Requisition Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for ordering the object. To change the options on the list, edit
the Requisition Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Supply Responsibility
Specifies the party responsible for delivering the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Supply Responsibility select list in Catalog.
Testing Responsibility

Molded Forms User's Guide 822


Place Linear Member Systems

Specifies the party responsible for testing on the object. To change the options on the list,
edit the Testing Responsibility select list in Catalog.

End Releases
Start Member Release
Select the directions to release at the start of the member part. Directions are defined in the
local coordinate system of the member system. If the combination of directions is not
available, select the User Defined option and define the releases yourself.
Start X Displacement
Defines if the X direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Y Displacement
Defines if the Y direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Z Displacement
Defines if the Z direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start X Rotation
Defines if the X moment direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Y Rotation
Defines if the Y moment direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
Start Z Rotation
Defines if the Z moment direction at the start of the member part is fixed or free.
End Member Release
Select the directions to release at the end of the member part. Directions are defined in the
local coordinate system of the member system. If the combination of directions is not
available, select the User Defined option and define the releases yourself.
End X Displacement
Defines if the X direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Y Displacement
Defines if the Y direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Z Displacement
Defines if the Z direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End X Rotation
Defines if the X moment direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Y Rotation
Defines if the Y moment direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
End Z Rotation
Defines if the Z moment direction at the end of the member part is fixed or free.
See Also
Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog Box (on page 818)

Molded Forms User's Guide 823


Place Linear Member Systems

Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the properties for the cross-section of a standard member part.
Section Standard
Specifies the section library from which you selected the section name. Sections are defined
in the reference data.
Member Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the member. If you know the section name, type it in. You can
use the asterisk [*] character wildcard to see all sections that contain that text. For example,
type W10X* to see all W10X sections in the catalog. Select More to browse the catalog for
the section to use. Sections are defined in the reference data. See Structure Reference Data
Guide for more information about reference data.
Cardinal Point
Displays the relative position of the structural cross-section to the
member placement line. Nine cardinal positions (1 -9) are available.
The location of cardinal points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear
center) depend on the section shape. The local z-axis of the member
and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 11
and 14. The local y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point
of the section define cardinal points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10
through 15 are unavailable for designed members or cans.
Angle
Defines the angle by which the section is rotated about the member axis.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This
parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of
when to use this option would be when you want the flanges of a channel
section to point in the opposite direction. The Reflect property is not
available when editing members that have Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.
Material
Select a material for the member. Materials are defined in the AllCommon.xls workbook or
in the Catalog task.
Grade
Select a material grade for the member. Material grades are defined in the AllCommon.xls
workbook or in the Catalog task.
Centroid X
Displays the location of the centroid along the local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Centroid Y
Displays the location of the centroid along the local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit

Molded Forms User's Guide 824


Place Linear Member Systems

this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Moment of Inertia about X (Ixx)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Moment of Inertia about Y (Iyy)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Warping Statical Moment (Sw)
Displays the warping statical moment. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about X (Sxx)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about Y (Syy)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Torsional Moment of Inertia (J)
Displays the torsional moment of inertia for the section. This property is read- only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Warping Constant (Cw)
Displays the warping constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Flexural Constant (H)
Displays the flexural constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Polar Radius of Gyration about Shear Center (ro)
Displays the polar radius of gyration about the shear center. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about X axis (Rxx)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Y axis (Ryy)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the

Molded Forms User's Guide 825


Place Linear Member Systems

corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Principle XY (Rxy)
Displays the radius of gyration about the principle xy-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about X (Zxx)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about Y (Zyy)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Is Hollow
Displays True if the cross-section is hollow, such as a tube or can. Displays False if the
cross-section is solid, such as a bar, or open, such as an I-beam.
Is Symmetric About X
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local x-axis of the cross-section.
Is Symmetric About Y
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local y-axis of the cross-section.
Flange Gage (gf)
Displays the bolt gage for the flange. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Web Gage (gw)
Displays the bolt gage for the web. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.

Section Name
Specifies the section name. This name displays when you label members. This property is
read-only. To edit this value, edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Short Name
Displays the short name for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Alternate EDI Name

Molded Forms User's Guide 826


Place Linear Member Systems

Displays the Electronic Data Interchange name for the section. This name is used when
translating sections through CIMsteel. This property is currently not used.
Description
Specifies the description. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the
cross- section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Area
Specifies the cross-section area for the object. This property is read-only. To change this
value, edit the object properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Depth
Displays the depth for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Width
Displays the flange width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Perimeter
Displays the outside perimeter distance for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the weight of the section. The unit weight is defined in mass per length pound per
foot (lbm/ft). This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's
properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Theoretical Maximum Yield Stress (Fy''')
Displays the maximum yield stress for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this
value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
corresponding workbook.
Statical Moment at Point in Flange (Qf)
Displays the first moment of area for the flange. This property is read- only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Statical Moment at Mid Depth of Section (Qw)
Displays the first moment of area for the web. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Normalized Warping Function (Wno)
Displays the normalized warping function. The function is defined in square inches or square
millimeters. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the cross- section's
properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Beam Buckling Factor (X1)
Displays the beam buckling factor. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 827


Place Linear Member Systems

Beam Buckling Factor (X2)


Displays the beam buckling factor. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Web Thickness (tw)
Displays the web thickness for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Web Depth (d)
Displays the web depth. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the
cross- section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Flange Thickness (tf)
Displays the flange thickness for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Flange Width (bf)
Displays the width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Distance to Web Toe Fillet (kdetail)
Displays the distance from the outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet of the rolled
shape or the equivalent distance on welded section. This property is read-only. To edit this
value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
corresponding workbook.
Distance to Web Toe Fillet (kdesign)
Displays the distance from the outer face of the flange to the web toe of the fillet of the rolled
shape or the equivalent distance on the welded section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
corresponding workbook.
Group Id
Displays the material group identification for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
corresponding workbook.

Designed Member Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the designed member that you are editing. For an explanation of the
difference between a standard member and a designed member, see Members.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply

Molded Forms User's Guide 828


Place Linear Member Systems

Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.
Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 829)
Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box) (on page 832)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

Occurrence Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the select designed member.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the member. Only Standard properties are
available for designed members.
Show Dimensional Legend
Displays a graphic indicating the different dimensions that can be specified for the selected
designed member.

Standard
Name
Displays the name of the designed member. The designed member name is based on the
Name Rule selection. To type a new name for the designed member, select User Defined in
the Name Rule box, and then type a name for the designed member in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this designed member. You can select one of the
listed rules or select User Defined and type the designed member name in the Name box.
Parent System
Specifies the name of the parent system. You can define new systems in the Systems and
Specifications task.
Section Standard
Specifies the section library from which you selected the section name. Sections are defined
in the reference data.
Member Section Name
Defines the cross-section for the member. If you know the section name that you want, you
can type it. You can use the asterisk [*] character wildcard to see all sections that contain that
text. For example, type BUIH* to see all W10X sections in the catalog. Select More to browse
the catalog for the section to use. Sections are defined in the reference data. For more
information about reference data, see Structure Reference Data Guide.
Cardinal Point
Displays the relative position of the structural cross-section to the
member placement line. Nine cardinal positions (1 -9) are available. The
location of cardinal points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center)
depend on the section shape. The local z-axis of the member and the
center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 11 and 14.
The local y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the

Molded Forms User's Guide 829


Place Linear Member Systems

section define cardinal points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10 through 15 are unavailable for
designed members or cans.
Angle
Defines the angle by which the section is rotated about the member axis.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This
parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of
when to use this option is when you want the flanges of a channel section to
point in the opposite direction.
Type category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Type
Specifies the type of member, such as a beam or column. The available member properties
change depending on the member type that you select. This property is a hierarchical child of
Type Category. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Type select
list in Catalog.
Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object system. Smart 3D uses the priority to group
objects. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Priority select list in
Catalog.
Centroid X
Displays the location of the centroid along the local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Centroid Y
Displays the location of the centroid along the local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Moment of Inertia about X (Ixx)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Moment of Inertia about Y (Iyy)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Warping Statical Moment (Sw)
Displays the warping statical moment. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 830


Place Linear Member Systems

Elastic Section Modulus about X (Sxx)


Displays the section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about Y (Syy)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Torsional Moment of Inertia (J)
Displays the torsional moment of inertia for the section. This property is read- only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Warping Constant (Cw)
Displays the warping constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Flexural Constant (H)
Displays the flexural constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Polar Radius of Gyration about Shear Center (ro)
Displays the polar radius of gyration about the shear center. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about X axis (Rxx)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Y axis (Ryy)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Principle XY (Rxy)
Displays the radius of gyration about the principle xy-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about X (Zxx)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about Y (Zyy)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 831


Place Linear Member Systems

Is Hollow
Displays True if the cross-section is hollow, such as a tube or can. Displays False if the
cross-section is solid, such as a bar, or open, such as an I-beam.
Is Symmetric about X
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local x-axis of the cross-section.
Is Symmetric about Y
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local y-axis of the cross-section.
Area
Specifies the cross-section area for the object. This property is read-only. To change this
value, edit the object properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Depth
Displays the depth for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Width
Displays the flange width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Perimeter
Displays the outside perimeter distance for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.

Cross Section Tab (Designed Member Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the cross-section of a designed member.
Name
Displays the cross-section name for the designed member. Sections are defined in the
reference data. For more information about reference data, see Structure Reference Data
Guide.
Centroid X
Displays the location of the centroid along the local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Centroid Y
Displays the location of the centroid along the local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Moment of Inertia about X (Ixx)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Moment of Inertia about Y (Iyy)

Molded Forms User's Guide 832


Place Linear Member Systems

Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Warping Statical Moment (Sw)
Displays the warping statical moment. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about X (Sxx)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about Y (Syy)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Torsional Moment of Inertia (J)
Displays the torsional moment of inertia for the section. This property is read- only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Warping Constant (Cw)
Displays the warping constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Flexural Constant (H)
Displays the flexural constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Polar Radius of Gyration about Shear Center (ro)
Displays the polar radius of gyration about the shear center. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about X axis (Rxx)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Y axis (Ryy)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Principle XY (Rxy)
Displays the radius of gyration about the principle xy-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about X (Zxx)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only.

Molded Forms User's Guide 833


Place Linear Member Systems

To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about Y (Zyy)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Is Hollow
Displays True if the cross-section is hollow, such as a tube or can. Displays False if the
cross-section is solid, such as a bar, or open, such as an I-beam.
Is Symmetric About X
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local x-axis of the cross-section.
Is Symmetric About Y
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local y-axis of the cross-section.
Flange Gage (gf)
Displays the bolt gage for the flange. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Web Gage (gw)
Displays the bolt gage for the web. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.

Plastic Neutral Axis (xp)


Displays the distance from the designated edge of the cross-section's plastic neutral axis
(PNA) along the local x-axis.
Plastic Neutral Axis (yp)
Displays the distance from the designated edge of the cross-section's plastic neutral axis
(PNA) along the local y-axis.
Section Name
Specifies the section name. This name displays when you label members. This property is
read-only. To edit this value, edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Area
Specifies the cross-section area for the object. This property is read-only. To change this
value, edit the object properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Depth
Displays the depth for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to

Molded Forms User's Guide 834


Place Linear Member Systems

edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.


Width
Displays the flange width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Perimeter
Displays the outside perimeter distance for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the weight of the section. The unit weight is defined in mass per length pound per
foot (lbm/ft). This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's
properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 835


Place Linear Member Systems

Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the root or leaf plate system of the designed member that you are
editing. A designed member contains multiple plate systems that you can individually edit.
OK
Accepts the values, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects the values, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Accepts the values, but does not close the dialog box.

 A leaf system always shares the same property values as its root system upon creation.
 When a root and leaf system have properties with the same values, a change to a root
system value changes the leaf system value.
 When you change the value of a property of a leaf system, later changes to that property on
the root system do not change the leaf system value.
 When a root system is split, new leaf systems are created that inherit the property values of
the root system, except for values on the original leaf system that are changed before the
split.
 Some leaf system properties cannot be changed at the leaf system level. They must be
changed at the root system level.
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 187)
Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 190)
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box - Designed Member)
(on page 840)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the nonlinear extruded plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type

Molded Forms User's Guide 836


Place Linear Member Systems

(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the

Molded Forms User's Guide 837


Place Linear Member Systems

property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and
reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on

Molded Forms User's Guide 838


Place Linear Member Systems

page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the nonlinear extruded plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Identifying Parent Values for Leaf Properties


For a property on a leaf system, the value assigned to the root system contains an asterisk (*),
such as:

This makes it easy to see whether the currently assigned value for a leaf property is different from
the parent property. You can also change a modifiable leaf property back to the root value
without first checking the root value in the root system Properties dialog box.
The asterisk (*) only displays in the Properties dialog box for a leaf system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 839


Place Linear Member Systems

Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Properties


Dialog Box - Designed Member)
Specifies the plate orientation rules for the plate system of the designed member that you are
editing.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. A plate on a designed member can be
Flange Plate, Web Plate, or Tube Plate. Plate system types are defined by the designed
member cross-section. You cannot change the type.

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 840


Place Linear Member Systems

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 841


Place Linear Member Systems

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 842


Place Linear Member Systems

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 843


Place Linear Member Systems

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 844


Place Linear Member Systems

General Tab
The General tab displays the properties that were selected by you or automatically determined
by the software at creation. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
The properties displayed duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. You can
edit the properties on these tabs.

Plate Part Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the plate part that you are editing.
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125)
Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 127)
Weight & CG Tab (on page 129)
Extended User Attributes Tab (on page 129)
Routing Tab (on page 129)

Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the plate part.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the object.
PlatePartRule - Creates a name based on the parent root plate system name, the location
within the parent root plate system, and the parent assembly name.
User Defined - Name the plate part yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type
Displays the type of the plate part. It is inherited from the parent system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.
Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Displays the parent system for the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 845


Place Linear Member Systems

Surface Geometry Type


Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the root parent plate system. It is
inherited from the parent system.
Specification
Specifies the specification for the object. This property is inherited from the parent system.
Description
Specifies a description for the object.
Tightness
Specifies the water tightness of the object. It is inherited from the parent system.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.

Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the material properties for the plate part that you are editing. The material properties are
inherited from the parent system.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Actual Thickness
Displays the material thickness for the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 846


Place Linear Member Systems

General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies general properties of the plate part. Some properties displayed duplicate those
available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. The property name appears on the left side of the
grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.

Category: Standard
NamingCategory
Displays the codelist value for Naming Category, defined on the Main tab. For more
information, see Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) (on page 125).
PlateTightness
Specifies the water tightness of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateTightness
codelist.
PlateType
Specifies the type of the plate part. The list is defined by the StructPlateType codelist.
Thickening Technique Requested
Specifies the technique requested to thicken the plate part.
This property affects only the behavior of plate parts derived from systems. The property
defaults to Procedural at creation. Changing the value of this property can affect the
geometry of the part as described below.
Standalone plate parts initially display nothing for this property. You can change the value,
but those changes do not change the part or its geometry. Smart 3D thickens all standalone
plate parts, including collars, using procedural thickening.
Undefined (blank) indicates that Smart 3D selects the appropriate technique. Smart 3D
automatically changes this value to Procedural.
Procedural indicates the part is thickened using the standard thickening method provided by
the ACIS modeler. This works for the vast majority of parts, and you should not change this
value unless there is a specific reason to try a different technique.
If the thickening fails using ACIS, and the part is a hull part, the software
automatically tries the NonProcedural thickening technique. This option only controls which
method the software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used
from the Thickening Technique Used property.
Procedural with slit is used for parts that have internal slits or discontinuities in the surface
of the system that form part of the boundary of parts on the system. The currently-supported
example of this is a surface with a combination of split and bent knuckles joined end to end.
Because Smart 3D does not support splitting knuckles and changing the properties of
different segments, these surface must be constructed with the correct geometry to reflect
the bent and split portions. Parts that are bounded by the slit, and potentially parts on the
system that are within half a meter of the slit, must have this value set to assure a proper trim.
Setting this attribute on parts that do not need it should not cause a failure but may cause the
part to take more time to detail. The following pictures show an example of this type of
surface, first the full surface and then a close-up in the region of the slit or discontinuity.
The plate system in these pictures is split into three parts by the knuckle (shown as white)
and the two black seams. You must be sure that a single part does not touch both sides of
the slit.

Molded Forms User's Guide 847


Place Linear Member Systems

NonProcedural is an infrequently used option. Historically, a much higher percentage of


parts failed to thicken with the ACIS modeler, and many designers used a specific hull form
definition tool that produced a surface with very specific characteristics. NonProcedural
thickening provided a tool that would thicken almost any part on this type of surface, even if
the ACIS modeler failed. The ACIS modeler has improved greatly, and the NonProcedural
thickening method has not been enhanced to handle the surfaces produced by many of the
hull form tools currently in use. Setting this option may solve a failure-to-thicken problem on a
hull part.
If NonProcedural thickening fails for a hull shell part, Smart 3D automatically tries
to thicken the part using Procedural thickening. This option only controls which method the
software tries first. You can determine which method Smart 3D actually used from the
Thickening Technique Used property.
Thickening Technique Used
Displays the technique used to thicken the plate part. This is blank for a standalone plate part,
although Procedural is always used for these parts. It displays one of the values defined for
Thickening Technique Requested for a system-derived part. The meaning for these values
is the same as defined for Thickening Technique Requested.

Category: Planning
Build Method
Specifies the method used to position child objects in the block. The list contains all available
values as defined in the reference data for the assigned workcenter, typically Vertical Drop,
Drop at angle, Slide, and Default. The list is defined by the BuildMethodData codelist.
Slot Connectivity
Specifies the minimum welding requirement at profile and slot intersections to meet the build
method requirements. The list contains all available values as defined in the reference data,
typically None, Webleft, Webright, Double, N/A, and Default. The list is defined by the
SlotConnectivityData codelist.

Molded Forms User's Guide 848


Place Linear Member Systems

Weight & CG Tab


Displays the center-of-gravity and the weight of the part.
Type
Displays the type of weight: Dry Weight or Wet Weight.
Weight
Displays the weight of the plate part pertaining to the weight type.
CoG X
Displays the position of center of gravity along the X-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Y
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Y-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Z
Displays the position of center of gravity along the Z-axis in the CoG Coordinate System.
CoG Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use to measure the center of gravity.

Extended User Attributes Tab


Displays the user attributes that have been bulkloaded on the report data object related to the
part. Changes to these attributes do not cause the related manufacturing part to go out-of-date.
The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value
appears on the right side of the grid.

Routing Tab
Specifies routing properties for the part. By default, no routing properties are set.
Create
Sets routing properties for the part.
Delete
Deletes the routing properties for the part.
Rule
Specifies a predefined rule set or a user-defined rule that is applicable to the part.
Workcenter
Select an assembly workcenter where the part is produced from a facility-defined rule set.
The list contains all available workcenters regardless of their level in the workcenter
hierarchy. Examples of workcenters include docks, shops, bays, and panel lines.
Workcenters may also be areas and zones where a block is assembled from multiple
assemblies.
Stage Code
Specifies the workcenter code.

Molded Forms User's Guide 849


Place Linear Member Systems

No. Of Actions
Specifies the number of actions required to produce the part.
Action
Specifies the name of the action.
Machine
Specifies the type of machine used to perform the required operation.
Code
Specifies the machine code.

Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the frame connection that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 850)
Edit a Frame Connection (on page 809)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

General Tab (Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the frame connection.
The supported member is the member that you are placing. The supporting member is
the existing member in the model to which you are connecting.
Category
Select the type of properties to view for the selected frame connection.
Type
Displays the type of frame connection. This box is read-only. See Frame Connections for
more information about the different types that are available.
Property
Displays all properties associated with the selected frame connection. The list of available
properties depends on what was defined in the reference data for the frame connection type.
Value
Specifies the values for the frame connection properties.
Name
Specifies the frame connection name.
Name rule
Specifies the naming rule used to name the frame connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the frame connection using the format "<frame connection
type>-<location>-<index>" where <frame connection type> is what you select in the
Type box on the ribbon, <location> is the global workshare location ID, and <index> is a
unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, Axis-Along-1-0043.

Molded Forms User's Guide 850


Place Linear Member Systems

 User Defined - Select this rule to name the frame connection yourself using the Name
box.
Position rule
Defines how the frame connection is to behave when the supporting member is moved. You
can select one of three options:
 Intersection - The member system lengthens or shortens to maintain the connections
with the supporting member. The end of the supported member system slides to a new
location on the supporting member.
 Ratio - The member system lengthens or shortens to maintain the connection with the
supporting member. The end of the supported member system stays in the same relative
position (that you can define) along the supporting member system. This option is similar
to the Distance option except that you define a percentage ratio from the supporting
member end.
 Distance - The member system lengthens or shortens to maintain the connection with
the supporting member. The end of the supported member system stays in the same
position (that you can define) along the supporting member system. This option is similar
to the Ratio option except that you define an actual distance from the supporting
member end.
Original Position:

Intersection Position Rule:

Ratio and Distance Position Rule:

Distance along
Type the distance from the supporting member end that the supported member is positioned.
You must include the units of measurement when defining this distance. The supporting
member end that is measured from, is defined using the End option. This option is available

Molded Forms User's Guide 851


Place Linear Member Systems

when you set Position Rule to Distance.


Ratio
Type the ratio of the supporting member length that the supported member is positioned. For
example, type .25 if you want the supported member a fourth of the way along the supporting
member. Type .333 if you want the supported member a third of the way, and so forth. Which
supporting member end that is measured from is defined using the End option. This option is
available when you set Position Rule to Ratio.
End
Specifies which end of the supporting member that the ratio or the distance-along distance is
measured. You can select Start, End, or Auto. Start is the first member end that was placed.
End is the second member end that was placed. If you select Auto, the software
automatically selects the supporting member end that is closest to the frame connection. The
Auto setting is recommended so that you do not have to worry whether the supporting
member was modeled left-to-right, right-to-left, top-to-bottom, or bottom-to-top.

Align Frame Connection Properties


Side Justification
Select the side of the plane on which to place the member.
 None - Aligns the member axis so that it is placed on the surface.
 Seated - Sets the member on top of the surface. The selected Orientation Side is
nearest the surface.
 Center - The center of the cross-section is placed on the surface. The center is
calculated by the top-bottom, left-right bounds of the cross-section shape.
 Flush - Uses the alignment surface's top and bottom extent to position the supported
member. The supported member typically lies within the body of the alignment plane with
one edge of the member flush with the alignment surface but can be offset.

Orientation Control
If On, the member angle is controlled by the Orientation Angle value defined for the Align
frame connection. If Off, you can set the angle of the member independently of the align
surface by using the Rotation property for the member part.
Orientation Side
Specifies the side of the supported member's cross-section that is

Molded Forms User's Guide 852


Place Linear Member Systems

mated to the alignment surface. You can specify Top, Right, Bottom, or Left. Edges of
typical section shapes are shown in the figure.
Orientation Angle
When Orientation Control is On, this angle is added to the selected Orientation Side to
rotate the member. If the Align frame connection is used on both ends of the member and
you define a different angle value for each end, the angle defined at the start end of the
member is used.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section of the supported member
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. An
example of when to use this option is when you place a
supported member with an angle cross-section using the left
edge option and you want the angle facing the other direction.
Extend Distance
Specifies the offset distance from the bounding surface along the member's axis.
Side Clearance
Specify the offset distance perpendicular to the align surface to place the member axis.
Lateral Distance
Specifies the offset distance in the plane of the align surface to place the member axis.

Axis Frame Connection Properties


X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction after the two cardinal points are aligned.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values. Local is the local coordinate
system of the supporting member.
Supporting CP
Specifies to which cardinal point on the supporting member system to align the supported
member system's cardinal point. You can specify any cardinal point number, or select 0 to
use the cardinal point with which the supporting member was placed.

Gap Frame Connection Properties


There are three members in a gap frame connection:
 The target member is the member always to move and is the owner of the frame connection.
The target member is shown as blue in the figure below.
 The primary member is the member to which the other two members are attached. The
primary member is shown as red in the figure below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 853


Place Linear Member Systems

 The secondary member is the third member in the joint. The software does not require the
secondary member to be in the same plane as the target member. The secondary member is
shown as orange in the figure below.
Actual Gap Distance (G)
Displays the actual gap distance between the target and secondary member. This distance is
shown as G in the figures below.
Actual Centerline Distance (X)
Displays the actual gap between the center line of the target member and the center line of
the secondary member. This distance is shown as X in the figures below.
Actual Overlap Distance (L)
Displays the distance between the lowest point of the target and secondary member saddle
on the primary member to the point where the target and secondary member intersect. This
distance is shown as L in the figures below.
Actual Overlap Distance (A)
Displays the amount of overlap between the target and secondary member. This distance is
shown as A in the figures below.
Allowable Centerline Distance
Displays the calculation of the primary member diameter times the Centerline Design
Factor. The centerline distance should be less than or equal to this value.
Allowable Overlap Distance (Fmin  B)
Specify the minimum overlap distance (A) that is acceptable.
Allowable Overlap Distance (Fmax  B)
Specify the maximum overlap distance (A) that is acceptable.
Design Passed (Centerline)
Display True if the centerline design passed. Displays False if the centerline failed. The
centerline design pass/fail is calculated by comparing actual centerline distance with the
allowable centerline distance.
Design Passed (Overlap)
Display True if the overlap design passed. Displays False if the overlap failed. The overlap
design pass/fail is calculated by (Min. Factor  B) < A < (Max. Factor  B) and then
comparing that value to the Allowable Overlap Distance (Fmin  B) and the Allowable
Overlap Distance (Fmax  B) values. You define the minimum and maximum design factors
using the Overlap Design Factor (Fmin) and Overlap Design Factor (Fmax) properties.
The B distance is shown in the figures below.
Direction
Select the direction to calculate the gap.
 Axially Along Surface - Select this mode when you want to define the offset as the
distance between the center lines of the target and secondary members. This distance is
measured parallel to the primary member centerline.
 Axially and Flush Along Surface - This option is currently not available. Select this
mode when you want to define the offset as the distance between the center lines of the

Molded Forms User's Guide 854


Place Linear Member Systems

target and secondary members and you want the target member to be flush with the
outside of the primary member. The axially distance is measured parallel to the primary
member centerline. Use the Flush Direction and Flush Offset options to refine exact
flush placement.
 Radially Along Surface - Select this mode when you want to define the offset as the
distance between the closest points on the hull of the target and secondary members.
This distance is measured around the hull of the primary member.
Offset Required
Type the gap distance that you want between the target and secondary member. Select how
you want to define this distance using the Offset Type box.
Centerline Distance Roundoff
Type the distance to which the centerline gap should be rounded off.
Centerline Design Factor
Type the ratio of the primary member section size to use in calculating whether the centerline
design passed or failed. The default value is 0.25, which specifies that the primary member
diameter be divided by 4 (D/4).
Flush Direction
This option is currently not available. Specify which direction you want the target member
to move to become flush with the primary member.
Flush Offset
This option is currently not available. Specify the distance from the primary member hull
edge to the target hull edge. An offset of zero indicates that the two member edges are
perfectly flush.
Offset Along
Defines if the target member moves along the primary member or along the secondary
member to create the gap. This property is only available for Gap Single Axial gap
connections.
Offset Type
Select how you want to specify the Offset Required value.
 Gap - The Offset Required distance is between the two closest points of the target
member hull and the secondary member hull. This is shown as G in the figures below.
 Centerline - The Offset Required distance is between the center line of the target
member and the center line of the secondary member. This is shown as X in the figures
below.
 Overlap - The Offset Required distance is between the lowest point of the target and
secondary member saddle on the support member to the point where the target and
secondary member intersect. This is shown as L in the figures below.
Overlap Design Factor (Fmin)
Defines the minimum design factor for the calculation: Min B < A < Max B. The default
value is 0.3. This calculation is used to determine if Design Passed (Overlap) passes or
fails. The A and B distances are shown in the figures below.
Overlap Design Factor (Fmax)

Molded Forms User's Guide 855


Place Linear Member Systems

Defines the maximum design factor for the calculation: Min B < A < Max B. The default
value is 0.5. This calculation is used to determine if Design Passed (Overlap) passes or
fails. The A and B distances are shown in the figures below.
Axially Along Surface:

Radially Along Surface:

Seated, Flush, and Centerline Frame Connection Properties


Side
Select the side of the supporting member on which you want to place the supported member.
Offset
Specify the distance to place the supported member from the supporting member. For
seated and flush frame connections, the offset is between the side of the supporting member
that you specified with the Side option and the supported member's side that you specify with
the Edge option. For centerline frame connections, the offset is between centerline of the
supporting member and the supported member's side that you specify with the Edge option.
Edge
Specifies the side of the supported member's cross-section that is
mated to the supporting member. You can specify Top, Right, Bottom,
or Left. Edges of typical section shapes are shown in the figure.

Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section of the supported member
about a plane perpendicular to the supporting member side. For

Molded Forms User's Guide 856


Place Linear Member Systems

example, when you place a supported member with an angle cross-section using the left
edge option and you want the angle facing the other direction.

Surface Frame Connection Properties


X Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies an offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Specifies the coordinate system to use for the offset values.

Tangent Frame Connection Properties


Offset Distance
Type the distance (3) from the centerline of the supporting member (2) to the tangent
connection point. This distance is the radius of the circle to which the supported member (1)
is made tangent.

Side
Select Left or Right to define on which side of the supporting member the supported
member is placed. To determine left and right, image you are standing on the start end of the
member with your head towards positive global Z looking down the length of the member.
Your left and right determine the direction of Left and Right.
Tangent Plane
Controls the plane on which the tangent circle is drawn. You can select:

Molded Forms User's Guide 857


Place Linear Member Systems

 Horizontal - The tangent circle is parallel to the X-Y plane (normal to global Z)
regardless of the slope of any of the members. For example, you are creating a tangent
connection between the sloping green beam and the sloping red column, or between the
sloping blue beam and the sloping red column.

 Vertical - The tangent circle is parallel to global Z and is aligned with the centerline of the
supported member (green member in the left figure, blue member in the right figure).

 Normal to Supporting - The tangent circle is normal to the supporting member (the
sloping red column).

Molded Forms User's Guide 858


Place Linear Member Systems

 In Plane of Supported - The tangent circle is parallel to the centerline of the supported
member and normal to the supporting member centerline (green member in the left
figure, blue member in the right figure).

Vertical Corner Brace Frame Connection Properties


X Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the x-direction.
Y Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the y-direction.
Z Offset
Specifies the offset to apply in the z-direction.
Coordinate System
Select whether the offset values are defined relative to the global coordinate system or the
member's local coordinate system.
Work Point
Specifies the work point location. There are six work point locations that you can select.

1 - Primary Center - Secondary Far Side


2 - Primary Center - Secondary Center
3 - Primary Center - Secondary Near Side
4 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Far Side
5 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Center
6 - Primary Near Side - Secondary Near Side

See Also
Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 850)

Molded Forms User's Guide 859


SECTION 8

Place Can
Places a can in the model. A can is a reinforcing connection piece on a member to increase
the surface area available for connections or to provide increased wall thickness or both. You can
place cans anywhere along a linear member (the support leg) including the end of the member.
There are three can types:
 Inline can - This can is placed anywhere along the length of a support leg. The support leg is
split into two parts and the can is placed between those parts.

 End can - This can is placed at the end of the support leg. As a general rule, the end of the
support leg does not frame into another member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 860


Place Can

 Stub-end can - This can is also placed at the end of the support leg, which generally does
frame into another member.

The software calculates the can length based on any transverse members that you select and the
L2 and L3 parameters that you define.

Can Limitations
 SmartSketch precision placement commands such as Point Along and PinPoint are not
available when placing an in-line can. The in-line can's location is determined by where you
select the supporting member or by the location of any transverse members assigned to the
can.
 Stub-in and end cans locations are determined by the frame or split connection that you
select during placement.
 The linear member that you select to be the supporting leg must be a designed member with
a BUTube cross-section. You cannot select curved members for the supporting leg or for the
transverse members.

Place Can Ribbon


Can Properties
Activates the Can Properties dialog box. Use this dialog box to specify additional properties,
such as material and material grade, which you cannot set on the ribbon. For more
information, see Can Properties Dialog Box (on page 872).

Select Primary Member


Select the support leg on which to place the can. The support leg is split at the location you
specify and highlights in red during can placement. If you are placing an inline can, you can
select a BUTube designed member. You cannot select a curved member as the primary
member. If you are placing an end can, you must select an unsupported frame connection. If
you are placing a stub-end can, you can select any split connection or frame connection
except unsupported frame connections.
If you are modifying an existing can, this option is not available.
Select Member Part
Select the member part on which to place the stub-end can. This option is only available with
the Can Type is set to a stub-end can and you have selected a split connection for the can's
location.

Select Transverse Members


Select the transverse members with which you want to base the can length. All transverse
members that are related to the can highlight in blue. You can select any member systems,
except curved members, that are connected to the primary member. You can use Cancel
to clear selected transverse members and Accept to confirm the transverse members
that you selected are the ones you want to use.

Molded Forms User's Guide 861


Place Can

If you are modifying more than one existing can, this option is not available.
Finish
Click to place the can in the model.
Cancel
Rejects the transverse members that you have selected.
Accept
Confirms the transverse members that you have selected.

Primary Member Information


Activates a small dialog box that displays the name, outside diameter, inside diameter, and
plate thickness of the selected primary member. This information is useful when selecting an
appropriate can type from the Catalog or when defining custom can specifications.
If you are modifying an existing can, this dialog box displays the name, outside diameter,
inside diameter, and plate thickness of the support legs on either side of the selected can.
Can Type
Specifies the type of can to place: stub-end, inline, or end can. When you select a can type,
the defaults settings from the Catalog are loaded.
Tube / Cone Parameters

Click to swap between defining cone parameters and defining tube parameters .

Tube Parameters
Outer/Inner Diameter
Specifies the can outer diameter or the can inner diameter depending on the can type you
have selected.
 If you selected a pre-defined can from the Catalog, the diameter value from the Catalog
is displayed.
 If you selected a Custom Can-OD Match from the Catalog, the outer diameter of the
selected primary member is displayed.
 If you selected a Custom Can-ID Match from the Catalog, the inner diameter of the
selected primary member is displayed.
 If you selected a Custom Can-User Defined from the Catalog, you must type a diameter
value in this box.
Can Thickness
Select the plate thickness for the can plate.
Computation Method
Specifies how you want Smart 3D to measure the L2 and L3 minimum distances.
 If you select Hull-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can times
the value you type in the Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 and L3
distances which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the
transverse member hull closest to that end of the can.

Molded Forms User's Guide 862


Place Can

 If you select Hull-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the Length box
for L2 and L3, which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on
the transverse member hull closest to that end of the can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Hull Extension Method

 If you select Centerline-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can
times the value you type in the Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 and L3
distances, which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to the centerline
of the transverse member closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Centerline-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the
Length box for L2 and L3, which are measured from the corresponding end of the can to
the centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Centerline Method

Factor
Specifies the factor to use in the extension method calculation. The default value is 0.5.
Length
Specifies the absolute distance to use in the extension method calculation. If you type a
length that is shorter than the American Petroleum Institute's minimum allowable length, a
message displays that one or more specified parameters are invalid.

Cone Parameters
Cones By
Specifies how you want to define the length of the cone transitions.
 If you select Angle the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the
can diameter, the support member cross-section, and the angle specified in the Cone
Angle box. This is shown as Angle in the figures above.
 If you select Length the length of the transition is defined explicitly in the Cone
Length box. This distance is shown as L1 and L4 in the figures above.

 If you select Slope , the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the
can diameter, the support member cross-section size, and the slope value specified in

Molded Forms User's Guide 863


Place Can

the Cone Slope box (the denominator of the slope). This is shown as Slope in the
figures above.
During placement, both cone transitions are placed using one set of values. If you
want the cone transitions on either end of the can to have different lengths or different angles,
you can change these values independently on the Can Properties Dialog Box (on page 872)
after placement.
Cone Angle
Specifies the angle of the cone transition. The length of the cone is adjusted so that the
entered angle is obtained. The software does not create a cone if the angle you specify is
less than 1 degree or greater than 89.0 degrees.
Cone Length
Specifies the length of the cone transition from the end of the support member to the start of
the can. This distance is shown as L1 and L4 in the figures above.
Cone Slope
Specifies the slope of the cone transition. The length of the cone is adjusted so that the
entered slope is obtained. The software does not create a cone if the slope you specify is
-6
greater than 100 (1/100) or less than 1 .
Cone Thickness
Select the plate thickness for the cone.

What do you want to do?


 Place an in-line can (on page 865)
 Place an in-line can on cross bracing (on page 866)
 Place an end can (on page 868)
 Place a stub-end can (on page 869)
 Add a transverse member to a can (on page 870)
 Remove a transverse member from a can (on page 871)

Molded Forms User's Guide 864


Place Can

Place an in-line can


1. Click Place Can on the vertical ribbon.
2. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the in-line can rule to place
from the Catalog.
Select one of the Custom Inline Can types to change individual can parameters.
3. Select the location of the in-line can along the supporting leg member.

4. Click Primary Member Information on the ribbon.


The software displays the name, outside diameter, inside diameter, and plate thickness of
the selected supporting leg.
5. Select the transverse members that participate in the can. Transverse members are used in
calculating the can length.

6. Click Accept .
7. If you are placing a Custom Inline Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone parameters on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a
predefined can from the Catalog, these settings are read-only.
8. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 865


Place Can

Place an in-line can on cross bracing


1. Click Place Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Place box, select By Object.
3. In the Split Status box, select Split First.
4. Select the cross brace to split.

5. Click Accept .
6. Select the other cross brace.

7. Click Finish.

8. Click Place Can on the vertical ribbon.


9. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the in-line can rule to place
from the Catalog.
Select one of the Custom Inline Can types to change individual can parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 866


Place Can

10. Select the cross brace you selected in step 6 (the cross brace that you did not split) near the
intersection of the two cross braces.

The software prompts you to select the transverse members.


11. Select the cross brace that you split (the cross brace you selected in step 4).

12. Click Accept .


13. If you are placing a Custom Inline Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone parameters on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a
predefined can from the Catalog, these settings are read-only.
14. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 867


Place Can

Place an end can


1. Click Place Can on the vertical ribbon.
2. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the end can rule to place
from the Catalog.
Select one of the Custom End Can types to change individual can parameters.
3. Select the unsupported frame connection at the member end where you want the end can.
End cans are only placed on unsupported frame connections.

4. Click Primary Member Information on the ribbon.


The software displays the name, outside diameter, inside diameter, and plate thickness of
the selected supporting member.
5. Select the transverse members, if any, that participate in the can. Transverse members are
used in calculating the length of the can.

6. Click Accept .
7. If you are placing a Custom End Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone settings on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a
predefined can from the Catalog, these settings are read-only.

Molded Forms User's Guide 868


Place Can

8. Click Finish.

Place a stub-end can


1. Click Place Can on the vertical ribbon.
2. From the Catalog browser or from Can Type on the ribbon, select the stub-end can rule to
place from the Catalog.
Select one of the Custom Stub End Can types to change individual can parameters.
3. Select the frame connection at the member end where you want the stub-end can.
Stub-end cans cannot be placed on unsupported frame connections.
or
Select the split connection where you want to place the stub-end can.

4. If placing the stub-end can at a split connection, select the member part on which to place the
stub-end can.

5. Click Primary Member Information on the ribbon.


The software displays the name, outside diameter, inside diameter, and plate thickness of
the selected supporting member.
6. Select the transverse members, if any, that participate in the can. Transverse members are
used in calculating the can length.
7. Click Accept .
8. If you are placing a Custom Stub End Can type, change the diameter, thickness, computation
method, factor, and cone settings on the ribbon to meet your needs. If you are placing a
predefined can from the Catalog, these settings are read-only.

Molded Forms User's Guide 869


Place Can

9. Click Finish.

Add a transverse member to a can


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the can to contain the new the transverse member.

3. Select Transverse Members on the ribbon.


4. Select the member to add to the can.

5. Click Accept .

Molded Forms User's Guide 870


Place Can

6. Click Finish.

Remove a transverse member from a can


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the can containing the transverse member you want to remove.

3. Select Transverse Members on the ribbon.


4. Select the member to remove from the can.

5. Click Accept .

Molded Forms User's Guide 871


Place Can

6. Click Finish.

Can Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the can that you are editing.
See Also
Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) (on page 872)
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) (on page 877)
Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) (on page 884)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the select can.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the member. Currently, only Standard
properties are available for BUCan designed member.
Preview
Displays a graphic indicating the different dimensions that can be specified for the selected
designed member.

Standard
Name
Displays the name of the can. The can name is based on the Name Rule selection. If you
want to type a new name for the can, in the Name Rule box, select User Defined, and then
type a name for the can in the Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this can. You can select one of the listed rules or
select User Defined to specify the can name yourself in the Name box.
 Default Rule - Names the can using the syntax: BUCan<Can Type>-<site ID>-<Index>
where: <Can Type> is the can type selected from the Catalog, <site ID> is the location ID
defined in Project Management, and <Index> is a 4-digit unique index number that starts
at 0001.

Molded Forms User's Guide 872


Place Can

Parent System
Specifies the name of the parent system. You can define new systems in the Systems and
Specifications task.
Section Standard
Specifies the section library from which you selected the section name. Sections are defined
in the reference data.
Cardinal Point
Displays the relative position of the structural cross-section to the
member placement line. Nine cardinal positions (1 -9) are available.
The location of cardinal points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear
center) depend on the section shape. The local z-axis of the member
and the center-of-gravity point of the section define cardinal points 11
and 14. The local y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point
of the section define cardinal points 12 and 13. Cardinal points 10
through 15 are unavailable for designed members or cans.
Angle
Defines the angle by which the section is rotated about the member axis.
Reflect
Reflects or mirrors the cross-section about the member's local z-axis. This
parameter affects both symmetric and asymmetric sections. An example of
when to use this option would be when you want the flanges of a channel
section to point in the opposite direction. The Reflect property is not
available when editing members that have Seated, Flush, or Centerline frame connections.
Type category
Specifies the type category of the member, such as a beam or a column. The available
member properties change depending on the member type category that you select. You can
define a custom member type category by editing the Structural Member Type list in the
Catalog task.
Type
Specifies the type of member, such as a beam or column. The available member properties
change depending on the member type that you select. This property is a hierarchical child of
Type Category. To change the options on the list, edit the Structural Member Type select
list in Catalog.
Priority
Select the priority to assign to the designed member. The priority is used to group members.
Centroid X
Displays the location of the centroid along the local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Centroid Y
Displays the location of the centroid along the local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 873


Place Can

Moment of Inertia about X (Ixx)


Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Moment of Inertia about Y (Iyy)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Warping Statical Moment (Sw)
Displays the warping statical moment. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about X (Sxx)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about Y (Syy)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Torsional Moment of Inertia (J)
Displays the torsional moment of inertia for the section. This property is read- only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Warping Constant (Cw)
Displays the warping constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Flexural Constant (H)
Displays the flexural constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Polar Radius of Gyration about Shear Center (ro)
Displays the polar radius of gyration about the shear center. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about X axis (Rxx)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Y axis (Ryy)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 874


Place Can

Radius of Gyration about Principle XY (Rxy)


Displays the radius of gyration about the principle xy-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about X (Zxx)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about Y (Zyy)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Is Hollow
Displays True if the cross-section is hollow, such as a tube or can. Displays False if the
cross-section is solid, such as a bar, or open, such as an I-beam.
Is Symmetric About X
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local x-axis of the cross-section.
Is Symmetric About Y
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local y-axis of the cross-section.
Diameter - Start
Displays the diameter of the start cone.
Diameter - End
Displays the diameter of the end cone.
Length - Start Cone
Displays the length of the start cone, which is the cone closest to the start of the supporting
member.
Length - End Cone
Displays the length of the end cone.
Section Properties
Displays how section properties are defined.
Area
Displays the cross-section area for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Depth
Displays the depth for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross- section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding workbook.
Width
Displays the flange width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you

Molded Forms User's Guide 875


Place Can

need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the corresponding
workbook.
Perimeter
Displays the outside perimeter distance for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in the Catalog task or in the
corresponding workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the unit weight.
Length Extension
Displays the length extension, which is the minimum distance between the transverse
member and the end of the tube part of the can.
Can Length
Displays the length of the can. This dimension includes the chamfer length.
Uncut Length
Displays the uncut length of the can. This dimension includes the chamfer length.
Can Type
Displays the can type that was selected from the Catalog.
L2 Hull Length
Displays the calculated L2 hull length. This dimension is measured from the outside hull of
the supporting member to the start of the chamfer on the tube section.
L2 Centerline Length
Displays the calculated L2 centerline length. This dimension is measured from the center of
the supporting member to the start of the chamfer on the tube section.
L3 Hull Length
Displays the calculated L3 hull length.
L3 Centerline Length
Displays the calculated L3 centerline length.
Chamfer1 Length
Displays the calculated Chamfer1 length.
Chamfer2 Length
Displays the calculated Chamfer2 length.

Molded Forms User's Guide 876


Place Can

Diameter - Tube
Displays the outside diameter of the tube part of the can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Hull Extension Method

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Centerline Method

Dimensions for Stub End Cans

Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the selected can rule.
Diameter Rule
Select how you want to define the diameter of the tube. You can select:
 Outer Diameter - Select this option to match the outside diameter of the tube with the
outside diameter of the supporting leg.
 Inner Diameter - Select this option to match the inside diameter of the tube with the
inside diameter of the supporting leg.

Molded Forms User's Guide 877


Place Can

 User Defined - Select this option to specify the diameter of the tube yourself. Cones are
created if you define a diameter that is significantly larger than the cross-section of the
supporting leg.
Can Outside Diameter
Specifies the outside diameter of the can.
Can Inside Diameter
Specifies the inside diameter of the can.
Can Thickness
Specifies the plate thickness of the can plate.
Cone 1 Thickness
Specifies the plate thickness of cone 1.
Cone 1 Material
Select the material for cone 1.
Cone 1 Grade
Select the material grade for cone 1.
Can Material
Select the material for the can.
Can Grade
Select the material grade for the can.
Minimum Extension Distance
Specify the minimum distance between the transverse member and the end of the can. If you
type a distance that is less than the minimum extension distance that is defined in the
Catalog, the software uses the distance defined in the Catalog, not the smaller distance that
you specified here.
L2 Computation Method
Specifies how you want Smart 3D to measure the L2 minimum distance.
 If you select Hull-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can times
the value you type in the L2 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 distance,
which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the transverse
member hull closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Hull-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L2 Length
box for L2, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the
transverse member hull closest to that end of the can.

Molded Forms User's Guide 878


Place Can

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Hull Extension Method

 If you select Centerline-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can
times the value you type in the L2 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2
distance, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the centerline of
the transverse member closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Centerline-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L2
Length box for L2, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the
centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Centerline Method

L2 Factor
Type the factor to use to calculate L2. The default is 0.25.
L2 Length
Type the L2 distance. This is the minimum distance that L2 can be. If there is no cone
defined for that end of the can, then the L2 distance is the longer of the two chamfer lengths
between the can and the support leg.

L3 Computation Method
Specifies how you want Smart 3D to measure the L3 minimum distance.
 If you select Hull-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can times
the value you type in the L3 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L2 distance
which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the transverse
member hull closest to that end of the can.

Molded Forms User's Guide 879


Place Can

 If you select Hull-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L3 Length
box for L3, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the point on the
transverse member hull closest to that end of the can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Hull Extension Method

 If you select Centerline-Factor, the software calculates the outside diameter of the can
times the value you type in the L3 Factor box. The result is used as the minimum L3
distance, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the centerline of
the transverse member closest to that end of the can.
 If you select Centerline-Length, the software uses the distance you specify in the L3
Length box for L3, which is measured from the corresponding end of the can to the
centerline of the transverse member closest to that end of can.

L2 and L3 Lengths when using a Centerline Method

L3 Length
Type the L3 distance. This is the minimum distance that L3 can be. If there is no cone
defined for that end of the can, then the L3 distance is the longer of the two chamfer lengths
between the can and the support leg (see L2 Length above for an illustration).
L3 Factor
Type the factor to use to calculate L3. The default is 0.25.
Cone 1 is the cone nearest the start end of the supporting leg that the can is placed
on.
Cone 1 Length Method
Specifies how you want to define the length of the first cone transition.
 If you select Angle, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section, and the angle specified in the Cone 1
Angle box. This is shown as Angle in the figures above.
 If you select Distance, the length of the transition is defined explicitly in the Cone 1
Length box. This distance is shown as L1 in the figures above.

Molded Forms User's Guide 880


Place Can

 If you select Slope, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section size, and the slope specified in the Cone 1
Slope box. This is shown as Slope in the figures above.
Cone 1 Length
Specifies the length of the cone transition from the end of the support member to the start of
the can tube. This distance is shown as L1 in the figures above. This option is available when
Cone 1 Length Method is set to Distance.
Cone 1 Slope
Specifies the slope of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the slope
-6
you specify is greater than 100 (1/100) or less than 1 . This option is available when Cone 1
Length Method is set to Slope.
Cone 1 Angle
Specifies the angle of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the angle
you specify is less than 1 degree or greater than 89.0 degrees. This option is available when
Cone 1 Length Method is set to Angle.
Cone 2 is the cone nearest the end of the supporting leg that the can is placed on.
Cone 2 Length Method
Specifies how you want to define the length of the end cone transition.
 If you select Angle, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section, and the angle specified in the Cone 2
Angle box. This is shown as Angle in the figures above.
 If you select Distance, the length of the transition is defined explicitly in the Cone 2
Length box. This distance is shown as L4 in the figures above.
 If you select Slope, the length of the transition is determined by the geometry of the can
diameter, the support member cross-section size, and the slope specified in the Cone 2
Slope box. This is shown as Slope in the figures above.
Cone 2 Length
Specifies the length of the cone transition from the end of the support member to the start of
the can tube. This distance is shown as L4 in the figures above. This option is available when
Cone 2 Length Method is set to Distance.
Cone 2 Slope
Specifies the slope of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the slope
-6
you specify is greater than 100 (1/100) or less than 1 . This option is available when Cone 2
Length Method is set to Slope.
Cone 2 Angle
Specifies the angle of the cone transition. The software does not create a cone if the angle
you specify is less than 1 degree or greater than 89.0 degrees. This option is available when
Cone 2 Length Method is set to Angle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 881


Place Can

Chamfer Slope
Specifies the slope of the chamfer located at the end of the can where the can's tube
transitions into the can's cone. The chamfer length, which is determined by the defined
sloped, contributes to the length of the can part of the overall can. The value you type here is
used for both ends of the can.

Roundoff Distance
Type the distance to round off the total can length. The length of the can is rounded up to the
next increment of this value.
Cone 2 Thickness
Specifies the plate thickness of cone 2.
Cone 2 Material
Specifies the plate material of cone 2.
Cone 2 Grade
Specifies the plate material grade of cone 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 882


Place Can

Inline Can

Stub Can

Molded Forms User's Guide 883


Place Can

End Can

Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box)


Displays the can properties as they are defined in the reference data. The property name
appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding property value appears on the right
side of the grid. If you selected more than one can and then selected the properties command,
only the common properties between the selected cans display.
The properties that display depend on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties.
Category
Select the properties that you want to view for the member. Currently, only Standard
properties are available for BUCan designed member.

Standard
Name
Displays the name of the designed member.
Symbol Definition
Displays the symbol ProgID.
Definition
Specifies the definition rule for the part class. Do not change the default value.
Parameter Rule
Specifies the parameter rule for the part class. Do not change the default value.
Centroid X
Displays the location of the centroid along the local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 884


Place Can

Centroid Y
Displays the location of the centroid along the local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Moment of Inertia about X (Ixx)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Moment of Inertia about Y (Iyy)
Displays the moment of inertia for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Warping Statical Moment (Sw)
Displays the warping statical moment. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need
to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about X (Sxx)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Elastic Section Modulus about Y (Syy)
Displays the section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Torsional Moment of Inertia (J)
Displays the torsional moment of inertia for the section. This property is read- only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Warping Constant (Cw)
Displays the warping constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Flexural Constant (H)
Displays the flexural constant for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value,
you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Polar Radius of Gyration about Shear Center (ro)
Displays the polar radius of gyration about the shear center. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about X axis (Rxx)
Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 885


Place Can

Radius of Gyration about Y axis (Ryy)


Displays the radius of gyration for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only. To
edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Radius of Gyration about Principle XY (Rxy)
Displays the radius of gyration about the principle xy-axis. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about X (Zxx)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local x-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Plastic Section Modulus about Y (Zyy)
Displays the plastic section modulus for the section's local y-axis. This property is read-only.
To edit this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the
corresponding workbook.
Is Hollow
Displays True if the cross-section is hollow, such as a tube or can. Displays False if the
cross-section is solid, such as a bar, or open, such as an I-beam.
Is Symmetric About X
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local x-axis of the cross-section.
Is Symmetric About Y
Displays True if the cross-section is symmetric about the local y-axis of the cross-section.
Diameter - Start
Displays the diameter of the start cone.
Diameter - End
Displays the diameter of the end cone.
Length - Start Cone
Displays the length of the start cone, which is the cone closest to the start of the supporting
member.
Length - End Cone
Displays the length of the end cone.
Section Properties
Displays how section properties are defined.
Section Name
Type the section name. The section name must be unique across the catalog.
Short Name
Type the short name for the section.

Molded Forms User's Guide 886


Place Can

EDI Name
Type the Electronic Data Interchange name for the section. This name is used when
translating sections through CIMsteel. This property is currently not used.
Area
Specifies the cross-section area for the object. This property is read-only. To change this
value, edit the object properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Depth
Displays the depth for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you need to
edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Width
Displays the flange width for the section. This property is read-only. To edit this value, you
need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding workbook.
Perimeter
Displays the outside perimeter distance for the section. This property is read-only. To edit
this value, you need to edit the cross-section's properties in Catalog or in the corresponding
workbook.
Unit Weight
Displays the unit weight.
Length Extension
Displays the length extension, which is the minimum distance between the transverse
member and the end of the tube part of the can.
Diameter - Tube
Displays the outside diameter of the tube part of the can.

Molded Forms User's Guide 887


SECTION 9

Creating Seams
The commands in the seams category provide the methods to place one or more design or
planning seams in the model. By using seams, you can split plate systems or profile systems at
changes in mechanical properties. When a seam is split, the logical connections between the
associated plate systems or profile systems are created. A seam object splits a system into
separate leaf subsystems and is always associated with one or more systems.

 Minimum height or distances are maintained by the software for objects that use Sketch 2D,
such as seams by projection. For more information, see Minimum Distance (on page 92).
 When you create or edit a seam by projection, the dialog box title displays the plate system
name using the format Plate System: <name of the plate system>:

 You can change the default colors of seams, profile systems, reference curves, and knuckle
curves to enhance visibility. For more information, see Modify Seam Display Colors (on page
918).

Execute Split - Automatically creates intersection seams and splits systems by


intersection and design seams. The split creates new subsystems. For more
information, see Execute Split (on page 891).

Manual Split - Places one or more intersection seams. For more information, see
Manual Split (on page 895).

Place Split - Divides a member system into multiple member parts while maintaining the
design intent of the original member system. For more information, see Place Splits (on
page 921).

Split Seam - Splits a seam by intersecting seams. For more information, see Split Seam
(on page 897).

Split Root System - Splits a top-level (or root) plate or profile system into multiple root
systems. For more information, see Split Root System (on page 899).

Molded Forms User's Guide 888


Creating Seams

Seam by Intersection - Creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate


system by defining the landing curve of the seam as the intersection of the selected
plate system and a grid plane. For more information, see Seam by Intersection (on page
902).

Seam by Offset - Creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate system by
defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another seam,
plate boundary, profile system, or grid plane). For more information, see Seam by Offset
(on page 905).

Seam by Projection - Creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate system
by projecting a 2D or 3D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system.
For more information, see Seam by Projection (on page 908).

Seam by Table - Creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate system by
defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table. For more information, see Seam by
Table (on page 912).

Profile Seam - Creates a design or planning seam on a profile or on all profiles that
belong to a plate system. For more information, see Profile Seam (on page 914).

Profile Knuckle - Creates a manual knuckle on the selected profile system. For more
information, see Profile Knuckle (on page 935).

Un-Split - Merges plates into a single plate while leaving the splitting seam. Available on
the Tools menu. For more information, see Un-Split (on page 895).

Identifying Seams in Workspace Explorer


You can identify the type of seam in the Workspace Explorer by the icon.

 Design seams

 Planning seams

 Straking seams

 Intersection seams

Intended Use of Seams


Intersection Seams
Created in the Molded Forms task at the intersection of two parts, such as where a deck and a
bulkhead intersect. Intersection seams are automatically created by the Execute Split command
in Molded Forms.

Molded Forms User's Guide 889


Creating Seams

Design Seams
Created in the Molded Forms task using a seam command. A design seam is used where a
design property of a system is changing, such as where the thickness of a plate changes. Leaf
systems under a single parent system are created.

Planning Seams

Create in the Planning task using Manage Block Intersections or in the Molded Forms task
using a seam command. A planning seam designates the limits of blocks (large segments of a
ship assembled in a single location) or smaller assemblies when the limits do not coincide with
design seams.

Straking Seams
Created in the Structural Detailing task to designate separate physical plates, usually due to
restrictions in plate sizes that can be ordered from the mill. Plate parts under a single leaf system
are created.

See Also
Knuckle Best Practices (on page 56)
Landing Curve Best Practices (on page 56)

Molded Forms User's Guide 890


Creating Seams

Execute Split
The Execute Split command automatically creates intersection seams and splits plate,
profile, and member systems by intersection, design, and planning seams. The split creates new
split subsystems and parts for plates and profiles, and new split parts for members. After you
select the system that you want to split, the software displays a list of all seams and intersections
for the selected system. You can then select which splits that you want performed, and, for
intersections, select which systems are split and which systems are splitters.

Splitting Root Systems versus Splitting with Seams


You typically use Split Root System to split large systems created during early design so
that you can move to zone or block-based structural detail and production design.

You typically use Execute Split during detail design when you are refining the design with
varying plate thicknesses and profile sizes, or during production design when you are creating
assemblies.
The following example shows the differences between splitting systems at the root level (using
Split Root System ) and splitting systems into leaf systems using plate seams, profile seam
points, and Execute Split .

Example Workspace Explorer

Plate and profile systems before splitting.

Split Root System splits the plate and profile


systems at the root level.

Molded Forms User's Guide 891


Creating Seams

Example Workspace Explorer

Plate and profile systems before splitting and with a


plate seam (Seam by Intersection ) and a profile
seam point (Profile Seam ).

Execute Split splits the plate and profile systems


into leaf systems at the seams.

Execute Split Ribbon


The Execute Split ribbon displays the controls used to split systems.
Select System - Select one or more systems to split. You can select the system in the
graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Reject - Removes all the selected sets of split and splitter entities and refreshes the Split
List.
Accept - Opens the Split List dialog box if it is not open, brings the split entities, if any, that
you have selected in the Workspace Explorer or in the graphic view to the Split List, and
refreshes the Split List. For more information, see Split List Dialog Box (on page 894).
Include Children - Includes children of the selected system in the splitting process.
Filter - Controls the types of objects that you can select. The following options are available:
 All: Allows you to select any object. This is the default value.
 Design/Planning Seams and Knuckles: Limits your selection in the graphic view or in the
Workspace Explorer to design/planning seams and knuckles.
 Intersection Only: Limits your selection in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer to
intersection objects.

Molded Forms User's Guide 892


Creating Seams

Split Best Practices (on page 74)

What do you want to do?


 Split a plate system (on page 893)
 Split a profile or member system (on page 893)

Split a plate system


1. Click Execute Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate systems to split.

 In the Filter box, you can select a filter to limit your selection to specific types of objects.
The default filter is All.
 You can select the systems either in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Select or clear the Include Children option depending on your needs.
4. Click Accept on the ribbon.
5. Review and set the options on the Split List dialog box.
For more information about this dialog box, see Split List Dialog Box (on page 894).
6. Click Finish on the Split List dialog box.

Split a profile or member system


1. Click Execute Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the profile or member systems to split.

 In the Filter box, you can select a filter to limit your selection to specific types of objects.
The default filter is All.
 You can select the systems either in the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Accept on the ribbon.
4. Review and set the options on the Split List dialog box.
For more information about this dialog box, see Split List Dialog Box (on page 894).
5. Click Finish on the Split List dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 893


Creating Seams

Split List Dialog Box


This dialog box opens during the Execute Split command and specifies which splits to make
to the selected system.

If the system that you selected has a higher continuity number than the interfering system, then
the selected system is automatically placed in the Split Entity column, the interfering system is
placed in the Splitter Entity column, and the Execute check box is automatically selected.
If the system that you selected has a lower continuity number than the interfering system, then
the selected system is automatically placed in the Splitter Entity column, the interfering system
is placed in the Split Entity column, and the Execute check box is not selected.
If the system that you selected and the interfering system have the same continuity number, then
the interference is ambiguous. The software places the selected system in the Split Entity
column, the interfering system in the Splitter Entity column, and then displays the names of both
systems in red. You need to review ambiguous entries and can use the Invert option to select the
needed result.
Execute - Select which split/splitter combination to process.
Split Entity - Displays the system intersecting the higher continuity setting. If you select the Split
Entity column, the split system highlights in red in the graphic view.
Splitter Entity - Displays the system intersecting the lower continuity setting. If you select the
Splitter Entity column, the splitter system highlights in yellow in the graphic view.
Select All - Selects all sets of split and splitter entities.
Select None - Clears the selection of sets of split and splitter entities.
Invert - Swaps the split and splitter entities for the active row.
Reject - Removes the selected sets of split and splitter entities and refreshes the Split List.
Accept - Brings a split entity that you have selected in the graphic view to the Split List and
refreshes the Split List.
Finish - Creates the splits using the parameters that you have defined and then updates the
Split List to display only entities that have not been split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 894


Creating Seams

Manual Split
The Manual Split command places one or more seams and splits on plate and profile
systems created in the Molded Forms Task, and member systems created in the Structure task.

Manual Split Ribbon


Displays the controls used to place intersection seams.

System to be Split - Defines the profile or plate to be split.

Splitter System - Defines the system that will split the system to be split.
Finish - Creates intersection seams using the parameters that you have defined.
Reject - Clears the selected objects.

Accept - Accepts all selected objects to split if System to be Split is active. Computes
the splits if Splitter System is active.
Split - Creates an intersecting seam. This is the default option.
Insert - Creates an inserted seam. This option is only available if you select a plate as the
splitter.

Create multiple intersections seams


1. Click Place Manual Split on the vertical tool bar.
2. Select the plate, profile, or member system to split.
3. Click Accept .

4. Click Splitter System , and select the splitter plate or the profile system.
5. Click Accept .
6. Click Split or Insert to indicate the type of seam.
7. Click Finish.

 If you select multiple System to be Split, you can select only one Splitter System and vice
versa.
 Insert is only available if the splitter object is a plate.

Un-Split
The Tools > Un-Split command merges previously split plates into a single plate. The splitting
seam remains in the model so that you can use the seam to split the plate again at a later time.

Un-Split Ribbon
Displays the options that you use to remove a split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 895


Creating Seams

Seam Properties
Opens the Seam Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the properties of
the seam that you are about to un-split in the model. For more information, see Seam
Properties Dialog Box (on page 904).

Select
Specifies the seam that caused the split that you want to un-spit.
Un-Split
Removes the split from plates affected by the selected seam, merges the plates back into a
single plate, and leaves the selected seam in the model.

Un-split a plate at a selected seam


1. Click Tools > Un-Split from the menu.

2. Click Select on the ribbon.


3. Select the seam that caused the plate split to undo.
4. Click Un-Split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 896


Split Seam
Splits a seam by intersecting seams. After you select the seam to be split, the software
displays a list of all intersecting seams. You can then select which splits you want performed.

Split Seam Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to split a seam.

Select Seam(s)
Specifies the seam to be split.
Reject
Rejects the seam selection and clears the Split List.
Accept
Opens the Split List dialog box, which shows all seams intersecting the selected seam. If the
dialog box is already open, refreshes the Split List to update the list of intersecting seams for
the selected seam. For more information about the Split List dialog box, see Split List Dialog
Box (Split Seam) (on page 898).
Plate Split Delay
When selected, delays the split plate update. The new position and boundaries of the design
seam appear in the graphic view when this option is selected. However, the plate being split
is placed on the To Do List with the message "Plate System split was stopped due to delay
split" with a status of "Out of Date." You must go to the To Do List and update the plate
system at a later time. This option is available only when you modify a design seam. If you do
not select this option, the plate is updated as soon as you move the design seam, which can
take time on a complex plate system, but no To Do List item is created for the plate.

Split a seam by intersecting seams


1. Click Split Seam on the vertical tool bar.

2. Click Select Seam(s) .


3. Select the seam that you want to split. The seam must be intersected by one or more seams.
4. Click Accept .
The Split List dialog box is displayed, showing all intersecting seams for the selected seam.
5. In the Execute column, select the intersecting seams to split the seam, and click Finish.
The software immediately processes the splits. When it is completed, the Split List dialog
box remains open and the split list is cleared.

6. To split another seam, click Select Seam(s) in the ribbon to select the seam to split, and
click Accept (either in the ribbon or in the Split List dialog box) to refresh the Split List.
Select the splits to perform and click Finish.
7. Click Reject (either in the ribbon or in the Split List dialog box) to clear the Split List and
clear the selection of the seam.
8. Close the Split List dialog box when you finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 897


Creating Seams

Split List Dialog Box (Split Seam)


This dialog box opens during the Split Seam command and specifies the intersecting seams
used to split the selected seam.

Execute
Select which splits to process.
Splitter Entity
Displays the seams intersecting the selected seam.
Is Bounded
Specifies if the intersecting seam is bounded to the selected seam.
Select All
Selects all the splitter entities.
Select None
Clears all the splitter entities.
Reject
Rejects the seam selection and clears the Split List.

You can directly click Select Seam(s) in the ribbon to select another seam to
split without closing the Split List dialog box.
Accept
Refreshes the Split List to update the list of intersecting seams for the selected seam.
Finish
Splits the seam using the parameters you have defined. When the split process is complete,
the Split List is cleared.

Molded Forms User's Guide 898


Creating Seams

Split Root System


The Split Root System command splits a root plate system or root profile system into
multiple root systems at the location of a plate system or a reference plane.
You can split a root system in the following ways:
 Select a plate system and a splitter intersecting the plate system. The plate system is split
into separate root plate systems. The children of the plate system (profile systems, seams,
and openings) are split into multiple objects.
 Select a profile system and a splitter intersecting the profile system. The profile system is split
into separate root systems, but its parent plate system is not.
A logical connection is placed at each split plate, profile, and edge reinforcement as a
child of one of the new systems.

Splitting Root Systems versus Splitting with Seams


You typically use Split Root System to split large systems created during early design so
that you can move to zone or block-based structural detail and production design.

You typically use Execute Split during detail design when you are refining the design with
varying plate thicknesses and profile sizes, or during production design when you are creating
assemblies.
The following example shows the differences between splitting systems at the root level (using
Split Root System ) and splitting systems into leaf systems using plate seams, profile seam
points, and Execute Split .

Example Workspace Explorer

Plate and profile systems before splitting.

Split Root System splits the plate and profile


systems at the root level.

Molded Forms User's Guide 899


Creating Seams

Example Workspace Explorer

Plate and profile systems before splitting and with a


plate seam (Seam by Intersection ) and a profile
seam point (Profile Seam ).

Execute Split splits the plate and profile systems


into leaf systems at the seams.

This command does not split:

 Brackets created with Bracket Plate System


 Child plate systems created with Child Plate System

 Members and built-up profiles created with Place Linear Member


 Tripping stiffeners created with Tripping Stiffener System
 Lapped plate parts created with Lapped Plate in the Structural Detailing task

 You have the limited ability in your current session to remove a root split and return the
systems to their original state by using Edit > Undo. For more information, see Undo in the
Common User's Guide.
 You cannot remove a root split or merge split systems back to their original state outside of
the limits of Edit > Undo or at a later date in a different session. Because of this limitation,
backing up your model before splitting is recommended.

Split Root System Ribbon


Split Root System Properties
Opens the Split Root System Properties dialog box, which displays log file options. For
more information, see Split Root System Properties Dialog Box (on page 901).

Molded Forms User's Guide 900


Creating Seams

Select System to Split


Specifies one or more root systems to split. Select a plate system to split the plate and its
children. Select a profile system to split only the profile. Select a system (created in the
Systems and Specifications task) to split all of the root plate systems within.
Select Splitter
Specifies one or more intersecting plate systems or reference planes which split the systems
selected for Select System to Split . If you are splitting a profile, you can also select an
intersecting profile system.
Finish
Splits the root systems using the defined splitters.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the selections for the current step.

Split a root system into multiple root systems


1. Click Split Root System on the vertical toolbar.
2. To split plate systems and their children, select one or more plate systems. Select a system
(created in the Systems and Specifications task) to split all of the root plate systems within.
OR
To split only profile systems, select one or more profile systems.
3. Click Select Splitter on the ribbon.
4. Select one or more plate systems or reference planes that intersect the systems to be split. If
you are splitting a profile, you can also select an intersecting profile system.
5. Click Finish.
A progress bar appears showing the status of the split operation. The progress bar closes
after splitting is finished.

 Click Cancel on the progress bar to stop splitting of the remaining plates after the current
plate is split.
 Click Edit > Undo to return all split systems to their original state.

Split Root System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies log file properties when splitting root systems. The log file can be viewed when
problems occur with the split.
Log File Type
Specifies the level of detail to include in the log file. Select Normal or Exhaustive.

Molded Forms User's Guide 901


Creating Seams

Display on Finish
When selected, automatically opens the log file after the system split is finished.
Log File Location
Specifies the location of the log file.
View Log
Opens the log file.
OK
Accepts changes to the values and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Rejects changes to the values and closes the dialog box.

Seam by Intersection
The Seam by Intersection command creates a design or planning seam on the selected
plate system by defining the landing curve of the seam as the intersection of the selected plate
system and a grid plane.
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate system boundary or
at another seam on the same plate system. The seam can cross an opening in the plate system.

Seam by Intersection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a design or planning seam in the model.

Seam by Intersection Properties - Opens the Seam by Intersection Properties dialog box,
which you use to view and modify the properties of the seam that you are about to place in the
model. For more information, see Seam Properties Dialog Box (on page 904).
Plate System - Specifies the plate systems. You can select multiple plate systems to place
multiple seams at the same time. The software uses the same boundaries for each seam. After
placement, the seams are unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.
Intersecting Objects - Specifies the objects that intersect the plate system for which you want
to generate seams.
Boundaries - Defines the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including other seams, in the model. If you select objects in the model and
those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary
relationship. See the Define Boundary Controls section below.
Finish - Creates the seam using the defined parameters.
Plate Split Delay
Select this option to delay the split plate update to a more convenient time. The new position and
boundaries of the design seam will appear in the graphic view when this option is selected.
However, the plate being split is placed on the To Do List with the message "Plate System split
was stopped due to delay split" with a status of "Out of Date." You are responsible for going to
the To Do List and updating the plate system at a later time. This option is available only when

Molded Forms User's Guide 902


Creating Seams

you modify a design seam. If you do not select this option, the plate is updated as soon as you
move the design seam, which can take several minutes to process, but no To Do List item is
created for the plate.
Seam Type
Specifies the type of seam to place. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam.

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).
Reject - Clears all selected plates or boundaries.
Accept - Accepts all selected plates or boundaries.
Seam Type - Specifies the type of seam that you are placing. Select Design Seam or Planning
Seam.

What do you want to do?


 Place a seam by intersection (on page 903)
 Modify a seam (on page 904)
 Delete a seam (on page 904)

Place a seam by intersection


1. Click Seam by Intersection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to receive the seams.
3. Click Intersecting Objects .
4. Select an intersecting grid plane or intersecting plate system where you want the seam.
5. Click Boundaries .
6. Define the seam boundaries using one or more of the following methods. If you do not select
boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to apply to the resulting
seam curves.

Molded Forms User's Guide 903


Creating Seams

Pick boundaries (on page 81)


Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
7. Click Accept .
8. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
9. Select whether to place a design seam or a planning seam.
10. Click Finish to place the seam.

Modify a seam
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Seams in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the seam to modify.
4. Edit the seam as needed using the ribbon bar controls.

Delete a seam
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Seams in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the seam to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Seam Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the seam that you are placing or editing.
Main Tab (Seam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 904)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Seam Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the seam.
Name
Specifies the name of the seam.
Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the seam.
 Select StdHierarchyChildNamingRule to use the following syntax: <Parent
Name>-<"IJSeam"><Index Number>. For example, D0-1DCK-1-IJSeam1, where D0 is
the reference plane, 1DCK is an index number appended by the plate type (Deck in this

Molded Forms User's Guide 904


Creating Seams

example), 1 is the Workshare Location ID, and IJSeam1 is "IJSeam" appended by an


index number.
 Select User Defined to name the seam using the appropriate box.
Type
Specifies the type of seam that you are placing: Design Seam or Planning Seam. The list is
defined by the StructSeamType codelist.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays how the landing curve for the seam was defined.
Board Management
Symmetry
Specifies the symmetry value for the part. The symmetry value is determined by Tools >
Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.
Manually Override
When selected, allows you to manually change the Symmetry value.
Symmetrical Part
Displays the name of the symmetrical part, if available. The symmetrical part is determined
by Tools > Board Management Service in Structural Detailing.

Seam by Offset
The Seam by Offset command creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate
system by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another
seam, plate boundary, profile system, or grid plane).
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve.
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting a plate system, or seam that intersects
the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses the landing curve ends as
the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate system boundary or at another seam on the
same plate system. The seam can cross an opening in the plate system.

Seam by Offset Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a design or planning seam in the model.

Seam by Offset Properties - Opens the Seam by Offset Properties dialog box, which you
use to view and modify the properties of the seam that you are about to place in the model. For
more information, see Seam Properties Dialog Box (on page 904).
Plate System - Specifies the plate system that you want to place a seam in. You can select
multiple plate systems to place multiple seams at the same time. The software uses the same
information for each seam. After placement, the seams are unrelated to each other and can be
edited as individual entities.
Base Curve - Specifies an existing curve or grid plane from which to offset the seam. The
intersection of the grid plane and the plate system defines the base curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 905


Creating Seams

Offset - Defines the offset parameters and direction from the base curve. See the Offset
Curve Definition Controls section below.
Boundaries - Defines the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including other seams, in the model. If you select objects in the model and
those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary
relationship. See the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish - Places the seam using the defined parameters.
Reject - Clears all selected objects.
Accept - Accepts all selected objects.
Plate Split Delay
Select this option to delay the split plate update to a more convenient time. The new position and
boundaries of the design seam will appear in the graphic view when this option is selected.
However, the plate being split is placed on the To Do List with the message "Plate System split
was stopped due to delay split" with a status of "Out of Date." You are responsible for going to
the To Do List and updating the plate system at a later time. This option is available only when
you modify a design seam. If you do not select this option, the plate is updated as soon as you
move the design seam, which can take several minutes to process, but no To Do List item is
created for the plate.
Seam Type
Specifies the type of seam to place. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam.

Offset Curve Definition Controls


Unlimited - Defines offset curves without a stop limit.

Stop Limit - Defines offset curves with a stop limit. By using a stop limit, you can select an
edge, profile landing curve, connection reference curve, or seam to control the landing curves
being created. If you type an offset value and the Offset lock is locked, then landing curves
are applied at increments of the offset value until the selected stop limit is reached. If the Offset
lock is unlocked and a value has been defined for Count, then the landing curves equal to
the number entered in the Count box are equally spaced between the base curve and the stop
limit.

Offset lock - Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves.
Offset - Specifies the offset distance between the base curve and the landing curve that you are
defining. If you type 0, the landing curve is place on the base curve. This box may also display
the offset distance as defined by mouse movements.
Method - Specifies an offset method. You can select transverse, longitudinal, vertical, or girth.
Count - Specifies how many seams should be created, each equally spaced by increments of the
offset value.
Step - Defines an increment that the system should use as you dynamically move the mouse. If
you have entered a value in the Offset box, then this control is not used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 906


Creating Seams

Boundary Definition Controls


Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

What do you want to do?


 Place a seam by offset (on page 907)
 Modify a seam (on page 904)
 Delete a seam (on page 904)

Place a seam by offset


1. Click Seam by Offset on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate systems to receive the seam.
3. Click Base Curve .
4. Select a base curve that the software is to use to compute the offset curve.
5. Click Offset .
6. Type an offset value in the Offset box.
7. Specify the offset method and count to use.
8. Select, with a mouse click in a graphic view, on which side of the base curve to apply the
offset. A red arrow appears as you move the mouse indicating the direction of the offset.
9. Click Boundaries .
10. Define the seam boundaries using one or more of the following methods. If you do not select
boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to apply to the resulting
seam curves.
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
11. Click Accept .
12. Select whether to place a design seam or a planning seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 907


Creating Seams

13. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
14. Click Finish to place the seam.

Seam by Projection
The Seam by Projection command creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate
system by projecting a 2D or 3D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system.
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate system boundary or
at another seam on the same plate system. The seam can cross an opening in the plate system.

Seam By Projection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a design or planning seam in the model.

Seam by Projection Properties


Opens the Seam by Projection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the seam that you are about to place in the model. For more information,
see Seam Properties Dialog Box (on page 904).
Plate System
Specifies the plate system for the seam. You can select multiple plate systems to place
multiple seams at the same time. The software uses the same information for each seam.
After placement, the seams are unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual
entities.

Define using 2D Sketcher


Defines the landing curve by drawing it in the Sketch 2D environment. See the Landing
Curve Definition Controls section below.
Landing Curve Definition by 3D
Allows creation of the seam curve directly in a graphic view by using the Seam Palette dialog
box (similar to the Geometric Construction Palette), the Geometric Construction ribbon,
and the Geometric Construction Explorer. This option is the 3D equivalent to Sketch 2D.
For more information, see Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).
Boundaries
Defines the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by selecting objects,
including other seams, in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are
moved, the software automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary relationship.
See the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish
Places the seam using the defined parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 908


Creating Seams

Landing Curve Definition Controls


Available when you use the Define using 2D Sketcher option.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Define Plane Controls


Available when you use the Define using 2D Sketcher option.
Offset from Plane
Defines a plane at a specified offset distance from another plane. An offset distance of 0
defines a coincident plane.

Plane by Point and Vector

Defines a plane using a vector normal to the plane being defined. A third point defines the
plane position along the vector.

Plane by Three Points


Defines a plane using three points that you identify in the model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 909


Creating Seams

/ Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by moving the pointer in a
graphic view. The Lock option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane
method.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance from the selected grid plane or planar model object. You can
specify the offset dynamically by moving the mouse in a graphic view or by typing the
distance. This option is only available when you use the Offset from a Plane plane method.
You can type the following formats for offset values:
 Offset distance without units.
Example: 5, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the distance
to 5 mm.
 Offset distance with units. The value converts to the default units.
Example: 5 m, when default units are millimeters (mm). The software converts the
distance to 5000 mm.
 Coordinate System: Frame plus or minus an offset distance.
Example (when the model has multiple coordinate systems): CS_0:F20 + 1.5 m
Example (when the model has one coordinate system): F20 + 1.5 m

/ Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane


Maintains the relationships of the plane to the definition method and the geometry used by
the definition method. For example, a plane created with Offset from Plane maintains the
relationship of the selected plane and the Offset value. Otherwise, this option disables the
relationships of the plane to allow moving of the plane.
When you copy a bracket and use Edit > Paste > Delete Optional to remove a
boundary, Remove/Maintain Relationships of the Plane / is not visible. You must
first click Select Bracket Supports to allow the command to determine the applicable
options.
Select Vector
Specifies a vector normal to the required plate system plane. This option is only available
when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point
Specifies the point along the vector at which to place the plate system. This option is only
available when you use the Plane by Point and Vector plane method.
Define Point 1
Specifies the location of the first of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Define Point 2
Specifies the location of the second of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Molded Forms User's Guide 910


Creating Seams

Define Point 3
Specifies the location of the third of three points that defines the plane. This option is only
available when you are using the Plane by Three Points plane method.

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Plate Split Delay
Select this option to delay the split plate update to a more convenient time. The new position and
boundaries of the design seam will appear in the graphic view when this option is selected.
However, the plate being split is placed on the To Do List with the message "Plate System split
was stopped due to delay split" with a status of "Out of Date." You are responsible for going to
the To Do List and updating the plate system at a later time. This option is available only when
you modify a design seam. If you do not select this option, the plate is updated as soon as you
move the design seam, which can take several minutes to process, but no To Do List item is
created for the plate.
Seam Type
Specifies the type of seam to place. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam.

What do you want to do?


 Place a seam by projection (on page 912)
 Define landing curve by 2D (on page 87)
 Define landing curve by 3D (on page 88)
 Modify a seam (on page 904)
 Delete a seam (on page 904)

Molded Forms User's Guide 911


Creating Seams

Place a seam by Projection


1. Click Seam by Projection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system for the seam.
3. Define the landing curve using one of the following methods:

Define landing curve by 2D .


Define landing curve by 3D .
4. Click Boundaries .
5. Define the seam boundaries using one or more of the following methods. If you do not select
boundaries, the software applies the entire length of the base curve to the resulting seam
curves.
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
6. Click Accept .
7. Select if you are placing a design seam or a planning seam.
8. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
9. Click Finish to place the seam.

Seam by Table
The Seam by Table command creates a design or planning seam on the selected plate
system by defining the landing curve as coordinates in a table.
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the seam boundaries. Seams must end at a plate system boundary or
at another seam on the same plate system. The seam can cross an opening in the plate system.

Seam By Table Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a design or planning seam in the model.

Seam by Table Properties - Opens the Seam by Table Properties dialog box, which you
use to view and modify the properties of the seam that you are about to place in the model. The
initial settings default from the parent plate system. For more information, see Seam Properties
Dialog Box (on page 904).
Plate System - Specifies the plate system for the seam. You can select multiple plate
systems to place multiple seams at the same time. The software uses the same information for
each seam. After placement, the seams are unrelated to each other and can be edited as
individual entities.
Landing Curve Table - Opens a table where you can define the landing curve coordinates for
the seam. For more information, see Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).

Molded Forms User's Guide 912


Creating Seams

Boundaries - Defines the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by
selecting objects, including other seams, in the model. If you select objects in the model and
those objects are moved, the software automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary
relationship. See the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish - Places the seam using the defined parameters.
Plate Split Delay
Select this option to delay the split plate update to a more convenient time. The new position and
boundaries of the design seam will appear in the graphic view when this option is selected.
However, the plate being split is placed on the To Do List with the message "Plate System split
was stopped due to delay split" with a status of "Out of Date." You are responsible for going to
the To Do List and updating the plate system at a later time. This option is available only when
you modify a design seam. If you do not select this option, the plate is updated as soon as you
move the design seam, which can take several minutes to process, but no To Do List item is
created for the plate.
Seam Type
Specifies the type of seam to place. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam.

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).
Reject - Clears all selected objects.
Accept - Accepts all selected objects.

Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760)

What do you want to do?


 Place a seam by table (on page 914)
 Modify a seam (on page 904)
 Delete a seam (on page 904)

Molded Forms User's Guide 913


Creating Seams

Place a seam by table


1. Click Seam by Table on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system for the seam.
3. Click Landing Curve Table .
4. Define the landing curve coordinates in the table. For more information about defining
coordinates, see Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).
5. Click Close.
6. Click Boundaries .
7. Define the seam boundaries using one or more of the following methods. If you do not select
boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to apply to the resulting
seam curves.
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
8. Click Accept .
9. Select whether to place a design seam or a planning seam.
10. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
11. Click Finish to place the seam.

Profile Seam
The Profile Seam command creates a design seam or a planning seam on a profile or on all
profiles that belong to a plate system. You can select individual profile systems to split, or you
can select a plate system and thereby implicitly select all the profile systems that belong to the
selected plate system to split. Optionally, you can automatically split the profile systems after the
profile seams are placed.

Profile Seam Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to split a profile.

Properties
Opens the Profile Seam Properties dialog box, which you can use to define properties for
the seam that you are about to place. For more information, see Profile Seam Properties
Dialog Box (on page 917).

Profile System
Specifies the profile system or the plate system that has associated profile systems to split.
You can select stiffener profile systems or linear beam profile systems.
The following option displays for this step:
Select - Specifies the profile selection method. Select Plate Systems to select profiles by
identifying their parent plate system. Select Profile Systems to identify profiles directly.

Molded Forms User's Guide 914


Creating Seams

References
Specifies objects that intersect the profile system at which to place the split. You can select
objects in either the graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer. Objects that you can select
as references include: reference curves, grid planes, plate systems, edge reinforcement
systems, seams (design, planning, and straking), profile systems (landing curve), and edge
ports including openings.
The following options display for this step:
Method - Specifies the seam placement method.
Offset - Places the seam at a distance from the selected reference objects, using the
selected offset method.
Along Profile - Places the seam along the profile landing curve. This method displays
the PinPoint ribbon. For more information, see PinPoint.
Offset Method - Specifies the offset measurement method. This option is only available
when you select Offset in the Method box.
Girth - Measure the offset value along the surface of the profile's parent plate system.
Vertical - Measure the offset value in the direction of the z-axis of the global coordinate
system.
Transverse - Measure the offset value in the direction of the y-axis of the global
coordinate system.
Longitudinal - Measure the offset value in the direction of the x-axis of the global
coordinate system.
Offset Value - Defines the offset value. You can specify the direction of the offset by typing a
plus (+) or minus (-) sign in front of the offset value. A positive value is offset in the positive
direction of the closest main coordinate system axis. If you type 0, the seam is placed at the
reference. This option is only available when you select Offset in the Method box.
Finish
Splits the profile using the parameters that you have defined.
Reject
Rejects the selected objects.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects and advances the command to the next step.
Seam Type
Specifies the profile seam type. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam.
Auto Split
When selected, splits the profile system after placing the profile seam.

What do you want to do?


 Place a profile seam by offsetting from a reference (on page 916)
 Place a profile seam at a distance along the profile (on page 916)

Molded Forms User's Guide 915


Creating Seams

Place a profile seam by offsetting from a reference


1. Click Profile Seam on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam in the Select box.
3. To split individual profiles, select Profile Systems in the Select box, and then select one or
more profile systems.
4. To split all profiles on a plate system, select Plate Systems in the Select box, and then
select one or more plate systems.
5. Select one or more model objects or reference planes to use as reference for the offset.
6. In the Method box, select Offset.
7. To define the profile seam location, select the offset method and type an offset value.
8. Click Finish.
The software places the profile seams.

If you select Auto Split on the ribbon, the software also splits the profile when you
click Finish.

Place a profile seam at a distance along the profile


1. Click Profile Seam on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Design Seam or Planning Seam in the Select box.
3. Select Profile Systems in the Select box, and then select a profile system.

4. Click References .
5. In the Method box, select Along Profile.

Molded Forms User's Guide 916


Creating Seams

The PinPoint ribbon displays, and the dotted magenta line of PinPoint displays on the
profile landing curve.

6. To define the profile seam location, click a location in the graphic view, or type X, Y, and Z
values. For more information on using PinPoint, see Place objects using rectangular
coordinates.
7. Click Finish.
The software places the profile seam.

If you select Auto Split on the ribbon, the software also splits the profile when you
click Finish.

Profile Seam Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the profile seam.
Main Tab (Profile Seam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 917)

Main Tab (Profile Seam Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties for the profile seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 917


Creating Seams

Name - Displays the name that is assigned to the profile seam.


Rule - Specifies how the name is created.
 Select StdHierarchyChildNamingRule to use the following syntax: <Parent Name>-<Index
Number><Profile Type>-<Index Number>-<"IJSeamPoint"><Index Number>. For example,
D0-1DCK-1-3T-1-IJSeamPoint1, where D0-1DCK-1 is the parent name, 3T is the profile
index number and type, 1 is an index number, and IJSeamPoint1 is "IJSeamPoint" appended
by an index number.
 Select User Defined if you want to name the seam yourself by using the appropriate box.
Type - Displays the current object type. You can select the Design Seam or Planning Seam.
Parent System - Displays the name of the parent system of the profile seam.

Modify Seam Display Colors


Use this procedure to create style rules to customize the display colors of landing curves. You
can use the procedure to set different colors for the landing curves of:
 Seams
 Profile Systems
 Reference Curves
 Plate Knuckle Curves
For example, before creating style rules, reference curves and design seams are white:

Molded Forms User's Guide 918


Creating Seams

After creating separate style rules for reference curves and design seams, they appear in
different colors:

Use the following steps to customize curve display colors.

Select the View Aspect


1. Click Format >View.
The Format View dialog box opens.
2. In the Selected Aspects box, click Reference Geometry.
By default, Simple physical is also selected.
3. Click OK.

Create a Style Rule


1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
The Surface Style Rules dialog box opens.
2. Click New.
The Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box opens
3. Type a name for the new surface style rule in the Rule name box.
4. In the Filter list, click More to create a new filter.
The Select Filter dialog box opens.

5. Click New Filter .


The New Filter Properties dialog box opens.
If you are an administrator, you can first select Ship Filters. The new filter is then
available to all users.
6. On the Object Type tab, expand the hierarchy Ship Structure, and select one of the
following:
 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Reference Curve

Molded Forms User's Guide 919


Creating Seams

 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Knuckle Curve


 Ship Structure/Seams/Plate Seam
 Ship Structure/Systems/Profile Systems/Stiffener System

7. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Select Filter dialog box.
9. In the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box, select a color in the Style applied box.
10. Click OK.
The new rule appears in the Style rule library list.

Add the Rule to the Workspace


1. Select the rule in the Style rule library list.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK.
See Also
In the Common User's Guide:
Format View
Format a View
Surface Style Rules
Create a Surface Style Rule
Create a New Filter
Add a Surface Style Rule to the Workspace

Molded Forms User's Guide 920


SECTION 10

Place Splits
Divides a member system (created in the Structure task) into multiple member parts. The
resulting member system is a set of continuous member parts that move as a single entity. This
splitting is useful when you want to resolve the interference between two intersecting structural
objects, such as pair of cross braces, or when you want to split the columns in your model at
certain elevations. You can split member systems at another member system, at a point along
the member system, a grid plane, an elevation plane, deck, bulkhead, or plate system.

Only member systems can be split using the command. However, the object used to split the
member system can be another member system, a grid plane, an elevation plane, deck,
bulkhead, or plate system.
To reconnect a split member system, delete the split connections. The split connects are child
objects of the member system that they are splitting.
If after you split a member system into multiple member parts you want to delete an individual
member part, you will need to create a member system parent for that member part using the
Convert option. Set the locate filter to Parts and select the member part, then click Convert
on the modify ribbon. For more information, see Modify Linear Member Part Ribbon in Place
Linear Member Systems (on page 787).

Member End Releases


If a column is split, the upper end of the lower column and the lower end of upper column has all
end releases fixed. The lower end of the lower column and the upper end of the upper column do
not change.
For beams and braces that are split, end releases on either side of the split are pinned for
rotation (RY and RZ). The free end of a cantilevered beam or brace has fully fixed member end
releases.

Boundary Conditions
Boundary Conditions remain on the ends for which they were defined. For example, if end 1 of
the original member was fully supported (X, Y, Z, RX, RY, RZ) and end 2 was supported only in
RX and RZ, then end 1 of new member 1 gets fully supported and end 2 of new member 2 gets
the RX and RZ support. The new interior ends (end 2 for member 1 and end 1 for member 2) do
not have any supports defined.

Molded Forms User's Guide 921


Place Splits

For more information about boundary conditions, refer to the Structural Analysis task
documentation.

Loads
Concentrated loads stay where they were placed (the physical location along the original
member part length). The absolute or relative placement value is recalculated based on the new
member part length.
Distributed loads are split into two distributed loads with the same magnitude (one distributed
load for each new member part).
Partially distributed loads do one of two things based on the split location. If the split location is
between the partially distributed load's end points, the load is split into two partially distributed
loads - one on each new member part on either side of the split location.
If the split location is outside of the partially distributed load's end points, the load is unaffected
other than having the end points' absolute or relative placement values recalculated based on the
new member part length.
For more information about loads, refer to the Structural Analysis task documentation.

Fireproofing
When a member with fireproofing is split, Smart 3D creates new fireproofing on the two new split
members with the same setback references as the original member's fireproofing. In addition, the
software adjusts the setback distances so that the fireproofing maintains the same geometric
start and end position and looks solid throughout.
If you delete a split, the fireproofing is merged using the properties from the existing fireproofing.
You must edit the resulting fireproofing and adjust the setbacks and other properties as needed.

Designed Members
When splitting designed members, you need to be aware of these limitations:
 You can split designed members only by a rolled member, a specified point, a grid plane, or
another designed member.
 If you split the designed member by a rolled member, then each plate in the designed
member has a logical connection to the rolled member.
 If you split the designed member by a grid plane, then the plate parts on one side of the grid
plane have a logical connection to the designed member part on the other side of the grid
plane.
 The split always places a square end-cut on the designed member. This square cut is
replaced by the appropriate end-cut when the designed member is detailed.
 Hangers, sketched boundaries, openings, features, chamfers, detailed plate parts,
intersection seams connected to the designed member's plate systems before the split are
deleted when the split is complete. Child plate systems and other plate systems referencing
a designed member's plate system are put on the To Do List. You must redefine the
reference relationships to remove them from the To Do List.
 Plate systems bounded by the designed member's plate systems before the split become
unbounded when the split is complete. Stiffeners and edge reinforcements on these plate
systems are also deleted upon completion of the split.

Molded Forms User's Guide 922


Place Splits

Locating Split Connections


Split connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to
Connections, you can locate and select split connections for review and editing. Split
connections are located at the ends of member parts where the split is located and appear as
circles when you move the cursor over them.

When you select a split connection, the software displays the parent member system of the split
connection in the ribbon. Select the Edit > Properties command to edit the split connection
properties. You cannot measure distances using the split connection as an end point when using
the Tools > Measure command.

Place Split Ribbon


Specifies the properties for the split that you are placing or editing.

Split Properties
Activates the Split Properties dialog box. For more information, see Split Connection
Properties Dialog Box (on page 929).
Place
Select how to define the split location.
 Select By Object to split the member system by another model object that you identify.
 Select By Point to split the member system at a point along the member system that you
identify.
Finish
Splits the member systems using the options that you have specified.
Cancel
Clears the selected objects.
Accept
Accepts the selected objects and moves you to the next step in the command.

By Object Options
Split Members
Select the members to split. Remember, if you set Split Status to By Rule then you cannot
split members that have Continuous set for the Continuity Type. You can split only
members set to Intercostal.

Molded Forms User's Guide 923


Place Splits

Splitting Members
Select the objects at which to split the member systems. The objects can be another member
system, a grid plane, an elevation plane, deck, or a bulkhead.
Split Status
Specifies the method to determine which member system splits another member system.
 By Rule - The software looks at the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority Number
values defined on the Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog
Box) (on page 813) to determine which member system to split. Member systems set to
Continuous split the other member system. Member systems set to Intercostal are split
by the other member system. The Continuity Priority Number is used to select which
member system is split when two member systems intersect, but both have Intercostal
for the Continuity Type. Member systems with a lower continuity priority (1, 2, 3, for
example) split member systems with a higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9, for example).
 Split First - The member systems that you identified during the Split Members step
are split by the member systems that you identified during the Splitting Members
step.
 Split Second - The member systems that you identified during the Splitting
Members step are split by the member systems that you identified during the Split
Members step.
 Split Both - All member systems that you have identified in both steps are split against
each other.
 Split None - No member systems are split, but the interference between the two objects
is suppressed.

By Point Options
Split Member
Select the member to split.

Splitting Point
Defines the split location point.
Location Definition
Specifies how the split location is calculated. The location can be defined as Ratio or
Distance.
 A ratio location can be thought of as a distance percentage along the member. For
example, a split placed at a relative distance of 0.333 is located at one-third the member
length measured from the member start. A split placed at a relative distance of 0.5 is
located at the middle of the member.
 A distance value is the actual distance from the start or end of the member. The software
verifies that the absolute distance that you specify is not past the end of the member.
Offset Reference
Select whether to measure the split location from the start or the end of the member.
Offset Value
Specify the position of the split as either the ratio distance along the member or the absolute

Molded Forms User's Guide 924


Place Splits

distance (as defined by Location Definition.)

What do you want to do?


 Split a member that intersects another member (on page 925)
 Split a cross brace (on page 926)
 Split columns at a plane (on page 927)
 Split a member at a point along member (on page 928)
 Set member split priority (on page 928)
 Remove a split (on page 929)

Split a member that intersects another member


1. Click Place Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Place box, select By Object.
3. In the Split Status box, select Split First.
If the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority Number values have been set for
the member systems, you can use the By Rule option to have the software automatically
determine which member system to split. For more information, see Place Split Ribbon in
Place Splits (on page 921).
4. Select the member to split.

5. Click Accept .
6. Select the splitting member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 925


Place Splits

7. Click Finish.

Split a cross brace


1. Click Place Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Place box, select By Object.
3. In the Split Status box, select Split First.
4. Select the cross brace to split.

5. Click Accept .
6. Select the other cross brace.

Molded Forms User's Guide 926


Place Splits

7. Click Finish.

Split columns at a plane


1. Click Place Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Split Status box, select By Rule.
3. Select the columns to split.

4. In the Workspace Explorer, select the elevation plane at which to split the columns.

Molded Forms User's Guide 927


Place Splits

You can also select the elevation plane by selecting it on the Z-axis ruler. Select
View > Rulers to turn on rulers.

5. Click Accept .
6. Click Finish.
Use the Grids task to create elevation planes.

Split a member at a point along member


1. Click Place Split on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Place box, select By Point.
3. Select the member to split.
An arrow indicates the split point.

4. In the Location Definition box, select Distance or Ratio.


5. Define the location for the split using the Offset Reference and Offset Value boxes.
6. Click Finish.

Set member split priority


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Set the Locate Filter to Members System.

Molded Forms User's Guide 928


Place Splits

3. Select the member system to edit.

4. Click Properties .
5. Set the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority Number options as required. See Member
System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) (on page 813) for information
on these two properties.
6. Click OK.

Remove a split
1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Set the Locate Filter to Split Connections.
3. In a graphic view, select the split to remove.
4. Click Delete .

Split Connection Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the split connection that you are editing.
See Also
General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 929)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)

General Tab (Split Connection Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the split connection.
Category
Select the type of properties to view for the selected split connection.
Name
Specifies the name of the split connection.
Name Rule
Select the name rule to use to name the split connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the split connection using the format: <split
status>-<location>-<index> where <split status> is the Split Status that was used to
create the split connection, <location> is the global workshare location, and <index> is a
unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, Split First-1-0004.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the split connection using the format: <split
status>-<location>-<index> where <split status> is the Split Status that was used to
create the split connection, <location> is the global workshare location, and <index> is a
unique index number that starts at 0001. For example, Split First-1-0004.
 User Defined - Select this name rule to name the split connection yourself in the Name
box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 929


Place Splits

Parent
Displays the parent member system to which the split belongs.
Split Parent Status
Specifies the method Smart 3D uses to determine the member system that splits another
member system. The list is defined by the SplitStatus codelist.
By Rule indicates that the software looks at the Continuity Type and Continuity Priority
Number values defined on the Member System Tab (Member System Prismatic Properties
Dialog Box) (on page 813) to determine the member system to split. Member systems set to
Continuous split the other member system. Member systems set to Intercostal are split by
the other member system. The Continuity Priority Number specifies the member system
that is split when two member systems intersect, but both have Intercostal for the
Continuity Type. Member systems with a lower continuity priority (1, 2, 3, for example) split
member systems with a higher continuity priority (7, 8, 9, for example).
Split First indicates that the member systems that you identified during the Split
Members step are split by the member systems that you identified during the Splitting
Members step.
Split Second indicates that the member systems that you identified during the Splitting
Members step are split by the member systems that you identified during the Split
Members step.
Split Both indicates that all member systems that you have identified in both steps are split
against each other.
Split None indicates that no member systems are split, but the interference between the two
objects is suppressed.
Offset
Specify the offset from the intersecting plane or surface to place the split. You can specify a
positive or negative number. This option is only available after the split connection is placed
when defining a split using a grid plane, elevation plane, or surface as the splitting object.
See Also
Split Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 929)

Molded Forms User's Guide 930


SECTION 11

Creating Knuckles
Knuckles are created automatically as children of extruded plate systems and of profile systems
by projection when there is an acute discontinuity (an angle with no radius) on the extrusion or
landing curve. These knuckles can be modified through the dialog boxes shown below. Profile
knuckles can also be added manually.
You can change the default colors of knuckle curves, seams, profile systems, and
reference curves to enhance visibility. For more information, see Modify Plate Knuckle Curve
Display Colors (on page 939).

Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box - Specifies the properties for a plate knuckle.
For more information, see Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page 931).

Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box - Specifies the properties for a profile
knuckle. For more information, see Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page
933).

Profile Knuckle - Creates a manual knuckle on a profile system. For more


information, see Profile Knuckle (on page 935).

Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the selected plate knuckle. The software creates a plate knuckle
when the curve of an extruded plate system has an angle with no radius. For more information,
see Linear Extruded Plate System (on page 156) and Nonlinear Extruded Plate System (on page
180).
General Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 931)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General KNU Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box) (on page 933)

General Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties of the plate knuckle.
Name
Specifies the name of the knuckle. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies the naming rule to use to name the knuckle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 931


Creating Knuckles

Type
Specifies the type of knuckle that you are placing.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Specifies the landing curve definition method for the knuckle.
Parent System
Specifies the parent system for the knuckle. You can define parent systems in the Systems
and Specifications task. When the plate system is created, the property values for the parent
system are used for the initial plate system property values. When a parent property value
changes, the corresponding child property value is updated.
Override
When selected, makes the Manufacturing Method box editable.
Manufacturing Method
Select the method for creating the knuckle. This box is read-only unless the Override check
box is turned on.
 Bend Knuckle - The knuckle part of the plate display the bend radius after detailing.
Plates and profiles that cross the knuckle include the knuckle bend in their contour after
detailing. Manufacturing parts have knuckle marking information.
 Split Knuckle - A design seam is placed at the same location as the knuckle on the plate.
You must run the Execute Split (on page 891) command to split the plate system.
After detailing, the plate edges along the knuckle bisect the knuckle angle. Plates that
cross the knuckle include the knuckle angle in their contour after detailing. The landing
curves of profiles that cross the knuckle follow the knuckle contour. Profiles also receive
a knuckle point and are split after detailing.

 Ignore Knuckle - No seam or radius is created.


Inner Radius
Specifies the inner radius dimension of the knuckle. The inner radius is generally two times
the web thickness. This box is read-only if Override Rule is cleared.
Override Radius
When selected, makes the Inner Radius box editable.
Molded Radius
Specifies the bend radius to the molded surface. The molded bend radius is automatically
calculated based on the inner radius, plate thickness, plate thickness direction, and plate
offset if any. This box is read-only.
An example potential knuckle radius is shown in the following figure. The inner knuckle's
radius is defined as the angle less than 180 degrees at the knuckle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 932


Creating Knuckles

If the plate thickness direction is from left to right, the software calculates the following:
Molded radius at the left side = Inner radius at the left side;
Molded radius at the right side of the plate - Inner radius at the right side + plate thickness
If the plate thickness direction is from right to left, the software calculates the following:
Molded radius at the left side = Inner radius at left side + plate thickness;
Molded radius at the right side of the plate = Inner radius at the right side.

1 - Plate part
2 - Plate thickness
3 - Inner knuckle radius
4 - Outer knuckle radius

General KNU Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box)


The General tab displays the properties that were selected by you or automatically determined
by the software at creation. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the
corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
The properties displayed duplicate those available on other tabs, such as the Main tab. You can
edit the properties on these tabs.

Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the selected profile knuckle. The software creates a profile knuckle
when a sketched profile has an angle with no radius, or when a profile crosses a knuckle on its
parent plate system. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Projection (on page
746).
Profile Knuckle Tab (Profile Knuckle Dialog Box) (on page 933)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Profile Knuckle Tab (Profile Knuckle Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties of the profile knuckle.

Molded Forms User's Guide 933


Creating Knuckles

Name - Specifies the name of the knuckle. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created.
For more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule - Select the naming rule to name the knuckle.
Override Rule - Indicates whether you can manually specify the Manufacturing Method. When
this option is cleared, the catalog rules determine the behavior of the profile.

Knuckle Properties
Manufacturing Method - Specifies the method for creating the knuckle. This list is only
available if the Override Rule check box is selected. The availability of methods depends on
the profile cross-section type and the plate seam condition. The list is defined by the
ProfileKnuckleManufacturingMethod codelist.
Bend indicates that the knuckled part displays the bend radius after detailing. The Flat Bar
cross-section type is supported for this option.
Split indicates that the knuckle point behaves as a design seam. You must run the Execute
Split (on page 891) command to split the profile system. During detailing, the end cut
rules determines the part geometry. The plane bisecting the knuckle angle is passed to the
end cut rules. All cross-section types are supported.

Ignore indicates that no seam or radius is created. This applies to EA, UA, BF and Flat Bar
cross-section types. This option is available when the knuckle angle is 2° or less.
Extend indicates that the tangential extension of the profile can extend beyond the profile
seam. The software determines part geometry and applicable end cuts. The profile is
trimmed to the plate contours after detailing. All cross-section types are supported.

Molded Forms User's Guide 934


Creating Knuckles

Bend Plus Feature indicates that when a profile is bent about its weak axis, Smart 3D
places a feature or features on a profile after detailing. The resulting features that are placed
are based on a combination of the profile knuckle rule and the smart occurrence rules. For
example, an edge feature and an insert plate feature are placed on a profile that has a
concave bend with its flange oriented on the convex side. This applies to UA and EA
cross-section types with heights of 200 mm or more and knuckle angles of 90° or less.

Inner Radius - Specifies the inner radius dimension of the knuckle. The inner radius is generally
two times the web thickness. This box is read-only if Override Rule is cleared.
Outer Radius - Specifies the outer radius dimension of the knuckle. The outer radius is generally
the inner radius plus the flange length. This box is read-only if Override Rule is cleared.
Knuckle Angle - Displays the angle of the knuckle bend.
Related Plate Knuckle - Displays the name of the associated plate knuckle.

Profile Knuckle
Creates a manual knuckle on the selected profile system. Use this command when a profile
crosses a change in the surface direction of in a plate, but the plate has a radius instead of a
knuckle and a knuckle is not automatically created for the profile. With Profile Knuckle , you
can select the radius and create a knuckle at the mid-point of the radius.
A profile knuckle is automatically created on a knuckled plate:

A profile knuckle is not created when the plate transition has a radius:

Molded Forms User's Guide 935


Creating Knuckles

Profile Knuckle creates a manual profile knuckle at the midpoint of the radius:

Profile Knuckle Ribbon


Profile Knuckle Properties - Displays the Manual Profile Knuckle Properties dialog box,
which you use to view and modify the properties of the knuckle. For more information, see Profile
Knuckle Tab (Manual Profile Knuckle Dialog Box) (on page 938).

Select Profile System - Specifies the profile system on which you want to place a manual
knuckle.
Reference Curve - Specifies the reference curve, which you want to use to place a manual
knuckle. You can select only one reference curve.
Generate Knuckle Point through GC - Allows creation of a geometry construction point to
use as the reference to place the manual knuckle. You create the geometry directly in a graphic
view by using the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, the Geometric Construction
ribbon, and the Geometric Construction Explorer. This option is the 3D equivalent to Sketch
2D. For more information, see Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box and Geometric
Construction Explorer (on page 1214).
Finish - Places the manual knuckle using the reference you chose.
Manufacturing Method - Specifies the default manufacturing method for the manual knuckle.
Select one of the following options:

 Split - The knuckle point behaves as a design seam. You must run Execute Split to split
the profile system. During detailing, the end cut rules determines the part geometry. The
plane bisecting the knuckle angle is passed to the end cut rules. For more information, see
Execute Split (on page 891).
 Ignore - The profile part is not affected. The knuckle point is ignored and no knuckle is
created.
 Extend - Allows the tangential extension of the profile beyond the profile seam. The
Structural Detailing task determines part geometry and applicable end cuts.
 Split and Extend - Allows the profile system to split at the knuckle, and also at the tangential
extension of the part beyond the knuckle.
AutoSplit - Splits the profile system when Finish is clicked.

If this option is not selected, click Execute Split to split the profile system. For
more information, see Split a profile or member system (on page 893).

Molded Forms User's Guide 936


Creating Knuckles

Knuckle Best Practices (on page 56)

What do you want to do?


 Place a manual profile knuckle by GC point (on page 937)
 Place a manual profile knuckle by reference curve (on page 937)
 Edit a manual profile knuckle (on page 938)
 Delete a profile knuckle (on page 938)

Place a manual profile knuckle by GC point


1. Click Profile Knuckle on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select a profile system crossing a curved plate transition.
3. Click GC Point .
The Geometric Construction Palette, Geometric Construction ribbon, and the
Geometric Construction Explorer display.
4. In the Geometric Construction box of the ribbon or the Curves tab of the Geometric
Construction Palette, select EdgesFromCurveOrSurface.
5. In the graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the profile system.
6. Click Continue.
7. In the Geometric Construction box of the ribbon or the Points tab of the Geometric
Construction Palette, select PointAtCurveMiddle to specify the midpoint of the arc to
place the profile knuckle.
8. In the Geometric Construction Explorer, select the needed arc on the profile landing curve.
Select [Not Named] elements under EdgesFormCurveOrSurf until the correct curve is
highlighted in the graphic view.

9. Click Continue, and then click Close.


10. Select the manufacturing method.
11. Click Finish.
A knuckle point is added to the profile at the midpoint of the arc.

Place a manual profile knuckle by reference curve


1. Click Profile Knuckle on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the root profile system.
3. Click Reference Curve .

Molded Forms User's Guide 937


Creating Knuckles

4. Select a reference curve.


5. Click Finish.

Edit a manual profile knuckle


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Locate Filter box, select RefCurve On Surface & Knuckles.
3. In a graphic view or on the Workspace Explorer, select the manual knuckle to edit.
4. Edit the knuckle as needed.
5. Click Finish.

Delete a profile knuckle


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Locate Filter box, select RefCurve On Surface & Knuckles.
3. In a graphic view or on the Workspace Explorer, select the manual knuckle to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Manual Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the profile knuckle.
Profile Knuckle Tab (Manual Profile Knuckle Dialog Box) (on page 938)

Profile Knuckle Tab (Manual Profile Knuckle Dialog Box)


Specifies the properties for the manual profile knuckle that you are placing or editing.
Name - Specifies the name of the knuckle. Names generated by a rule include a Global
Workshare name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created.
For more information, see "Using Global Workshare" in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule - Specifies the naming rule to name the knuckle.

Knuckle Properties
Override Rule - Allows you to manually specify the manufacturing method. If this option is
cleared, the rules determine the method.
Manufacturing Method - Specifies the method for creating the manual profile knuckle. This
option is only available if Override Rule is selected. Select one of the following options:

 Split - The knuckle point behaves as a design seam. You must run Execute Split to split
the profile system. During detailing, the end cut rules determines the part geometry. The
plane bisecting the knuckle angle is passed to the end cut rules. For more information, see
Execute Split (on page 891).
 Ignore - The profile part is not affected. The knuckle point is ignored and no knuckle is
created.

Molded Forms User's Guide 938


Creating Knuckles

 Extend - Allows the tangential extension of the profile beyond the profile seam. The
Structural Detailing task determines part geometry and applicable end cuts.
 Split and Extend - Allows the profile system to split at the knuckle, and also at the tangential
extension of the part beyond the knuckle.
You cannot modify the properties for Manufacturing Method when creating a new
profile knuckle.
Inner Radius - Specify the inner radius dimension of the knuckle. This box is read-only if
Override Rule is cleared.
Outer Radius - Specify the outer radius dimension of the knuckle. This box is read-only if
Override Rule is cleared.
Knuckle Angle - Displays the angle of the knuckle bend.
Related Plate Knuckle - Displays the name of the associated plate knuckle. A plate knuckle is
associated with a profile knuckle if you select it as a reference object.

Modify Plate Knuckle Curve Display Colors


Use this procedure to create style rules to customize the display colors of landing curves. You
can use the procedure to set different colors for the landing curves of:
 Seams
 Profile Systems
 Reference Curves
 Plate Knuckle Curves
For example, before creating style rules, reference curves and design seams are white:

Molded Forms User's Guide 939


Creating Knuckles

After creating separate style rules for reference curves and design seams, they appear in
different colors:

Use the following steps to customize curve display colors.

Select the View Aspect


1. Click Format >View.
The Format View dialog box opens.
2. In the Selected Aspects box, click Reference Geometry.
By default, Simple physical is also selected.
3. Click OK.

Create a Style Rule


1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
The Surface Style Rules dialog box opens.
2. Click New.
The Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box opens
3. Type a name for the new surface style rule in the Rule name box.
4. In the Filter list, click More to create a new filter.
The Select Filter dialog box opens.

5. Click New Filter .


The New Filter Properties dialog box opens.
If you are an administrator, you can first select Ship Filters. The new filter is then
available to all users.
6. On the Object Type tab, expand the hierarchy Ship Structure, and select one of the
following:
 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Reference Curve

Molded Forms User's Guide 940


Creating Knuckles

 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Knuckle Curve


 Ship Structure/Seams/Plate Seam
 Ship Structure/Systems/Profile Systems/Stiffener System

7. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Select Filter dialog box.
9. In the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box, select a color in the Style applied box.
10. Click OK.
The new rule appears in the Style rule library list.

Add the Rule to the Workspace


1. Select the rule in the Style rule library list.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK.
See Also
In the Common User's Guide:
Format View
Format a View
Surface Style Rules
Create a Surface Style Rule
Create a New Filter
Add a Surface Style Rule to the Workspace

Molded Forms User's Guide 941


SECTION 12

Placing Logical Connections


Logical connections are created automatically as children of plate and profile systems where they
are bounded to other systems. When placing design seams and splitting the seams, logical
connections are also created automatically at the seams for the newly created child systems or at
the intersections between systems. In some cases, you can manually create a logical connection,
such as between two edge-to-edge plate systems or between a profile system and a plate
system that are aligned end-to-edge.
The top level logical connection is called the root logical connection. Every root logical
connection has at least one leaf (or child) logical connection. If multiple leaf logical connections
exist, then the parent system is bounded to or intersects multiple child systems along the
connection, as shown in this example:

When two plate systems or a plate system and a profile system intersect or are bounded to each
other, you can invert the logical connection to change the way the systems are connected. You
can also split the logical connection between the plate systems.
You can manually place logical connections, such as between edge-to-edge plate systems, or
between members and plates. For more information, see Logical Connection (on page 943).
Logical connections contain the connection properties between systems. These properties are
used to create assembly connections, physical connections, and construction feature objects in
the Structural Detailing task, and to generate manufacturing data in the Structural Manufacturing
task.

Molded Forms User's Guide 942


Placing Logical Connections

See Also
Creating Seams (on page 888)
Edit Intersection (on page 948)

Logical Connection
The Logical Connection command creates a relationship between two systems to identify
that the two systems are connected. Use this command when you have placed the two systems
separately, but they coincide such as described in the following situations:
 A plate system edge against another plate system edge. This situation can happen when you
use the same grid plane as a boundary for both plate systems during placement. You can
connect plate systems of the same type (planar, imported, ruled, linear extruded, nonlinear
extruded, revolved, or child) or different types. An example of this situation is a cambered
deck where you want the seams at the deck to be knuckles. If the deck is created as separate
planar plate systems sharing grid plane boundaries, use this command to connect the
separate plate systems.
 A plate system edge against a stiffener profile (or linear beam profile) end. This situation can
happen when the ends of edge reinforcements connect to the free edge of plate system
openings or sketched boundaries.
 A profile end against profile end. This situation can happen when you have two profile
systems on adjacent plate systems.
 A member to a plate system. This situation can happen when members are created first, and
plates are added afterwards.
 Two lapped plates, or between a plate and a member. This situation can happen when the
surface of one flat plate is adjacent to the surface of another flat plate, or when a member is
adjacent to a plate.

Plate Knuckles
If the plate system has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve, the software creates a
plate knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the Workspace Explorer. For
more information, see Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page 931).

Profile Knuckles
If the plate system associated with the profile has an angle with no radius on the extrusion curve,
the software creates a profile knuckle object. You can select this object graphically, or in the
Workspace Explorer. For more information, see Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box (on page
933).

Logical Connection Ribbon


Logical Connection Properties - Opens the Logical Connection Properties dialog box,
which you use to define connection properties. For more information, see Logical Connection
Properties Dialog Box (on page 945).
Finish - Places a logical connection between the objects that you have selected.
Reject - Clears all selected objects.
Accept - Accepts all selected objects.

Molded Forms User's Guide 943


Placing Logical Connections

Connection Type to Create - Specifies the type of logical connection to be created. Select one
of the following in the list: Member Lapped to Plate, Plate Lapped to Plate, Profile End to
Profile End, Plate Edge to Plate Edge, Any System Connected to Any System, or Any
System Lapped to Any System. The connection type that you select determines which pair of
Select Set controls display on the ribbon. See Select Set Controls below.
Parent - Specifies the parent object for the logical connection. Select Use Select Set 1 Object
as Parent or Use Select Set 2 Object as Parent.
Name - Displays the name of the logical connection.
Lapped - Designates that the logical connection is between two lapped plates. This option is
checked by default when the logical connection is between a member and a plate.

Select Set Controls


The following table shows the controls that display on the Logical Connection ribbon when a
selection is made in the Connection Type list. Use these controls to help identify the objects that
you can select to create the required logical connection.

Connection Type Select Set 1 Select Set 2

Standard Member - Select


Plate System - Select a plate
Member Lapped to Plate one or more standard members
system to connect.
to connect.

Plate System - Select one or Plate System - Select one or


Plate Edge to Plate Edge
more plate systems to connect. more plate systems to connect.

Profile System - Select one Profile System - Select one


Profile End to Profile End or more profile systems to or more profile systems to
connect. connect.

Plate Lapped to Plate Plate System - Select a plate Plate System - Select the
system to connect. other plate system to connect

Any System Connected First System - Select any Second System - Select the
to Any System system to connect. other system to connect.

Any System Lapped to First System - Select any Second System - Select the
Any System system to connect. other system to connect.

What do you want to do?


 Connect systems using a logical connection (on page 945)
 Remove logical connections (on page 945)

Molded Forms User's Guide 944


Placing Logical Connections

Connect systems using a logical connection


1. Click Logical Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. In the Connection Type to Create list, select the type of connection to create.
3. In the Parent list, specify the select set to be used as the parent.
4. Create the first select set, and click Accept .

 The select set can consist of one or more systems. To select multiple objects, press the
CTRL key while clicking each required member of the select set. Alternatively, drag the
mouse to fence the required select set objects.
 Click Reject to clear the select set of all selected objects.
5. Create the second select set, and click Accept .
6. Repeat the previous steps as needed to create select sets for as many logical connections
as necessary.
7. Click Finish.
The software creates the logical connections. Logical connections are highlighted in red in
the graphic view.
The logical connections remain highlighted in red in the graphic view until Finish is
clicked again or until the selection in the Connection Type list changes.

Remove logical connections


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Connections from the Locate Filter.
3. Select the logical connection to remove.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Logical Connection Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for logical connections.
Main Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box) (on page 945)
Relationships Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box) (on page 947)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the main properties for the logical connection.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare

Molded Forms User's Guide 945


Placing Logical Connections

name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.
Rule
Specifies the naming rule to use to name the logical connection.
 Select StdHierarchyChildNamingRule to use the following syntax: <Parent
Name>-LC<Index Number>. For example, D0-1DCK-1-LC101, where D0 is the
reference plane, 1DCK is an index number appended by the plate type (Deck in this
example), 1 is the Workshare Location ID, and LC101 is "Logical Connection" appended
by an index number.
 Select User Defined to name the logical connection yourself by using the appropriate
box.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system of the logical connection.
Type
Displays the object type, which in this case is Logical Connection.

Optional Corner Trim Property


Your administrator must bulkload the following files before the Corner Trim displays:
Bulkload into the site and site schema databases:
 [Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\BulkLoad\DataFiles\ProjectDBFiles\StructureCustomClasses.x
ls
 [Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\Bulkload\DataFiles\ShipStructure\CornerTrimCodelist.xls
 Bulkload into the catalog and catalog schema databases:
 [Product Folder]\ShipCatalogData\Bulkload\DataFiles\SM_SquareEdgeTrimRules.xls
 [Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\Bulkload\DataFiles\ShipStructure\CornerTrimCodelist.xls
 [Product
Folder]\ShipCatalogData\Bulkload\DataFiles\ShipStructure\CornerTrimAttribute.xls
Corner Trim
Indicates whether plates bounded by plate connections or edge reinforcement connections
use the square edge trim.
The available options are:
 Flush (Flush Neat Trim) - This value uses the normal trim behavior for attached plates
or for plates bounded by edge reinforcement when detailing. This is the default value.
 Open (Open Square Trim) - This value uses the square edge trim behavior when
detailing the attached plates or when detailing the plates bounded by edge reinforcement,
as shown below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 946


Placing Logical Connections

Plate bounded by plate:

Plate bounded by edge reinforcement:

Relationships Tab (Logical Connections Properties Dialog Box)


Displays a list of objects related to the logical connection. Select General or Logical
Connection as the relationship category from the list on the right.
List color - Specifies the display color in the graphic view for all items in the list.
Item color - Specifies the display color in the graphic view for a selected item in the list.
Name - Displays the name of the related object.
Type - Displays the type of related object.
Go To - Displays the properties of the selected object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 947


Placing Logical Connections

Edit Intersection
When two plate systems or a plate system and a profile system intersect or are bounded to each
other, you can use the Edit Intersection command to change the way the systems are
connected. The Edit Intersection ribbon is available when you select any root logical
connections between two plate systems.
However, the ribbon is not available for logical connections between a plate and a
profile. Only the Invert option is available from the short-cut menu.
You can edit logical connections as follows:
 Split a logical connection into regions.
The software does not support splitting the logical connection between a profile
and a plate.
 Invert the connection relationship (continuous versus intercostal) between each system,
along the entire logical connection or on individual regions.

 Offset the edge of one system beyond the other, along the entire logical connection or on
individual regions.
The offset does not apply to the logical connection between a profile and a plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 948


Placing Logical Connections

Edit Intersection Ribbon

 The Edit Intersection ribbon is available when you select any root logical connections
between two plate systems. However, the ribbon is not available for logical connections
between a plate and a profile. Only the Invert option is available from the short-cut menu.
 The software does not support splitting the logical connection between a profile and a plate.
Logical Connection Properties - Opens the Logical Connection Properties dialog box, which
you use to modify connection properties. For more information, see Logical Connection
Properties Dialog Box (on page 945).

Define Region - Select one or more objects that intersect the logical connection to define
region boundaries. You can select objects such as reference planes, reference curves, seams,
and points. If no objects are selected, then the logical connection has one region.
Select and Edit Region - Select a region to edit.
Finish - Adds the regions and offsets to the logical connection.
Cancel - Clears all selected objects.
Accept - Accepts all selected objects.
Invert - Reverses the connection relationship (continuous versus intercostal) between the
systems in the selected region. An arrow in the direction of the continuous system appears in a
graphic view.

 The Invert option can simultaneously invert multiple logical connections when each
connection has only one region. If any of the selected logical connections have multiple
regions, the invert operation fails with an error message.
 If a single logical connection is selected to be inverted and it has only one region, the region
is automatically selected for the invert operation.
 For logical connections between a plate and a profile, only the Invert option is available from
the short-cut menu.
Offset - Specifies a value to extend the continuous system beyond the intercostal system.
Available when at least one of the systems is bounded to the other.
The offset does not apply to the logical connection between a profile and a plate.

What do you want to do?


 Modify a logical connection (on page 950)
 Invert multiple logical connections (on page 950)
 Invert the logical connection between a plate and a profile (on page 951)

Molded Forms User's Guide 949


Placing Logical Connections

Modify a logical connection


The software does not support splitting the logical connection between a profile and a
plate.

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the logical connection to modify.
The Edit Intersection ribbon appears.

4. If you need to split the logical connection into more than one region, click Define Region .
5. Select one or more grid planes, plate systems, profile landing curves, or seams that intersect
the logical connection.
6. Click Select and Edit Region .
A red circle appears at each region boundary.
7. Select a region to modify.
A red arrow appears in the plane of the continuous system.
8. If needed, click Invert.
The red arrow moves to the other system, which is now continuous for the selected region.
You can also right-click the logical connection in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer and click Invert from the short-cut menu.
If the logical connection to be inverted has only one region, the region is
automatically selected for the invert operation.
9. If needed, type a value for Offset.
10. Click Finish.
Invert and Offset changes made to the logical connection are not visible in a
graphic view until the systems have been detailed in the Structural Detailing task.

Invert multiple logical connections


The software does not support splitting the logical connection between a profile and a
plate.

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the logical connections that you want to invert.
The Edit Intersection ribbon appears. If all the selected logical connections have only one
region, the region is automatically selected for the invert operation, a red circle appears
at each region boundary, and a red arrow appears in the plane of each continuous
system. If any of the logical connections have multiple regions, you can only modify their
logical connection properties. Only Logical Connection Properties is available on the
ribbon bar.
4. Click Invert.

Molded Forms User's Guide 950


Placing Logical Connections

For each logical connection, the red arrow moves to the other system, which is now
continuous for the region.
You can also right-click the logical connections in a graphic view or in the Workspace
Explorer and click Invert from the short-cut menu.
The logical connections to be inverted simultaneously must have only one region.
If any of the logical connections have multiple regions, the operation fails with an error
message.
5. If needed, type a value for Offset. This value is applied to all selected logical connections.
6. Click Finish.
Invert and Offset changes made to the logical connections are not visible in a graphic
view until the systems have been detailed in the Structural Detailing task.

Invert the logical connection between a plate and a profile


The software does not support splitting the logical connection between a profile and a
plate.

1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.


2. Select Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. In a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer, select the logical connections that you want to
invert.
If all the selected logical connections have only one region, the region is automatically
selected for the invert operation, a red circle appears at each region boundary, and a red
arrow appears in the plane of each continuous system.
The logical connections to be inverted simultaneously must have only one region.
If any of the logical connections have multiple regions, the operation fails with an error
message.
4. Right-click the logical connections and click Invert from the short-cut menu.
The software immediately inverts the connections. For each logical connection, the red arrow
moves to the other system, which is now continuous for the region.
Invert changes made to the logical connections are not visible in a graphic view until
the systems have been detailed in the Structural Detailing task.

Molded Forms User's Guide 951


SECTION 13

Place Assembly Connection


Places an assembly connection or free end cut at the selected
frame connection. Assembly connections define the necessary
trimming between member parts and provide for the generation of
parts such as base plates, gusset plates, and clip angles. Assembly
connections also control cutbacks, copes, notches, bolt holes, weld
preparations, and slots.
This command places member assembly connections or a free end
cut on the member. The software automatically places slab assembly connections when you
place the slab.

Member Assembly Connections


Member assembly connections are similar to frame connections, but define the necessary
trimming between member parts and the generation of parts such as base plates, gusset plates,
and clip angles. Assembly connections control member features including cutbacks, copes,
notches, bolt holes, and slots. Whether or not features are placed depends on the member
assembly connection type and the geometry of the connection between the members.
There are several basic assembly connections delivered with the software. You can create your
own assembly connections by editing the StructAssemblyConnections.xls workbook, and then
bulk loading the workbook. For more information on creating your own assembly connections,
see the Structure Reference Data Guide.
For very complex nodal connections, instead of writing a custom assembly connection,
you might want to try Trim Members in the Structure task.
The following general assembly connections are delivered with the software:

The base plate assembly connection places a plate at the end of an


unsupported member. This assembly connection requires an
unsupported frame connection on one member. For example, use this
assembly connection to place a base plate at the bottom of a column.

The corner gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical brace to


a beam and column intersection using a gusset plate. This assembly
connection requires a frame connection with three members, such as
vertical corner brace.

Molded Forms User's Guide 952


Place Assembly Connection

The fitted assembly connection connects two members. This assembly


connection requires a frame connection with two members, such as axis,
seated, or flush. Examples of this connection include a beam framing into
a column or a beam framing into another beam.

The gusset plate assembly connection connects a vertical or horizontal


brace to a beam or a vertical brace to a column using a gusset plate. This
assembly connection requires a frame connection with two members,
such as axis.

The miter assembly connection connects two members that meet at an


angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection requires a frame
connection with two members, such as axis. In addition, the members
must be end connected.

The splice assembly connection connects two members that are collinear
and end connected. This assembly connection requires a frame
connection with two members, such as axis.

The general surface assembly connection connects a member end with a


nonmember surface such as a slab, a deck, or a hull plate. The member
is cut to surface and a base plate is placed on the member end.

End Cut Assembly Connections


The following end cut assembly connections are delivered with the software:

The end cut along assembly connection cuts the end of one member to
the sides or bottom of another member along the second member's
length.

Molded Forms User's Guide 953


Place Assembly Connection

The end cut bearing plate assembly connection connects the end of a
member along the axis of another member. This is typically used to
attach the end of a member to the flange of the supporting member. The
bearing plate connection works at any angle and provides circular,
rectangular, and triangular bearing plates depending on the supported
member's shape.

The end cut miter assembly connection connects two members that meet
at an angle but are co-planar. This assembly connection required a frame
connection with two members, such as axis. In addition, the members
must be end connected.

The end cut split assembly connection connects two members that are
collinear and end connected. This assembly connection requires a frame
connection with two members, such as axis.

The end cut split long box assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are perpendicular to each other. The
supporting member is cut square to the supported member while an item
from the Axis category is placed on the supported member.

The end cut split seam angle assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are:
 member axes are collinear to each other
 have identical cross-section type and size
 have identical cardinal point and rotation values

The end cut split short box assembly connection is used when the
supported and supporting members are perpendicular to each other. The
supported member is cut square to the supporting member while an item
from the Axis category is placed on the supporting member.

End Cut Assembly Naming Conventions


Each end cut assembly connection name consists of three parts:
[EndCutCase]_[WebCutType]_[FlangeCutType]
where:
 [EndCutCase]
 Axis - Supported member is bounded by the axis curve of the supporting member
 LongBox - End-to-end perpendicular supported member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supporting member
 ShortBox - End-to-end perpendicular supporting member is extended, and an axis end
cut is applied to the supported member

Molded Forms User's Guide 954


Place Assembly Connection

 Miter - End-to-end non-collinear


 Split - End-to-end collinear
 SeamAngle - End-to-end collinear where one end is extended
 [WebCutType]
The WebCutType is used to type of web cut that is to be applied at the top of the web and at
the bottom of the web. The following combinations are available (W indicates a straight cut, C
indicates a Cope cut, and S indicates a Snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#C#
 W#S#
 C#C#
 C#S#
 C#W#
 S#S#
 S#C#
 S#W#
 [FlangeCutType]
The FlangeCutType is used to type of flange cut that is to be applied at the left flange section
and at the right flange section. The following combinations are available (W indicates a
straight cut, C indicates a cope cut, and S indicates a snipe cut):
 W#W#
 W#S#
 S#S#
 S#W#
You cannot apply different flange cuts when the supported member has both a top flange and a
bottom flange. In these cases, the same flange cut type is applied to both the top and bottom
flange.
You cannot apply different web cuts or flange cuts in the end-to-end cases. The end-to-end
cases place a web cut and flange cut on both the supported member and the supporting member.
For these cases, the same web cut and flange cut are applied to both the supported member and
the supporting member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 955


Place Assembly Connection

1 - Top left flange


2 - Top right flange
3 - Web top
4 - Web bottom
5 - Bottom right flange
6 - Bottom left flange

See Members in the Structure task for important related information.

Locating Assembly Connections


Assembly connections do not display in the model. However, if you set the Locate Filter to
Member Assembly Connections in the Structure task, you can locate and select assembly
connections for review and editing. Assembly connections are located at the ends of member
parts and appear as circles when you move the cursor over them. Any assembly components,
such as gusset plates, associated with the assembly connection also highlight.

When you select an assembly connection, the software displays the assembly connection type in
the ribbon. Select the Edit > Properties command to edit the assembly connection properties.
You cannot measure distances using the assembly connection graphic as an end point when
using the Tools > Measure command.

Place Assembly Connection Ribbon


Specifies the properties for the assembly connection that you are placing or editing.

Assembly Connection Properties


Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box. You can use this dialog box to
specify additional properties that you cannot set on the ribbon. For more information, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 956


Place Assembly Connection

Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 962).

Select Member/Connection
Activated automatically by the software so that you can select the frame connection or the
member for which you want to place assembly connections.
Finish
Click to place the assembly connection the model.
Cancel
Rejects the selected object.
Accept
Confirms that the selected members, is the member to place assembly connections for. The
software displays in tentative mode the results of the assembly connection.
Condition
Specifies how you want the software to handle existing assembly connections when you try
to place a new assembly connection at the same location. Select Retain existing to keep the
existing assembly connection. Select Update existing to replace the existing assembly
connection with the new assembly connection.
By Rule
Select to allow the software to select the assembly connection to use based on the selected
member parts and their orientation to each other.
Type
Select the assembly connection type to use. If you select By Rule, the software determines
the correct assembly connection to use based on the geometry between the member parts,
and this option is unavailable. If you select More, all available assembly connections display
from which you can select the assembly connection to use. For more information about
assembly connections, see Member Assembly Connections.
Member Part Parent
Select to make the member part the parent object of the assembly connection. Clear this
option to specify a generic system, using the System box, to be the assembly connection
parent. Assembly connections created using member parts as their parents can be edited to
have a system parent later if needed.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection belongs. You can define new systems in
the Systems and Specifications task. This option is unavailable if you select Member Part
Parent. Assembly connections created using a system as their parent can be edited to have
a member part as their parent later if needed.
Name
Specify the name of the assembly connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 957


Place Assembly Connection

Modify Auxiliary Parts Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to add auxiliary parts to the selected assembly connection.

Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection before the assembly connection is
committed to the database. For more information, see Assembly Connection Properties
Dialog Box (on page 962).
Assembly Connection Smart Item
Displays valid smart items for the selected assembly connection.

Add/Delete Auxiliary Parts


Select the parts that can be connected to the selected assembly connection and do not
already have an existing assembly connection. Parts that do not have common geometry
with the selected assembly connection cannot be selected.

Accept
Adds parts from selected parts to the assembly connection and saves the changes to the
database.

Reject
Removes any selected parts from the auxiliary parts list. Only selections made after the last
commit are removed.

What do you want to do?


 Place an assembly connection (on page 959)
 Edit assembly connection properties (on page 960)
 Delete an assembly connection (on page 960)
 Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection (on page 960)
 Edit assembly connection parts (on page 961)
 Place free end cuts (on page 961)
 Edit free end cut properties (on page 961)
 Delete free end cut (on page 961)

Molded Forms User's Guide 958


Place Assembly Connection

Place an assembly connection


1. Click Place Assembly Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the By Rule option if you want the software to automatically select the type of
assembly connection to place. Clear the By Rule option to select the assembly connection
type yourself.
3. Select the frame connection nearest the member end to which to apply the assembly
connection.

4. If you are selecting the assembly connection type yourself, use the Type option.
5. Click Accept .
The software automatically selects the assembly connection and displays the results.

6. Click Finish.

For more information about the types of assembly connections, see Member
Assembly Connections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 959


Place Assembly Connection

Edit assembly connection properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the assembly connection to edit.

4. Click Edit > Properties.


5. Edit the assembly connection properties as needed. For more information, see Assembly
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 962).

Delete an assembly connection


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the assembly connection to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection


This command supports adding parts to an existing assembly connection by selecting an
adjacent plate, profile or member parts that have overlapping geometry.
1. Select an existing assembly connection.

2. Click Select Auxiliary Parts on the ribbon bar.

The Select Auxiliary Parts is enabled for any assembly connection. You can
only add valid auxiliary parts to an assembly connection.

3. Click Accept to add all intersecting parts on the selected parts to the assembly
connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 960


Place Assembly Connection

Edit assembly connection parts


1. Select an assembly connection, and click Select Auxiliary Parts on the ribbon bar.
2. Select the parts not already connected to the selected assembly connection that have
intersecting geometry.
3. To remove a single part, re-select it from the graphic view or Workspace Explorer.

4. To remove the auxiliary parts added in the current command execution, click Reject on
the ribbon bar.

5. Click Accept to add all intersecting parts on the selected parts to the assembly
connection.

Place free end cuts


1. Click Place Assembly Connection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the unsupported frame connection nearest the member end to which you want to
apply the free end cuts.
If you select a member part, the software automatically places free end cuts at the
unsupported frame connections.
3. Click Accept.
The software automatically selects the free end cuts and displays the results.
4. Click Finish.

Edit free end cut properties


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the free end cut to edit.
4. Click Edit > Properties.
5. Edit the free end cut properties as needed. For more information, see Free End Cut
Properties Dialog Box.

Delete free end cut


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Member Assembly Connections in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the free end cut to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Molded Forms User's Guide 961


Place Assembly Connection

Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the member assembly connection that you are editing.
Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 962)
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 966)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
Notes Tab (on page 817)
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 966)
See Also
Edit assembly connection properties (on page 960)

Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog


Box)
The Occurrence tab displays the member assembly connection properties that you can edit or
that are automatically determined by the software at placement. The property name appears on
the left side of the grid, and the corresponding property value appears on the right side of the grid.
If you selected more than one assembly connection, and then selected the properties command,
only the common properties between the selected assembly connections display.
When viewing properties for a single assembly connection, the following properties display. More
properties may display depending on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on properties.
Name
Displays the name of the assembly connection. The assembly connection name is based on
the Name Rule selection. To type a new name for the assembly connection, in the Name
Rule box, select User Defined, and then type a name for the assembly connection in the
Name box.
Name Rule
Specify the naming rule to use to name this assembly connection.
 Default Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <assembly
connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <assembly connection> is the name of
the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location> is the global workshare
location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at 0001. For example,
GussetPlateAsmConn_1-1-0045.
 Unique Name Rule - Names the assembly connection using this format: <parent system
name>-<assembly connection>-<location>-<unique index> where <parent system
name> is the parent System selected for the assembly connection, <assembly
connection> is the name of the assembly connection defined in the catalog, <location> is
the global workshare location, and <unique index> is an index number that starts at 0001.
For example, Structure System-GussetPlateAsmConn_1-1-0045.
 User Defined - Select to specify the assembly connection name yourself in the Name
box.
System
Select the system to which the assembly connection that you are placing belongs. You can

Molded Forms User's Guide 962


Place Assembly Connection

create new systems in the Systems and Specifications task.

Base Plate Assembly Connection Properties


Depth Clearance
Specify the clearance between the flange of the member and
the edge of the base plate. This is dimension C in the figure.
Width Clearance
Specify the clearance between the flange of the member and
the edge of the base plate. This is dimension D in the figure.
Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.
Plate Category
Select the plate category.
Plate Type
Select the plate type.

Miter Assembly Connection Properties


Top Distance
Specifies the distance between the top flange of the member section and the top of the plate.
Bottom Distance
Specifies the distance between the bottom flange of the member section and the bottom of
the plate.
Left Distance
Specifies the distance between the left edge of the member section and the left edge of the
plate.
Right Distance
Specifies the distance between the right edge of the member section and the right edge of
the plate.
Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the
first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
With Plates
Specifies whether or not a plate is inserted between the member ends. Select False to not
place the plate. Select True to place the plate.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the member ends.

Molded Forms User's Guide 963


Place Assembly Connection

Sizing Rule
Select the sizing rule method for the base plate.

Slab by Member Boundary


Clearance
Type a clearance distance between the edge of the slab and the member.
Port Face Position
Select the location on the member at which the slab is to stop. You can select the outmost
plane, the centerline, or the in-most plane on the member.
Detailed Connection
Select True to trim the slab using the boundary member as the cutting edge. Select False to
not trim the slab.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected Port Face Position and the edge of the slab. A
negative value moves the edge into the body of the slab. A positive value moves the edge
out from the body of the slab.

Slab by Slab Assembly


Trim Type
Defines the type of trimming.
 By Whole Slab - Trim by the slab boundary geometry before trim.
 By Lateral Face - Trim by the slab boundary geometry after trim.
 By Extended Lateral Face - Trim by the extension of the lateral face of the slab
boundary.
Trim Excess Material
Specify whether to trim the exceeding part.
Trim Excess Material Offset
Specify the offset applied on the lateral face used to trim.

Slab Free Edge Assembly


Reference Direction
Select the reference direction for the angle:
Normal
The angle is measured from a vector perpendicular to the slab edge.
 Horizontal - The angle is measured from the global XY plane in the model.
 Vertical - The angle is measured from the Z-Axis in the model.
Angle
Type a slope for the slab edge represented by the assembly connection. If the slab was place
using the Face Position Top, the side face rotates about the top slab edge. If the slab was

Molded Forms User's Guide 964


Place Assembly Connection

placed using the Face Position Bottom, the side face rotates about the bottom slab edge.
Offset
Specify the distance between the selected boundary object and the edge of the slab.

Splice Assembly Connection Properties


Symmetry
Controls how to cut back the member ends when the clearance value is not zero. Select
Center to specify that both members are cut back equally. Select Right to specify that the
first member that you selected be cut back. Select Left to specify that the second member
that you selected be cut back.
Clearance
Specifies the distance between the ends of the members.
Splice With
Select the plates that you want to use in the splice.
Web Plate Position
Select a web plate position.
Distance from flange gage line
Specifies the distance from the flange gage line.
Distance from web gage line
Specifies the distance from the web gage line.
Flange Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Length
Specifies the length of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Width
Specifies the width of the flange plates.
Flange Plate Category
Select the plate category for the flange plates.
Flange Plate Type
Select the plate type for the flange plates.
Web Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the web plates
Web Plate Length
Specifies the length of the web plates.
Web Plate Width
Specifies the width of the web plates.
Web Plate Category

Molded Forms User's Guide 965


Place Assembly Connection

Select the plate category for the web plates.


Web Plate Type
Select the plate type for the web plates.

General Surface Assembly Connection Properties


With Pad
Select True to place a steel pad between the member end and the surface. Select False to
have the member end connect directly to the surface.
Pad Type
Select the shape of the pad.
Sizing Rule
Select whether you want to the software to automatically size the pad or if you want to size
the pad.
Offset
Type the distance between the end of the member and the face of the surface.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 962)

Definition Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)


The Definition tab displays the member assembly connection properties as they are defined in
the reference data. The property name appears on the left side of the grid and the corresponding
property value appears on the right side of the grid. If you selected more than one assembly
connection and then selected the properties command, only the common properties between the
selected assembly connections display.
The properties that display depend on what you defined in the reference data. Refer to the
Structure Reference Data Guide for more information on the properties.
See Also
Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 962)

Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the rule criteria used for the member assembly connection. Assembly connection rule
selections affect the selections available for other smart occurrence objects that are children of
the assembly connection.

 The software reevaluates the selection rules after any change occurs to the values, when you
select a new object, or when you open a different property page.
 You can resize the columns by sliding the divider in the heading row.
Class
Displays the name of the rule class.
Question

Molded Forms User's Guide 966


Place Assembly Connection

Displays questions asked by the rule.


Answer/Result
Defines the results of the rules and the answers to questions asked by the rules. The default
results and answers are determined by the rule class. Each row represents a result or
answer that is cumulatively defined by the preceding rows. The Answer/Result box is not
editable if Rule Based is selected.
Rule Based
Defines when a question is rule-driven. This option is selected by default for each question.
 Select to always use the default rule-based answer or result. For an existing object, if a
change in the model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the answer is changed to
the new default.
 Clear to manually select an answer or result. For an existing object, if a change in the
model requires a recalculation of the rule, then the manually-selected answer is not
changed to the new default. If the manually selected answer is not in the list of valid
answers, then the new default is used.
If multiple existing objects are selected and a row contains a mix of rule-based
and non-rule-based answers/results, then the Answer/Result box is blank, and the Rule
Based check is unavailable, as shown in the following example.

1. Click the Rule Based box to clear and remove the rule-based value for all objects.
2. Click the Rule Based box again to select and set all objects to rule based.

 The available questions, answers, and results vary depending upon the detailed parts
associated with the connection.
 The questions in each Selection tab represent the default rules delivered with the software.
Customized rules may have different questions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 967


SECTION 14

Place Member Generic Assembly


Connection
Places an assembly connection between a member part and a bounding part. This command
creates the assembly connection, applies the appropriate flange and web cuts, and creates the
appropriate physical connections. A typical example is the bounding of a member to the flange
and web faces of another member.

Member generic assembly connections are typically created automatically when a


member is placed with Place Linear Member Systems and connected to a detailed plate
system or edge reinforcement. You can use Place Member Generic Assembly Connection
in situations where the connection is not created automatically.
The member is bounded to ports at the faces or edges of the bounding part. The ports used can
be edited after creating the assembly connection. This command supports the following
situations:
 A member bounded by a plate edge port.
 A member bounded by a plate face port.
 A member bounded by a flange edge port.
 A member bounded by a web or flange face port.

 The selected bounding geometry must be on detailed parts.


 This command can generate physical connections to a single plate part.

Place Member Generic Assembly Connection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place an assembly connection between a built-up member
part and intersecting face ports.

Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection. For more information, see Assembly

Molded Forms User's Guide 968


Place Member Generic Assembly Connection

Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 962).

Supported Member
Select the built-up member for which to create the assembly connection.
Supporting (Bounding) Geometry
Select a bounding port that intersects the end of the supported member to bound. If
necessary, select additional bounding ports to which to create assembly and physical
connections. Only those bounding ports that intersect the selected bounded end of the
supported member are available for you to select.
Finish
Places the assembly connection.
Cancel
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selection. After you accept the supporting member and bounding
geometry, the Properties button becomes active, and the Assembly Connection list is
populated with the available connection types.
Assembly Connection
Select an assembly connection type from the list.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Assembly Connection list. Selecting this check box disables
Assembly Connection list.

Modify Member Generic Assembly Connection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to modify an existing assembly connection between a built-up
member part and intersecting face ports.

Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection. For more information, see Assembly
Connection Properties Dialog Box (on page 962).

Supported Member
Displays the built-up member for which to create the assembly connection. The supported
member cannot be modified.

Supporting (Bounding) Geometry


Select a bounding port that intersects the end of the supported member to bound. If
necessary, select additional bounding ports to which to create assembly and physical
connections. Only those bounding ports that intersect the selected bounded end of the
supported member are available for you to select.
Finish
Places the assembly connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 969


Place Member Generic Assembly Connection

Cancel
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selection. After you accept the supporting member and bounding
geometry, the Properties button becomes active, and the Assembly Connection list is
populated with the available connection types.
Assembly Connection
Select an assembly connection type from the list.
Rule Based
Enables or disables the Assembly Connection list. Selecting this check box disables the
Assembly Connection list.

What do you want to do?


 Place a member generic assembly connection (on page 970)
 Modify a smart occurrence object (on page 992)
 Delete a smart occurrence object (on page 992)
 Edit assembly connection ports (on page 971)

Place a member generic assembly connection


1. Click Place Member Generic Assembly Connection.
2. Select the member for which to create the assembly connection.
3. Select the bounding ports.

 The software creates physical connections between the supported member and the
bounding ports that you select.
 Only those ports that intersect the selected end of the supported member are available
for selection.
 If you select only the top flange of the bounding built up, the software may not be able to
completely trim the bounded member.
4. Click Accept .
The Rule Based check box must be clear to select the assembly connection type.
5. Select the assembly connection type from the Assembly Connection list.
6. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 970


Place Member Generic Assembly Connection

Edit assembly connection ports


1. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select a member with an assembly
connection that you want to modify.
The member and assembly connection highlight in magenta. The assembly connection ports
highlight in yellow.

2. Select the port that you want to change.


The Modify Member Generic Assembly Connection ribbon appears with Supporting
(Bounding) Geometry as the active option.
3. To remove an existing port, select it.
The port is no longer yellow.
4. To add a new port, select it.
The port highlights in yellow.
5. Click Accept .
6. If you want to change the assembly connection type select a new value from the Assembly
Connection list.
7. Click Finish.

 A list of members and plates connected to the selected member can be viewed on the
Relationship tab of the Assembly Connection Properties dialog box. Select a connected
object from the list to highlight it in the graphic view.
 Because you can modify the bounding geometry ports, but not the bounded member, the
Supported Member option is not available.

Molded Forms User's Guide 971


SECTION 15

Creating Reference Curves


The commands in the reference curves category allow you to create and modify 3D curves
defined on any planar, knuckled, or curved surface. You can classify curves as reference, grids,
marking, tangents, and knuckles.

 When you create or edit a reference curve, the dialog box title displays the plate system
name using the format Plate System: <name of the reference plane>.

 You can change the default colors of reference curves, seams, profile systems, and knuckle
curves to enhance visibility. For more information, see Modify Reference Curve Display
Colors (on page 986).

Reference Curve by Intersection - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate


system by defining the landing curve as the intersection of the selected plate system
and a grid plane. For more information, see Reference Curve by Intersection (on
page 973).

Reference Curve by Offset - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate system
by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another
seam, plate boundary, profile system, or grid plane). For more information, see
Reference Curve by Offset (on page 976).

Reference Curve by 2D Sketch - Creates a reference curve on the selected plate


system by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate
system. For more information, see Reference Curve by 2D Sketch (on page 980).

Reference Curve from External File - Creates and modifies knuckled reference
curves. For more information, see Reference Curve from External File (on page 984).

See Also
Knuckle Best Practices (on page 56)
Landing Curve Best Practices (on page 56)

Molded Forms User's Guide 972


Creating Reference Curves

Reference Curve by Intersection


The Reference Curve by Intersection command creates a reference curve on the selected
plate system by defining the landing curve as the intersection of the selected plate system and a
grid plane.
You can control the boundaries of the reference curve by selecting a plate system or reference
curve that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses the
landing curve ends as the reference curve boundaries. The reference curve must end at a plate
system boundary or at another reference curve on the same plate system. The reference curve
can cross an opening in the plate system.

Reference Curve by Intersection Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a reference curve by intersection in the model.

Reference Curve by Intersection Properties


Opens the Reference Curve by Intersection Properties dialog box, which you use to view
and modify the properties of the reference curve that you are about to place in the model. For
more information, see Reference Curve by Intersection Properties Dialog Box (on page 975).
Plate System
Specifies the plate systems. You can select multiple plate systems to place multiple
reference curves at the same time. The software uses the same boundaries for each
reference curve. After placement, the reference curves are unrelated to each other and can
be edited as individual entities.
Intersecting Objects
Specifies the objects that intersect the plate system for which you want to generate seams.
Boundaries
Defines the boundaries of the seam. You can define the boundaries by selecting objects in
the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the software
automatically resizes the seam to maintain the boundary relationship. See the Define
Boundary Controls section below.
Finish
Creates the seam using the defined parameters.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Type
Specifies the curve type. Select Reference, Grid, Mark, Tangent, or Knuckle.
Name
Defines the name of the reference curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 973


Creating Reference Curves

Define Boundary Controls


Available when you use the Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

What do you want to do?


 Place a reference curve by intersection (on page 974)
 Modify a reference curve (on page 975)
 Delete a reference curve (on page 975)

Place a reference curve by intersection


1. Click Reference Curve by Intersection on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system to receive the reference curve.
3. Click Intersecting Objects .
4. Select an intersecting grid plane or intersecting plate system where you want the reference
curve.
5. Click Boundaries .
6. Define the reference curve boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
7. Click Accept .
8. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
9. Click Finish to place the reference curve.

 If you do not select boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to
apply to the resulting reference curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 974


Creating Reference Curves

 A reference curve is always attached to a plate system.

Modify a reference curve


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select RefCurve on Surface & Knuckles in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the reference curve to modify.
4. Edit the reference curve as needed using the ribbon bar.

Delete a reference curve


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select RefCurve On Surface & Knuckles in the Locate Filter box.
3. Select the reference curve to delete.
4. Click Edit > Delete.

Reference Curve By Intersection Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the reference curve that you are placing or editing.
Main Tab (Reference Curve By Intersection Properties Dialog Box) (on page 975)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Reference Curve By Intersection Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the general properties of the reference curve.
Name
Specifies the name of the reference curve.
Rule
Select the naming rule used to name the reference curve. Select from the following:
 StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - This name is generated by using the name of the
Parent system as a prefix, followed by the interface name and a unique number,
generated by the system and appended to the name; for example,
Hull-IJRefCurveOnSurface101.
 StdReferenceCurveNamingRule - The name is generated according to the curve type:
 Grid Curve - Uses the names of the Coordinate System and Grid Plane as a prefix;
for example, Grid:CS_Main:F16-201.
 Mark Curve - Uses the prefix Mark; for example, Mark-110.
 Reference Curve - Uses the prefix Reference; for example, Reference-110.
 Tangent Curve - Uses the prefix Tangent; for example, Tangent-110.

Molded Forms User's Guide 975


Creating Reference Curves

 Knuckle Curve - Uses the prefix Knuckle; for example, Knuckle-110.


 User Defined - Any text can be assigned; for example, Hull1.
Type
Specifies the type of marking information to be placed on parts.
 Reference - Use for general purpose.
 Grid - (grid plane curve). A reference curve created using Intersection with Grid Plane
is automatically created as the curve type of grid. However, you could change the type.
Use to mark off sections of a hull.
 Mark - (marking curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings such as
"No Smoking."
 Tangent - (tangent curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings for
processing and unfolding (such as roll boundaries).
 Knuckle - (knuckle curve). Use to control how the plate system is handled in Molded
Forms regarding bending or splitting along the knuckle curve.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the landing curve definition.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system.

Reference Curve by Offset


The Reference Curve by Offset command creates a reference curve on the selected plate
system by defining the landing curve as being offset from an existing curve (such as another
seam, plate boundary, profile system, or grid plane).
You can control the boundaries of the seam by selecting the parent plate system, seam, or split
knuckle line that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses
the landing curve ends as the reference curve boundaries. Reference curves must end at a plate
system boundary or at another reference curve on the same plate system.
The reference curve can cross an opening in the plate system.

Reference Curve by Offset Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place an offset reference curve in the model.

Reference Curve by Offset Properties


Opens the Reference Curve by Offset Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the reference curve that you are about to place in the model. For
more information, see Reference Curve by Offset Properties Dialog Box (on page 979).
Plate System
Specifies the plate system in which you want to place a reference curve. You can select
multiple plate systems to place multiple reference curves at the same time. The software
uses the same information for each reference curve. After placement, the reference curves
are unrelated to each other and can be edited as individual entities.

Molded Forms User's Guide 976


Creating Reference Curves

Base Curve
Specifies an existing curve or grid plane from which to offset the reference curve. The
intersection of the grid plane and the plate system defines the base curve.
Offset
Defines the offset parameters and direction from the base curve. See the Offset Curve
Definition Controls section below.
Boundaries
Defines the boundaries of the reference curve. You can define the boundaries by selecting
objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the reference curve to maintain the boundary relationship.
See the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish
Places the reference curve using the defined parameters.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Type
Specifies the curve type. Select Reference, Grid, Mark, Tangent, or Knuckle.
Name
Defines the name of the reference curve.

Offset Curve Definition Controls


Unlimited
Defines offset curves without a stop limit.

Stop Limit
Defines offset curves with a stop limit. By using a stop limit, you can select an edge, profile
landing curve, connection reference curve, or reference curve to control the landing curves
being created. If you type an offset value and the Offset lock is locked, then landing
curves are applied at increments of the offset value until the selected stop limit is reached. If
the Offset lock is unlocked and a value has been defined for Count, then the landing
curves equal to the number entered in the Count box are equally spaced between the base
curve and the stop limit.
Offset Lock
Locks the Offset value, disabling updates of the offset value by mouse moves.
Offset
Specifies the offset distance between the base curve and the landing curve that you are
defining. If you type 0, the landing curve is place on the base curve. This box may also
display the offset distance as defined by mouse movements.

Molded Forms User's Guide 977


Creating Reference Curves

Method
Specifies an offset method. You can select transverse, longitudinal, vertical, or girth.
Count
Specifies how many reference curves are created, each equally spaced by increments of the
offset value.
Step
Defines an increment that the software uses as you dynamically move the mouse. If you
entered a value in the Offset box, then this control is not used.

Boundary Definition Controls


Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

What do you want to do?


 Place a reference curve by offset (on page 978)
 Modify a reference curve (on page 975)
 Delete a reference curve (on page 975)

Place a reference curve by offset


1. Click Reference Curve by Offset on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system.
3. Click Base Curve .
4. Select a base curve that the software is to use to compute the offset curve.
5. Click Offset .
6. Type an offset value in the Offset box.
7. Specify the offset method and count to use.
8. Select, with a mouse click in a graphic view, on which side of the base curve to apply the
offset.
A red arrow appears as you move the mouse indicating the direction of the offset.

Molded Forms User's Guide 978


Creating Reference Curves

9. Click Boundaries .
10. Define the seam boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
11. Click Accept .
12. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
13. Click Finish to place the seam.

 If you do not select boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to apply
to the resulting reference curves.
 A reference curve is always attached to a plate system.

Reference Curve By Offset Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the reference curve that you are placing or editing.
Main Tab (Reference Curve By Offset Properties Dialog Box) (on page 979)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Reference Curve By Offset Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the reference curve.
Name
Specifies the name of the reference curve.
Rule
Select the naming rule used to name the reference curve. Select from the following:
 StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - This name is generated by using the name of the
Parent system as a prefix, followed by the interface name and a unique number,
generated by the system and appended to the name; for example,
Hull-IJRefCurveOnSurface101.
 StdReferenceCurveNamingRule - The name is generated according to the curve type:
 Grid Curve - Uses the names of the Coordinate System and Grid Plane as a prefix;
for example, Grid:CS_Main:F16-201.
 Mark Curve - Uses the prefix Mark; for example, Mark-110.
 Reference Curve - Uses the prefix Reference; for example, Reference-110.
 Tangent Curve - Uses the prefix Tangent; for example, Tangent-110.
 Knuckle Curve - Uses the prefix Knuckle; for example, Knuckle-110.
 User Defined - Any text can be assigned; for example, Hull1.

Molded Forms User's Guide 979


Creating Reference Curves

Type
Specifies the type of marking information to be placed on parts.
 Reference - Use for general purpose.
 Grid - (grid plane curve). A reference curve created using Intersection with Grid Plane
is automatically created as the curve type of grid. However, you could change the type.
Use to mark off sections of a hull.
 Mark - (marking curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings such as
"No Smoking."
 Tangent - (tangent curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings for
processing and unfolding (such as roll boundaries).
 Knuckle - (knuckle curve). Use to control how the plate system is handled in Molded
Forms regarding bending or splitting along the knuckle curve.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the landing curve definition.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system.

Reference Curve by 2D Sketch


The Reference Curve by 2D Sketch command creates a reference curve on the selected
plate system by projecting a 2D landing curve that you have sketched onto the plate system.
You can control the boundaries of the reference curve by selecting a plate system, or reference
curve that intersects the landing curve. If you do not define boundaries, the software uses the
landing curve ends as the reference curve boundaries. Reference curves must end at a plate
system boundary or at another reference curve on the same plate system. The reference curve
can cross an opening in the plate system.

Reference Curve by 2D Sketch Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a reference curve in the model.

Reference Curve by 2D Sketch Properties


Opens the Reference Curve by 2D Sketch dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the reference curve that you are about to place in the model.
Plate System
Select the plate system for the reference curve. You can select multiple plate systems to
place multiple reference curves at the same time. The software uses the same information
for each reference curve. After placement, the reference curves are unrelated to each other
and can be edited as individual entities.

Sketch Curve
Select to draw the landing curve. See the Landing Curve Definition Controls section below.
Boundaries
Define the boundaries of the reference curve. You can define the boundaries by selecting

Molded Forms User's Guide 980


Creating Reference Curves

objects in the model. If you select objects in the model and those objects are moved, the
software automatically resizes the reference curve to maintain the boundary relationship.
See the Boundary Definition Controls section below.
Finish
Places the reference curve using the defined parameters.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Type
Specifies the curve type. Select Reference, Grid, Mark, Tangent, or Knuckle.
Name
Defines the name of the reference curve.

Landing Curve Definition Controls


Available when you use the Sketch Curve option.
Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve. See the
Define Plane Controls section below.

Add Intersecting Item


Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the Sketch 2D environment.

Add Projection Item


Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the Sketch 2D environment.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).

Molded Forms User's Guide 981


Creating Reference Curves

Boundary Definition Controls


Available when you use the Boundaries option.

Pick Boundaries
Select this option to select objects in the model or in the Workspace Explorer to define the
boundaries. This option is only available when you are defining the boundaries.

Solve Ambiguity
If the objects that you selected in the model for the boundary define an ambiguous solution,
then the software prompts you to select one bounded section to clarify the needed boundary.
This ambiguity only occurs if one of the boundaries wraps around both sides of the profile or
seam, such as the hull. Move the cursor over a bounded section, and then click to select.

Boundary List
Opens the Boundary List dialog box. This dialog box allows you to review and define the
boundaries. For more information, see Boundary List Dialog Box (on page 83).

What do you want to do?


 Place a reference curve by 2D sketch (on page 982)
 Modify a reference curve (on page 975)
 Delete a reference curve (on page 975)

Place a reference curve by 2D sketch


1. Click Reference Curve by 2D Sketch on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the plate system for the reference curve.

3. Click Sketch Curve .


4. Specify one plane for the reference curve sketch using one of the following methods:
Define a coincident plane (on page 76)
Define an offset plane (on page 77)
Define plane using angle from plane
Define a plane using a point and a normal vector (on page 78)
Define a plane using three points (on page 79)
Define plane by vectors normal

5. Click Add Intersecting Item .


6. Select objects in the model that intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects appear in the 2D environment.

7. Click Add Projection Item .


8. Select objects in the model that do not intersect the sketching plane that you want to use as
reference geometry. These extra objects are projected onto the sketching plane and appear
in the 2D environment.

9. Click Sketch 2D .

Molded Forms User's Guide 982


Creating Reference Curves

10. In the 2D environment, sketch the reference curve.


You can constrain the curve to geometric construction points offset from plate
systems. For more information, see Point at Minimum Distance Command in the
SmartSketch Drawing Editor Drawing Editor Help, available within the 2D environment.
11. Click Finish in the 2D environment.
12. Click Boundaries .
13. Define the reference curve boundaries using one or more of the following methods:
Pick boundaries (on page 81)
Define a boundary curve (on page 82)
14. Click Accept .
15. If the boundary definition results in two solutions, pick the needed solution using the following
procedure:
Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82)
16. Click Finish to place the reference curve.

 If you do not select boundaries, the software uses the entire length of the base curve to apply
to the resulting reference curves.
 A reference curve is always attached to a plate system.

Reference Curve By 2D Sketch Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the reference curve that you are placing or editing.
Main Tab (Reference Curve By 2D Sketch Properties Dialog Box) (on page 983)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Reference Curve By 2D Sketch Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the reference curve.
Name
Specifies the name of the reference curve.
Rule
Select the naming rule used to name the reference curve. Select from the following:
 StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - This name is generated by using the name of the
Parent system as a prefix, followed by the interface name and a unique number,
generated by the system and appended to the name; for example,
Hull-IJRefCurveOnSurface101.
 StdReferenceCurveNamingRule - The name is generated according to the curve type:
 Grid Curve - Uses the names of the Coordinate System and Grid Plane as a prefix;
for example, Grid:CS_Main:F16-201.
 Mark Curve - Uses the prefix Mark; for example, Mark-110.

Molded Forms User's Guide 983


Creating Reference Curves

 Reference Curve - Uses the prefix Reference; for example, Reference-110.


 Tangent Curve - Uses the prefix Tangent; for example, Tangent-110.
 Knuckle Curve - Uses the prefix Knuckle; for example, Knuckle-110.
 User Defined - Any text can be assigned; for example, Hull1.
Type
Specifies the type of marking information to be placed on parts.
 Reference - Use for general purpose.
 Grid - (grid plane curve). A reference curve created using Intersection with Grid Plane
is automatically created as the curve type of grid. However, you could change the type.
Use to mark off sections of a hull.
 Mark - (marking curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings such as
"No Smoking."
 Tangent - (tangent curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings for
processing and unfolding (such as roll boundaries).
 Knuckle - (knuckle curve). Use to control how the plate system is handled in Molded
Forms regarding bending or splitting along the knuckle curve.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the landing curve definition.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system.

Reference Curve from External File


Reference Curve from External File creates and modifies knuckle reference curves. These
curves require that the edges of the sheetbody faces carry an attribute that reflects that they are
knuckles and relates them to the appropriate reference curve.

Reference Curve from External File Ribbon


Reference Curve Properties
Opens the Reference Curve by Importing Properties dialog box, which you use to view
and modify the properties of the reference curve that you are about to place in the model. For
more information, see Reference Curve from External File Properties Dialog Box (on page
985).
Parent Plate System
Specifies the plate system onto which you want to place the reference curve.
Open external file
Specifies the SAT or IGS file containing the reference curve to place.
Finish
Places the reference curve using the defined parameters.

Molded Forms User's Guide 984


Creating Reference Curves

Point Tolerance
Specifies the distance that is used to determine whether the surface edges are aligned with
the reference curve.
Import Options

Modify existing Reference Curves


When selected, modifies existing curves during the import.

Delete missing Reference Curves


When selected, deletes missing curves during the import.

What do you want to do?


 Place a reference curve by importing from file (on page 985)
 Modify a reference curve (on page 975)
 Delete a reference curve (on page 975)

Place a reference curve by importing from file


1. Click Reference Curve from External File on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the parent plate system.
3. Type a value for Point Tolerance.
4. Click Open external file , and select the file to import.
5. Click Finish.

 If you do not select boundaries, the software applies the entire length of the base curve to the
resulting reference curves.
 A reference curve is always attached to a plate system.

Reference Curve from External File Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the reference curve that you are placing or editing.
Main Tab (Reference Curve from External File Properties Dialog Box) (on page 985)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)

Main Tab (Reference Curve from External File Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the general properties of the reference curve.
Name
Specifies the name of the reference curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 985


Creating Reference Curves

Rule
Select the naming rule used to name the reference curve. Select from the following:
 StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - This name is generated by using the name of the
Parent system as a prefix, followed by the interface name and a unique number,
generated by the system and appended to the name; for example,
Hull-IJRefCurveOnSurface101.
 StdReferenceCurveNamingRule - The name is generated according to the curve type:
 Grid Curve - Uses the names of the Coordinate System and Grid Plane as a prefix;
for example, Grid:CS_Main:F16-201.
 Mark Curve - Uses the prefix Mark; for example, Mark-110.
 Reference Curve - Uses the prefix Reference; for example, Reference-110.
 Tangent Curve - Uses the prefix Tangent; for example, Tangent-110.
 Knuckle Curve - Uses the prefix Knuckle; for example, Knuckle-110.
 User Defined - Any text can be assigned; for example, Hull1.
Type
Specifies the type of marking information to be placed on parts.
 Reference - Use for general purpose.
 Grid - (grid plane curve). A reference curve created using Intersection with Grid Plane
is automatically created as the curve type of grid. However, you could change the type.
Use to mark off sections of a hull.
 Mark - (marking curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings such as
"No Smoking."
 Tangent - (tangent curve). Use in the manufacturing process for special markings for
processing and unfolding (such as roll boundaries).
 Knuckle - (knuckle curve). Use to control how the plate system is handled in Molded
Forms regarding bending or splitting along the knuckle curve.
Landing Curve Definition Method
Displays the landing curve definition.
Parent System
Displays the name of the parent system.

Modify Reference Curve Display Colors


Use this procedure to create style rules to customize the display colors of landing curves. You
can use the procedure to set different colors for the landing curves of:
 Seams
 Profile Systems
 Reference Curves
 Plate Knuckle Curves

Molded Forms User's Guide 986


Creating Reference Curves

For example, before creating style rules, reference curves and design seams are white:

After creating separate style rules for reference curves and design seams, they appear in
different colors:

Use the following steps to customize curve display colors.

Select the View Aspect


1. Click Format >View.
The Format View dialog box opens.
2. In the Selected Aspects box, click Reference Geometry.
By default, Simple physical is also selected.
3. Click OK.

Create a Style Rule


1. Click Format > Surface Style Rules.
The Surface Style Rules dialog box opens.

Molded Forms User's Guide 987


Creating Reference Curves

2. Click New.
The Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box opens
3. Type a name for the new surface style rule in the Rule name box.
4. In the Filter list, click More to create a new filter.
The Select Filter dialog box opens.

5. Click New Filter .


The New Filter Properties dialog box opens.
If you are an administrator, you can first select Ship Filters. The new filter is then
available to all users.
6. On the Object Type tab, expand the hierarchy Ship Structure, and select one of the
following:
 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Reference Curve
 Ship Structure/ Reference Curves/Knuckle Curve
 Ship Structure/Seams/Plate Seam
 Ship Structure/Systems/Profile Systems/Stiffener System

7. Click OK.
8. Click OK in the Select Filter dialog box.
9. In the Surface Style Rule Properties dialog box, select a color in the Style applied box.
10. Click OK.
The new rule appears in the Style rule library list.

Add the Rule to the Workspace


1. Select the rule in the Style rule library list.
2. Click Add.
3. Click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 988


SECTION 16

Execute Detailing Command


The Execute Detailing command creates detail parts from the root part of a plate, profile, or
member system. The command requires you to select one or more blocks, assemblies, systems,
sub-systems, or root parts. You can select built-up members for detailing, but you cannot select
rolled members. You can select the objects from the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
Objects can be selected for detailing both before and after launching the Execute Detailing
command. Only valid items are added to the list and are highlighted in yellow, and invalid
commands are filtered out.
After you run the Execute Detailing command, the icon for the object changes in the
Workspace Explorer. For more information, see Icons in the Workspace Explorer (on page 32).
When parts are created in the Molded Forms task, those parts are trimmed to the molded
surfaces of the part's boundaries. Parts in this initial state are referred to as light parts. The
Execute Detailing command transforms the light parts to production definition and accuracy by
considering the thickness, orientation, and connection information of the bounding objects. Parts
in this advanced state are referred to as detailed parts. In addition to the thickness based
trimming, other objects, such as assembly and physical connections, slots, collars, end cuts, and
chamfers are automatically created. These additional objects are either incorporated in the detail
part, or become related to the detailed part, as appropriate.
The software trims a detail part based on its bounding objects. After a bounding object has been
detailed, the resulting detail part boundary is trimmed to the face of the bounding detail part,
which means the boundary is adjusted by the thickness of the bounding detail part. If the
bounding object has not been detailed (that is, the Execute Detailing command has not been
run for its root part), then the resulting detail part boundary is trimmed to the bounding parent
plate system surface. When you run Execute Detailing against the bounding root part, the
boundary of the bounded detail part is adjusted as required by the molded thickness direction
and the thickness of the bounding detail part.
As parts are detailed, additional detailing objects are created as smart occurrences by rules in
the reference data and can be individually modified after creation. Assembly and physical
connections are created for both parts associated with a connection. Free end cuts are created at
the ends of unbounded profiles or members. If you have run Execute Split in the Molded Forms
task, the software automatically creates slot and collar features where stiffeners penetrate plates,
end cuts on profiles, and chamfers at design seams where plate thickness change by a specified
amount. The default values of smart occurrence objects cannot be modified with the Execute
Detailing command, but can be modified after creation by selecting the object and modifying the
properties of the object.
If you select a detailed part and click Delete, the software removes the detailing from that part.
If you have run Execute Detailing for only one of the root parts, then the software does not
create the assembly and physical connections or any applicable features. For example, if you run
Execute Detailing for a root part that is penetrated by a stiffener that has not had Execute
Detailing run, then the assembly and physical connections for the penetration are not created,
and thus the slot and collar or clip features created by the assembly connection are also not
created. When you run Execute Detailing for the penetrating root part, the assembly connection
at the penetration is created. The software then creates the slot on the penetrated detail part.

Molded Forms User's Guide 989


Execute Detailing Command

The generated detail parts inherit their properties from the parent plate or profile system.
Straking seams can only be placed on detail parts. Therefore, you must run Execute
Detailing before you can place straking seams.

Execute Detailing Ribbon


Displays the controls used to generate detail parts.

Select objects for detailing


Select the objects from which to generate detail parts. You can select the objects in a graphic
view or in the Workspace Explorer.
Finish
Creates the detail parts using the parameters that you have defined.
Plate Systems and Parts Only
Excludes profiles from the parts that the software processes. If you select this option before
you select parts, the software prevents you from selecting profile objects. If you select this
option before you click Finish, the software excludes any profiles that are in your selected
objects from processing.
Reject
Clears all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Propagate changes
In addition to detailing the selected objects, other parts affected by the detailing are also
changed. If many parts are affected, propagation can significantly impact processing time.
Do not propagate changes
Only the selected objects are detailed. Other parts affected by the detailing are not changed,
keeping processing time to a minimum.

 You can select plate or profile parts by default in a graphic view, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can select planning blocks by default in a graphic view, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can select plate or profile systems and sub systems in the Workspace Explorer or
by using QuickPick in a graphic view. Execute Detailing details all child parts.
 You can select planning blocks and assemblies in the Workspace Explorer or by using
QuickPick in a graphic view. Execute Detailing details all assigned parts.
 Select the Plate Systems & Parts Only option to exclude profiles from the objects that
you can select.
 If you select root parts, then only the root parts selected are detailed. For example,
selecting a root plate part does not detail the root profile parts on the plate, even if Plate
Systems and Parts Only is turned off.

Molded Forms User's Guide 990


Execute Detailing Command

Smart Occurrence Ribbon


Displays the controls used to modify a smart occurrence object. The ribbon is available after the
smart occurrence object is created automatically by the Execute Detailing command.

Properties
Activates the Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify the properties of the
smart occurrence object that you are modifying. The initial properties default from the
Structural Detailing rules used by the Execute Detailing command.
Item
Displays the final result of User Answers on the Selection tab of the Properties dialog box.
Item does not display for some smart occurrence objects.

Modify Auxiliary Parts Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to add auxiliary parts to the selected assembly connection.

Properties
Activates the Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the assembly connection before the assembly connection is
committed to the database. For more information, see Assembly Connection Properties
Dialog Box (on page 962).
Assembly Connection Smart Item
Displays valid smart items for the selected assembly connection.

Add/Delete Auxiliary Parts


Select the parts that can be connected to the selected assembly connection and do not
already have an existing assembly connection. Parts that do not have common geometry
with the selected assembly connection cannot be selected.

Accept
Adds parts from selected parts to the assembly connection and saves the changes to the
database.

Reject
Removes any selected parts from the auxiliary parts list. Only selections made after the last
commit are removed.

What do you want to do?


 Assign part names at placement (on page 992)
 Create detailed parts from plate and profile systems (on page 992)
 Delete a smart occurrence object (on page 992)
 Modify a smart occurrence object (on page 992)
 Remove detailed parts from plate and profile systems (on page 993)
 Add auxiliary parts to an assembly connection (on page 960)

Molded Forms User's Guide 991


Execute Detailing Command

 Edit assembly connection parts (on page 961)

Assign part names at placement


Every task that creates new parts in the model must assign a part name to each new part.
In the Structural Detailing task, the part name is automatically generated using the default name
rule when you place the part. The name consists of the system parent, the category of the part,
and a sequencing number.
You can change the part name on the Main Tab for each part. When you override the
automatically generated name in the Name box on the Main tab, the text in the Rule box
changes to User Defined.

Create detailed parts from plate and profile systems


1. Click Execute Detailing .
2. Select the parts to detail.

 You can select plate or profile parts by default in a graphic view, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can select planning blocks by default in a graphic view, or from the Workspace
Explorer.
 You can select plate or profile systems and sub systems in the Workspace Explorer or
by using QuickPick in a graphic view. Execute Detailing details all child parts.
 You can select planning blocks and assemblies in the Workspace Explorer or by using
QuickPick in a graphic view. Execute Detailing details all assigned parts.
 Select the Plate Systems & Parts Only option to exclude profiles from the objects that
you can select.
 If you select root parts, then only the root parts selected are detailed. For example,
selecting a root plate part does not detail the root profile parts on the plate, even if Plate
Systems and Parts Only is turned off.
3. Click Finish.

Delete a smart occurrence object


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the object to delete.
3. Click Delete .

Modify a smart occurrence object


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.

Molded Forms User's Guide 992


Execute Detailing Command

2. Select one of the following in the Locate Filter box:


 Features to select slots, collars, web cuts, flange cuts, or chamfers
 Assembly Connections / Free End Cuts
 Physical Connections
3. Select the smart occurrence object to modify.
4. Click Properties .
5. Edit properties and parameters for the object as needed.

Remove detailed parts from plate and profile systems


1. Select one or more detailed parts.
Detailed parts have red icons in the Workspace Explorer. For more information,
see Icons in the Workspace Explorer (on page 32).
2. Click Delete .
The detailed part is deleted, and replaced by a light part.

Detailing Built Up Connections


The following cases provide examples of the results that you can expect when the software
details member to member connections involving built up (designed) members.
The following abbreviations are used in these descriptions:
 M# - Member System
 FC# - Frame Connection
 DM# - Designed Member
 P# - Plate System
 AC# Assembly Connection
 PC# Physical Connection
 P#' - Plate sub System
 PP# - Plate Part
 LC# Logical Connection
 LC#' - Sub Logical Connection

Molded Forms User's Guide 993


Execute Detailing Command

Topics
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ...................994
Tube End to Tube End - Co-Linear Axis ........................................998
Tube to Tube - Axis Along ..............................................................1000
Designed Member to Designed Member ........................................1002
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ...................1003
Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along ...................1004
Designed Member to Designed Member - I Seated .......................1005
Vertical Brace or Gap .....................................................................1006
Rolled I to Built Up I ........................................................................1006
Designed Member to Rolled I .........................................................1007
Designed Member to Plate .............................................................1008
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90° Center ............................................1009
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Center ...................1010
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite Connect Points ...............1011
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Opposite Connect Points 1012
Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular .............................................1013
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Overlapping Connect Points ..........1014
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Partial Penetration .1015
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Penetration ....................................1016
Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Penetration ............1017
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Rotation of Member .......................1018
Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Split Both........................................1019
Can - Horizontal Beam ...................................................................1020
Can - Vertical Column ....................................................................1020
Can - Continuous Leg .....................................................................1021
Can - Multiple Braces .....................................................................1021
Can - Diameter Change ..................................................................1022
Can - Single Axis Gap ....................................................................1023
Can - Multiple Braces .....................................................................1024
Can - Cone Transition ....................................................................1025
Can - Beam and Column End Point ...............................................1025
Can - Beam and Column Intersection ............................................1026

Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along


Member2 (DM2) to Member1 (DM1) Axis Along

Object Hierarchy Before Detailing


MS1
-DM1
-PS11
-PS11’
-PP11
-PS12
-PS12’
-PP12
-PS13
-PS13’
-PP13
-FC1

Molded Forms User's Guide 994


Execute Detailing Command

-FC2
MS2
- DM2
- PS21
- PS21’
- PP21
- LC 1 (PS21 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 1 (PS21’<-> MS1)
- PS22
- PS22’
- PP22
- LC 2 (PS22 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 2 (PS22’<-> MS1)
- PS23
- PS23’
- PP23
- LC 3 (PS23 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 3 (PS23’<-> MS1)
- FC3
- FC4

Object Hierarchy After Detailing


MS1
- …
MS2
- DM2
- PS21
- PS21’
- PP21

Molded Forms User's Guide 995


Execute Detailing Command

- LC 1
- LC’ 1
- AC1 (PP21 <-> PP11)
- PC1
- PS22
- PS22’
- PP22
- LC 2
- LC’ 2
- AC2 (PP22 <-> PP12)
- PC2
- PS23
- PS23’
- PP23
- LC 3
- LC’ 3
- AC3 (PP23 <-> PP13)
- PC3
- AC4 (PP23 <-> PP11)
- PC4
- AC5 (PP23 <-> PP12)
- PC5
- FC3
- FC4

Molded Forms User's Guide 996


Execute Detailing Command

Flange Thickness of Supported Member is Less Than Flange Thickness of Supporting


Member
Object hierarchy is not shown.

Flange Thickness of Supported Member is Greater than Flange Thickness of Supporting


Member

 Object hierarchy is not shown.


 The width of web PP23 remains constant in this case.

Molded Forms User's Guide 997


Execute Detailing Command

Differing Control Points


Object hierarchy is not shown.

Tube End to Tube End - Co-Linear Axis


Member1(DM1)[Tube] then continue to Member2 (DM2) [Tube] OD Different, ID Same

Object Hierarchy Before Detailing


MS1
- DM1
- PS1
- PS11’
- PP11
- PS12’
- PP12
- Seam1
- Seam2
-FC1
-FC2
MS2
- DM2
- PS2
- PS21’
- PP21
- PS22’
- PP22
- Seam1
- Seam2
- LC 1 (PS2 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 11 (PS21’ <-> MS1)
- LC’ 12 (PS22’ <-> MS1)
- FC3
- FC4

Molded Forms User's Guide 998


Execute Detailing Command

Object Hierarchy After Detailing


MS1
- DM1
- PS1
- PS11’
- PP11
- PS12’
- PP12
- Seam1
- Seam2
-FC1
-FC2
MS2
- DM2
- PS2
- PS21’
- PP21
- PS22’
- PP22
- Seam1
- Seam2
- LC 1 (PS2 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 11 (PS21’ <-> MS1)
- AC111 (PP21 <-> PP11)
- PC111
- AC112 (PP21 <-> PP12)
- PC112
- LC’ 12 (PS22’ <-> MS1)
- AC121 (PP22 <-> PP11)
- PC121
- AC122 (PP22 <-> PP12)
- PC122
- FC3

Molded Forms User's Guide 999


Execute Detailing Command

- FC4

Tube to Tube - Axis Along


Member1(DM1)[Tube] connected to Member2 (DM2) [Tube/Cone] Axis Along Member2 into
the side of Member1
Closed surfaces, such as cones and tubes, must have at least two longitudinal design
splits for the software to detail them.

Object Hierarchy Before Detailing


MS1
- DM1
- PS1
- PS11’
- PP11
- PS12’
- PP12
- Seam1
- Seam2
-FC1
-FC2
MS2
- DM2
- PS2
- PS21’
- PP21
- PS22’
- PP22
- LC 1 (PS2 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 11 (PS21’<-> MS1)
- LC’ 12 (PS22’<-> MS1)
- FC3
- FC4

Molded Forms User's Guide 1000


Execute Detailing Command

Object Hierarchy After Detailing


MS1
- DM1
- PS1
- PS11’
- PP11
- PS12’
- PP12
- Seam1
- Seam2
-FC1
-FC2
MS2
- DM2
- PS2
- PS21’
- PP21
- PS22’
- PP22
- LC 1 (PS2 <-> MS1)
- LC’ 11 (PS21’<-> MS1)
- AC1
- PC1
- LC’ 12 (PS22’<-> MS1)
- AC2
- PC2
- FC3

Molded Forms User's Guide 1001


Execute Detailing Command

- FC4

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Designed Member to Designed Member


Member2(DM2) to Member1 (DM1) Axis Along (Flush on top flange, DM2 smaller depth and
smaller flange thickness)
The frame connection is the same as in .Designed Member to Designed Member -
Axis Along (on page 994)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1002


Execute Detailing Command

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along


Member (DM2) to Member (DM1) Axis Along (M2 offset above M1)
The frame connection is the same as Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis
Along (on page 994).

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1003


Execute Detailing Command

Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis Along


Member(DM2) to Member (DM1) Axis Along (Flush on top flange, M2 flange thickness > M1
flange thickness)
The frame connection is the same as Designed Member to Designed Member - Axis
Along (on page 994).

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1004


Execute Detailing Command

Designed Member to Designed Member - I Seated


Member2 (DM2) to Member1 (DM1) Axis Along (“I-Seated”)

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1005


Execute Detailing Command

Vertical Brace or Gap


Vertical Brace or Gap 1 or Gap2
For Gap2, FC4 and FC6 are Gap2.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Rolled I to Built Up I
Member 1(Rolled-I) then continue to Member 2 (DM2) [BuiltUp-I]

Molded Forms User's Guide 1006


Execute Detailing Command

Member 1(DM2) [BuiltUp-I] then continue to Member 2 (Rolled-I)

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Designed Member to Rolled I


Member2 (DM2) to Member1 (Rolled - I) Axis Along

Molded Forms User's Guide 1007


Execute Detailing Command

Member2(Rolled-I) to Member1 (DM1) Axis Along

Designed Member to Plate


Member2 (DM2) to Plate (P1) {Surface Connection}

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1008


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90° Center


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. Both members were
defined using cardinal point 5.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1009


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Center


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM 3. Both members
were defined using cardinal point 5.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1010


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite Connect Points


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. DM1 and DM2 use
cardinal point 2. DM3 uses cardinal point 8.

 This configuration is modeled with DM1 and DM2 using cardinal point 2 and DM3 using
cardinal point 8. There is not a frame connection between the crossing members before the
split. The member axes must intersect for the software to create the split. If there is a gap
between the two crossing systems, the software cannot create the logical connections.
Structural Detailing requires a connection to detail this case. The lapped property on the
structural framing connection is sufficient for this.
 The orientation of the split is determined by the plane through the intersection point of the two
member axes. This plane is normal to the split member axis.
 Structural Detailing does not create a connection between DM1 and DM2.
 If you place manual logical connections between the plate systems for DM1 and DM2, then
assembly connections and physical connections are created as children of the manual logical
connections.
See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1011


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Opposite


Connect Points
DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. DM1 and DM2 use
cardinal point 2. DM3 uses cardinal point 8.

 The orientation of the split is not modified by detailing. The trim of the lower flanges for DM1
and DM2 are normal to the direction of the member.
 If manual logical connections are placed between plate systems for DM1 and DM2, then
assembly connections and physical connections are created as children of the manual logical
connections.
See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1012


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular


DM2, DM2, and DM3 were created by splitting the original design member by GL1 and GL2.

 Assembly connections and physical connections are created as children of the logical
connections.
 The software checks to ensure than duplicate assembly connections and physical
connections are not created. If duplicate logical connections exist, the assembly connections,
physical connections, and chamfers are created as children of the first logical connection
processed.
See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1013


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Overlapping Connect Points


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3.

The following figure indicates the trim lines after detailing:

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1014


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Partial


Penetration
DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3.

The following figure indicates the trim lines after detailing:

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1015


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Penetration


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3.

The following figure indicates the trim lines after detailing:

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1016


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - Non Perpendicular Penetration


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. Both members are
defined using cardinal point 5.

The following figure indicates the trim lines after detailing:

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1017


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Rotation of Member


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3. Both members are
defined using cardinal point 5.

The following figure indicates the trim lines after detailing:

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1018


Execute Detailing Command

Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Split Both


DM1 and DM2 were created by splitting the original design member by DM3 and DM4. DM3 and
DM4 were created by splitting the original design member by DM1 and DM2.

 Structural Detailing creates only the split frame connections. This is an ambiguous case that
you need to modify later in the design cycle with additional objects such as column or side
plates, so logical connections are not created.
 All assembly and physical connections are placed on the To Do List because there is no
physical contact after trimming.
The following figure indicates the trim lines after detailing:

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1019


Execute Detailing Command

Can - Horizontal Beam


The beam is horizontal and continuous before the can is placed.

 The beam can be a built-up member.


 The beam can be a standard member.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Can - Vertical Column

 The column is continuous before the can is placed.


 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1020


Execute Detailing Command

Can - Continuous Leg

 The leg is continuous.


 The column is doubly sloping (sloping X-Z and Y-Z plane).
 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 The software does not support an incoming continuous leg. The leg must be bound to the
column that has the can inserted.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Can - Multiple Braces

 The column is doubly sloping (sloping X-Z and Y-Z plane).


 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 The beam is a built-up member.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1021


Execute Detailing Command

 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Can - Diameter Change

 The column is doubly sloping (sloping X-Z and Y-Z plane).


 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 The can is placed with an outer diameter that is larger than either leg.
 The beam is a built-up member.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1022


Execute Detailing Command

Can - Single Axis Gap

 The column is doubly sloping (sloping X-Z and Y-Z plane).


 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 Rule-based gaps are applied (AxisGap - Single) to the vertical braces shown in orange
before the can is placed.
 The vertical braces and beams are all coplanar.
 The beam is a built-up member.
 The can is placed with an outer diameter larger than either leg.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

Two Vertical Braces with Gap Applied


The vertical braces are coplanar. They are smaller than the can and are built-up tubes.

Stub End Cans Added to Vertical Braces

Molded Forms User's Guide 1023


Execute Detailing Command

Bottom Leg Matches the Outer Diameter of the Can

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Can - Multiple Braces

 The beam is continuous before the can is placed. Only the columns (shown in red) exist on
either side.
 An oversized can is applied to the beam (shown in yellow).
 Braces are added to the can with rule based gaps (AxisGap - Single).
 The vertical braces, columns, and beams are all coplanar.
 The cone is set to have a matching ID with the can.
 Members are built-up members.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1024


Execute Detailing Command

Can - Cone Transition

 The bottom leg and top leg are of different sizes.


 The can matches the outer diameter of the bottom leg.
 The cone matches the outer diameter of the top leg.
 The column is continuous before the can is placed.
 The beam is a built-up member
 The can is inserted first, then the leg sizes are changed.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Can - Beam and Column End Point

 The beam and the column share the same end point.
 The can has a larger outer diameter than the outer diameter of the leg.
 The beam is a built-up member.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1025


Execute Detailing Command

 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Can - Beam and Column Intersection

 The can matches the outer diameter and ID of the column.


 The beam is horizontal and split before the can is placed.
 For more information on the chamfer properties, see Chamfer Properties Dialog Box.
 Inserting cans may result in two root logical connections with duplicate geometry. However,
Assembly Connections and Physical Connections are only created for one of the Logical
Connections.

See Also
Detailing Built Up Connections (on page 993)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1026


SECTION 17

Geometric Constructions
Geometric constructions are geometry, such as points, curves, and surfaces, created directly in
the 3D graphic view. The software used the geometry to create objects in the model, such as
plates, seams, knuckles, and physical connections. The geometry is typically used in a
progressive manner, such as:
 Create points
 Create curves using the points
 Create a surface using the curves
 Create a plate system using the surface
The Geometric Construction Palette displays when you click the option on the ribbon of a
supported command. Each tab of the dialog box graphically displays macros in the catalog
database.

Geometric Construction Palette


Each command using the option displays the palette with dialog box tabs
and geometric construction icons appropriate to the command.
Filters
Limits the available macros on a tab to the selected type.
Clear Recent
Removes recently selected macros from the Recent tab.
Help
Displays help for the selected macro in a preview window. If no help is available, a preview of
the selected macro displays.
You can also select Tools > Automatic Preview to display the preview window.
The Geometric Construction Palette typically contains the following tabs:
 Points - Displays interfaces for creating points.
 Curves - Displays interfaces for creating lines and curves. Some related point interfaces also
appear.
 Surfaces - Displays interfaces for creating planes and surfaces. Some related curve and
point interfaces also appear.
 Coordinate Systems - Displays interfaces for creating coordinate systems.
 Recent - Displays geometric construction interfaces recently selected on the other tabs. Click
Clear Recent to remove interfaces from this tab.
The following geometric construction types are available. These interfaces appear in different
combinations on the Geometric Construction Palette tabs.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1027


Geometric Constructions

Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)


Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
Surfaces (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1115)
Coordinate Systems (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1168)
Solids (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1176)
After you select an interface, the ribbon for that interface displays.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.
The Geometric Construction Explorer dialog box also displays when is clicked. As
geometry is created, a hierarchical list of applicable surfaces, curves, and points display.

Geometric Construction Explorer (on page 1214)

Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)


The following geometric construction interfaces create points.
Each command supporting the option displays tabs and interfaces appropriate to
the command.

Points Along Curve - Creates evenly-spaced points along a curve. For more
information, see Points Along Curve (on page 1047).

Point from Coordinate System - Creates a point at the X, Y, and Z coordinates of


the selected coordinate system. For more information, see Point from Coordinate
System (on page 1039).

Point Along Curve on Surface - Creates a point along a curve on a surface


relative to the selected coordinate system. For more information, see Point Along
Curve on Surface (on page 1029).

Vertices from Curve or Surface - Creates points at the vertices of a curve or


surface. For more information, see Vertices From Curve or Surface (on page
1057).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1028


Geometric Constructions

Point Along Curve on Surface

Tooltip: PointAlongCurveOnSurface
Creates a point along a curve on a surface relative to the selected coordinate system.

Required Input Output


1 - Coordinate system Point along the curve
2 -Surface
3 - Reference plane intersecting the
surface
6 - Supporting plane intersecting the
surface
Optional Input
Points or curves to define reference plane 3
Parameters
Offset method and value
Distance method and value

Molded Forms User's Guide 1029


Geometric Constructions

Point Along Curve on Surface Ribbon (for geometric constructions)


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the coordinate system. The coordinate system is used when there is an ambiguous
solution.
2
Specifies the surface. By default, this is the surface of the plate selected for the main
command.
3
Specifies a reference plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the reference curve from which the new point
is offset as defined by Offset and Offset Direction.

Specifies a point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if a point or curve is selected for 3.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1030


Geometric Constructions

Specifies a third point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if points are selected for 3 and .
6
Specifies a supporting plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the supporting curve along which the new
point is located as defined by Distance and Distance Method.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept

Molded Forms User's Guide 1031


Geometric Constructions

Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Offset
Defines the offset distance of the point along the reference curve.
Offset Direction
Defines the offset direction (with respect to the selected coordinate system 1) along the
reference curve. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available when Offset is set to
a value other than 0.

Inter Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the supporting plane intersects a complex surface in multiple
locations. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. The following example shows the ambiguity options
in the bow of a hull.

Distance
Defines the distance of the point from the reference curve along the supporting curve.
Distance Method
Defines how the point is measured along the supporting curve. Select Girth (on page 1457),
Along x, Along y, or Along z.
Point Ambiguity

Molded Forms User's Guide 1032


Geometric Constructions

Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Girth is
selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available for
Girth.

Distance Direction
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Along x,
Along y, or Along z is selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This
option is available for Along x, Along y, or Along z.
Side Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the reference plane intersects a complex surface in more than
one location, such as on the port and starboard sides of a hull. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z.

For options that have coordinate axis values, select a value that is
compatible with the orientation of the curve. For example, if a non-linear reference curve is in
the x-y plane, valid options for Offset Direction are +x, -x, +y, and -y.

Point Along Curve on Surface Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming

Molded Forms User's Guide 1033


Geometric Constructions

Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the coordinate system. The coordinate system is used when there is an ambiguous
solution.
2
Specifies the surface. By default, this is the surface of the plate selected for the main
command.
3
Specifies a reference plane intersecting the surface, or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the reference curve from which the new point
is offset as defined by Offset and Offset Direction.

Specifies a point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if a point or curve is selected for 3.

Specifies a third point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if points are selected for 3 and .
6
Specifies a supporting plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the supporting curve along which the new
point is located as defined by Distance and Distance Method.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1034


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1035


Geometric Constructions

Reject
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
Offset
Defines the offset distance of the point along the reference curve.
Offset Direction
Defines the offset direction (with respect to the selected coordinate system 1) along the
reference curve. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available when Offset is not set
to 0.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1036


Geometric Constructions

Inter Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the supporting plane intersects a complex surface in multiple
locations. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. The following example shows the ambiguity options
in the bow of a hull.

Distance
Defines the distance of the point from the reference curve along the supporting curve.
Distance Method
Defines how the point is measured along the supporting curve. Select Girth (on page 1457),
Along x, Along y, or Along z.
Point Ambiguity
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Girth is
selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available for
Girth.

Distance Direction
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Along x,
Along y, or Along z is selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This
option is available for Along x, Along y, or Along z.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1037


Geometric Constructions

Side Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the reference plane intersects a complex surface in more than
one location, such as on the port and starboard sides of a hull. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z.

For options that have coordinate axis values, select a value that is
compatible with the orientation of the curve. For example, if a non-linear reference curve is in
the x-y plane, valid options for Offset Direction are +x, -x, +y, and -y.

What do you want to do?


 Place a point on a surface and along a curve (on page 1038)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)
 Place a topological point on a surface and along a curve (on page 1333) (in the Molded
Forms task)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334) (in the Molded Forms task)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms
task)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms task)

Place a point on a surface and along a curve


1. Click PointAlongCurveOnSurface on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a coordinate system.
3. Select a surface, such as a plate system or reference plane.
If a surface was selected for the main command, then this is the default value and
2 has a yellow background. If you want to use this surface, skip this step and click 3.
4. Select a plane intersecting the surface. The Offset direction is along the reference curve
created by this intersection.
5. Select another plane intersecting the surface and the reference curve. The Distance
direction is along the supporting curve created at the intersection with the surface.
6. Select a value for Distance Method.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1038


Geometric Constructions

7. Type the needed values for Offset and Distance.


A preview point in green appears at the intersection of the surface, reference curve, and
supporting curve. If more than one point appears, then more than one solution is possible.
8. If multiple points appear, perform one of the following steps to resolve the ambiguity:
 If the surface is complex (a plane intersects it more than once), then select a coordinate
axis direction for Inter Ambiguity.
 If Girth is selected for Distance Method, then select a coordinate axis direction for
Point Ambiguity.
 If two solutions are possible on opposing sides of the reference curve, then select a
coordinate axis direction for Side Ambiguity.
For each ambiguity, select a value that is compatible with the orientation of the
points.
A single green preview point is now visible.
9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as [Not Named] in the Geometric
Construction Explorer.

10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Point from Coordinate System

Molded Forms User's Guide 1039


Geometric Constructions

Tooltip: PointFromCS
Creates a point at the defined X, Y, and Z distances from the origin of the selected coordinate
system or from a selected point.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Point
Optional Input
Reference point
Parameters
X, Y, and Z distances

Point from Coordinate System Ribbon (for geometric constructions)


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1

Molded Forms User's Guide 1040


Geometric Constructions

Specifies the coordinate system.

Specifies a reference point from which X, Y, and Z distances are measured. If no reference
point is selected, the X, Y, and Z distances are measured from the origin of the coordinate
system. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue

Molded Forms User's Guide 1041


Geometric Constructions

Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
X
Specifies the distance along the X-axis from the origin or reference point.
Y
Specifies the distance along the Y-axis from the origin or reference point.
Z
Specifies the distance along the Z-axis from the origin or reference point.

Point from Coordinate System Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select a different,
recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming
Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the coordinate system.

Specifies a reference point from which X, Y, and Z distances are measured. If no reference
point is selected, the X, Y, and Z distances are measured from the origin of the coordinate
system. This value is optional.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1042


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1043


Geometric Constructions

Reject
Clears the current selections.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
X
Specifies the distance along the X-axis from the origin or reference point.
Y
Specifies the distance along the Y-axis from the origin or reference point.
Z
Specifies the distance along the Z-axis from the origin or reference point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a point by distances from a coordinate system origin (on page 1045)
 Place a point by distances from a reference point (on page 1045)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)
 Place a topological point by distances from a coordinate system origin (on page 1364) (in the
Molded Forms task)
 Place a topological point by distances from a reference point (on page 1364) (in the Molded
Forms task)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334) (in the Molded Forms task)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms
task)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms task)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1044


Geometric Constructions

Place a point by distances from a coordinate system origin


1. Click PointFromCS on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a coordinate system.
3. Type values for X, Y. and Z.
A green preview point appears. It is offset from the coordinate system origin by the X, Y. and
Z values.
4. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Geometric Construction
Explorer.

5. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


6. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Place a point by distances from a reference point


1. Create the point to use as a reference point. The point can be created with Insert > Control
Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click PointFromCS on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Click , and select the reference point.
5. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
A green preview point appears. It is offset from the reference point by the X, Y, and Z values

Molded Forms User's Guide 1045


Geometric Constructions

and along the X, Y, and Z axes of the coordinate system.


6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Geometric Construction
Explorer.

7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1046


Geometric Constructions

Points Along Curve

Tooltip: PointsAlongCurve
Creates an evenly-spaced pattern of points along a curve. Points are placed by defining the
spacing between points or the total number of points.

Required Input Output


1 - Curve, line, or edge Points
Optional Input
(2) - Start point
(3) - End point
Parameters
Point spacing or point count

Points Along Curve Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1047


Geometric Constructions

Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the curve on which the points are placed.

Specifies the starting point for the point pattern. This value is optional.

Specifies the ending point for the point pattern. This value is optional.

Specifies a tracking point used to control the direction of point placement an ambiguity exists.
A tracking point is only needed with some curves, such as:
 A circle defined by two points and a mid-point in which there are two arcs between the
start and end points.
 A curve on multiple sides of a non-planar surface, such as a seam or reference curve
wrapping around a hull.
This value is optional.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with
Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1048


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Direction
Specifies the direction of point creation. Select one of the following:
 Normal - Points are created from the start point to the end point.
 Reversed - Points are created from the end point to the start point.
Method
Specifies the way points are placed. Select one of the following:
 By Spacing - Points are placed at the distance specified in the Spacing box.
 As Divisors - Points are placed by the value in the Count box. The points are spaced
equally along the distance between the start and end points.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1049


Geometric Constructions

Spacing
Specifies the distance between each point. This option is only available when By Spacing is
selected in the Method box.
Count
Specifies the number of points to place. This option is only available when As Divisors is
selected in the Method box.
Debug
When set to On, displays a sphere around each point to improve visibility. The size of the
sphere is set by the value of Radius.

 Sphere preview:

 Sphere after point is created:


Radius
Specifies the sphere radius for Debug.

What do you want to do?


 Place points along a curve by spacing with start and end points (on page 1050)
 Place points along a curve by spacing without start and end points (on page 1052)
 Place points along a curve by count with start and end points (on page 1053)
 Place points along a curve by count without start and end points (on page 1054)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place points along a curve by spacing with start and end points
1. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a plate edge, or a geometric construction
curve.
2. Create the points needed as start and end points on the curve using Insert > Control Point,
Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
3. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the same curve.
5. Click , and select a start point for the point pattern.
6. Click , and select an end point for the point pattern.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1050


Geometric Constructions

7. In the Method box, select By Spacing.


8. In the Direction box, select Normal.
9. In the Spacing box, type a value for the distance between points.
A preview of the points appears. Spacing starts from the selected start point on the curve and
continues until the remaining curve length to the selected end point is less than the spacing
value.

1 - Start point
2 - End point

10. If the point spacing does not start from the needed end of the curve, select Reversed in the
Direction box.
Points start from the opposite end in the preview.

11. Click Continue.


Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.

12. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


13. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1051


Geometric Constructions

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Place points along a curve by spacing without start and end


points
1. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a plate edge, or a geometric construction
curve.
3. In the Method box, select By Spacing.
4. In the Direction box, select Normal.
5. In the Spacing box, type a value for the distance between points.
A preview of the points appears. Spacing starts from the system-defined start point of the
selected curve and continues until the remaining curve length is less than the spacing value.

6. If the point spacing does not start from the needed end of the curve, select Reversed in the
Direction box.
Points start from the opposite end in the preview.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1052


Geometric Constructions

7. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.

8. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


9. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Place points along a curve by count with start and end points
1. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a plate edge, or a geometric construction
curve.
2. Create the points needed as start and end points on the curve. These can be points created
with Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction
point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
3. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the same curve.
5. Click , and select a start point for the point pattern.
6. Click , and select an end point for the point pattern.
7. In the Method box, select As Divisors.
8. In the Count box, type the number of points to place.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1053


Geometric Constructions

A preview of the points appears. The points are evenly spaced between the selected start
and end points.

1 - Start point
2 - End point

9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.

10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Place points along a curve by count without start and end points
1. Click PointsAlongCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a plate edge, or a geometric construction
curve.
3. In the Method box, select As Divisors.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1054


Geometric Constructions

4. In the Count box, type the number of points to place.


A preview of the points appears. The points are evenly spaced between the system-defined
start and end points of the curve.

5. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointsAlongCurve > [Not
Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.

6. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


7. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Modify a geometric construction


Use this procedure to modify a geometric construction that is displayed after clicking Continue
on a geometric construction ribbon but before clicking Close on the geometric construction
ribbon.

1. On the geometric construction ribbon, click Select .

Molded Forms User's Guide 1055


Geometric Constructions

Do not click Select on the vertical toolbar. This removes you from your
current command and deletes all temporary geometric constructions.
2. In a graphic view or the Geometric Construction Explorer, select the geometric
construction to modify.
The geometric construction highlights in the graphic view, the ribbon for the geometric
construction appears, and inputs highlight in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Make the required changes.
4. Click Accept .
A preview of the changed geometric construction appears.
5. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view.
6. If required, create or modify additional geometric constructions.

Change a geometric construction to a different definition


Use this procedure when the geometric construction is displayed after clicking Continue on a
geometric construction ribbon but before clicking Close on the geometric construction ribbon.

1. On the geometric construction ribbon, click Select .

Do not click Select on the vertical toolbar. This removes you from your
current command and deletes all temporary geometric constructions.
2. In a graphic view or the Geometric Construction Explorer, select the geometric
construction to modify.
The geometric construction highlights in the graphic view, the ribbon for the geometric
construction appears, and the inputs highlight in the Workspace Explorer.
3. In the Macro Definition box, click More.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears showing the appropriate geometric
constructions. For example, if the original geometric construction is a point, then only points
appear.
4. Select the needed geometric construction, and then click OK.
The new selection appears in the Macro Definition box with a yellow background. Options
with blue backgrounds contain new values suggested by the software. Options with white
backgrounds retain the values from the previous geometric construction.
5. Make the required changes to options on the ribbon.
Changed options appear with a yellow background.
6. Click Accept .
A preview of the changed geometric construction displays.
7. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view.
8. If required, create or modify additional geometric constructions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1056


Geometric Constructions

Delete a geometric construction


Use this procedure to delete a geometric construction that is displayed after clicking Continue on
a geometric construction ribbon but before clicking Close on the geometric construction ribbon
and then Finish on the main command ribbon.

1. On the geometric construction ribbon, click Select .

Do not click Select on the vertical toolbar. This removes you from your
current command and deletes all temporary geometric constructions.
2. In a graphic view or the Geometric Construction Explorer, select the geometric
construction to delete.
The geometric construction highlights in the graphic view, the ribbon for the geometric
construction appears, and inputs highlight in the Workspace Explorer.
3. On the geometric construction ribbon, click Delete .
The geometric construction is deleted.

4. If required, click Select and delete additional geometric constructions.

5. If required, click Add to create or modify additional geometric constructions.

Vertices from Curve or Surface

Tooltip: VerticesFromCurveOrSurf
Creates points at the vertices of a curve or surface, including profile and seam landing curves
and plate systems. A point is created at each end point, corner point, each change in tangency of
1° or more on a curve, and at each location where a curve crosses a surface patch boundary.

Required Input Output


Plate part or profile part Points

Vertices from Curve or Surface Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1057


Geometric Constructions

Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies a surface or curve.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1058


Geometric Constructions

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place points on vertices (on page 1060)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1059


Geometric Constructions

Place points on vertices


1. Click VerticesFromCurveOrSurf on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a plate part or profile part.
Green preview points at all vertices are visible.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as VerticesFromCurveOrSurf >
[Not Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer. In the example below, a point is
place at each corner and at the surface patch boundary of a bounding plate.

4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1060


Geometric Constructions

Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)


The following geometric construction interfaces create lines and curves.
Each command supporting the option displays tabs and interfaces appropriate to
the command.

Curve by Points on Surface - Creates a curve by interpolation through a set of


points. Some points can be designated as knuckles so that the curve has
discontinuous tangency. For more information, see Curve by Points on Surface
(on page 1076).

Curve by Two Points on Surface - Creates a curve between two points projected
onto a surface. The curve can be created with or without extensions at each end.
For more information, see Curve by Two Points on Surface (on page 1081).

Fillet by Curve - Creates a blended fillet of a specified radius between two curves
that are end-connected and projected onto a surface. For more information, see
Fillet by Curve (on page 1090).

Curve by Curves - Creates a single curve from two or more end-to-end curves.
For more information, see Curve by Curves (on page 1070).

Curve by Intersection - Creates a curve along the intersection of two surfaces.


For more information, see Curve by Intersection (on page 1073).

Curve at Offset by Intersection - Creates a curve offset from the intersection of a


surface or plane with a surface. For more information, see Curve at Offset by
Intersection (on page 1066).

Line from Coordinate System - Creates a line along a coordinate system axis.
For more information, see Line from Coordinate System (on page 1100).

Line by Points - Creates a line between two points. For more information, see
Line by Points (on page 1098).

Parallel Line - Creates a line parallel to another line. For more information, see
Parallel Line (on page 1107).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1061


Geometric Constructions

Line by Point, Angle, and Length - Creates a line at a defined angle and length
on a coordinate system plane. For more information, see Line by Point, Angle, and
Length (on page 1094).

Line String by Points - Creates a line string between a series of two or more
points. For more information, see Line String by Points (on page 1104).

Edge from Curve or Surface - Creates a curve at an edge of a surface, such as a


plate, the landing curve of a profile, or a solid. For more information, see Edge
from Curve or Surface (on page 1085).

Edges from Curve or Surface - Creates one or more curves at each edge of a
surface, such as a plate, the landing curve of a profile, or a solid. For more
information, see Edges from Curve or Surface (on page 1088).

Polyline by One to Four Segments - Creates a polyline string of up to four


curves by defining point coordinates on a reference plane. For more information,
see Polyline by One to Four Segments (on page 1110).

Curve as Extended Section - Copies polyline cross-sections. For more


information, see Curve as Extended Section (on page 1063).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1062


Geometric Constructions

Curve as Extended Section

Tooltip: CurveAsExtendedSection
Copies cross-sections created using the Polyline by One to Four Segments (on page 1110)
geometric construction. This curve type is commonly used to extend a surface created with the
Surface by Curves (on page 1130) geometric construction. You can add a cross-section before
the first cross-section and after the last cross-section of the surface.

Required Input Output


1 - Polyline to extend Extended polyline
2 - Second polyline
Optional Input
(3) - Line string joining equivalent vertices
Parameters
Extension distance

Curve as Extended Section Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1063


Geometric Constructions

Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first polyline cross-section. This is typically a cross-section at the end of a
surface created with the Surface by Curves (on page 1130) geometric construction.
2 - Specifies the second polyline cross-section. This is typically the cross-section next to the
selected end of the surface.
- Specifies a line string joining equivalent vertices of the cross-sections. This value is optional,
and is only needed when the cross-sections do not have the same number of vertices.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1064


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Cancel - Clears the current selections.
Accept - Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and
parameters for additional geometry can be defined.
Extension - Specifies the distance by which the first cross-section 1 is extended.

What do you want to do?


 Extend a polyline cross-section (on page 1065)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Extend a polyline cross-section


1. Click CurveAsExtendedSection on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select the first cross-section.
3. Select the second cross-section.
4. If the cross-sections have different numbers of vertices, click , and select a line string
joining equivalent vertices.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1065


Geometric Constructions

5. Click Accept .
A preview of the extended cross-section appears.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CurveAsExtendedSection in
the Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Curve at Offset by Intersection

Tooltip: CurveAtOffsetByInt
Creates a curve on a surface offset from an intersecting reference plane or surface.

Required Input Output


Intersecting reference plane or surface Curve
Intersected surface
Parameters
Offset distance

Curve at Offset by Intersection Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1066


Geometric Constructions

Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies an intersecting surface or reference plane.
2 - Specifies the intersected surface or reference plane. By default, this is the surface of the plate
selected for the main command.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1067


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Offset - Defines the offset distance of the curve from the intersecting reference plane or surface.

What do you want to do?


 Place a curve offset from an intersection (on page 1069)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1068


Geometric Constructions

Place a curve offset from an intersection


1. Click CurveAtOffsetByInt on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a surface, such as a plate system or a reference plane. Typically this is a surface
intersecting the surface selected for the main command.
3. Select a surface intersected by the first surface. By default, this is the surface selected for the
main command.
4. Type an offset value.
A green preview curve is visible at the offset from the surface intersection. If one of the
surfaces, such as a reference plane, is infinite, then the preview curve is infinite.
5. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CurveAtOffsetByInt in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
6. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
7. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1069


Geometric Constructions

Curve by Curves

Tooltip: CurveByCurves
Creates a single curve from two or more end-to-end curves.

Required Input Output


Two or more connected curves Curve

Curve by Curves Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies two or more connected curves to combine.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1070


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1071


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Combine end-to-end curves (on page 1072)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Combine end-to-end curves


1. Create the curves needed to define the fillet. These curves must be connected and are
created with other geometric construction curve interfaces.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. Click CurveByCurves on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select two or more end-to-end curves. Select the curves in sequence.
4. Click Continue.
The curves are merged into a single curve.
5. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
6. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1072


Geometric Constructions

Curve by Intersection

Tooltip: CurveByIntersection
Creates a curve along the intersection of two surfaces.

Required Input Output


Intersecting surface Curve
Intersected surface
Optional Input
Coordinate system

Curve by Intersection Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult

Molded Forms User's Guide 1073


Geometric Constructions

your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.


1 - Specifies an intersecting surface or reference plane.
2 - Specifies the intersected surface or reference plane. By default, this is the surface of the plate
selected for the main command.
- Specifies a coordinate system used to orient the curve. This value is optional and is not
available when Keep all curves is selected for Curve Option.
- Specifies a tracking point used to control the direction of curve placement when an
ambiguity exists. A tracking point is only needed with curved surfaces that intersect more than
once. The tracking point is used with the value selected by Track Flag. This value is optional and
is not available when Keep all curves is selected for Curve Option.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1074


Geometric Constructions

Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Track Flag - Controls how the tracking point is used when the Curve Option of Keep one curve
is selected and an ambiguity exists. Select Near to use the curve nearest to the tracking point.
Select Far to use the curve farthest from the tracking point.
Curve Option - Controls the number of curves that are created when an ambiguity exists. Select
Keep one curve to create one curve based on the selected value of Track Flag and the selected
tracking point. Select Keep all curves to create all possible curves.

What do you want to do?


 Place a curve by intersection (on page 1075)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a curve by intersection


1. Click CurveByIntersection on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a surface, such as a plate system or a reference plane. Typically this is a surface
intersecting the surface selected for the main command.
3. Select a surface intersected by the first surface. By default, this is the surface selected for the
main command.
A green preview curve is visible at the surface intersection. If one of the surfaces, such as a
reference plane, is infinite, then the preview curve is infinite.
4. Optionally, click , and select a coordinate system to orient the curve.
5. To create all possible curves, select Keep all curves for Curve Option.
6. To create one curve when multiple curves are possible:
 Select Keep one curve for Curve Option.
 Click , and select the needed value for Track Flag.
If changing the value for Track Flag does not give the needed solution, you can
first create a point that you then select after clicking . The point can be created with Insert
> Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1075


Geometric Constructions

Control Point in the Common User's Guide


Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
7. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CurveByIntersection in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
8. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
9. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Curve by Points on Surface

Tooltip: CurveByPointsOnSurface
Creates a curve by interpolation through a set of points. Some points can be designated as
knuckles so that the curve has discontinuous tangency.

Required Input Output


Points Curve
Surface
Optional Input
Knuckle points
Tangent vectors at start and end

Curve by Points on Surface Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1076


Geometric Constructions

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the points used for the curve.
Select the points in the order in which the curve is created.
- Specifies points selected in 1 to use as knuckles. This value is optional.
- Specifies a line or edge as a start vector used to control the interpolation. The vector acts as
a tangent at the start point of the curve. This value is optional.
- Specifies a line or edge as an end vector used to control the interpolation. The vector acts
as a tangent at the end point of the curve. This value is optional.
5 - Specifies the surface for the curve.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1077


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place a curve by points (on page 1079)
 Place a knuckled curve by points (on page 1080)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1078


Geometric Constructions

Place a curve by points


1. Create the points needed to define the curve by using Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click CurveByPointsOnSurface on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the points used to define the curve. Select the points in their order on the curve.
4. Optionally, click , and select a start vector.
5. Optionally, click , and select an end vector.
6. Click 5, and select the surface for the curve.
A preview of the curve appears. The curve passes through the points in the selected order.

7. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CurveByPointsOnSurface in
the Geometric Construction Explorer.

8. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


9. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"

Molded Forms User's Guide 1079


Geometric Constructions

The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Place a knuckled curve by points


1. Create the points needed to define the curve. These can be points created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click CurveByPointsOnSurface on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the points used to define the curve. Select the points in their order on the curve.
4. Click , and select one or more of the previously-selected points (excluding the end points)
to use as knuckles.
5. Optionally, click , and select a start vector.
6. Optionally, click , and select an end vector.
7. Click 5, and select the surface for the curve.
A preview of the curve appears. The curve passes through the points in the selected order
and is knuckled at the selected points. One knuckle point is shown in the example below.

8. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CurveByPointsOnSurface in
the Geometric Construction Explorer.

9. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1080


Geometric Constructions

10. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Curve by Two Points on Surface

Tooltip: CurveBy2PointsOnSurface
Creates a curve between two points projected onto a surface along the surface normal, an axis,
or angle. The curve can be created with or without extensions at each end.

Required Input Output


Start and end points Curve
Surface
Coordinate system
Parameters
Projection method
Start and end projections

Curve by Two Points on Surface Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1081


Geometric Constructions

Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first point.
2 - Specifies the second point.
3 - Specifies the surface onto which the curve is projected. By default, this is the surface of the
plate selected for the main command.
4 - Specifies the coordinate system used to control the direction of projection.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1082


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Projection Method - Specifies how the curve is projected to the surface. Select one of the
following:
 Normal - Projects the curve normal to the surface.
 Along x - Projects the curve along the x-axis of the selected coordinate system.
 Along y - Projects the curve along the y-axis of the selected coordinate system.
 Along z - Projects the curve along the z-axis of the selected coordinate system.
 At Angle - Projects the curve at an angle.
Angle - Specifies the projection angle relative to the reference axis. This option is only available
when Angle is selected for Projection Method.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1083


Geometric Constructions

Rotation Axis - Specifies the rotation axis for an angle projection. Select x, y, or z. This option is
only available when Angle is selected for Projection Method.
Reference Axis - Specifies the reference axis for an angle projection. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or
-z. This option is only available when Angle is selected for Projection Method.
Extension at Start - Specifies the distance that the curve is extended before the first point.
Extension at End - Specifies the distance that the curve is extended after the second point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a curve on a surface by two points and projection (on page 1084)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a curve on a surface by two points and projection


1. Create the points needed to define the curve. These can be points created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click CurveBy2PointsOnSurface on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the first point for the curve.
4. Select the second point for the curve.
5. Select the surface. By default, this is the surface of the plate selected for the main command.
6. Select a coordinate system to use for projection of the curve.
7. Select a projection method. If Angle is selected, also select the needed values for Rotation
Axis and Reference Axis.
8. Optionally, type values for extensions at the start and end of the curve.
A preview of the curve appears.
9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CurveBy2PointsOnSurface in
the Geometric Construction Explorer.
10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1084


Geometric Constructions

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Edge from Curve or Surface

Tooltip: EdgeFromCurveOrSurf
Creates a curve at an edge of a surface, such as a plate, the landing curve of a profile, or a solid.

Required Input Output


Curve, surface, or solid Curve

Edge from Curve or Surface Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1085


Geometric Constructions

 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a surface, such as a plate, the landing curve of a profile or seam, or a solid.
- Specifies a tracking point used to control curve placement on an edge when an ambiguity
exists. A tracking point is only needed with curved surfaces that intersect more than once. The
tracking point is used with the value selected by Track Flag. This value is optional.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1086


Geometric Constructions

Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Track Flag - Controls how the tracking point is used when an ambiguity exists. Select Near to
use the curve nearest to the tracking point. Select Far to use the curve farthest from the tracking
point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a curve at an edge (on page 1087)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a curve at an edge


1. Click EdgeFromCurveOrSurf on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a plate or profile system or part, a seam, or a solid.
A green preview curve is visible on an edge.
3. If there are multiple solutions, such as on the edges of a plate, click , select a tracking
point, and select the needed value for Track Flag.
If changing the value for Track Flag still does not give the needed solution, you
may need to first create a point that you then select after clicking . The point can be
created with Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric
construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
4. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as EdgeFromCurveOrSurf in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
5. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
6. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1087


Geometric Constructions

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Edges from Curve or Surface

Tooltip: EdgesFromCurveOrSurf
Creates a curve at each edge of a surface, such as a plate or the landing curve edge of a profile.

Required Input Output


Curve, surface, or solid Curve on each edge

Edges from Curve or Surface Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1088


Geometric Constructions

 A different, recently-used interface.


 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a surface, such as a plate, the landing curve of a profile or seam, or a solid.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept

Molded Forms User's Guide 1089


Geometric Constructions

Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.


Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place a curve on all edges of a selected object (on page 1090)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a curve on all edges of a selected object


1. Click EdgesFromCurveOrSurf on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a plate or profile system or part, a seam, or a solid.
A green preview curve is visible on each edge.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view. The curve at each edge also appears
as EdgesFromCurveOrSurf > [Not Named] in the Geometric Construction Explorer.
4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Fillet by Curve

Molded Forms User's Guide 1090


Geometric Constructions

Tooltip: CmdFilletByCurve
Creates a blended fillet of a specified radius between two curves that are end-connected and
projected onto a surface.

Required Input Output


Two end-connected curves Curve with radius and tangential to input
curves
Surface
Optional Input
Projection Method
Radius

Fillet by Curve Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first curve.
2 - Specifies the second curve. This curve must be connected to the first curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1091


Geometric Constructions

3 - Specifies the surface onto which the curves and the fillet are projected. By default, this is the
surface of the plate selected for the main command.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1092


Geometric Constructions

The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the fillet curve.
Projection Method - Specifies how the curve is projected to the surface. Select one of the
following:
 Normal - Projects the curve normal to the surface.
 Along x - Projects the curve along the x-axis of the selected coordinate system.
 Along y - Projects the curve along the y-axis of the selected coordinate system.
 Along z - Projects the curve along the z-axis of the selected coordinate system.

What do you want to do?


 Place a filleted curve on a surface (on page 1093)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a filleted curve on a surface


1. Create the curves needed to define the fillet. These curves must be connected and are
created with other geometric construction curve interfaces.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. Click CmdFilletByCurve on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the first curve.
4. Select the second curve.
5. Select the surface. By default, this is the surface of the plate selected for the main command.
6. Type a radius for the fillet.
7. Select a projection method.
A preview of the projected curves and fillet appears with the first and second curves
tangential to and trimmed to the fillet.
8. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CmdFilletByCurve in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
9. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
10. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1093


Geometric Constructions

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Line by Point, Angle, and Length

Tooltip: LineByPointAngleLength
Creates a line at a defined angle and length on a coordinate system plane.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Line
Starting point
Optional Input
Reference line
Parameters
Coordinate system plane
Length
Angle

Line by Point, Angle, and Length Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction

Molded Forms User's Guide 1094


Geometric Constructions

ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a coordinate system used to orient the line and define the plane of the line.
2 - Specifies the starting point of the line.
- Specifies a reference line. The angle of the line is measured from the reference line. If no
reference line is selected, the angle is based on the coordinate system axes. This value is
optional.
- Specifies a tracking point used to control the direction of curve placement when an
ambiguity exists. The tracking point is used with the value selected by Track Flag. This value is
optional.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1095


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Active Axes - Defines the coordinate system plane on which the line is placed. Select (x,y), (y,z),
(z,x), (y,x), (z,y), or (x, z).
Angle - Defines the angle of the line about the axis normal to the plane defined by Active Axes.
If a reference line is selected for , then the angle is measured from that line.
Length - Defines the length of the line.
Track Flag - Controls how the tracking point is used when an ambiguity exists. Select Near
to use the curve nearest to the tracking point. Select Far to use the curve farthest from the
tracking point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1096


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Place a line by point, angle, and length (on page 1097)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a line by point, angle, and length


1. Create the point needed as the start point of the line using Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. If you are using a reference line, create that line with another geometric construction line
interface.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
3. Click LineByPointAngleLength on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the coordinate system.
5. Select the starting point.
6. Optionally, click , and select a reference line.
7. In the Active Axes box, select the plane for the line.
8. Type a value for Angle.
9. Type a value for Length.
A preview of the line appears.
10. If there are multiple solutions, such as the edges of a plate, click , select a tracking point,
and select the needed value for Track Flag.
11. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as LineByPointAngleLength in
the Geometric Construction Explorer.
12. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
13. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"

Molded Forms User's Guide 1097


Geometric Constructions

The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Line by Points

Tooltip: LineByPoints
Creates a line between two points.

Required Input Output


Starting and ending point Line

Line by Points Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1098


Geometric Constructions

2 - Specifies the second point.


If successive lines are created using Line by Points, the point selected for 2 of a line
is the default selection for 1 of the next line.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1099


Geometric Constructions

The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place a line between two points (on page 1100)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a line between two points


1. Create the points needed as the start and end points of the line using Insert > Control Point,
Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click LineByPoints on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the first point.
4. Select the second point.
A preview of the line appears.
5. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as LineByPoints in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
6. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
If successive lines are created using Line by Points, the point selected for 2 of a
line is the default selection for 1 of the next line.
7. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon and create the model object.

Line from Coordinate System

Tooltip: LineFromCS
Creates a line along a coordinate system axis.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1100


Geometric Constructions

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Line
Optional Input
Starting point
Parameters
Looking axis
Length, orientation, and justification

Line from Coordinate System Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a coordinate system used to orient the line.
- Specifies a starting point for the line. If no starting point is selected, the origin of the
coordinate system is used. This value is optional.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1101


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Looking Axis - Specifies the coordinate system axis of the line. The line is place in the direction
of the axis. Select X, Y, or Z.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1102


Geometric Constructions

Length - Defines the length of the line.


Orientation - Specifies the direction of the line from the starting point. Select Direct to place the
line in the positive axis direction. Select Indirect to place the line in the negative axis direction.
Orientation is ignored if Centered is selected for Justification.
Justification - Specifies the placement of the line relative to the starting point. Select Centered
to center the line on the starting point. Select Not Centered to place the line according the value
selected for Orientation.

What do you want to do?


 Place a line in the direction of a coordinate system axis (on page 1103)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a line in the direction of a coordinate system axis


1. Create the point needed as the start point of the line using Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click LineFromCS on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the coordinate system.
4. Optionally, click , and select a starting point.
5. In the Looking Axis box, select an axis.
6. Type a value for Length.
7. Select values for Orientation and Justification.
A preview of the line appears.
8. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as LineFromCS in the Geometric
Construction Explorer.
9. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
10. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"

Molded Forms User's Guide 1103


Geometric Constructions

The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Line String by Points

Tooltip: LineStringByPoints
Creates an open or closed line string between a series of two or more points.

Required Input Output


Points Line
Parameter
Closed or open string

Line String by Points Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1104


Geometric Constructions

 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the points used for the line string.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1105


Geometric Constructions

Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Closed Flag - Specifies whether the line string is extended from the last point back to the first
point, creating a closed string. Select Closed to extend the string. Select Opened to stop the
string at the last point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a line string (on page 1106)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a line string


1. Create the points needed to define the line by using Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click LineStringByPoints on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the points used to define the line. Select the points in their order on the line string.
4. To extend the line string from the last point back to the first point, select Closed in the
Closed Flag box.
A preview of the line appears.
5. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as LineStringByPoints in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
6. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
If successive lines are created using Line by Points, the point selected for 2 of a
line is the default selection for 1 of the next line.
7. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon and create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1106


Geometric Constructions

Parallel Line

Tooltip: LineParallel
Creates a line parallel to another line.
This geometric construction only works with lines, not line strings or curves.

Required Input Output


Line Line
Surface or plane
Parameters
Distance

Parallel Line Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric

Molded Forms User's Guide 1107


Geometric Constructions

Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a line. You must select a line or linear landing curve. You cannot select a line string
or a curve.
2 - Select a surface or sketching plane.
- Specifies a tracking point used to control the direction of parallel line placement when an
ambiguity exists. The tracking point is used with the value selected by Track Flag. This value is
optional.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1108


Geometric Constructions

Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Distance - Defines the distance of the parallel line from the selected line.
Track Flag - Controls how the tracking point is used when an ambiguity exists. Select Near to
use the curve nearest to the tracking point. Select Far to use the curve farthest from the tracking
point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a line parallel to another line (on page 1109)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a line parallel to another line


1. Click LineParallel on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a line.
3. Select a sketching plane or surface.
4. Type a value for Distance.
A preview of the parallel line displays.
5. If there are multiple solutions, such as the edges of a plate, click , select a tracking point,
and select the needed value for Track Flag.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry displays in the graphic view and as LineParallel in the Geometric
Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1109


Geometric Constructions

"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Polyline by One to Four Segments

Tooltip: PolylineBy1to4Segments
Creates a polyline string of up to four lines by defining point coordinates on a reference plane.
This curve type is commonly used to define hopper sides in a bulk carrier merchant ship.
Hoppers run longitudinally, so symmetry is defined about the longitudinal center line as +Y side,
-Y side, or both sides.

Required Input Output


Reference plane Polyline
Parameters
Number of polyline segments (maximum
four segments)
Point coordinates (maximum five points)
Symmetry
Start and end extensions

Molded Forms User's Guide 1110


Geometric Constructions

Polyline by One to Four Segments Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the reference plane for the polyline.
2 - Specifies a reference plane or object along the selected reference axis (Y reference or Z
reference) for Point #1 Coord. This option is only available when Y reference or Z reference is
selected for Point #1 Coord.
3 - Specifies a reference plane or object normal to the selected axis for Point #1 Coord. For
example, if Y axis or Y reference is selected, then the reference plane or object must be in the
Z-axis direction. This option is only available when Reference is selected for Point #1 Orient.
4 - Specifies a reference plane or object along the selected reference axis (Y reference or Z
reference) for Point #2 Coord. This option is only available when Y reference or Z reference is
selected for Point #2 Coord.
5 - Specifies a reference plane or object normal to the selected axis for Point #2 Coord For
example, if Y axis or Y reference is selected, then the reference plane or object must be in the
Z-axis direction. This option is only available when Reference is selected for Point #2 Orient.
6 - Specifies a parallel line for Point #2. This option is only available when Parallel is selected for
Point #2 Orient.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1111


Geometric Constructions

Options similar to 4, 5, and 6 are also available for Point #3, Point #4, and Point #5.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Cancel - Clears the current selections.
Accept - Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Continue - Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and
parameters for additional geometry can be defined.
Auto Preview - Specifies whether a preview of the polyline is displayed. The preview updates as
options are changed. Select On or Off.
Segments Count - Specifies the number of line segments in the polyline. Select 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Category - Specifies the type of polyline parameters. Select Ref Plane, Point #1, Point #2,
Point #3, Point #4, Point #5, Other, or All. Descriptions of the parameters for each category are
below. All displays the properties for all categories.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1112


Geometric Constructions

Ref Plane Category


Defines the reference plane offset.
Ref Plane Offset - Type the offset value.

Point #1 Category
Defines the first point on the polyline.
Point #1 Coord - Select Y axis, Z axis, Y reference, or Z reference.
 Point #1 Coord1 - When Y axis or Z axis is selected for Point #1 Coord, type a coordinate
value. For Y axis, this value is the Y coordinate. For Z axis, this value is the Z coordinate.
 Point #1 Offset1 - When Y reference or Z reference is selected for Point #1 Coord, select
a reference plane or object for 2, and then type a value for the offset distance of the point
from the plane.
Point #1 Orient - Select Offset to define point coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define point coordinates as offsets from a reference plane or object.
 Point #1 Coord2 - When Offset is selected for Point #1 Orient, type a coordinate value for
Point #1 Coord. For Y axis, this value is the Z coordinate. For Z axis, this value is the Y
coordinate.
 Start Pt Offset2 - When Reference is selected for Point #1 Orient, select a reference plane
or object for 3, and then type a value for the offset distance of the point from the plane.

Point #2 through Point #5 Categories


Defines subsequent points on the polyline. The number of points varies with the value of
Segment Count. For example, Point#1 and Point#2 are displayed if there is one segment.
Point #1, Point #2, Point #3, Point #4, and Point #5 are displayed if there are four segments.
For Point #2:
Point #2 Coord - Select Y axis, Z axis, Y reference, or Z reference.
 Point #2 Coord1 - When Y axis or Z axis is selected for Point #2 Coord, type a coordinate
value. For Y axis, this value is the Y coordinate. For Z axis, this value is the Z coordinate.
 Point #2 Offset1 - When Y reference or Z reference is selected for Point #2 Coord, select
a reference plane or object for 2, and then type a value for the offset distance of the point
from the plane.
Point #2 Orient - Select Offset to define point coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select At angle to define the line segment based on an axis and angle. Select Parallel to define
the line segment based on a parallel line. Select Reference to define point coordinates as offsets
from a reference plane or object.
 Point #2 Coord2 - When Offset is selected for Point #2 Orient, type a coordinate value for
Point #2 Coord. For Y axis, this value is the Z coordinate. For Z axis, this value is the Y
coordinate.
 Point #2 Offset2 - When Reference is selected for Point #2 Orient, select a reference plane
or object for 3, and then type a value for the offset distance of the point from the plane.
 Point #2 Angle - When At angle is selected for Point #2 Orient, select an axis (Y axis or Z
axis) and type an angle to define the line starting at Point #2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1113


Geometric Constructions

Options similar to those for Point #2 are also available for Point #3, Point #4, and
Point #5.

Other Category
Defines extension and symmetry properties.
Start Extension - Defines the distance the first line is extended before the first point.
End Extension - Defines the distance the first line is extended after the last point.
Symmetry - Defines symmetry of the polyline about the longitudinal centerline. Select Side Y+,
Side Y-, or Both Sides.

What do you want to do?


 Place a polyline (on page 1114)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a polyline
Start polyline definition
1. Click PolylineBy1to4Segments on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. In the Auto Preview box, select On.
3. Select a reference plane along the X-axis.
A preview of the polyline appears with default values.
4. Optionally, select an offset distance from the plane in the Ref Plane Offset box.
5. In the Segments Count box, select the needed number of segments.

Define the start point


1. In the category box following Segments Count, select Point #1.
2. In the Point #1 Coord box, select the needed axis or reference. If a reference is selected,
also select a reference plane or object for 2.
3. If an axis is selected, type a value for Point #1 Coord1. If a reference is selected, type a
value for Point #1 Offset1.
4. In the Point #1 Orient box, select Offset or Reference.
5. If Offset is selected, type a value for Point #1 Coord2. If Reference is selected, then select
a reference plane or object for 3 and type a value for Start Pt Offset.
The preview updates as options as changed.

Define the remaining points


1. In the category box following Segments Count, select Point #2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1114


Geometric Constructions

2. In the Point #2 Coord box, select the needed axis or reference. If a reference is selected,
also select a reference plane or object for 4.
3. If an axis is selected, type a value for Point #2 Coord1. If a reference is selected, type a
value for Point #2 Offset1.
4. In the Point #2 Orient box, select Offset, Reference, At angle, or Parallel.
5. Define values related to the selected option.
6. Repeat the steps in this section for the remaining points.
The preview updates as options as changed.

Finish polyline creation


1. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PolylineBy1to4Segments in
the Geometric Construction Explorer.
2. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
3. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Surfaces (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)


The following geometric construction interfaces create planar and curved surfaces.
Each command supporting the option displays tabs and interfaces appropriate to
the command.

Plane from Coordinate System - Creates a plane normal to an axis of a


coordinate system at a given distance from the coordinate system origin. For more
information, see Plane from Coordinate System (on page 1117).

Plane by Points - Creates a plane from three points. For more information, see
Plane by Points (on page 1120).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1115


Geometric Constructions

Plane by Positions - Creates a plane from three points, either by selecting points
or defining point coordinates. For more information, see Plane by Positions (on
page 1123).

Plane by Two Points and Normal - Creates a plane passing through two points
and normal to a curve. For more information, see Plane by Two Points and Normal
(on page 1126).

Surface by Curves - Creates a multi-patch surface faired from a series of


cross-section curves. For more information, see Surface by Curves (on page
1130).

Surface by Corrugation (on page 1453) - Creates a corrugated surface by


extruding a corrugation cross-section. For more information, see Surface by
Corrugation (on page 1133).

Surface by Surfaces - Creates a single surface from two or more edge-to-edge


curves. For more information, see Surface by Curves (on page 1130).

Surface by Swage (on page 1465) - Creates a swaged surface by extruding a


cross-section with a swage pattern and defining the top and bottom locations. For
more information, see Surface by Swage (on page 1145).

Surface by Sweeping - Creates a surface from a set of planar cross-section


curves and path curves. For more information, see Surface by Sweeping (on page
1153).

The following surface geometric constructions are available by selecting More in the Geometric
Construction box of any geometric construction ribbon:

Surface by Blending - Creates a surface from a set of curves while maintaining


tangencies with adjacent surfaces. For more information, see Surface by Blending
(on page 1158).

Surface by Fillet - Creates a radius surface between two surfaces. For more
information, see Surface by Fillet (on page 1161).

Surface with Knuckles - Creates a multi-patch knuckled surface. For more


information, see Surface with Knuckles (on page 1165).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1116


Geometric Constructions

Plane from Coordinate System

Tooltip: PlaneFromCS
Creates a plane normal to an axis of a coordinate system at a given distance from the coordinate
system origin.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Plane
Parameters
Axis
Offset from origin
Range of the plane from the origin

Plane from Coordinate System Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric

Molded Forms User's Guide 1117


Geometric Constructions

Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1118


Geometric Constructions

The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Looking Axis - Specifies the normal axis of the plane. The plane is centered about the looking
axis.
Offset - Defines the distance of the plane from the coordinate system origin.
Range - Defines the size of the sides of the plane. The range is centered about looking axis.

What do you want to do?


 Place a plane by coordinate system offset (on page 1119)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a plane by coordinate system offset


1. Click PlaneFromCS on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a coordinate system.
3. Select a value for Looking Axis.
4. Type a value for Offset.
5. Type a value for Range.
A preview of the plane appears. The plane is normal to the looking axis, offset from the origin,
and is centered about the looking axis.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PlaneFromCS in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1119


Geometric Constructions

Plane by Points

Tooltip: PlaneByPoints
Creates a plane from three points. The points define three vertices of the plane, and determine
both the orientation and size of the plane.

Required Input Output


Three points Plane

Plane by Points Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first point.
2 - Specifies the second point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1120


Geometric Constructions

3 - Specifies the third point.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1121


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Place a plane by points (on page 1122)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a plane by points


1. Create the points needed to define the plane using Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click PlaneByPoints on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the first point.
4. Select the second point.
5. Select the third point.
A preview of the plane appears. Each point is a vertex of the plane.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PlaneByPoints in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1122


Geometric Constructions

Plane by Positions

Tooltip: PlaneByPositions
Creates a plane from three points, either by selecting points or defining point coordinates. The
points define an origin and two axes, are three vertices of the plane, and determine both the
orientation and size of the plane.

Required Input Output


Point coordinates Plane
Optional Input
Points

Plane by Positions Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric

Molded Forms User's Guide 1123


Geometric Constructions

Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
- Select an origin point. This option replaces the values of x1, y1, and z1. This value is
optional.
- Select a second point. This point defines a side of the plane as an axis from the origin point.
This option replaces the values of x2, y2, and z2. This value is optional.
- Select a third point. This point defines a second side of the plane as a second axis from the
origin point. This option replaces the values of x3, y3, and z3. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1124


Geometric Constructions

Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
x1, y1, z1 - Specifies the coordinates for the origin point.
x2, y2, z2 - Specifies the coordinates for the second point.
x3, y3, z3 - Specifies the coordinates for the third point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a plane by coordinate positions (on page 1125)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a plane by coordinate positions


1. If you are selecting any points instead of typing point coordinates, create the points using
Insert > Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click PlaneByPositions on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Type coordinate values for the origin point in the x1, y1, and z1 boxes. Optionally, click ,
and select a point.
4. Type coordinate values for the second point to define the first axis in the x2, y2, and z2
boxes. Optionally, click , and select a point.
5. Type coordinate values for the third point to define the second axis in the x3, y3, and z3
boxes. Optionally, click , and select a point.
A preview of the plane appears. Each point is a vertex of the plane.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PlaneByPositions in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1125


Geometric Constructions

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Plane by Two Points and Normal

Tooltip: PlaneBy2PointsAndNormal
Creates a plane passing through two points and a curve. One point is on the curve and the plane
is normal to the curve at that point.

Required Input Output


Curve Plane
Point on the curve (acting as an origin)
Second point
Parameters
Range of the plane from the origin

Molded Forms User's Guide 1126


Geometric Constructions

Plane by Two Points and Normal Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the curve.
2 - Specifies a point on the curve.
3 - Specifies the second point.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1127


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Plane Range - Defines the size of the sides of the plane. the range is centered about the point on
the curve 2. If no value is specified, the range is twice the distance between the two points.

What do you want to do?


 Place a plane by two points normal to a curve (on page 1129)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1128


Geometric Constructions

Place a plane by two points normal to a curve


1. Create the curve needed to define the plane.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. Create the points needed to define the plane using Insert > Control Point, Insert >
Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces. One point must be on
the curve. The other point is not on the curve.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
3. Click PlaneBy2PointsAndNormal on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select a curve.
5. Select a point on the curve.
6. Select another point which is not on the curve.
7. Optionally, type a length for the side of the plane in the Plane Range box.
A preview of the plane appears. The plane is along the two points and normal to the curve
and is centered about the point on the curve.
8. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PlaneByPoints in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
9. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
10. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1129


Geometric Constructions

Surface by Curves

Tooltip: SurfByCurves
Creates a multi-patch surface faired (see "fair" on page 1456) from a series of cross-section
curves, lines, or polylines.
If the cross-section curves have different quantities of segments, or you want to control the
surface fairing differently than the software, you can also define a line string connecting
equivalent vertices on the curves so that the surface is faired correctly from one curve to the next.

Without line string: With line string:

Required Input Output


Cross-section curves, lines, or polylines Surface
Optional Input
Optional line string joining equivalent
vertices

Surface by Curves Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1130


Geometric Constructions

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the cross-section curves, lines, or polylines. Select the curves in the order they are
used to create the surface.
- Specifies a line string connecting common vertices on the curves. This value is optional and
is only needed when you want to control the fairing of the surface in a different manner than
performed by the software, such as when the curves have a different number of vertices.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1131


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place a surface by cross-section curves (on page 1132)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a surface by cross-section curves


1. Create the cross-section curves, lines, or polylines needed to define the surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1132


Geometric Constructions

Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)


2. If you want to use a line string to control the surface creation, create points at the curve
vertices, and connect the needed points from curve to curve with a line string.
Vertices from Curve or Surface (on page 1057)
Line String by Points (on page 1104)
3. Click SurfByCurves on the Geometric Construction Palette.
4. Select the curves in order.
5. Optionally, click , and select the line string.
A preview of the surface appears.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfByCurves in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Surface by Corrugation

Tooltip: SurfByCorrugation
Creates a corrugated (see "corrugation" on page 1453) surface by extruding a corrugation
cross-section and defining the top and bottom locations.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Corrugated surface
Reference plane
Parameters
Start point, end point, height, and pattern
dimensions

Molded Forms User's Guide 1133


Geometric Constructions

Surface by Corrugation Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system.
2 - Specifies the reference plane used as a supporting surface for the corrugated surface.
3 - Specifies a starting point reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the starting point of the corrugation cross-section. This option is only
available when Reference is selected for Start Pt Orient Type.
4 - Specifies an ending point reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the ending point of the corrugation cross-section. This option is only
available when Reference is selected for End Pt Orient Type.
5 - Specifies a starting height reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the bottom height of the corrugation surface. This option is only
available when Reference is selected for Start Height Orient.
6 - Specifies a ending height reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the top height of the corrugation surface. This option is only available
when Reference is selected for End Height Orient.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1134


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Auto Preview - Specifies whether a preview of the corrugated surface is displayed. The preview
updates as options are changed. Select On or Off.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1135


Geometric Constructions

Category - Specifies the type of corrugation parameters. Select Main, Start Pt, End Pt, Start
Height, End Height, Pattern, or All. Descriptions of the parameters for each category are below.
All displays the properties for all categories.

Main Category
Defines general orientation properties.
Axis - Defines the orientation of the corrugated cross-section on the reference plane. Select X
axis, Y axis, or Z axis. For example, if the reference plane is on an X-Y plane, then valid
selections are X axis or Y axis.

X axis: Y axis:

Corrugation Dir - Defines the direction of the corrugation cross-section with respect to the
reference plane. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. For example, if the reference plane is on an X-Y
plane, then valid selections are +z or -z.

+z: -z:

Ref Plane Offset - Defines the offset of the corrugated surface from the reference plane.

Start Pt Category
Defines the starting point of the corrugation cross-section.
Start Pt Orient Type - Select Offset to define point coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define point coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
(by clicking 3) with reference plane 2.
Start Coord - Defines a coordinate value for the starting point. Type a value. This option is only
available when Offset is selected for Start Pt Orient Type.
Start Clearance - Defines the distance between the starting point and the first bend of the
corrugation. Type a value.
Start Extension - Defines a value for the distance the surface is extended before the starting
point. Type a value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1136


Geometric Constructions

Start Pos Type - Defines orientation of the surface before the first bend of the corrugation.
Select Flush up or Flush bottom.

End Pt Category
Defines the ending point of the corrugation cross-section.
End Pt Orient Type - Select Offset to define point coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define point coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
(by clicking 4) with reference plane 2.
End Coord - Defines a coordinate value for the ending point. Type a value. This option is only
available when Offset is selected for End Pt Orient Type.
End Clearance - Defines the distance between the ending point and the last bend of the
corrugation. Type a value.
End Extension - Defines a value for the distance the surface is extended after the ending point.
Type a value.
End Pos Type - Defines orientation of the surface after the last bend of the corrugation. Select
Flush up or Flush bottom.

Start Height Category


Defines the bottom location of the corrugation surface.
Start Height Orient - Select Offset to define height coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define height coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
with reference plane 2.
Start Height - Defines a coordinate value for the bottom of the corrugated surface. Type a value.
This option is only available when Offset is selected for Start Height Orient.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1137


Geometric Constructions

Start Height Offset - Defines the offset of the bottom of the corrugated surface from reference
plane 5. This option is only available when Reference is selected for Start Height Orient.

End Height Category


Defines the top location of the corrugation surface.
End Height Orient - Select Offset to define height coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define height coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
with reference plane 2.
End Height - Defines a coordinate value for the top of the corrugated surface. Type a value. This
option is only available when Offset is selected for End Height Orient.
End Height Offset - Defines the offset of the top of the corrugated surface from reference plane
6. This option is only available when Reference is selected for End Height Orient.

Pattern Category
Defines the corrugation pattern.

a - The distance between corrugations at the bottom of the cross-section.


b - The slope width. This option is only available when Offset is selected for b Type.
b as angle - The slope angle. This option is only available when Angle is selected for b Type.
c - Width of the corrugation at the top of the cross-section.
d - Corrugation height.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1138


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Place a corrugated surface (on page 1139)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a corrugated surface


Start corrugation definition
1. Click SurfByCorrugation on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. In the Auto Preview box, select On.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Select a reference plane.
A preview of the corrugated surface appears, oriented on the reference plane and using
default values.

Define the starting point of the corrugation cross-section

1. In the Category box, select Start Pt.


2. If you select Offset in the Start Pt Orient Type box:
 Type values for Start Coord, Start Clearance, and Start Extension.
 Select a value for Start Pos Type.
The start of the corrugation cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.
3. If you select Reference in the Start Pt Orient Type box:
 Click 3, and select a reference plane or object.
 Type values for Start Clearance and Start Extension.
 Select a value for Start Pos Type.
The start of the corrugation cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1139


Geometric Constructions

Define the ending point of the corrugation cross-section


1. In the Category box, select End Pt.
2. If you select Offset in the End Pt Orient Type box:
 Type values for End Coord, End Clearance, and End Extension.
 Select a value for End Pos Type.
The end of the corrugation cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.
3. If you select Reference in the Start Pt Orient Type box:
 Click 4, and select a reference plane or object.
 Type values for End Clearance and End Extension.
 Select a value for End Pos Type.
The end of the corrugation cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.

Define the bottom and top of the corrugated surface

1. In the Category box, select Start Height.


2. If you select Offset in the Start Height Orient box, type a value for Start Height.
3. If you select Reference in the Start Height Orient box, click 5, and select a reference plane
or object, and type a value for Start Height Offset.
The bottom of the corrugated surface updates in the preview as options as changed.
4. In the Category box, select End Height.
5. If you select Offset in the End Height Orient box, type a value for End Height.
6. If you select Reference in the End Height Orient box, click 6, and select a reference plane
or object, and type a value for End Height Offset.
The top of the corrugated surface updates in the preview as options as changed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1140


Geometric Constructions

Define the corrugation pattern

1. In the Category box, select Pattern.


2. Type values for a, c, and d.
3. If you select Offset in the b Type box, type a value for b.
4. If you select Angle in the b Type box, type a value for b as angle.
The corrugation pattern updates in the preview as options as changed.

Finish surface creation


1. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfByCorrugation in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
2. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
3. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1141


Geometric Constructions

Surface by Surfaces

Tooltip: SurfBySurfaces
Creates a single surface from two or more edge-to-edge curves.

Required Input Output


Two or more surfaces Surface

Surface by Surfaces Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies two or more surfaces to merge. Each surface must share a common edge with at
least one of the other surfaces.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1142


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1143


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Merge surfaces into a single surface (on page 1144)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Merge surfaces into a single surface


1. Click SurfbySurfaces on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select the surfaces to combine. Each surface must share a common edge with another of the
surfaces.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry of the merged surfaces is displayed in the graphic view and as
SurfbySurfaces in the Geometric Construction Explorer.
4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1144


Geometric Constructions

Surface by Swage

Tooltip: SurfBySwage
Creates a swaged (see "swage" on page 1465) surface by extruding a cross-section with a
swage pattern and defining the top and bottom locations. A swage cross-section can be very
similar to the regular, elongated-V pattern of a corrugated surface, but more frequently has radius
or V bends and an irregular pattern.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Swaged surface
Reference plane
Parameters
Start point, end point, height, and pattern
dimensions

Surface by Swage Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1145


Geometric Constructions

 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system.
2 - Specifies the reference plane used as a supporting surface for the swaged surface.
3 - Specifies a starting point reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the starting point of the swage cross-section. This option is only
available when Reference is selected for Start Pt Orient Type.
4 - Specifies an ending point reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the ending point of the swage cross-section. This option is only
available when Reference is selected for End Pt Orient Type.
5 - Specifies a starting height reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the bottom height of the swage surface. This option is only available
when Reference is selected for Start Height Orient.
6 - Specifies a ending height reference plane or object. The intersection of this plane with
reference plane 2 defines the top height of the swage surface. This option is only available when
Reference is selected for End Height Orient.
7 - Specifies the center locations for swage features when Non-Regular is selected for Swage
Pattern.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1146


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Auto Preview - Specifies whether a preview of the swaged surface is displayed. The preview
updates as options are changed. Select On or Off.
Category - Specifies the type of swage parameters. Select Main, Start Pt, End Pt, Start Height,
End Height, Pattern, or All. Descriptions of the parameters for each category are below. All
displays the properties for all categories.

Main Category
Defines general orientation properties.
Along Axis - Defines the orientation of the swage cross-section on the reference plane. Select X
axis, Y axis, or Z axis. For example, if the reference plane is on an X-Y plane, then valid
selections are X axis or Y axis.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1147


Geometric Constructions

X axis: Y axis:

Swage Dir - Defines the direction of the swage cross-section with respect to the reference plane.
Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. For example, if the reference plane is on an X-Y plane, then valid
selections are +z or -z.

+z: -z:

Ref Plane Offset - Defines the offset of the swage surface from the reference plane.

Start Pt Category
Defines the starting point of the swage cross-section.
Start Pt Orient Type - Select Offset to define point coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define point coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
(by clicking 3) with reference plane 2.
Start Coord - Defines a coordinate value for the starting point. Type a value. This option is only
available when Offset is selected for Start Pt Orient Type.
Start Clearance - Defines the distance between the starting point and the first bend of the swage.
Type a value.
Start Extension - Defines a value for the distance the surface is extended before the starting
point. Type a value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1148


Geometric Constructions

End Pt Category
Defines the ending point of the swage cross-section.
End Pt Orient Type - Select Offset to define point coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define point coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
(by clicking 4) with reference plane 2.
End Coord - Defines a coordinate value for the ending point. Type a value. This option is only
available when Offset is selected for End Pt Orient Type.
End Extension - Defines a value for the distance the surface is extended after the ending point.
Type a value.

Start Height Category


Defines the bottom location of the swaged surface.
Start Height Orient - Select Offset to define height coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define height coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
with reference plane 2.
Start Height - Defines a coordinate value for the bottom of the swaged surface. Type a value.
This option is only available when Offset is selected for Start Height Orient.
Start Height Offset - Defines the offset of the bottom of the swaged surface from reference
plane 5. This option is only available when Reference is selected for Start Height Orient.

End Height Category


Defines the top location of the swaged surface.
End Height Orient - Select Offset to define height coordinates based on the coordinate system.
Select Reference to define height coordinates as the intersection of a reference plane or object
with reference plane 2.
End Height - Defines a coordinate value for the top of the swaged surface. Type a value. This
option is only available when Offset is selected for End Height Orient.
End Height Offset - Defines the offset of the top of the swaged surface from reference plane 6.
This option is only available when Reference is selected for End Height Orient.

Pattern Category
Defines the swage feature shape and spacing.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1149


Geometric Constructions

Swage Pattern - Specifies the pattern for swage spacing:


 Regular - Places features at the center-to-center interval specified by Spacing. The edge of
the first feature is at the Start Clearance location.

 Non-Regular - Places the center of features at the reference planes selected for 7.

Feature Type - Specifies the shape of the swage features. Select V, Elongated V, or Arc.

V: Elongated V: Arc:

a - The width at the bottom of a V or Elongated V feature.


b - The width at the top of an Elongated V feature.
c - The height for a V or Elongated V feature. The radius for an Arc feature.
Spacing - The center-to-center distance between features. This option is only available when
Regular is selected for Swage Pattern.

What do you want to do?


 Place a swaged surface (on page 1151)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1150


Geometric Constructions

Place a swaged surface


Start swage definition
1. Click SurfBySwage on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. In the Auto Preview box, select On.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Select a reference plane.
A preview of the swaged surface appears, oriented on the reference plane.

Define the starting point of the swage cross-section

1. In the Category box, select Start Pt.


2. If you select Offset in the Start Pt Orient Type box, type values for Start Coord, Start
Clearance, and Start Extension.
The start of the swage cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.
3. If you select Reference in the Start Pt Orient Type box:
 Click 3, and select a reference plane or object.
 Type values for Start Clearance and Start Extension.
The start of the swage cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.

Define the ending point of the swage cross-section


1. In the Category box, select End Pt.
2. If you select Offset in the End Pt Orient Type box, type values for End Coord and End
Extension.
The end of the swage cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.
3. If you select Reference in the Start Pt Orient Type box:
 Click 4, and select a reference plane or object.
 Type a value for End Extension.
The end of the swage cross-section updates in the preview as options as changed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1151


Geometric Constructions

Define the bottom and top of the swaged surface

1. In the Category box, select Start Height.


2. If you select Offset in the Start Height Orient box, type a value for Start Height.
3. If you select Reference in the Start Height Orient box, click 5, and select a reference plane
or object, and type a value for Start Height Offset.
The bottom of the swaged surface updates in the preview as options as changed.
4. In the Category box, select End Height.
5. If you select Offset in the End Height Orient box, type a value for End Height.
6. If you select Reference in the End Height Orient box, click 6, and select a reference plane
or object, and type a value for End Height Offset.
The top of the swaged surface updates in the preview as options as changed.

Define the swage feature and spacing pattern


1. In the Category box, select Pattern.
2. In the Swage Pattern box, select the type of spacing.
 If you select Regular, type a value for Spacing.

 If you select Non-Regular, click 7, and select one or more reference planes.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1152


Geometric Constructions

3. In the Feature Type box, select the type of swage feature.


4. Type values for a, b, and c, as appropriate for the selected feature type.

V: Elongated V: Arc:

The swage pattern updates in the preview as options as changed.

Finish surface creation


1. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfBySwage in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
2. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
3. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Surface by Sweeping

Tooltip: SurfBySweeping
Creates a surface from a set of planar curves (such as curves on plate edges) and optional path
curves.
The cross-section curves:
 Must be planar, but do not need to be coplanar
 Must be oriented in the same direction to avoid a twist in the surface
 Must each have the same number of vertices

Molded Forms User's Guide 1153


Geometric Constructions

 Can be open or closed


 Can touch at some vertices
The paths curves:
 Do not need to be planar
 Must touch the cross-section curves unless there is only one path curve
 Must each have the same number of vertices
The following example shows planar cross-sections curves swept along two path curves:

The following example shows planar cross-sections curves touching at end vertices, and swept
along a single path curve:

The following example shows closed cross-sections swept along two path curves. A capping
surface is created on the left end:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1154


Geometric Constructions

Required Input Output


Planar curves Surface
Optional Input Capping surface at one or both ends
Path curves
Parameter
Capping faces

Surface by Sweeping Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the cross-section curves.
- Specifies one or more path curves. These curves control the creation of the surface when
multiple paths through the cross-section curves are possible. This value is optional.
Capping Faces - Specifies surfaces capping the ends of the swept surface. This option is valid
with closed cross-section curves. Select No capping face, Capping face at start, Capping face
at end, or Both capping faces. Capping surfaces are merged with the main surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1155


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1156


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Place a surface by sweeping between planar curves (on page 1157)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a surface by sweeping between planar curves


1. Create the planar cross-section curves needed to define the surface. Optionally, create one
or more path curves to control the sweep of the surface through the curves.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. Click SurfBySweeping on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. Select the cross-section curves in order.
4. Optionally, click , and select the path curves.
A preview of the surface appears.
5. If the cross-section surfaces are closed, select the capping surfaces to add.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfBySweeping in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1157


Geometric Constructions

Surface by Blending

Tooltip: SurfByBlending
Creates a surface from a set of curves while maintaining tangencies with adjacent surfaces. Two
to five curve and adjacent surface combinations are required. The curves and adjacent surfaces
must be selected in sequential order and create a closed contour, as shown in the following
examples.

Required Input Output


Curves and surfaces adjacent to the curves Surface

Surface by Blending Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1158


Geometric Constructions

 A different, recently-used interface.


 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first curve, typically at the edge of a surface.
2 - Specifies the surface adjacent to the first curve.
3 - Specifies the second curve.
4 - Specifies the surface adjacent to the first curve.
5 through 10 - Specifies additional curve and adjacent surface combinations used to create a
closed contour. These values are optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1159


Geometric Constructions

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place a surface blended between adjacent curves and surfaces (on page 1160)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a surface blended between adjacent curves and surfaces


1. Create the curves needed to define the surface. These curves are typically at the edges of
the adjacent surfaces.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. On the geometric construction ribbon, click More in the Geometric Construction box.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears.
3. Select SurfByBlending and click OK.
4. Select the first curve.
5. Select the surface adjacent to the curve.
6. Select the second curve.
7. Select the surface adjacent to the second curve.
8. Continue select curves and surfaces, up to five pairs, until a closed contour of curves is
formed.
A preview of the surface appears.
9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfByBlending in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1160


Geometric Constructions

10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.


11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Surface by Fillet
Tooltip: SurfByFillet
Creates a radius surface between two surfaces. The supporting surfaces must not be coplanar
and do not need to touch. The radius of the fillet surface must be large enough to fill the gap
between surfaces that do not touch, but smaller than the two surfaces. In the examples below,
the fillet surface is in gray.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1161


Geometric Constructions

Required Input Output


Two non-coplanar surfaces Radius surface
Parameter
Radius

Surface by Fillet Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the first surface.
2 - Specifies the second surface.
3 - Specifies a tracking point used to control the placement of the fillet surface.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1162


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Radius - Specifies the radius of the fillet surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1163


Geometric Constructions

 If the surfaces do not touch, the radius must be large enough to create the fillet surface.
 If the radius must be smaller than supporting surfaces to create the fillet surface.

What do you want to do?


 Place a fillet surface between two surfaces (on page 1164)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a fillet surface between two surfaces


1. Create the point needed as the tracking point to locate the fillet surface by using Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point
interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. On the geometric construction ribbon, click More in the Geometric Construction box.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears.
3. Select SurfByFillet and click OK.
4. Select the first surface.
5. Select the second surface.
6. Select the tracking point.
A preview of the fillet surface appears.

7. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfByFillet in the Geometric
Construction Explorer.
8. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1164


Geometric Constructions

9. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Surface with Knuckles

Tooltip: SurfWithKnuckles
Creates a single multi-patch knuckled surface.

Required Input Output


Surface Surface
Optional Input
Knuckles curves to remove
Knuckles curves to add
Surface angle at which a knuckle curve is created

Surface with Knuckles Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1165


Geometric Constructions

Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a surface.
- Specifies curves to add to the surface as knuckle curves. This value is optional.
- Specifies curves to remove from the surface as knuckle curves. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1166


Geometric Constructions

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Max dev angle - Specifies the angle in a surface bend at which the software creates a knuckle
curve.

What do you want to do?


 Place a knuckled surface (on page 1167)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a knuckled surface


1. Create the surface needed to define the knuckled surface.
Surfaces (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1115)
2. Optionally, create curves to use as knuckle curves.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
3. On the geometric construction ribbon, click More in the Geometric Construction box.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears.
4. Select SurfWithKnuckles, and click OK.
The SurfWithKnuckles ribbon appears.
5. Select the surface.
6. Optionally, click , and select curves to add to the surface as knuckle curves.
7. Optionally, click , and select curves to remove from the surface as knuckle curves.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1167


Geometric Constructions

8. Type the maximum angle for a surface bend at which the software creates a knuckle curve.
9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SurfWithKnuckles in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Coordinate Systems (Geometric Construction Palette


Dialog Box)
The following geometric construction interfaces create coordinate systems.
Each command supporting the option displays tabs and interfaces appropriate to
the command.

Coordinate System by Lines - Creates a coordinate system from two lines. The
first line defines the first axis. The second line defines the general direction of the
second axis. For more information, see Coordinate System by Lines (on page
1169).

Coordinate System by Points - Creates a coordinate system from three points.


The first point defines the origin. The second point defines the direction of the first
axis. The third point defines the general direction of the second axis. For more
information, see Coordinate System by Points (on page 1172).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1168


Geometric Constructions

Coordinate System by Lines

Tooltip: CSByLines
Creates a coordinate system from two lines. The first line defines the first axis. The second line
defines the general direction of the second axis. The origin is at the intersection of the lines.
This geometric construction only works with lines, not line strings or curves.

Required Input Output


Lines for first and second axes Coordinate system
Parameters
Initial axes to create, such as (x,y) or (y,z)
Direction of third axis

Coordinate System by Lines Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1169


Geometric Constructions

Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric


Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies a line for the first axis. You must select a line. You cannot select a line string or a
curve.
2 - Specifies a line for the second axis. You must select a line. You cannot select a line string or a
curve.
- Specifies a tracking point used to control the direction of axis placement when an ambiguity
exists with one of the lines selected for 1 and 2. The tracking point is used with the value selected
by Track Flag. This value is optional.
The selected tracking point must be an existing point previously created with Insert >
Control Point, Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1170


Geometric Constructions

Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Assign Axes To - Specifies the axes to define by the selected lines. The first value defines the
axis for line 1. The second value defines the axis for line 2. Select (x,y), (y,z), (z,x), (y,x), (z,y), or
(x,z).
Coordinate System - Specifies the direction of the third axis. Select Direct to use the right-hand
rule to define the third axis. Select Indirect to define the third axis in the opposite direction.
Track Flag - Controls how the tracking point is used when there is an axis ambiguity with
one of the lines selected for 1 and 2. Select Near to use the axis direction towards the tracking
point. Select Far to use the axis direction away from the tracking point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a coordinate system by lines (on page 1171)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a coordinate system by lines


1. Create the lines needed to define the coordinate system. Two lines are needed for the
direction of the first axis and the general direction of the second axis on the (first axis, second
axis) plane. Create the lines by using another geometric construction line interface.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. Click CSByLines on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. In the Assign Axes To box, select the initial axes and plane to define.
4. In the Coordinate System box, select Direct.
5. Select the first line for the direction of the first axis.
6. Select the second line for the general direction of the second axis.
A preview of the coordinate system appears. The direction of the third axis is determined by
the right-hand rule.
7. If there are multiple solutions for the first or second axis, such as when a line extends beyond
the origin, click , select a tracking point, and select the needed value for Track Flag.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1171


Geometric Constructions

8. If the third axis is not in the needed direction, select Indirect in the Coordinate System box.
The direction of the third axis is flipped.
9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CSByPoints in the Geometric
Construction Explorer.
10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Coordinate System by Points

Tooltip: CSByPoints
Creates a coordinate system from three points. The first point defines the origin. The second
point defines the direction of the first axis. The third point defines the general direction of the
second axis.

Required Input Output


Points Coordinate system
Parameters
Initial axes to create, such as (x,y) or (y,z)
Direction of third axis

Coordinate System by Points Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the

Molded Forms User's Guide 1172


Geometric Constructions

numbered step options listed below.


Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the point to use as the coordinate system origin.
2 - Specifies the point to define the direction of the first axis of the value selected for Assign
Axes To. For example, if (z,x) is selected, this point defines the direction of the Z-axis.
3 - Specifies the point to define the general direction of the second axis of the value selected for
Assign Axes To. For example, if (z,x) is selected, this point defines the general direction of the
X-axis. This point must be on the (first axis, second axis) plane.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1173


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Assign Axes To - Specifies the axes to define by the selected points. The first value defines the
axis for point 2. The second value defines the axis for point 3. Select (x,y), (y,z), (z,x), (y,x), (z,y),
or (x,z).
Coordinate System - Specifies the direction of the third axis. Select Direct to use the right-hand
rule to define the third axis. Select Indirect to define the third axis in the opposite direction.

What do you want to do?


 Place a coordinate system at a point (on page 1175)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1174


Geometric Constructions

 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Place a coordinate system at a point


1. Create the points needed to define the coordinate system. Three points are needed for the
origin, the direction of the first axis from the origin, and the general direction of the second
axis on the (first axis, second axis) plane. Create the points by using Insert > Control Point,
Insert > Topological Points, or other geometric construction point interfaces.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323)
Points (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1028)
2. Click CSByPoints on the Geometric Construction Palette.
3. In the Assign Axes To box, select the initial axes and plane to define.
4. In the Coordinate System box, select Direct.
5. Select the origin point.
6. Select the point for the direction of the first axis.
7. Select the point for the general direction of the second axis.
A preview of the coordinate system appears. The direction of the third axis is determined by
the right-hand rule.
8. If the third axis is not in the needed direction, select Indirect in the Coordinate System box.
The direction of the third axis is flipped.
9. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as CSByPoints in the Geometric
Construction Explorer.
10. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
11. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1175


Geometric Constructions

Solids (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box)


The following geometric construction interface creates solids. It is available by selecting More in
the Geometric Construction box of any geometric construction ribbon:
Each command supporting the option displays tabs and interfaces appropriate to
the command.

Solid by Sweeping - Creates a solid from a set of planar cross-section curves and
path curves. For more information, see Solid by Sweeping (on page 1176).

Solid by Sweeping
Tooltip: SolidBySweeping
Creates a solid from a set of planar cross-sections and optional path curves. Capping surfaces
are created at the ends of the solid when needed.
This interface is similar to Surface by Sweeping (on page 1153).
The cross-section curves:
 Must be planar, but do not need to be coplanar
 Must be oriented in the same direction to avoid a twist in the surface
 Must each have the same number of vertices
 Must be closed
The paths curves:
 Do not need to be planar
 Must touch the cross-section curves unless there is only one path curve
 Must each have the same number of vertices
The capping faces are:
 Planar surfaces positioned at and bounded by the first and last cross-section curves
 Merged to the main surface, creating the solid
 Not created if the path curves are closed
The following example shows one planar cross-section curve swept along two open path curves.
Capping faces at each end are automatically used to create the closed surfaces of the solid.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1176


Geometric Constructions

The following example shows a torus with a closed cross-section and closed path curve. No
capping faces are needed:

Required Input Output


Planar cross-sections Solid
Optional Input
Path curves

Solid by Sweeping Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1177


Geometric Constructions

Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the cross-section curves.
- Specifies one or more path curves. These curves control the creation of the solid. This
value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1178


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

What do you want to do?


 Place a solid by sweeping between planar cross-sections (on page 1180)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1179


Geometric Constructions

Place a solid by sweeping between planar cross-sections


1. Create the planar cross-section curves needed to define the solid. Optionally, create one or
more path curves to control the sweep through the cross-section curves.
Curves (Geometric Construction Palette Dialog Box) (on page 1061)
2. On the geometric construction ribbon, click More in the Geometric Construction box.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears.
3. Select SolidBySweeping and click OK.
4. Select one or more cross-section curves in order.
5. Optionally, click , and select the path curves.
A preview of the surface appears.
6. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as SolidBySweeping in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
7. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
8. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Standard Chutes (Geometric Construction Palette


Dialog Box)
You can use chute shape geometric construction macros for quick layout of chute design. The
following macros are available to create chute shapes in material handling mode. They appear in
the Molded Forms Advanced Plate System command on the Standard Chutes tab of the
Geometric Construction Palette.
A complete chute is typically made from three macros. The top macro is the head section, the
middle is the transition section, and the bottom is a bifurcated or spoon section.

Head Section Type A - Creates a chute type A head section. For more
information, see Head Section Type A.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1180


Geometric Constructions

Head Section Type B - Creates a chute type B head section. For more
information, see Head Section Type B.

Head Section Type C - Creates a chute type C head section. For more
information, see Head Section Type C.

Transition Section Type A - Creates a chute type A middle transition section. For
more information, see Transition Section Type A.

Transition Section Type B - Creates a chute type B middle transition section. For
more information, see Transition Section Type B.

Transition Section Type C - Creates a chute type C middle transition section. For
more information, see Transition Section Type C.

Bifurcated Section Type A - Creates a chute type A bottom bifurcated section.


For more information, see Bifurcated Section Type A.

Spoon Section Type A - Creates a chute type A bottom spoon section. For more
information, see Spoon Section Type A.

Limitations
 The software creates the chute as a single plate system with bent knuckles.
 You cannot place stiffener profiles on the chute plate system.
 You cannot place edge reinforcements on the chute plate system.
You can only place openings on the chute plate system by using topological openings. You
cannot sketch openings in the Sketch 2D environment. For more information, see Topological
Openings Dialog Box in the Molded Forms User's Guide.

Head Section Type A


Tooltip: HeadSectionTypeA
Creates a chute type A head section.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1181


Geometric Constructions

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Head Section Type A Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1182


Geometric Constructions

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1183


Geometric Constructions

Specify the following dimensions:

COR - Cutout radius


PCPD - Pulley centerpoint depth
PCPL - Pulley centerpoint length
HSL - Head section length
HSD - Head section depth
HSW - Head section width
HSOL - Head section opening length
HSCA1 - Head section converging angle

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1184


Geometric Constructions

Place a chute shape


1. In Grids, create a coordinate system at the required inlet location of the chute shape using
one of the following commands:
 Grid Wizard

 Place Coordinate System

 Place Coordinate System by Three Points


For more information, see the Grids User's Guide.
You do not need to create grid planes for the coordinate system.

2. In Molded Forms, click Advanced Plate System on the vertical toolbar.


The Advance Plate System ribbon appears.
3. Select Construction from the Macro Definition list.
OR
If Construction was selected earlier in the same session and is visible in the Macro
Definition list, click Plate Definition by 3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon appear.
4. On the Standard Chutes tab of the Geometric Construction Palette, click a chute shape
macro.
The ribbon for the macro appears.
5. Select the coordinate system in the graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.
The chute shape surface name displays in to the Geometric Construction Explorer. Green
preview geometry displays in the graphic view.
6. If required, type new parameter values.
7. Click Continue.
The preview geometry color changes to gray in the graphic view.
8. Click Close.
The Advance Plate System ribbon reappears.
9. Click Finish.
The software creates the chute plate system.

Create a chute using multiple chute shapes


Place the head chute shape
1. In Grids, create a coordinate system at the required inlet location of the chute head section
using one of the following commands:
 Grid Wizard

Molded Forms User's Guide 1185


Geometric Constructions

 Place Coordinate System

 Place Coordinate System by Three Points


For more information, see the Grids User's Guide.
You do not need to create grid planes for the coordinate system.

2. In Molded Forms, click Advanced Plate System on the vertical tool bar.
The Advance Plate System ribbon appears.
3. Select Construction from the Macro Definition list.
OR
If Construction was selected earlier in the same session and is visible in the Macro
Definition list, click Plate Definition by 3D .
The Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, Geometric Construction Explorer
dialog box, and Geometric Construction ribbon appear.
4. On the Standard Chutes tab of the Geometric Construction Palette, click a head section
macro.
The ribbon for the macro appears.
5. Select the coordinate system in the graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.
The chute shape surface name displays in to the Geometric Construction Explorer. Green
preview geometry displays in the graphic view.
6. If needed, type new parameter values.
7. Click Continue.
The software changes the preview geometry color to gray in the graphic view and adds the
head section to the Geometric Construction Explorer.

Place the transition chute shape


1. On the Standard Chutes tab of the Geometric Construction Palette, click a transition
section macro.
The ribbon for the macro appears.
2. Select the local coordinate system at the outlet of the head section. Select the coordinate
system in the graphic view or the Geometric Construction Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1186


Geometric Constructions

In the Geometric Construction Explorer, the coordinate system is one of the two
[Not Named] items for the head section chute shape.

The chute shape surface name displays in to the Geometric Construction Explorer. Green
preview geometry displays in the graphic view.
3. If required, type new parameter values. Check the compatibility of dimensions where the
head section and the transition section meet. For example, if you are using type B sections,
the values of BL and W at the outlet of the head section equal the values of TSBL and
TSBW on the inlet of the transition section.
4. Click Continue.
The software changes the preview geometry color to gray in the graphic view and adds the
transition section to the Geometric Construction Explorer.

Place the bottom chute shape


1. On the Standard Chutes tab of the Geometric Construction Palette, click a bottom
bifurcated or spoon section macro.
The ribbon for the macro appears.
2. Select the local coordinate system at the outlet of the transition section. Select the coordinate
system in the graphic view or the Geometric Construction Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1187


Geometric Constructions

In the Geometric Construction Explorer, the coordinate system is one of the two
[Not Named] items for the transition section chute shape.

The chute shape surface name displays in to the Geometric Construction Explorer. Green
preview geometry displays in the graphic view.
3. If required, type new parameter values. Check the compatibility of dimensions where the
transition section and the bottom section meet. For example, if you are using type B
transition and spoon sections, the values of TSBOL and TSBOW at the outlet of the
transition section equal the values of SSLand SSTW on the inlet of the spoon section.
4. Click Continue.
The software changes the preview geometry color to gray in the graphic view and adds the
bottom section to the Geometric Construction Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1188


Geometric Constructions

Merge the chute shapes


1. On the Surfaces tab of the Geometric Construction Palette, click SurfBySurfaces.

The ribbon for the geometric construction appears.


2. In the Merge surfaces box, click Do not merge co-planar surfaces.
3. Select each chute shape surface.
You can select the surfaces in the Geometric Construction Explorer. For each
chute shape, the surface is one of the two [Not Named] items.

4. Click Continue.
The software changes the preview geometry color to gray in the graphic view and adds
SurfBySurfaces to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
5. On the Surfaces tab of the Geometric Construction Palette, click SurfWithKnuckles.

The ribbon for the geometric construction appears.


6. Select SurfBySurfaces on the Geometric Construction Explorer.
The surface representing the merged chute shapes highlights.
7. Click Continue.
The software changes the preview geometry color to gray in the graphic view and adds
SurfWithKnuckles to the Geometric Construction Explorer.
8. Click Close.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1189


Geometric Constructions

The Advance Plate System ribbon reappears.


9. If required, select a parent system and a plate type.
10. Click Finish.
From the merged chute shapes, the software creates a chute as a single plate system with
bent knuckles.

Move a chute
1. In the Grids task, click and select the coordinate system used to position a chute.
The Place Coordinate System by Three Points ribbon appears.
2. Move the coordinate system to the required location.
3. Click Finish.
For more information, see Place Coordinate System by Three Points in the Grid User's Guide.

Head Section Type B


Tooltip: HeadSectionTypeB

Molded Forms User's Guide 1190


Geometric Constructions

Creates a chute type B head section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Head Section Type B Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1191


Geometric Constructions

 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1192


Geometric Constructions

Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Specify the following dimensions:

BL - Head section bottom length


L1, L2 - Length dimensions
H1, H2, H3, H4, H5, H6, H9 - Width dimensions
H7 - Pulley centerpoint depth
H8 - Pulley centerpoint radius
W - Head section width
A1, A2 - Head section converging angles
A3 - Angle

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1193


Geometric Constructions

 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)


 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Head Section Type C


Tooltip: HeadSectionTypeB
Creates a chute type C head section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Head Section Type C Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close

Molded Forms User's Guide 1194


Geometric Constructions

Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1195


Geometric Constructions

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Specify the following dimensions:

COR - Cutout radius


Width - Head section width
PCPL1, PCPL2 - Pulley centerpoint lengths
PCPD - Pulley centerpoint depth
HSL1, HSL2, HSL3 - Head section lengths
HSD1, HSD2, HSD3 - Head section depths
HSW - Head section width
HSOL - Head section opening length
HSCA1, HSCA2 - Head section converging angles

Molded Forms User's Guide 1196


Geometric Constructions

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Transition Section Type A


Tooltip: TransitionSectionTypeA
Creates a chute type A transition section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Transition Section Type A Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1197


Geometric Constructions

Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system. When a transition section is the center section of a chute,
select the local coordinate system at the outlet of the first (head) section.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1198


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1199


Geometric Constructions

Specify the following dimensions:

TSAL - Transition section A length


TSAW - Transition section A width
TSAOL - Transition section A opening length
TSAOW - Transition section A opening width
TSAD - Transition section A depth
TSARA - Transition section A rotation angle of the outlet (TSAOL x TSAOW) relative to the inlet
(TSAL x TSAW)

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Transition Section Type B


Tooltip: TransitionSectionTypeB

Molded Forms User's Guide 1200


Geometric Constructions

Creates a chute type B transition section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Transition Section Type B Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric

Molded Forms User's Guide 1201


Geometric Constructions

Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system. When a transition section is the center section of a chute,
select the local coordinate system at the outlet of the first (head) section.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject

Molded Forms User's Guide 1202


Geometric Constructions

Clears the selections for the current step.


Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Specify the following dimensions:

TSBL - Transition section B length


TSBW - Transition section B width
TSBOL - Transition section B opening length
TSBOW - Transition section B opening width
TSBD - Transition section B depth
TSBA - Transition section B angle
TSBRA - Transition section B rotation angle of the outlet (TBOL x TSBOW) relative to the inlet
(TSBL x TSBW)

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1203


Geometric Constructions

Transition Section Type C


Tooltip: TransitionSectionTypeC
Creates a chute type C transition section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Transition Section Type C Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1204


Geometric Constructions

 A different, recently-used interface.


 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system. When a transition section is the center section of a chute,
select the local coordinate system at the outlet of the first (head) section.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1205


Geometric Constructions

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Specify the following dimensions:

TSCL - Transition section C length


TSCW - Transition section C width
TSCD - Transition section C depth
TSCOL - Transition section C opening length
TSCOW - Transition section C opening width
TSCCA - Transition section C converging angle
TSCDA - Transition section C diverging angle
TSCRA - Transition section C rotation angle of the outlet (TSCOL x TSCOW) relative to the inlet
(TSCL x TSCW)

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1206


Geometric Constructions

 Move a chute (on page 1190)


 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Bifurcated Section Type A


Tooltip: BifurcatedSectionTypeA
Creates a chute type A bifurcated section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Bifurcated Section Type A Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction

Molded Forms User's Guide 1207


Geometric Constructions

ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system. When a bifurcated section is the final section of a chute,
select the local coordinate system at the outlet of the center (transition) section.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1208


Geometric Constructions

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Specify the following dimensions:

BSL - Bifurcated section length


BSW - Bifurcated section width
BSOL - Bifurcated section opening length
BSD - Bifurcated section depth
BSD1 - Bifurcated section depth at bifurcation
BSA1 - Bifurcated section angle at bifurcation

Molded Forms User's Guide 1209


Geometric Constructions

BSA1 - Bifurcated section angle

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Spoon Section Type A


Tooltip: SpoonSectionTypeA
Creates a chute type A spoon section.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Chute shape, as a single plate system
Parameters
Chute dimensions

Spoon Section Type A Ribbon


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1210


Geometric Constructions

Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1 - Specifies the coordinate system. When a spoon section is the final section of a chute, select
the local coordinate system at the outlet of the center (transition) section.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1211


Geometric Constructions

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until you
click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1212


Geometric Constructions

Specify the following dimensions:

SSL - Spoon section length


SSTL - Spoon section total length
SSD1 - Spoon section depth 1
SSD2 - Spoon section depth 2
SSOL - Spoon section opening length
SSTD - Spoon section total depth
SSTW - Spoon section total width
SSA1 - Spoon section angle 1
SSA2 - Spoon section angle 2

What do you want to do?


 Place a chute shape
 Create a chute using multiple chute shapes
 Move a chute (on page 1190)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1213


Geometric Constructions

Geometric Construction Explorer


Displays geometry related to the selected geometric construction interface. The geometry is
added after you define parameters for the interface and click Continue on the Geometric
Construction ribbon.
When creating a new object, such as a curve or a surface, the geometry is temporary and is not
named.

Geometry used to create the object is saved with the object and named. When modifying an
existing object, the geometry names display.

The Geometric Construction Explorer displays parameters in a hierarchical list similar to the
Workspace Explorer. Selecting a geometry name highlights the geometry in the graphic view.

Commands
The following commands are available by right-clicking an item in the hierarchical list:
Show
Turns on the graphical display of a hidden object in the graphic view.
Hide
Turns off the graphical display of an object in the graphic view. The names of hidden objects
display in italics in the Geometric Construction Explorer.
Export
Exports the selected geometric construction to an XML file. This command is only available
when you right-click the top level geometric construction set.
Import
Imports a previously exported geometric construction from an XML file into the workspace.
The imported geometric construction replaces any existing geometric construction. This
command is only available when you right-click the top level geometric construction set.
Export and Import are primarily intended for use by administrators creating complex
geometric construction macros. The commands can also be used to save multiple geometric
constructions, such as a set of seams or profile stiffener landing curves on a hull, that you may
not complete in a single session, or that you want to reuse in a similar model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1214


Geometric Constructions

Color Coding
You can identify the purpose of objects by the text color:
Black text - An individual geometric construction macro.
Red text - A shared parameter used by multiple geometric constructions.
Blue text - Output geometry from the macros.

1 - Geometric
construction
2 - Shared parameter
3 - Output
4 - Geometric
construction set

Error Display
When a required input for a geometric construction is deleted, the Geometric Construction
Explorer displays an error, such as those shown in the following example.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1215


SECTION 18

Importing ACIS and IGES Data


You can temporarily import geometry data in ACIS or IGES format from other software packages,
such as Tribon, NAPA, or Rhino. You can compare the temporary geometry to the geometry of
objects in the model.
For more information about importing ACIS and IGES data, see Import ACIS (File Menu) (on
page 1216) and Import IGES (File Menu) (on page 1216).

 You must have a license for IGES to use the Import > IGES command.
 The data in the Geometry Analysis and Repair task is not saved in a session file or in the
database. If you delete geometry, or define or refresh the workspace, the imported geometry
is lost. You must export the data to an external file to save it.
 The imported geometry cannot be used to create objects in the database.

Import ACIS (File Menu)


File > Import > ACIS imports wireframe and surface data from a file in the Acis .sat format. The
imported geometry is not saved in the session file or in the database. After processing the data,
you will need to export it to save your work. For more information, see Export ACIS (File Menu)
(on page 1236).

Import ACIS or IGES data


1. Click File > Import > ACIS or File > Import > IGES, depending on what type of data to
import.
2. Browse to locate the file.
3. Click Open.

 A log file is saved in the folder where the input file resides.
 You can import data over other data. The effect is cumulative.

Import IGES (File Menu)


File > Import > IGES imports wireframe and surface geometry data from a file in IGES format
into the software. The imported geometry is not saved in the session file or in the database. After
processing the data, you will need to export it to save your work. For more information, see
Export IGES (File Menu) (on page 1236).
You must have a license for IGES in order to use this command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1216


SECTION 19

Importing Stiffeners and Seams


You can import one or more complete profile stiffener or seam systems from Microsoft Excel
workbook files. All stiffener and seam definition types and all data associated with each creation
type are supported.
Import modifies existing stiffener or seam objects if objects with the same names already exist on
the selected plate system. Relationships and properties of the existing objects are maintained.
Errors are written to a log file if the modification causes incorrect definitions. The software does
not overwrite existing log files. It appends new errors to the end of the log file.
Import Seams (File Menu) (on page 1225)
Import Stiffeners (File Menu) (on page 1217)

Import Stiffeners (File Menu)


File > Import > Stiffeners imports stiffener profile systems from a Microsoft Excel workbook. All
stiffener definition types (by intersection, by offset, by projection, and by table) can be imported.
All stiffener data associated with each definition type are supported, including names, attributes,
cross-section types, wireframe coordinates, boundaries, and orientations.
Import Stiffener Dialog Box (on page 1218)
Stiffener Import Workbook (on page 1218)

Import stiffener or seam data


1. Create an Excel workbook with the stiffener or seam data to be imported. For more
information, see Stiffener Import Workbook (on page 1218) and Seam Import Workbook (on
page 1226).
2. Select the root plate system on which you want to import the stiffeners or seams.
3. Click File > Import > Stiffeners or File > Import > Seams.
4. Define the location of the Excel workbook in Open File.
5. Define the location and name of the log file in Log File.
6. Click Submit.

 Click Cancel on the Import Progress dialog box to stop the import. Processing completes on
the current stiffener or seam, updates the log file, and closes the dialog box.
 After import finishes, click View to see the log file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1217


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Import Stiffener Dialog Box


Sets options for importing stiffener data.
Plate System
Displays the selected plate system.
Open File
Specifies the name of and path to the Microsoft Excel workbook file containing stiffener data.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the workbook.
Log File
Specifies the name of and path to the log file that is created during import.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the log file.
Submit
Starts importing stiffeners from the specified workbook.
Cancel
Cancels the command and closes the dialog box.
Close
Closes the dialog box. Use after import finishes.

Stiffener Import Workbook


An Excel workbook must have specific formatting to import profile stiffeners. The stiffener
import-export format.xls workbook is provided as a template of the format needed for each
stiffener type. The workbook is delivered to the [Product Folder]\MoldedForms\Data folder.
Configuration and Summary worksheets in the workbook are provided only for information, and
are not required for import.
Each worksheet represents a type of stiffener and the attributes of the stiffener. When a stiffener
has been imported into the model, it is like a stiffener of the same type created using the
command in the software. Attributes on a worksheet correspond to attributes on the Properties
dialog box or attributes created using a control on the software ribbon.
Multiple stiffeners of the same type may be defined on each worksheet. Each stiffener definition
must end with a Finish row. Multiple worksheets may be defined in the same workbook.
Sections common to all worksheets:

Header-Main section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Properties dialog box of the profile ribbon. For more
information, see Main Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 730).
Name
Name (Main tab)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1218


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

NamingCategory
Naming Category (Main tab)
Type
Type (Main tab)
Continuity
Continuity (Main tab)
Priority
Continuity Priority (Main tab)
Description
Description (Main tab)

Header-XC section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Properties dialog box of the profile ribbon. For more
information, see Cross Section Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732) and Section
Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) (on page 732).
This section is not used on the Tripping worksheet.
SectionType
Section Type (Cross Section tab)
SectionSize
Section Size (Cross Section tab)
Material
Material (Cross Section tab)
Grade
Grade (Cross Section tab)
PrimaryOrient
Primary Orientation (Section Orientation tab)
SecondaryOrient
Secondary Orientation (Section Orientation tab)
MountingFace
Mounting Face (Section Orientation tab)
LoadPoint
Load Point (Section Orientation tab)
ProjectionMethod
Landing Curve Projection Method (Section Orientation tab)
AttachmentMethod
Attachment Method (Section Orientation tab)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1219


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Header-Bound section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Boundary Definition step of the profile ribbon.
For more information, see Boundary Methods (on page 80).
Boundary 1
Name of the first boundary object. If the boundary is a grid plane, define the name using the
grid plane name format (see below).
Boundary 2
Name of the second boundary object. If the boundary is a grid plane, define the name using
the grid plane name format (see below).
Ambiguity
Defines whether the boundaries create an ambiguous solution, equivalent to using the
Solve Ambiguity step of the profile ribbon. Type True or False. For more information,
see Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).
The hull is the most common boundary to create an ambiguous solution.
AmbiX
X-coordinate on the selected solution.
AmbiY
Y-coordinate on the selected solution.
AmbiZ
Z-coordinate on the selected solution.

Header-Orient section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Profile Orientation Definition step of the profile
ribbon. For more information, see Profile Orientation (on page 88).
This section is not used on the Tripping worksheet.
OrientNumber
Sequential number for a point defining rule regions.
PointType
The type of point defining rule regions. Type StartPoint, RegionBoundary, or EndPoint.

 The first point must always be StartPoint.


 The last point must always be EndPoint.
OrientInt.Object
The object intersecting the landing curve to create the definition point. Type None or the
object name. If the object is a grid plane, define the name using the grid plane name format
(see below).
X
X-coordinate of the definition point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1220


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Y
Y-coordinate of the definition point.
Z
Z-coordinate of the definition point.
Rule
Orientation rule used at the definition point. Type ProfileOrientationNormal,
ProfileOrientationUpDown, ProfileOrientationPortStarboard, ProfileOrientationForeAft,
ProfileOrientationPlanar, ProfileOrientationTwistLinearGirth,
ProfileOrientationTwistLinearOrthogonal, or ProfileOrientationTwistCubic.
Angle
Angle used by the orientation rule at the definition point.
AngleRef
Plane in which to measure the angle. Type ProfileAnglePlaneNormal or
ProfileAnglePlaneOrthogonal.
Plane
Angle reference plane from which the angle is measured. Type ProfileReferenceNormal,
ProfileReferenceUpDown, ProfileReferencePortStarboard, or ProfileReferenceForeAft.

Intersection worksheet
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-XSec, Header- Bound, Header-Intersect,
Header-Orient, and Finish.

Header-Intersection Section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Stiffener Profile System by Intersection
command. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Intersection Ribbon in Stiffener
Profile System by Projection (on page 746).
Method
Type Coincident. This is the required value.
Object
Grid plane used to create the landing curve. Define the name using the grid plane name
format (see below).
Offset
Type 0. This is the required value.

Offset worksheet
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-XSec, Header- Bound, Header-Offset, Header-Orient,
and Finish.

Header-Offset section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Stiffener Profile System by Offset command.
For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Offset Ribbon.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1221


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

BaseCurve
Base curve definition. If the base curve is defined by a grid plane, define the name using the
grid plane name format (see below).
Offset
Offset value for the landing curve from the base curve.
OffsetMethod
Method used to offset the landing curve from the base curve. Type Girth, Vertical,
Transverse, or Longitudinal.

Projection worksheet
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-XSec, Header- Bound, Header-Project,
Header-Orient, and Finish.

Header-Project section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection
command. For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by 2D Projection Ribbon.
SketchPlaneMethod
Sketch plane method used. Type Coincident or Offset. Other sketch plane methods, such
as Angle from Plane, Plane by Point & Vector, Plane by Three Points, and Plane by Vectors
Normal, cannot be used for import.
Offset
Offset value for the sketch plane if the Offset SketchPlaneMethod type is used. Type 0 if the
Coincident SketchPlaneMethod type is used.
Object
Grid plane or object used to create as the sketch plane. If the object is a grid plane, define
the name using the grid plane name format (see below).
FileName
Type the fully qualified path and the .sha file name containing the sketch curve. If the .sha file
is in the same folder as the import workbook, then only the file name is required.

Table worksheet
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-XSec, Header- Bound, Header-Table,
Header-IntPlane, Header-Orient, and Finish.

Header-Table section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Stiffener Profile System by Table command.
For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Table Ribbon in Stiffener Profile System by
Table (on page 755) and Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).
LCNumber
Sequential number for a point on the landing curve.
PointType

Molded Forms User's Guide 1222


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Type Definition or Knuckle.


IntTab.Object
Intersecting object that helps to define two coordinate values of the landing curve point.
X-Reference
X-coordinate of the landing curve point. Type 0 if the coordinate is derived.
X-Offset
Offset value form the X-reference. Type 0 is there is no offset.
Y-Reference
Y-coordinate of the landing curve point. Type 0 if the coordinate is derived.
Y-Offset
Offset value form the Y-reference. Type 0 is there is no offset.
Z-Reference
Z-coordinate of the landing curve point. Type 0 if the coordinate is derived.
Z-Offset
Offset value form the Z-reference. Type 0 is there is no offset.
DerivedCoord
Type X, Y, or Z for the derived coordinate.

Header-IntPlane section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Intersection Plane option of the Stiffener Profile
System by Table command. This section is optional and is used when the coordinates of
only two points are known for a landing curve on a plate system with curvature. For more
information, see Stiffener Profile System by Table Ribbon in Stiffener Profile System by Table (on
page 755) and Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).
BasePlane
Grid plane in which to measure the angle used to define the intersection plane. Define the
name using the grid plane name format (see below).
NormalToPlane
Normal to Base Plane. Defines whether the intersection plane is oriented normal to the base
plane. Type True or False.
MeasureFrom
Defines the plane from which to measure the angle used to define the intersection plane.
Type Horizontal or Vertical.
IntPlaneAngle
Angle. The angle of the intersection plane, measured from the Horizontal or Vertical plane.

Tripping worksheet
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-XSec, Header- Trip, and Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1223


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Header-Trip section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Tripping Stiffener command. For more
information, see Tripping Stiffener System Ribbon in Tripping Stiffener System (on page 765).
B1
Starting object for the tripping stiffener.
B1ConnectType
Connection type between the tripping stiffener and starting object. Type Connected, Lapped,
Parallel, Perpendicular, Transverse, Vertical, Longitudinal, Fixed X, Fixed Y, Fixed Z, or
End Connect.
B2
Ending object for the tripping stiffener.
B2ConnectType
Connection type between the tripping stiffener and ending object. Type Connected, Lapped,
Parallel, Perpendicular, Transverse, Vertical, Longitudinal, Fixed X, Fixed Y, Fixed Z, or
End Connect.

Configuration worksheet
Date
The date on which the export was performed. This field can be blank for import.
IntelliShip Version
The version of software from which the export was performed. This field can be blank for
import.
User
The name of the active user. This field can be blank for import.
ModelDB
The name of the model database. This field can be blank for import.
CatalogDB
The name of the catalog database. This field can be blank for import.
PlateSystem
The plate system name. This field can be blank for import.
Number Exported
The number of stiffeners included in the export. This field can be blank for import.
CoordSystemSepa
A coordinate system separator character that is not part of the coordinate system or
reference plane names.
Use the same character throughout the workbook. "@" is recommended.
Do not use the backslash character. ("\").
Distance Unit

Molded Forms User's Guide 1224


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

This unit can be meters (M) or millimeters (MM).


Angle Unit
This unit can be Degrees or Radians.

Grid Plane Name Format


If an object is a grid plane, define the name by typing the coordinate system, a coordinate system
separator character, and the grid plane name. For example, CS_O@L-21.
Choose a coordinate system separator character that is not part of the coordinate system or
reference plane names.
Use the same character throughout the workbook. "@" is recommended.
Do not use the backslash character. ("\").
See Also
Import Stiffener or Seam Data (on page 1217)
Import Stiffeners (File Menu) (on page 1217)

Import Seams (File Menu)


File > Import > Seams imports design seams from a Microsoft Excel workbook. All seam
definition types (by intersection, by offset, by projection, and by table) can be imported. All seam
data associated with each definition type are supported, including names, attributes, wireframe
coordinates, and boundaries.
Import Seam Dialog Box (on page 1225)
Seam Import Workbook (on page 1226)

What do you want to do?


 Import Stiffener or Seam Data (on page 1217)

Import Seam Dialog Box


Sets options for importing seam data.
Plate System
Displays the selected plate system.
Open File
Specifies the name of and path to the Microsoft Excel workbook file containing seam data.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the workbook.
Log File
Specifies the name of and path to the log file that is created during import.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the log file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1225


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Submit
Starts importing seams from the specified workbook.
Cancel
Cancels the command and closes the dialog box.
Close
Closes the dialog box. Use after import finishes.

Seam Import Workbook


An Excel workbook must have specific formatting to import design seams. The stiffener
import-export format.xls workbook is provided as a template of the format needed for each
seam type. The workbook is delivered to the [Product Folder]\MoldedForms\Data folder.
Configuration and Summary worksheets in the workbook are provided only for information, and
are not required for import.
Each worksheet represents a type of seam and the attributes of the seam. When a seam has
been imported into the model, it is like a seam of the same type created using the command in
the software. Attributes on a worksheet correspond to attributes on the Properties dialog box or
attributes created using a control on the software ribbon.
Multiple seams of the same type may be defined on each worksheet. Each seam definition must
end with a Finish row. Multiple worksheets may be defined in the same workbook.
Sections common to all worksheets:

Header-main section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Properties dialog box of the profile ribbon. For more
information, see Main Tab (Seam Properties Dialog Box) (on page 904).
Name
Name (Main tab)
Type
Type (Main tab). Type DesignSeam.

Header-Bound section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Boundary Definition step of the profile ribbon.
For more information, see Boundary Methods (on page 80).
Boundary 1
Name of the first boundary object. If the boundary is a grid plane, define the name using the
grid plane name format, below.
Boundary 2
Name of the second boundary object. If the boundary is a grid plane, define the name using
the grid plane name format, below.
Ambiguity
Defines whether the boundaries create an ambiguous solution, equivalent to using the Solve
Ambiguity step of the profile ribbon. Type True or False. For more information, see

Molded Forms User's Guide 1226


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Solve ambiguous solution created by selected boundaries (on page 82).


The hull is the most common boundary to create an ambiguous solution.
AmbiX
X-coordinate on the selected solution.
AmbiY
Y-coordinate on the selected solution.
AmbiZ
Z-coordinate on the selected solution.

Intersection worksheet:
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-Bound, Header- Intersect, and Finish.

Header-Intersect section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Seam by Intersection command. For more
information, see Seam by Intersection Ribbon in Seam by Intersection (on page 902).
Method
Type Coincident. This is the required value.
Object
Grid plane used to create the landing curve. Define the name using the grid plane name
format, below.
Offset
Type 0. This is the required value.

Offset worksheet:
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-Bound, Header- Offset, and Finish.

Header-Offset section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Seam by Offset command. For more information,
see Seam by Offset Ribbon in Seam by Offset (on page 905).
BaseCurve
Base curve definition. If the base curve is defined by a grid plane, define the name using the
grid plane name format, below.
Offset
Offset value for the landing curve from the base curve.
OffsetMethod
Method used to offset the landing curve from the base curve. Type Girth, Vertical,
Transverse, or Longitudinal.

Projection worksheet:
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-Bound, Header- Project, and Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1227


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Header-Project section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Design Seam by Projection command. For
more information, see Seam by Projection (on page 908).
SketchPlaneMethod
Sketch plane method used. Type Coincident or Offset. Other sketch plane methods, such
as Angle from Plane, Plane by Point & Vector, Plane by Three Points, and Plane by Vectors
Normal, cannot be used for import.
Offset
Offset value for the sketch plane if the Offset SketchPlaneMethod type is used. Type 0 if the
Coincident SketchPlaneMethod type is used.
Object
Grid plane or object used to create as the sketch plane. If the object is a grid plane, define
the name using the grid plane name format, below.
FileName
Type the fully qualified path and the .sha file name containing the sketch curve. If the .sha file
is in the same folder as the import workbook, then only the file name is required.

Table worksheet:
The section order is: Header-Main, Header-Bound, Header- Table, Header-IntPlane, and Finish.

Header-Table section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Stiffener Profile System by Table command.
For more information, see Stiffener Profile System by Table Ribbon in Stiffener Profile System by
Table (on page 755) and Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).
LCNumber
Sequential number for a point on the landing curve.
PointType
Type Definition or Knuckle.
IntTab.Object
Intersecting object that helps to define two coordinate values of the landing curve point.
X-Reference
X-coordinate of the landing curve point. Type 0 if the coordinate is derived.
X-Offset
Offset value form the X-reference. Type 0 is there is no offset.
Y-Reference
Y-coordinate of the landing curve point. Type 0 if the coordinate is derived.
Y-Offset
Offset value form the Y-reference. Type 0 is there is no offset.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1228


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Z-Reference
Z-coordinate of the landing curve point. Type 0 if the coordinate is derived.
Z-Offset
Offset value form the Z-reference. Type 0 is there is no offset.
DerivedCoord
Type X, Y, or Z for the derived coordinate.

Header-IntPlane section
Contains attributes equivalent to using the Intersection Plane option of the Stiffener Profile
System by Table command. This section is optional and is used when the coordinates of
only two points are known for a landing curve on a plate system with curvature. For more
information, see Stiffener Profile System by Table Ribbon in Stiffener Profile System by Table (on
page 755) and Landing Curve Table Dialog Box (on page 760).
BasePlane
Grid plane in which to measure the angle used to define the intersection plane. Define the
name using the grid plane name format, below.
NormalToPlane
Normal to Base Plane. Defines whether the intersection plane is oriented normal to the base
plane. Type True or False.
MeasureFrom
Defines the plane from which to measure the angle used to define the intersection plane.
Type Horizontal or Vertical.
IntPlaneAngle
Angle. The angle of the intersection plane, measured from the Horizontal or Vertical plane.

Configuration worksheet:
Date
The date on which the export was performed. This field can be blank for import.
IntelliShip Version
The version of software from which the export was performed. This field can be blank for
import.
User
The name of the active user. This field can be blank for import.
ModelDB
The name of the model database. This field can be blank for import.
CatalogDB
The name of the catalog database. This field can be blank for import.
PlateSystem
The plate system name. This field can be blank for import.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1229


Importing Stiffeners and Seams

Number Exported
The number of stiffeners included in the export. This field can be blank for import.
CoordSystemSepa
A coordinate system separator character that is not part of the coordinate system or
reference plane names.
Use the same character throughout the workbook. "@" is recommended.
Do not use the backslash character. ("\").
Distance Unit
This unit can be meters (M) or millimeters (MM).
Angle Unit
This unit can be Degrees or Radians.

Grid Plane Name Format


If an object is a grid plane, define the name by typing the coordinate system, a coordinate system
separator character, and the grid plane name. For example, CS_O@L-21.
Choose a coordinate system separator character that is not part of the coordinate system or
reference plane names.
Use the same character throughout the workbook. "@" is recommended.
Do not use the backslash character. ("\").
See Also
Import Seams (File Menu) (on page 1225)
Import Stiffener or Seam Data (on page 1217)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1230


SECTION 20

Import Ship Structure


File > Import > Ship Structure, available in the Molded Forms and Structural Detailing tasks,
imports Tribon marine structure XML data into Smart 3D for planning and outfitting work.
TM
To use this command, you must purchase and install the Intergraph Smart 3D Tribon
Interface (SEBY812AG) from Smart 3D. Please contact Intergraph Support for licensing
information.
Before you can import the data into Smart 3D, you must export the data from Tribon Initial Design
Version M3 (Version 1.3). Smart 3D only supports XML in Schema V3 format.

Import Ship Structure Dialog Box (on page 1231)

Import ship structure data


1. Export data from Tribon Initial Design to create an M3 XML file.
2. In Smart 3D, select File > Import > Ship Structure.
The Import Ship Structure dialog box appears.
3. Click the button next to the XML file or path box to navigate to the appropriate folder location,
and do one of the following:
Click Open to process all of the valid XML files in the folder.
OR
Select the individual XML file to use for import, and then click Open.
4. Click the button next to the Map file box to select the XLS map workbook to use for import,
and then click Open.
5. Select a system to use as the parent for the imported data.
6. Click OK to import the Tribon data as specified, or click Submit Job to run the import as a
batch job.
For more information about setting up the batch service, see Installing Batch
TM
Services in the Intergraph Smart 3D Installation Guide.

Import Ship Structure Dialog Box


Sets options for importing Tribon XML data.
XML file or path
Specify the name of and path to the XML file exported from Tribon. To process multiple files
simultaneously, specify the name of and path to the folder that contains the XML files to
import. Alternatively, you can use the browse feature and navigate to the file or folder of files
to be used for import.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1231


Import Ship Structure

Map file
Specify the name of and path to the mapping file between the Tribon XML data and the
Smart 3D data in the catalog. For more information, see Import Translation Map Workbook
(on page 1232).
System
Select a system in the Smart 3D model under which to place the imported data.

Import Translation Map Workbook


The Microsoft Excel workbook named SM_Mapping.xls is delivered in the [Reference Data
Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TribonTranslator\MappingFiles folder. This workbook maps Tribon
material and cross-section names to Smart 3D material and cross-section names.
The Cross Section worksheet maps profile cross-section names between the Tribon XML file and
Smart 3D.
Cross Section Worksheet (on page 1232)
The Material worksheet maps Tribon material names to Smart 3D material names.
Material Worksheet (on page 1232)

Cross Section Worksheet


The Cross Section sheet of the SM_Mapping.xls workbook maps Tribon profile cross-section
names in the XML file to Smart 3D profile cross-section names.
Section Name
Type the Smart 3D profile cross-section name.
Imported Family Name
Type the Tribon profile cross-section name as it appears in the XML file.
The last item listed for each section type is the default value for that section type.

Material Worksheet
The Material sheet of the SM_Mapping.xls workbook maps Tribon materials in the XML file to
Smart 3D materials.
Material Type
Type the Smart 3D material type.
Material Grade
Type the Smart 3D material grade.
Imported Material Grade
Type the Tribon material name as it appears in the XML file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1232


SECTION 21

Import Bocad
The File > Import > Structure > Bocad command imports a Bocad® .bti file into Smart 3D.

Import of Attributes/Properties
Attributes that were defined in bocad and exported can be mapped and imported to Smart 3D
properties using the sample UserAttribute_Map.xlm file. These attributes are included in the
BOCAD_Master_Physical_Map.xml file. This file is delivered with Smart 3D in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
If the bocad attribute that you want to map does not have an equivalent property in Smart 3D, you
need to add that property to Smart 3D (using bulkload) before you can map to it in the xml file.
If the bocad attribute does not have an entry in the mapping files but a property with the same
name exists in the Smart 3D, then that third-party attribute imports and populates the Smart 3D
property even though it is not in the mapping file.

Member Orientation and Member Type


The physical orientation of the member determines the member type during import.
 If the bocad member name exactly matches an existing member type defined in Smart 3D,
then the software sets the member to that member type regardless of orientation. For
example, if a member has an orientation greater than 10° from vertical but is named
"Column", the software imports that member as a column despite the member having an
orientation of a vertical brace.
 Members that are vertical or within 10° (1/10 slope) of vertical import as columns.
 Members that are horizontal or within 10° of horizontal import as beams.
 Members that are between 10° of horizontal and 10° of vertical import as vertical braces.
 Members are never imported as horizontal braces as there is no way to distinguish horizontal
braces from beams. You must manually edit the members that are horizontal braces after
import and set the correct member type.
 All curved members import as beams.

Limitations
 Curved members are imported using the resolution defined in the import file.
 Built-up members are imported if the mapping file is defined to do that.
 Previously imported structure is not updated on subsequent imports. In this situation, either
that structure is skipped, replaced, or imported as a copy depending on the import option
chosen.

How to Import a bocad File


1. Select File > Import > Structure > Bocad.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1233


Import Bocad

2. Select the system and coordinate system to use for the imported objects.
3. Select whether to import members (with or without openings) and plates (with or without
openings).
4. Define the .bti file to import.
5. Select the mapping file.
6. Define the location and name for the log file.
7. Select the action to perform when you click Import.
Click Import.

bocad Import Dialog Box


Controls how objects are imported from the bocad .bti file. Be sure to check the Compatibility
Matrix before you import data. Open https://smartsupport.intergraph.com
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com, select View Downloads at the top, and then select
Product Compatibility under Useful Links on the right.
System
Select the system to which to assign the objects being imported. You can define new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task. Select More to display all systems defined
in the workspace or the model.
Coordinate System
Select the coordinate system to use for the imported objects. All objects are placed relative to
this coordinate system.
Members
Select to import members in the import file. Clear this option to not import members in the
import file.
Plates
Select to import plates in the import file. Clear this option to not import plates in the import
file.
Openings
Select to import opening in members and plates. Clear this option to not import openings.
Import File
Define the file name and folder path of the bocad .bti file to read and import.
Mapping file
Specify the mapping file to use. A sample mapping BOCAD_Master_Physical_Map.xml file is
delivered with Smart 3D in the [Product
Folder]\SmartPlantStructure\Symbols\StructureImportExportMaps folder.
Log file
Specify a log file name.
Action
Select whether to import or preview the contents of the bocad file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1234


Import Bocad

 Select Import to import objects from the bocad into the model. This option checks the
unique identification numbers in the bocad file with the identification numbers of the
model objects finding matching objects. Matching objects from the bocad file are skipped
during import because they already exist in the model. Only new members in the bocad
file are imported into the model.
 Select Import as copy to import objects from the bocad into the model. This option does
not compare identification numbers in the bocad file with the identification numbers of
model objects. This option allows you to import the bocad objects as new, unique objects
to the model.
 Select Import and replace to import objects from the bocad into the model. This option
checks the unique identification numbers in the bocad file with the identification numbers
of the model objects finding matching objects. This option deletes the existing, matching
model object and places a new model object from the bocad file. Because of this delete
and replace, other objects connected to the deleted and replaced object must be
reconnected using Member Autoconnect.
 Select Preview to identify problems with the bocad file before the actual import is
attempted. Objects in the bocad file that have not been imported cannot be previewed.
All cross-sections, materials, and plate stocks found in the import file are written to the
log file.
View Log
Opens the log file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1235


SECTION 22

Exporting ACIS and IGES Data


You can export geometry data in ACIS or IGES format. The export operation operates against
selected sheetbody and wirebody objects.
If you are exporting in IGES format, you can set the output data units using the Tools > Options
command. For more information about Tools > Options, see Options in the Common User's
Guide.
For more information about exporting ACIS and IGES data, see Export ACIS (File Menu) (on
page 1236) and Export IGES (File Menu) (on page 1236).

Export ACIS (File Menu)


File > Export > ACIS saves the selected wireframe and surface geometry data to a file in ACIS
format. This command supports the output of geometry to a file but not object properties.

Export IGES (File Menu)


File > Export > IGES saves the selected wireframe and surface geometry data to a file in IGES
format. This command supports the output of geometry to a file but not object properties. You
must have a license for IGES in order to use this command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1236


SECTION 23

Exporting Stiffeners and Seams


You can export one or more complete profile stiffener or seam systems to Microsoft Excel
workbook files. All stiffener and seam definition types and all data associated with each creation
type are supported. Data in the workbooks can be used to import stiffeners or seams into other
Model Databases, or can be changed and imported back into your current model.
See Also
Export Seam Data (on page 1239)
Export Seams (File Menu) (on page 1239)
Export Stiffener Data (on page 1238)
Export Stiffeners (File Menu) (on page 1237)

Export Stiffeners (File Menu)


File > Export > Stiffeners saves the selected stiffener data to a Microsoft Excel workbook. All
stiffener definition types (by intersection, by offset, by 2D projection, and by table) can be
exported. All stiffener data associated with each definition type are supported, including names,
attributes, cross-section types, wireframe coordinates, boundaries, and orientations.
The output workbook uses the stiffener import-export format.xls workbook as a template. For
more information, see Stiffener Import Workbook (on page 1218).

Export Stiffeners Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to save profile stiffener system data to a Microsoft Excel
workbook. Geometry and attribute data are exported.
Select
Specifies profile stiffener systems to be exported. Selection is based on the Filter option.

Export
Opens the Export Stiffeners dialog box, which you use to specify export file names and
properties. For more information, see Export Stiffeners Dialog Box (on page 1238).
Reject
Clears all selected stiffeners.
Accept
Accepts all selected stiffeners.
Filter
Filters the object type available with Select . The Plate option allows selection of all
profile stiffeners on a plate. The Stiffeners option allows selection of individual profile
stiffeners.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1237


Exporting Stiffeners and Seams

Export stiffener data


1. Click File > Export > Stiffeners.
2. Define the Filter for profile stiffener selection.
3. Select a root plate system if the Plate filter is defined. Select one or more stiffeners from the
same plate system if the Profiles filter is defined.
4. Click Export.
5. Define the location and name of the Excel workbook in Save As.
6. Define the location and name of the log file in Log File.
7. Click Submit.

 Click Cancel on the Export Progress dialog box to stop the export. Processing completes
on the current stiffener, updates the log file, and closes the dialog box.
 After export finishes, click View to see the log file.

Export Stiffeners Dialog Box


Sets options for exporting stiffener data to a Microsoft Excel workbook.
Coordinate System Separator
Defines a character that is inserted into workbook cells between the coordinate system name
and the reference plane name. The character is used when a reference plane is part of
stiffener definition, such as for the intersection plane, the sketch plane, or boundaries. The
default value is @.

 Choose a character that is not part of the coordinate system or reference plane names.
 Do not use the backslash character "\". This character has special meaning to the
Windows operating system.
Save As
Specifies the name of and path to the new workbook file containing exported stiffener data.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the workbook.
Log File
Specifies the name of and path to the new log file that is created during export.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the log file.
Submit
Starts exporting stiffener data to the specified workbook.
Cancel
Cancels the command and closes the dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1238


Exporting Stiffeners and Seams

Close
Closes the dialog box. Use after export finishes.
See Also
Export Stiffeners (File Menu) (on page 1237)
Export Stiffeners Dialog Box (on page 1238)

Export Seams (File Menu)


File > Export > Seams saves the selected seam data to a Microsoft Excel workbook. All seam
definition types (by intersection, by offset, by 2D sketch, and by table) can be exported. All seam
data associated with each definition type are supported, including names, attributes, wireframe
coordinates, and boundaries.
The output workbook uses the stiffener import-export format.xls workbook as a template. For
more information, see Seam Import Workbook (on page 1226).

Export Seams Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to save profile seam data to a Microsoft Excel workbook.
Geometry and attribute data are exported.
Select
Specifies seams to be exported. Selection is based on the Filter option.

Export
Opens the Export Seams dialog box, which you use to specify export file names and
properties. For more information, see Export Seams Dialog Box (on page 1240).
Reject
Clears all selected seams.
Accept
Accepts all selected seams.
Filter
Filters the object type available with Select . The Plate option allows selection of all
seams on a plate. The Seams option allows selection of individual seams.

Export seam data


1. Click File > Export > Seams.
2. Define the Filter for seam selection.
3. Select a root plate system if the Plate filter is defined. Select one or more seams from the
same plate system if the Seams filter is defined.
4. Click Export.
5. Define the location and name of the Excel workbook in Save As.
6. Define the location and name of the log file in Log File.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1239


Exporting Stiffeners and Seams

7. Click Submit.

 Click Cancel on the Export Progress dialog box to stop the export. Processing completes
on the current seam, updates the log file, and closes the dialog box.
 After export finishes, click View to see the log file.

Export Seams Dialog Box


Sets options for exporting seam data to a Microsoft Excel workbook.
Coordinate System Separator
Defines a character that is inserted into workbook cells between the coordinate system name
and the reference plane name. The character is used when a reference plane is part of seam
definition, such as for the intersection plane, the sketch plane, or boundaries. The default
value is @.

 Choose a character that is not part of the coordinate system or reference plane names.
 Do not use the backslash character "\". This character has special meaning to the
Windows operating system.
Save As
Specifies the name of and path to the new workbook file containing exported seam data.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the workbook.
Log File
Specifies the name of and path to the new log file that is created during export.
 Browse - Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
 View - Opens the log file.
Submit
Starts exporting seam data to the specified workbook.
Cancel
Cancels the command and closes the dialog box.
Close
Closes the dialog box. Use after export finishes.
See Also
Export Seam Data (on page 1239)
Export Seams (File Menu) (on page 1239)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1240


SECTION 24

Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)


File > Export > Neutral/GeniE Export saves the model data to a neutral or GeniE XML format.
For neutral XML, data from the following types of objects are exported:
 Plate systems
 Bracket systems
 Profiles systems, which include beam systems, profile edge reinforcement systems, and
stiffener systems.
 Member systems
 Openings
 Compartments
 Loadings
 Coordinate systems
For GeniE XML, data from the following types of objects are exported:
 Plate systems
 Bracket systems
 Profiles systems, which include beam systems, profile edge reinforcement systems, and
stiffener systems
 Member systems
 Openings
 Slabs
 Equipment
 Equipment foundations
 Footings
 Ladders
 Stairs
 Hand rails
 Analysis loads
 Load cases
 Load combinations

 The deactivated plate and stiffener leaf systems are skipped during export.
 Export to neutral output requires a S3N license key installed on the License server.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1241


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

 Export to GeniE output requires a S3G license key installed on the License server.
This command uses two Microsoft Excel workbooks. For neutral schema output, the command
uses the ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook. By default, this workbook is delivered to the
[Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TranslatorsMarine\AttributeMapFile folder. For
GeniE output, the command uses the S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls workbook, which is delivered
to the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TranslatorsMarine\AttributeMapFile folder.
Before you export model data to either format, you must modify the associated mapping
worksheet to ensure that the required user interfaces and attributes are defined. For more
information, see Export Attribute Mapping Workbooks (on page 1246).

Supported Versions of the GeniE Software


Supported GeniE Version: 7.2-07

Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box (on page 1244)

Export data to Neutral XML


Export to Neutral XML output requires a S3N license key installed on the
License server.
1. Click File > Export > Neutral/GeniE Export.
The Export NSchema/GeniE dialog box opens.
2. Define the Filter for selection.
3. Select Neutral from the Output format.
4. Specify the type of plate systems that need to be exported, and the required file type under
External Geometry Export Options section.

 The External Geometry Export Options exports the selected plate systems geometry
to the specified external file type. The remaining plate systems geometry is exported to
the output XML file.
 If you select Imported and IGES, the software exports all of the imported plate systems
geometry to an IGES file format.
 If you select All and IGES, the software exports all of the plate systems geometry to an
IGES file format.
 If you select Non Planar and IGES, the software exports all the non planar systems
geometry to an IGES file format.
 If you select Imported and ACIS, the software exports all of the imported plate systems
geometry to an ACIS file format.
 If you select All and ACIS, the software exports all of the plate systems geometry to an
ACIS file format.
 If you select Non Planar and ACIS, the software exports all the non planar systems
geometry to an ACIS file format.
5. Specify the name and location for the neutral XML file in the XML file box.
6. Specify the name and location for the neutral mapping file in the Mapping file box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1242


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

7. Specify the name and location for the log file in the Log file box.
8. Click OK.
After export finishes, click View XML to see the XML file. Click View Log to see the
log file.

Export data to GeniE XML


Export to GeniE output requires a S3G license key installed on the License
server.
1. Click File > Export > Neutral/GeniE Export.
The Export NSchema/GeniE dialog box opens.
2. Define the Filter for selection.
3. Select GeniE from the Output format.
4. Specify the name and location for the GeniE XML file in the XML file box.
5. Specify the name and location for the GeniE mapping file in the Mapping file box.
6. Specify the name and location for the log file in the Log file box.
7. Click OK.
After export finishes, click View XML to see the XML file. Click View Log to see the
log file.

Configure the GeniE export initialization file


The GenieExportTranslator.ini file controls the export of model data to GeniE XML format. You
can modify the default values to suit your specific project needs.
1. In Windows Explorer, browse to the following location:
[Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TranslatorsMarine\S3DGeniEExport
2. Open the GenieExportTranslator.ini file and modify the options as needed.
3. Save your changes.
SharedContent is delivered in the reference data setup.

GeniE Export Initialization File Global Options


DeveloperLogging
Controls the logging mode. The following values are available:
 0 - Generates the log file in End User mode. This is the default.
 1 - Generates the log file in Developer mode.
GeniEACISVersion
Denotes the ACIS version that GeniE software expects. The following values are available:
 16 - Creates embedded data in ACIS version 16 format. This is the default.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1243


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

 19 - Creates embedded data in ACIS version 19 format . You can give any ACIS version
that GeniE can accept.

Limitations of GeniE Export


GeniE export has the following limitations:
1. GeniE does not import overlapped plates. Before you export to GeniE.xml file, verify that the
plates are not overlapped.
2. Objects with duplicate names are not imported into GeniE. Verify that the objects names are
unique before you export to the GeniE xml file.
3. GeniE export does not support surface loads.
4. GeniE does not support the concept of Slab and Layer. Slab is exported as a plate and the
layer material with larger thickness is exported as plate material to GeniE.

Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box


Sets options for exporting model data to a neutral XML format.

General
Filter
Defines the filter used to determine which objects are exported.
Description
Specifies a text description for the export.
Author
Specifies the author assigned to the export.
Organization
Specifies the organization assigned to the export.

Output Format
Neutral Schema
Indicates that the output XML is in the neutral format. Exporting to neutral schema output
requires a S3N license key installed on the License server.
Genie
Indicates that the output XML is in the GeniE format. Exporting to GeniE output requires a
S3G license key installed on the License server.

External Geometry Export Options


These options specify the type of plate systems to export to the selected file type.

Plate Systems
Imported

Molded Forms User's Guide 1244


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

Exports all of the imported plate systems geometry to the specified file type. The remaining
plate systems geometry is exported to the output XML file.
All
Exports all of the plate systems geometry to the specified file type.
Non Planar
Exports all the non planar plate systems geometry to the specified file type. The planar plate
systems geometry is exported to the output XML file.

File Type
IGES
Outputs exported plate systems to an IGES file.
ACIS
Outputs exported plate systems to an ACIS file.
Plate System File options are not applicable for the GeniE output format. When
you select Genie, these options are unavailable. By default, all the plate systems are
exported to the GeniE XML file.

Paths
XML File
Specifies the name of and path to the XML file that is created during export.
Mapping File
Specifies the name of and path to the mapping file that is used during export.
Log File
Specifies the name of and path to the log file that is created during export.
Browse
Uses the Open dialog box to select the path.
OK
Starts exporting to the XML file, and closes the dialog box.
Cancel
Cancels the command, and closes the dialog box.
Apply
Starts exporting to the XML file, but does not close the dialog box.
View Log
Displays the log file.
View XML
Displays the XML file.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1245


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

Export Attribute Mapping Workbooks


The ExportAttributeMapping.xls and S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls workbooks are used to
define mapping attributes required for model data export. By default these files are delivered to
the [Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TranslatorsMarine\AttributeMapFile and
[Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TranslatorsMarine\S3DGeniEExport folders.
ExportAttributeMapping.xls (on page 1246)
S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls (on page 1250)
See Also
Export Data to Neutral XML (on page 1242)
Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box (on page 1244)

ExportAttributeMapping.xls
The ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook consists of all required types of translation mapping
worksheets. Before you export Smart 3D model data, you must modify these mapping
worksheets to ensure that all of the necessary criteria have been met.

Worksheets
Index
Provides an index of all the other sheets in the workbook.
NSchemaMap
Provides the main mapping sheet for neutral schema mapping. This sheet in turn refers to
the other NSchema mapping sheets.
Smart3DClassMap
Maps the supported classes between Smart 3D and the neutral schema. This is the main
mapping sheet for the neutral schema translation.
CompartmentMap
Maps structural compartment user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the
neutral schema.
SpatialLoadingMap
Maps structural spatial load user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
UnitLoadingMap
Maps structural unit load user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
ModelDetailsMap
Maps model details between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
ModelAdditionalAttributesMap
Maps model additional model attributes between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
AdditionalAttributesMap

Molded Forms User's Guide 1246


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

Maps additional model attributes between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
PrincipalParticulars
Maps principal particulars attributes between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
ThirdPartyDetailsMap
Maps third party application details between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
ThirdPartyApplicationAttrMap
Maps third party application attribute details between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
ThirdPartyAdditionalAttrMap
Maps third party additional attribute details between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.
ShipCrossSectionMap
Maps the Smart 3D cross-section user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the
neutral schema.
MemberSystemMap
Maps the member system user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
MemberPartMap
Maps the member part user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
DesignMemberPartMap
Maps the design member part user attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the
neutral schema.
PlantCrossSectionMap
Maps the Smart 3D cross-section attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the
neutral schema.
GlobalsMap
Defines global settings for data export to the neutral schema.
RootPlateSystemMap
Maps the root plate system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
LeafPlateSystemMap
Maps the leaf plate system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
RootProfileSystemMap
Maps the root profile system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
LeafProfileSystemMap
Maps the leaf profile system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1247


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

RootBracketSystemMap
Maps the root bracket system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
LeafBracketSystemMap
Maps the leaf bracket system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
RootEdgeReinforcementSystemMap
Maps the root edge reinforcement system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and
the neutral schema.
LeafEdgeReinforcementSystemMap
Maps the leaf edge reinforcement system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and
the neutral schema.
RootBeamSystemMap
Maps the root beam system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
LeafBeamSystemMap
Maps the leaf beam system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
CoordinateSystemMap
Maps the coordinate system attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral
schema.
OpeningMap
Maps the opening attributes and interfaces between Smart 3D and the neutral schema.

Mapping Sheets Columns


Source Attribute
Defines the Smart 3D object attribute to map.
Target Attribute
Defines the neutral schema attribute to which the Smart 3D attribute value is mapped.
MapType
Defines the map type of the attribute. Acceptable values are as follows:
 NameDef - Used when the value needs to be directly transferred. For example, there is
an attribute named Name in the source system and the same attribute named name in
the target system. Because both attributes have the same meaning, the value just needs
to be transferred between the two systems. By default, if no MapType is specified,
NameDef is used.
 ValueDef - Used when the value of an attribute needs to be mapped before it is
transferred.
 AdditionalAttributeDef - Used when it is necessary to create new or additional
attributes for the value of a given attribute.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1248


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

 PatternDef - Used when any valid regular expression can be used to map the values.
 CharacterDef - Used to split the value of an attribute using a delimiter or character
position and string length to generate new attributes.
SheetName
Defines the name of the sheet in the ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook that contains
additional mapping information related to the attribute, if any exists.
Formula
Defines the formula used to calculate the value of the attribute to mapped, if one is needed.
For example, if the source system has an attribute Radius that needs to be mapped to the
destination system's attribute Diameter, the software cannot substitute one value for the
other. Instead the value used for Diameter results from the following calculation: Diameter =
2 * Radius.
Value
Specifies the value of the neutral schema attribute.
Label
Specifies whether the Smart 3D attribute is a label. Type TRUE/YES or FALSE/NO. Entries
can be in lowercase or uppercase.
Ignore
Specifies whether the item is ignored during export. Type TRUE/YES or FALSE/NO. Entries
can be in lowercase or uppercase.

Mapping Tips
Use the labels in Smart 3D to map the direct properties of objects or the properties of the related
objects such as traverse relationships.
The following steps illustrate how to export the structure member weight to the neutral schema
xml file:
1. If a label is not available in the Catalog task, create a label that gives the Structure Member
Weight of the placed member.
For more information about creating labels, see Label Editor Command in the
Catalog User's Guide.
2. Open the MemberPartMap sheet in translation mapping file.
The MemberPartMap sheet is available in the ExportAttributeMapping.xls
workbook. By default, the ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook is available in the
following location:
[Reference Data Folder]\SharedContent\Data\TranslatorsMarine\AttributeMapFile.
3. Map the Smart 3D Attribute to the corresponding Neutral Schema Attribute.
4. Type TRUE in the Label column.
5. Save the mapping file.
Label mapping is not applicable for GeniE export functionality.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1249


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

Hierarchical Mapping
The ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook also supports hierarchical mapping between source
and target systems. For example, if the source object has an attribute value called web length on
a cross-section object using the following hierarchy:
IJUAXSectionWeb.WebLength
If the above hierarchy is matched with Web.WebLength on the target system, then you can
directly map this hierarchy in the Value and Target Attribute columns.
This hierarchical mapping is applicable until a child item is a direct attribute on its
parent.

S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls
This workbook contains mapping for both neutral schema and GeniE export. That is, it contains
all the sheets of the ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook and the mapping sheets needed for
GeniE export. In the existing sample mapping sheets, you can add new mapping entries.

Worksheets
Index
Provides an index of all the other sheets in the workbook. It describes all other sheets in the
workbook.
GeniEMap
Provides the main mapping sheet for GeniE mapping. This sheet in turn refers to the other
GeniE mapping sheets.
GeniEClassMap
Maps the supported structure classes between Smart 3D and GeniE export. This is the main
mapping sheet for the GeniE translation.
GeniEGlobalsMap
Defines global settings for data export to GeniE Schema.
StraightMemSystemAttrsMap
Maps the straight member system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
CurvedMemSystemAttrsMap
Maps the curved member system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
StraightMemPartAttrsMap
Maps the straight member part attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
CurvedMemPartAttrsMap
Maps the curved member part attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1250


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

StraightStiffenerSysAttrsMap
Maps the straight stiffener system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
CurvedStiffenerSysAttrsMap
Maps the curved stiffener system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
StraightERSysAttrsMap
Maps the straight edge reinforcement system attributes and interfaces between the neutral
and GeniE schemas.
CurvedERSysAttrsMap
Maps the curved edge reinforcement system attributes and interfaces between the neutral
and GeniE schemas.
BeamSysAttrsMap
Maps the beam system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
MaterialMap
Maps the material attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
ApplicationDetailsMap
Maps the application details between the neutral and the GeniE schemas.
UnitsNameMap
Maps the unit names and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
UnitsMap
Maps the unit attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
FlatBarXSectionMap
Maps the flat bar cross-section attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
AngleXSectionMap
Maps the angle cross-section attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
GeneralXSectionMap
Maps the generic cross-section attributes and interfaces between Neutral and GeniE
Schema.
IXSectionMap
Maps the I-cross-section attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
ChannelXSectionMap
Maps the channel cross-section attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
TubeXSectionMap
Maps the tubular cross- section attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE

Molded Forms User's Guide 1251


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

schemas.
BoxXSectionMap
Maps the box cross-section attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
XSectionAdditionalAttrMap
Maps the cross-sectional additional attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
SlabAttrsMap
Maps the slab attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
FlatPlateSysAttrsMap
Maps the flat plate system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
CurvedPlateSysAttrsMap
Maps the curved plate system attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
EquipmentAttrsMap
Maps the equipment attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
EqpFoundationAttrsMap
Maps the equipment foundation attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
FootingAttrsMap
Maps the footing attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
StairAttrsMap
Maps the stair attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
LadderAttrsMap
Maps the ladder attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
HandRailAttrsMap
Maps the hand rail attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
LoadCaseAttrMap
Maps the load case attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
LoadCombinationAttrMap
Maps the load combination attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE
schemas.
PointLoadAttrMap
Maps the point load attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.
UDLAttrMap
Maps the UDL load attributes and interfaces between the neutral and GeniE schemas.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1252


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

Mapping Sheets Column Description


Source Attribute
Defines the neutral schema attribute to be mapped.
Target Attribute
Defines the GeniE schema attribute to which the neutral schema attribute value is mapped.
MapType
Defines the map type of the attribute. Acceptable values are as follows:
 NameDef - Used when the value needs to be directly transferred. For example, there is
an attribute named Name in the source system and same attribute named name in the
target system. Because both attributes have the same meaning, the value just needs to
be transferred between the two systems. By default, if no MapType is specified,
NameDef is used.
 ValueDef - Used when the value of an attribute needs to be mapped before it is
transferred.
 AdditionalAttributeDef - Used when it is necessary to create new or additional
attributes for the value of a given attribute.
 PatternDef – Used when any valid regular expression can be used to map the values.
 CharacterDef - Used to split the value of an attribute using a delimiter or character
position and string length to generate new attributes.
SheetName
Defines the name of the sheet in the ExportAttributeMapping.xls workbook that contains
additional mapping information related to the attribute, if any exists.
Formula
Defines the formula used to calculate the value of the attribute to mapped, if one is needed.
For example, if the source system has an attribute Radius that needs to be mapped to the
destination system's attribute Diameter, the software cannot substitute one value for the
other. Instead the value used for Diameter would result from the following calculation:
Diameter = 2 * Radius.
Value
Specifies the value of the neutral schema attribute.
Label
Specifies whether the Smart 3D attribute is a label. Type TRUE/YES or FALSE/NO. Entries
can be in lowercase or uppercase.
Ignore
Specifies whether the item is ignored during export. Type TRUE/YES or FALSE/NO. Entries
can be in lowercase or uppercase.

Hierarchical Mapping
The S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls workbook also supports hierarchical mapping between
source and target systems. For example, if the source object has an attribute called COG on
Equipment using the following hierarchy:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1253


Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu)

EquipmentProperties.Physical.DryCoG.Point3D.X
And if the above hierarchy is matched with cog.x on the target system, then you can directly map
this hierarchy in the Source Attribute and Target Attribute columns.
This hierarchical mapping is applicable until a child item is a direct attribute on its
parent.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1254


SECTION 25

Copy by Family
The Edit > Copy by Family command replicates structural objects on the Select Copy Family
dialog box using three methods:
 Copy Similar replicates major portions of the model with the ability to automatically update
the replicas as changes are made. A copy similar family consists of groups of structure with
similar grid planes. One group is copied to the other groups. A typical example is to define a
transverse bulkhead, including profile stiffeners, seams, and openings, and copy the
bulkhead to other transverse locations.
 Copy Symmetry replicates portions of the model across a longitudinal centerline symmetry
grid plane. A copy symmetry family consists of groups of structure on both the port and
starboard sides of the symmetry plane. One group is reflected about the symmetry plane to
the other group.
 Copy Across Models replicates major portions of a model to another model.
Within the Create Target Group and Modify Target Group, you can manually select
objects to copy. For more information, see Manually copy objects (on page 1271).

Copy by Family Batch Services


Smart 3D uses the SmartPlant Batch Services application to help you perform Copy by Family
functions in the background. You can submit the batch jobs that are executed in a batch queue.
For this, you must create, enable, and start batch queues before submitting the batch jobs.
For more information about SmartPlant Batch Services, see the Batch Services User’s
Guide and the Batch Services Quick Start Guide.
You can use the following guidelines listed to run the batch services:
 SmartPlant Batch Services must be installed on the client workstation that submits a batch
job and on the batch server workstation that processes the job. The necessary software
queues must also be created. For information on installing SmartPlant Batch Services and
setting up the batch queues, see Installing SmartPlant Batch Services in the Smart 3D
Installation Guide.
 The batch jobs that are submitted using this functionality can only be monitored by the
SmartPlant Batch Services application.
 Use the Intergraph Batch Manager tool provided by the Intergraph Batch Services to
discontinue any batch job. The Batch Timeout property specified on the Property page is no
longer valid.
 The mapped account that performs the batch job does not need to be an administrator on the
batch server.
 The batch processes run as a Windows service using a configured login. You do not need to
be logged on to the batch server.
 In the Intergraph Batch Server Properties (Local Computer) > Log On, make sure Allow
service to interact with desktop is selected.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1255


Copy by Family

 For Windows XP batch servers, grant Write permissions for each mapped account to
the %SYSTEMDRIVE%/Documents and Settings/Default User/Application
Data/Microsoft/AddIns folders.
 For 64-bit batch servers, the %windir%/SysWOW64/config/systemprofile/desktop folder must
be manually created and every mapped account must have Write access on that folder. For
most machines, the %windir% folder is be located in the C:/Windows. However this may vary
depending on your Windows installation.
 For batch jobs, Microsoft Excel must have the same security settings that are necessary for
interactive updates. Configure Microsoft Excel for every SmartPlant Batch Services mapped
account on the batch server, so that it can be accessed by the batch processes. For more
information, see Reports User’s Guide.
 Microsoft Excel must be opened on the batch server at least once by each SmartPlant Batch
Services mapped user. Also, Trust Settings for Microsoft Excel must be included.
 For Windows 7 batch servers, the registry key
HKEY_USERS/.DEFAULT/Software/Microsoft/VBA must be manually created with Write
permissions given individually for each mapped account.

Select Copy Family Dialog Box

Toolbar
Create New Similar Family
Creates a new copy similar family. For more information on creating copy similar families,
see Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1276).

Create New Symmetry Family


Creates a new symmetry family. For more information on creating copy symmetry families,
see Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279).

Create New Across Model Family


Creates a new across model family. For more information on creating across model families,
see Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box (on page 1281).
Delete Family Definition
Deletes the selected family.
Rename Family Definition
Renames the selected family. You must select a family before you can rename that family.

Edit Family Definition


Edits the selected family. You must select a family before you can edit that family.
Refresh Family
Removes any relationships created in the family by using the Synchronize command and
the Copy by Family ribbon. For example, Refresh Family restores highlighting of objects in
the graphics view for the Find and correlate objects step if that step has been
previously carried out.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1256


Copy by Family

Copy Shortcuts
Configures copy shortcut keys for similar or symmetry families and specify a log file to store
the copy operation. For more information, see Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box (on page
1284).

Copy Family Hierarchy


Copy Across Model Families
Lists the Copy Across Model Families that you have defined.

Copy Similar Families


Lists the copy similar families that you have defined.

Copy Symmetry Families


Lists the copy symmetry families that you have defined.
Batch
Displays the Copy by Family Batch dialog box. You can use this dialog box to execute jobs
in a batch queue. For more information, see Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box (on page
1285).
Synchronize
Opens the Copy by Family ribbon for the selected family.
Close
Closes the dialog box.

Copy by Family Ribbon


The Copy by Family ribbon copies structural objects between the source and target family
groups, and keeps the family groups in synchronization. Similar families and symmetry families
both use the ribbon. The ribbon is available after clicking Synchronize on the Select Copy
Family dialog box.

Find and correlate objects


Select to highlight similar or symmetrical structural objects that meet the criteria of both the
Source Group and Target Group of the Similar or Symmetry family. When you click Finish,
the software adds the objects to the copy family so that duplicates are not created during the
copy. Select Find Man to manually add objects that were not found automatically.
The search for similar/symmetry objects first considers if they have the same inputs (that is,
the same boundaries, supporting frame, and so on). It then matches geometry (for example,
starboard plate is the same as the mirrored port plate). For similar relationships, parametric
changes caused by the hull are recognized.
Because this is a strong matching criterion, multiple finds in the same group are typically
caused by the same object being placed twice. These overlapping finds are reported as
errors for you to fix, and the similar/symmetry relation is not made.
Because this is such a strong criteria, the Manual Find option allows you to force objects to
be similar that are not similar according to the automatic criteria. After using Manual Find,
you can run Find and correlate objects to match objects that use the manually similar
entities as inputs.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1257


Copy by Family

Use the Find and correlate objects option before a copy or modify operation if there is a
chance that a similar/symmetry object has been created in the target area after initially using
the Copy by Family command.
Potential similar or symmetry objects can be created in the target area by the following
operations:
 Creating a new object in the target area.
 The copy result of a different family copies an object into the same target area.
 An automatic process creates a new object in the target area. For example, the execute
split command creates intersection seams in the target area that are similar to the source
area.

Create target group copy


Select to highlight objects in the source group that are not in the target group. The software
automatically finds all plate systems that use the grid plane of the source group as the
surface definition. The software then finds all children of the plate system (seams, stiffeners,
openings, and features) and all the structural objects that are bounded by either the grid
plane or the plate systems defined by the grid plane and all their children. You can click
objects in the graphics view to clear them and prevent them from being copied from the
source group to the target group. Select Browser to clear objects in a hierarchical list. The
software displays the cleared objects in green in both the graphics view and the Browser.
When you click Finish, all highlighted objects are copied to create the target group.

Modify target group copy


Select to highlight objects that are different between the source and target groups. If a family
for which a copy has already been created contains changed copied objects or new objects,
use this option to update the target group copy. You can click objects in the graphics view to
clear them and prevent them from being updated. Select Browser to clear objects in a
hierarchical list. The software displays the cleared objects in green in both the graphics view
and the Browser. When you click Finish, all highlighted objects are updated in the target
group.

Delete target group copy


Select to highlight objects that have been previously copied and deleted from the source
group, but remain in the target group. You can click objects in the graphics view to clear them
and prevent them from being deleted in the target group. The software marks these cleared
objects as recognized differences between the groups and displays the objects in green.
Select Browser to clear objects in a hierarchical list. The software displays the cleared
objects in green in both the graphics view and the Browser. When you click Finish, all
highlighted objects are deleted from the target group.
Finish
Performs the copy create, modify, or delete as appropriate.
Reject
Resets the selected objects.
Accept
Confirms that the selected objects are the ones you want to work on.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1258


Copy by Family

Family
Select the family to work with. You can create new families by using the Create New Similar
Family or Create New Symmetry Family commands on the Select Copy Family
dialog box. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 1283).
Source Filter
Select the filter to be used by the create or modify operations.

 When you copy or update objects in a similar or symmetry family, the <Filter> +
Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from the Select Filter
dialog box so that the Copy by Family operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter. When the <Filter> +
Workspace Filter option is in use, the Source Filter box is highlighted in yellow, and the
Find and Delete buttons are unavailable. The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option
supports only similar and symmetry families.
 When you copy across models, you can select the Select Filter option to display all
filters in the model corresponding to those in the source model of the selected copy
across model family. Select the filter you need from the Select Filter dialog box. Your
filter selection is remembered in the session file and is used as the default source filter
the next time you copy across models. For more information, see Select Filter Dialog Box
(on page 1282).
Source Group
Select the family group to use as the copy source.
Target Group
Select one or more family groups to create or modify.
Browser
Opens a browser similar to the Workspace Explorer that lists objects included in the target
group copy. You can clear objects from the browser. The CDF tab (Copy Dependent Full)
lists the objects in a hierarchy. The CDT tab (Copy Dependent by Type) sorts the objects by
type. You can de-select objects from the browser. The software displays selected objects in
yellow and cleared objects in green.

Family Synchronize Options


Defines find, create, and modify options for synchronizing the family. For more information,
see Synchronize Options Dialog Box (on page 1275).

What do you want to do?


 Create a copy similar family using a single grid plane (on page 1260)
 Create a copy similar family using multiple grid planes (on page 1261)
 Modify a copy similar family (on page 1262)
 Delete a copy similar family (on page 1262)
 Create a copy symmetry family (on page 1262)
 Modify a copy symmetry family (on page 1263)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1259


Copy by Family

 Delete a copy symmetry family (on page 1263)


 Create a copy across models family using a single grid plane (on page 1263)
 Create a copy across models family using multiple grid planes (on page 1264)
 Create a copy across models family by range (on page 1264)
 Modify a copy across model family (on page 1265)
 Delete a copy across model family (on page 1265)
 Copy objects in a similar family (on page 1265)
 Update objects in a similar family (on page 1266)
 Delete objects in a similar family (on page 1267)
 Copy objects in a symmetry family (on page 1269)
 Update objects in a symmetry family (on page 1269)
 Delete objects in a symmetry family (on page 1270)
 Manually copy objects (on page 1271)
 Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts (on page 1271)
 Copy objects in an across model family (on page 1272)
 Find and correlate objects across models (on page 1273)
 Select the source filter for copy across models (on page 1273)
 Schedule a Copy by Family operation as a batch job (on page 1274)
 Configure the Smart 3D batch queues (on page 1274)
 Configure account mapping for batch services (on page 1275)

Create a copy similar family using a single grid plane


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Similar Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Similar Family Properties dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.
4. Select the definition method for the family: Standard, By Range, or Overlapping.
5. Select the box in the grid under the .G 1 group heading.
6. In the Workspace Explorer, select the grid plane that defines the objects in .G 1.
7. Select the box in the grid under the .G 2 group heading.
8. In the Workspace Explorer, select the grid plane that defines the location of .G 2.
9. Optionally, click Insert group if you need more than two groups in the family.
10. Define the grid planes for any new groups as you did for .G 2.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1260


Copy by Family

11. Click OK.

 By default, .G 1 is the copy source group for the family (as indicated by the check in the group
heading). You can specify another group to be the copy source by selecting the checkbox in
that group's heading.
 All structural objects that are related to the plane in a group are included in the group after
Synchronize is performed. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on
page 1283).
 You can select a group column heading box (for example, .G 1) and rename the group.

Create a copy similar family using multiple grid planes


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Similar Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Similar Family Properties dialog box displays.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.
4. Select the definition method for the family: Standard, By Range, or Overlapping.
5. Select the box in the grid under the .G1 group heading.
6. In the Workspace Explorer, select the first grid plane that defines the objects in .G1.
7. Select the box in the grid under the .G2 group heading.
8. In the Workspace Explorer, select the grid plane that defines the location of .G2.
9. Click Insert corresponding item (row).
10. Select the new (second) box in the grid under the .G1 group heading.
11. In the Workspace Explorer, select the second grid plane that defines the objects in .G1.
12. Select the new (second) box in the grid under the .G2 group heading.
13. In the Workspace Explorer, select the second grid plane that defines the location of .G2.
14. Optionally, click Insert group if you need more than two groups in the family.
15. Define the grid planes for any new groups as you did for .G2.
16. Click OK.

 By default, .G1 is the copy source group for the family (as indicated by the check in the group
heading). You can specify another group to be the copy source by selecting the checkbox in
that group's heading.
 All structural objects that are related to both planes in a group are included in the group after
Synchronize is performed. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on
page 1283).
 You can select a group column heading box (for example, .G1) and rename the group.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1261


Copy by Family

Modify a copy similar family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to modify under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.

3. Click Edit Family Definition in the Select Copy Family dialog box. This activates the
Similar Family Properties dialog box.
4. Using the dialog box controls, edit the family as needed.

 The grid planes in a row cannot be modified. You can delete the group with grid planes to
change, and add a new group.
 An existing row cannot be deleted. You can delete the family in the Select Copy Family
dialog box and create a new one with the needed number of rows.

Delete a copy similar family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to delete under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Delete Family Definition .

Create a copy symmetry family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Symmetry Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Symmetry Family Properties dialog box.
3. Type a unique name for the family in the Name box.
4. In the Workspace Explorer, select one or more coordinate systems to define the symmetry
plane.
The coordinate systems display in the Symmetry Planes box.
All selected coordinate systems must have coincident Y=0 planes.
5. In the Port Group Name box, type a name for the port side group.
6. In the Starboard Group Name box, type a name for the starboard side group.
7. Under Source Group, select whether the port side or the starboard side is the copy source
group.
8. Click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1262


Copy by Family

Modify a copy symmetry family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to modify under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.

3. Click Edit Family Definition in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Symmetry Family Properties dialog box displays.
4. Using the dialog box controls, edit the family as needed.
An existing coordinate system in the Symmetry Planes box cannot be deleted.
You can delete the family in the Select Copy Family dialog box and create a new one with the
needed coordinate system.

Delete a copy symmetry family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to delete under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Delete Family Definition .

Create a copy across models family using a single


grid plane
1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Across Model Family Definition dialog box displays.
3. Type a name for the family in the Name box, or use the default name.
4. Type a value in the Range Growth Value box, or use the default value. The Method
definition is selected as Standard by default.
5. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the target group name, and type
the name.
6. To select the source ship, click the cell Ship Name of the source, and select the ship from
the list. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the source group name,
and type the name.
7. Click the cell Corresponding Elements1 under the Target or Source, and select the grid
plane that defines the target or source group.
8. Click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1263


Copy by Family

All structural objects that are related to the plane in a group are included in the group
after Synchronize is performed. For more information, see Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on
page 1283).

Create a copy across models family using multiple


grid planes
1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Across Model Family Definition dialog box displays.
3. Type a name for the family in the Name box, or use the default name.
4. Type a value in the Range Growth Value box, or use the available value. The Method
definition is selected as Standard by default.
5. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the target group name, and type
the name.
6. To select the source ship, click the cell Ship Name of the source, and select the ship from
the list. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the source Group Name,
and type the name.
7. Click the cell Corresponding Elements1 under the Target or Source, and define the grid
plane that defines the target/source group.
8. Click the Add Corresponding Elements button to add Corresponding Elements rows to
define additional grid planes for the target or source group.
9. Click OK.

Create a copy across models family by range


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Across Model Family Definition dialog box displays.
3. Type a name for the family in the Name box, or use the default name.
4. Type a value in Range Growth Value box, or use the default value.
5. Select Method from the By Range list.
6. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the target group name, and type
the name.
7. To select the source ship, click the cell Ship Name of the source, and select the ship from
the list. To change the Group Name, click the cell corresponding to the source group name,
and type the name.
8. Click the cells Corresponding Elements1 and Corresponding Elements2 under the
Target or Source, and define the grid planes for the target or source group.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1264


Copy by Family

9. Click Add Corresponding Elements to add Corresponding Elements rows to define


additional grid planes for the target/source group. Because there are only two corresponding
elements allowed when the Method definition is By Range, the Add corresponding
Elements and Delete Corresponding Elements buttons are not available.
10. Click OK.

Modify a copy across model family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to modify under the Copy Across Model Families hierarchy.

3. Click Edit Family Definition in the Select Copy Family dialog box.
The Copy Across Model Family Properties dialog box displays.
4. Using the dialog box controls, edit the family definition as needed.

 You can edit the name of the family and the range growth value.
 Optionally, you can add additional Corresponding Elements rows to define additional
grid planes using Add Corresponding Elements.
5. Click Apply or OK to save the changes.

 You cannot change the Method definition.


 The target and source group details cannot be edited.
 For more information on configuration details, see Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box
(on page 1281).

Delete a copy across model family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to delete under the Copy Across Model Families hierarchy.
3. Click Delete Family Definition .

Copy objects in a similar family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1265


Copy by Family

For instructions on creating a new copy similar family, see Create a copy similar
family using a single grid plane (on page 1260) and Create a copy similar family using
multiple grid planes (on page 1261).
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group when you defined the family. For more information, see
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1276).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.
Optionally, select Multiple to copy to more than one target group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .


The software highlights all existing structural objects that are similar and meet the criteria of
both the Source Group and the Target Group.

8. Click Create target group copy on the ribbon.


The software highlights in yellow all the objects in the Source Group that are not in the
Target Group.
9. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the graphics view that you do not want to copy to
the Target Group.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to cyan.
10. Click Finish.
The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.

Update objects in a similar family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to update under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1266


Copy by Family

5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more information, see Copy
Objects in a Similar Family (on page 1265).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.
Optionally, select Multiple to copy to more than one target group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .


The software highlights all existing structural objects that are similar, meet the criteria of both
the Source Group and the Target Group, and have been added after the original copy.

8. Click Modify target group copy on the ribbon.


The software highlights all the objects that are in the Source Group but not in the Target
Group, in both the Source Group and the Target Group but have changed, or have been
added after the original copy.
9. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the graphics view that you do not want to copy to
the Target Group.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to green.
10. Click Finish.
The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.
Within the Create Target Group and Modify Target Group, you can manually select
objects to copy. See Manually Copy Objects (on page 1271).

Delete objects in a similar family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Similar Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Group box, select the group in which objects have been deleted. By default,
this is the group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more information,
see Copy objects in a similar family (on page 1265).
5. In the Target Group box, select the group in which to remove the deleted objects from the
Source Group. Optionally, select Multiple to copy to more than one target group.

6. Click Delete target group copy on the ribbon.


The software highlights all the objects in the Target Group that have been deleted from the
Source Group.
7. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the Target group that you do not want deleted.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to green.
8. Click Finish.
The software deletes the highlighted objects in the Target group. Objects highlighted in
green are not deleted from the Target Group. The software marks the green objects as

Molded Forms User's Guide 1267


Copy by Family

recognized differences between the two groups and excludes the objects from future copy
operations.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1268


Copy by Family

Copy objects in a symmetry family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
For instructions on creating a new copy symmetry family, see Create a copy
symmetry family (on page 1262).
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.
The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group when you defined the family. For more information, see
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .


The software highlights all existing structural objects that have symmetry.

8. Click Create target group copy on the ribbon.


The software highlights in yellow all the objects in the Source Group that are not in the
Target Group.
9. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the graphics view that you do not want to copy to
the Target Group.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to cyan.
10. Click Finish.
The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.

Update objects in a symmetry family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to update under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the filter that the copy uses to find structural objects. By
default, Workspace Filter is used.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1269


Copy by Family

The <Filter> + Workspace Filter option allows you to select a predefined filter from
the Select Filter dialog box so that the operation is performed on only those objects
satisfying both the predefined filter and the Workspace filter.
5. In the Source Group box, select the group from which to copy objects. By default, this is the
group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more information, see
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279).
6. In the Target Group box, select the group to which to copy objects from the Source Group.

7. Click Find and correlate objects .


The software highlights all existing structural objects that are similar, meet the criteria of both
the Source Group and the Target Group, and have been added after the original copy.

8. Click Modify target group copy on the ribbon.


The software highlights all the objects that are in the Source Group but not in the Target
Group, in both the Source Group and the Target Group but have changed, or have been
added after the original copy.
9. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the graphics view that you do not want to copy to
the Target Group.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to green.
10. Click Finish.
The software copies the highlighted objects in the Source group to the Target group.
Within the Create Target Group and Modify Target Group, you can manually select
objects to copy. See Manually copy objects (on page 1271).

Delete objects in a symmetry family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the family to work with under the Copy Symmetry Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Group box, select the group in which objects have been deleted. By default,
this is the group indicated as the source group during the original copy. For more information,
see Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279).
5. In the Target Group box, select the group in which to remove the deleted objects from the
Source Group.

6. Click Delete target group copy on the ribbon.


The software highlights all the objects in the Target Group that have been deleted from the
Source Group.
7. Optionally, select any highlighted objects in the Target group that you do not want deleted.
The color of the highlighted objects changes from yellow to green.
8. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1270


Copy by Family

The software deletes the highlighted objects in the Target group. Objects highlighted in
green are not deleted from the Target Group. The software marks the green objects as
recognized differences between the two groups and excludes the objects from future copy
operations.

Manually copy objects


When using the Create target group copy and Modify target group copy commands
on the Copy by Family ribbon, you can manually select items to copy. Select from the following
two methods:

Copy Preselected Objects


1. Pre-select the needed objects.
2. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

3. To create a target, select Create target group copy , or click Finish.


Preselected objects are copied. Objects on which the selected objects are dependent are
also copied.

4. If you want to modify an existing target, select Modify target group copy , or click
Finish.
Preselected objects are copied. Objects on which the selected objects are dependent are
also copied.
Only the target group is modified, even if you select target and source objects.

Clear Objects and Select Again


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.

2. Clear the Select All checkbox, and select Create target group copy .
All the copy candidates are highlighted in green, indicating that they are no longer selected.
3. Manually select the objects to copy.

Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts


You can replicate objects under similar or symmetry families and update the replicas using
customized shortcut keys.

Configure Copy Shortcuts


1. Define the shortcut keys in the CopybyFamilyShortCutKeys.txt file. The file is located in the
[Product Folder]\CopybyFamily\Data folder.
2. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
3. In the Select Copy Family dialog box, click Copy Shortcuts.
The Copy Shortcuts Settings dialog box displays.
4. Configure each shortcut key as follows:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1271


Copy by Family

a. In the Family cell, specify Similar or Symmetry.


b. In the Source Group cell, specify the family group to use as the copy source.
c. In the Target Group cell, specify the family group to create or modify.
d. In the Select Child cell, specify True to include child objects in the copy operation, or
False to exclude them. The default value comes from the Copy by Family ribbon.
e. In the Molded Form Only cell, specify True if the shortcut key is used only in the Molded
Forms task, or False if it is used across tasks. The default value comes from the Copy
by Family ribbon.
5. In Log File Path, specify a log file for storing the copy shortcuts operation.
6. Click OK.

Replicate Objects Using Shortcut Keys


1. In the Workspace Explorer, select the objects under the family range to be replicated or to
update their replicas.
2. Press the assigned copy shortcut key to start the copy shortcuts operation.
A dialog box displays showing the corresponding family name and stating that the copy or
modify operation is in progress. When the operation is completed, the dialog box closes
automatically.

 If any error occurs during the copy shortcuts operation, a dialog box displays allowing you to
display the log file.
 If there are any unresolved entities on the target side, the browser automatically displays
these entities so that you can resolve them manually.

Copy objects in an across model family


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family , and create a copy across model family. For
information on how to create a across model family, see Create a copy across models family
using a single grid plane (on page 1263) and Create a copy across models family using
multiple grid planes (on page 1264).

3. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
4. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.

5. Click Create target group copy .


6. Click Finish to copy the objects from the source ship to the target ship.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1272


Copy by Family

Find and correlate objects across models


1. In the target ship, click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Click Create New Across Model Family , and create a copy across model family. For
information on how to create a across model family, see Create a copy across models family
using a single grid plane (on page 1263) and Create a copy across models family using
multiple grid planes (on page 1264).

3. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
4. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.

5. Click Find and correlate .


The objects which can be mapped are identified.
6. Click Finish to correlate the objects to the target ship from the specified source ship.
After you perform Find and correlate, the software includes the objects to the
copy family so that duplicates are not created during the synchronize operation.

Select the source filter for copy across models


You can perform copy across models without selecting a filter (No Filter) or by specifying the
Source Filter.

Performing Copy Across Models without specifying a Source Filter


1. In the target ship, click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

2. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays.
4. In the Source Filter box, select the No Filter option.

5. Click Create target group copy .


The message As Source Filter is not specified, all the entities in Source Ship will be
processed. This could take considerable time. Please press OK to continue or Cancel
to stop the operation.
6. Click Yes to perform the copy or No to cancel the copy and specify a different filter.

Performing Copy Across Models specifying a Source Filter


1. In the target ship, click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1273


Copy by Family

2. Select the Copy Across Model Family from the Copy Across Families hierarchy.
3. Click Synchronize.
The Copy by Family ribbon displays. The Source Filter list shows your previously used
filters and the No Filter and Select Filter options. By default, your last used filter is selected.
If this is the first time you synchronize the family, No Filter is the default.
4. In the Source Filter box, select a filter. To select a filter corresponding to those in the source
model of the selected copy across model family, select Select Filter. Select a filter from the
Select Filter dialog box, and click OK.
The Source Filter box does not allow you to type a filter name.

5. Click Create target group copy .


If the filter exists, the copy candidates are selected based on the objects associated with the
filter.
If the specified filter does not exist, the message Filter with the given name does
not exist in Source Ship. Please enter the name of an existing Filter displays. Select
Source Filter for Copy Across Models.

Schedule a Copy by Family operation as a batch job


1. Click Edit > Copy by Family.
The Select Copy Family dialog box displays.
2. Click Batch.
The Copy by Family Batch dialog box displays.
You must configure the batch queues before you can submit a Copy by Family
operation as a batch job. For more information, see Configure the Smart 3D batch queues
(on page 1274).
3. Set up the parameters to meet your needs. For more information, see Copy By Family Batch
Dialog Box (on page 1285).
4. Click Submit.
The Schedule [Task] dialog box displays.
5. Set up the scheduling parameters to meet your needs. For more information, see Schedule
[Task] Dialog Box (on page 1287).

Configure the Smart 3D batch queues


1. Run the configureSP3DBatchQueue.exe utility. By default, this utility is downloaded to the
[Product Folder]\ProjectMgmt\Tools\Bin folder.
The software creates, enables, and starts the SP3DProjectManagement, SP3DPrinting, and
SP3DApplication queues.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1274


Copy by Family

Configure account mapping for batch services


1. Click Start > Intergraph Batch Manager.
2. Click Option Server > Connect To to connect to individual servers.
3. Right-click a server, and select Account Mapping.
The Account Mapping dialog box displays.
4. Type the account mapping details. In the following example, all users and domains from Map
From Account are mapped to the Domain/Host: V91HFTSTBLP and User: dwguser
account.

5. Click Add.
6. Type the password to complete the mapping.
Other mapping options are also possible. For example, the jobs submitted by User-1
can be mapped to Account-1 while the jobs submitted by User-2 can be mapped to Account-2.

Synchronize Options Dialog Box


Find Options
Clear relationships for Source Filter before Find
Removes any relationships created in the family after clicking Find and correlate objects
. This restores highlighting of objects in the graphics view for the Find and correlate
objects step. Clear then Find performs the same function as Refresh Family on
the Select Copy Family dialog box.
This option removes all Copy By Family relationships in the current family
for the objects in the source filter.
To In/Outboard
Changes all port and starboard molded conventions to inboard and outboard before using
the Find and correlate objects command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1275


Copy by Family

Manual Mode
Manually find objects that were not found by the software when using the Find and correlate
objects command. You can select an object for the Source Group and an object for the
Target Group to make them similar or symmetrical.

Create/Modify Options
Molded Forms objects only
Selects molded forms objects.
Select All
Selects all of the objects.
Select Child
Selects the child objects.

Modify Only Options


Geometry Modifications
Finds changes in landing curves.

Similar Family Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the groups and grid planes for a Copy Similar family.

Overview
The Copy Similar method uses a user-defined family of similar grid planes to define what
structural objects are copied and to maintain the relationships between the objects to check for
modifications. You define a family by selecting the grid planes for each group in the family.

In the following example, Group1 is the source group. The software finds all plate systems that
use the Group1 transverse grid plane as the surface definition. The software then finds all

Molded Forms User's Guide 1276


Copy by Family

children of the plate system (seams, stiffeners, openings, and features). Finally, the software
finds all the objects that are bounded by either the select grid plane or the plate systems defined
by the grid plane and all their children.

You can use one grid plane or multiple grid planes in each group to define the family.
In this example, one grid plane defines each group, with Group1 being the source group to be
cloned for the family.

.G 1 .G 2 .G 3 .G 4

F60 F80 F100 F120

In the next example, two transverse grid planes define each group, with Group1 being the source
group to be cloned for the family. Objects between the grid planes, but related to the grid planes,
are also included.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1277


Copy by Family

.G 1 .G 2 .G 3 .G 4

F60 F80 F100 F120

F62 F82 F102 F122

Dialog Box Controls


Name
Type a name for the family. This name must be unique among all family names.
Standard
Defines the Copy Similar Family by specifying one or more rows of grid planes to be used for
the groups. For example:

.G 1 .G 2 .G 3 .G 4

F60 F80 F100 F120

F61 F81 F101 F121

F62 F82 F102 F122

F63 F83 F103 F123

F64 F84 F104 F124

By Range
Defines the Copy Similar Family by specifying a range of grid planes. All grid planes within a
range are included. In this example, the results are the same as the five rows specified for
the Standard example:

.G 1 .G 2 .G 3 .G 4

F60 F80 F100 F120

F64 F84 F104 F124

Overlapping
Defines the Copy Similar Family by specifying a range of grid planes, but ignores structure
that overlaps from one group to the next. For example, in the both the Standard and By
Range examples, a transverse bulkhead could be at the end of the F60-F61 range, but could
also be at the beginning of the F61-F62 range. The Overlapping option prevents the F61
bulkhead from being created twice.
.G X
Displays the groups that you have defined for this family. Check the corresponding box for
the group that you want to copy to the other groups. To add a group to the family, click Insert
group. To remove a group from the family, click Remove group. The name of the group can
be modified. For example, .G 1 can be changed to Group 1 or F60 - 62 Group.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1278


Copy by Family

Insert group
Adds a new group to the family.
Remove group
Removes the selected group from the family.
Insert corresponding item (row)
Inserts another row. Click this button when you want to define a group using multiple grid
planes.
See Also
Copy by Family (on page 1255)
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 1288)
Create a copy similar family using a single grid plane (on page 1260)
Create a copy across models family using multiple grid planes (on page 1264)
Delete a copy similar family (on page 1262)
Modify a copy similar family (on page 1262)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 1283)

Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the groups and symmetry planes for a Copy Symmetry family.
For each symmetry family, a coordinate system is selected, typically the main global coordinate
system. The Y=0 grid plane, the longitudinal centerline of the coordinate system, is automatically
used by the software as the symmetry plane. The software automatically creates two symmetrical
groups, one on each side (port and starboard) of the symmetry plane, containing all the grid
planes for each side. One group is selected as the source group to be cloned. For example, the
software uses all port side grid planes as the source group. The starboard side grid planes are
the corresponding elements for the starboard group. To determine all the structural objects that
belong to the source group, the software finds all objects whose definition is based on the grid
planes, then finds all their children, then finds all the objects that are bounded by either the grid
planes or the systems defined by the grid planes and all their children.

Main tab
Name
Type a name for the copy symmetry family. This name must be unique among all family
names.
Symmetry Planes
Select the coordinate systems to use for the symmetry plane. By default, the software uses
the Y=0 plane of the selected coordinate system as the symmetry plane. If you select more
than one coordinate system, all selected coordinate systems must have coincident Y=0
planes.
Source Group
Select which group is the source for the symmetrical copy.
Port Group Name
Type a name for the port symmetrical group. This name appears when you synchronize the
groups. The default name is Port.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1279


Copy by Family

Starboard Group Name


Type a name for the starboard symmetrical group. This name appears when you synchronize
the groups. The default name is Starboard.
Range Growth Value
Type a value for the range required for selecting the Copy candidates.
Copy MfgData
Copies manufacturing objects.

Configuration tab
Displays the creation, modification, and status information about an object.
Ship
Displays the name of the model. You cannot change this value.
Permission Group
Specifies the permission group to which object belongs. You can select another permission
group, if needed. Permission groups are created in the Project Management task.
Status
Specifies the current status of the selected object or filter. Depending on your access levels,
you may not be able to change the status of the object.
Created
Displays the date and time that the object was created.
Created by
Displays the user name of the person who modified the object.
Modified
Displays the date and time when the object was modified.
Modified by
Displays the user name of the person who modified the object.
See Also
Copy by Family (on page 1255)
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 1288)
Copy Objects in a Symmetry Family (on page 1269)
Create a copy symmetry family (on page 1262)
Delete a copy symmetry family (on page 1263)
Delete objects in a symmetry family (on page 1270)
Modify a copy Symmetry Family (on page 1263)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 1283)
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1276)
Update Objects in a Symmetry Family (on page 1269)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1280


Copy by Family

Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box


Defines an Across Model family. An Across Model family is used to perform Copy Similar across
ships.
To use this functionality when your target and source ship are on different
servers, you must link the servers. For more information, see Linking Servers in the Intergraph
TM
Smart 3D Installation Guide.

Click Create New Across Model Family to open the dialog box.

Main Tab
Name
Type a name for the across model family. This name must be unique among all family names.
The name New Across Model Family is available by default.
Range Growth Value
Type a value for the range required when selecting the Copy candidates. The Range
Growth Value is set to 0.80 m by default.
Copy MfgData
Copies manufacturing objects.
Method
Select the method of the definition of the family. You can select either by Range or Standard.
The Standard method is selected by default.
Ship Name
Displays the name of the target or source ship. The target ship name (name of the
current/active ship) cannot be edited. You can select ships within a site, even if they belong
to different servers.
Group Name
Specifies the name of the target/source group. By default, the name of target/source group is
the same as the target/source ship name. The target/source group name can be edited.
Corresponding Elements 1
Type a frame name, or browse and select from the list in the Select Frame dialog box.
If the frame name you type is not valid or not available, it is highlighted in red. If
you type a new corresponding element name, use the following format:
Coordinate System Name:Frame name. For example, CS_0:F0 where CS_0 is the
Coordinate System name and F0 is the frame name.
Add Corresponding Element
Adds a row for you to type or select corresponding elements.
Because there are only two corresponding elements allowed when the method
definition is By Range, the Add corresponding Elements button is not available.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1281


Copy by Family

Delete Corresponding Element


Removes an element that you have added. This command is available only after you add
corresponding elements.
When the method definition is By Range, the Delete corresponding Elements
button is not available.
See Also
Create a copy across models family using a single grid plane (on page 1263)
Create a copy across models family using multiple grid planes (on page 1264)
Create a copy across models family by range (on page 1264)

Select Filter Dialog Box


Creates, edits, deletes, and selects filters for use with the Define Workspace, Surface Style
Rules, and other Select by Filter commands, including Project Management's Model Data
Reuse (MDR), Drawings View Styles, and Reports commands that require runtime filter selection.
You can access this dialog box in several ways.
 Select File > Define Workspace, and select the More option in the Filter box.
 Select Format > Surface Style Rules, click New or Modify, and then select the More option
in the Filter box.
 Select Tools > Select by Filter.
The tree view displays the following types of filters:
 Catalog Filters - These filters are used to reference data in the Catalog. For example, a
catalog filter could apply to company-wide operations. Your administrator can define
Company_Filter_1, Company_Filter_2, and so forth.
 Model Filters - These filters are available to everyone assigned to a specific model database.
There are delivered catalog filters to query on the different types of model objects. You must
have the appropriate privileges to create, edit, or delete these filters.
 My Filters - These are personal filters that you create and place in the My Filters folder.
They are visible only to you, the owner. You cannot see the personal filters of others, and
they cannot see your personal filters. Select a filter from one of the listed filters, or create a
new filter to meet your specific requirements.
New Folder
Creates a new folder.

New Filter (Simple or Asking)


Displays the New Filter Properties dialog box so that you can create a new filter. Asking
filters allow you to specify the parameters of the search. An asking filter has built-in
functionality to ask for values (with boxes that you are required to supply). The values apply
to properties that you have already designated you will supply when the filter runs. Asking
filters are portable between models.
Model Data Reuse (MDR) does not support asking filters. The only valid filter
types for an MDR transaction are System, Permission Group, Object Type, Volume and
Properties. You can define the filter on any one of these tabs or in a combination using
multiple tabs.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1282


Copy by Family

New Compound Filter


Displays the New Compound Filter Properties dialog box, which you use to create a new
compound filter containing the Or, And, or Not operators. Compound filters are not supported
for MDR.
New SQL Filter
Displays the New SQL Filter Properties dialog box, in which you can type the text of an
SQL query. SQL filters are not supported for MDR
Delete
Removes a filter or folder from the Select Filter list. If you delete a folder, the software also
deletes its contents.
Rename
Changes the name of an existing filter or folder from the Select Filter list.

Properties
Displays the Filter Properties dialog box so that you can select the properties that determine
your filter search criteria.

 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, you can select multiple
filters on this dialog box. Hold CTRL or SHIFT, and click each filter. When you click OK, all
objects that fit the selected filters are selected.
 If this dialog box is activated from the Select by Filter command, it clears the select set
before adding objects to the select set.
See Also
Select by Filter
Select Objects by Filter

Select Copy Family Dialog Box


Toolbar
Create New Similar Family
Creates a new copy similar family. For more information on creating copy similar families,
see Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1276).

Create New Symmetry Family


Creates a new symmetry family. For more information on creating copy symmetry families,
see Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279).

Create New Across Model Family


Creates a new across model family. For more information on creating across model families,
see Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box (on page 1281).
Delete Family Definition
Deletes the selected family.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1283


Copy by Family

Rename Family Definition


Renames the selected family. You must select a family before you can rename that family.

Edit Family Definition


Edits the selected family. You must select a family before you can edit that family.
Refresh Family
Removes any relationships created in the family by using the Synchronize command and
the Copy by Family ribbon. For example, Refresh Family restores highlighting of objects in
the graphics view for the Find and correlate objects step if that step has been
previously carried out.
Copy Shortcuts
Configures copy shortcut keys for similar or symmetry families and specify a log file to store
the copy operation. For more information, see Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box (on page
1284).

Copy Family Hierarchy


Copy Across Model Families
Lists the Copy Across Model Families that you have defined.

Copy Similar Families


Lists the copy similar families that you have defined.

Copy Symmetry Families


Lists the copy symmetry families that you have defined.
Batch
Displays the Copy by Family Batch dialog box. You can use this dialog box to execute jobs
in a batch queue. For more information, see Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box (on page
1285).
Synchronize
Opens the Copy by Family ribbon for the selected family.
Close
Closes the dialog box.

Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box


Configures shortcut keys for similar or symmetry families, and specifies a log file for the copy
shortcuts operation.
SNo
Displays the number assigned to the shortcut key.
ShortCut Key
Displays the shortcut key defined in the CopybyFamilyShortCutKeys.txt file. This text file is
located in the [Product Folder]\CopybyFamily\Data folder.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1284


Copy by Family

Family
Indicates whether to copy similar families or symmetry families.
Source Group
Specifies the family group to use as the copy source.
Target Group
Specifies the family group to create or modify.
Select Child
Determines whether to include child objects in the copy operation. Specify True or False for
the value. The default value comes from the Copy by Family ribbon.
Molded Form Only
Determines whether the shortcut key applies only in the Molded Forms task. Specify True or
False for the value. The default value comes from the Copy by Family ribbon.
Log File Path
Specifies a log file for storing the last copy shortcuts operation.
Browse
Click to browse to the log file.
Open
Opens the log file.
OK
Accepts the configuration.
Cancel
Rejects the configuration and closes the dialog box.
See Also
Copy by Family (on page 1255)
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 1288)
Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts (on page 1271)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 1283)

Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box


Controls properties for copy by family batch processes.
Actions To Queue
Displays the actions in the queue. The options in the grid behave in the same way as those
on the Copy by Family ribbon. For more information on these options, see Copy by Family
(on page 1255).
Family
Specifies the family on which to perform the batch operation. After you select a value for
Family, the software invokes the source and target groups and source filter.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1285


Copy by Family

Steps
Specifies the operation to perform. The list contains the following options:

 Find

 Create

 Modify - This option is not available for copy across model.


 Delete - This option is not available for copy across model.
 Object Report
 Property Report
Source Group
Displays the source group. The software determines this based on the value in the Family
box.
Target Groups
Displays the target groups. The software determines this based on the value in the Family
box.
Source Filter
Displays the source filter. The software determines this based on the value in the Family
box.
Properties
Displays the Properties dialog box. For more information, see Properties Dialog Box (on
page 1288). This option is not available if the Steps box is set to Object Report or Property
Report.
Add Action
Adds a row to the end of the grid.
Delete Action
Removes the selected row from the grid. This is the same as pressing DELETE.
Save CBF Log File
Displays the location for the Copy by Family log file. You can type the path, or click Browse
to navigate to the folder.
Audit Report Path
Displays the location for the Copy by Family audit report file. You can type the path, or click
Browse to navigate to the folder.
Submit
Displays the Schedule [Task] dialog box. For more information see Schedule [Task] Dialog
Box (on page 1287)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1286


Copy by Family

Schedule [Task] Dialog Box


Queue
Displays the name of the queues configured by an administrator for the job. For more
information on configuring the queues, see Configure Queues for Jobs in the Project
Management User's Guide.
Run job
Sets the frequency with which the job runs. Jobs can be scheduled to run once or on a
regular interval (daily, weekly, or monthly). Depending on the job frequency selected,
additional controls display. These controls allow you to define more specific scheduling
information. The scheduling controls can be changed only at job submission.
Run on
Sets the time to start running the job.
Options
Opens the Optional Schedule Properties Dialog Box that you can use to define a start and
end date.
Run on box
Contains a calendar from which you can select the run date. This option is available when
you select Once from Run job.
Every X days
Specifies how many days pass between job runs. This option is available when you select
Daily from Run job.
Every X weeks
Specifies how many weeks pass between job runs. In addition, you can select on which days
the job runs. This option is available when you select Weekly from Run job.
Day X of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. This option is available when you select
Monthly from Run job.
The X Y of the month
Specifies on which day of the month the job runs. For example, you can select the last
Monday of the month. This option is available when you select Monthly from Run job.
Job Start
Notifies you when the job starts, if Outlook is set up.
Job Completion
Notifies when the job completes, if Outlook is set up.
Job Abort
Notifies you if the job aborts, if Outlook is set up.
Address Book
Selects the name of the person to be notified by e-mail of the job status, if Outlook is set up. If

Molded Forms User's Guide 1287


Copy by Family

Outlook is not available, this option does not work. You can also type the address manually.
The person you define here receives an email with the job log files after the job finishes.

 The Batch Services SMTP option must be configured on the batch server for this to work. For
more information, see the Intergraph Smart Batch Services documentation.
 The WinZip application is no longer required on the batch server to compress any emailed
attachments. Compression is now done with functionality included in Smart 3D.

Properties Dialog Box


Controls properties for Copy by Family batch operations.
Clear relationships for Source Filter before Find
Removes all Copy by Family relationships in the current family for the object in the source
filter.
Molded Form Objects Only
Indicates that only Molded Forms objects are used for create and modify batch operations.
Select All
Indicates that all objects are used for create and modify batch operations.
Select Child
Indicates that child objects are used for create and modify batch operations.
Geometry Modifications
Indicates that geometry modifications are included in modify batch operations.

Copy By Family Log Files


Logs are generated for Find and correlate objects , Create target group copy , Modify
target group copy , and Finish operations.

Find and correlate objects log


The purpose of this log is to show objects that failed to find operations because the target area
contains duplicated objects (both geometrically and topologically). You must delete one of the
duplicates before the Find and correlate objects command can correlate the source and target
objects and any dependent objects.
If the Modify Port/Starboard option is selected, the list of forced objects is logged at
the finish of the Find and correlate objects command.

Create target group copy log


The initial step of this command shows the candidates for copy (that is, objects that do not yet
have a target object). Any objects that are on the to-do list are not selected for copy. None of the
dependents of the to-do list objects are selected for copy.
The list of objects on the to-do list is logged, and any dependent objects are listed at the end.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1288


Copy by Family

Modify target group copy log


Modify target group copy excludes to-do list objects and reports on them in the same way as
the Create target group copy command does. Modify target group copy compares the
attribution of the source object with the target object and selects candidates to copy when
differences are found. To simplify the selection process, these differences are reported in the log.
The actual attribute difference is shown first with the objects that are different shown at the end.
Because features are considered attributes of parts, this creates a hierarchy. All features,
including intermediate features, are shown.

Finish after Create, Modify, or Delete log


Errors in the finish log include:
 New errors, such as targets that go on the to-do list
 Exceptions thrown by the underlying operations such as copy, split, or detail.
 Exceptions thrown by Copy by Family because it is processing an object before its parent.
This requires that the copy be run a second time.
The format of these error messages is as follows:

If the target geometry is bad, the dependents are copied unless they cannot be copied without
the parent. The dependents that are not copied are listed at the end of the log.
See Also
Copy by Family (on page 1255)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 1283)
Copy By Family Log File Workflows (on page 1289)
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1276)
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279)

Copy By Family Log File Workflows


Target is on the To-Do List
If the "!Molded Form target object in error A-614DCK->A- 2602DCK/Plate" type of error is the
first error in the log file, check the unsupported object construction list.
 If the source object's construction is not supported by copy, try to fix the target object
manually or recreate it manually on the target side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1289


Copy by Family

 If the source object's construction is supported by copy, select the Clear Before check box,
run Find and correlate objects, and try copying again.
After the target object is repaired or created, select the Clear Before check box, run Find and
correlate objects and Create/Modify/Delete again to copy any remaining objects.
If the "!Split or Part target object in error A- 614DCK_PART->A-2602DCK_PART/Part" type
of error is the first error in the log file, check the unsupported object construction list.
 If the source object's construction is not supported by copy, try to fix the target object
manually by undetailing and redetailing the parts or by fixing the molded forms system and
boundaries. Alternately, you can recreate the object manually on the target side.
 If the source object is supported by copy, contact Intergraph Support, and model the failed
target object manually.
After the target object is repaired or created, select the Clear Before check box, run Find and
correlate objects and Create/Modify/Delete again to copy any remaining objects.

Exception
If the “!!!Exception processing above elements” type of error is the first error in the log file, do
the following:
 If the failed object is a Molded Forms object, select the Clear Before checkbox, run Find and
correlate objects again, and then try copying again.
 If the failed object is a detailed part, or if the second try to copy is unsuccessful, contact
Intergraph Support, and model the failed target object manually. After the object is repaired or
created, run Find and correlate objects and Create/Modify/Delete again to copy any
remaining objects.

Object Skipped
If the "!Skipped D51(2nd Dk)-491DCK/Plate" type of error is found in the log file, then there was
a problem with the order in which the objects were copied. If you run copy again, the objects are
copied correctly, and errors are eliminated from the log.
If errors remain, then there was a problem with the parent of the failed object specified in the
skipped error log. Fix the parent so that this object can be copied successfully.

Entities not Completely Supported by the Copy Process


Limitations of the copy implementation can be classified in the following types:
 Object types not yet supported by copy similar/symmetry. The objects are excluded from the
copy process. That is, they are not selected as candidates. In some cases, dependent
entities might be selected for copy and could fail to copy. These specific cases are listed
below.
 Some aspect of the construction of the object is not supported. In this case, you must edit the
object to remove the unsupported aspect. These specific constructions are listed below.

Object Types Not Supported By Copy Similar/Symmetry


 Auxiliary coordinate systems. Dependent objects fail.
 Manual logical connections.
 Inverted connections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1290


Copy by Family

 Beam parts (detailed property and beams using assoc points on edges).
 Standalone Plate parts, Profile Parts, Lapped Plate Parts, Bracket Parts.
 Standalone Profile Parts, Profile Edge Reinforcement Parts.
 Straking Seams.
 Profile Straking Seams.
 Split Physical Connections.
 Manufacturing Plates and Profiles.

Aspects of the Construction of Object Not Supported


 Problem with profile and seams by table.
 RAD Sketches containing constraints. After copy, the software replaces the inputs to the
sketcher with the new copied geometry. If the new geometry is not infinite, and if the direction
of the curves is reversed, this produces bad results for end point constraints and any
constraints dependent on the direction. Copy Symmetry with edge constraints is not
supported.
 Assoc point on edge. Using the place point on edge Smart Point placement can result in the
point reversal during mirror.
See Also
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 1288)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1291


Copy by Family

Frame mapping and Range Growth Values in Copy by


Family
The Range Growth Value and Offset values determine the range of the family from which you
must pick the copy candidates. The technique for using Range Growth Value depends on the
type of family with which you are working.

Similar Standard Family


If you create a similar standard family with F1 as the source and F4 as the target, the software
maps F1 to F4.

If you specify a default Range Growth Value of 0.8, then the range of the family extends from
the source frame -0.8 to the source frame + 0.8

Similar Overlapping Family


To create a similar overlapping family you must have at least one frame in common between the
source and the target. For example, you could create a family with F1 and F3 as the source and
F3 and F5 as the target. In this case, F3 is the common frame. The software then maps F1 to F3,
F2 to F4, and F3 to F5.

If you specify a default Range Growth Value of 0.8, Smart 3D sets the range of the family from
the minimum source frame value - 0.8 to the maximum source frame value + 0.8

Molded Forms User's Guide 1292


Copy by Family

Symmetry Family
If you create symmetry with port as the source with five positive frames and starboard as the
target with five negative frames, Smart 3D maps L-1 to L1, L2 to L-2, L -3 to L3, L-4 to L4, and
L-5 to L5.

If you specify a default Range Growth Value of 0.8, Smart 3D sets the range of the symmetry
family from the centerline + 0.8 to infinity.

Across Models Standard Family


If you create an Across-Models Standard Family with F1 as the source and F4 as the target,
Smart 3D maps F1 to F4. This behavior is the same as creating a standard family within a model.
The software also maps the X and Y axes in an Across Models Family. If you specify a default
Range Growth Value of 0.8, Smart 3D sets the range of the family from the source minimum
frame value - 0.8 to the source maximum frame value + 0.8.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1293


Copy by Family

Objects and behaviors supported for Copy by Family


Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across
in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Molded Forms Planar Plate Yes Yes Yes


 Using plane created by Plane by
Vector Normal
 Using plane created by Plane By
Point Normal
 Using plane created by Plane By 3
Points

LEP Yes Yes Yes

NLEP Yes Yes Yes

Advanced Plate System Yes Yes Yes


 APS polyline plate macros
 APS corrugated plate macros
 APS swage plate macros

Bracket by Plane Yes Yes Yes


 Using plane created by coincident
plane
 Using plane created by Plane By
Vector Normal
 Using plane created by Plane By 3
Points

Molded Forms User's Guide 1294


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Bracket by selected supports Yes Yes Yes

Profile by intersection Yes Yes Yes

Profile by projection Yes Yes Yes

Profile by geometric construction Yes Yes Yes

Profile by offset Yes Yes Yes

Profile by table Yes Yes Yes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1295


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Tripping stiffener Yes Yes Yes

Profile edge reinforcement Yes Yes Yes

Seam by intersection Yes Yes Yes

Seam by offset Yes Yes Yes

Seam by table Yes Yes Yes

Seam by geometric construction Yes Yes Yes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1296


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Profile seam Yes Yes Yes

Openings Yes Yes Yes

Macro or Catalog openings Yes Yes Yes

Standard Members Yes Yes Yes

Built-up (Designed) Members Yes Yes Yes

Generated logical connections Yes Yes Yes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1297


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Split logical connection having inverted Yes Yes Yes


regions

Manual logical connection Yes Yes Yes

Plate knuckles Yes Yes Yes

Profile knuckles Yes Yes Yes

Copy by Family also supports brackets created with Tripping Bracket.

Structural Standalone plate part Yes Yes No


Detailing

Lapped plate part Yes Yes No

Molded Forms User's Guide 1298


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Plate part Yes Yes No

Bracket part Yes Yes No

Profile part Yes Yes No

Edge features Yes Yes No

Corner features Yes Yes No

Sketch features Yes Yes No

Molded Forms User's Guide 1299


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Edge treatments Yes Yes No

Manual chamfer under edge Yes Yes No


reinforcement

Generated chamfer Yes Yes No

Smart plate Yes Yes No

Assembly connections Yes Yes No

Physical connections Yes Yes No

Molded Forms User's Guide 1300


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

End cuts Yes Yes No

Slot Yes Yes No

Collar Yes Yes No

Structural Constant margin Yes Yes No


Manufacturing

Oblique margin Yes Yes No

Marking Yes Yes No

Molded Forms User's Guide 1301


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported for Copy Similar Symmetry Copy Across


in Copy by Family Family Family Model Family

Shrinkage Yes Yes No

Objects not supported by Copy by Family


Task Objects Not Supported by Copy by Family

Molded Forms Objects created using Reference Curve by Intersection

Ruled plates

Child plates

Structural Detailing Bracket part

Standalone stiffener part

Beam profile part

Plate edge reinforcement part

Profile edge reinforcement part

Profile straking seam

Split physical connection

Member generic assembly connection

Manual physical connection

Structural Template
Manufacturing
Pin Jig

Manufacturing Plate

Manufacturing Profile

No other objects from other tasks (such as Equipment, Hangers and Supports, and
so on) are supported in Copy by Family.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1302


Copy by Family

Objects and behaviors supported in Attribute Modify


Task Objects Supported Properties Supported
for Modify in
Copy by Family

Molded Forms Plate  Type


 Naming Category
 Specification
 Continuity
 Tightness
 Description
 Split Priority
 Material
 Material Grade
 Actual Thickness
 Plate System Type
 Thickness Direction
 Offset
 Primary Profile Orientation Forward of For Aft
reference
 Primary Profile Orientation Aft of For Aft
reference
 Primary Profile Orientation at For Aft reference
 Secondary Orientation of Vertical Profiles
 Secondary Orientation of Vertical Profiles on
Port Starboard
 Secondary Orientation of Horizontal Profiles
 All user-defined attributes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1303


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported


for Modify in
Copy by Family

Brackets  Type
 Naming Category
 Specification
 Continuity
 Tightness
 Split Priority
 Structural Priority
 Material
 Material Grade
 Actual Thickness
 Thickness direction
 Offset
 Primary Profile Orientation
 Primary Profile Orientation at Port Starboard
Reference
 Secondary Orientation of Longitudinal Profiles
 Secondary Orientation of Vertical
 Profiles Forward of Fore Aft reference
 Secondary Orientation of Vertical
 Profiles Aft of Fore Aft reference
 Secondary Orientation of Vertical
 Profiles at Fore Aft reference
 Bracket Contour Type
 All user-defined attributes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1304


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported


for Modify in
Copy by Family

Profile  Type
 Naming Category
 Continuity
 Continuity Priority
 Description
 Section Type
 Section Size
 Material
 Grade
 Primary Orientation
 Secondary Orientation
 Mounting Face
 Load Point
 Landing Curve Projection Method
 Attachment Method
 Start Connection Method
 End Connection Method
 All user-defined attributes

Molded Forms User's Guide 1305


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported


for Modify in
Copy by Family

Profile Edge  Naming Category


Reinforcement
 Specification
 Description
 Section Type
 Section Size
 Material
 Grade
 Position
 Primary Orientation
 Secondary Orientation
 Mounting Face
 Load Point
 Start Connection Method
 End Connection Method
 All user-defined attributes

Seam  Seam type


 All user-defined attributes

Profile Seam  All user-defined attributes

Opening  Opening Design Type


 Opening Planning Method
 Opening Production Method
 All user-defined attributes

Manual/Generated Only user-defined attributes


Logical Connections

Standard Member  Type


 Type Category
 Priority
 Continuity Type
 Continuity Priority number
 Align

Molded Forms User's Guide 1306


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported


for Modify in
Copy by Family

Member Part  Type


 Type Category
 Section Name
 Cardinal Point
 Angle
 Reflect
 End Releases
 Member Section Name
 Material
 Grade

Split Connection  Offset


 Offset Reference
 Distance
 Location Definition

SPS Opening  Cutting Limit


 All user-defined attributes

Frame Connection  Connection


 All user-defined attributes

Built-up Member  Type


 Type Category
 Priority
 Continuity Type
 Continuity Priority number
 Align

Molded Forms User's Guide 1307


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported


for Modify in
Copy by Family

Designed Member  Cardinal Point


 Angle
 Reflect
 Type Category
 Type
 Priority
 Length Extension
 Wide Extension - Top Flange
 Depth Extension

Structural Plate Part  Description


Detailing  Thickening Technique Requested
 All user-defined attributes

Bracket Part  Description


 Thickening Technique Requested
 All user-defined attributes

Profile Part  Naming Category


 Description
 All user-defined attributes

Edge Feature Not Supported

Corner Feature Not Supported

Sketch Feature Not Supported

Edge Treatment Not Supported

Standalone Plate Part Not Supported

Molded Forms User's Guide 1308


Copy by Family

Task Objects Supported Properties Supported


for Modify in
Copy by Family

Assembly Connections  End Cut Type


 Split End To End Case
 Flip End To End Angle
 Chamfer Type
 Current Selection
 Question Controls
 All user-defined attributes

Physical Connections All attributes are supported

Free End Cuts  End Cut Type


 Chamfer Type
 Current Selection
 Question Controls
 Is Named By Rule

Webcut All attributes are supported

Flangecut All attributes are supported

Smart Plate  Description


 Thickening Technique Requested
 All user-defined attributes

Slot All attributes are supported

Collar All attributes are supported

Structural Margin  Type


Manufacturing
 Value
 Start Value
 End Value

Marking  Manufacturing Marking Side


 Manufacturing Marking Type

Shrinkage  Shrinkage Type


 Primary Factor
 Secondary Factor

Molded Forms User's Guide 1309


Copy by Family

Geometry modification behavior for objects in Copy by Family


Application Objects Supported for Remarks
Modify with Geometry
Modification in Copy by
Family

Molded Forms Plate Only boundary modifications are supported.

Brackets Only boundary modifications are supported.

Profile Geometry modification only applies to boundary


and landing curve modifications.

Seam Geometry modification only applies to boundary


and landing curve modifications.

Seam Point Geometry modification applies to reference


plane and offset cases.

Openings and Macro Geometry modification applies to the location


Openings change of the opening.

Solutions to common problems in Copy by Family


Problem: A problem is encountered when creating a symmetry family.
Reason: Creating a symmetry family requires an equal number of positive and negative
frames for a coordinate system.
Recovery: Update the coordinate system so that there are an equal number of positive and
negative frames for the coordinate system.
Problem: The following error message displays in the log file:
The Object is being copied before its input <NoBlk>-5WB.101-1-PS.1-1
1. Please Check the Geometry and Inputs for this Object from Source to
Target
2. Try to do Manual Copy of the Parent and Perform Find and Correlate.
Aborted due to Issue with Input Ordering.
!Skipped A-221LBH-1/Plate
!Note: Above elements have been skipped, run copy a second time
Reason: Copy by Family did not handle the ordering and wrote the message to the log file.
Recovery: Use Copy by Family multiple times to complete the copy.
OR
Use Copy/Paste to create a find to map for these objects.
Problem: Smart 3D does not find an object using autoFind.
Reason: The objects are not identical, or the objects are not identical crossovers.
Recovery: Perform a manual Find using the browser to map the objects.
Problem: Objects depending on a hull do not copy using Across Models Family.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1310


Copy by Family

Reason: Either the source or target model has more than one hull.
Recovery: Perform a manual Find using the browser to map the hull from the source to the
target model.
Problem: The Range Growth Value does not impact the selection of objects.
Reason: You have modified the Range Growth Value after clicking Create.
Recovery: Refresh the family, and then select the appropriate objects.
Problem: Smart 3D does not select objects for Modify, even though the objects have differences
in attributes and geometry.
Reason: The objects are out of the workspace, or the Geom-Mod option is not available on
the ribbon.
Recovery: Verify that the source and target objects are in the workspace. Use the
Geom-Mod option if a change exists in the geometry of the source object.
Problem: Objects dependent on leaf systems or parts fail to copy.
Reason: Smart 3D performs the split operation step which generates leaves on the target
side during the split operation step. This step follows the Molded Forms copy step.
OR
Smart 3D performs the detailing step (which creates detailed parts on the target side) after
the Molded Forms copy step.
Recovery: Perform multiple runs to copy this type of object.

Frequently Asked Questions


Q: Does Copy by Family support copy of objects created using a rotated coordinate system?
A: No, Copy by Family cannot be used to copy objects if the objects are created using
rotated coordinate systems.
Q: How do I verify that the object is copied to the target?
A: Use Audit-Tool in Manual Mode to select the family and select the object to check from
Smart 3D. Then, run a report to show whether Smart 3D copied the object to the target.
Q: How do I map objects that are not identical from the source to the target?
A: Use the browser in Manual mode to map the objects.
Q: How do I copy only certain objects in an Across Models Family?
A: Create a filter on the source with the objects to copy. Use that filter in the Source Filter
box so that Smart 3D only processes the required objects.
Q: How do I copy objects that are children of an object I am not copying with Copy by Family?
A: Use Copy/Paste or Mirror Copy to copy the objects to the target. Then, use Find to map
the object, and Copy the child objects using Copy by Family.
Q: How do I copy only certain objects from the source?
A: Press CTRL + Q to use the Manual Preselect option to manually select the objects to
copy and synchronize. Smart 3D then makes Finish available. Click Finish to copy these
objects to the target. This technique also works for Modify.
Q: When do I use Select All and Select Child?

Molded Forms User's Guide 1311


Copy by Family

A: To select all the objects, click Select All. The selected objects display in yellow.
To clear all the objects so that you can pick the objects to copy, clear Select All. The objects
then display in cyan. As you select the objects to copy, they display in yellow.
To select all the child objects when you select the parent, click Select Child.
Q: Are some objects not supported by the audit tool?
A: The audit tool does not report logical connections created by manually created features
copied using Copy by Family.
Q: Does Copy by Family support all kinds of filters?
A: The command supports ship filters, SQL filters, and user filters. Copy by Family does not
currently support asking filters.
Q: Which kind of coordinate systems can I use to create a symmetry family?
A: Currently, Smart 3D only supports ship coordinate systems for creating a symmetry
family.
Q: What should I do if I get an HRESULT failure?
A: HRESULT failures can occur because of compilation or build issues. Try to minimize the
test case by reducing the number of objects to determine the object that is causing the
HRESULT failure. Then, file a TR with the simplified workflow.
Q: What should I do if I see an Out of memory issue during the copy process?
A: Use the 3GB option and GC Cache to copy the objects from the source to the target. File
a TR so that the memory issues are resolved.
Q: What is the difference between Manual Mode in Find and Manual Find in the browser?
A: Smart 3D uses both options to map source to target objects. In Manual Mode, you can
resolve one object at a time. You can use Manual Find to resolve multiple objects at a time.
Q: What is the custom filter option in Copy by Family?
A: You can select either a workspace filter or any specific filter for performing the following
actions:
 Find/Create/Modify/Delete option in Copy by Family.
 Select objects for processing that are common to the workspace by using the Custom
Filter option.
Q: What issues do I face when I use coordinate systems with different frame spacing in Across
Models Family?
A: Issue 1 - If you create objects using one coordinate system but create the family using
another coordinate system, Smart 3D creates substitute planes at an improper location,
because the frame spacing is different for both of the coordinate systems. Because of this,
use the same coordinate system for both the family and the objects.
Issue 2 - If you create the hull and range family with coordinate systems having different
frame spacing, hull mapping fails. This also causes all of the dependents of the hull to fail to
copy.
Q: Does Copy by Family support modification (Property or Geometry)?
A: No, you cannot propagate feature modification to the target by using the Copy by Family
modify operation. You can achieve this by updating the feature count on the source by

Molded Forms User's Guide 1312


Copy by Family

adding or removing features on the source. Copy by Family picks up this feature count as a
difference and deletes and recopies all of the features to the target.
Q: What kind of advanced plate system (APS) plates are supported using Copy by Family?
A: Copy by Family supports the following advanced plate systems:
 Plate systems created using APS polyline plate macros
 Plate system created using APS corrugated plate macros
 Plate system created using APS swage plate macros
Q. What is the System Hierarchy option in Copy by Family?
A. Copy by Family provides target parent system options on the Select Copy Family dialog
box so that the target objects are copied under the given parent system. This makes target
objects easier to locate.
Q: What is Copy/Paste? How can I use this command in conjunction with Copy by Family?
A: Copy/Paste lets you copy and paste objects from the source to the target by taking inputs
from the Paste dialog box.
If an object fails to copy from the source to the target using Copy by Family, then all the
dependent objects also fail to copy because the parent is missing on the target. Use
Copy/Paste to copy such objects, and perform an auto or manual Find to map the source to
the target object. Then, use Copy by Family to copy the dependent objects.
Q: What should I do to decide if a problem is related to Copy by Family?
A: Perform the following actions:
a. Verify that the object is supported by Copy by Family. For more information, see Objects
and behaviors supported for Copy by Family (on page 1294).
b. If the object is supported, check for a ToDo list entry.
c. Try to Edit the object.
d. Try to Copy/Paste the object.
e. Try Model Data Reuse for the object.
If all the previous actions are successful, then the issue is related to Copy by Family.
Q: What is the port mapping issue in Copy by Family?
A: If the following message displays in the finish log, then this is a port mapping issue in
Copy by Family.
WARNING : Cannot resolve input mapping for object->
IJPortSrc-SF_!BLFX_0_0_8_<>_{}_()||D3-DCK
!Skipped F 70.000 m-1TBH-1/Plate
!Please review with support
Possible reasons:
 Smart 3D did not copy an object that the port needs.
 An ordering issue from Copy by Family exists.
 A port mapping issue from Copy by Family exists.
Use Copy/Paste to copy the object, and then use Auto or Manual Find to map the objects
using Copy by Family.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1313


Copy by Family

Q: What are the implications of using Commit in rules?


A: Avoid using Commit and client-tier references in rules. Using these references can cause
Smart 3D to exit.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1314


SECTION 26

Copy By Family Synchronize


The Edit > Copy by Family Synchronize command opens the Copy by Family ribbon with the
last used family set as the default family.
This command can be used if you want to perform Copy by Family for families that
already have been created. If no families exist, a message is displayed informing you that there
are "No Copy Families Defined".
See Also
Copy By Family Log Files (on page 1288)
Select Copy Family Dialog Box (on page 1283)
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1276)
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box (on page 1279)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1315


SECTION 27

Copy By Family Audit Report


The Tools > Copy by Family Audit Report command allows you verify that the source has been
copied to the target by highlighting selected source and targets after a copy has been performed.

Copy By Family Audit Report Ribbon


Edit file report properties
Opens the Settings dialog box in which you set the path to the location where you want to
save the generated report. By default, the path for all the reports is set to C:\Documents and
Settings\[User name]\Smartmarine3d\Report Output.
Currently, three kinds of reports are generated. These reports are generated in
the Microsoft Excel workbook format and can be saved for future reference.
 Object Summary Report - Provides information on object details.
 Property Summary Report - Verifies that the properties of source and target objects
match.
 Property Compare Report - Provides a detailed description of the Property Summary
Report.

Select Objects
Select objects manually from Workspace Explorer or from the graphic view when Select
Mode list is set to Manual.

Run Report
Allows you process all the objects and displays the report. The Run Report option is not
available if it is Manual unless an object is selected manually.
Finish
Closes the reports. This option is only available after you run a report.
Reject
Rejects all selected objects.
Accept
Accepts all selected objects.
Report
Select Object Summary Report or Property Summary Report. The Object Summary
Report is available by default.
Select Mode
Lists the following modes:
 Manual - Selects objects manually from the Workspace Explorer or graphic view.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1316


Copy By Family Audit Report

 Auto Select Family Objects - Selects all objects associated with the selected family for
processing.
 Auto Select Family Objects in Workspace - Selects all objects associated with the
selected family which are in current workspace.
 Open Existing Reports - Displays existing reports.
 Manual (recursive) - This is same as Manual mode except that in this case, when an
object is selected, its children also get selected.
Copy Family
Select the family on which you want to run the report. Acceptable values are Copy Across
Models Family, Similar Family, or Symmetry Family.

Object Summary Report


The Object Summary Report has three worksheets.
 Worksheets with object information. These worksheets are named in the following format -
“Source group-Target group”.
 Configuration worksheet
 Defective Entities worksheet
The report has multiple worksheets for multiple targets.

Worksheet with Object Information


In the worksheet with object information, you can find the following information:
Status
Displays the status of the object. If the object is copied, the status is OK. If the object is not
copied, the status is Check.
When the status is Check, you need to check for any discrepancies in the source
and the target. The entire row is highlighted in yellow. The parameters which fail to match are
highlighted in red.
Object Type
Displays information on the type of object.
Source Object Name
Displays the name of the source object.
TDL
Indicates whether this object (Source or Target) is present in the To Do List.
LC's
Displays the count of logical connections.
AC's
Displays the count of assembly connections.
PC's
Displays the count of physical connections.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1317


Copy By Family Audit Report

Fetr's
Displays the number of features available for the object.
Detailed
Displays a detailed status on the object.
Copied
Specifies whether the object has been copied successfully.
Target Object Name
Displays the name of the target object.

Configuration Worksheet
The Configuration sheet provides you with the following information:
Generation Date
Displays the date when the report was generated.
UserID
Displays user identification information.
Selected Mode
Specifies the mode selected.
Compute Time
Displays the time taken (in seconds) for generating the report.
Number of Objects
Displays the number of objects selected.

Defective Entities Worksheet


If there is any information about defective entities, it displays on the Defective Entities sheet.
When a cell in any row is selected in the report, the corresponding source and target
objects are highlighted in the graphic view.
You can also run the Object Summary Report on a Copy Across Model family.

Property Summary Report


The Property Summary Report has two work sheets - Parameter Summary and Defective
Entities.
In the Parameter Summary sheet, you can find the following information:
Status
Displays the status on the properties of the source and target objects. If all the properties for
the source and target match, the status is Ok. If any of the properties do not match, the
status is Check.
If the status is Check, the entire row is highlighted in yellow. For multiple targets,
the status is Check if the properties of the source object fail to match with any of the targets.
In this case, the cell corresponding to that target is highlighted in red.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1318


Copy By Family Audit Report

Object Type
Displays information on the type of object selected.
Source
Displays the name of the source object.
Show Details
Describes the Property Summary Report in detail.
Target
Displays the name of the target object.
In all the reports, any discrepancies in source and target are highlighted in red.

Property Compare Report


The Property sheet lists all of the properties of the source and targets and their status. In the
Property sheet, you can find the following information:
Status
Displays the status for each of the properties of the source and target objects.

 If the status is Check, it indicates that the property of the source and target has failed to
match. The entire row is highlighted in yellow. If the property matches, the status is Ok.
 When the status is Check, a comment is displayed on the target box (when you move
the pointer over the target box) indicating the expected value that is needed for the
properties to match.
 When the target value is expected to be different (in cases, when target attribute value is
defined by a rule), the status is Ok.
Property
Displays information on any property associated with the selected objects.
Source
Displays the name of the source object.
Target
Displays the name of the target object.
If the objects being processed for a particular report do not belong to the selected
family, then the following message displays: There are some objects not associated with the
family. Hence these objects will not be reported in the Report.

What do you want to do?


 Generate an object summary report in manual mode (on page 1320)
 Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects mode (on page 1320)
 Generate an object summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode (on
page 1320)
 Generate a property summary report in manual mode (on page 1321)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1319


Copy By Family Audit Report

 Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects mode (on page 1321)
 Generate a property summary report in auto select family objects in workspace mode (on
page 1321)

Generate an object summary report in manual mode


You can generate the object summary report in manual mode to generate the report for required
objects in family defined in the workspace.
1. Click Tools > Copy By Family Audit Report.
The Audit Report ribbon displays.
2. In the Report box, select Object Summary Report.
3. In the Select Mode box, select Manual.
4. In the Copy Family box, select the family on which to run the report.
5. Select the objects from Workspace Explorer or the graphic view.
6. Click Run Report to display the Object Summary Report.

Generate an object summary report in auto select


family objects mode
If you want to select all the objects related to the family without regard to the defined workspace
(for example, all the related objects in the database), you can generate the report in auto select
family objects mode.
1. Click Tools > Copy By Family Audit Report.
The Audit Report ribbon displays.
2. In the Report box, select Object Summary Report.
3. In the Select Mode box, select Auto Select Family Objects.
4. In the Copy Family box, select the family on which to run the report.
5. Click Run Report to display the Object Summary Report.

Generate an object summary report in auto select


family objects in workspace mode
You can generate the object summary report in auto select family objects mode to generate the
report for required objects in a family defined in the workspace.
1. Click Tools > Copy By Family Audit Report.
the Audit Report ribbon displays.
2. In the Report box, select Object Summary Report.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1320


Copy By Family Audit Report

3. In the Select Mode box, select Family Objects in Workspace.


4. In the Copy Family box, select the family on which to run the report.
5. Click Run Report to display the Object Summary Report.

Generate a property summary report in manual mode


You can generate the property summary report in manual mode to generate the report for
specific objects in the family defined in the workspace.
1. Click Tools > Copy By Family Audit Report.
The Audit Report ribbon displays.
2. In the Report box, select Property Summary Report.
3. In the Select Mode box, select Manual.
4. In the Copy Family box, select the family on which to run the report.
5. Select the objects from Workspace Explorer or graphic view.
6. Click Run Report to display the Property Summary Report.

Generate a property summary report in auto select


family objects mode
If you want to select all the objects related to the family without regard to the defined workspace
(for example, all the related objects in the database), you can generate the report in Auto Select
Family Objects mode.
1. Click Tools > Copy By Family Audit Report.
The Audit Report ribbon displays.
2. In the Report box, select Property Summary Report.
3. In the Select Mode box, select Auto Select Family Objects.
4. In the Copy Family box, select the family on which to run the report.
5. Click Run Report.
The Property Summary Report displays.

Generate a property summary report in auto select


family objects in workspace mode
You can generate the property summary report in auto select family objects mode to generate the
report for required objects in a family defined in the workspace.
1. Click Tools > Copy By Family Audit Report.
The Audit Report ribbon displays.
2. In the Report box, select Property Summary Report.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1321


Copy By Family Audit Report

3. In the Select Mode box, select Family Objects in Workspace.


4. In the Copy Family box, select the family on which to run the report.
5. Click Run Report.
The Property Summary Report displays.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1322


SECTION 28

Topological Points (Insert Menu)


Insert > Topological Points creates associative points directly in the graphic view. The points
parametrically constrain objects that use them. These points are most commonly used with the
Plane by Three Points plane method used in many commands.
This command opens the Point Palette dialog box and contains the following options:

Point from Coordinate System - Creates a point at the defined X, Y, and Z


coordinates of the selected coordinate system. For more information, see Point
from Coordinate System.

Point at Minimum Distance - Creates a point at defined distances from the faces
of two plate, profile, or member systems. For more information, see Point at
Minimum Distance (on page 1341).

Point at Offset from Key Point - Creates a point using a cross-section key point
as a reference. For more information, see Point at Offset from Key Point (on page
1348).

Point Along Curve on Surface - Creates a point along a curve relative to the
selected coordinate system. For more information, see Point Along Curve on
Surface (on page 1029).

Point at Curve Middle - Creates a point at the middle of a curve. For more
information, see Point at Curve Middle (on page 1335).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1323


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Point Along Curve on Surface

Tooltip: PointAlongCurveOnSurface
Creates a point along a curve on a surface relative to the selected coordinate system.

Required Input Output


1 - Coordinate system Point along the curve
2 -Surface
3 - Reference plane intersecting the surface
6 - Supporting plane intersecting the surface
Optional Input
Points or curves to define reference plane 3
Parameters
Offset method and value
Distance method and value

Molded Forms User's Guide 1324


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Point Along Curve on Surface Ribbon (for geometric constructions)


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the coordinate system. The coordinate system is used when there is an ambiguous
solution.
2
Specifies the surface. By default, this is the surface of the plate selected for the main
command.
3
Specifies a reference plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the reference curve from which the new point
is offset as defined by Offset and Offset Direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1325


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Specifies a point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if a point or curve is selected for 3.

Specifies a third point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if points are selected for 3 and .
6
Specifies a supporting plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the supporting curve along which the new
point is located as defined by Distance and Distance Method.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1326


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
Offset
Defines the offset distance of the point along the reference curve.
Offset Direction
Defines the offset direction (with respect to the selected coordinate system 1) along the
reference curve. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available when Offset is set to
a value other than 0.

Inter Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the supporting plane intersects a complex surface in multiple
locations. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. The following example shows the ambiguity options
in the bow of a hull.

Distance
Defines the distance of the point from the reference curve along the supporting curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1327


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Distance Method
Defines how the point is measured along the supporting curve. Select Girth (on page 1457),
Along x, Along y, or Along z.
Point Ambiguity
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Girth is
selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available for
Girth.

Distance Direction
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Along x,
Along y, or Along z is selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This
option is available for Along x, Along y, or Along z.
Side Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the reference plane intersects a complex surface in more than
one location, such as on the port and starboard sides of a hull. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z.

For options that have coordinate axis values, select a value that is
compatible with the orientation of the curve. For example, if a non-linear reference curve is in
the x-y plane, valid options for Offset Direction are +x, -x, +y, and -y.

Point Along Curve on Surface Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1328


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming
Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the coordinate system. The coordinate system is used when there is an ambiguous
solution.
2
Specifies the surface. By default, this is the surface of the plate selected for the main
command.
3
Specifies a reference plane intersecting the surface, or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the reference curve from which the new point
is offset as defined by Offset and Offset Direction.

Specifies a point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if a point or curve is selected for 3.

Specifies a third point used to define the plane intersecting the surface. This option is only
available if points are selected for 3 and .
6
Specifies a supporting plane intersecting the surface or a curve or point used to define the
plane. The curve created by this intersection is the supporting curve along which the new
point is located as defined by Distance and Distance Method.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1329


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1330


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Reject
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
Offset
Defines the offset distance of the point along the reference curve.
Offset Direction
Defines the offset direction (with respect to the selected coordinate system 1) along the
reference curve. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available when Offset is not set
to 0.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1331


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Inter Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the supporting plane intersects a complex surface in multiple
locations. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. The following example shows the ambiguity options
in the bow of a hull.

Distance
Defines the distance of the point from the reference curve along the supporting curve.
Distance Method
Defines how the point is measured along the supporting curve. Select Girth (on page 1457),
Along x, Along y, or Along z.
Point Ambiguity
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Girth is
selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This option is available for
Girth.

Distance Direction
Specifies the solution along the supporting curve when Distance is not 0 and Along x,
Along y, or Along z is selected as Distance Method. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. This
option is available for Along x, Along y, or Along z.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1332


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Side Ambiguity
Specifies the solution when the reference plane intersects a complex surface in more than
one location, such as on the port and starboard sides of a hull. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z.

For options that have coordinate axis values, select a value that is
compatible with the orientation of the curve. For example, if a non-linear reference curve is in
the x-y plane, valid options for Offset Direction are +x, -x, +y, and -y.

What do you want to do?


 Place a point on a surface and along a curve (on page 1038)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)
 Place a topological point on a surface and along a curve (on page 1333) (in the Molded
Forms task)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334) (in the Molded Forms task)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms
task)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms task)

Place a topological point on a surface and along a curve


1. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
2. Click PointAlongCurveOnSurface on the Point Palette.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Select a surface, such as a plate system or reference plane.
5. Select a plane intersecting the surface. The Offset direction is along the reference curve
created by this intersection.
6. Select another plane intersecting the surface and the reference curve. The Distance
direction is along the supporting curve created at the intersection with the surface.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1333


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

7. Select a value for Distance Method.


8. Type the needed values for Offset and Distance.
A preview point in green appears at the intersection of the surface, reference curve, and
supporting curve. If more than one point appears, then more than one solution is possible.
9. If multiple points appear, perform one of the following steps to resolve the ambiguity:
 If the surface is complex (a plane intersects it more than once), then select a coordinate
axis direction for Inter Ambiguity.
 If Girth is selected for Distance Method, then select a coordinate axis direction for
Point Ambiguity.
 If two solutions are possible on opposing sides of the reference curve, then select a
coordinate axis direction for Side Ambiguity.
For each ambiguity, select a value that is compatible with the orientation of the
points.
A single green preview point is now visible.
10. Optionally, type a name for the point.
11. Optionally, select More in the Parent box, and select a parent system for the point. For
example, you can select the plate system on which you are placing the point.
12. Click Finish.
Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Modify a topological point


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the topological point to modify.
The point is highlighted in the graphic view, the ribbon for the topological point appears, and
inputs are highlighted in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Make the needed changes.
4. Click Accept .
A preview of the changed geometric construction appears.
5. Click Finish.
The modified point is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1334


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Change a topological point to a different point definition


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the topological point to modify.
The point is highlighted in the graphic view, the ribbon for the topological point appears, and
the inputs are highlighted in the Workspace Explorer.
3. In the Macro Definition box, click More.
The Select Geometric Construction dialog box appears. Only the appropriate point
geometric constructions appear.
4. Select the needed point geometric construction, and then click OK.
The new selection appears in the Macro Definition box with a yellow background. Options
with blue backgrounds contain new values suggested by the software. Options with white
backgrounds retain the values from the previous geometric construction.
5. Make the needed changes to options on the ribbon.
Changed options have a yellow background.
6. Click Accept .
A preview of the changed point appears.
7. Click Finish.
The modified point is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Delete a topological point


1. On the vertical toolbar, click Select .
2. In a graphic view or in the Workspace Explorer, select the topological point to delete.
The point is highlighted in the graphic view, the ribbon for the topological point appears, and
inputs are highlighted in the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Delete .
The geometric construction is deleted.

Point at Curve Middle

Tooltip: PointAtCurveMiddle
Creates a point at the middle of a curve.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1335


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Required Input Output


Curve, line, or edge Point
Optional Input
Projection surface

Point at Curve Middle Ribbon (for geometric constructions)


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the curve on which the point is placed.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1336


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.

Point at Curve Middle Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1337


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming
Resources is installed.1 - Specifies the curve on which the point is placed.

Specifies a surface on which to project the point. This value is optional.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1338


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Reject
Clears the current selections.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.

What do you want to do?


 Place a point at the middle of a curve (on page 1340)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1339


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)


 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)
 Place a topological point at the middle of a curve (in the Molded Forms task)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334) (in the Molded Forms task)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms
task)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms task)

Place a point at the middle of a curve


1. Click PointAtCurveMiddle on the Geometric Construction Palette.
2. Select a curve, such as a profile landing curve, a plate edge, or a geometric construction
curve.
A preview of the point appears at the middle of the curve.
3. Click Continue.
Temporary geometry is displayed in the graphic view and as PointAtCurveMiddle in the
Geometric Construction Explorer.
4. If needed, create additional geometric constructions.
5. Click Close to return to the main command ribbon.

 If you stop the command before clicking Finish, the software does not save the geometric
constructions to the model. When you restart the command, the following message displays,
giving you the option to recover the geometric constructions:
"The previous execution of the command was not completed. Do you want to recover the 3D
construction?"
The message displays only during creation of an object and is unavailable when editing an
object.
 The geometric constructions are not saved to the model until you click Finish on the main
command ribbon to create the model object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1340


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Point at Minimum Distance

Tooltip: PointAtMinimumDistance
Creates a point at defined distances from the faces of two plate, profile, or member systems.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Point controlled by driven dimensions
Intersecting plate systems or surfaces
Sketching plane
Parameters
Measurement method and distances

Point at Minimum Distance Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming
Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the coordinate system used for the specified directions and axes.
2
Specifies the first plate system, stiffener system, member system, or surface.
3
Specifies the second plate system, stiffener system, member system, or surface.
4
Specifies the sketching plane that intersects the selected systems or surfaces.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1341


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Specifies an auxiliary reference for the sketching plane, such as a plate or profile system.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1342


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Reject
Clears the current selections.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
Method
Specifies the measurement method. Select At girth then along normal or At intersection
of offset curves. Descriptions of the parameters for each method are below.

At girth then along normal Method


Positions a point at the girth distance from the starting point along the curve of the first system
(such as the hull), and then at a distance from the girth point along the normal to the curve. The
intersection point is at the intersection of the first system, the second system, and the sketching
plane. The curve of the first system is at the intersection between the first system and the
sketching plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1343


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

1 - Intersection point
2 - Girth distance
3 - Girth point
4 - Normal distance
5 - Point at minimum distance

Girth Distance
Defines the girth (on page 1457) distance along the first system curve.
Normal Distance
Defines the linear distance normal to the first system curve.
Intersection
Defines the axis direction for the intersection point, when the first system, second system,
and sketching plane intersect in more than one location. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. For
example, a hull, deck, and transverse sketching plane intersect on the port and starboard
sides. Select +y to use the starboard side starting point or -y to use the port side starting
point.
Girth
Defines the axis direction used to orient the girth distance measurement.
Normal
Defines the axis direction used to orient the normal distance measurement.
Offset 0
Defines the distance that the point is offset from the sketching plane 4.
Face Reference
Specifies the profile face to use to create a sketching plane. Select Web or Flange. This
option is only available when a profile system is selected for sketching plane 4.
Direction
Specifies the direction of Offset 0, using the axis normal to the sketching plane. Select
Positive or Negative.

At intersection of offset curves Method


Positions a point linearly along the select coordinate system axes from the intersection point of
the offset curves from the first and second systems.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1344


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

1 - Intersection point
2 - Offset 1 curve
3 - Offset 2 curve
4 - Offset 1 distance
5 - Offset 2 distance
6 - Point at minimum distance

Offset 1 Distance
Defines the linear distance along the first system curve offset.
Offset 2 Distance
Defines the linear distance along the second system curve offset.
Intersection
Defines the axis direction for the intersection point, when the first system, second system,
and sketching plane intersect in more than one location. Select +x, -x, +y, -y, +z, or -z. For
example, a hull, deck, and transverse sketching plane intersect on the port and starboard
sides. Select +y to use the port side starting point or -y to use the starboard side starting
point.
Offset 1
Defines the axis direction used to orient the first offset measurement.
Offset 2
Defines the axis direction used to orient the second offset measurement.
Offset 0
Defines the distance that the point is offset from the sketching plane 4.
Face Reference
Specifies the profile face to use to create a sketching plane. Select Web or Flange. This
option is only available when a profile system is selected for sketching plane 4.
Direction
Specifies the direction of Offset 0, using the axis normal to the sketching plane. Select
Positive or Negative.

What do you want to do?


 Place a topological point along a girth distance and offset normal to the curve (on page 1346)
 Place a topological point offset from the intersection of two offset curves (on page 1347)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1345


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Place a topological point along a girth distance and offset


normal to the curve
1. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
2. Click PointAtMinimumDistance on the Point Palette.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Select a plate system, profile system. member system, or surface. The girth distance is
measured along this system.
5. Select a second plate system, profile system. member system, or surface. This selection
must intersect or be bounded to the first system.
6. Select a sketching plane, such as a reference, that intersects the two systems.
7. In the Method box, select At girth then along normal.
A point appears on the sketching plane at the intersection of the selected systems or
surfaces. This is the intersection point.
8. Type a value for Girth.
A point appears on the sketching plane along the girth distance of the first system. This is the
girth point.
9. Type a value for Normal.
The point moves from the girth at a distance normal to the curve of the system.

1 - Intersection point
2 - Girth distance
3 - Girth point
4 - Normal distance
5 - Point at minimum distance

10. Click Finish.


Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1346


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Place a topological point offset from the intersection of two


offset curves
1. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
2. Click PointAtMinimumDistance on the Point Palette.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Select a plate system, profile system. member system, or surface. The girth distance is
measured along this system.
5. Select a second plate system, profile system. member system, or surface. This selection
must intersect or be bounded to the first system.
6. Select a sketching plane, such as a reference, that intersects the two systems.
7. In the Method box, select At intersection of offset curves.
A point appears on the sketching plane at the intersection of the selected systems or
surfaces. This is the intersection point.
8. Type a value for Offset 1 Distance.
9. Type a value for Offset 2 Distance.
The point moves the location of the offsets.

1 - Intersection point
2 - Offset 1 curve
3 - Offset 2 curve
4 - Offset 1 distance
5 - Offset 2 distance
6 - Point at minimum distance

10. Click Finish.


Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1347


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Point at Offset from Key Point

Tooltip: PointAtOffsetFromKeyPoint
Creates a point using a profile or member cross-section key point as reference. For more
information, see Key Points (on page 1353).

Required Input Output


Profile stiffener system or member system Point controlled by driven dimensions
cross-section
Sketching plane
Parameters
Key point
Offset distances

Point at Offset from Key Point Ribbon


Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming
Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the profile or member system.
2
Specifies a plate system, profile system, or reference plane used as a sketching plane
intersecting profile or member system 1.

Specifies a coordinate system. If no coordinate system is selected, then the main coordinate
system is the default. This value is optional.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1348


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.
Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1349


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Reject
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
KeyPoint
Specifies a key point by index number. Every cross-section has 27 key points, although
some are combined for cross-sections with simple geometry. For more information, see Key
Points (on page 1353).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1350


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Select Value in the 3D Graphic View


Allows key point selection in the graphic view. Key points display as preview geometry, key
point numbers, and the local u-v coordinate system. For more information, see Key Points
(on page 1353).

U Offset
Specifies the offset of the geometric construction point from the key point along the local
u-axis of the cross-section. For more information, see Key Points (on page 1353).
V Offset
Specifies the offset of the geometric construction point from the key point along the local
v-axis of the cross-section. For more information, see Key Points (on page 1353).
Offset 0
Defines the distance that the point is offset from the sketching plane 4.
Face Reference
Specifies the profile face to use to create a sketching plane. Select Web or Flange. This
option is only available when a profile system is selected for sketching plane 2.
Direction
Specifies the direction of Offset 0, using the axis normal to the sketching plane. Select
Positive or Negative.

What do you want to do?


 Place a topological point referenced from a profile or member cross-section key point (on
page 1352)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1351


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Place a topological point referenced from a profile or


member cross-section key point
1. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
2. Click PointAtOffsetFromKeyPoint on the Point Palette.
3. Select a profile or member system.
4. Select a plate system, profile system, member system, or reference plane intersecting the
first profile or member system. This is the sketching plane.
5. Select an index number in the Keypoint box, or click Select Value in the 3D Graphic View
and select a key point in the graphic view.
The key point displays in yellow.

6. Type u-axis and v-axis offset values.


Preview geometry of the point displays in green.

7. Optionally, type a name for the point.


8. Optionally, select More in the Parent box, and select a parent system for the point. For
example, you can select the profile or member system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1352


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

9. Optionally, type a value for the offset from the sketching plane in Offset 0, and select a value
for Direction.
10. Click Finish.
Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Key Points
Profile cross-sections use a numbering system called key points. Members use an
equivalent point system called cardinal points. The numbering convention for cardinal points
differs from key points, as described below.

Key Point Numbering Conventions


Key points are numbered consistently among all types of profile cross-sections without regard to
the number of geometric elements. This assures consistent behavior in the software when
changing cross-sections of an existing profile system. As a result, some points are coincident on
some cross-sections. Key point numbering is based on an I-beam profile because it is the most
complex shape. Numbering for other profiles is derived from the I-beam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1353


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

I-beam S-beam

Includes rolled and built-up cross-sections.

T Fabricated T

Includes T and I-to-T. Midpoint is from top of Midpoint is from bottom of flange.
flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1354


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

S-T Angle

Midpoint is from top of flange.


Midpoint is from top of flange.

Fabricated angles

Midpoint is from bottom of flange.

Midpoint is from top of flange.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1355


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Channel S-channel

Flat bar Bulb

Molded Forms User's Guide 1356


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Pipe Rectangular tube

Includes pipe, tube, and round bar.

Half-round

Cardinal Point Numbering Conventions


A cardinal point defines the location where the software displays a member cross-section. There
are 15 cardinal points definable for a member cross-section symbol, but only one can be used at
a time when the member is placed. Each cardinal point has a number and a name.
The local y-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define load points 11
and 14. The local z-axis of the member and the center-of-gravity point of the section define load
points 12 and 13. The location of points 10 (center-of-gravity) and 15 (shear center) depend on
the section shape.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1357


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

1. Bottom Left
2. Bottom Center
3. Bottom Right
4. Center Left
5. Center
6. Center Right
7. Top Left
8. Top Center
9. Top Right
10. Centroid
11. Centroid Bottom
12. Centroid Left
13. Centroid Right
14. Centroid Top
15. Shear Center

Point from Coordinate System

Tooltip: PointFromCS
Creates a point at the defined X, Y, and Z distances from the origin of the selected coordinate
system or from a selected point.

Required Input Output


Coordinate system Point
Optional Input
Reference point
Parameters
X, Y, and Z distances

Point from Coordinate System Ribbon (for geometric constructions)


Select
Selects an existing geometric construction object, such as a curve or surface, to edit or
delete.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1358


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Add
Selects geometry that defines a new geometric construction. This option is used with the
numbered step options listed below.
Delete
Deletes a selected geometric construction.
Cancel
Cancels the macro, closes the geometric construction ribbon and the Geometric
Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main command ribbon.
Close
Verifies the validity of values selected for the options, closes the geometric construction
ribbon and the Geometric Construction Palette dialog box, and then returns to the main
command ribbon. The selected values are still available when you click again on the
main command ribbon.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select:
 A different, recently-used interface.
 More - Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric
construction, all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing
geometric construction, only similar interface types are available.
Geometric constructions displaying only in the Select Geometric
Construction dialog box are not intended for general usage. You should first consult
your Intergraph support representative before using these geometric constructions.
1
Specifies the coordinate system.

Specifies a reference point from which X, Y, and Z distances are measured. If no reference
point is selected, the X, Y, and Z distances are measured from the origin of the coordinate
system. This value is optional.

Color Coding
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background color when there is no input.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected for the previous geometric construction
and the input can also be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1359


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

When changing an existing geometric construction to a different definition, colors represent the
different value changes:

 and - No background color when you keep the value of the original
geometric construction.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Reject
Clears the selections for the current step.
Accept
Accepts the current selections and displays a preview.
Continue
Completes the geometric construction definition. The ribbon continues to display so that you
can define parameters for additional geometry.
The geometric constructions are not created and saved to the model until
you click Finish on the main command ribbon to create the model object.
X
Specifies the distance along the X-axis from the origin or reference point.
Y
Specifies the distance along the Y-axis from the origin or reference point.
Z
Specifies the distance along the Z-axis from the origin or reference point.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1360


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Point from Coordinate System Ribbon (for topological points in the Molded Forms task)
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the selected geometric construction. This option is only
available after selecting an existing geometric construction.
Geometric Construction
Displays the current geometric construction interface. You can also select a different,
recently-used interface.
More
Opens the Select Geometric Construction dialog box. For a new geometric construction,
all interfaces delivered with the software are available. For an existing geometric construction,
only similar interface types are available. For more information, see [Product
Folder]\Programming\Help\GeometricConstructions.chm, available when Programming
Resources is installed.
1
Specifies the coordinate system.

Specifies a reference point from which X, Y, and Z distances are measured. If no reference
point is selected, the X, Y, and Z distances are measured from the origin of the coordinate
system. This value is optional.

Color Coding
Creating
For a new geometric construction, you can identify the status of input items by the background
color of the step:

 - No background when no input is selected.

 - Yellow background when an input is selected.

 - Blue background when an input was selected from the previous geometric construction
and can be used for the current geometric construction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1361


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Selected inputs appear highlighted in pink in the Workspace Explorer and as pink
dotted lines in the graphic view:

Editing
When modifying an existing geometric construction to a different definition, the colors are used
differently:

 and - No background when the value of the original geometric


construction is retained.

 and - Yellow background when you change a value.

 and - Blue background when the software changes a value to a new


suggested value.
Multi-editing
When modifying multiple existing geometric constructions and an input or parameter is available
for all selections:

 - Blue background when the input is the same for all selected geometric constructions.

 - No background with pink underline when the input is different for all selected
geometric constructions.

 - Blue background with pink underline when the input is different for some selected
geometric constructions.

 - Yellow background with pink underline when all inputs that were originally the same
have been changed. Remaining values have not been changed.

 - No background and no text displayed when the value of the parameter is


different for the selected geometric constructions. Each value, along with the applicable
geometric constructions, are available as selections in the box, as shown in the following
example.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1362


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Reject
Clears the current selections.
Accept
Accepts the current selections, and displays a preview.
Finish
Completes geometric construction definition. The ribbon is still displayed, and parameters for
additional geometry can be defined.
Name
Specifies the name of the geometric construction.
Parent
Specifies a parent for the geometric construction. Select one of the following:
 The current model. This is the default value.
 More - Select a system in the model.
The New GC Set option is not used for topological points.
X
Specifies the distance along the X-axis from the origin or reference point.
Y
Specifies the distance along the Y-axis from the origin or reference point.
Z
Specifies the distance along the Z-axis from the origin or reference point.

What do you want to do?


 Place a point by distances from a coordinate system origin (on page 1045)
 Place a point by distances from a reference point (on page 1045)
 Modify a geometric construction (on page 1055)
 Change a geometric construction to a different definition (on page 1056)
 Delete a geometric construction (on page 1057)
 Place a topological point by distances from a coordinate system origin (on page 1364) (in the
Molded Forms task)
 Place a topological point by distances from a reference point (on page 1364) (in the Molded
Forms task)
 Modify a topological point (on page 1334) (in the Molded Forms task)
 Change a topological point to a different point definition (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms
task)
 Delete a topological point (on page 1335) (in the Molded Forms task)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1363


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Place a topological point by distances from a coordinate


system origin
1. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
2. Click PointFromCS on the Point Palette.
3. Select a coordinate system.
4. Type values for X, Y. and Z.
A green preview point appears. It is offset from the coordinate system origin by the X, Y. and
Z values.
5. Optionally, type a name for the point.
6. Optionally, select More in the Parent box, and select a parent system for the point.
7. Click Finish.
Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Place a topological point by distances from a reference point


1. Create a point to use as a reference point by creating another topological point or using
Insert > Control Point.
Control Point in the Common User's Guide
Topological Points (Insert Menu) (on page 1323) in the Molded Forms User's Guide
2. In the Molded Forms task, select Insert > Topological Points.
3. Click PointFromCS on the Point Palette.
4. Select a coordinate system.
5. Click , and select the reference point.
6. Type values for X, Y, and Z.
A green preview point appears. It is offset from the reference point by the X, Y, and Z values
and along the X, Y, and Z axes of the coordinate system.
7. Optionally, type a name for the point.
8. Optionally, select More in the Parent box, and select a parent system for the point.
9. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1364


Topological Points (Insert Menu)

Point geometry is displayed in the graphic view and in the Workspace Explorer.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1365


SECTION 29

Delay Settings (Tools Menu)


Tools > Delay Settings specifies whether changes made in Molded Forms are immediately
updated in Structural Detailing or Structural Manufacturing. When the delay is active, changes to
the Molded Form systems appear in Molded Forms, but changes needed to the corresponding
Structural Detailing and Structural Manufacturing objects are put on the To Do List. When the
delay is not active, the changes needed to the corresponding Structural Detailing and Structural
Manufacturing objects are propagated immediately.
This setting is saved in, and applies only to, your session file. Therefore, it is possible
that objects that you expect to appear in the To Do List propagate instead because they are
used in someone else's session where the delay setting is off.
This command opens the Delay Operations dialog box.

What do you want to do?


 Turn on delay operations (on page 1366)
 Update delayed objects (on page 1366)
 Turn off delay operations (on page 1366)

Turn on delay operations


1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
2. Click the Delay Settings tab.
3. Turn on the Delay Structure Operations options that meet your requirements.
4. Click OK.

Update delayed objects


1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
2. Click the Update To Do Records tab.
3. Define the record filter as required.
4. Type a file name and folder path for the error file.
5. Click Update Objects.

Turn off delay operations


1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
2. On the Delay Settings tab, click No Delay.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1366


Delay Settings (Tools Menu)

3. Click OK.

Delay Operations Dialog Box


Displays settings for the Delay Settings command.
Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) (on page 1367)
Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) (on page 1367)
To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box) (on page 1368)

Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box)


Specifies the delay operation, if any, that you want taken.

Report Data Generation


Disable Report Data
Select to disable the report data generation.

Delay Structure Operations


No Delay
Select this option to have changes to the Structural Manufacturing and Structural Detailing
objects propagated when the Molded Form object changes.
Delay Molded Forms
Select this option to have changes to the Molded objects sent to the To Do List instead of
being propagated.
Delay Struct Detailing
Select this option to have changes to the Structural Detailing objects sent to the To Do List
when the Molded Form object changes.

Update To Do Records Tab (Delay Operations Dialog Box)


Controls how objects that you have delayed to the To Do List are updated.

To Do Record Filters
User Name
Select the user name to filter the To Do List records by.
Dates
Define the starting (From) and ending (To) dates to filter the To Do List records by.
Order
Select the order in which to process the To Do List records. Select None, Optimal,
Ascending, or Descending.
Select Optimal to allow the software to pick the order of updating that most logically
clears records from the To Do List.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1367


Delay Settings (Tools Menu)

Type
Select which type of To Do List records to process. Select Errors, Warnings, Out-of-Date,
Out-of-Date Reporting, or Out-of-Date Molded Forms.
Structure to Update
Select All, Hull, or Select a Filter.
 All or Hull updates the objects accordingly.
 Select a Filter launches additional options, CreateNewFilter and More(Select from
Existing Filters). Both options require you to select a filter before the system can update
the objects.

Update To Do Records
Update Objects
Click to update all To Do List records that satisfy the filter you have defined. Objects are
updated in the selected order.
Cancel Update
Stops the update process.
Batch Update
Click to update all To Do List records that meet the requirements for the filters that you have
defined through the Batch process. The system updates objects in the optimal order.

Log
Log File
Type a file name and folder path for the error log.
Enable Logging
Turn on to generate the log file.
View Log File
Click to display the error log.

To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay Operations Dialog


Box)
Displays detailed information about the delayed To Do List records.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1368


SECTION 30

Repairing Tribon Data


The Tribon translator software includes a command that you can use to repair the data in Tribon
XML files. Examples of data to repair include:
 Instance properties
 Profile part and seam location
The integrity of the source data is the responsibility of the generating software
(in this case, Tribon). When you repair the data with this command, you assume liability and
responsibility for the results. Intergraph does not assume any liability for the data modifications.
See Also
Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu) (on page 1369)

Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu)


Tools > Repair Tribon XML modifies data in Tribon XML files. You can then import the modified
data into Smart 3D.

Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box (on page 1369)

Repair Tribon data


1. Import Tribon data from an XML file. For more information, see Import Ship Structure (on
page 1231).
2. If you see errors in the imported geometry, perform the following steps.
3. Click Tools > Repair Tribon XML.
4. On the Repair Tribon XML dialog box, specify the input file, output file, and log file for the
repair process.
5. Select the curved panels to repair.
6. Check the repair options as needed.
7. Click OK.
8. Re-import the data using the repaired XML file. Objects that are different from the previous
import are automatically updated in the model.

Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box


Sets options for repairing Tribon data.

Files
Input XML file

Molded Forms User's Guide 1369


Repairing Tribon Data

Specify the import file.


Output XML file
Specify the output file. You can import this file into Smart 3D using the File > Import > Ship
Structure command.
Log File
Specify a log file that stores information about the repair process.

Panel
Curved Panels
Select this box to choose curved panels, which are panels defined on a sculpted, not flat,
surface.
Plane Panels
This option is not available in this release.
Select the curved panels to be modified in the xml
Click the panels to repair.

Options
Change instance property of panel to As Defined
Changes the instance property to AsDefined. This property specifies the position of objects
relative to their defining geometry. The different values for this property can be:
 AsDefined - The objects are located where they were defined.
 Reflected - If the objects were defined on the port side, they are actually on the
starboard side. If the objects were defined on the starboard side, they are actually on the
port side.
 Both - The objects are symmetrical with respect to the origin and are located on both
sides.
Move profile parts to other side of center line (Change Y value)
Reflects the profile parts about the Y-axis so the parts are in the correct location.
Move seams to other side of centerline (Change Y value)
Reflects the seams about the Y-axis so the parts are in the correct location.
The other options in this section are not available in this release of the software.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1370


SECTION 31

Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu)


The Tools > Data Integrity Check command checks the attributes, ports, boundaries, seams,
thickness direction, and connections of plates to verify their integrity. Although every precaution
has been taken in the software to ensure the integrity of all plates, plate corruption is possible.
This command allows you to search for any corruption or errors.
You can view errors interactively by using the Results Dialog Box (on page 1372).

Data Integrity Check Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to select objects in the model to check, and to view the results
of the check.

Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box, which you use select the name and location of the log file
created by the Data Integrity Check command.
Select Objects
Select the objects to check. Selection is controlled by the Part Selection option.
Finish
Performs the data integrity check on selected objects.
Part Selection
Select the selection method from the following options:
 Workspace - Selects all objects in the workspace.
 Select Parts - Manually select parts in the Workspace Explorer or a graphic view.
 Database - Selects all objects in the model database.
 Last Results - Opens the Results dialog box. After making a part selection and clicking
Finish in the current session, the results of the data integrity check are displayed. For
more information, see Results Dialog Box (on page 1372).

Check data integrity of plates


1. Click Tools > Data Integrity Check.

2. Click Properties .
3. Define a file name and folder location for the log file.
4. Click OK.
5. In the Part Selection list, select the method used to find plates to check.
6. Click Finish.
7. After processing is complete, click View in the View Log dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1371


Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu)

The Results dialog box opens. Each object with an error message is a row on the grid.
The Results dialog box can be reopened at any time in the current session by
selecting Last Results in the Part Selection option.
8. Select Auto Zoom.
9. Select a row in the grid.
A new graphic view window opens. The new graphic view zooms to and highlights the
affected objects. The objects affected by the error also highlight in existing graphic views
without zooming.
10. Right-click the row and select Help.
Molded Forms Help opens to a page describing the error, possible causes, and solutions.
You can also press F1, or click Help in the Selection options frame.
11. To correct the error, follow the instructions in Molded Forms Help.

Results Dialog Box


The Results dialog box displays error messages created from carrying out the Data Integrity
Check command. It also provides tools for filtering the results and correcting the errors.
You open this dialog box by clicking Last Results in the Part Selection list on the Data Integrity
Check ribbon.
Results are available only with the current session. If you start a new session, click
Tools > Data Integrity Check again to see results in the Results dialog box.

Filter Options
The results can be filter using the following options:
Filter selection
Select one or more object type filters.
Enable filters
Select to allow selection of filters in the Filter selection list.
Select All
Click to select all filters in the Filter selection list.
Select None
Click to clear selected filters in the Filter selection list.
Apply
Click to apply selected filters to the results in the grid. Only results meeting the filter criteria
appear in the grid.

Selection Options
A result selected in the grid can be viewed or repaired using the following options:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1372


Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu)

Edit
Selects the object named in the selected row, in both the graphic view and the Workspace
Explorer. You can now edit the object to correct the error. This command is also available on
the shortcut menu.
Recompute
Recalculates the object and all related objects. Performs the same recalculation as the Tools
> Recompute Objects command. For more information, see Recompute Objects. This
command is also available on the shortcut menu.
Help
Opens Molded Forms Help to the page describing the error, possible causes, and solutions
for the object named in the selected row. This command is also available on the shortcut
menu.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the object named in the selected row. This command is
also available on the shortcut menu.
Auto Zoom
Select to open a second graphic view window. When you select a row, the new graphic view
zooms to and highlights the affected objects. The objects affected by the error also highlight
in existing graphic view without zooming.
Color 1
Sets the display color for the object named in the selected row.
Color 2
Sets the display color for shortcut menu commands.

Grid Properties
Lists the objects with errors. When you select a row, the object highlights in existing graphic
views.
Name
Names of affected objects.
Status
The severity of the error. Error indicates a problem that must be fixed. Warning indicates an
irregularity that may not be serious, but requires checking.
Comments
A description of the error.
Checked
The status of your actions on the affected object. To set the value to Checked or Not
checked, select a row, right-click, and select Toggle Checked/Unchecked.
Click the property heading in the grid to sort by that property in ascending or
descending order.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1373


Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu)

Shortcut Menu
Available by right-clicking a row.
Edit
Selects the object named in the selected row, in both the graphic view and the Workspace
Explorer. You can now edit the object to correct the error.
Properties
Opens the Properties dialog box for the object named in the selected row.
Recompute
Recalculates the object and all related objects. Performs the same recalculation as the Tools
> Recompute Objects command.
Update
Recalculates the object, more quickly but less thoroughly than Recompute. Performs the
same recalculation as Update on the To Do List. For more information, see To Do List
Dialog Box.
Seam
Available for seam objects
 View Bounded Seams - Highlights seams bounded to the selected seam.
 View Boundaries - Highlights boundary objects for the selected seam.
Toggle Checked/Unchecked
Changes the value in the Checked box between Checked and Not checked.
Help
Opens Molded Forms Help to the page describing the error, possible causes, and solutions
for the object named in the selected row.
See Also
Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) (on page 1371)
Data Integrity Check Messages (on page 1407)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1374


SECTION 32

Manufacturing Service Manager


Manufacturing Service Manager (in the Structural Manufacturing task) or Tools >
Manufacturing Service Manager reviews and updates manufacturing objects. Review displays
a report of the current condition of the manufacturing objects that you have selected. Updating
pulls any outstanding changes into the manufacturing environment. The command is available on
the vertical toolbar in the Structural Manufacturing task, and by clicking Tools > Manufacturing
Service Manager in the Molded Forms, Structural Detailing, Planning, and Structural
Manufacturing tasks.
You can select individual parts, assemblies, or blocks for this command.
The Manufacturing Service Manager pulls changes into the manufacturing environment
instead of associatively pushing from other tasks into the manufacturing environment. In this way,
the manufacturing environment is similar to the drawing environment; you have control over
which objects get updated and when.

 A manufacturing object goes on the To Do List for the following reasons:


 The object has a nonworking status, or it contains objects which are included in different
permission groups. You must change the manufacturing part status back to Working,
and then update the manufacturing part by using the Manufacturing Service Manager.
 The parent system of the manufacturing object was split in the Molded Forms task, and
that split migration produced an error.
 A compute found a failure within the rule and the manufacturing plate, manufacturing
profile, or manufacturing member returned a warning.
 Some other compute failure, with a specific action per entity, occurred.
 The same behavior occurs when the molded form split is performed by someone who does
not have write permissions to the manufacturing part. In this case, a second person with write
permission to the manufacturing part must update the manufacturing part by the
Manufacturing Service Manager.

Manufacturing Service Manager Ribbon


Displays the controls used to update and review manufacturing objects.

Selection of Possible Report Data


Opens a dialog box from which you can set up reports.

Select
Selects objects in the model.
Finish
Starts the Manufacturing Service Manager.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1375


Manufacturing Service Manager

Cancel
Clears the current selection.
Accept
Accepts the current selection.
Action
Determines whether the Manufacturing Service Manager updates the objects, reviews the
objects, or reports the Detailed Review of the objects.
Filter
Specify the type of manufacturing part to use.
 Parts - All plate, profile, and member parts.
 Parts or Assemblies - All plate, profile, member, and different assembly types. For
assemblies, you can select blocks, assembly blocks and assemblies.
 Plate Parts - Plate parts.
 Plate Parts and Connected Profiles - Includes all profiles connected to the plate parts.
 Profile Parts - Profile parts.
 Member Parts - Member parts.
 Systems - All plate systems, profile systems, and member systems.
 Systems or Assemblies - All systems and assemblies.
 Plate Systems - All plate systems.
 Plate Systems and Connected Profiles - All member systems.
 Profile Systems - All profile systems.
 Member Systems - All member systems and design member systems.
Connected
Specify which type of connected parts to use.
 <Ignore> - Only the selected part.
 Direct Connected - Includes objects that are physically connected to the selected part.
 Indirect Connected - Includes direct objects and objects that are physically connected
to the direct objects.

What do you want to do?


 Review a manufacturing object (on page 1377)
 Update a manufacturing object (on page 1377)
 Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter (on page 1377)
 Detail Review a manufacturing object

Molded Forms User's Guide 1376


Manufacturing Service Manager

Review a manufacturing object


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing objects to review.
You can select the objects in the model or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Review in the Action box.
4. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
5. Click Finish.

Update a manufacturing object


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the manufacturing objects to review.
You can select the objects in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
3. Click Update in the Action box.
4. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
5. Click Finish.
The software updates the database as each manufacturing object is updated. Clicking
Cancel stops the update for any objects that have not yet been posted to the database.

Review or update a set of objects selected by a filter


1. Click More from the filter selection list.
The Select Filter dialog box displays.
2. Set up the filter to meet your requirements. For example, you could define a filter to select
plate and profile parts in a specific block.
The software finds and highlights the objects that match the filter.

3. Click Service Manager (in the Structural Manufacturing task) or Tools >
Manufacturing Service Manager.
The software prompts you to use the selected list of objects.
4. Click Yes.
5. If required, add additional objects to the list.
6. Click Review or Update in the Action box.
7. Select the type of manufacturing object to review in the Report Per box.
8. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1377


Manufacturing Service Manager

Review Dialog Box


Displays the controls used to review the current manufacturing status of manufacturing objects.
This dialog box opens when you click Finish on the Manufacturing Service Manager
Ribbon.
The manufacturing object status display includes:
 Up to Date - Indicates that the object does not require updating.
 Out of Date - Indicates that the object requires updating.
 Can Be Deleted - Indicates that the object is no longer needed.
 To-Do-List (Error) - Indicates that the object is on the To Do List because of an error
condition.
 To-Do-List (Out-of-Date) - Indicates that the object is on the To Do List because it requires
updating.
 To-Do-List (Warning) - Indicates that the object is on the To Do List because of a warning
condition.
 Edited - Indicates that the object has been edited with the part editor. If you modify this part
by using the Manufacturing Plate or Manufacturing Profile commands, or use the BO
Recompute command, then the status does not display as Edited.

Properties
Displays the Selection of Possible Report Data dialog box. For more information, see
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box (on page 1379).
Report Per
Displays the current settings for the report data that is set to display. The information that
displays depends on what you have set to show or hide on the Selection of Possible
Report Data dialog box.
Update
Updates the objects. Only the objects shown on the dialog box are updated. This option does
not update parts with a status of Edited.
Cancel
Closes the dialog box.
File name
Type the path and file name for the report file. You can use the Browse button beside the
box to browse through the file system.
View
Displays the report file in the default text editor, such as Notepad.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1378


Manufacturing Service Manager

Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Box


Displays the controls used to determine which report data displays on the Review dialog box.

Attributes Tab
Option
Determines the manufacturing object type for which you are setting the review options.
Select the box next to the option, and change the setting to Show or Hide as necessary.

Settings Tab
Review Settings
Turn on the settings to apply when the Action is set to Review. The available options
include:
 Only include Out of Date manufacturing objects
 Only include manufacturing objects in To Do List
 Check detailed part in To Do List
 Include light parts
 Refresh after Update
 Highlight Out of Date objects
Update Settings
Turn on the settings to apply when the Action is set to Update. The available options
include:
 Delete objects under light part
 Update objects with detailed part in To Do List
 Update manufacturing objects in To Do List
 Recompute all manufacturing objects

Molded Forms User's Guide 1379


SECTION 33

Submit Batch Job


Tools > Submit Batch Job runs batch processes using the Intergraph Batch Services
framework.
This command runs the following types of batch jobs:
Detailing:
 Detail parts
 Undetail parts
 Update reports
Production:
 Generate manufacturing parts
 Generate XML output files
 Manufacturing Service Manager update
Custom batch processes:
 BO recompute
 Other custom batch processes that you define.

What do you want to do?


 Run a detailing batch process (on page 1380)
 Run a production batch process (on page 1381)
 Run a custom batch process (on page 1381)
 Add a custom batch process (on page 1382)

Run a detailing batch process


1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Detailing from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available detailing batch processes in the Select Batch Process list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1380


Submit Batch Job

Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.


5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Run a production batch process


1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Production from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available production batch processes in the Select Batch Process
list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Run a custom batch process


1. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
2. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
3. Select Custom Batch PRocesses from the Batch Process Type list.
Smart 3D displays the available custom batch processes in the Select Batch Process list.
4. Select the process to run from the Select Batch Process list, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
5. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
6. Click Schedule.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1381


Submit Batch Job

The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.


7. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Add a custom batch process


1. Add the ProgID and job description of the custom batch process to the <Product
Folder>\CommonShip\SOM\Client\Xml\CustomBatchJobDetailsConfiguration.xml file.
For example:
<JOB>
<JobType>CustomBatchProcessD</JobType>
<JobType_LocaleID>103</JobType_LocaleID>
<JobDescription>Description of
CustomBatchProcessD</JobDescription>
<JobDescription_LocaleID>104</JobDescription_LocaleID>
<JobProgId> ProgID of CustomBatchProcess </JobProgId>
<IsModelSpecific>False</IsModelSpecific>
</JOB>
2. Click Tools > Submit Batch Job.
The Generic Batch Command dialog box displays.
3. Select the batch process to run from the Batch Process list. If the process you want to run is
not in the list, select More from the Batch Process list.
The Batch Process Selection dialog box displays.
4. Select Custom Batch Process from the Batch Process Type list.
The available custom batch processes display in the Select Batch Process list.
5. Select the custom process to run, and click OK.
Smart 3D returns to the Generic Batch Command dialog box.
6. Specify the Batch Input Type, and add inputs as necessary.
7. Click Schedule.
The Schedule [Task] Batch Job dialog box displays.
8. Set up the parameters to run the batch job. For more information, see Schedule [Task]
Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1382


Submit Batch Job

Generic Batch Command Dialog Box


Displays the controls used to submit a generic batch command.
Batch Process
Specifies the batch process to run. The list contains recently-selected job types. Click More
to display the Batch Process Selection dialog box, and select a process that is not on the
list. For more information, see Batch Process Selection Dialog Box (on page 1384).
Batch Input Type
Indicates the input type for the batch process.
 Filter indicates that you are providing a filter as an input to the batch job.
 Assembly indicates that you are providing an assembly as input to the batch job.
 Object indicates that you are providing a set of objects as input to the batch job.

Add
Adds inputs to your batch job.
 If Filter is selected, this button displays the Select Filter dialog box so that you can add
filters as inputs to your batch job.
 If Assembly is selected, this button displays the Select Assembly dialog box so that
you can add assemblies as inputs to your batch job.
 If Object is selected, this button is not available. To add objects as inputs, select them
from the model or the Workspace Explorer.

Remove
Removes the selected inputs from the list. The software only removes the inputs that have
the associated check box selected.
Share
Saves the inputs for the next batch process. If this check box is cleared, Smart 3D clears the
inputs when you select a different batch process.
Schedule as Multiple Jobs
Processes each item in the inputs list as a separate batch process. If this check box is
cleared, Smart 3D processes all of the inputs as a single batch process.
Schedule
Displays the Schedule [Task] dialog box so that you can schedule the batch process. For
more information, see Schedule [Task] Dialog Box in the Common User's Guide.
Cancel
Exits the command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1383


Submit Batch Job

Batch Process Selection Dialog Box


Displays the controls used to specify the type of batch process to run.
Batch Process Type
Displays the general batch process types. Select a type to display the available batch
process of that type in the Select Batch Process list.
Select Batch Process
Displays the available batch process associated with the selected type.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1384


SECTION 34

Miscellaneous Commands
The following commands are on the Edit and Tools menus.

In This Section
Change Geometry Type (Edit Menu) ............................................. 1385
Measure Explicit (Tools Menu) ...................................................... 1386
Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu) .............................................. 1388
Automatic Preview (Tools Menu) ................................................... 1395

Change Geometry Type (Edit Menu)


Edit > Change Geometry Type modifies the geometry type of a plate system, a profile system,
or a design seam. Use this command when you want to change a stiffener profile system by 2D
projection to a stiffener profile system by table, for example.
Some geometry types are not compatible with other geometry types. You cannot change a
non-linear extruded plate system to a planar plate system, for example.
You will have greater success changing geometry types of profile systems and seams, because
a curve is modified. Plates systems are more difficult to change because a surface must be
modified.

Modify geometry type


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select the appropriate filter in the Locate Filter: Root Plates, Root Profiles, Seams, or
RefCurve On Surface & Knuckles.
3. Select the plate system, profile system, or seam to modify.
4. Click Edit > Change Geometry Type.
The Change Geometry Type dialog box displays.
5. Slect the new geometry type, and then click OK.
6. Using the ribbon controls for the new geometry type, define the parameters for the object.
The workflow is similar to placing a new plate system, profile system, or seam. See the
appropriate topic for details:
Place a planar plate system (on page 104)
Place a linear extruded plate system (on page 161)
Place a nonlinear extruded plate system (on page 185)
Place a revolved plate system (on page 209)
Create a ruled plate system using existing curves (on page 454)
Place stiffener profile by intersection (on page 728)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1385


Miscellaneous Commands

Place stiffener profile by offset (on page 745)


Place stiffener profile by projection (on page 753)
Place stiffener profile by table (on page 760)
Place a seam by intersection (on page 903)
Place a seam by offset (on page 907)
Place a seam by projection (on page 912)
Place a seam by table (on page 914)
7. Click Finish on the ribbon bar to complete the geometry type change.

Measure Explicit (Tools Menu)


Measures girth distances along curves, such as landing curves, in a cumulative fashion.

The Measure Explicit command differs from the Measure command. Measure allows
you to pick a reference point on an edge or curve and then measures the distance between that
point and another point that you select on the edge/curve. The Measure Explicit command
allows you to specify curves that intersect the edge/curve along which you are measuring. The
software then computes the intersection points.

 You can change the display of the units of measure for the distance by clicking Tools >
Options. For more information, see Change a Displayed Unit of Measure in the Common
User's Guide.
 The measurement information only appears when the command is active. This command
does not write any dimensions or information to the database.

Measure Explicit Ribbon


Displays options for cumulatively measuring girth distances along curves.

Coordinate System Properties


Shows properties of the active coordinate system.
Coordinate System
Assigns the coordinate system to use to define the axis directions.

Define Coordinate System by 3 Points


Defines a temporary coordinate system by three points. Point 1 defines the origin of the
coordinate system. Point 2 defines the end of the local X-axis. Point 3 defines the end of the
local Y-axis.
Cumulative
Sums repeated measurements.
Clear
Resets the value of Cumulative to zero.
Distance
Displays the distance value. You can specify the units by clicking Tools > Options and
selecting the Units of Measure tab. For more information, see Change a Displayed Unit of
Measure in the Common User's Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1386


Miscellaneous Commands

X
Displays the distance along the X-axis.
Y
Displays the distance along the Y-axis.
Z
Displays the distance along the Z-axis.

What do you want to do?


 Measure using a temporary coordinate system (on page 1387)
 Measure a girth distance along a landing curve (on page 1387)

Measure using a temporary coordinate system


1. Click Tools > Measure Explicit.

2. On the ribbon, click Define Coordinate System by 3 Points .


The ribbon temporarily disappears.
3. Click the first point to define the origin of the coordinate system.
4. Click the second point to define the end of the local X-axis.
5. Click the third point to define the end of the local Y-axis.
The ribbon reappears. Temporary appears as the value in the Coordinate System box.
6. Follow the status bar prompts to begin measuring.
7. Right-click to quit the Measure Explicit command.

Measure a girth distance along a landing curve


1. Click Tools > Measure Explicit.
2. Select the object edge to measure along.
3. Select the element from which to start the measurement. This element (curve) must intersect
with the object edge that you selected in the previous step.
4. Click the second element (curve). This element (curve) must also intersect with the object
edge that you selected in step 2. The girth distance from the first point to the second point
appears next to the pointer.
5. Continue clicking in the model for additional measurements, as needed. The software
displays the total distance in the Cumulative box on the ribbon.
6. Right-click to quit the Measure Explicit command.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1387


Miscellaneous Commands

Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu)


Tools > Automatic Reconnect changes a boundary from one object to another. You most
commonly use Automatic Reconnect after you copy, move, or mirror systems (including
through Model Data Reuse and Model Data Transform operations in the Project Management
task) without including a boundary in the copy (by selecting Edit > Paste > Delete Optional).
These copy operations replace the boundary with a standalone plane boundary. After the copy,
you can replace the standalone plane with a new boundary by using Tools > Automatic
Reconnect.
You can also make other boundary changes, such as changing the boundary of a plate system
from a reference plane to a plate system, or from a seam to another seam.

Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box (on page 1391)

What do you want to do?


 Use filters to view copied objects required reconnection (see "Use filters to view copied
objects requiring reconnection" on page 1388)
 Reconnect copied objects to a new boundary (on page 1390)
 Reconnect temporary definition and sketching planes to model reference planes (on page
1390)
 Rebound objects (on page 1391)

Use filters to view copied objects requiring reconnection


Use this procedure to highlight objects with standalone boundaries or definition planes, resulting
from a copy/move/mirror of systems, or model data reuse/model data transform in the Project
Management task.
1. Click Tools > Select by Filter.
The Select Filter dialog box displays.
2. Select one of the following:
 Catalog Filters/Default Intelliship Filters/Intelliship Object Filters/All Objects with
Substituted Boundary.
 A filter in the Catalog Filters/Default Intelliship Filters/Intelliship Object Filters/All Objects
with Substituted Boundary folder, such as Plate Systems with Substituted Boundary.
 Catalog Filters/Default Intelliship Filters/Intelliship Object Filters/All Objects with
Substituted Definition Plane.
 A filter in the Catalog Filters/Default Intelliship Filters/Intelliship Object Filters/All Objects
with Substituted Definition Plane folder, such as Plate Systems with Substituted
Definition Plane.
3. Click OK.
Objects meeting the filter criteria highlight in the graphic view.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1388


Miscellaneous Commands

Example 1 - Plate Systems with Substituted Boundaries

1 - Original model objects


2 - Copied model objects

Example 2 - Profile Systems with Substituted Boundaries

1 - Original model objects


2 - Copied model objects

For easier access, you can copy the filters into the My Filters or Ship Filters folders
in the Select Filter dialog box.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1389


Miscellaneous Commands

Reconnect copied objects to a new boundary


Use this procedure to reconnect copied objects to a boundary when the original boundary has
been replaced by a temporary standalone plane as part of the copy operation.
1. Select Tools > Automatic Reconnect.
The Automatic Reconnect dialog box displays.
2. On the Boundary tab, select Reconnect.
3. Specify the Distance value for finding standalone planes near the new boundary.
4. For standalone planes, select Geometry as the type of existing boundary.
5. For New boundary filter, select an object type from the list. For example, if the new
boundary is a plate system, select Plate Systems.
6. Specify the new boundary object in the New boundary object box. You can select the object
from either the Workspace Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box,
or select an object from the list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.
7. Optionally, to further filter restrict the objects to reconnect, select values for Scope filter and
the Entity filter.
8. Click Apply.
All entities that are bounded to the standalone plane display in Candidates list and highlight
in the graphic view.
9. In Candidates list, clear the check box for objects you do not want to rebound.
10. Click Reconnect.
11. Click View Log to see the reconnect status.
12. Click Close.

Reconnect temporary definition and sketching planes to


model reference planes
Use this procedure to reconnect copied objects to a definition or sketching plane when the
original plane has been replaced by a temporary standalone plane as part of the copy operation.
1. Select Tools > Automatic Reconnect.
The Automatic Reconnect dialog box displays.
2. On the Plane tab, select the type of standalone plane to reconnect, Definition or Sketch.
3. Specify the Distance value for finding planes near the new plane.
4. Click Select Frame, and select the new plane in the Select Frame dialog box.
5. For standalone planes, select Geometry as the type of existing boundary.
6. Optionally, to further filter restrict the planes to reconnect, select values for Scope filter and
the Entity filter.
7. Click Apply.
All objects with standalone plane definitions and within the distance value of the new plane

Molded Forms User's Guide 1390


Miscellaneous Commands

display in Candidates list and highlight in the graphic view.


8. In Candidates list, clear the check box for objects you do not want to reconnect.
9. Click Reconnect.
10. Click View Log to see the reconnect status.
11. Click Close.

Rebound objects
Use this procedure to replace a boundary with another boundary, such as when the boundary is
used by multiple objects.
1. Select Tools > Automatic Reconnect.
The Automatic Reconnect dialog box displays.
2. On the Boundary tab, select Rebound.
3. For Old boundary filter, select an object type from the list. For example, if the boundary is a
reference plane, select Grids.
4. Specify the old boundary object in the Old boundary object box. You can select the object
from either the Workspace Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box,
or select an object from the list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.
5. For New boundary filter, select an object type from the list. For example, if the boundary is
a plate system, select Plate Systems.
6. Specify the new boundary object in the New boundary object box. You can select the object
from either the Workspace Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box,
or select an object from the list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.
7. Optionally, to further filter restrict the objects to rebound, select values for Scope filter and
the Entity filter.
8. Click Apply.
All entities that are bounded to the old boundary display in Candidates list and highlight in
the graphic view.
9. In Candidates list, clear the check box for objects you do not want to rebound.
10. Click Rebound.
11. Click View Log to see the rebound status.
12. Click Close.

Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box


Sets automatic rebounding parameters and performs the rebounding operation.
Boundary Tab (Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box) (on page 1392)
Plane Tab (Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box) (on page 1394)

Transactions
Single transaction

Molded Forms User's Guide 1391


Miscellaneous Commands

When selected, rebounds or reconnects all the selected candidates to the new boundary
object in a single transaction.
Entities per transaction
Specifies the number of objects that you want to rebound or reconnect per transaction. If you
do not want to commit all the objects in a single transaction, clear Single transaction and
type the number of objects.
Plate split delay
When selected, delays the split plate update. The plate to split is placed on the To Do List
with the message Plate System split was stopped due to delay split and with a status of Out
of Date. You must select View > To Do List to update the plate system at a later time.
Rebound/Reconnect
Rebounds or reconnects the selected candidates to the new boundary object. When
candidates are reconnected to the new boundary object, the software removes the
candidates from the Candidates list.
View Log
Displays the logging information of the results on the selected candidates of the reconnect
process. The Automatic Rebound Log dialog box displays. From this dialog box, you can
click Save As to save the log to a file.
Close
Closes the Automatic Reconnect dialog box, and closes the command. If you did not click
Rebound/Reconnect, changes are not saved.

Boundary Tab (Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box)


Sets parameters and rebounds or reconnects objects to a new boundary object.

Type
Reconnect
Restricts the command to replacing a standalone boundary resulting from a copy operation
with a new object boundary. The replacement reconnects the bound plate or profile system to
another system or a reference plane.
Rebound
Restricts the command to replacing a system or reference plane boundary with a new system
or reference plane boundary.

Boundaries (Reconnect options)


Distance
Specifies the range distance used by the software to find existing boundaries, such as
standalone planes, near the new boundary object.
New boundary filter
Specifies the object type, such as grids, seams, reference curves, plate systems, profile
systems, or member systems, for the new boundary object.
Depending on the entities that you select in Candidates list for rebound, the

Molded Forms User's Guide 1392


Miscellaneous Commands

object types that do not suit as boundaries for the selected entities are available for selection.
New boundary object
Specifies the new boundary object. You can select the object from either the Workspace
Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box , or select an object from the
list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.

If you select Grids for New boundary filter, you can click browse to display
the Select Frame dialog box, which shows all the coordinate systems in the model. You can
select the appropriate reference plane for the new boundary. For example, if you select
frame F5 from coordinate system Main_CS, the New boundary object displays as
Main_CS:F5.

Boundaries (Rebound options)


Old boundary filter
Specifies the object type, such as Grids, Seams, Reference Curves, Plate Systems,
Profile Systems, or Member Systems, for the old boundary object.
Old boundary object
Specifies the old boundary object. You can select the object from either the Workspace
Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box, or select an object from the
list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.

If you select Grids for Old boundary filter, you can click browse to display
the Select Frame dialog box, which shows all the coordinate systems in the model. You can
then select the appropriate reference plane for the old boundary. For example, if you select
frame F5 from coordinate system Main_CS, the Old boundary object displays as
Main_CS:F5.
New boundary filter
Specifies the object type, such as grids, seams, reference curves, plate systems, profile
systems, or member systems, for the new boundary object.
Depending on the entities that you select in Candidates list for rebound, the
object types that do not suit as boundaries for the selected entities are available for selection.
New boundary object
Specifies the new boundary object. You can select the object from either the Workspace
Explorer or the graphic view, type the object name into the box , or select an object from the
list, which shows the last ten selections you have made.

If you select Grids for New boundary filter, you can click browse to display
the Select Frame dialog box, which shows all the coordinate systems in the model. You can
select the appropriate reference plane for the new boundary. For example, if you select
frame F5 from coordinate system Main_CS, the New boundary object displays as
Main_CS:F5.

Candidates
Scope filter
Defines a scope to further filter the candidates list.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1393


Miscellaneous Commands

 Workspace - The software shows all the entities in the workspace that are bounded to
the old boundary object.
 System Folder - Displays the Select System dialog box, where you select a system.
The software shows all the entities in the selected system that are bounded to the old
boundary object.
 Select Filter - Displays the Select Filter dialog box, where you select a catalog filter or
create your own filter. The software shows all entities matching the filter criteria that are
bounded to the old boundary object.
Entity filter
Defines an object type, such as Plate Systems, Profile Systems, Seams, Reference
Curves, or Bracket Systems, to further filter the candidates list. You can also select Select
Filter to create an object filter.
Candidates list
After you click Apply, displays all entities that are bounded to the old boundary object and
satisfy the filter criteria. The candidates highlight in the graphic view. To select a candidate
for rebounding, select the check box next to the candidate.
You can examine a candidate before selecting it. Click the candidate in
Candidates list, and it displays in the system highlight color in the graphic view.
 Description - Displays the name of a candidate.
 Status - Shows the state of a candidate. The status can be OK, Error, or To Do List.
Apply
Populates the Candidates list with objects meeting the filter criteria.
Select All
Selects all the candidates available in Candidates list.
Select None
Clears all selections made in Candidates list.

Plane Tab (Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box)


Sets parameters and reconnects objects to a new reference or sketching plane.

Plane
Distance
Specifies the range distance used by the software to find systems with existing definition
planes, such as the reference planes for planar plate systems, near the new reference plane.

New Planes
Select Frame
Displays the Select Frame dialog box, which shows all coordinate systems in the model. You
can select the appropriate reference plane for the new plane. For example, if you select
frame Z1 from coordinate system Main_CS, the New boundary object displays as
Main_CS:Z1.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1394


Miscellaneous Commands

New Planes
Displays the new reference plane.

Candidates
Scope filter
Defines a scope to further filter the candidates list.
 Workspace - The software shows all the entities in the workspace that are defined by a
standalone plane and within the range distance of the new plane.
 System Folder - Displays the Select System dialog box, where you select a system.
The software shows all the entities in the selected system that are defined by a
standalone plane and within the range distance of the new plane.
 Select Filter - Displays the Select Filter dialog box, where you select a catalog filter or
create your own filter. The software shows all entities matching the filter criteria that are
defined by a standalone plane and within the range distance of the new plane.
Entity filter
Defines an object type, such as Plate Systems, Profile Systems, Seams, Reference
Curves, or Bracket Systems, to further filter the candidates list. You can also select Select
Filter to create an object filter.
Candidates list
After clicking Apply, displays all entities that are defined by a standalone plane, within the
range distance of the new plane, and satisfy the filter criteria.The candidates highlight in the
graphic view. To select a candidate for reconnection, select the check box next to the
candidate.
You can examine a candidate before selecting it. Click the candidate in
Candidates list, and it displays in the system highlight color in the graphic view.
 Description - Displays the name of a candidate.
 Status - Shows the state of a candidate. The status can be OK, Error, or To Do List.
Apply
Populates the Candidates list with objects meeting the filter criteria.
Select All
Selects all the candidates available in Candidates list.
Select None
Clears all selections made in Candidates list.

Automatic Preview (Tools Menu)


Tools > Automatic Preview sets advanced plate system and geometric construction palettes
to automatically display previews for a selected macro. For more information, see Advanced
Plate Palette Dialog Box (on page 283) and Geometric Constructions (on page 1027).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1395


APPENDIX A

Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using


Molded Forms Delay
Use this workflow when a ship is far enough into the design cycle that changing the hull form
causes recalculation of a large number of objects. This workflow uses settings on the Delay tab
of the Imported Plate System Properties dialog box, allowing changed objects to be better
managed to prevent model errors and excessive recalculation time. The following types of
recalculations are delayed:
 Hull splits
 Update of hull structure, such as hull profiles
 Update of internal structure dependent on the hull

 This workflow is best performed by an administrator with full permissions to the model.
 This workflow is best performed on a 64-bit Windows computer with at least 4 GB of RAM.
TM
For more information, see Intergraph Smart 3D Installation Guide.
 If your model is very early in the design process, you may be able to use the basic hull swap
procedure described in Swap hulls (on page 137). If you are unsure of which procedure to
use, follow the workflow below.

What do you want to do?


 Prepare the model (on page 1397)
 Copy the model (on page 1397)
 Start error logging (on page 1398)
 Select delay and range settings and swap the hulls (on page 1398)
 Check the To-Do List (on page 1400)
 Check the seam pattern on the new hull (on page 1400)
 Repair seams that did not split (on page 1401)
 Remove delay and update To-Do List records for the hull (on page 1402)
 Check hull records on the To-Do List (on page 1402)
 Remove delay and update To-Do List records for internal structure (on page 1403)
 Check internal structure records on the To-Do List (on page 1403)
 Check internal structure in the model (on page 1403)
 Update remaining To-Do List records (on page 1403)
 Evaluate results (on page 1404)

Molded Forms User's Guide 1396


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

 Recover from a failed hull swap (on page 1405)


 Stop error logging (on page 1405)

Prepare the model


The following steps are recommended to ensure that the model is in the cleanest possible state
before swapping the hull.
1. In Project Management, click Database > Integrity to scan the model for records that may
cause performance problems and can be removed, such as records of deleted objects. For
more information, see Database Integrity in the Project Management User's Guide.
2. In Project Management, click Database > Maintenance to clean the unneeded records from
database. For more information, see Database Maintenance in the Project Management
User's Guide.
3. In SQL, run the following queries:
 [Product
Folder]\StructDetail\Server\Schema\SQL\DataIntegrityScripts\FixDanglingFlavorRlns.sql
 [Product
Folder]\StructDetail\Server\Schema\SQL\DataIntegrityScripts\CleanUnnecessaryFlavors
.sql
4. In the model, click Tools > Data Integrity Check. Perform the check, and fix listed items
related to seam gaps and seams on the To Do List. For more information, see Check data
integrity of plates in Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) (on page 1371).
5. Optionally, export the seam data by clicking File > Export > Seams. This seam data can be
imported onto the new swapped hull if problems occur during the swap. For more information,
see Export Seams (File Menu) (on page 1239).
6. If delay is used on any existing model objects, Click Tools > Delay Settings and update all
structure. The steps are similar to Remove delay and update To-Do List records for internal
structure (on page 1403).
7. Click View > To Do List. Fix as many listed records as possible.

Copy the model


1. Create a backup of the databases. For more information, see Backup in the Project
Management User's Guide.
2. From the backup, restore a copy of the model into the existing site. Give the copied model a
different name. For more information, see Restore in the Project Management User's Guide.
The copied model is later used as the before-swap model to compare with the
after-swap model. For more information, see Evaluate results (on page 1404).
3. Open the original model.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1397


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

Start error logging


1. Open EnableErrorLog. EnableErrorLog.exe is delivered in [Product
Folder]\Core\Tools\Administrator\Bin.
The Enable Error Log window opens.
2. Select Log run time errors.
3. Select 2 - Detailed for Select the severity of the errors to be reported.
4. If you do not want to use the default location and file name, type a new path for Error log full
file name.
5. Click Generate time-based log file name at each new start of SP3D task host and
Preserve User Settings.
6. Click OK.
The Enable Error Log window closes. Error logging runs in the background when Smart 3D
is running.

Select delay and range settings and swap the hulls


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
3. Select the existing hull plate system in a graphic view or the Workspace Explorer.
The Imported Plate System ribbon appears.

4. Click File Definition .


The Open Hull File dialog box appears.
5. Select the .SAT or .IGS file that contains the new hull to import.

 The names, types, and attributes of reference curves and knuckles on the new hull must
match those of the old hull. Unmatched reference curves and knuckles are deleted.
 To show .IGS files in the file browser, you must select IGES files (*.igs) as the file type.
6. Click Open.
A preview of the new hull appears in the graphic view.
7. If you are importing a hull from an .IGS file and the file defines only half of the hull, click
Mirror surface , Mirror reference curves , or both on the ribbon to import a complete
hull.
By default, the two mirror options are unavailable. A preview for the hull is updated
automatically when you click Mirror surface .

8. On the Imported Plate System ribbon, click Imported Plate System Properties .
The Imported Plate System Properties dialog box appears.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1398


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

For more information, see Imported Plate System (on page 130) and Delay Tab (Imported
Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 155).
9. On the Delay tab, select Molded Forms Delay.
10. Optionally, select Plate Split Delay.
This option provides the fastest performance for the hull swap.
11. If you do not know the coordinate range differences between the old and new hull and want
all hull-related recalculations to be delayed, then select System range of change.
Low and High values are added in the Display Range grid.
12. If you know the coordinate range differences between the old and new hull or only want to
delay recalculations in one or more limited areas:
 Select User range of change.
 Type Low and High values for the X, Y, and Z axes.
 Click Add.
The values appear in the Display Range grid.
13. Repeat the previous steps to create additional ranges as needed.
14. To check a range, select a row in the Display Range grid.
A range box appears in the graphic view.

.
When System range of change is selected, verify that the range box includes the
entire old and new hulls.
15. If the range box is not correct, type the needed Low and High values for X, Y, and Z, then
click Modify.
16. Click OK.
The Imported Plate System Properties dialog box closes.
17. Click Finish on the ribbon.
The old hull is replaced with the new hull. Hull seams, structure, and reference curves are
moved to the new hull.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1399


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

Check the To-Do List


1. Click View > To Do List.
The To Do List dialog box appears.
2. Select records with the following messages:
 Compute was stopped due to delay propagation.
 Plate System bound was stopped due to delay propagation.
 Landing curve bound was stopped due to delay propagation.
 Plate system split was stopped due to delay split during molded forms delay.
 Bracket re-symbolization was stopped due to delay propagation.
 Plate part generation was stopped due to delay propagation.
 Profile part generation was stopped due to delay propagation.
 One or more connected leaf systems are delayed. Please update the connected object in
delay.
The affected objects highlight in the graphic view. In the example below, internal structure
with the "Plate System bound was stopped due to delay propagation" message is selected.

3. Check that the objects are in the range boxes that you defined on the Delay tab.

Check the seam pattern on the new hull


1. Add a Verify Seam Pattern to Split custom command for ProgID
SplitCommands.VerifySeamPatternToSplit. For more information, see Custom
Commands in the Common User's Guide.

2. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.


3. Select Molded Forms (Root Level) in the Locate Filter.
4. Select the hull plate system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1400


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

5. Click Tools > Custom Commands.


The Custom Commands dialog box appears.
6. Select Verify Seam Pattern to Split in the Command name box and click Run.
A dialog box appears listing:
 Successful and failed splits (bad splitters).
 The number of modified, new, identical, and deleted leaf systems.
7. Select options in the dialog box.
The selected options display in the graphic view. In the following example, Modified
Bodies (Yellow) is selected. Modified leaf systems display in yellow.

8. Check the results.

Repair seams that did not split


Perform these steps if any seams failed to split on the new hull.
1. Click Tools > Data Integrity Check.
2. Perform the check. For more information, see Check data integrity of plates in Data
Integrity Check (Tools Menu) (on page 1371).
3. In the Results dialog box, select Enable filters. Select Knuckles and Seams in the Filter
selection box. For more information, see Results Dialog Box (on page 1372).
4. Try to fix the listed items according to the help provided with Data Integrity Check.
5. Repeat these steps until all bad splits are fixed.
If you are certain that items with a Warning status do not have an impact on the model,
then you can ignore them.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1401


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

Remove delay and update To-Do List records for the


hull
1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
The Delay Operations dialog box appears.
2. On the Delay Settings tab, click No Delay, and then click Apply.
3. On the Update To Do Records tab, select Optimal.
4. Select Out-of-Date Molded Forms. Clear all other Type options.
5. For Structure to Update, select or type the name of the hull.
The number of delayed objects to update is shown in the Update To Do Records frame.
6. Select Enable Logging.
7. Click Update Objects.
Updates of hull records on the To Do List are performed by the software. Internal structure is
still delayed. For more information, see Optimal Update Processing for Hull Swaps (on page
1406).
8. Click View Log File and check results of the update.
9. Click OK.
For more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page 1366) and Delay Operations
Dialog Box (on page 1367).

Check hull records on the To-Do List


1. Click View > To Do List.
The To Do List dialog box appears.
2. Select records with "delay propagation" messages.
The delayed objects highlight in the graphic view.
3. Check that:
 The objects are in the range boxes that you defined on the Delay tab.
 Most remaining records are for internal structure.
 Remaining hull records are valid. For example, a hull profile bounded or split by internal
structure is still out-of-date if the internal structure is out-of-date.
4. Fix or update remaining hull records, as described in Repair seams that did not split (on page
1401) and Remove delay and update To-Do List records for the hull (on page 1402).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1402


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

Remove delay and update To-Do List records for


internal structure
1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
The Delay Operations dialog box appears.
2. On the Delay Settings tab, click No Delay, and then click Apply.
3. On the Update To Do Records tab, select Optimal.
4. Select Out-of-Date Molded Forms. Clear all other Type options.
5. For Structure to Update, select All.
The number of delayed objects to update is shown in the Update To Do Records frame.
6. Select Enable Logging.
7. Click Update Objects.
Updates of remaining delay records on the To Do List are performed by the software. For
more information, see Optimal Update Processing for Hull Swaps (on page 1406).
8. Click View Log File and check results of the update.
9. Click OK.
For more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page 1366) and Delay Operations
Dialog Box (on page 1367).

Check internal structure records on the To-Do List


1. Click View > To Do List.
The To Do List dialog box appears.
2. Select records with "delay propagation" messages.
The delayed objects highlight in the graphic view.
3. Fix or update remaining delay records.

Check internal structure in the model


Perform the following checks in the graphic view and the Workspace Explorer.
1. Check connections for internal structure that were affected by the hull swap.
2. Check detailing objects for plates and profiles that were affected by the hull swap.

Update remaining To-Do List records


1. Click Tools > Delay Settings.
The Delay Operations dialog box appears.
2. On the Delay Settings tab, click No Delay, and then click Apply.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1403


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

3. On the Update To Do Records tab, select Optimal.


4. Select Errors, Warnings, and Out-of-Date for Type.
5. For Structure to Update, select All.
The number of objects to update is shown in the Update To Do Records frame.
6. Select Enable Logging.
7. Click Update Objects.
Updates of remaining records on the To Do List are performed by the software.
8. Click View Log File and check results of the update.
9. Click OK.
10. Click View > To Do List.
The To Do List dialog box appears. Remaining items on the To Do List are likely modeling
errors that should be fixed.
For more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page 1366) and Delay
Operations Dialog Box (on page 1367).

Evaluate results
1. Add an Audit Tool custom command for ProgID stAnalysisTool.AuditTool. For more
information, see Custom Commands in the Common User's Guide.
2. Click Tools > Custom Commands.
The Custom Commands dialog box appears.
3. Select Audit Tool in the Command name box and click Run.
The Audit Report dialog box appears.
4. Click Base Model.
The Set Connection String dialog box appears.
5. For Database, select the server and copied model database name created in Copy the
model (on page 1397). This is a copy of the current model before the hull swap.
6. For Metadata, select the server and catalog schema for the copied model database. This is
the same catalog schema as the current model.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Audit Report dialog box, select Show objects in current workspace (under Report
Option) and Highlight objects in both models (under Visualize).
9. Define a comparison start data and time, and click Process.
An audit report created in a .xls workbook opens after processing completes.
10. Select one or more rows in the .xls workbook.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1404


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

Modified objects are selected in the graphic view.

11. Audit reports are saved to the C:\\temp folder. Click Load on the Audit Report
dialog box to open an existing audit report and view the results at any time.

Recover from a failed hull swap


Perform the following steps if the hull swap fails.
1. Copy the log files created in Start error logging (on page 1398), Remove delay and update
To-Do List records for the hull (on page 1402), and Remove delay and update To-Do List
records for internal structure (on page 1403) to a different location so that they are available
for future analysis.
2. Repeat the steps in Remove delay and update To-Do List records for the hull (on page 1402),
Remove delay and update To-Do List records for internal structure (on page 1403), and
Update remaining To-Do List records (on page 1403) until all delay-related To Do List
records are removed.
When the software recalculates an object that failed on the previous attempt, you are
asked if you want to process it again.

Stop error logging


1. Open EnableErrorLog.
The Enable Error Log window opens.
2. Clear Log run time errors.
3. Click OK.
The Enable Error Log window closes. Error logging no longer runs in the background when
Smart 3D is running.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1405


Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using Molded Forms Delay

Optimal Update Processing for Hull Swaps


With Tools > Delay Settings, you can define options on the Delay Settings tab that optimize
update processing. In the following example workflow, hull structure is updated first, followed by
internal structure.

First Update
The following update sequence is used when Optimal and Out-of-Date Molded Forms are
selected, and the hull is defined for Structure to Update. The software repeatedly updates until
all delayed hull objects are processed.
1. Hull root plate system is split, with all new or modified leaf systems delayed.
2. Hull root profile systems are updated, with internal structure dependent on the profiles
delayed.
3. Hull leaf plate systems are updated, with internal structure dependent on the hull delayed.
4. Hull logical connections are updated, with internal structure dependent on the connections
delayed.
5. Hull plate parts are updated, with internal structure dependent on the parts delayed.
6. Hull detailing objects are updated, with internal structure dependent on the objects delayed.

Second Update
The following update sequence is used when Optimal and Out-of-Date Molded Forms are
selected, and All is defined for Structure to Update. The software repeatedly updates until all
remaining delayed objects are processed.
1. Internal root plate systems are updated, with all leaf systems and dependent structure
delayed.
2. Leaf plate systems are updated, with dependent structure delayed.
3. Profile systems are updated, with dependent structure delayed.
4. Bracket systems are updated, with dependent structure delayed.
5. Logical connections are updated, with dependent structure delayed.
6. Plate and profile parts are updated, with dependent structure delayed.
7. Detailing objects are updated, with dependent structure delayed.
For more information, see Delay Settings (Tools Menu) (on page 1366).

Molded Forms User's Guide 1406


APPENDIX B

Data Integrity Check Messages


This appendix describes the messages and possible solutions for the Results dialog box of the
Data Integrity Check command in the Molded Forms task. For more information, see Data
Integrity Check (Tools Menu) (on page 1371).

In This Appendix
All seams or knuckles are ignored in split. .................................... 1408
Bad connection (either missing port or invalid port in connection) 1408
Bad edge attributes because of knuckle <name of knuckle>. Check connection. 1408
Bad edge attributes because of seam <name of seam>. Check connection. 1409
Connection has no geometry. ........................................................ 1409
Could not find the boundary/operator creating the edge. Check the connection. 1410
Could not get back the edge information. Check connection ........ 1410
Could not retrieve boundary. Check connection. .......................... 1410
Could not retrieve edge information. Check connection. ............... 1411
Could not retrieve the children of the plate system. ...................... 1411
Could not retrieve the root plate. ................................................... 1411
Duplicate Physical Connection. ..................................................... 1412
Edge port doesn't have geometry. Check connection. .................. 1412
Entire length of seam ignored in split. ........................................... 1413
Error - Has opposite surface normal as the root plate <name of root plate> 1413
Failure encountered while checking seam geometry and split result. 1413
Failure encountered while retrieving thickness.............................. 1414
Gap detected in the seam bounding. ............................................. 1414
In to-do list: <to-do list item>.......................................................... 1415
Inconsistent attributes between system and part geometry. Check connection. 1415
Inconsistent port attributes between root plate and leaf plate. Check connection. 1415
Knuckle <name of knuckle> has no geometry............................... 1416
<length in meters> of seam length ignored in split. ....................... 1416
Missing boundary connection to <object name> ........................... 1417
Missing child connections. ............................................................. 1417
Missing connection with <object name> ........................................ 1417
Missing root intersection connection with <object name> ............. 1418
No splitting surface - will be ignored in split. Check the seam creation. 1418
Not used in splitting. ...................................................................... 1419
Seam <name of seam> has no geometry. .................................... 1419
Seam overlaps knuckle <name of knuckle> .................................. 1419
Seam overlaps seam <name of seam>. ........................................ 1420
Part light part geometry might be corrupted. ................................. 1420
Plate has no plate part children. .................................................... 1421
The seam has multiple segments; there may be a problem in the split. 1421
The wrong item is used in the bounding logical connection. ......... 1421
There is a gap in the boundary <name of boundary>. Detailing might fail. 1422
Too many child connections. ......................................................... 1423
Unable to check for seams in To Do List. ...................................... 1423
Unknown error ............................................................................... 1424
Warning!!--Possible wrong thickness direction among leaf parts. . 1424

Molded Forms User's Guide 1407


Data Integrity Check Messages

All seams or knuckles are ignored in split.


Description
No seams or knuckles are in the split list of the plate.

Possible Cause
The Execute Split command has not been carried out. This message is expected if Data
Integrity Check is run before a plate is split.

What You Should Do


Select the plate, and carry out the Execute Split command.

Bad connection (either missing port or invalid port in


connection)
Description
A root logical connection has a missing or invalid destination port.

Possible Cause
Unknown.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Bad edge attributes because of knuckle <name of


knuckle>. Check connection.
Description
The geometry of the knuckle does not overlap the corresponding plate edge. As a result, the
edge attributes are incorrect.

Possible Cause
Bad bounding or split operation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1408


Data Integrity Check Messages

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. If the knuckle uses sketched geometry, extend it past the plate edges.
4. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Bad edge attributes because of seam <name of seam>.


Check connection.
Description
The geometry of the seam does not overlap the corresponding plate edge. As a result, the edge
attributes are incorrect.

Possible Cause
Bad bounding or split operation.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. If the seam uses sketched geometry, extend it past the plate edges.
4. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Connection has no geometry.


Description
Geometry of the logical connection cannot be read.

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1409


Data Integrity Check Messages

Could not find the boundary/operator creating the


edge. Check the connection.
Description
An edge input was not found during inspection of the plate edges.

Possible Cause
The object responsible for creating the edge on the plate no longer exists or is corrupted.

What You Should Do


Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Could not get back the edge information. Check


connection
Description
An error occurred while reading the edge attributes of the object.

Possible Causes
Corrupted object.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Could not retrieve boundary. Check connection.


Description
An error occurred while reading the boundary attributes of the object.

Possible Causes
A boundary no longer exists or a boundary is corrupt.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1410


Data Integrity Check Messages

2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Rebound the object.

Could not retrieve edge information. Check


connection.
Description
Unable to find the plate edges.

Possible Cause
Corrupt plate.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Could not retrieve the children of the plate system.


Description
No child plate system could be retrieve from the root plate system during inspection. Every root
plate system should have at least one child.

Possible Cause
Error during a split.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Could not retrieve the root plate.


Description
Object is the root system of another object, but could not be read as a root system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1411


Data Integrity Check Messages

Possible Causes
Corrupted object.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Duplicate Physical Connection.


Description
Two overlapping physical connections exist in the model.

Possible Cause
A manual physical connection is placed in a location where physical connections are generated
by rule.

What You Should Do


Delete the manually-placed physical connections.

Edge port doesn't have geometry. Check connection.


Description
Error while getting the geometry of an edge port.

Possible Cause
Computation error during plate modification.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.
4. Delete the object and recreate it.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1412


Data Integrity Check Messages

Entire length of seam ignored in split.


Description
The seam was included in the split list of the plate, but no part of it was used as part of the split.

Possible Cause
Corrupt or out-of-date seam.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the seam.
2. Delete the seam and recreate it.

Error - Has opposite surface normal as the root plate


<name of root plate>
Description
The root plate and child plate surface normals differ.

Possible Cause
Computation error during propagation in a split operation.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Select the child plate system. Use Tools > Recompute Objects to recalculate the object.
2. Select the root plate system. Use Tools > Recompute Objects to recalculate the object.

Failure encountered while checking seam geometry


and split result.
Description
An unknown error occurred while the analysis tool was checking the seams and geometry on a
plate

Possible Cause
Corrupted seam geometry

Molded Forms User's Guide 1413


Data Integrity Check Messages

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.
4. Delete the object and recreate it.

Failure encountered while retrieving thickness.


Description
Plate thickness was not retrieved during inspection.

Possible Cause
Corrupt plate system.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Check the plate system properties to verify that the properties, especially the material and
thickness, are set properly.
2. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Gap detected in the seam bounding.


Description
A gap exists between a seam landing curve and one of its boundaries.

Possible Cause
1. A sketched seam does not intersect its boundary.
2. The seam is out-of-date.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Select the row in the Results dialog box. The beginning of the gap is shown in the graphic
view with this icon: .
2. Open the seam in Sketch 2D and verify that the seam landing curve extended past its
boundaries.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the seam.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1414


Data Integrity Check Messages

In to-do list: <to-do list item>


Description
The object has one or more to-do list items associated with it

Possible Cause
Computation error.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Inconsistent attributes between system and part


geometry. Check connection.
Description
Plate part wire geometry does not fit entirely within the plate system wire geometry, as expected.

Possible Causes
1. Improper modification of the plate part and/or system.
2. The part or system was corrupted during database migration/upgrade.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.
4. Delete the object and recreate it.

Inconsistent port attributes between root plate and


leaf plate. Check connection.
Description
The port attributes between the logical connection of the root and leaf plates do not match.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1415


Data Integrity Check Messages

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Knuckle <name of knuckle> has no geometry.


Description
No geometry was found for the knuckle.

Possible Cause
Corrupt or out-of-date knuckle.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

<length in meters> of seam length ignored in split.


Description
The seam was included in the split list of the plate, but part of the length was not used as part of
the split.

Possible Cause
Computation error.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Select the row in the Results dialog box. The point where the length is ignored is shown in
the graphic view with this icon: .
2. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1416


Data Integrity Check Messages

Missing boundary connection to <object name>


Description
The object specified in the error message bounds the plate but no bounding logical connection
for it exists.

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Click View > To Do List. Select any items associated with the root logical connection.
Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Missing child connections.


Description
The number of child logical connections on the plate is less than the number of splitters
intersecting the plate.

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Missing connection with <object name>


Description
An edge on this plate and another plate overlap and should therefore have a logical connection
between them, but the connection is missing.

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1417


Data Integrity Check Messages

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Missing root intersection connection with <object


name>
Description
The object specified in the error message splits and intersects the plate but no intersection
connection for it exists.

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

No splitting surface - will be ignored in split. Check


the seam creation.
Description
The splitting surface attribute was not found on the seam. Because of this, it is not used in
splitting the plate.

Possible Cause
Corrupt seam

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1418


Data Integrity Check Messages

Not used in splitting.


Description
The seam is on a plate that is split, but it was not added to the split list

Possible Cause
The seam was created after the plate was split or it was not selected when the Execute Split
command was run on the plate.

What You Should Do


1. From the Execute Split command, add the seam to the split list and apply the changes.

Seam <name of seam> has no geometry.


Description
No geometry detected for the seam.

Possible Cause
Corrupt or out-of-date seam.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Seam overlaps knuckle <name of knuckle>


Description
The landing curve of the knuckle overlaps that of another knuckle. There may be problems
when splitting.

Possible Cause
The boundaries of the seam are not set properly or the seam has the wrong solution chosen if it
is ambiguous.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:

Molded Forms User's Guide 1419


Data Integrity Check Messages

1. Select the row in the Results dialog box. The point where the two affected seams overlap is
shown in the graphic view with this icon: .
2. Verify that the two seams have the right boundaries chosen and if the seam is ambiguous,
verify that the right solution is chosen.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the seam.

Seam overlaps seam <name of seam>.


Description
The landing curve of the seam overlaps the landing curve of another seam. This creates
potential issues when attempting to split.

Possible Cause
The boundaries of the seam are not correct or the seam has the wrong solution chosen if it is
ambiguous.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Select the row in the Results dialog box. The point where the two affected seams overlap is
shown in the graphic view.
2. Verify that the two seams have the right boundaries chosen and if the seam is ambiguous,
verify that the right solution is chosen.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Part light part geometry might be corrupted.


Description
Geometry of the object could not be read.

Possible Cause
Corrupted data.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1420


Data Integrity Check Messages

Plate has no plate part children.


Description
The child plate system does not have a plate part.

Possible Cause
Corrupt plate part or child plate system. Computation error during propagation in a split
operation.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Select the child plate system. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the
object.
2. Select the root plate system. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the
object.

The seam has multiple segments; there may be a


problem in the split.
Description
Seams with multiple segments may not valid.

Possible Cause
An ambiguous solution may not have been solved correctly, leaving two or more seam landing
curves.

What You Should Do


Seams composed of multiple segments are acceptable when they form an unbroken line across
the plate to be split. Otherwise, this indicates a problem with the seam bounding. Verify that the
proper seam boundaries are selected and the proper solution is selected if the seam is
ambiguous.
It may be possible to correct this issue with the Recompute command. Click Recompute in the
Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

The wrong item is used in the bounding logical


connection.
Description
The geometry of the destination port used in the bounding logical connection is not actually
bounding the plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1421


Data Integrity Check Messages

Possible Cause
Corrupt or out-of-date root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

There is a gap in the boundary <name of boundary>.


Detailing might fail.
Description
An error was encountered while inspecting the specified object. A gap exists between the edge of
the object and the boundary. This can cause problems in the Structural Detailing task.

Possible Cause
The object is using infinite geometry as a boundary.
The free edge gap can be caused by one of two situations:
 Unbounded geometry is used for the plate bounding. For example, create a plate bounded by
3 reference planes (red) and 1 planar plate (green). Because of the infinite geometry of the
bounding plate is used, the plate is created successfully in Molded Forms. But the plate will
fail in detailing because there is a gap in the trim boundary caused by the bounding plate.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1422


Data Integrity Check Messages

 Incomplete trim boundary due to the plate thickened geometry. In Molded Forms, the
boundary is complete, but in detailing, there is a small gap along the thicken direction. In
most cases, the gap is very small.

What You Should Do


Check and update the object boundaries.

Too many child connections.


Description
There are more child logical connections than splitters intersecting the plate.

Possible Cause
Missing or corrupt root logical connection.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.

Unable to check for seams in To Do List.


Description
An error was encountered while checking for seams on the to-do list.

Possible Cause
Computation error with the to-do list.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1423


Data Integrity Check Messages

What You Should Do


Contact Intergraph Support for assistance.

Unknown error
Description
An unexpected error was encountered while inspecting the specified object.

Possible Cause
Unknown.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Right-click and select Update.
2. Manually correct other objects with errors associated with the object.
3. Click Recompute in the Results dialog box to recalculate the object.
4. Delete the object and recreate it.

Warning!!--Possible wrong thickness direction among


leaf parts.
Description
A child plate system was found that did not match one of the other child plate systems under the
same parent plate system.

Possible Cause
Computation error during propagation in a split operation.

What You Should Do


Separately try each of the following steps:
1. Select the child plate system. Use Tools > Recompute Objects to recalculate the object.
2. Select the root plate system. Use Tools > Recompute Objects to recalculate the object.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1424


APPENDIX C

Tripping Bracket
Tools > Tripping Bracket is provided only for compatibility with brackets created with the old
Bracket Plate System command in earlier versions of the software.

To create new, similar brackets, use Bracket Plate System and select Plane by Selected
Supports as the value for Select Plane. For more information, see Bracket Plate System
(on page 227).

Tripping Bracket Ribbon


Displays the options that you use to place a bracket plate system in the model.

Properties
Opens the Bracket Plate System Properties dialog box, which you use to view and modify
the properties of the bracket system that you are about to place in the model. The initial
bracket system properties default from the selected structural specification. For more
information, see Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 1429).

Select bracket and flange symbols


Specifies the type of bracket system to place. Also optionally specifies the type of flange to
place on the bracket system.
Bracket Symbol
Select More to select a bracket symbol from the catalog. Select Sketched to sketch the free
edge of the bracket.
Flange Symbol
Select More to select a flange symbol from the catalog. Select No Flange if the bracket does
not need a flange.
Only use a flange symbol with a bracket symbol containing parameters for
the addition of a flange.

Flip Flange
Flips the orientation of the flange about an axis normal to the bracket free edge. If the flange
is symmetrical, Flip Flange has no visible effect.
Type
Select the type of bracket system to place. The bracket type is classified by the number of
supports.

Select Support 1
Select the first support for the bracket plate system.
Length 1
Enter a value to define a point on the bracket plane.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1425


Tripping Bracket

 If the support is linear, then the Length 1 value can be any number greater than zero.
 If the support is curved, then the Length 1 value can be adjusted to change the bracket
position relative to the support.

Select Support 2
Select the second support for the bracket plate system.
Length 2
Enter a value to define a second point on the bracket plane.
 If the support is linear, then the Length 2 value can be any number greater than zero.
 If the support is curved, then the Length 2 value can be adjusted to change the bracket
position relative to the support.

Select Support 3
Select the third support for the bracket plate system. (Available only for 3S, 4S, and 5S
brackets.)

Select Support 4
Select the fourth support for the bracket plate system. (Available only for 4S and 5S
brackets.)

Select Support 5
Select the fifth support for the bracket plate system. (Available only for 5S brackets.)
Constraint
Select the method by which the third point of the bracket plane is defined. This option is
unavailable until Select Support 1 and Select Support 2 have been defined.
 Parallel - Bracket plane is parallel to the support 1 plane.
 Perpendicular - Bracket plane is perpendicular to the support 1 plane.
 Transverse - Bracket plane is transverse.
 Vertical - Bracket plane is vertical.
 Fixed X - Rotate Bracket around the fixed X-Axis.
 Fixed Y - Rotate Bracket around the fixed Y-Axis.
 Fixed Z - Rotate Bracket around the fixed Z-Axis.
Fixed Value
Value of fixed axis rotation. This option appears after one of the fixed axis third point
locations have been selected.

Resolve ambiguity/sketch boundary


Switches to the Sketch 2D commands when creating a sketched bracket.

Bracket Reinforcement
Adds a reinforcement to the bracket.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1426


Tripping Bracket

Sketching Plane
Specify the sketching plane for the curve. This is the first step in defining the curve.

Add Intersecting Item


Allows you to select objects that intersect the sketching plane in the 3D environment. You
see the selected objects in the Draft 2D environment when you are drawing the opening.
Add Projection Item
Allows you to select objects that do not intersect the sketching plane in the 3D environment.
The objects are projected onto the sketching plane, and you see the selected objects in the
Draft 2D environment when you are drawing the opening.
Finish
Places the bracket plate system in the model.

Auto Finish Mode


Click to automatically place the bracket plate system in the model as soon as you set all of
the required inputs. When set to Off, you must click Finish to place the system.

Sketch 2D
Opens the Sketch 2D environment in which you can draw the curve.
To display a grid or reference plane ruler in the Sketch 2D environment, first
define an active coordinate system using Tools > PinPoint. For more information, see
PinPoint in the Common User’s Guide and 2D Grids Ruler in the SmartSketch Drawing Editor
Help.
Auto Import Enable/Disable
Allows the software to automatically add all objects that are relative to the object to be
sketched to a select set. Items in the select set are highlighted in the graphics view and in the
Workspace Explorer. If no objects are added to the select set, the software displays a
message in the status bar. This option is only available when you use the Add Intersecting
Item or the Add Project Item option. For more information, see Sketch 2D Best Practices
(on page 65).
Override Offsets
Ignores the rule-based U and V offsets for all three points that are used to define the plane of
the tripping bracket, and sets the offsets to zero and the override flag to True.
Accept
Accepts the active selection or state.
L/T
Displays the length divided by the thickness. This value is used by the rules to calculate the
reinforcement and cannot be edited.
By Rule
Turn on the checkbox to let the rules calculate an appropriate reinforcement. Turn off the
checkbox to manually define the reinforcement.
Reinforcement
Displays the reinforcement type. You can change the reinforcement type if the By Rule

Molded Forms User's Guide 1427


Tripping Bracket

checkbox is turned off.

Properties
Activates the Bracket Reinforcement Properties dialog box, which you use to view and
modify the properties of the bracket reinforcement that you are about to place in the model.
The initial reinforcement properties default from the selected bracket and the bracket
reinforcement rules. For more information see Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box
(on page 271).
Section Size
Select the section size for the reinforcement. This is read-only if the Override Cross Section
Information check box is turn off on the Bracket Reinforcement Properties dialog box. For
more information, see Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 272).
Primary Orientation
Select the primary orientation for the reinforcement.
Brkt Thickness
Select the thickness for the bracket.
Lapped
Select to create a lapped bracket system when a Sketched bracket symbol is selected.
Lapped is automatically selected and unavailable if a lapped bracket symbol is selected.
Parent System
Select a parent system for the bracket plate system that you are placing. You can create new
systems in the Systems and Specifications task.
Type
Select the type of plate system to place. If you do not specify a type, the software
automatically determines the type based on the plate system orientation.

What do you want to do?


 Add a flange to a catalog bracket system (on page 1428)
 Modify a bracket system (on page 1429)
 Delete a bracket system (on page 1429)

Add a flange to a catalog bracket system


1. Click Select bracket and flange symbols .
2. In the Bracket Symbol box, be sure that the bracket catalog symbol chosen supports adding
a flange.
3. In the Flange Symbol box, select More....
4. Select a flange symbol to place from the catalog.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1428


Tripping Bracket

Modify a bracket system


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Plates in the locate filter.
3. Select the bracket to modify.

 You can select the bracket in the model, or from the Workspace Explorer.
 You can select and modify more than one bracket at a time. This is especially useful
when you want to modify load points and offsets for multiple tripping brackets. For more
information, see Tripping Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate System
Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1447).
 Using the ribbon controls, edit the bracket as needed.

Delete a bracket system


1. Click Select on the vertical toolbar.
2. Select Root Plates in the locate filter.
3. Select the bracket system to delete.
4. Click Delete .

Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the bracket system that you are editing.
See Also
Bracket Flange Properties Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1446)
Bracket Parameters Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1445)
Configuration Tab (on page 124)
General Tab (on page 125)
Main Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1429)
Relationship Tab (on page 123)
Material Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1432)
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on page 1432)
Tripping Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box) (on
page 1447)

Main Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the general properties of the bracket plate system.
Name
Specifies the name of the object. Names generated by a rule include a Global Workshare
name rule ID if the name rule ID was defined when the model database was created. For
more information, see Using Global Workshare in the Global Workshare Guide.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1429


Tripping Bracket

Rule
Select the naming rule to use to name the plate system.
StdPlateSystemNamingRule - Uses syntax based on the reference plane.
 Plate system on a reference plane: <Reference plane name>-<Index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>. For example, F383-1TBH-1, where F383 is the
reference plane name, 1TBH is an index number appended by the Plate Type
(Transversal Bulkhead in this example), and the final 1 is the Workshare Location ID.
Child plates inherit the parent name and add a unique index number to the end, such as
F383-1TBH-1-103.
 Plate system not created on a reference plane, or on a standalone plane (created from a
copy or model data reuse operation): <Global CS axis><Global CS position along the
axis in mm>-<Index number><Plate type>-<Workshare location ID>, as shown in the
following examples.
Global CS Location: 2 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2000-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2000-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2000-1TBH-1
Global CS Location: 2.75 m
XY Plane at Global Z Location: Z2750-1DCK-1
ZX Plane at Global Y Location: Y2750-1LBH-1
YZ Plane at Global X Location: Y2750-1TBH-1
 Plate system not orthogonal to any major plane: A-<Unique index number><Plate
type>-<Workshare location ID>, such as A-202DCK-1.
 Standalone planes used as boundaries, created from a copy or model data reuse
operation: Plane: <Global CS axis> = <Global CS position along the axis>, such as
Plane: Z = 2500mm. The name only displays in the Boundary List Dialog Box (on
page 83).
StdHierarchyChildNamingRule - Uses the following syntax: <Parent system
name>-<Object type>. For example, Model_MDB-IJPlate1, where Model_MDB is the parent
system, IJPlate is the object type, and 1 is an index number appended to the object type.
User Defined - Allows you to type any name.
Type
Specifies the type of plate system that you are placing. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
If you do not specify a type, the software automatically determines the type based on the
plate system orientation. Plate systems that are mostly horizontal (XY plane) are assigned to
Deck. Plate systems that are mostly transverse (YZ plane) are assigned to Transverse
Bulkhead. Plate systems that are mostly longitudinal (XZ plane) are assigned to
Longitudinal Bulkhead. If you are using material handling mode, plate systems are
assigned to General Plate.
The naming rule also uses Type to name the plate system.
Subtype
Specifies an additional plate type that is independent of the Type value. The subtype does
not affect molded conventions or plate naming. The default value is None.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1430


Tripping Bracket

Naming Category
Specifies the naming category. The naming rule uses the category in naming the profile part
that is a child to the profile system.
Parent System
Specifies a parent system for the plate system. You can define parent systems in the
Systems and Specifications task. When you create a plate system, the software uses the
property values of the parent system as the initial property values for the plate system. When
a parent property value changes, the corresponding child property value also updates.
If this plate system is a bracket system, you cannot select another root plate system as the
parent system because a bracket system is a root plate system.
Surface Geometry Type
Displays the Molded Forms command used to create the plate system.
Specification
Defines the structural specification for the plate system. This property can only be modified at
the root system.
Description
Defines an optional description for the plate system.
Continuity
Specifies the continuity type for the plate system. Continuity defines how the plate system
reacts when it intersects another plate or profile system. Select Continuous to indicate that
the plate system penetrates the other system. Select Intercostal to indicate that the plate
system is penetrated by the other system. This property can only be modified at the root
system.
Split Priority
Specifies the continuity priority. This priority is used to specify which plate system is
continuous and which penetrated (split) when two plate systems intersect, but have the same
value for Continuity. Plate systems with a lower continuity priority (such as 1, 2, or 3)
penetrate plate systems with a higher continuity priority (such as 7, 8, or 9). This property can
only be modified at the root system.
Structural Priority
Specifies the priority assigned to the object. Structural priority groups and filters plates, such
as is needed in Drawings and Reports. The list is defined by the StructuralMemberPriority
codelist.
Primary is the default value for Molded Forms plate systems.
Secondary is the default value for Molded Forms bracket systems.
Tertiary is the default value for Structural Detailing parts, such as collars, standalone plate
parts, lapped plate parts, bracket parts, and plate edge reinforcements. These parts do not
have parent systems.
Tightness
Specifies the level of tightness as it applies to the entire plate system.
Active
Determines whether a leaf system is active and applicable for modeling, drawing, and

Molded Forms User's Guide 1431


Tripping Bracket

reporting operations. To exclude the leaf system from these operations, select No. In the
Workspace Explorer, the lock icon is shown over the icon of the deactivated leaf system,
and the detailed or light part associated with the leaf system is also deleted. In addition,
because connections to deactivated leaf system are not valid, you must resolve such invalid
connections in the To Do List. To change the leaf profile system back to the active state,
select Yes; however, to have the detailed part, you must detail the leaf system explicitly. For
information on leaf systems, see Marine Structure Hierarchy in the Workspace Explorer (on
page 30) in the Molded Forms User's Guide or in the Common User's Guide.
See Also
Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 1429)

Material Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box)


Specifies the material properties for the plate system that you are editing.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Thickness
Specifies the material thickness for the plate system.

Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default plate and profile orientation rules for the bracket plate system.
Plate System Type
Displays the plate system type specified on the Main Tab. The delivered reference data
provides different orientation settings for each type. Select Deck, Transverse Bulkhead,
Longitudinal Bulkhead, Hull, Longitudinal Tube, Transverse Tube, Vertical Tube, Tube
Plate, Web Plate, Flange Plate, or General Plate.
Fore Aft Reference
Displays the longitudinal location at which the molded conventions change, usually midship.
This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.
Port Starboard Reference
Displays the transverse location at which the molded conventions change, usually the
longitudinal centerline. This value is set in the structural specification and cannot change.

Deck Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Above - Positions thickness above the deck. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1432


Tripping Bracket

Below - Positions thickness below the deck.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Up - Orients profiles above the deck.

Down - Orients profiles below the deck. This is the default value.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port and starboard sides of the
port/starboard reference. The reference is usually the longitudinal centerline.
Inboard - Orients profile flanges towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Longitudinal Profiles at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the port/starboard. The reference is
usually the longitudinal centerline.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1433


Tripping Bracket

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Transverse Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles forward of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Transverse Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference. The reference
is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Longitudinal Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness towards the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference.

Port - Positions thickness to the port side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1434


Tripping Bracket

Starboard - Positions thickness to the starboard side.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Port - Orients profiles to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profiles to the starboard side.

Profile Orientation at Port Stbd Reference


Defines the primary orientation for profiles at the port and starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1435


Tripping Bracket

Down - Orients profiles downward. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
The reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference. The
reference is usually midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles on the forward/aft reference, usually
midship.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft. This is the default value.

Transverse Bulkhead Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the forward/aft reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the forward/aft reference.

Forward - Positions thickness to the forward side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1436


Tripping Bracket

Aft - Positions thickness to the aft side. This is the default value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Profile Orientation Forward of Fore Aft Reference
Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation Aft of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profile Orientation at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the primary orientation for transverse profiles at the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profiles forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profiles aft.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Vertical Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1437


Tripping Bracket

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Inboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Outboard - Orients profile flanges toward the port/starboard reference

Vertical Profiles on Port Stbd


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Horizontal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for horizontal profiles.
Up - Orients profile flanges upward. This is the default value.

Down - Orients profiles downward.

Hull Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
Inboard - Positions thickness toward the port/starboard reference.

Outboard - Positions thickness away from the port/starboard reference. This is the default
value.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1438


Tripping Bracket

Profiles Primary Orientation


Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Inboard - Orients profiles toward the port/starboard reference. This is the default value.

Outboard - Orients profiles away from the port/starboard reference.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of the
web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Longitudinal Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles.
Towards Centerline - Orients profile flanges downward and inboard.

Away From Centerline - Orients profile flanges upward and outboard.

Longitudinal Profile on Port Stbd Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for longitudinal profiles on the port/starboard reference.
Port - Orients profile flanges to the port side. This is the default value.

Starboard - Orients profile flanges to the starboard side.

Vertical Profiles Forward of Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles forward of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles Aft of the Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles aft of the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1439


Tripping Bracket

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Vertical Profiles at Fore Aft Reference


Defines the orientation of the flanges for vertical profiles on the forward/aft reference.
Fore - Orients profile flanges forward. This is the default value.

Aft - Orients profile flanges aft.

Web Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Left - Positions thickness in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Positions thickness in the positive u-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface. This is the default value for
designed members.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1440


Tripping Bracket

In - Orients profiles towards t center of the member.

Left - Orients profiles in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profiles in the positive u-axis direction. This is the default value for designed
members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the member plate web.
This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the


member plate web.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the web plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1441


Tripping Bracket

Flange Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the member. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the member.

Up - Positions thickness in the positive v-axis direction.

Down - Positions thickness in the negative v-axis direction.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed
members.
Profiles Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the member. This is the default value for designed
members.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the member.

Down - Orients profiles in the negative v-axis direction.

Up - Orients profiles in the positive v-axis direction.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1442


Tripping Bracket

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
In - Orients profile flanges towards the member plate web. This is the default value for
designed members.

Out - Orients profile flanges away from the member plate web.

Left - Orients profile flanges in the negative u-axis direction.

Right - Orients profile flanges in the positive u-axis direction.

Non-axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the flange plate of a designed member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed
member.

General Plate Molded Conventions


Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
With Normal - Positions thickness in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Positions thickness in the direction opposite to the molded surface
normal.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1443


Tripping Bracket

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Profiles
Primary Orientation
Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
With Normal - Orients profiles in the same direction as the molded surface normal.

Opposite Normal - Orients profiles in the direction opposite to the molded surface normal.

Secondary Orientation
Specifies the direction of the web thickness for symmetrical cross-sections, or the direction of
the web thickness and the flange for unsymmetrical cross-sections.
Left - Orients profile flanges to the left.

Right - Orients profile flanges to the right.

Tube Plate Molded Conventions


Plates
Plate Thickness Direction
Specifies the direction from the molded surface in which the plate thickness is applied.
In - Positions thickness towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Positions thickness away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value
for designed tube members.

Centered - Centers thickness about the molded surface.

Offset
Specifies the distance from the molded surface to the first plate face. Type 0 to put the face
of the plate on the molded surface. Type a negative value to offset the plate face in the
opposite direction of the thickness direction setting. 0 is the default value for designed tube
members.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1444


Tripping Bracket

Profiles Primary Orientation


Defines the primary orientation for profiles. Primary orientation defines on which side of the
plate system to place the profiles.
In - Orients profiles towards the center of the tube member.

Out - Orients profiles away from the center of the tube member. This is the default value for
designed tube members.

Profiles Secondary Orientation


Ring Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run perpendicular to the length of the designed member
Towards Start - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the start point of the designed tube
member. This is the default value for designed members.

Towards End - Orients profile flanges in the direction of the end point of the designed tube
member.

Axial Profiles
Defines the orientation of the flanges for profiles that:
 Are on the plate of a designed tube member
 Run parallel to the length of the designed member
Clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a clockwise direction about the axis of the designed
tube member. This is the default value for designed members.

Counter-clockwise - Orients profile flanges in a counter-clockwise direction about the axis


of the designed tube member.

Bracket Parameters Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the default values for the bracket plate system parameters. Parameter names and
values are specific to each bracket symbol. Values can be modified as permitted by the catalog.
This tab is only visible after bracket creation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1445


Tripping Bracket

Bracket Flange Properties Tab (Bracket Plate System


Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the default values for the bracket flange parameters. Values can be modified as
permitted by the catalog. This tab is only visible after bracket creation and only if the bracket has
a flange.
Molded Surface Side
Sets the molded side of the bracket and bracket flange. Supports creation of the flange
symbol at the correct location while accounting for molded convention thickness direction
and offset values.
 If the molded side is the inner surface, the value is 0.
 If the molded side is the outer surface, the value is 1.
Flange Width
Width of the flange measured from the edge of the bracket symbol, which is also the first
bend tangent.
Plate Thickness
Specifies the thickness of the plate.
Bend Angle
Angle between the flange surface and bracket surface.
Inner Radius
Bend radius measured along the inner surface of the bend.

1 FlangeWidth

2 PlateThickness

3 BendAngle

4 InnerRadius

One option is also displayed.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1446


Tripping Bracket

Flange Orientation
Select the orientation of the flange bracket.
 Same As Parent - Orientation is the same as the bracket plate system primary profile
orientation.
 Against Parent - Orientation is in the opposite direction of the bracket plate system
primary profile orientation.

Tripping Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket Plate


System Properties Dialog Box)
Specifies the default offset values and lapped status for a tripping bracket plate system. This tab
is only visible after bracket creation.

Offset Values
Load Point
Specifies the support load point of each point used to calculate the bracket system plane.
Offsets are measured from the load points. Load points are defined in the profile
cross-section symbols. If one of the supports is a plate system, then the load point value is 0.
For more information, see Key Points.

U Offset
Specifies the offset along the local U axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the bracket
is not on the flange of a profile support.
V Offset
Specifies the offset along the local V axis of the support profile. The value is 0 if the bracket is
not on the flange of a profile support.
Override
Select to specify different values for Load Point, U Offset and V Offset.

Lapped Status
Displays the status of each tripping bracket support. Lapped is selected if the support is lapped.
This value is set during bracket creation and cannot be changed here.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1447


Tripping Bracket

See Also
Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box (on page 1429)

Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box


Specifies the properties for the bracket system reinforcement that you are editing. Tabs on this
dialog box are visible only after bracket creation.
Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 272)
Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) (on page 272)

Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog


Box)
Specifies the cross-section settings for a bucking stiffener bracket reinforcement. This tab is only
visible after bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement or Buckling Stiffener is
selected for Reinforcement.
Section Type
Specifies the profile cross-section type. The software displays the section type properties for
the section type that you selected. Each section type has different properties.
Section Size
Specifies the profile section size.
Material
Specifies the object material type, such as Steel - Carbon or Steel - High Strength.
Grade
Specifies the object material grade, such as A36 or A529.
Override Cross Section Information
Select to override the cross-section information generated by the rule.
WebLength(WL)
Displays the web length of the reinforcement.
WebThickness(WT)
Displays the web thickness of the reinforcement.

Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Reinforcement Properties


Dialog Box)
Specifies the orientation settings for a bracket edge reinforcement. This tab is only visible after
bracket creation when Edge Reinforcement is selected for Reinforcement.
Rule
Select the orientation rule that you want to use for the edge reinforcement. Available rules
include Normal, Longitudinal, Vertical, and Transverse.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1448


APPENDIX D

Shell Plate Unfold Preview


Tools > Shell Plate Unfold Preview generates a graphic preview of an unfolded plate shape
with frame marks, roll line marks, a surrounding minimum rectangle with annotated dimensions,
an unfolded surface area, and the percentage of material used in a private graphic view.

Shell Plate Unfold Preview Ribbon


Select Plate System
Select the plate system that you want to preview.

Boundaries
Select the seams, frames, or split knuckles that intersect the selected plate system.
Finish
Click to display the unfolded output of the shell plate.

Solve Ambiguity
If the boundaries that you selected can form the object in more than one way, then you have
defined an ambiguous solution. The software prompts you to select one or more solutions.
Reject
Click to rejects the plate selection.
Accept
Click to accepts the plate selection.
Frame System
Select the coordinate system to use for the unfolding.

1. Select Tools > Shell Plate Unfold Preview.


2. Select the plate to unfold.
3. Select the coordinate system from the Frame System.
4. Click Finish.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1449


Glossary
abaft
Toward the stern of a ship, behind, further aft than.
abstract part
A part that is only defined by a partial specification and that cannot be materially provided by the
organization that defines the specification.
access holes
An opening cut in the structure of a ship to permit entering or leaving various compartments.
accommodation
Functions for the design and construction of crew spaces aboard ship, particularly deck house
design on commercial ships.
accommodation ladder
A portable set of steps on the side of a ship for the accommodation of people boarding from small
boats or from a pier.
Active Template Library (ATL)
Set of class templates and wizards supplied with Microsoft C++ Version 5.0 and later. You can
use an ATL when you create ActiveX controls and any other type of object that uses the
Component Object Model (COM) model. Using an ATL is generally preferred over Microsoft
Foundation Classes (MFC), because the implementations are smaller, easier to use, and more
closely tied to the COM model.
aft
Toward, at, or near the stern.
after body
The hull from aft of the midship section.
aftermost
Nearest the stern.
angle
The circular measurement taken from the intersection of two pipes at a turn or branch.
approval state
Recorded state of acceptance of information contained in objects within the database. The
approval states indicate a level of confidence in the information stored in the database and
govern your ability to alter specific data about a product.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1450


Glossary

arrangement (accommodation)
Those components of a system arranged in three-dimensional space with accurate dimensional
representation for installation. Various types include electrical, HVAC, machinery, outfitting, and
piping.
attribute
A single type of non-graphics information that is stored about an object such as diameter or end
preparation.
axis
An imaginary line used to define the orientation of a system or object normally defined in terms of
an x-, y-, and z-axis. Some 3-D graphic objects have an associated axis used to define the center
or axis for rotations.
basic design
Engineering definition of the model and its systems.
bending
Process of conforming a plate to the hull surface. A bending process can be either simple (bent in
one direction) or compound (bent in multiple directions). The software must minimize compound
bending requirements.
bill of material (BOM)
Hierarchical decomposition of a product into constituent assemblies and parts. Specific types of
BOMs exist (for example, an EBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of an engineering
department; an MBOM is a bill of material from the point of view of manufacturing).
built ships
Complete database of NGC information after completion of the ship contract.
bulkload
The process by which reference data in Microsoft Excel workbooks is loaded into the Catalog
database.
cabin plan
Deck plan arrangement of bulkheads, compartments, and furnishings.
catalog
Repository of information about components and materials used in construction. When you use
catalog parts in the model, the software places an occurrence of the catalog part in the project.
This occurrence is a copy of the actual catalog part.
Catalog database
The database that contains the reference data. Each model database can reference a different
Catalog database.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1451


Glossary

ceiling
Overhead design of the cabin area, including distribution systems for power, water, and
ventilation.
chain
A set of continuous and tangent segments.
change history
Process of recording information such as who, when, and why for any given modification.
change management
Software features or manual procedures for managing the consequence of change. For example,
software can support a change management feature to report drawings that need updating as a
result of a change in a 3-D model.
change propagation
Ability of the software to intelligently modify dependent design information to reflect change in a
higher order object.
class
Grouping of individual objects that share some very significant, common characteristics.
class rule check
Verification that the developing design meets the rules of a particular classification society, such
as ABS, Lloyd's, or DNV.
Class Rules
Classification Society Design Rules.
classification folder
A folder in the Catalog hierarchy that contains part classes. Classification folders are one level
above part classes. The ClassNodeType and R-ClassNodeDescribes sheets in the Microsoft
Excel workbooks define the classification folders.
codelist
A set of acceptable values for a particular property that can be referred to by an index number or
selected in a combo box. For example, the codelist for the material specification allows you to
select from a set of standard entries, such as ASTM A183-F316 Stainless Steel.
commodity code
A user-defined code that provides an index to parts in a catalog.
commodity item
A standard component found in a manufacturer catalog (an off-the-shelf component).
component
Physical part that a feature generates.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1452


Glossary

concurrent access
Ability of the software to allow multiple users to simultaneously access and modify the design of a
model.
consolidated tasks
A collection of tasks run in batch. For example, the software allows you to extract a set of
drawings immediately or to schedule the batch extraction for a future time.
constraints
A logical restriction that controls how part symbols ports relate to each other and to reference
ports. There are four constraints: parallel, perpendicular, coincident, and distance.
contract
A Work Breakdown Structure object representing a scope of work, usually performed by an
external supplier. The contract is related to a project and appears in the Work Breakdown
Structure hierarchy.
control point
A point that is used to control the shape of a NURBS curve or surface. Curves have a
one-dimensional array of control points, while surfaces have a two-dimensional array.
coordinate
The location of a point along the X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
coordinate system
A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the model. The most common
coordinate system is the rectangular coordinate system, whereby points are located by traversing
the X-, Y-, and Z-axes of the model. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as
0,0,0.
corrugation
A surface or plate shaped into folds with a repeated pattern of parallel and alternating ridges and
grooves, typically in an elongated V shape. In practice, a corrugated plate can be formed by
swaging, but is more commonly bent through a series of alternating knuckles, such as those
found on a corrugated bulkhead in an oil tanker.
cutting plane
A plane that cuts through an object.
damage records
Data relating to the damage and repair of structure or components that occurred during or after
construction of a plant.
data interchange
Capability to output the design, or portions of the design, in a standard format for use or
movement to another computer software system.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1453


Glossary

database
Repository for the product model data. The database contains information to describe individual
objects in the data model and the relationships between objects as appropriate.
database backup
Process of recording a backup copy of the complete database or the incremental changes after
the date that the last complete copy was created.
database break and recovery
Utilities used to restore a database after files are corrupted.
database copy
Functionality to copy large collections of model objects from one design project to another design
project.
database management
Functionality related to managing a product model database.
database monitor record
Transactions that occur in order to provide database (DB) recovery after a stop in response with
a minimum of lost data.
degree
The highest polynomial factor in the curve or surface mathematical definition. A line is a degree 1
curve, while a cubic B-spline is a degree 3 curve.
design alternative
Difference in a design represented by a separate version. A design alternative can be a new
design prepared as a proposed change, or one of several elective options that the builder or
customer selects. Each design alternative has an identification assigned so you can uniquely
refer to the design alternatives.
design approval log
Record of review and approval of parts of the design.
design data auto input
Automation in loading existing design data into a new design database.
design documents
Drawings, sketches, material lists, procedures, and so forth that are generated during the design
phase.
design object
Any object with properties that you can select. A design object can be related to one or more
contracts of different types, but related only to one contract of a given type.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1454


Glossary

design progress check


Analysis of the content of the design to some metric unit that gives an idea of the degree of
completion.
design review
Functionality to support rapid viewing of the design and markup of features with comments.
design service
Any general system services related to the design function.
design standard
Feature or object used in plant design that has been determined to the normal or approved way
of accomplishing a design requirement. In the context of computer software, the term refers to
computer functionality to support standards, not the standard itself.
detail schedule
Lowest level of schedule used to manage and track work progress.
distributed systems
Systems consisting of sequential parts with a distributive characteristic (for example, pipes
distribute fluids, HVAC distributes air, cabling distributes power, and structure distributes loads).
distribution systems
Term synonymous and used interchangeably with the term distributed systems.
documentation
Drawings and other records that you must produce to document, obtain approval, or build the
design.
drawing tool
Tool that helps in the process of creating, modifying, or manipulating objects. Examples are
PinPoint and SmartSketch.
easting
A term that describes an east coordinate location in a coordinate system.
edge
A topological object that represents a trimmed curve bounded by a start and end vertex.
edge distance
The distance from the center of a bolt or rivet to the edge of a plate or flange.
edge reinforcement axis
A curve that you place along the edge reinforcement. This axis can exist as part of the free edge
or an offset of a part of the free edge.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1455


Glossary

edge reinforcement boundary


An object that limits the edge reinforcement axis.
equipment catalog
Catalog of equipment geometry and limited properties that the software uses to identify and
visualize equipment and its placement in the model. The catalog is not the source for the total
specification and ordering data for the object.
external appendages
External structure attached to the hull, such as the propeller nozzle, shaft struts, bilge keel, and
so forth.
fabricate
To cut, punch, and sub-assemble members in the shop.
face
A topological object that represents a trimmed surface bounded by a loop of edges.
face plate
An edge reinforcement type that places a plate or profile at the selected plate edge.
face-to-face
The overall length of a component from the inlet face to the outlet face.
fair
To create a smooth line from one point to the next. In the case of a ship hull, to create a smooth
line from one offset point to the next, or to create a smooth surface transition from one
cross-section curve to the next.
fasteners
Bolts and rivets used to connect structural members.
element
Primitive geometric shape such as a line, circle, or arc.
fence
Boundary or barrier that separates or closes off an area. To surround or close like a fence.
field adjustment
Material added to the neat design geometry of piping or structural parts to allow for fit up in the
case that extra material is required due to uncontrolled variance in the manufacturing and
construction process.
fire integrity
Deck and bulkhead treatments and fire and smoke blocks for fire control and retardation.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1456


Glossary

flavor
A different variation of a symbol. Each variation has different occurrence property values.
focus of rotation
A point or line about which an object or view turns.
free edge
A plate edge that is not bounded by another structural object.
full penetration weld
A type of weld in which the weld material extends through the complete thickness of the
components being joined.
function points
Part of the requirements documentation, function points are the smallest granularity of a
requirement statement that describe specific detailed actions that the software performs.
functional block diagram
Schematic representation of a system (piping, electrical, ventilation) showing system parts and
their relationship. You use symbols to represent equipment and components. A connecting
network of lines illustrates their relationship. Taken together, the symbols and the network
illustrate the function of the system.
furnishings
Parts such as movable articles and fittings that normally are not associated with a system (for
example, a chair).
generic specific
Object that is parametrically defined or defined to suit a family of specific parts (for example,
International Standards parametrics). For example, a 100 - 200 gpm pump in the catalog can
provide a general shape to appear in the model until a specific object has been identified. See
also specific and specific object.
girth
The transverse measurement around the surface of the hull. As used in the software, the
measurement along the surface of a body in any direction.
GUIDs
Acronym that stands for Globally Unique Identifiers. The software automatically creates the
GUIDs sheet in the Excel workbooks when you create the Catalog database and schema. The
purpose of storing GUIDs within Excel workbooks is to help you keep track of what has been
loaded into the database. Storing GUIDs also helps to avoid the situation in which a replacement
Catalog database causes existing models to become invalid.
host location
The first location created for a Site. This host location is defined when the Database Wizard
creates the Site database.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1457


Glossary

host server
The database server on which the Site database was created using the Database Wizard.
Alternatively, if it is a restored database set, the Host Server is the database server where the
Site database is restored. The Host Server in a Workshare environment contains the origin for
the Site, Site Schema, Catalog, and Catalog Schema databases. Consequently, most Project
Management and reference data work must take place at the Host.
hull
The outside surface or envelope of a member.
hull applicability versioning
Capability within the database that allows the database to have a single model for a class of
ships that are nearly identical (sister ships) while recognizing and managing the different parts in
each ship of the class. The concept considers that alternate configurations are created for a state
purpose (owner change order, new vendor, design improvement, and so forth). In addition, this
concept relates the geometry and associated geometry to that purpose, and provides an
extraction method from the database for viewing or manufacturing the base ship with the
appropriate variant of the design authorized for that particular ship hull.
hull form generation development
Set of ship lines or surfaces that meet ship requirements for speed, powering, fuel rate, and
cargo, and any special limitation of draft, beam, or length. At this stage, lines should be adequate
for model tests.
hull structure design
Functions related to creating the structural design and manufacturing attributes of the hull and
longitudinal and transverse structure of a ship.
initial design
Early stage of design work, generally before contract, used to estimate construction costs and
provide a rough concept of the intended plant. Contains information relating to a plant created
during its initial (concept) design period.
initial structural plan
Principal structural plan for the plant; also called a construction profile.
instantiation
Occurrence of a catalog object at a specific geometric location in the model.
interference checking
A process that identifies possible collisions or insufficient clearance between objects in the
model.
internal structure
All internal structural members of the ship.
job order
Industrial authorization for accomplishing work; synonymous with a work order.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1458


Glossary

joiner
Non-structural bulkheads, and trim and built-in furnishings.
kinematics analysis
Analysis of mechanical motion.
ksi
Kips per square inch.
leg length analysis
Preferred term is welding length analysis.
library
Resource of reference information that you can access in developing a plant design.
life cycle database
Information developed to assist in the maintenance and modernization of delivered plants.
link
Way to store information about another file in your document. You can update a link so that
changes in the file appear in your document.
lintel
A horizontal member used to carry a wall over an opening.
load group
A grouping in which all components feature uniform load limits and stress safety characteristics.
For example, if a pipe clamp from load group 5 has a maximum nominal load of 20kN, then so
does a threaded rod from load group 5.
location
A Location is defined by three user-defined inputs: 1) a unique name, 2) a unique name rule ID,
and 3) the server where the Site databases reside for that Location. A Location is defined and
created when the Site database is created using the Database Wizard. Additional Locations can
be created in the Project Management task. Each Location is a Site-level object, thus other
Plants within the same Site collection can use the Locations when the Plants are configured for
Workshare.
logical member
An object in the model used to represent the design topology.
machinery
Major pieces of equipment installed in a plant.
macro
A sequence of actions or commands that can be named and stored. When you run the macro,
the software performs the actions or runs the commands. You can create the macros in Visual

Molded Forms User's Guide 1459


Glossary

Basic or other OLE-aware programming applications. Some of the other OLE-aware


programming applications are Visual Basic for Applications, Visual C++, and so forth.
maintenance envelope
A rectangular box around the part for clearance during maintenance operations.
maintenance parts
Required material for depot or on-board repair or overhaul of equipment, as determined by
engineering study. Generally at a level below the purchased construction object of the plant.
maintenance records
Records of breakdown, repair, and overhaul of equipment.
material analysis
Analysis of a completed design work for extracting detailed material requirements; also called
material lists.
material list
An option category that controls the format and content of the bill of materials.
methods
Objects in the database that describe the manufacturing methods to the component parts of a
plant.
move from point
Starting point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move From
point determines the point of origin for the move.
move to point
Ending point for an action. For example, when you move an equipment object, the Move To point
determines where you want the move to stop.
MTO neutral file
A non-graphic output file that can be fed into a material control system. MTO stands for Material
Take-Off.
natural surface
A surface without a boundary curve.
node
 One of the set of discrete points in a flow graph.
 A terminal of any branch of a network or a terminal common to two or more branches of a
network.
 An end point of any branch or a network or graph, or a junction common to two or more
branches.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1460


Glossary

non-aligned
If the tangents computed at intersecting points of plate to stiffen and supports are not parallel,
then both the supports are called to be non-aligned.
northing
A term that describes a north coordinate location in a coordinate system.
nozzle
A piping connection point to a piece of equipment.
nozzle standout
The shortest allowable distance between the connection point of a nozzle and the start point of a
turn on the leg connected to the nozzle.
NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter)
The diameter of a pipe.
object
A type of data other than the native graphic format of the application.
occurrence (of part or equipment)
Instantiation of a part of equipment in the model that refers to the part library; an instance of a
specific object. The design can be built several times, and therefore the occurrence can apply to
more than one hull. Typically, an occurrence points back to a specific object, either for its
complete definition, as in the case of a particular valve, or for its made from material, as in the
case of a steel plate part cut from sheets. Thus, when a designer selects a component from the
catalog and places it at a location in the space of the plant, the software creates an occurrence of
that object in the plant design.
occurrence property
A characteristic that applies to an individual object in the model. Occurrence properties are
designated with 'oa:' in the reference data workbooks. You can view and modify occurrence
properties on the Occurrence tab of the properties dialog boxes in the software. Depending on
the object, some occurrence properties are read-only.
origin
In coordinate geometry, the point where the X-, Y-, and Z-axes intersect.
origin point
The point at which the coordinate system is placed, providing a full Cartesian coordinate system
with positive and negative quadrants. Points are placed at coordinates relative to the origin point,
represented by the X, Y, and Z values.
orthogonal
The characteristic of an element consisting completely of elements positioned at 90-degree
angles. A square is an orthogonal element.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1461


Glossary

orthographic
A depiction of an object created by projecting its features onto a plane along lines perpendicular
to the plane.
P&ID
Diagram that shows the topology, functional components, and special requirements of a piping
system; generally represents the engineering design of the system.
package
Set of closely related classes. (UML)
painting
Computation of paint surface and recording of paint system requirements.
parameter
A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior of something.
part class
A group of similar objects. You can define part classes in the Excel workbooks. A part class can
have multiple parts. For example, a heat exchanger part class can contain heat exchangers with
different dimensions.
part number
Unique identifier of a part.
PDS (Plant Design System)
A comprehensive, intelligent, computer-aided design and engineering application for the process,
power, and marine industries. PDS consists of integrated 2-D and 3-D modules that correspond
to engineering tasks in the design workflow.
physical occurrence
Unique specific object that has traceability and is the physical manifestation of an occurrence
object. A physical occurrence applies to one and only one hull. It is a version of its occurrence
object with as-built or as-modified differences included and has a serial number or lot number.
PinPoint
Tool that allows you to place, move, and modify elements with precision, relative to a reference
point.
principle of superposition
The principle that states that the stresses, strains, and displacements due to different forces can
be combined. This principle is only valid for linear analysis.
product
Data objects that describe the components of a ship and any corresponding properties. An
individual object or part (or its representation in the product model) that may be installed in the
ship. Examples of individual products include objects such as a coffee urn, a light fixture, a piece

Molded Forms User's Guide 1462


Glossary

of pipe, a piece of ventilation duct, a radar display console, a bulkhead plate, and a structural
profile stiffening a bulkhead.
Product Data Management (PDM) System
Software intended to manage both product data and documents associated to the product data.
Functionality typically includes: object-based data modeling tools, user administration, business
rules, and document management. Document management typically includes document editing
or reviewing, document mark-up or redline, document storage, and full-text retrieval.
product structure
Hierarchical breakdown or decomposition of a product into constituent parts, volumes, or units.
(For example, a bill of material is one possible type of product structure.)
production planning
Functionality associated with the work breakdown and sequence of the construction of a plant.
promotion
Process of associating approval state with a product version. A product version begins its
existence at a working approval state. When the version is at some level of maturity, its approval
state is elevated to a higher approval state (that is, promoted). Then, further changes must be
carefully controlled and generally require the data set demoted to a working state. One or more
promotions can occur successively higher approval states (between working and approved) to
represent various intermediate levels of review or progressive approval.
query select sets
Set of objects that are selected in a query or queries on the database.
reference data
The data that is necessary to design plants or ships using the software. Reference data includes
graphical information, such as symbols. It also contains tabular information, such as physical
dimensions and piping specifications.
resource estimation
Rough estimate of material, manpower, and facility utilization for the design and construction of
the plant.
route
1) A line connecting a series of points in space and constituting a proposed or traveled route. 2)
The set of links and junctions joined in series to establish a connection.
satellite server
The database server where the replicated databases reside for Workshare. The Satellite Server
is not used unless Workshare is activated.
schema
A database that creates the structure of another database. For example, a schema specifies the
queries, tables, fields, and data types in a database.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1463


Glossary

schema update utility


Functionality used to assist in processing existing product models to an updated database
structure after you modify or add to the database structure.
sheetbody
A topological object that represents a collection of faces joined along their common edges
(stitched).
shell structure
External portion of the surface of the plant.
ship
A collection of modeled objects that can be simultaneously displayed and edited in a workspace.
A Ship points to a Catalog (optionally shared with other Ships). Access control is managed at the
Ship level.
site
The top level in the Project Management hierarchy. A Site configuration may contain several
Catalogs, each shared by multiple Plants.
site administrator
Person responsible for managing the standards and general parameters for a given plant site
within a Site database.
site setup
Functionality associated with establishing a new plant site or hull for design development.
sketch and trace
User interface for rough definition of a required design feature that typically works in a 2-D mode.
specials
An option category that allows you to control specialized calculations for equipment trim,
repeatability, and center-of-gravity.
specifications
Contracted requirements for the plant.
steel outfitting
Internal structural elements of a ship that are required to meet a local requirement such as
foundations, non-structural bulkheads, walkways, and so forth.
stern frame
Casting and structure that support the rudder and shaft opening.
stud
A bolt, threaded on both ends, used to connect components.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1464


Glossary

surfaces
Those areas of a ship that include the hull, deck, and bulkhead surfaces.
suspended floor
A concrete floor system built above and off the ground.
swage
A surface or plate formed to a shape, typically a regular or non-regular pattern of grooves in an
arc, V or elongated V shape. In practice, a swaged plate is formed by stamping or hammering
with a tool, die, or press.
swash bulkhead
A longitudinal or transverse nontight bulkhead in a tank that decreases the swashing motion of
the liquid contents. A plate in a tank that has this same effect but that does not extend to the
bottom of the tank is called a swash plate.
symmetric node
Type of vertex on a curve. A curve with a symmetric node has the same curvature on each side
of the node. A handle can be attached to a symmetric node for editing.
system
A conceptual design grouping that organizes parts in hierarchical relationships. A system
represents a functional view of the model and includes information such as system name, type,
properties, and design specifications for the objects assigned to the system.
tag number
User-specific, unique number assigned to an object (for example, CV-101 for a control valve,
HE-2002 for a heat exchanger).
target point
The origin for coordinate measurements displayed by PinPoint. You can position the target point
anywhere on the drawing sheet or view.
tolerant geometry
A type of ACIS geometry - either an edge or a vertex - that is outside the tolerance for ACIS and
requires special handling.
transverse
At right angles to the fore-and-aft center line.
transverse frames
The athwartship members that form the ribs of the ship.
trim
The difference between the forward draft and the aft draft.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1465


Glossary

trimmed surface
A surface whose boundary is fully or partially inside the "natural" geometric definition of the
surface. Some or the entire control polygon extends outside the face boundary.
trunk
Feature that quickly reserves space for the distributive systems and other systems that have a
path. Along the trunk are stations that define the cross section and identify part or system
membership.
tumble home
The inboard slope of the side of a ship, usually above the designed waterline.
unit/module modeler
Facility of the system to structure collections of equipment and components into a single
identifiable object.
user attributes
A customized property in the reference data. The Custom Interfaces sheets in the Excel
workbooks define these properties. You can list the customized properties on the individual part
class sheets.
version control
Ability of the system to manage multiple versions of a single part of the design. Version control
should support conditional analysis and promotion status, as well as alternate design features
among hulls within a plant site.
vertex
A topological object that represents a point in the three-dimensional model.
vertical keel
A row of vertical plates extending along the center of the flat plate keel.
viewset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) that a view operation uses. Membership
or lack of membership for any object in a viewset does not affect the actual stored representation
of the object, but only its availability or desirability for viewing in the current scenario.
water line
A line parallel with the base line that depicts the water.
watertight door
A door that when closed prevents the passage of water.
weather deck
A deck exposed to the weather.
weathertight door
A door that when closed prevents the passage of rain and spray.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1466


Glossary

weight and CG analysis


Routines that compute the weight of commodity materials as configured in a given design (for
example, plate and pipe) and determine total weight and center of gravity (CG) for a collection of
material and equipment, as well as the complete plant.
welding
Weld requirements for joining materials. Welding length analysis is the calculation of required
weld dimensions; also called leg length analysis.
windlass
The machine used to hoist and lower anchors.
wirebody
A topological object that represents a collection of edges jointed at their common endpoints.
wizard
Software routine attached to an application that provides guidance and expert help to you to
complete one of the functionalities of the application.
work content
Estimation development of metrics from the database that relates to the work hour content of the
various construction units.
work order
Plant authorization for completing work; synonymous with a job order.
working plane
The available 2-D plane of movement for endpoint selection.
workset
Set of objects (usually a subset of the entire database) used in an interactive change, add, or
delete operation. Membership or lack of membership for any object in a workset does not
necessarily affect the actual stored representation of an object. However, you can change or
delete an object in a workset that also results in a change or deletion of the stored object.
Similarly, when you add a new object (not currently stored) to a workset, the software also adds
the object container.
workspace
Area that represents the portion of the model data needed to perform the intended task and
includes the user modeling settings.
workspace document
Document into which you can extract a portion of the model data for a user task.
Workspace Explorer
Tree or list representation of objects in your workspace.

Molded Forms User's Guide 1467


Index
Advanced 3S Opening • 490
< Advanced 4S Opening • 498
<length in meters> of seam length ignored Advanced Opening with No Supports • 484
in split. • 1416 Advanced Plate Palette Dialog Box • 283
Advanced Plate System • 275
0 Advanced Plate System Properties Dialog
Box • 408
0S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)
aft • 1450
• 515
after body • 1450
0S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) •
aftermost • 1450
576
All seams or knuckles are ignored in split. •
0S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog
1408
Box) • 637
angle • 1450
approval state • 1450
3 arrangement (accommodation) • 1451
3S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) Assembly Connection Properties Dialog Box
• 529 • 962
3S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) • Assign part names at placement • 992
589 attribute • 1451
3S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Automatic Preview (Tools Menu) • 1395
Box) • 653 Automatic Reconnect (Tools Menu) • 1388
3S Support and Offset Opening • 505 Automatic Reconnect Dialog Box • 1391
axis • 1451
4
4S Circle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box)
B
• 555 Bad connection (either missing port or
4S Oval Tab (Opening Palette Dialog Box) • invalid port in connection) • 1408
615 Bad edge attributes because of knuckle
4S Rectangle Tab (Opening Palette Dialog <name of knuckle>. Check connection. •
Box) • 680 1408
4S Support and Offset Opening • 512 Bad edge attributes because of seam
<name of seam>. Check connection. •
A 1409
basic design • 1451
abaft • 1450 Batch Process Selection Dialog Box • 1384
abstract part • 1450 bending • 1451
access holes • 1450 Best Practices • 50
accommodation • 1450 Bifurcated Section Type A • 1207
accommodation ladder • 1450 bill of material (BOM) • 1451
Across Model Family Definition Dialog Box • bocad Import Dialog Box • 1234
1281 Boundary List Dialog Box • 83
Active Template Library (ATL) • 1450 Boundary Methods • 80
Add a custom batch process • 1382 Boundary Tab (Automatic Reconnect Dialog
Add a flange to a catalog bracket system • Box) • 1392
1428 Boxed Member Buckling Plate • 342
Add a transverse member to a can • 870 Bracket Best Practices • 50
Add auxiliary parts to an assembly Bracket by Plane • 246
connection • 960 Bracket by Supports • 247
Add reinforcement to a bracket • 244

Molded Forms User's Guide 1468


Index

Bracket Connect Points Data Tab (Bracket change management • 1452


System Properties Dialog Box) • 271 change propagation • 1452
Bracket Flange Properties Tab (Bracket Check data integrity of plates • 1371
Plate System Properties Dialog Box) • Check hull records on the To-Do List • 1402
1446 Check internal structure in the model • 1403
Bracket Parameters Tab (Bracket Plate Check internal structure records on the
System Properties Dialog Box) • 1445 To-Do List • 1403
Bracket Plate System • 227 Check the seam pattern on the new hull •
Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog Box 1400
• 1429 Check the To-Do List • 1400
Bracket Reinforcement Properties Dialog Child Plate System • 426
Box • 271, 1448 Child Plate System Properties Dialog Box •
Bracket System Properties Dialog Box • 250 432
Brackets Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Circular Opening with Four Supports • 555
Dialog Box) • 378 Circular Opening with Four Supports and a
Buckling Plate • 347 200 mm Fixed Radius • 562
Buckling Plate along Member • 353 Circular Opening with Four Supports and a
Buckling Plates Tab (Advanced Plate 250 mm Fixed Radius • 568, 572
Palette Dialog Box) • 341 Circular Opening with No Supports • 515
built ships • 1451 Circular Opening with No Supports and a
bulkload • 1451 200 mm Fixed Radius • 520
Circular Opening with No Supports and a
C 250 mm Fixed Radius • 524
Circular Opening with No Supports and a
cabin plan • 1451 300 mm Fixed Radius • 526
Can - Beam and Column End Point • 1025 Circular Opening with Three Supports • 530
Can - Beam and Column Intersection • 1026 Circular Opening with Three Supports and a
Can - Cone Transition • 1025 200 mm Fixed Radius • 538
Can - Continuous Leg • 1021 Circular Opening with Three Supports and a
Can - Diameter Change • 1022 250 mm Fixed Radius • 545
Can - Horizontal Beam • 1020 Circular Opening with Three Supports and a
Can - Multiple Braces • 1021, 1024 300 mm Fixed Radius • 550
Can - Single Axis Gap • 1023 class • 1452
Can - Vertical Column • 1020 class rule check • 1452
Can Properties Dialog Box • 872 Class Rules • 1452
Can Rule Tab (Can Properties Dialog Box) • classification folder • 1452
877 codelist • 1452
catalog • 1451 Column Insert Plate • 398
Catalog database • 1451 Column Tee Insert Plate • 403
ceiling • 1452 Combine end-to-end curves • 1072
Center of Buoyancy • 91 commodity code • 1452
chain • 1452 commodity item • 1452
Change a geometric construction to a component • 1452
different definition • 1056 concurrent access • 1453
Change a recess opening to a through Configuration Tab • 124, 815
opening • 717 Configure account mapping for batch
Change a through opening to a recess services • 1275
opening • 717 Configure the GeniE export initialization file
Change a topological point to a different • 1243
point definition • 1335 Configure the Smart 3D batch queues •
Change an advanced opening to a different 1274
opening definition • 489 Connect systems using a logical connection
Change Geometry Type (Edit Menu) • 1385 • 945
change history • 1452

Molded Forms User's Guide 1469


Index

Connection has no geometry. • 1409 Create a copy across models family using
consolidated tasks • 1453 multiple grid planes • 1264
constraints • 1453 Create a copy similar family using a single
Continuity Plate • 322 grid plane • 1260
Continuity Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Create a copy similar family using multiple
Palette Dialog Box) • 321 grid planes • 1261
contract • 1453 Create a copy symmetry family • 1262
control point • 1453 Create a four or five support bracket by
Convert a member part • 810 plane • 239
coordinate • 1453 Create a one support bracket by plane • 237
coordinate system • 1453 Create a ruled plate system by drawing
Coordinate System by Lines • 1169 curves • 455
Coordinate System by Points • 1172 Create a ruled plate system using existing
Coordinate Systems (Geometric curves • 454
Construction Palette Dialog Box) • 1168 Create a three support bracket by plane •
Copy and paste a sketched opening • 481 239
Copy and paste an advanced opening • 490 Create a three, four, or five support bracket
Copy by Family • 1255 by supports • 241
Copy By Family Audit Report • 1316 Create a two support bracket by plane • 238
Copy By Family Batch Dialog Box • 1285 Create a two support bracket by supports •
Copy By Family Log File Workflows • 1289 241
Copy By Family Log Files • 1288 Create detailed parts from plate and profile
Copy By Family Synchronize • 1315 systems • 992
Copy objects in a similar family • 1265 Create multiple intersections seams • 895
Copy objects in a symmetry family • 1269 Creating Knuckles • 931
Copy objects in an across model family • Creating Reference Curves • 972
1272 Creating Seams • 888
Copy objects using Copy Shortcuts • 1271 Cross Insert Plate • 386
Copy Shortcuts Settings Dialog Box • 1284 Cross Insert Plate 1 • 390
Copy the model • 1397 Cross Section Tab • 781
corrugation • 1453 Cross Section Tab (Bracket Reinforcement
Could not find the boundary/operator Properties Dialog Box) • 272, 1448
creating the edge. Check the connection. Cross Section Tab (Can Properties Dialog
• 1410 Box) • 884
Could not get back the edge information. Cross Section Tab (Designed Member
Check connection • 1410 Properties Dialog Box) • 832
Could not retrieve boundary. Check Cross Section Tab (Member Part Prismatic
connection. • 1410 Properties Dialog Box) • 824
Could not retrieve edge information. Check Cross Section Tab (Profile Properties Dialog
connection. • 1411 Box) • 732
Could not retrieve the children of the plate Cross Section Worksheet • 1232
system. • 1411 Curve as Extended Section • 1063
Could not retrieve the root plate. • 1411 Curve at Offset by Intersection • 1066
Create a bracket and bracket reinforcement Curve by Curves • 1070
using the icon browser • 244 Curve by Intersection • 1073
Create a child plate system • 431 Curve by Points on Surface • 1076
Create a chute using multiple chute shapes Curve by Two Points on Surface • 1081
• 1185 Curves (Geometric Construction Palette
Create a copy across models family by Dialog Box) • 1061
range • 1264 Custom Shape Tab (Opening Palette Dialog
Create a copy across models family using a Box) • 484
single grid plane • 1263 cutting plane • 1453

Molded Forms User's Guide 1470


Index

D design alternative • 1454


design approval log • 1454
damage records • 1453
design data auto input • 1454
Data Integrity Check (Tools Menu) • 1371
design documents • 1454
Data Integrity Check Messages • 1407
design object • 1454
data interchange • 1453
design progress check • 1455
database • 1454
design review • 1455
database backup • 1454
design service • 1455
database break and recovery • 1454
design standard • 1455
database copy • 1454
Designed Member Properties Dialog Box •
database management • 1454
828
database monitor record • 1454
Designed Member to Designed Member •
Define a boundary curve • 82
1002
Define a coincident plane • 76
Designed Member to Designed Member -
Define a plane using a point and a normal
Axis Along • 994, 1003, 1004
vector • 78
Designed Member to Designed Member - I
Define a plane using three points • 79
Seated • 1005
Define an offset plane • 77
Designed Member to Plate • 1008
Define Bracket Plate System Properties
Designed Member to Rolled I • 1007
Dialog Box • 272
detail schedule • 1455
Define landing curve by 2D • 87
Detailing Built Up Connections • 993
Define landing curve by 3D • 88
Direction and Orientation Glyphs for Objects
Definition Tab (Assembly Connection
• 44
Properties Dialog Box) • 966
Display a profile or seam dynamically while
degree • 1454
extending • 786
Delay Operations Dialog Box • 1367
distributed systems • 1455
Delay Settings (Tools Menu) • 1366
distribution systems • 1455
Delay Settings Tab (Delay Operations
documentation • 1455
Dialog Box) • 1367
drawing tool • 1455
Delay Tab (Imported Plate System
Duplicate Physical Connection. • 1412
Properties Dialog Box) • 155
Delete a bracket • 245
Delete a bracket system • 1429 E
Delete a copy across model family • 1265 easting • 1455
Delete a copy similar family • 1262 edge • 1455
Delete a copy symmetry family • 1263 edge distance • 1455
Delete a geometric construction • 1057 Edge from Curve or Surface • 1085
Delete a member system • 809 Edge port doesn't have geometry. Check
Delete a plate system • 106 connection. • 1412
Delete a profile knuckle • 938 edge reinforcement axis • 1455
Delete a reference curve • 975 edge reinforcement boundary • 1456
Delete a seam • 904 Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Properties
Delete a smart occurrence object • 992 Dialog Box • 779
Delete a stiffener profile • 729 Edge Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box
Delete a topological point • 1335 • 775
Delete a tripping stiffener profile • 770 Edges from Curve or Surface • 1088
Delete advanced opening geometry • 489 Edit a frame connection • 809
Delete an assembly connection • 960 Edit a manual profile knuckle • 938
Delete an opening • 481, 717 Edit assembly connection parts • 961
Delete edge reinforcement profile • 775 Edit assembly connection ports • 971
Delete free end cut • 961 Edit assembly connection properties • 960
Delete objects in a similar family • 1267 Edit free end cut properties • 961
Delete objects in a symmetry family • 1270 Edit Intersection • 948
Derive points • 765 Edit member part properties • 809

Molded Forms User's Guide 1471


Index

Edit member system properties • 809 Flange Parameters Tab (Bracket System
Entire length of seam ignored in split. • 1413 Properties Dialog Box) • 270
equipment catalog • 1456 Flange Selection Tab (Bracket System
Error - Has opposite surface normal as the Properties Dialog Box) • 269
root plate <name of root plate> • 1413 flavor • 1457
Evaluate results • 1404 focus of rotation • 1457
Execute Detailing Command • 989 Frame Connection Properties Dialog Box •
Execute Split • 891 850
Export ACIS (File Menu) • 1236 Frame mapping and Range Growth Values
Export Attribute Mapping Workbooks • 1246 in Copy by Family • 1292
Export data to GeniE XML • 1243 free edge • 1457
Export data to Neutral XML • 1242 full penetration weld • 1457
Export IGES (File Menu) • 1236 function points • 1457
Export Neutral/GeniE XML (File Menu) • functional block diagram • 1457
1241 furnishings • 1457
Export NSchema/GeniE Dialog Box • 1244
Export seam data • 1239 G
Export Seams (File Menu) • 1239
Export Seams Dialog Box • 1240 Gap detected in the seam bounding. • 1414
Export stiffener data • 1238 Gap Transition Plate • 334
Export Stiffeners (File Menu) • 1237 General KNU Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties
Export Stiffeners Dialog Box • 1238 Dialog Box) • 933
ExportAttributeMapping.xls • 1246 General Tab • 125, 845
Exporting ACIS and IGES Data • 1236 General Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile
Exporting Stiffeners and Seams • 1237 Part Properties Dialog Box) • 782
Extend • 785 General Tab (Edge Reinforcement
Extend a polyline cross-section • 1065 Properties Dialog Box) • 779
Extend a profile or seam in both directions • General Tab (Frame Connection Properties
785 Dialog Box) • 850
Extend a profile or seam in one direction • General Tab (Opening Properties Dialog
785 Box) • 719
Extended User Attributes Tab • 129, 849 General Tab (Plate Knuckle Properties
external appendages • 1456 Dialog Box) • 931
General Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog
Box) • 127, 847
F General Tab (Split Connection Properties
fabricate • 1456 Dialog Box) • 929
face • 1456 General Tab (Stiffener Part Properties
face plate • 1456 Dialog Box) • 738
face-to-face • 1456 Generate a property summary report in auto
Failure encountered while checking seam select family objects in workspace mode •
geometry and split result. • 1413 1321
Failure encountered while retrieving Generate a property summary report in auto
thickness. • 1414 select family objects mode • 1321
fair • 1456 Generate a property summary report in
fasteners • 1456 manual mode • 1321
feature • 1456 Generate an object summary report in auto
fence • 1456 select family objects in workspace mode •
field adjustment • 1456 1320
Fillet by Curve • 1090 Generate an object summary report in auto
Find and correlate objects across models • select family objects mode • 1320
1273 Generate an object summary report in
fire integrity • 1456 manual mode • 1320
Generic Batch Command Dialog Box • 1383

Molded Forms User's Guide 1472


Index

generic specific • 1457 instantiation • 1458


GeniE Export Initialization File Global interference checking • 1458
Options • 1243 internal structure • 1458
Geometric Construction Explorer • 703, Invert multiple logical connections • 950
1214 Invert the logical connection between a
Geometric Constructions • 1027 plate and a profile • 951
girth • 1457
GUIDs • 1457 J
job order • 1458
H joiner • 1459
Head Section Type A • 1181
Head Section Type B • 1190 K
Head Section Type C • 1194
host location • 1457 Key Points • 1353
host server • 1458 kinematics analysis • 1459
hull • 1458 Knuckle <name of knuckle> has no
hull applicability versioning • 1458 geometry. • 1416
hull form generation development • 1458 Knuckle Best Practices • 56
hull structure design • 1458 Knuckled Bracket • 379
ksi • 1459
I
L
Icons in the Workspace Explorer • 32
Import a plate system • 136 Landing Curve Best Practices • 56
Import ACIS (File Menu) • 1216 Landing Curve Methods • 87
Import ACIS or IGES data • 1216 Landing Curve Table Dialog Box • 760
Import Bocad • 1233 leg length analysis • 1459
Import IGES (File Menu) • 1216 Legacy Catalog Tab (Opening Properties
Import Seam Dialog Box • 1225 Dialog Box) • 482
Import Seams (File Menu) • 1225 library • 1459
Import Ship Structure • 1231 life cycle database • 1459
Import ship structure data • 1231 Limitations of GeniE Export • 1244
Import Ship Structure Dialog Box • 1231 Line by Point, Angle, and Length • 1094
Import Stiffener Dialog Box • 1218 Line by Points • 1098
Import stiffener or seam data • 1217 Line from Coordinate System • 1100
Import Stiffeners (File Menu) • 1217 Line String by Points • 1104
Import Translation Map Workbook • 1232 Linear Extruded Plate System • 156
Imported Plate System • 130 Linear Extruded Plate System Properties
Imported Plate System Properties Dialog Dialog Box • 162
Box • 137 link • 1459
Importing ACIS and IGES Data • 1216 lintel • 1459
Importing Stiffeners and Seams • 1217 load group • 1459
In to-do list location • 1459
<to-do list item> • 1415 Logical Connection • 943
Inconsistent attributes between system and Logical Connection Properties Dialog Box •
part geometry. Check connection. • 1415 945
Inconsistent port attributes between root logical member • 1459
plate and leaf plate. Check connection. •
1415 M
initial design • 1458 machinery • 1459
initial structural plan • 1458 macro • 1459
Insert Plate Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Main Tab (Advanced Plate System
Dialog Box) • 385 Properties Dialog Box) • 409

Molded Forms User's Guide 1473


Index

Main Tab (Bracket Plate System Properties Marine Structure Hierarchy in the
Dialog Box) • 1429 Workspace Explorer • 30
Main Tab (Bracket System Properties material analysis • 1460
Dialog Box) • 250 material list • 1460
Main Tab (Child Plate System Properties Material Tab (Advanced Plate System
Dialog Box) • 432 Properties Dialog Box) • 412
Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Profile Part Material Tab (Bracket Plate System
Properties Dialog Box) • 780 Properties Dialog Box) • 1432
Main Tab (Edge Reinforcement Properties Material Tab (Bracket System Properties
Dialog Box) • 775 Dialog Box) • 253
Main Tab (Imported Plate System Material Tab (Child Plate System Properties
Properties Dialog Box) • 138 Dialog Box) • 435
Main Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System Material Tab (Imported Plate System
Properties Dialog Box) • 163 Properties Dialog Box) • 140
Main Tab (Logical Connections Properties Material Tab (Linear Extruded Plate System
Dialog Box) • 945 Properties Dialog Box) • 166
Main Tab (Nonlinear Plate System Material Tab (Nonlinear Plate System
Properties Dialog Box) • 187, 836 Properties Dialog Box) • 190, 839
Main Tab (Opening Properties Dialog Box) • Material Tab (Planar Plate System
482 Properties Dialog Box) • 109
Main Tab (Planar Plate System Properties Material Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog
Dialog Box) • 107 Box) • 127, 846
Main Tab (Plate Part Properties Dialog Box) Material Tab (Revolved Plate System
• 125, 845 Properties Dialog Box) • 213
Main Tab (Profile Properties Dialog Box) • Material Tab (Ruled Plate System
730 Properties Dialog Box) • 459
Main Tab (Profile Seam Properties Dialog Material Worksheet • 1232
Box) • 917 Measure a girth distance along a landing
Main Tab (Reference Curve By 2D Sketch curve • 1387
Properties Dialog Box) • 983 Measure Explicit (Tools Menu) • 1386
Main Tab (Reference Curve By Intersection Measure using a temporary coordinate
Properties Dialog Box) • 975 system • 1387
Main Tab (Reference Curve By Offset Member Part Prismatic Properties Dialog
Properties Dialog Box) • 979 Box • 818
Main Tab (Reference Curve from External Member Part Tab (Member Part Prismatic
File Properties Dialog Box) • 985 Properties Dialog Box) • 818
Main Tab (Revolved Plate System Member System Prismatic Properties Dialog
Properties Dialog Box) • 211 Box • 813
Main Tab (Ruled Plate System Properties Member System Tab (Member System
Dialog Box) • 457 Prismatic Properties Dialog Box) • 813
Main Tab (Seam Properties Dialog Box) • Merge surfaces into a single surface • 1144
904 methods • 1460
Main Tab (Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Minimum Distance • 92
Box) • 737 Miscellaneous Commands • 1385
maintenance envelope • 1460 Missing boundary connection to <object
maintenance parts • 1460 name> • 1417
maintenance records • 1460 Missing child connections. • 1417
Manual Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Missing connection with <object name> •
Box • 938 1417
Manual Split • 895 Missing root intersection connection with
Manually copy objects • 1271 <object name> • 1418
Manually select a bracket symbol • 242 Model Bulkheads with Multiple Openings •
Manufacturing Service Manager • 1375 57

Molded Forms User's Guide 1474


Index

Modify a bracket • 245 Molded Conventions Tab (Planar Plate


Modify a bracket system • 1429 System Properties Dialog Box) • 110
Modify a copy across model family • 1265 Molded Conventions Tab (Revolved Plate
Modify a copy similar family • 1262 System Properties Dialog Box) • 214
Modify a copy symmetry family • 1263 Molded Conventions Tab (Ruled Plate
Modify a geometric construction • 1055 System Properties Dialog Box) • 460
Modify a logical connection • 950 Molded Forms • 22
Modify a plate system • 104 Molded Forms Workflow • 28
Modify a plate system created with Move a chute • 1190
geometric constructions • 282 Move a defined plane • 80
Modify a reference curve • 975 Move a member • 812
Modify a seam • 904 Move a plate system to a different system in
Modify a smart occurrence object • 992 the model hierarchy • 105
Modify a stiffener profile • 729 move from point • 1460
Modify a topological point • 1334 Move one end of a member • 812
Modify a tripping stiffener profile • 769 move to point • 1460
Modify an advanced plate system • 281 MTO neutral file • 1460
Modify an edge reinforcement profile • 775
Modify an Opening • 480 N
Modify geometry type • 1385
Modify Plate Knuckle Curve Display Colors • natural surface • 1460
939 No splitting surface - will be ignored in split.
Modify Profile System Landing Curve Check the seam creation. • 1418
Display Colors • 783 node • 1460
Modify Reference Curve Display Colors • non-aligned • 1461
986 Nonlinear Extruded Plate System • 180
Modify Seam Display Colors • 918 Nonlinear Plate System Properties Dialog
Modify the angle of a member • 811 Box • 187, 836
Modify the cardinal point of a member • 810 northing • 1461
Modify the cross-section of a member • 811 Not used in splitting. • 1419
Modify the end releases of a member • 810 Notes Tab • 817
Modify the material grade of a member • 811 nozzle • 1461
Modify the material of a member • 811 nozzle standout • 1461
Modify the type of member • 812 NPD (Nominal Piping Diameter) • 1461
Molded Conventions Tab (Advanced Plate
System Properties Dialog Box) • 412 O
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket Plate object • 1461
System Properties Dialog Box) • 1432 Objects and behaviors supported for Copy
Molded Conventions Tab (Bracket System by Family • 1294
Properties Dialog Box) • 254 Objects and behaviors supported in
Molded Conventions Tab (Child Plate Attribute Modify • 1303
System Properties Dialog Box) • 436 Objects not supported by Copy by Family •
Molded Conventions Tab (Imported Plate 1302
System Properties Dialog Box) • 141 occurrence (of part or equipment) • 1461
Molded Conventions Tab (Linear Extruded occurrence property • 1461
Plate System Properties Dialog Box) • Occurrence Tab (Assembly Connection
166 Properties Dialog Box) • 962
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate Occurrence Tab (Can Properties Dialog
System Properties Dialog Box - Designed Box) • 872
Member) • 840 Occurrence Tab (Designed Member
Molded Conventions Tab (Nonlinear Plate Properties Dialog Box) • 829
System Properties Dialog Box) • 191 One-sided Buckling Plate • 373
Opening Palette Dialog Box • 482

Molded Forms User's Guide 1475


Index

Opening Properties Dialog Box • 482, 719 Place a buckling plate along a built-up
Openings • 475 boxed member • 344
Optimal Update Processing for Hull Swaps • Place a buckling plate along a built-up
1406 tubular member • 365
Orientation Rule Tab (Bracket Place a buckling plate along a member •
Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) • 355
272, 1448 Place a buckling plate at a rolled member
origin • 1461 and a nodal connection • 360
origin point • 1461 Place a buckling plate on one side of a
orthogonal • 1461 member web • 375
orthographic • 1462 Place a chute shape • 1185
Oval Opening with Four Supports • 615 Place a circular opening with four supports •
Oval Opening with Four Supports, a 500 559
mm Length, and a 250 mm Width • 622 Place a circular opening with four supports
Oval Opening with Four Supports, a 600 and a fixed radius • 566
mm Length, and a 450 mm Width • 629 Place a circular opening with no supports •
Oval Opening with Four Supports, an 850 518
mm Length, and a 500 mm Width • 633 Place a circular opening with no supports
Oval Opening with No Supports • 577 and a fixed radius • 522
Oval Opening with No Supports, a 500 mm Place a circular opening with three supports
Length, and a 250 mm Width • 582 • 534
Oval Opening with No Supports, an 850 mm Place a circular opening with three supports
Length, and a 500 mm Width • 586 and a fixed radius • 543
Oval Opening with Three Supports • 590 Place a column insert plate along a member
Oval Opening with Three Supports, a 500 • 400
mm Length, and a 250 mm Width • 598 Place a column insert plate on supporting
Oval Opening with Three Supports, a 600 and supporting members • 405
mm Length, and a 450 mm Width • 605 Place a continuity plate • 325
Oval Opening with Three Supports, an 850 Place a coordinate system at a point • 1175
mm Length, and a 500 mm Width • 610 Place a coordinate system by lines • 1171
Place a corrugated surface • 1139
P Place a cross insert plate on intersecting
members • 392
P&ID • 1462 Place a cross insert plate on supporting and
package • 1462 supported members • 388
painting • 1462 Place a curve at an edge • 1087
Parallel Line • 1107 Place a curve by intersection • 1075
parameter • 1462 Place a curve by points • 1079
Parameters Tab (Bracket System Properties Place a curve offset from an intersection •
Dialog Box) • 268 1069
part class • 1462 Place a curve on a surface by two points
Part light part geometry might be corrupted. and projection • 1084
• 1420 Place a curve on all edges of a selected
part number • 1462 object • 1090
Partial Buckling Plate • 368 Place a custom plate system using
PDS (Plant Design System) • 1462 geometric constructions • 282
Permission Group Behaviors Between Place a fillet surface between two surfaces •
Tasks • 45 1164
physical occurrence • 1462 Place a filleted curve on a surface • 1093
Pick boundaries • 81 Place a gap transition plate between flanges
PinPoint • 1462 • 337
Place a buckling plate aligned with flanges Place a gap transition plate between webs •
or continuity plates • 349 339

Molded Forms User's Guide 1476


Index

Place a knuckled bracket • 382 Place a rectangular opening with three


Place a knuckled curve by points • 1080 supports and a fixed height and width •
Place a knuckled surface • 1167 667
Place a line between two points • 1100 Place a reference curve by 2D sketch • 982
Place a line by point, angle, and length • Place a reference curve by importing from
1097 file • 985
Place a line in the direction of a coordinate Place a reference curve by intersection •
system axis • 1103 974
Place a line parallel to another line • 1109 Place a reference curve by offset • 978
Place a line string • 1106 Place a revolved plate system • 209
Place a linear extruded plate system • 161 Place a ring plate • 305
Place a manual profile knuckle by GC point • Place a ring plate with radial edges • 319
937 Place a ring plate with sniped corners • 312
Place a manual profile knuckle by reference Place a seam by intersection • 903
curve • 937 Place a seam by offset • 907
Place a member generic assembly Place a seam by Projection • 912
connection • 970 Place a seam by table • 914
Place a member using finish mode • 808 Place a side plate • 288
Place a nonlinear extruded plate system • Place a side plate with sniped corners • 294
185 Place a solid by sweeping between planar
Place a partial buckling plate on one side of cross-sections • 1180
a member web • 371 Place a stub-end can • 869
Place a planar plate system • 104 Place a surface blended between adjacent
Place a plane by coordinate positions • 1125 curves and surfaces • 1160
Place a plane by coordinate system offset • Place a surface by cross-section curves •
1119 1132
Place a plane by points • 1122 Place a surface by sweeping between
Place a plane by two points normal to a planar curves • 1157
curve • 1129 Place a swaged surface • 1151
Place a point at the middle of a curve • 1340 Place a tee insert plate on supporting and
Place a point by distances from a coordinate supported members • 396
system origin • 1045 Place a topological point along a girth
Place a point by distances from a reference distance and offset normal to the curve •
point • 1045 1346
Place a point on a surface and along a Place a topological point by distances from
curve • 1038 a coordinate system origin • 1364
Place a polyline • 1114 Place a topological point by distances from
Place a profile seam at a distance along the a reference point • 1364
profile • 916 Place a topological point offset from the
Place a profile seam by offsetting from a intersection of two offset curves • 1347
reference • 916 Place a topological point on a surface and
Place a rectangular opening with four along a curve • 1333
supports • 684 Place a topological point referenced from a
Place a rectangular opening with four profile or member cross-section key point
supports and a fixed height and width • • 1352
691 Place a transition plate • 332
Place a rectangular opening with no Place an advanced opening • 480
supports • 640 Place an advanced opening offset from four
Place a rectangular opening with no supports • 512
supports and a fixed height and width • Place an advanced opening offset from
645 three supports • 509
Place a rectangular opening with three Place an advanced opening with four
supports • 658 supports • 502

Molded Forms User's Guide 1477


Index

Place an advanced opening with no Place tripping stiffener • 769


supports • 487 Placing Logical Connections • 942
Place an advanced opening with three Placing Plate Systems • 96
supports • 495 Placing Profile Systems • 721
Place an assembly connection • 959 Planar Plate System • 99
Place an axial side plate • 298 Planar Plate System Properties Dialog Box •
Place an end can • 868 106
Place an in-line can • 865 Plane by Points • 1120
Place an in-line can on cross bracing • 866 Plane by Positions • 1123
Place an opening by boundaries • 709 Plane by Two Points and Normal • 1126
Place an opening by drawing • 711 Plane from Coordinate System • 1117
Place an opening by shape • 710 Plane Methods • 76
Place an opening by sketching • 479 Plane Tab (Automatic Reconnect Dialog
Place an opening on a leaning wall • 715 Box) • 1394
Place an opening on a sloped wall • 713 Plate has no plate part children. • 1421
Place an oval opening with four supports • Plate Knuckle Properties Dialog Box • 931
619 Plate Part Properties Dialog Box • 125, 845
Place an oval opening with four supports Plate System Boundaries • 98
and a fixed height and width • 626 Point Along Curve on Surface • 1029, 1324
Place an oval opening with no supports • Point at Curve Middle • 1335
579 Point at Minimum Distance • 1341
Place an oval opening with no supports and Point at Offset from Key Point • 1348
a fixed height and width • 584 Point from Coordinate System • 1039, 1358
Place an oval opening with three supports • Points (Geometric Construction Palette
595 Dialog Box) • 1028
Place an oval opening with three supports Points Along Curve • 1047
and a fixed height and width • 603 Polyline by One to Four Segments • 1110
Place Assembly Connection • 952 Preface • 18
Place Can • 860 Prepare the model • 1397
Place edge reinforcement profile • 774 principle of superposition • 1462
Place free end cuts • 961 product • 1462
Place Linear Member Systems • 787 Product Data Management (PDM) System •
Place Member Generic Assembly 1463
Connection • 968 product structure • 1463
Place members using contiguous placement production planning • 1463
• 807 Profile Edge Reinforcement • 771
Place members using discrete placement • Profile Knuckle • 935
806 Profile Knuckle Properties Dialog Box • 933
Place Opening • 705 Profile Knuckle Tab (Manual Profile Knuckle
Place points along a curve by count with Dialog Box) • 938
start and end points • 1053 Profile Knuckle Tab (Profile Knuckle Dialog
Place points along a curve by count without Box) • 933
start and end points • 1054 Profile Orientation • 88
Place points along a curve by spacing with Profile Properties Dialog Box • 729
start and end points • 1050 Profile Seam • 914
Place points along a curve by spacing Profile Seam Properties Dialog Box • 917
without start and end points • 1052 Profile Section Tab (Stiffener Part
Place points on vertices • 1060 Properties Dialog Box) • 738
Place Splits • 921 promotion • 1463
Place stiffener profile by intersection • 728 Properties Dialog Box • 1288
Place stiffener profile by offset • 745
Place stiffener profile by projection • 753 Q
Place stiffener profile by table • 760
query select sets • 1463

Molded Forms User's Guide 1478


Index

R reference data • 1463


Relationship Tab • 123, 815
Rebound objects • 1391
Relationships Tab (Advanced Plate System
Reconnect copied objects to a new
Properties Dialog Box) • 426
boundary • 1390
Relationships Tab (Logical Connections
Reconnect temporary definition and
Properties Dialog Box) • 947
sketching planes to model reference
Remove a split • 929
planes • 1390
Remove a transverse member from a can •
Recover from a failed hull swap • 1405
871
Rectangular Opening with Four Supports •
Remove delay and update To-Do List
680
records for internal structure • 1403
Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a
Remove delay and update To-Do List
1350 mm Length, and a 700 mm Width •
records for the hull • 1402
698
Remove detailed parts from plate and profile
Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a
systems • 993
400 mm Length, and a 300 mm Width •
Remove logical connections • 945
687
Repair seams that did not split • 1401
Rectangular Opening with Four Supports, a
Repair Tribon data • 1369
600 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width •
Repair Tribon XML (Tools Menu) • 1369
694
Repair Tribon XML Dialog Box • 1369
Rectangular Opening with No Supports •
Repairing Tribon Data • 1369
638
resource estimation • 1463
Rectangular Opening with No Supports, a
Results Dialog Box • 1372
1350 mm Length, and a 700 mm Width •
Review a manufacturing object • 1377
650
Review Dialog Box • 1378
Rectangular Opening with No Supports, a
Review or update a set of objects selected
400 mm Length, and a 300 mm Width •
by a filter • 1377
643
Revolved Plate System • 205
Rectangular Opening with No Supports, a
Revolved Plate System Properties Dialog
600 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width •
Box • 210
647
Ring Plate 1 • 301
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports •
Ring Plate 2 • 308
653
Ring Plate 3 • 315
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports,
Ring Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette
a 1350 mm Length, and a 700 mm Width
Dialog Box) • 301
• 675
Rolled I to Built Up I • 1006
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports,
Rolled Member Buckling Plate • 358
a 400 mm Length, and a 300 mm Width •
route • 1463
662
Routing Tab • 129, 849
Rectangular Opening with Three Supports,
Ruled Plate System • 449
a 600 mm Length, and a 500 mm Width •
Ruled Plate System Properties Dialog Box •
670
456
Reference Curve by 2D Sketch • 980
Run a custom batch process • 1381
Reference Curve By 2D Sketch Properties
Run a detailing batch process • 1380
Dialog Box • 983
Run a production batch process • 1381
Reference Curve by Intersection • 973
Reference Curve By Intersection Properties
Dialog Box • 975 S
Reference Curve by Offset • 976 S3DGeniEExportMapping.xls • 1250
Reference Curve By Offset Properties satellite server • 1463
Dialog Box • 979 Schedule [Task] Dialog Box • 1287
Reference Curve from External File • 984 Schedule a Copy by Family operation as a
Reference Curve from External File batch job • 1274
Properties Dialog Box • 985 schema • 1463

Molded Forms User's Guide 1479


Index

schema update utility • 1464 site setup • 1464


Seam <name of seam> has no geometry. • Sketch 2D Best Practices • 65
1419 Sketch a bracket • 243
Seam by Intersection • 902 sketch and trace • 1464
Seam by Offset • 905 Solid by Sweeping • 1176
Seam by Projection • 908 Solids (Geometric Construction Palette
Seam by Table • 912 Dialog Box) • 1176
Seam Import Workbook • 1226 Solutions to common problems in Copy by
Seam overlaps knuckle <name of knuckle> • Family • 1310
1419 Solve ambiguous solution created by
Seam overlaps seam <name of seam>. • selected boundaries • 82
1420 specials • 1464
Seam Properties Dialog Box • 904 specifications • 1464
Seams Best Practices • 60 Split a cross brace • 926
Section Orientation Tab (Edge Split a member at a point along member •
Reinforcement Profile Part Properties 928
Dialog Box) • 781 Split a member that intersects another
Section Orientation Tab (Edge member • 925
Reinforcement Properties Dialog Box) • Split a plate system • 893
777 Split a profile or member system • 893
Section Orientation Tab (Profile Properties Split a root system into multiple root
Dialog Box) • 732 systems • 901
Select Copy Family Dialog Box • 1283 Split a seam by intersecting seams • 897
Select delay and range settings and swap Split Best Practices • 74
the hulls • 1398 Split Built Up by Built Up - 90° Center • 1009
Select Filter Dialog Box • 1282 Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Opposite
Select intersecting object • 764 Connect Points • 1011
Select Macro Dialog Box • 408 Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Overlapping
Select the source filter for copy across Connect Points • 1014
models • 1273 Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Penetration •
Selecting Objects • 40 1016
Selection of Possible Report Data Dialog Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Rotation of
Box • 1379 Member • 1018
Selection Tab (Assembly Connection Split Built Up by Built Up - 90º Split Both •
Properties Dialog Box) • 966 1019
Selection Tab (Bracket System Properties Split Built Up by Built Up - Non
Dialog Box) • 267 Perpendicular Center • 1010
Session File Best Practices • 64 Split Built Up by Built Up - Non
Set coordinate by key-ins • 765 Perpendicular Opposite Connect Points •
Set coordinate by plane • 764 1012
Set member split priority • 928 Split Built Up by Built Up - Non
sheetbody • 1464 Perpendicular Partial Penetration • 1015
Shell Plate Unfold Preview • 1449 Split Built Up by Built Up - Non
shell structure • 1464 Perpendicular Penetration • 1017
ship • 1464 Split Built Up by Grid - Perpendicular • 1013
Side Plate • 284 Split columns at a plane • 927
Side Plate 2 • 290 Split Connection Properties Dialog Box •
Side Plate Axial • 296 929
Side Plates Tab (Advanced Plate Palette Split List Dialog Box • 894
Dialog Box) • 284 Split List Dialog Box (Split Seam) • 898
Similar Family Properties Dialog Box • 1276 Split Root System • 899
site • 1464 Split Root System Properties Dialog Box •
site administrator • 1464 901

Molded Forms User's Guide 1480


Index

Split Seam • 897 tolerant geometry • 1465


Spoon Section Type A • 1210 Too many child connections. • 1423
Standard Chutes (Geometric Construction Topological Points (Insert Menu) • 1323
Palette Dialog Box) • 1180 Transfer Ownership Dialog Box • 816
Start error logging • 1398 Transition Plate • 329
steel outfitting • 1464 Transition Plates Tab (Advanced Plate
stern frame • 1464 Palette Dialog Box) • 328
Stiffener Import Workbook • 1218 Transition Section Type A • 1197
Stiffener Part Properties Dialog Box • 736 Transition Section Type B • 1200
Stiffener Profile System by Intersection • Transition Section Type C • 1204
723 transverse • 1465
Stiffener Profile System by Offset • 739 transverse frames • 1465
Stiffener Profile System by Projection • 746 trim • 1465
Stiffener Profile System by Table • 755 trimmed surface • 1466
Stop error logging • 1405 Tripping Bracket • 1425
stud • 1464 Tripping Bracket Connect Points Data Tab
Submit Batch Job • 1380 (Bracket Plate System Properties Dialog
Support and Offset Tab (Opening Palette Box) • 1447
Dialog Box) • 505 Tripping Stiffener Connection Data Tab
Surface by Blending • 1158 (Tripping Stiffener Properties Dialog Box)
Surface by Corrugation • 1133 • 771
Surface by Curves • 1130 Tripping Stiffener Properties Dialog Box •
Surface by Fillet • 1161 770
Surface by Surfaces • 1142 Tripping Stiffener System • 765
Surface by Swage • 1145 trunk • 1466
Surface by Sweeping • 1153 Tube End to Tube End - Co-Linear Axis •
Surface with Knuckles • 1165 998
surfaces • 1465 Tube to Tube - Axis Along • 1000
Surfaces (Geometric Construction Palette Tubular Member Buckling Plate • 363
Dialog Box) • 1115 tumble home • 1466
suspended floor • 1465 Turn off delay operations • 1366
swage • 1465 Turn on delay operations • 1366
Swap hulls • 137
Swap Hulls on a Detailed Model Using U
Molded Forms Delay • 1396
swash bulkhead • 1465 Unable to check for seams in To Do List. •
symmetric node • 1465 1423
Symmetry Family Properties Dialog Box • unit/module modeler • 1466
1279 Unknown error • 1424
Synchronize Options Dialog Box • 1275 Un-Split • 895
system • 1465 Un-split a plate at a selected seam • 896
Update a manufacturing object • 1377
Update delayed objects • 1366
T Update objects in a similar family • 1266
tag number • 1465 Update objects in a symmetry family • 1269
target point • 1465 Update remaining To-Do List records • 1403
Tee Insert Plate • 394 Update To Do Records Tab (Delay
The wrong item is used in the bounding Operations Dialog Box) • 1367
logical connection. • 1421 Use filters to view copied objects requiring
There is a gap in the boundary <name of reconnection • 1388
boundary>. Detailing might fail. • 1422 Use the Boundary List dialog box • 81
The seam has multiple segments • 1421 user attributes • 1466
To Do Delay Record Detail Tab (Delay
Operations Dialog Box) • 1368

Molded Forms User's Guide 1481


Index

V
version control • 1466
vertex • 1466
Vertical Brace or Gap • 1006
vertical keel • 1466
Vertices from Curve or Surface • 1057
viewset • 1466

W
Warning!!--Possible wrong thickness
direction among leaf parts. • 1424
water line • 1466
watertight door • 1466
weather deck • 1466
weathertight door • 1466
Weight & CG Tab • 129, 849
weight and CG analysis • 1467
welding • 1467
What's New in Molded Forms • 18
windlass • 1467
wirebody • 1467
wizard • 1467
work content • 1467
work order • 1467
working plane • 1467
workset • 1467
workspace • 1467
workspace document • 1467
Workspace Explorer • 1467

Molded Forms User's Guide 1482

You might also like